These learning materials offer a comprehensive guide to mastering Microsoft Excel, starting with fundamental interface elements like the ribbon and cells. They progress to essential functions such as SUM and IF, alongside data manipulation techniques including sorting, filtering, and removing duplicates. The resources also cover data visualization through various charts and pivot tables, as well as more advanced tools like Power Query and the use of the AI-powered Copilot. Furthermore, they explore the role of Excel in data analysis, covering statistical functions and the creation of interactive dashboards. Finally, the materials touch upon career paths in data analysis, emphasizing required skills and the importance of projects and portfolios. The practical demonstrations and step-by-step instructions aim to equip users with both basic and intermediate Excel proficiencies.

Excel Proficiency Study Guide

Quiz

1. Explain the primary difference between the COUNT and COUNTA functions in Excel. Provide a brief example illustrating this difference.

• The COUNT function only counts cells containing numerical values within a specified range, while COUNTA counts all non-empty cells, including those with numbers, text, dates, and logical values. For example, if range A1:A3 contains “1”, “apple”, and a blank cell, COUNT would return 1, and COUNTA would return 2.

1. Describe how the COUNTIF function is used in Excel. Give a simple scenario where using COUNTIF would be beneficial.

• The COUNTIF function counts the number of cells within a specified range that meet a given criteria. A beneficial scenario would be counting how many students in a class scored above a certain grade on an exam by specifying the score threshold as the criteria within the range of student scores.

1. What are the steps involved in formatting dates in Excel? Mention at least two different date formats one might apply.

• To format dates, select the cells containing the dates, right-click, and choose “Format Cells.” In the “Number” tab, select “Date” from the category list. Then, choose the desired format from the available options or create a custom format. Two different date formats are “MM/DD/YYYY” and “DD-MMM-YY”.

1. Explain the purpose of the DATEDIF function in Excel. What are the common units used to calculate the difference between two dates with this function?

• The DATEDIF function calculates the difference between two dates based on a specified unit. Common units used include “Y” for years, “M” for months, and “D” for days. It’s often used to calculate age or the duration between events.

1. Describe the ROUND function in Excel and its basic syntax. Provide an example of how it can be used to simplify decimal values.

• The ROUND function rounds a number to a specified number of digits. The basic syntax is =ROUND(number, num_digits). For example, =ROUND(80.66, 1) would round the number 80.66 to one decimal place, resulting in 80.7.

1. Briefly explain the concept of standard deviation and variance in the context of Excel and data analysis. How are these measures helpful?

• Standard deviation measures the dispersion or spread of data points around the mean, while variance is the average of the squared differences from the mean. These measures are helpful in understanding the variability within a dataset; a higher standard deviation or variance indicates greater spread.

1. How does the MATCH function work in Excel? What are the key arguments required for this function?

• The MATCH function searches for a specified item in a range of cells and then returns the relative position of that item in the range. The key arguments are lookup_value (the item to search for), lookup_array (the range to search within), and match_type (specifying exact or approximate match).

1. Outline the purpose and basic steps for using the SUMIFS function in Excel. How does it differ from the SUMIF function?

• The SUMIFS function calculates the sum of cells in a range that meet multiple criteria. The basic steps involve selecting the sum range, then specifying pairs of criteria ranges and their corresponding criteria. Unlike SUMIF, which allows only one condition, SUMIFS can handle multiple conditions.

1. What is a macro in Excel, and how can it be used to count colored cells based on manual formatting?

• A macro in Excel is a recorded or programmed sequence of actions that can automate tasks. A macro to count manually colored cells would involve VBA code that iterates through a specified range, checks the interior color of each cell against a given color code, and increments a counter for each match.

1. Explain the core idea behind time series data and mention its primary components as discussed in the source material.

• Time series data is a sequence of data points recorded over specific intervals of time, making it time-dependent. Its primary components are trend (the overall direction of the data), seasonality (periodic fluctuations), cyclicity (longer-term fluctuations), and irregularity (random variations).

Essay Format Questions

1. Discuss the importance of data validation in Excel. Describe different data validation techniques and explain how they contribute to data accuracy and integrity.
2. Compare and contrast the use of formulas and functions in Excel. Provide examples of when you might use each and explain the order of operations Excel follows when evaluating formulas.
3. Explain the functionality and benefits of using the VLOOKUP function in Excel. Describe a scenario where VLOOKUP would be particularly useful and discuss its limitations compared to other lookup functions.
4. Discuss the capabilities of Excel for data analysis and visualization. Describe how features like pivot tables, charts, and the Data Analysis Toolpak can be used to gain insights from data, referencing specific examples from the source material where applicable.
5. Explain the concept of time series forecasting and the ARIMA model as introduced in the source material. Discuss the key components of time series data and the parameters of the ARIMA model (p, d, q), and the role of ACF and PACF in model selection.

Glossary of Key Terms

• COUNT Function: An Excel function used to count the number of cells within a specified range that contain numerical values.
• COUNTA Function: An Excel function used to count the number of non-empty cells within a specified range, regardless of the data type.
• COUNTIF Function: An Excel function used to count the number of cells within a specified range that meet a specific criterion.
• Date Formatting: The process of changing the way dates are displayed in Excel, including the order of day, month, year, and the use of separators.
• DATEDIF Function: An Excel function that calculates the difference between two dates in specified units like years, months, or days.
• ROUND Function: An Excel function that rounds a number to a specified number of digits.
• Standard Deviation: A measure of the amount of variation or dispersion of a set of values. A low standard deviation indicates that the values tend to be close to the mean (also called the expected value) of the set, while a high standard deviation indicates that the values are spread out over a wider range.
• Variance: A measure of how far a set of numbers is spread out from their average value. It is calculated as the average of the squared differences from the mean.
• MATCH Function: An Excel function that searches for a specified item in a range of cells and returns the relative position of that item in the range.
• SUMIFS Function: An Excel function that calculates the sum of cells in a range that meet multiple specified criteria.
• Macro: A recorded or programmed sequence of actions in Excel that can automate repetitive tasks.
• Time Series Data: A sequence of data points indexed (or listed or graphed) in time order. Most commonly, a time series is a sequence taken at successive equally spaced points in time.
• Trend (Time Series): The long-term movement in a time series, indicating the general direction (upward or downward) of the data over a sustained period.
• Seasonality (Time Series): Regular and predictable fluctuations in a time series that occur within a year, often repeating annually.
• Cyclicity (Time Series): Longer-term fluctuations in a time series that occur over periods longer than a year, often related to economic or business cycles.
• Irregularity/Random Component (Time Series): Unpredictable and short-term fluctuations in a time series that do not follow a regular pattern.
• ARIMA Model: An acronym for AutoRegressive Integrated Moving Average, a class of statistical models for analyzing and forecasting time series data.
• Autoregressive (AR) Term: In an ARIMA model, the component that uses the dependency between an observation and a number of lagged observations.
• Integrated (I) Term: In an ARIMA model, the component that represents the number of times the raw observations are differenced to make the time series stationary.
• Moving Average (MA) Term: In an ARIMA model, the component that uses the dependency between an observation and a residual error from a moving average model applied to lagged observations.
• Stationary Data: A time series whose statistical properties such as mean, variance, autocorrelation, etc. are all constant over time.
• Autocorrelation Function (ACF): A function that shows the correlation of a time series with its own past values.
• Partial Autocorrelation Function (PACF): A function that shows the correlation of a time series with its own lagged values, controlling for the correlations at intermediate lags.

Briefing Document: Review of Excel Features and Functions

This document provides a detailed review of the main themes and important ideas or facts presented in the provided excerpts from an Excel course. The sources cover a range of fundamental and advanced Excel functionalities, including data manipulation, analysis, visualization, and automation.

1. Basic Functions for Data Aggregation and Analysis:

• COUNT Function: This function is used to count the number of cells within a specified range that contain numbers. It is highlighted as crucial for quickly assessing numerical density in mixed data sets.
• Example: =COUNT(J2:J5) applied to cells containing 7, 89, 0, 100 would return 4.
• Quote: “the count function in Excel is used to specifically count the number of cells that contain numbers in a Range”
• COUNTA Function: Unlike the COUNT function, COUNTA counts the number of non-empty cells in a range. This includes numbers, text, dates, and logical values. It is useful for determining the size of data sets regardless of the data type.
• Difference from COUNT: COUNT only counts numerical values and dates (excluding blanks), while COUNTA counts any non-empty cell, including text.
• Example: =COUNTA(K2:K5) applied to cells containing 56, a blank cell, 98, and 56 would return 3. It would also return 3 if the cells contained “Apple”, a blank cell, “Banana”, and “Orange”.
• Quote: “this count a function in Excel counts the number of cells in a Range that are not empty. […] the count function generally used to count a range of cells containing numbers or dates excluding blank whereas this count a function will count everything including numbers dates text or a range containing a mixture of these items but does not count blank cells”
• COUNTIF Function: This function allows counting cells within a range that meet a specified criteria. This is valuable for conditional counting.
• (Further details on COUNTIF criteria are expected in subsequent parts of the full course.)
• Quote: “this counter function is used to count the number of cells in a Range that meet a specified criteria.”
• (Other basic functions mentioned but not detailed in this excerpt include CONCATENATE, TRIM, MAX, MIN, AVERAGE, IF, and SUM.)

2. Data Formatting:

• Date Formatting: Excel offers flexibility in how dates are displayed. Users can change the format by selecting cells, right-clicking, choosing “Format Cells,” and navigating to the “Date” category or using “Custom” formatting.
• Location-based formatting: Dates can be displayed according to different regional conventions (e.g., US format: YYYY-MM-DD, India format: DD-MM-YYYY).
• Custom formatting: Users can specify which parts of the date to display (e.g., only month and year: “MMMM YYYY”).
• Inclusion of time: Date formats can also include time, down to seconds or milliseconds.
• Examples: Switching from DD-MM-YYYY to MM-DD-YYYY by selecting “English (United States)”. Displaying only month and year by using a custom format like “MMMM YY”. Displaying date and time including seconds using a format like “DD-MM-YYYY HH:MM:SS”.
• Quote: “you might want to also change your dates based on the location so right now we are in India and imagine if you wanted to you know change something based on us or if you if you’re having your client in us and he wants the dates in US format it you can also change that […] you might want to also change your dates based on the location”

3. Calculating Age from Date of Birth:

• DATEDIF Function (or DATE DIFF): This function is used to calculate the difference between two dates in various units (years, months, days).
• Syntax: =DATEDIF(start_date, end_date, unit)
• Units: “Y” for years, “M” for months, “D” for days.
• Example: =DATEDIF(“2010/01/05”, “2022/01/01”, “Y”) would return the difference in years.
• Quote: “all you have to use is the dated IF function or if you also call it as date diff function based on your choice”

4. Rounding Numbers:

• ROUND Function: This function rounds a number to a specified number of digits.
• Syntax: =ROUND(number, num_digits)
• num_digits: Specifies the number of digits to which the number should be rounded. Positive for decimal places, zero for the nearest integer, negative for rounding to the left of the decimal point.
• Example (implicitly using ROUNDUP): =ROUNDUP(M3, 1) applied to 80.66 would round up to 80.7.
• Quote: “to actually perform the roundoff uh formula we do have a pre method for that for that you just have to type in equals to round and there you go we have round up and round down so both of them perform the same operation” (Note: The example uses ROUNDUP, but the general concept of rounding is introduced)

5. Understanding and Calculating Standard Deviation and Variance:

• Standard Deviation: Defined as the calculated square root of variance. It measures the dispersion or spread of data points around the mean. A higher standard deviation indicates greater variability.
• Prerequisites for manual calculation: Mean, variance, deviation (difference between observed value and expected/mean value), and squared deviation.

1. Steps for manual calculation:Calculate the mean of the data set.
2. Calculate the deviation of each data point from the mean.
3. Square each deviation.
4. Calculate the variance (sum of squared deviations divided by the total number of values minus 1 for sample standard deviation).
5. Calculate the standard deviation (square root of the variance).

• Excel Function: Excel has built-in functions to directly calculate standard deviation (e.g., STDEV.S for sample, STDEV.P for population).
• Quote: “standard deviation is a calculated square of variance”
• Variance: A measure of variability, calculated as the average of the squared deviations from the mean. It indicates how far data points are spread out from the average, in squared units.
• Quote: “variance is a measure of variability it is calculated by taking the average of squared deviation from the mean”
• Deviation: The difference between an observed value and the expected value (often the mean). It represents the distance from the center point.
• Quote: “the deviation is a measure that is used to find the difference between the observed value and the expected value of a variable in simple terms deviation is the distance from the center point”

6. Using the MATCH Function:

• Purpose: The MATCH function is used to find the position (index) of a specified item within a range of cells.
• Syntax: =MATCH(lookup_value, lookup_array, [match_type])
• lookup_value: The value you want to find.
• lookup_array: The range where you want to search.
• match_type: (Optional) 0 for exact match, 1 for less than, -1 for greater than.
• Example: =MATCH(“Marketing”, A2:A11, 0) would return 4 if “Marketing” is the fourth item in the range A2:A11.
• Use Case: Helpful for quickly identifying the position of a specific element in a list.
• Quote: “our main idea is to find out the index of these particular elements for example if you wanted to find the index of the element marketing then how could you do it so here let’s try to use the match function in Excel”

7. Creating Custom Functions with Macros (VBA):

• Purpose: Macros allow users to automate tasks and create custom functions in Excel using VBA (Visual Basic for Applications).
• Example: COUNT COLORED CELLS: The excerpt describes a macro function called count colored cells designed to count the number of manually colored cells within a specified range that match the interior color of a selected “current cell.”
• Logic: The macro iterates through each cell in the given range. It compares the interior color of each cell to the interior color of the “current cell.” If the colors match, a counter variable is incremented.
• Usage: =countcoloredcells(current_cell, cell_range)
• Limitation: This specific macro works only for manually colored cells and will not recognize colors applied through conditional formatting.
• Quote: “this particular macro will work only for manually colored cells so there are situations where we have used conditional formatting to color a single cell […] if we try to use that particular green color to be counted by the color count sales function no it will not happen”

8. Identifying and Removing Duplicate Rows:

• Excel Functionality (implied): While not explicitly detailing the steps, the excerpt mentions the possibility of duplicate rows in a student database and implies that Excel has methods to identify and remove them.
• (Standard Excel features for this include “Remove Duplicates” under the “Data” tab, which allows users to select specific columns to consider when identifying duplicates.)
• Quote: “there might be possibilities about the duplication of class because all the students all the 10 students are in same class so there might be a duplication but we are not looking for such kind of duplications right we are looking for the duplication of the entire row”

9. Using the SUMIFS Function for Conditional Summation:

• Purpose: SUMIFS allows summing values in a range based on multiple criteria.
• Syntax: =SUMIFS(sum_range, criteria_range1, criteria1, [criteria_range2, criteria2], …)
• sum_range: The range of cells to sum.
• criteria_range(n): The range of cells to evaluate the criteria against.
• criteria(n): The condition that must be met.
• Prerequisite: Converting the data range into an Excel Table using Ctrl+T is recommended for easier referencing of columns.
• Example: =SUMIFS(Table1[Sales], Table1[Region], “West”) would sum the values in the “Sales” column of “Table1” where the corresponding value in the “Region” column is “West”.
• Multiple Criteria: SUMIFS can accommodate multiple conditions. For example, to find the sales of “Furniture” in the “West” region: =SUMIFS(Table1[Sales], Table1[Region], “West”, Table1[Category], “Furniture”).
• Quote: “it will basically add a condition calculate the sum of sales where the region is equals to West simple to like or similar to seal query right so that is exactly what we’re going to do in Excel today that is using summs”

10. Introduction to Microsoft Copilot in Excel:

• Functionality: Microsoft Copilot is an AI-powered tool integrated into Excel designed to assist with data analysis and report creation.
• Capabilities (based on the excerpt):Generating regional or country-wise sales reports based on text commands.
• Identifying the day of the week an order was placed.
• Potentially identifying customers with the highest sales (although an error occurred in the example).
• Usage: Users can input natural language commands to Copilot to request specific analyses or reports.
• Limitations (as observed): May experience issues with data type recognition (e.g., needing to explicitly format a column as “Text”). Can be slower compared to other AI modules. May encounter errors in certain data processing tasks (e.g., extracting text content from uploaded files).
• Quote: “please help me create a regional wise sales report with this data set and can also give a few more commands right so it’s loaded right now you can see the icon here now you can write down give me country wise sales report and just fire the command”

11. Power Query for Data Transformation:

• Purpose: Power Query (Get & Transform Data) is a powerful tool in Excel for importing, cleaning, and transforming data from various sources.
• Data Sources: Can import data from Excel files, XML, JSON, PDF, cloud services, SQL databases, and more.

1. Workflow:Connect to Data Source: Select the data source (e.g., “From Folder”).
2. Transform Data: Open the Power Query Editor to perform transformations such as:

• Removing columns.
• Changing data types.
• Splitting columns by delimiters.
• Renaming columns.
• Performing calculations (e.g., calculating profit by subtracting cost from revenue).

1. Load Data: Load the transformed data into an Excel worksheet or the Data Model.

• Example Transformations: Changing the data type of “Order Date” and “Delivery Date” to Date format. Splitting a “Customer ID and Name” column into two separate columns using a space as a delimiter.
• Quote: “Power Query window will shortly open now with the power query window opened you can select the orders 2022 Excel folder and it will be loaded now let’s try to cck click on the content button over here which should load our data”

12. Understanding Time Series Data and Forecasting:

• Definition: Time series data is a sequence of data points recorded at specific and fixed time intervals. It is time-dependent, and analysis often involves forecasting future values based on past trends.
• Graphical Representation: Time series data is typically visualized as a line graph with time on the x-axis and the measured variable on the y-axis.
• Quote: “time series data is basically a sequence of data that is recorded over a specific intervals of time”
• Components of Time Series Data:
• Trend: The overall long-term direction of the data (increasing, decreasing, or stable).
• Seasonality: Periodic fluctuations in the data that occur at regular intervals (e.g., annually, monthly, weekly).
• Cyclicity: Longer-term fluctuations that are not strictly periodic (e.g., business cycles, recessions). The duration between cycles is typically longer and less fixed than seasonality.
• Irregularity (Random Component): Random, unpredictable variations in the data that cannot be attributed to trend, seasonality, or cyclicity.
• Quote: “Time series data consists of primarily four components one is the trend then we have the seasonality then cyclicity and then last but not least regularity or the random component”
• Stationary vs. Non-Stationary Data:
• Stationary Data: Data whose statistical properties (mean, variance) remain constant over time. Many time series models assume stationarity.
• Non-Stationary Data: Data exhibiting trends or seasonality, where statistical properties change over time. Transformations (e.g., differencing) are often needed to make non-stationary data stationary before modeling.
• Quote: “if you have taken the raw data this is how it would look and uh what do you think it is is it stationary no right because there is a trend upward Trend so this is not a stationary data”
• Moving Average Method: A simple forecasting technique that smooths out fluctuations in the data by calculating the average of a fixed number of preceding data points.
• Centered Moving Average: A moving average where the average is associated with the midpoint of the time period, further smoothing the data.
• Quote: “we will just go ahead and uh manually do the forecasting using what is known as moving average method”
• Multiplicative Model: A time series model where the components (seasonality, trend, irregularity) are multiplied together to represent the data.
• Formula (simplified for prediction): Predicted Value = Seasonality × Trend × Irregularity
• ARIMA Model for Time Series Forecasting (Introduction):
• Acronym: Autoregressive Integrated Moving Average.
• Parameters: Specified by three parameters (p, d, q):
• p (Autoregressive): Number of lagged values of the dependent variable used in the model. The current value is regressed on its own past values.
• d (Integrated): Number of times the data needs to be differenced to become stationary.
• q (Moving Average): Number of lagged forecast errors used in the model.
• Assumption: ARIMA models typically assume that the time series data is stationary.
• Quote: “we will be using the arima model to do the forecast of uh this time series data so let us try to understand what is arima model so arima is actually an acronym it stands for autor regressive integrated moving average”
• Autocorrelation Function (ACF) and Partial Autocorrelation Function (PACF): Tools used to analyze the correlation between a time series and its lagged values, helping to determine the parameters (p and q) of an ARIMA model.
• Autocorrelation: The correlation between values of the same variable at different time points.
• Partial Autocorrelation: The correlation between a time series and its lagged values, after removing the effects of the intermediate lags.
• Quote: “in order to test whether the data is stationary or not there are two important components that are considered one is the autocorrelation function and other is the partial autocorrelation function so this is referred to as ACF and pacf”
• Forecasting in R using ARIMA (Brief Introduction): The excerpt briefly mentions using the forecast package in R to implement ARIMA models for forecasting. It highlights the auto.arima function, which automatically selects the optimal parameters (p, d, q) for the ARIMA model based on information criteria like AIC (Akaike Information Criterion). Model diagnostics and validation using tests like the Ljung-Box test are also mentioned.

13. Creating Dashboards in Excel:

• Definition: A visual interface that provides an overview of key performance indicators (KPIs) and relevant data using charts and graphs to facilitate quick understanding and decision-making.
• Types: Strategic, analytical, and operational dashboards.
• Advantages: Quick detection of outliers and correlations, comprehensive data visualization, and time-saving compared to running multiple reports.
• Demo using Sample Sales Data (overview): The excerpt introduces the intention to create dashboards using a sample sales dataset, implying the use of charts and potentially PivotTables to visualize sales performance by various dimensions (e.g., region).
• Quote: “a dashboard is a visual interface that provides an overview of key measures relevant to a particular objective with the help of charts and graphs”

14. Descriptive Statistics using Excel’s Data Analysis Toolpak:

• Accessing the Toolpak: Requires enabling the “Analysis Toolpak” add-in (File > Options > Add-ins > Excel Add-ins > Go…).
• Descriptive Statistics Feature: Under the “Data” tab, the “Data Analysis” option appears after enabling the toolpak, providing access to various statistical analysis tools, including “Descriptive Statistics.”
• Output: The “Descriptive Statistics” tool generates a table summarizing key statistical measures for selected data ranges, including:
• Mean: Average of all data values.
• Standard Error: Measure of the variability of sample means.
• Median: Middle value in a sorted data set.
• Mode: Most frequently occurring value.
• Standard Deviation: Measure of the spread of data.
• Sample Variance: Square of the standard deviation.
• Kurtosis: Measure of the “tailedness” of the distribution.
• Skewness: Measure of the asymmetry of the distribution.
• Range: Difference between the maximum and minimum values.
• Minimum: Smallest value.
• Maximum: Largest value.
• Sum: Total of all values.
• Count: Number of data points.
• Usage: Select the input range, specify the output options (e.g., new worksheet), and check the “Summary statistics” box to generate the descriptive statistics table.
• Quote: “moving on the first value we got is the mean basically it is the average of all the data values […] moving on we have the second one which is standard error it is nothing but the measure of the variability of sample means”

15. Using Chat GPT for Excel Tasks:

• Capabilities Demonstrated:Identifying and Removing Duplicates: Can analyze an Excel spreadsheet and identify duplicate rows based on specified columns. Can provide options for handling duplicates (e.g., keeping the first or last occurrence).
• Data Cleaning: Can find and remove extra spaces in cells. Can treat blank cells by filling them with placeholder values.
• Data Analysis and Visualization: Can create PivotTables and corresponding charts (e.g., bar charts) to analyze data, such as sales performance by region. Can guide users through the process.
• Advanced Analysis and Automation (Forecasting): Can assist in building forecasting models based on historical data, including steps like data preparation, model selection (e.g., ARIMA/SARIMA implied), and model evaluation. Can provide insights into time series characteristics (trend, seasonality) and perform statistical tests (e.g., ADF test for stationarity).
• Interaction: Users interact with Chat GPT through text prompts, providing the Excel file and specifying the desired tasks.
• Limitations Observed: May encounter errors during analysis or visualization (e.g., character encoding issues, plotting forecast confidence intervals).
• Overall Value: Chat GPT can be a valuable tool for Excel users, assisting with various data-related tasks, enhancing productivity, and helping uncover insights.
• Quote: “can you help me identify and remove duplicates duplicates from this Excel spreadsheet from the provided Excel spreadsheet […] please create a pivot table and a corresponding chart to analyze sales performance by region […] can you assist me in building a forecasting model to predict future sales based on historical data”

16. Introduction to Pivot Tables and Charts:

• Pivot Tables: Powerful tools for summarizing and analyzing large amounts of data. Allow users to rearrange and aggregate data based on different fields, enabling multi-dimensional analysis.
• Pivot Charts: Visual representations of PivotTable data, providing interactive ways to explore trends and patterns.
• Creating Basic Charts (Line Chart Example): The excerpt demonstrates creating a line chart to visualize month-on-month sales data. The steps involve selecting the date and sales data, going to the “Insert” tab, and choosing a line chart.
• Creating Pivot Tables (Steps): Highlight the data range (including headers), go to the “Insert” tab, select “PivotTable,” confirm the data range and location for the PivotTable. Drag fields to the “Rows,” “Columns,” “Values,” and “Filters” areas to structure the analysis.
• Grouping Dates in Pivot Tables: Excel can automatically group dates in a PivotTable by year, quarter, month, etc., facilitating time-based analysis.
• Creating Pivot Charts from Pivot Tables: Select any cell within the PivotTable, go to the “PivotTable Analyze” tab (or “PivotTable Options” in older versions), and select “PivotChart” to choose a chart type.
• Customizing Charts: Chart elements (legends, titles, axes labels) can be edited and customized for better presentation. Chart types can be changed after creation.
• Quote: “please create a pivot table and a corresponding chart to analyze sales performance by region […] so what’s the first step highlight the range of cells that contain your data set and including headers and go back to Excel and you can just click on any cell and control a all your T set has been selected or these days you can just select one of the cells and go to insert menu and pivot table”

17. Integration of Python in Excel:

• Python Mode in Excel: Allows users to execute Python code directly within Excel worksheets.
• Accessing Python: By typing =PY in a cell and pressing Tab, users can enter Python mode.
• DataFrames: Python in Excel utilizes the Pandas library, with data from Excel ranges being represented as Pandas DataFrames.
• Referencing Excel Ranges in Python: Excel ranges can be referenced within Python code (e.g., referencing a cell containing a data range).
• Python Output in Excel: The results of Python computations can be displayed directly in Excel cells, either as Python objects (DataFrames) or converted to Excel values.
• Basic Python Data Analysis in Excel (Examples):.describe(): Provides descriptive statistics for a DataFrame or a specific column.
• .sum(): Calculates the sum of values in a column.
• .mean(): Calculates the average of values in a column.
• .groupby(): Groups data based on specified columns, enabling aggregated calculations (e.g., sum of sales per date or per month).
• .plot(): Creates basic charts (e.g., line charts) within Excel.
• Benefits: Leverages the power of Python’s data analysis libraries (Pandas) within the familiar Excel environment. Enables more complex data manipulation and analysis than standard Excel functions alone.
• Quote: “you can see over this section that it is written the data range I mean the sales range and headers is equal to true as we have headers over here now press enter now you can see that it didn’t happen anything only it went to the next line for me to run this we need to press control plus enter Control Plus enter and see what we got we got a data frame over here”

18. Formulas vs. Functions in Excel:

• Formula: An expression that you write in a cell that performs calculations or other actions on the data in your worksheet. It always starts with an equals sign (=) and can contain cell references, constants, operators, and functions.
• Function: A predefined formula that performs specific calculations in a particular order using specified values (arguments). Excel has a vast library of built-in functions (e.g., SUM, AVERAGE, COUNT, VLOOKUP).
• Key Difference: Formulas are user-defined calculations, while functions are built-in, ready-to-use calculation tools. Formulas often use functions as part of their logic.
• Quote: “a formula is an expression that calculates the value of a cell. Formulas can perform simple calculations such as addition and subtraction as well as more complex operations using functions. A function is a predefined formula that performs calculations using specific values in a particular order or structure”

19. Order of Operations in Excel (PEMDAS/PEDMAS):

• Acronyms: PEMDAS (Parentheses, Exponents, Multiplication and Division, Addition and Subtraction) or PEDMAS (Parentheses, Exponents, Division and Multiplication, Addition and Subtraction). The order for multiplication and division (and addition and subtraction) is from left to right.
• Excel’s Evaluation Order: Excel evaluates formulas based on this order:

1. Parentheses ()
2. Exponents ^
3. Multiplication * and Division / (from left to right)
4. Addition + and Subtraction – (from left to right)

• Importance: Understanding the order of operations is crucial for writing correct formulas that produce the intended results. Using parentheses can override the default order.
• Example: =A1*10+5/2 will be evaluated as (A1*10) + (5/2). To force addition first, use =(A1+5)*10/2.
• Quote: “the Order of Operations is first it will calculate what is there in the parenthesis it will perform this function and then it will see if there are any exponents in it and if it is there it will do that calculation the next and after that it will see if there is any multiplication or division […] and then it will see there is any addition […] and then the last one will be the substraction”

20. Key Text Manipulation Functions:

• CONCATENATE (or & operator): Combines text from multiple cells into one cell.
• Syntax: =CONCATENATE(text1, [text2], …) or text1&text2&…
• Example: =CONCATENATE(A1, ” “, B1) or =A1&” “&B1 would combine the text in cell A1, a space, and the text in cell B1.
• Quote: “the concatenate function is used to join two or more text strings together into one string. The syntax is very simple equals concatenate open parenthesis and then you specify the text strings that you want to join separated by commas close the parenthesis and you will get it all merged in one particular cell”
• Text to Columns: A feature used to split a single column of text into multiple columns based on a delimiter (e.g., space, comma, tab) or a fixed width.
• Steps: Select the column to split, go to the “Data” tab, choose “Text to Columns,” select the delimiter type, specify the delimiter, preview the result, and choose the destination for the split data.
• Use Case: Useful for separating first and last names from a full name column, or splitting addresses into separate components.
• Quote: “you need to select that particular cell and then go to the data Tab and then choose text to columns there will be an option where in you need to select text to columns”

21. VLOOKUP Function (Introduction):

• Purpose: VLOOKUP (Vertical Lookup) is used to find and retrieve data from a specific column in a table based on a lookup value in another column (the first column of the table).
• (Detailed explanation of VLOOKUP syntax and usage is expected in subsequent parts of the full course.)
• Quote: “vlookup function is used for looking up a piece of information in a table and extracting some corresponding data or”

22. Report Formats in Excel:

• Available Formats: When creating reports (often using PivotTables), Excel offers different layout formats for displaying the data:
• Compact Form: Displays all row labels in one column, using indentation to show hierarchy. Saves horizontal space.
• Outline Form: Displays each level of row labels in its own column. Can repeat item labels.
• Table Form: Similar to Outline Form but does not indent subordinate items. Each field is in its own column.
• Choosing a Format: The best format depends on the data structure and the desired readability of the report.
• Quote: “Excel is basically used for reporting mainly used for reporting to management you have to extract different kinds of reports and what are the report formats that are available in Excel this is one of the uh important questions again uh for a beginner level and there are three formats basically compact form outline form table form”

23. Conditional Logic with IF and SUMIF Functions:

• IF Function (Detailed): Performs a logical test and returns one value if the test is TRUE and another value if the test is FALSE.
• Syntax: =IF(logical_test, value_if_true, value_if_false)
• Logical Test: Any expression that can be evaluated to TRUE or FALSE (e.g., A1>10, B2=”Yes”).
• Nesting IF Functions: Multiple IF functions can be nested within each other to handle more than two possible outcomes.
• Example: =IF(A1>20, IF(B1>40000, “Valid”, “Invalid Salary”), “Invalid Age”) (as interpreted from the description).
• Quote: “the F function in Excel it actually performs a logical test and you will give a condition it performs the test and returns a value if the test evaluates to true and another value which you again will specify if the test result is false”
• SUMIF Function (Detailed): Sums the values in a range that meet a specified criterion.
• Syntax: =SUMIF(range, criteria, [sum_range])
• range: The range of cells to evaluate the criteria against.
• criteria: The condition that determines which cells in the range will be summed.
• sum_range: (Optional) The range of cells to actually sum. If omitted, the cells in the range that meet the criteria are summed.
• Example: =SUMIF(G2:G6, “>75000”, G2:G6) would sum the salaries in the range G2:G6 that are greater than 75,000.
• Quote: “the sum IF function okay again the sum function adds the cell value specified by a given condition or a criteria so you are giving a condition and you are actually doing another function which is performing the addition”

24. COUNTIF Function (Example):

• Usage Example (implied): Finding the number of days where the number of deaths in Italy was greater than 200, using a COUNTIF function on a column containing death counts.
• Syntax: =COUNTIF(range, criteria)
• Example (hypothetical): If column G contains the number of deaths in Italy, =COUNTIF(G2:G100, “>200”) would count the number of cells in that range where the value is greater than 200.
• Quote: “we will try to find the function so we’ll use the count function and count function is again simple count if you are specifying the column that is the uh source that you’re looking for that is G2 the column G and it is two it starts from two row two” (Incomplete sentence, but implies the use of COUNTIF with a range and criteria)

25. Data Validation:

• Purpose: Used to control the type of data that can be entered into a cell, helping to prevent errors and ensure data accuracy.
• Accessing Data Validation: Select the cells where you want to apply validation, go to the “Data” tab, and click on “Data Validation.”
• Validation Criteria: Various criteria can be set, such as:
• Whole number
• Decimal
• List
• Date
• Time
• Text length
• Custom formula
• Error Alerts: Custom error messages can be displayed when invalid data is entered.
• Input Messages: Helpful messages can be shown to guide users on the expected data.
• Example: Setting data validation for a cell to only allow whole numbers between 1 and 10. If a user tries to enter text or a number outside this range, an error alert will appear.
• Quote: “Data validation is one of the very important features in Excel which is used to restrict the type of data or the values that users enter into a cell. To apply it you need to select the cells where you want to apply the data validation go to the data tab and click on data validation”

26. Applying Conditional Logic (IF and AND):

• Combining IF and AND: The AND function can be used within the logical test of an IF function to check if multiple conditions are all TRUE.
• Syntax: =IF(AND(condition1, condition2, …), value_if_true, value_if_false)
• Example (Student Pass/Fail): To determine if a student passes based on marks greater than 60 AND attendance greater than 75%: =IF(AND(U5>60, V5>75), “Pass”, “Fail”).
• Quote: “you have to use the IF function and check with the and condition to fill the results column […] we are checking the conditions here and the marks should be in row I mean the column U and it starts with u5 so let’s see u5 okay it will immediately go to column U and five row five okay and then what is the condition we are satisfying here it should be greater than 60 okay and the other condition is uh the column V that is the attendance column okay and what is the condition we are specifying V 5 should be greater than 75”

27. Calculating Age Using YEARFRAC and DATEDIF:

• YEARFRAC Function: Returns the fraction of the year represented by the number of whole days between a start date and an end date. Can be used to calculate age as a decimal.
• Syntax: =YEARFRAC(start_date, end_date, [basis])
• basis: (Optional) Specifies the day count basis to use (e.g., actual/actual, 30/360).
• DATEDIF Function (revisited for age): As mentioned earlier, can calculate the difference in whole years.
• Example (YEARFRAC for age): =YEARFRAC(birth_date, today())
• Example (DATEDIF for age): =DATEDIF(birth_date, today(), “Y”)
• Quote: “use the ear fraction or dated IF function to return the number of whole days between start date and the end date […] here is a small example and this is how we use the ear Frack function”

28. Nested IF Statements (Detailed):

• Purpose: To test multiple conditions and return different values based on which condition is met.
• Logic: One IF function is placed inside another IF function’s value_if_false argument (or sometimes value_if_true).
• Example (Excellent/Bad/Average): =IF(B2>80, “Excellent”, IF(B2<=60, “Bad”, “Average”)). This formula first checks if the value in B2 is greater than 80. If TRUE, it returns “Excellent.” If FALSE, it proceeds to the nested IF function, which checks if B2 is less than or equal to 60. If TRUE, it returns “Bad”; otherwise, it returns “Average.”
• Quote: “the IF function can be nested I mean it can be Loop when we have multiple conditions to meet okay it can be nested the false value is replaced by another if function”

29. Descriptive Statistics Using Data Analysis Toolpak (Recap and Steps):

1. Steps:Enable the Analysis Toolpak (File > Options > Add-ins > Go > Analysis Toolpak > OK).
2. Go to the “Data” tab and click “Data Analysis.”
3. Select “Descriptive Statistics” and click “OK.”
4. Specify the “Input Range” (the data you want to analyze).
5. Specify the “Output Options” (e.g., a new worksheet).
6. Check the box for “Summary statistics.”
7. Click “OK.”

• Output Interpretation: The generated table provides key statistical measures like mean, median, standard deviation, etc., helping to understand the central tendency and dispersion of the data.
• Quote: “to analyze the data so we might come across a question and you will be given a data or a table and you need to find the descriptive statistics of the columns using data analysis tool […] how you do that is you have to add a pack okay okay you should be knowing that you need to add a pack which is called the analysis tool pack which you go to uh file options and then just click on the addin and select the analysis tool pack click uh Excel addin and just click go then it will add the option and then when you select the data you have to go to the click on the data analysis option”

30. Calculated Fields in Pivot Tables:

• Purpose: Allow users to create new fields in a PivotTable based on calculations involving existing fields. This enables analysis of data that isn’t directly present in the original source.
• Accessing Calculated Fields: Select any cell in the PivotTable, go to the “PivotTable Analyze” tab (or “Options” in older versions), click on “Fields, Items, & Sets,” and choose “Calculated Field.”
• Formula Creation: A dialog box opens where you can enter a name for the new field and create a formula using the existing PivotTable fields and standard Excel operators.
• Example (Bonus Calculation): Creating a “Bonus” field based on “Sales” and “Unit Sold” with a condition (e.g., if Unit Sold > 1000, Bonus = Sales * 5%, else Bonus = Sales * 2%). The formula might involve an IF function within the calculated field definition.
• Quote: “Allow you to perform calculations on the data in your pivot table. These calculations can involve other fields in the pivot table and help you derive new insights from your data. To add a calculated field you need to go to the pivot table analyze tab click on fields items and sets and select calculated field”

31. Slicers for Pivot Table Filtering:

• Purpose: Visual filters that provide an easy and interactive way to filter the data displayed in a PivotTable.
• Inserting Slicers: Select any cell in the PivotTable, go to the “PivotTable Analyze” tab (or “Options” in older versions), and click “Insert Slicer.” In the dialog box, check the fields you want to create slicers for.
• Usage: Clicking on items within a slicer filters the PivotTable to show only the data related to those selected items. Multiple items can be selected (often using Ctrl or Shift keys). Multiple slicers can be used simultaneously for multi-dimensional filtering.
• Example: Adding slicers for “Month” and “Country” to a PivotTable. Clicking “Feb” in the “Month” slicer and “USA” in the “Country” slicer would filter the PivotTable to show data only for February in the USA.
• Quote: “Slicers are used to further filter data in the pivot table suppose you already have some data and it’s for ease that you can do it by just adding a slicer you can select particular uh data in or a field and you can see the output for that particular field that you have chosen in the slicer […] go to the insert Tab and select slicer under filters”

32. What-If Analysis Tools (Goal Seek, Scenario Manager, Data Table):

• Purpose: Allow users to explore how changes to certain input values in a formula affect the output. Useful for sensitivity analysis and planning.
• Accessing What-If Analysis: Located under the “Data” tab, in the “Forecast” group, click the “What-If Analysis” dropdown.
• Goal Seek: Allows you to find the input value needed for a formula to reach a specific target output value. Useful for answering “What input value do I need to achieve this result?” questions.
• Parameters: Set cell (the formula cell), To value (the target output), By changing cell (the input cell to adjust).
• Example: Finding out what interest rate is needed to achieve a specific monthly payment on a loan.
• Quote: “Goal seek is a feature in Excel that allows you to adjust the value of one input cell in a formula to find the value needed to achieve a desired result in another cell which is the output cell. It’s particularly useful when you know the outcome you want but are unsure what input value is required to get there”
• Scenario Manager: Allows you to define and save different sets of input values (scenarios) and see their impact on the formulas in your worksheet. More advanced than Goal Seek as it can handle multiple changing variables simultaneously. Provides a summary report of the different scenarios and their results.
• Usage: Define different scenarios with varying input values, and the Scenario Manager will show the resulting output for each scenario.
• Example: Analyzing the impact of different sales growth rates and expense levels on the company’s profit.
• Quote: “the scenario manager it is a bit more complicated compared to the other two but then it is uh more advanced than goal seek as it allows you the uh to adjust the multiple variables at the same time”
• Data Table: Allows you to see how one or two variables in a formula change the results of that formula. Creates a table of outcomes based on different possible input values.
• Types: One-variable data table (examines the effect of one input variable on one or more formulas) and two-variable data table (examines the effect of two input variables on one formula).
• Example (One-Variable): Calculating the monthly payment for a loan at different interest rates.
• Example (Two-Variable): Calculating the total revenue based on different price points and sales volumes.
• Quote: “data table is another what if analysis tool that allows you to see how changing one or two variables in your formula will affect the results of that formula it’s a way to automate multiple what if questions and display the answers in a table”

33. Functions vs. Subroutines in VBA:

• Function (VBA): A block of VBA code that performs a specific task and returns a value. Can be called from other VBA code or directly used in worksheet formulas (if written as a user-defined function – UDF).
• Called by: A variable or directly in a formula.
• Purpose: To perform calculations and return a result.
• Example: A VBA function to calculate the area of a rectangle given its length and width, returning the calculated area.
• Quote: “a function always returns a value of the task it is performing […] functions are called by a variable […] functions are used directly in spreadsheet as formulas”
• Subroutine (Sub) (VBA): A block of VBA code that performs a specific task but does not directly return a value. Subroutines perform actions, such as manipulating worksheet data, displaying messages, or controlling application behavior.
• Called by: Name from other VBA code, by triggering events (e.g., clicking a button), or through the Macro dialog box.
• Purpose: To automate tasks and perform actions.
• Example: A VBA subroutine that formats a selected range of cells with a specific font and color.
• Quote: “sub routine it does not return a value of the task it is performing […] sub routines can be recalled from anywhere in the program in multiple types […] Subs cannot be used directly in spreadsheets as formula”

This briefing document summarizes the key concepts and functionalities of Excel covered in the provided excerpts. It highlights the importance of understanding basic functions, data manipulation techniques, data analysis tools, visualization options, and the potential of advanced features like macros, Power Query, and integration with AI tools and programming languages like Python. The distinction between formulas and functions, the order of operations, and the difference between VBA functions and subroutines are also crucial for effective Excel usage.

Frequently Asked Questions about Excel Based on the Provided Sources

1. What is the COUNT function in Excel used for? The COUNT function in Excel is specifically used to count the number of cells within a selected range that contain numerical values (numbers). It is helpful for quickly assessing the density of numbers in a dataset, particularly when the data includes a mix of different types like text and numbers. The function ignores blank cells and cells containing text or other non-numeric data types. For example, =COUNT(J2:J5) would count how many cells in the range J2 to J5 contain numbers.
2. How does the COUNTA function differ from the COUNT function? While the COUNT function only counts cells containing numbers, the COUNTA function counts all non-empty cells in a specified range. This includes cells with numbers, text, dates, logical values, and even cells containing formulas that result in any of these types of data. Importantly, like the COUNT function, COUNTA does not count blank cells. For instance, =COUNTA(K2:K5) would count all cells in the range K2 to K5 that are not blank, regardless of their content (number, text, date, etc.).
3. What is the purpose of the COUNTIF function in Excel? The COUNTIF function in Excel is used to count the number of cells within a given range that meet a specific criterion or condition. This function is valuable for analyzing data based on certain requirements. For example, you could use COUNTIF to count how many times a specific product appears in a list or how many sales figures are above a certain value. The syntax for COUNTIF involves specifying the range to be checked and the criteria to be met.
4. How can you change the format of dates in Excel? Excel offers several ways to change the format in which dates are displayed. One common method is to select the cells containing the dates, right-click, and choose “Format Cells.” In the “Format Cells” dialog box, under the “Number” tab, you can select “Date” from the category list. This will present you with various built-in date formats that you can choose from. Additionally, you can customize date formats by selecting “Custom” and using format codes (like YYYY for year, MM for month, DD for day) to arrange the date components as desired. You can also change the regional settings (e.g., from India to United States) to automatically apply the date format conventions of that region.
5. How can you calculate age from a date of birth in Excel? To calculate the age in years from a date of birth, you can use the DATEDIF function (or sometimes referred to as DATE DIFF). This function calculates the difference between two dates based on a specified interval (like years, months, or days). The basic syntax is =DATEDIF(start_date, end_date, unit). For calculating age in years, the start_date would be the date of birth, the end_date would typically be today’s date (which can be entered using the TODAY() function), and the unit would be “Y” for years. For example, if the date of birth is in cell A2, the formula might look like =DATEDIF(A2, TODAY(), “Y”).
6. What is standard deviation and how is it calculated in Excel? Standard deviation is a statistical measure that quantifies the amount of dispersion or spread of a set of data values around their mean (average). A low standard deviation indicates that the data points tend to be close to the mean, while a high standard deviation indicates that the data points are more spread out. In Excel, you can calculate the standard deviation of a sample using the STDEV.S function or the standard deviation of an entire population using the STDEV.P function. Both functions take a range of numerical values as their argument. For example, =STDEV.S(A1:A10) would calculate the sample standard deviation of the values in cells A1 through A10. The calculation of standard deviation conceptually involves finding the variance (the average of the squared differences from the mean) and then taking the square root of the variance.
7. What is the SUMIFS function in Excel and how is it used? The SUMIFS function in Excel is used to calculate the sum of values in a range that meet multiple specified criteria. It allows you to apply more than one condition to determine which cells should be included in the sum. The syntax for SUMIFS is =SUMIFS(sum_range, criteria_range1, criteria1, [criteria_range2, criteria2], …). The sum_range is the range containing the values to be summed. Each subsequent pair of criteria_range and criteria defines a condition. For example, to find the total sales in the “West” region, you might use a formula like =SUMIFS(Sales_Column, Region_Column, “West”), assuming you have columns named “Sales_Column” and “Region_Column”. You can add more criteria by specifying additional criteria_range and criteria pairs. It’s often beneficial to format your data as a table in Excel before using SUMIFS for easier column referencing.
8. What is Microsoft Copilot for Excel and what kind of tasks can it help with? Microsoft Copilot for Excel is an AI-powered tool designed to assist users with various Excel-related tasks. It can help with data analysis by generating regional-wise sales reports or country-wise sales reports based on a given dataset. Copilot can also assist in data transformation, such as identifying the day of the week for order placement based on an order date column or finding the customer with the highest sales record. Furthermore, it can aid in building forecasting models to predict future sales based on historical data. While noted as being potentially slower than other AI tools, Copilot aims to streamline workflows and provide insights directly within the Excel environment by understanding user commands and data patterns.

Microsoft Excel Basics and Fundamentals

Based on the source “003-Excel_Full_Course_2025___Excel-03-24-2025.pdf”, let’s discuss Microsoft Excel basics:

What is Microsoft Excel? Microsoft Excel is a software product developed by Microsoft that is more than just a spreadsheet; it’s a powerful tool for turning data into insights that drive smarter business decisions. It is designed for storing data in an organized way using rows and columns. Excel is also capable of manipulating data through mathematical operations and can be used to extract insights from data and represent them visually using graphs and charts. In 2025, Excel is considered an essential skill in every data-driven industry.

Fundamentals of Microsoft Excel: When you start Microsoft Excel, you will first see the Microsoft Excel homepage. This page offers various suggestions based on the type of sheet you want to work with, including blank workbooks and templates for various purposes like business, personal use, planners, trackers, lists, budgets, and charts.

Once you open a sheet, you will encounter several key interface elements:

• Toolbar Menu: Located at the top, this menu includes options like File, Home, Insert, Draw, Page Layout, Formulas, Data, Review, View, and Help. These tools are used to work on your data.
• Toolbar Ribbon: When you select an option from the toolbar menu, a ribbon appears below it. This ribbon contains various options and functionalities specific to the selected tool. For example, selecting the “Home” tool displays a ribbon with options for clipboard functions (Paste, Cut, Copy, Format Painter), font manipulation (font type, size, bold, italic, underline), and text alignment. Each tool in the toolbar menu (Insert, Draw, etc.) has its own unique ribbon.
• Toolbar Groups: The toolbar ribbon is further segmented into groups, where each group contains a set of related functions. For instance, the “Home” ribbon has groups like “Clipboard,” “Font,” and “Alignment,” each with specific operations. Some toolbar groups have a small arrow icon in the corner, which, when clicked, opens a dialogue box with more options that couldn’t fit in the main group section.
• Cell and Address: An Excel sheet is made up of boxes called cells. Each cell has its own unique address, which is a combination of its column letter and row number. For example, a highlighted cell might have the address “B3,” where “B” is the column name and “3” is the row number. The cell address is displayed in a designated area of the Excel interface.
• Sheet Tracker: Located in the bottom left corner of the Excel sheet, the sheet tracker allows you to navigate through different sheets within the same Excel file (workbook). You can add new sheets by clicking on a “+” option.
• Sheet Size Control: In the bottom right corner, there is an option to increase or decrease the sheet size (zoom level).

Basic Excel Functions and Formulas: Learning basic Excel functions and formulas is crucial for mastering Excel and can significantly boost productivity. These are fundamental for daily tasks and data analysis. Some essential basic functions include:

• SUM: Used to add up numbers. It can calculate the total of values typed directly into the function or values within a range of cells. The formula starts with =SUM() followed by the range of cells (e.g., =SUM(A2:A5)).
• IF: Performs a logical test and returns one value if the condition is true and another value if the condition is false. The formula structure is =IF(logical_test, value_if_true, value_if_false) (e.g., =IF(B2>300, “Above 300”, “300 or Below”)).
• AVERAGE: Calculates the mean or average of numbers provided. The formula is =AVERAGE() followed by the range of cells (e.g., =AVERAGE(C2:C5)).
• MIN and MAX: Used to find the minimum and maximum values within a given range of data, respectively. The formulas are =MIN(range) (e.g., =MIN(D2:D5)) and =MAX(range) (e.g., =MAX(E2:E5)).
• TRIM: Removes extra spaces from text, except for single spaces between words. It’s useful for cleaning data from inconsistent sources. The formula is =TRIM(text) (e.g., =TRIM(F2)).
• CONCATENATE: Joins two or more text strings into one string. It can combine data from different cells. The formula is =CONCATENATE(text1, text2, …) (e.g., =CONCATENATE(H2,” “,I2)) or you can use the ampersand operator (&) for the same purpose (e.g., =H2&” “&I2).
• COUNT: Counts the number of cells within a range that contain numbers. There are related functions like COUNTA which counts cells with any content and COUNTBLANK which counts empty cells.

Mastering these basic elements and functions is the foundation for using Excel effectively for data analysis, report creation, task automation, and building interactive dashboards.

Essential Excel Functions Explained

Based on the source “003-Excel_Full_Course_2025___Excel-03-24-2025.pdf” and our previous discussion, let’s delve deeper into the usage of several key Excel functions. The source emphasizes that functions and formulas are crucial for mastering Excel and are fundamental for daily Excel tasks. Learning even a few essential functions can significantly enhance your abilities.

Here’s a breakdown of the usage of some basic but important Excel functions:

• SUM Function:
• The SUM function in Excel is used to add up numbers.
• It provides a quick way to calculate the total of several values, whether typed directly into the function or included within a range of cells.
• Example: To sum the values in cells A2 through A5, you would select the cell where you want the result to appear and enter the formula =SUM(A2:A5) in the formula bar.
• IF Function:
• The IF function in Excel is used to perform logical tests and return values based on the results of these tests.
• It checks whether a condition is TRUE or FALSE and then returns one value for a TRUE result and another for a FALSE result. This is extremely useful for decision-making processes within your data set.
• Example: To check if the value in cell B2 is greater than 300, and display “Above 300” if true and “300 or Below” if false, you would enter the formula =IF(B2>300, “Above 300”, “300 or Below”). This logic can also be applied to other cells by dragging the fill handle.
• AVERAGE Function:
• The AVERAGE function in Excel calculates the mean or average of numbers provided to it.
• This function is particularly useful for quickly finding the central values in a set of data, which can be helpful in various statistical analyses.
• Example: To find the average of values in cells C2 through C5, you would enter the formula =AVERAGE(C2:C5) in the desired cell.
• MIN and MAX Functions:
• The MIN and MAX functions in Excel are used to find the minimum and maximum values within a given range of data, respectively.
• These functions are useful for quickly identifying the smallest and largest numbers in a data set, helping you to analyze different ranges efficiently.
• Examples: To find the minimum value in cells D2 through D5, use =MIN(D2:D5). To find the maximum value in cells E2 through E5, use =MAX(E2:E5).
• TRIM Function:
• The TRIM function in Excel is used to remove all the extra spaces from text, except for a single space between words.
• This function is especially useful for cleaning up data that comes from other sources or has been entered inconsistently.
• Example: If cell F2 contains text with extra spaces, you can clean it by entering the formula =TRIM(F2) in another cell.
• CONCATENATE Function:
• The CONCATENATE function in Excel is used to join two or more text strings into one string.
• It helps in combining data from different cells, which can be useful for creating full names, combining addresses, or any situation where text needs to be merged.
• Example: If “Andrew” is in cell H2 and “Garfield” is in cell I2, you can combine them with a space by using the formula =CONCATENATE(H2,” “,I2) or =H2&” “&I2.
• COUNT Function:
• The COUNT function in Excel is used to specifically count the number of cells that contain numbers in a Range.
• It’s a crucial function for quickly assessing the numbers density in a data set, especially when dealing with mixed data types.
• Example: To count the number of cells containing numbers in the range J2 to J5, you would use the formula =COUNT(J2:J5).
• COUNTA Function:
• The COUNTA function in Excel counts the number of cells in a Range that are not empty.
• It is useful for determining the size of data sets that include various types of data such as numbers, text, or even logical values.
• Difference from COUNT: While COUNT only counts numeric values, COUNTA counts any non-empty cell. It does not count blank cells.
• Example: To count all non-empty cells in the range K2 to K5, use =COUNTA(K2:K5). This will count cells containing numbers or text.
• COUNTIF Function:
• The COUNTIF function is used to count the number of cells within a range that meet a specified criteria.
• This function is valuable for filtering and analyzing data based on specific conditions.
• Example: To count the number of cells in the range L2 to L5 that contain a value greater than 5, you would use the formula =COUNTIF(L2:L5, “>5”).
• SUMIF Function:
• The SUMIF function in Excel allows you to add up values in a Range based on specified criteria.
• This function is extremely useful for performing conditional sums where you want to sum numbers that meet certain conditions.
• Example: To calculate the sum of values in the range M2 to M5 that are greater than 5, you would use the formula =SUMIF(M2:M5, “>5”).

The source further highlights that Microsoft consistently updates Excel, introducing new functions to enhance data management capabilities. Mastering these basic functions lays the groundwork for understanding and utilizing more advanced features in Excel.

Excel for Data Analysis: 2025 Essentials

Based on the source “003-Excel_Full_Course_2025___Excel-03-24-2025.pdf” and our previous discussions, Microsoft Excel is presented as more than just a spreadsheet; it is a powerful and essential tool for data analysis in 2025. It enables users to transform raw data into valuable insights that can drive smarter business decisions. The source highlights that proficiency in Excel, from basic to advanced techniques, is vital for tasks such as creating reports, automating tasks, and building interactive dashboards. Furthermore, it mentions the exploration of advanced features like Power Query, Co-pilot for AI insights, and the use of key formulas to boost productivity.

Here are key aspects of data analysis in Excel as discussed in the source:

• Foundational Tool: Excel serves as a foundational tool for initial data exploration and basic analysis. Its versatility in data manipulation, visualization, and modeling is unmatched at this stage.
• Data Organization and Manipulation: Excel’s fundamental structure of rows and columns allows for organized data storage. It is also capable of manipulating data through various mathematical operations.
• Essential Functions for Analysis: The source emphasizes the crucial role of functions and formulas in mastering Excel for data analysis. Basic but important functions like SUM, AVERAGE, IF, COUNT, and SUMIF are fundamental for daily Excel tasks and make handling data easier and more efficient. Our previous discussion elaborated on these and other basic functions like MIN, MAX, TRIM, CONCATENATE, and COUNTIF, which are all building blocks for analyzing data.
• Data Visualization: Excel allows users to represent data in visually appealing graphs and charts, which is crucial for extracting insights and communicating findings effectively. The source demonstrates the creation of various chart types like pie charts, column charts, bar charts, and line graphs for different analytical purposes.
• Interactive Dashboards: A significant aspect of data analysis in Excel is the ability to build interactive dashboards. These dashboards allow for dynamic exploration and presentation of data using elements like pivot tables and slicers.
• Data Filtering and Sorting: Excel provides robust features for filtering data to focus on specific subsets and sorting data to identify trends and patterns, including sorting by date and multiple criteria. Advanced filtering options are also available for more complex data extraction.
• What-If Analysis: Excel offers what-if analysis tools like Goal Seek to experiment with different scenarios and understand how changes in input variables can affect outcomes.
• Data Cleaning: Preparing data for analysis is crucial, and Excel provides tools for removing duplicate values and using functions like TRIM to clean text data.
• Advanced Analysis Features: The source introduces more advanced capabilities for data analysis:
• Power Query: For importing and transforming data from various sources.
• Power Pivot: An Excel add-in for analyzing large data sets from multiple sources and creating relationships between tables.
• Co-pilot for AI Insights: Integrating AI to assist with data analysis tasks.
• Data Analysis Toolpak: An add-in that provides advanced data analysis tools for statistical calculations, including descriptive statistics like mean, median, mode, standard deviation, etc..
• Python in Excel: Integration of Python for advanced data analysis, visualization, and automation within the Excel environment.
• Pivot Tables: Pivot tables are highlighted as essential tools for summarizing and analyzing large datasets. They allow for easy aggregation, filtering, and comparison of data, and can be used to create pivot charts for visual representation. The source demonstrates creating pivot tables with multiple variables and calculating percentage contributions.
• Integration with Other Tools: While Excel is powerful, the source also acknowledges that data analysts often use it in conjunction with other tools like SQL, Python, Tableau, and Power BI for more advanced tasks.

In summary, the source “003-Excel_Full_Course_2025___Excel-03-24-2025.pdf” positions Microsoft Excel as a comprehensive tool for data analysis, offering a wide range of features from basic data organization and manipulation to advanced statistical analysis, visualization, and integration with other powerful platforms and languages. It emphasizes the continuous evolution of Excel with the introduction of features like Co-pilot and Python integration, further solidifying its role in the modern data-driven landscape.

Data Visualization Tools: Excel, Tableau, Power BI, and Python

Based on the source “003-Excel_Full_Course_2025___Excel-03-24-2025.pdf” and our conversation history, several tools for data visualization are discussed:

• Microsoft Excel: The source extensively highlights Excel’s capabilities as a powerful tool for turning data into insights, with a strong emphasis on data visualization through various types of charts and graphs. Excel allows users to represent data in visually appealing formats, which is crucial for understanding trends, patterns, and relationships within the data. The document demonstrates the creation of pie charts, column charts, bar charts, and line graphs to represent different types of data, such as company shares, profits over time, and revenue growth. Interactive dashboards can be built in Excel using pivot tables and pivot charts combined with slicers to filter data dynamically, making complex data more understandable. The source emphasizes that data visualization skills are paramount for data analysts as data complexity grows, and the ability to present insights clearly and persuasively is essential.
• Tableau and Power BI: The source mentions Tableau and Power BI as examples of data visualization tools that data analysts should be proficient in. These are presented alongside Excel, MySQL, and programming languages like Python and R, suggesting they are important components of a data analyst’s toolkit. The source implies that these tools are used for more advanced data visualization, although specific details about their functionalities are not provided within the excerpts.
• Python: The source identifies Python programming language as essential for data analysts, enabling data manipulation, advanced statistical analysis, and machine learning implementations. While the primary focus mentioned is not solely visualization, it’s widely known that Python has powerful libraries like Matplotlib and Seaborn that are extensively used for creating various types of static, interactive, and animated visualizations in data analysis [information not in the source, please verify independently]. The source briefly touches upon using Python within Excel, showcasing the creation of a line chart as a Python output.

In summary, the source emphasizes Microsoft Excel as a key data visualization tool, equipped with comprehensive charting features and the ability to create interactive dashboards. Tableau and Power BI are mentioned as other important data visualization tools for data analysts. Additionally, Python is highlighted for its broader data analysis capabilities, which include powerful visualization libraries [information not in the source, please verify independently], and its integration within Excel is also noted. The ability to present insights clearly and persuasively through data visualization is considered a core skill for data analysts in the context of data-driven communication.

Becoming a Data Analyst: Skills, Qualifications, and Experience

Based on the source “003-Excel_Full_Course_2025___Excel-03-24-2025.pdf” and our conversation history, becoming a data analyst involves acquiring a specific set of skills, qualifications, and practical experience. The source outlines a five-step approach to becoming a data analyst: focusing on skills, obtaining proper qualification, testing skills through personal projects, building a portfolio, and targeting entry-level jobs or internships.

Here’s a breakdown of these aspects based on the source:

1. Essential Skills:

The source categorizes the necessary skills into six key areas:

• Data Cleaning: Ensuring data is accurate and ready for analysis.
• Data Analysis: Extracting meaningful insights from data. Proficiency in Excel remains vital for data manipulation, visualization, and modeling as a foundational tool for initial data exploration and basic analysis. Excel is capable of manipulating data through mathematical operations and extracting insights. Basic Excel functions like SUM, AVERAGE, IF, COUNT, and SUMIF are essential.
• Data Visualization: Presenting data insights clearly and persuasively. Excel offers tools to represent data in visually appealing graphs and charts. The source also mentions data visualization tools like Tableau and Power BI as important for data analysts.
• Problem Solving: Identifying issues, formulating hypotheses, and devising innovative solutions for complex data challenges.
• Soft Skills: Effective communication of findings to both technical and non-technical stakeholders, teamwork, and collaboration within multidisciplinary teams.
• Domain Knowledge: Understanding the specific industry or domain in which one is working to provide accurate results.

2. Technical Skills:

Beyond the core skills, specific technical proficiencies are crucial:

• Microsoft Excel: As highlighted, proficiency in Excel is vital for data manipulation, visualization, and modeling. The source details various Excel functionalities like formulas (e.g., COUNTIF, SUMIF), charting, creating interactive dashboards using pivot tables and slicers, Power Pivot for large datasets, Power Query for data transformation, Co-pilot for AI insights, and even the integration of Python for advanced analysis.
• Database Management: Skills in database management, particularly proficiency in DDB systems and querying languages like SQL, are indispensable for accessing and manipulating data seamlessly.
• Statistical Analysis: Understanding statistical concepts and methods to uncover trends, patterns, and correlations within data, facilitating evidence-based decision-making. The source mentions tools like the Data Analysis Toolpak in Excel for statistical calculations, including ANOVA and descriptive statistics.
• Programming Languages: Proficiency in programming languages like Python is essential for advanced data manipulation, statistical analysis, and machine learning implementations. The source also mentions R programming language as another tool in a data analyst’s arsenal.
• Data Visualization Tools: Familiarity with dedicated data visualization tools like Tableau and Power BI is important for creating more sophisticated and interactive visualizations.

3. Qualifications:

Formal education and training can significantly enhance one’s prospects of becoming a data analyst:

• Master’s Courses, Online Courses, and Boot Camps: These provide structured learning to gain in-depth knowledge and specialized skills in data analysis.
• Master’s Programs: Offer comprehensive, academically rigorous training, often including research projects.
• Online Courses: Provide flexibility to learn at one’s own pace while covering essential topics.
• Boot Camps: Offer immersive, hands-on training in a short period, focusing on practical skills.

These qualifications enhance credibility, keep individuals updated on industry trends, and make them more attractive to potential employers.

4. Practical Experience:

Demonstrating practical skills is crucial for landing a data analyst role:

• Data Analyst Projects: Working on personal projects demonstrates practical skills in data cleaning, visualization, and analysis. These projects help build a portfolio showcasing expertise and problem-solving abilities and bridge the gap between theory and real-world application.
• Portfolio: A portfolio serves as tangible proof of data analysis skills and expertise through real-world projects, showcasing the ability to analyze and interpret data effectively. It highlights domain knowledge and problem-solving skills, providing a competitive edge.
• Internships: Internships offer hands-on experience with real-world datasets, tools, and workflows, bridging the gap between theoretical knowledge and practical application. They provide exposure to industry practices, build professional networks, enhance resumes, and improve chances of securing full-time roles.

5. Career Progression:

The initial steps often involve gaining practical experience and exposure:

• Targeting Entry-Level Jobs or Internships: These provide exposure to real-world data problems and allow for the application of learned skills in a professional setting.

In conclusion, becoming a data analyst in 2025, as outlined by the source, requires a combination of strong technical skills in areas like Excel, SQL, and potentially programming languages and visualization tools, alongside essential soft skills and domain knowledge. Obtaining relevant qualifications through various educational paths and gaining practical experience through personal projects, a strong portfolio, and internships are critical steps in this career journey. The source emphasizes that proficiency in Excel remains a foundational and vital skill for aspiring data analysts.

The Original Text

hello everyone and welcome to excel full course by simply learn Excel is more than just a spreadsheet it’s a powerful tool for turning data into insights that drivve smarter business decisions in 2025 Excel is an essential skill as data leads every industry in this course you learn from Basics to Advanced Techniques learning how to create reports automate task and build interactive dashboards you’ll also explore power query co-pilot for AI insights and 10 key formulas to boost productivity plus we’ll dive into dashboard creation charb automation database management and many more so let’s get started before we comment if you are interested to supercharge your career in data analytics the professional certificate program in data analytics and generative AI by E and ICT Academy it goari is your perfect choice this 11 Monon live online course offers interactive m master classes by I goti faculty and Industry experts combining Cutting Edge tools like generative AI chbt python Tab and SQL plus you’ll also earn an executive aluminize status from it goti and ibam recognized certifications to stand out in the job market Microsoft Excel so Microsoft Excel is a software product designed and developed by Microsoft storing data in an organized way that is rows and columns and Microsoft Excel is also capable to manipulate data through some mathematical operations followed by that Microsoft Excel is also used to extract the insights from the data and represent it in the form of visually appealing graphs and charts now we have a basic understanding or an overview of what a Microsoft Excel software product is now moving ahead we will understand the fundamentals of Microsoft Excel so following are some fundamentals that you need to know before getting started with Microsoft Excel so basically when you install the Microsoft Office in your computer you will have various Microsoft products out of which Microsoft Excel is one of the product so we will be dealing exactly with that particular product that is Microsoft Excel so when you get started with Microsoft Excel this is what you will see in the first page so this particular page is called as Microsoft Excel homepage where you will be having various varieties of sheets Microsoft Excel will give you some suggestions based on the type of sheet you want to work with we will see this in a better way through the Practical session so once you get started with the sheet you will have some more options so this particular option is called as the toolbar menu you will have the file home insert draw past layout formulas data review View and help so these are the tools that you will be using to work on your data using Microsoft Excel furthermore we have a toolbar ribbon so when you select some or the other option from the file home insert draw page layout formulas data review View and help buttons you will have a ribbon so for example you can see that I have selected the Home Tool here so when I press on the Home Tool this is the ribbon which Microsoft Excel gives me so this ribbon has some options in it which can perform various operations now in a further more detailed way we will have toolbar groups so when you see in the previous slide we have a complete toolbar ribbon so this particular ribbon been is segmented into groups so you can see the first group as paste Cut Copy format painter etc etc and the second group is the font the size of the font and to increase the size of the font to decrease the size of the font bold italic underline etc etc and here you can see the text alignment so each and every group has separate functions so each set is called as a group and I think you can see a small Arrow op over here so this Arrow option is used into the toolbar groups when the group is not able to fit all the operations or all the functionalities in one single provided section so when you click on this particular Arrow Mark you will have another dialogue box so this is called toolbar more options so you can see that when I clicked on this icon you can see a new dialogue box which opens me a new set of operations which are not able to be fit in this particular group so we will also see more about this in a better way in the practice iCal session now moving forward we have cell and address so when you open a Microsoft Excel sheet you can find boxes so each and every box is named as a cell and each cell has its own address for example the highlighted cell over here has an address B3 so B is the column name and three is the rule name and apart from that you can have the sheet tracker in the bottom left corner of the Excel sheet where you can navigate through different sheets and in the bottom right corner you have an option of increasing or decreasing the sheet size so these are the basic fundamentals of Microsoft Excel that you need to keep in mind before getting started so we will have more on this in the Practical session if you are new to Excel or looking to improve your skills learning these functions can really help Excel isn’t just making spreadsheets it’s a powerful tool for analyzing data and managing projects in this guide we will cover some basic but important Excel functions like sum average if count and sum if you’ll see how these functions do and learn and how to use them with practical examples this knowledge will help you with daily task and make you more confident in using Excel so let’s explore these functions together and see how they can make handling data easier and more efficient let’s get going and make the most of your data with Excel why learn basic Excel functions and formulas functions and formulas are crucial for mastering Excel by learning even a few essential ones you can outpace many around you they are fundamental for daily Excel task to deepen your knowledge or explore Advanced functions consider exploring a comprehensive database of all existing Excel functions Microsoft consistently updates Excel introducing new functions like xlup in Microsoft 365 enhancing your data management capabilities so now let’s move on to the demo part okay so first we will understand the sum function in Excel as we know the sum function in Excel is used to add up the numbers it provides a quick way to calculate the total of several values whether they are typed into a function directly included within a range of cells so these are the cells so you just have to type the numbers in the cell and uh give the function over here and it will give you the desired result let’s check how so first we will understand the sum function I’m just I’ll just write it over here so the first step is like open your Excel file in your computer and select any column or row like here I’m selecting the column for instance you might just put them in cells A1 till A5 so uh in the A1 part I’ve mentioned some for your understanding so we’ll start with A2 we’ll type all the values over here so just type any values like I’m typing 40 then we have 78 then 35 and then we have 67 from A2 till A5 we have typed the values and using the formula in the formula bar it will add all the numbers from cell A2 till A5 and it will display in this particular cell so just select the cell where you want your answer to be shown and just insert the formula over here the formula for sum function is equal to sum A1 till A5 so we just go back to this bar and just select this particular cell and here in this bar just type the formula A1 till A5 but then here we have A2 so we’re just going to change it to A2 till A5 all right and just press enter so here you get the value 220 which is the sum of all the values which we have mentioned over here so it was pretty simple right now let us understand the IF function in Excel okay so the IF function in Excel is used to perform logical test and return values based on the results of these test this function checks whether a condition is true or false and then returns one value for a True Result and another for a false result it is extremely useful for decision making process within your data set let us now understand what are the steps to use this if function so just input your data and put any numeric values in the cells from B2 till B5 okay so 56 90 36 23 and here I want my result to be shown so I’ll just insert the formula here in the function bar so okay just check out the formula with IF function which is equal to if A1 is greater than a00 above 300 300 or below so let’s see how it works we’re just going to enter the formula okay so this will tell Excel to check if the value of B2 is greater than 300 if true it will display above 300 and if false it will display 300 or below let’s check it out okay so there’s some mistake going to paste the formula here again so in place of A1 we will mention B2 we just type B2 over here if GR greater than 300 above 300 or 300 below just press enter so we’ll just enter the formula over here and in place of A1 we will provide B2 all right so we just type here B2 that’s it and we just press enter so you can see the result has come to 300 or below because the value is less than 300 and you can also so drag and fill handle from B1 down to B5 and apply the same logic in other columns as well and it will give you the same result let us now understand the next function which is the average function in Excel the average function and okay so what is this average function used for basically the average function in Excel it will calculate the mean or average of numbers provided to it this function is particularly useful for quickly finding the central values in a set of data which can be helpful in various statistical analysis let us now understand the steps to use the average function so the first step is like you just click on the cell wherever you want your value to appear all right so just provide any values suppose um let’s provide some bigger values like bigger numbers like 430 here we type 2 78 then we have 98 and we have uh 79 and here I want my value to be shown so I’ll just insert the average formula which is let’s check out the formula which is equal to equal to average what is the um column we have chosen from C2 so we’ll just type C2 over here till C2 till C5 C5 all right and we will just press enter so as you can see the average function value is shown over here so after pressing enter the Excel will compute and display the average of all the cells in the selected Cel the next function is the minimum and maximum functions in Excel it’s very very simple let’s discuss what is the minimum and maximum function used for the Min and the max functions in Excel are used to find the minimum and maximum values within a given range of data these functions are useful for quickly identifying the smallest and largest numbers in a data set helping you to analyze different ranges efficiently so let us now understand what are the steps to use this formula it’s very simple just type any values over here 500 next we have 389 then we have 200 190 198 and here I want my value to be shown the minimum value so in the function bar I’ll just press I’ll just type the function which is equal to Min and in the bracket you just mention the column which is starting from D2 right so D2 D2 till D5 so just type the formula over here and after pressing enter you can see the minimum value shown over here is 190 and it’s similar for the maximum function as well so for the max let’s let’s uh use some different values and I want my uh function to be shown here so same you have to use the same formula just type the in place of Max we’re using in place of minimum we using the max function so just type Max and then the column name which is from uh I think G no no no yeah e so just so in place of we will just write right e okay sorry we just type E2 till I think it’s still E5 right E5 that’s it and just press enter so you can see the maximum value shown over here that is 800 so it’s very simple the Exel will display the largest and the minimum value using Min and Max functions the next is to understand the trim function in Excel let us now understand the trim function in Excel so basically this trim function in Excel is used to remove all the extra spaces from text except for a single space between words this function is specially used for cleaning up the data that comes from other sources of data that has been entered inconsistently let us now understand the steps to use the STM functions it is same as we have seen for all these functions the only difference is that this stream function will exclude the spaces so assume your text Data with some Extra Spaces in cells suppose over here I type any sentence any text okay like hello and then I provide some extra space every one and suppose I want my value to be inserted over here to remove all the extra space or if you want some bigger text you can do that but let us now check how the trim functions work for this text just click on the cell where you want your clean text to appear that is F6 and using the function over here just write uh equal to trim and then in place of you just have to mention over here which is uh F2 which is F2 just press enter now you can see that I’ve provided some Extra Spaces over here but here using the trim function it will remove all the extra space and just make it in a clean manner so you can also drag the fill handle from B1 like from this F2 down to G2 and all of that and then you can use a trim function in other column as well to clean up the text the second function is the concatenate function so let’s discuss the concatenate function over here okay so this concatenate function in Excel is used to join two or more text strings into one string it helps in combining data from different cells which can be useful for creating full names from first and last names combining addresses or any situation where text needs to be merged so let us now look the step steps how to use this concatenate function so just assume that you have written your name suppose I’ve written Andrew in this column H2 and here I have written car field now if I want what if I want to combine Andrew Garfield together so just by using this concatenate function I can make it happen all right so if I want my uh result to be shown in this particular cell I’ll just click on this and then in the function bar I’ll just enter the formula which is which is uh equal to cona concatenate and then I have to mention the cell name which is H this is H2 right H2 H and this one is I2 so I’ll just mention the yeah and here and here after mentioning okay I have to provide some space over here so I’ll just put comma and then some space then comma and then here I’ll just I2 all right and here I’ll just press enter so you can see in this particular Rule and both name has been combined concatenated together into a single name so this is how we use the concatenate function and the next function we have is the count function in Excel let us now understand how to use this count function okay the count function in Excel is used to specifically count the number of cells that contain numbers in a Range it’s a crucial function for quickly assessing the numbers density in a data set especially when dealing with mixed data types we’ll just assume that you have added transaction counts in column J starting from column G2 till J5 so the transaction counts are as follows 7 89 0 100 till J5 and then click on the cell where you want your count to appear say J j6 and then you just go to the formula bar and just press just enter the formula over there which is equal to count bracket this should be J2 J2 in J5 and just press enter and you can see the Excel will display the number of cells that contain numbers in column J which is one 2 3 4 okay so this was all for count concatenate trim Max Min average if and Su functions next we have is the count a function let us now understand what is this count a function fun used for and how is it different from count function so this count a function in Excel counts the number of cells in a Range that are not empty it is useful for determining the size of data sets that include various type of data such as numbers text or even logical values so just it will just count the number of nonempty cells in a specific column just click on the cell where you want the count to appear okay let me just tell you the difference between count and count function is that the count function generally used to count a range of cells containing numbers or dates excluding blank whereas this count a function will count everything including numbers dates text or a range containing a mixture of these items but does not count blank cells so suppose if I enter 56 and I leave it blank and then I enter 98 and then again I leave it okay and then just enter 56 and I want my formula to be shown over here so I’ll just go in this formula bar and just enter equal to count a and then from K column this is K column right K2 K2 till K5 okay and I just press enter so as you can see it’s showing three one 2 3 it will not count the extra space or the empty call empty cell we have left behind and also one more thing that we can also type text over here it’s not necessary to type only the numbers you can also type the text for example I type Apple your right type banana now okay here is the function just press enter will count three which is 1 2 and three so this count a function is used both for text as well as the dates as well as the numeric values but the count function is only used for the numeric values and it it will not count the text over here now let us understand the count if function in Excel we have now understood count and count a function and what is the difference between both both of these function we will now understand the countif function over here so let’s understand the count if function okay so this counter function is used to count the number of cells in a Range that meet a specified criteria this function is valuable for filtering and analyzing data based on specific conditions to count the number of transaction that ex exceeds a certain amount of value a threshold value for example five just click on the cell and suppose you want your values to appear in column L2 so suppose I type here 89 7 3 and five and here I will enter the formula which is equal to count if and then from L2 till L5 okay just close the bracket and here you just also have to input the threshold value suppose I take the threshold value as uh let’s say three or let’s say five okay let’s take it five so this is my threshold value greater than five so it will display only the numbers which are greater than five and I just press enter so you can see it’s showing two okay because 7 and 89 are the only two values which are greater than five so you can see that using any threshold function even if I could have written over here let’s say three so it will show three because the number is greater than three are 5 7 and 89 so this is how count a function works we will now understand the last function which is the sum IF function in Excel so what is the sum of function used for basically the sum of function in Excel allows you to add up values in a Range based on specified criteria this function is extremely use useful for performing conditional sums where you can want to show the sum numbers that meet certain condition so to calculate the sum of transactions where the number is greater than five click on the cell where you want your total number to appear let’s say over here I select which is m6 and you just have to enter the formula before that just write any number values like 7 5 3 and 10 and over here just mention the formula which is equal to sum if and the column name is starting from M2 till M5 value should be greater than comma this is M2 right M2 to M that’s it and we’ll just press enter so it’s showing 17 So based on this formula bar the formula will check the values from M2 till M5 and if the number is greater than five and sum only those number so as I’ve mentioned the value five so it will only calculate it will it will only sum numbers which are greater than five which are 10 and 7 which is equal to 17 so this is how the summ function is used we have come to the end of our video and this was all for the top 10 most important basic Excel functions if you categorize the steps to become a data analyst these are the ones firstly you need to focus on skills followed by that you need to have a proper qualification then test your skills by creating a personal project an individual project followed by that you must focus on building your own portfolio to describe your caliber to your recruiters and then Target to the entry level jobs or internships to get exposure to the real world data problems so these are the five important steps now let’s begin with the step one that is skills so skills are basically categorized into six steps it cleaning data analysis data visualization problem solving soft skills and domain knowledge so these are the tools Excel MySQL our programming language Python programming language some data visualization tools like tblo powerbi and next comes the problem solving so these are basically the soft skill Parts problem solving skills domain knowledge the domain in which you’re working maybe a Pharma domain maybe a banking sector maybe automobile domain Etc and lastly you need to be a good team player so that you can actively work along with the team and solve the problem collaboratively now let’s move ahead and discuss each and every one of these in a bit more detail starting with Microsoft Excel while Advanced tools are prevalent Proficiency in Excel remains vital for data analyst Excel versatility in data manipulation visualization and modeling is unmatched it serves as a foundational tool for initial data exploration and basic analysis data management database management skill is indispensable for data analyst as data volume saw efficient management and retrieval from ddb is critical Proficiency in ddb systems and querying languages like SQL ensures analyst can access and manipulate data seamlessly followed by that we have statistical analysis statistical analysis allow analysts to uncover hidden Trends patterns and Corr relationships within data facilitating evidence-based decision making it empowers analyst to identify the significance of findings validate hypothesis and make reliable predictions next after that we have have programming languages Proficiency in programming languages like python is essential for data analys these languages enable data manipulation Advanced statistical analysis and machine learning implementations next comes data storytelling or also known as data visualizations data storytelling skill is Paramon for data analy data storytelling Bridges the gap between data analysis and actionable insights ensuring that the value of data is fully realized in a world data driven communication is Central to business success data visualization skill is a CornerStore for data analyst as data complexity grows the ability to present insights clearly and persuasively is Paramount next is managing your customers and problem solving managing all your customers data and companies relationships is Paramount strong problem solving skills are important for data analyst with complex data challenges and evolving analytical methodologies analyst must excel in identifying issues formulating hypothesis and devising innovative solutions in addition to the technical skills data analyst in 2025 will require strong soft skills to excel in their roles here are the top FES data analyst must effectively communicate their findings to both Technical and non-technical stakeholders this includes presenting complex data in a clear and understandable manner next soft skill as teamwork and collaboration data analysts often work with multidisciplinary teams alongside data scientists data Engineers business professionals collaborative skills are essential for sharing insights brainstorming Solutions and working cohesively towards common goals and last but not least domain knowledge knowledge on domain in which you’re currently working is really important it might be a phical domain it can be an automobile domain it can be banking sector and much more unless you have a basic foundational domain knowledge you cannot continue in that domain with accurate results now the next step which was about the qualification to become a data analyst Master’s courses online courses and boot camps provide strong structured learning that helps you gain in-depth knowledge and specialized skills in data analysis masters programs offer comprehensive academically reest training and often include research projects making sure you’re highly competitive in the job maret Market online courses allow flexibility to learn at your own pace while covering essential topics and boot gaps offer immersive Hands-On training in a short period focusing on practical skills all three parts enhance your credibility keeping you updated on industry Trends and make you more attractive to potential employers if you are looking for a well curated allrounder then we have got you covered simply learn offers a wide range of courses on data science and data analytics starting from Master’s professional certifications to postgraduation and boot camps from globally reputed and recognized universities for more details check out the links in the description box below and comment section now proceeding ahead we have the projects for data analyst data analyist projects demonstrate practical skills in data cleaning visualization and Analysis they help build a portfolio showcasing your expertise and problem solving abilities projects provide hands-on experience Bridging the Gap between Theory and real world application they show domain knowledge making you more appealing to employees in specific Industries projects enhance your confidence and prepare you to discuss real world challenges in interviews proceeding ahead the next step is about the portfolio for data analysts a portfolio is a testament that demonstrates your skill and expertise through real world projects showcasing your ability to analyze and interpret data effectively it provides tangible proof of your capabilities making you stand out to the employers additionally it highlights your domain knowledge and problem solving skills giving you a Competitive Edge during job applications and interviews last but not the least data analyst internships internships provide hands-on experience with real world D sets tools and workflows Bridging the Gap between Theory knowledge and practical application they offer exposure to Industry practices helping you understand how data is used to drive decisions internships also build you Professional Network enhance your resume and improve chances of securing a full-time data analy role so now we enter the demo inventory in Microsoft Excel so we will be using Microsoft Excel to create a sheet of the employees in a company so basically an employee in a company has employee ID name and designation salary etc etc so we will be trying to create the same table using Microsoft Excel but before that let us understand the fundamentals of Microsoft Excel through the the Practical demo first so I have started my Microsoft Excel and this is how the homepage of Microsoft Excel looks like so you have a blank workbook over here if you want to create a new workbook you can select new Option so Excel will provide you with various variety of sheets you can see money in Excel adjustable meeting agenda streaming showers small business cash flow and many more if you’re not able to find what you’re looking for then you always have an option of selecting the particular type of sheet what you’re looking for so you have various options if it’s business if it’s personal if it’s planners and trackers list budgets charts etc etc so let’s imagine that you wanted something from business so just by clicking at business option the Excel will load a variety of sheets related to business options so this might take a while so you can see that the Excel is loading few types of sheets so you can see that Excel has provided us with some online varieties of sheets for example any calendar business expenses Channel marketing budget budget sumary report blue product list etc etc you can see construction proposal Eno you name it Excel has got it so Excel will provide you with some variety of options based on your requirement now for this session let’s get started with your blank workbook which looks something like this since this tutorial is based on the fundamentals we’ll go with the blank workbook now over here you can see the toolbar that we discussed earlier that has the file home insert draw page layout formulas data review View and help so this is the toolbar and under the toolbar I have selected home and you can see this is the particular ribbon what we discussed about this particular ribbon belongs to homepage and when you select file option you’ll get back to home and if you select insert option you’ll have another different ribbon with different groups etc etc so every particular tool has different ribbons in them and remember the extra options that we discussed when you press over this Arrow key this is it so when you press the arrow key you’ll have few more settings which cannot be fit in this this particular section of groups so you can have some variety of options over here of changing the font changing some effects to the text font size and font style etc etc apart from this we have also discussed about the cells in every sheet so this particular cell has an address so you can see the address over here which is B3 so B happens to be the column name and three happens to be the row name now we also had a discussion about the sheet tracker right now we just have one sheet if you want multiple sheets you can just feel free to select on the plus option which will always create you some extra sheets and you can navigate through sheets just by pressing on the sheet name and when you get back to the bottom right corner you have an option of increasing and decreasing the cell size or the sheet size now let’s keep it default with 100% now these are the few fundamentals that you need to keep in mind before getting started with Microsoft Excel now that we know the fundamentals of Microsoft Excel let’s get started with a practical session which is about the employees details in a company now let’s select this particular cell and let’s type in employ details yeah we have the cell now an employee details table will have the information related to employees so the information will be about about name it will be about employee number it will be the designation and maybe salary and maybe blood group as well and uh let’s take another one which is phone number yeah so so far so good and uh you can see that we have some problem with this particular column the designation the name uh the the name of the designation is practically good but it is not visible so when you uh when you’re not on that particular cell you can see that the name is incomplete over here so you can always fix that you can just you know manually change the size of the row or cell or you also feel free to you know double click on that cell which will automatically you know set the size of that particular cell and same goes to the blood group just let’s try to double click on that and same goes to phone number great so you can see that the employees details are just confined to the first two cells it’s supposed to be somewhere in the middle right so no problem we can do that as well we can select all the cells and we have an option of merging them you can just select this one which will help you with merging and centering that particular data to the center part so that’s how we do it now let’s get started by adding the names of the employees uh let’s add the names Joe John uh Mary Mark Susan and then Jennifer let’s type in Mike let’s type in Tim Jeff Jeffrey yeah we have a couple of employees now let’s type in the employee numbers yeah we have the employee numbers now let’s type in the designation okay let’s choose uh Joe to be the CEO of the company and John as the software developer and Mary as tester Mark and finance Susan also in finance and Jennifer in testing and mik in uh marketing same goes for Tim and again Jeffrey into software development and uh Ming into testing again now let’s click on C so that it gets you know resized according to the length of the text now it’s done so let’s get into salary uh $10,000 and $115,000 $119,000 let’s increase the salary of a CEO so let’s keep it $1 lakh and finance again 20,000 so yeah the salaries are allocated again the blood group yeah we have the blood groups now let’s type in the mobile numbers for yeah now we have typed in some random mobile numbers as well so uh yeah this is how you can add in some data into your table and now let us imagine that you forgot to add or remove a column so let’s imagine that we wanted to add a serial number as well but somehow we forgot to add it now you can always add a new row or column for example here we wanted to add a new column so we just have to right click on a select the insert option here we have a new row now now let’s type in serial number and let’s type one now can you see the small box option over here if you just drag it you can you know copy paste all those over here and now let’s right click and fill series now we have the employee number starting from 1 to 10 that’s how you do it and apart from this you you can also uh you know change the font of the entire row you can change the font to say uh aroni and you can always also change the font and same goes to the employee table you can select it bold it and you can also increase the size and again select a color for the text maybe a different color green would be better and and uh you can also select the entire cells and align them to the center looks more good and you can select or double click the row names so you’ll have the proper spacing between all the rows and columns so we have double click on the column right yeah so basically that’s how you make things happen now let’s save this so I’d like to go to the save option and uh EMP data let me save this in my local location and just save it’s done so that’s how you work on your Excel file with some basic data and to learn more don’t forget to get subscribed to Simply learns YouTube channel and don’t forget to hit that Bell icon to stay updated so you are the first person to get an update on any technology not just Excel now let’s get back to the Practical mode and now we are on our Excel spreadsheet so here here we have some text boxes on the column A and on column B we have lower and upper okay so um we have a mix of uh uppercase and lower case in our text so first we’ll try to convert them to lower case and then we’ll try to convert the entire text into uppercase so for that you need to press on equal symbol and select the lower formula tap and you selected the function and now click on the cell A3 that’s your select press and press on okay now all the letters are converted to low case so we had J in the uppercase which is converted to low case now all you can do is drag the formula to all the cells and it will be applied to all the cells right now let’s similarly try to convert into uppercase and tab space and there you go you have selected the formula now the cell address press enter and drag the same address I mean drag the same formula to all the cell addresses and there you go all the cells are converted to uppercase now that’s how you convert the cells or data in Excel to uppercase or lowercase in Excel now we are on the Excel spreadsheet now here we have some sales data based on a store now what we going to do is we going to add some multiple rows or a single Row in this particular data so here you can see the region wise category Wise statewise subcategory Wise and the sales and quantities right now let us imagine that you must have to add a sale data here right so let us imagine that on the row 7th you were supposed to add some detail for example some technology related sale happened on that day and you missed out to add it right so how do you create a new rule now so for example if multiple sales happened on the same day like 3 to four and you missed out them so how do I add three to four rows in between the ex testing data right so don’t worry about it it’s completely simple all you have to do is select the row and right click and press on the option insert now this will insert one single row if you wanted to add one single uh row or you know toule and if you wanted to add multiple rows for example you wanted to add three rows Al together then it’s also simple all you have to do is select three rows and right click and press on insert and then you have three rows so there you go so that’s how you add multiple rows in a Excel spreadsheet or that’s how you add one single Row in an Excel spreadsheet now we have started our Excel worksheet and here you can see we have employee details on our worksheet now all of a sudden uh you wanted to add employee second name as well or a last name right so you are a beginner and you don’t know how to add a column or you know you might be a little ambiguous right so instead of using this simple step you might end up creating a whole new sheet or maybe other approaches as well which are timec consuming so let me give you this simple step all you have to do is select the column so here you wanted to add a last name right so B is your column with the first name and here you wanted to add a second name or the last name which is in between the columns B and C so remember that Excel adds a column always towards the left side of a column so here if I if you wanted to add a column next to V then you want to select the column C and right click and select the insert option so that it can be added in between B and C which is adjacent to B so let’s look at it right so you have added the next uh column or a new column right next to the column V and it’s in between the designation and employee name now you can add your you know second name so that’s how you create a new column in Excel now in case if you wanted to you know create multiple columns all together so uh here we have or here we needed a second name also here you have a designation and you wanted to add another column which you know assigns managers to the employees right so let’s delete it uh Delete the second column and let me explain you how what I want to do so here you wanted to add the second name of the employee and also the manager of these employees right so here you wanted to add two columns Al together right uh and now you might be wondering could I add two columns together or will it work only for the one column thing right no it it works for two columns and also more than two columns all together so you wanted to add two columns here right so select the two columns you you can select or you can click on the column see and hold that left key and drag it along the right side Okay so here I have selected two columns and here it’s three right so you can see here uh it’s 1 48 5 6 7 6 are cross 3C that means you have selected three columns if I navigate on the four you can see we have selected four columns right now right click and select on insert and you’ll have four columns in between employee name and designation now you might have to add your second name man man name manager employee ID you know and the department everything or you can add anything or any number of columns in between the existing columns now we are on our Excel spreadsheet now you might want to you know add uh some extension to your data since we have sales here you might want to add the dollar logo right so if you have like five to 10 rows then it’s easy but if you have multiple rows then it might be a little time consuming in such scenarios you might want to select the entire column right so how do you do that in a shortest method so there are multiple methods to do it so the easiest one the first and the easiest one is clicking on the column number or column name so here we have the column name that is e and if you click on it the entire column is selected and here we have numbers so let us imagine that you wanted to select the row number two click on number two and you have all the rows I mean the entire row selected all the cells are selected right so this is one way and again there is another way where you can just you know uh click on the first table header and press control spacebar so the combination key is control spacebar for columns and if you want to select the entire row it is shift space bar so this is the method two and another method so you might have a doubt here right so when you click on the column name or when you click on the row number the entire row or entire column gets selected right and you wanted to select only the cells which have data so we have another way for that so you can select the cell now hold the control and shift key and press the lower Arrow key to select the entire column with cells having data so there you go you have selected all the cells in one single column with only data and all the cells which do not have data are not selected same applies to rows as well control shift right arrow key or left Arrow key based on your rows and all the rows with data will be selected I mean all the celles in a row are selected not the entire row and U coming back to the first question that is adding the dollar symbol so here we have General so go to the data type and add currency so you have rupees here so currently we are in India so we have rupees now what is the advantage of selecting the entire row when you don’t have any data in the 57th row or the next cell right I’ll show you now let us add the number 100 and press enter there you go let us add another number like th000 and press enter so the data formatting is automatically applied to all the cells so most of the time your cells or the data sheet will be varying you might have to add or remove elements or numbers right so in such scenarios this will be helpful now comparing two different columns or multiple columns happen Happ s to be an important job when you’re working in data analytics as you have to come up with some decisive decisions based on the data now if you had to do it manually then you might end up taking hours or even days based on the data set you’re working with but if I say that you can do it within minutes then it would be interesting to work with right now we’ll be doing the same now we’ll work on a sample data set right on my screen so here we have column 1 and column two now our job is to compare the column one 1 and column two and come up with the result now the first and the simplest way to do it is use the built-in conditional formatting which comes with Excel by default now all you have to do is select all the data and navigate to home and then the home go to Styles group and select conditional formatting and in conditional formatting you can see highlight cells so in that you can use duplicate values when you click on duplicate values a small pop-up window will come on your screen and here you have an option of choosing whether duplicate or unique so duplicate means you’re comparing the cells and you can see there are some duplicate cells which are present in column one are also present in column two now you can also check how to uh you know find out the unique values which are only present in column 1 but not in column two so you can just press unique and there you go you can find it now you can also try to you know change the color by filling with green for The Unique columns and duplicate cells with color red now this was the first method and you can also work out some different ones like uh you can just directly uh press equal to and select the cell and equals to and the next cell press enter and if there is a match it will give you true if there is no match then it will give you false now you can drag it down and see which all are matching and and which I learn not now you can also make some minute modifications to this so uh if in case you didn’t find the data then you can say not found so for that uh you can try if and inside brackets and then you can give the value as not found if true it’s found first you have to give the True Values so for true you can write it as found and in case if it’s not found then you can write write it down as not found there you go close the bracket press enter and there you go if there is a perfect match you will have found and if there is no match then you’ll get not found now so far we have discussed uh comparing two cells using conditional formatting and also by using equals to operator and trying to uh add some tweaks to the equals to Operator by involving with if operator and apart from those we also have another way to compare two columns in Excel so uh another way is using the lookup functions so we’ll use a simple V lookup function to compare both the cells so for that let’s type in equals to we look up time space and um select the cell you want to check for and then the range of elements you want to uh compare and then I’ll press F4 to log them now uh you want the data from column one and now you want the exact match so zero press enter so there you go so the elements which are present in column 1 and column 2 are been displayed here so but in case if the elements are not found you’ll get an error so let’s look at that simply drag the formula to all the cells and there you go so the elements which are matching will give you the proper result but the ones which are not matching will give you not applicable or error message this can be fixed we can make some minor tweaks to the same formula so uh we can add if error comma simply write an as not found and close the bracket so that should do so we have closed the bracket and press enter there you go now simply drag this and soon you can see the data which is having no match is shown as not found now uh there is another possibility okay let’s get back to another different sheet so this should work so uh we we already have the formula so let’s erase that first I’ll erase the whole data and even this one yeah now we have the clear column for so here you can see we have Ford India and here you can see we have just Ford and similarly here you have Mahendra and Mahendra and here you have Mahendra right so in some situations you might have to compare two different columns but the names might be a little different right so for example uh if you’re working with Oracle and if you’re working with Oracle America and you have in the first case is Oracle and then the second column is Oracle America then those are one and same but you have some minor text changes right just like here you have for India and here you have Ford so what if you had such kind of issues so you can also make some minor tweaks to it so using the same lookup formula you can add equals to we lookup and also the comparision cell which is this one and you’re not you’re not stopping them you’re trying to add the wild card here so the wild card is HRI which means if there is anything like uh if you get the comparison between the first cell and and the second cell which matches and if there is anything extra rather than the actual cell please try to consider it so that’s what we going to do so after entering entering the wild card symbol you’ll select the range of columns which you have to uh you know fetch the data from and then try to fix them using function key F4 you’re looking from the column number one and then you’re finding the exact match now you can close it and ENT now let’s try to drag it there you go so you have the data Mahindra and Mahindra hindai India Honda India so that’s how you try to use uh comparing cells in Excel now you can see I’m on my Excel worksheet and I have one table on my worksheet right now so you can you know transposing or you know converting rows to columns is a very simple task I’ll explain you in two different ways so the first way select all the sales that you have on your sheet and press on contrl C so it will give you the copy option and then you can also paste in the same sheet or if you want you can go to a whole new sheet and select the paste option over here but before selecting the actual paste option you can see a small drop- down icon click on that and navigate to paste special and in this you can see transpose option click on that or you know make sure that it’s checked and press okay now you can see all your columns are been converted into rows and all your rows are converted into columns so this was the first way and uh what is the second way you ask me so it’s really simple select one cell somewhere and you know you can or let’s create a new sheet as well so here you can you know write down the formula as transpose and select the array which you want to transpose so this is the array so transpose is basically an array function in Excel so once you are done with you know selecting your data press enter there you go so all your rows are now columns and all your columns are now the rows now on my spreadsheet you can see some data which is the sales data of quarterly basis and the four different zones that is northwest southeast so you can you know make things look better by hiding these columns and if you hide these columns it’s critical for the end user to identify which columns are exactly hidden right to make things a little easier for your end user you can select the columns and then go to the data option and in the data option click on the group option so this will group these columns and you will have the symbol of minimization which will help you you hide these columns automatically and unhide these columns automatically now let’s also try to group GH i j columns and there you go now similarly let’s also try to group the rows of North and Rose of West then you have the rose of South and row of East right now all these rows and columns are been grouped now all you can do is just click on the minimize button and those will be minimized similarly the rules right and to unhide them all you can do is click on the plus icon and they will be unhidden you can also try to ungroup the columns and rows all you have to do is select the columns and click on the ungroup option similarly the rows as well and that’s how you can group and ungroup rows and columns in Exel now we are on our spreadsheet and you can see I have some sample data on my spreadsheet and it does have some blank rows now how do I eliminate these blank rows so one step is you can you know select the entire row and try to right click and delete it again this sort of method might take us to get rid of all the blank rows and most of the time you might end up even selecting the rows with data in it right so if I want to select multiple rows then I’ll be selecting some rows with data as well which might be a little Troublesome in the future now let’s try to use the easier way now for that go to the find and select option select the go to special option and in that select the blanks option and press okay now hold control key and press minus key and you will have an option of deleting the cells now select the entire row now we are selecting the entire rows with blank data and press okay and the cells will be shifted now this was simple but let me show you another example so even here we have some blank rows but in between those blank rows for example will take cell 17 or cell d17 or row 17 we have some data testing and here in the employee ID we have some data in a26 and again in b39 we have some data that is first name right in such scenarios how do I eliminate data so we have a simple Logic for it so all we need to do is add another row which is to count the number of cells in the row now that can be count now here equals to the function is Count a let Tab and the cells will be from A2 to G2 press enter now you have seven so now we are basically calculating the number of cells so if you apply the same to the entire um data set let’s drag it and there you go so there are certain places where you find zero which are basically the empty columns right now let’s do some formatting if you need let’s try to add filters crl a contr d and now table will have filters and headers now here you can see the drop- down icon click on that now instead of select all what you can do is Select zero now you will be highlighted with all the rows which do not have any data select all those and press on delete or what you can do is the same way control minus there you go now clear the filter now all you have is the data without any kind of blank rows so all the rows that had some amount of data are retrained and all the data or all the cells or all the rows which do not have any data which are completely blank they have been eliminated so here you can see columns and rows so especially the fourth row and the column C right so uh currently we have data on our uh spreadsheet and it is exceeding the number of rows currently visible on our screen right so when you scroll down you can see that the header or the headers of all the columns are getting vanished or scrolled up along with the data right and you might want to keep that so that you’ll have reference to every single aspect of or every single cell data you’re referring to right so for that reason you might want to freeze this and also you might have a doubt what if uh even even I had this data in the column section right and what if I had to freeze that and you know when when you scroll this and keep that data uh set on the column as it is right so we can also do that let’s look at both of them so there is a simple process to do that all you have to do is select the cell or for which you want to uh you know set the or freeze the column adjacent to it or the row adjacent to it right so currently you want to let me expand it so currently I want to freeze this particular row right and this particular column so the cell I would be selecting is the first cell here that is D5 right so when I select this particular cell I can be able to freeze this particular row and this particular column so now you need to navigate to the toolbar and then select the view menu and inside view option you can see there is an option of free pains right so click on the drop down so you can see three different options as we discussed earlier we can either choose to freeze an entire row that is the second option or you can freeze the entire column that is the third option or you can freeze both that is the first option right freezing rows and columns so let’s select this one and see if our rows and columns are frozen or not right so now let’s scroll down and you can see our row is successfully Frozen there right and similarly scroll towards right and you can see our column has been successfully Frozen right so this is how you freeze rows and columns or you can freeze panes in Excel now here on my sheet you can see we have some numbers that is $10 or 10 .20 $22 $ 53.1 two $12 and $110 now the task is to convert these numbers into word format that is representing the numbers alphabetically right this might be a little curious and we also might end up searching for a predefined method which is not readily available in Excel but there is a way where you can create a function using Excel VBA or macros now again creating a macro is completely complex now I identifying the trouble Microsoft has already come up with a readily available macro code on their official website which will support the various versions of Microsoft Excel starting from Microsoft Excel 365 to all the way up to the older Excel version that is 2010 now you can scroll down and use this particular macro function which Microsoft has readily made us available and use this to create our own macro in Excel VBA now let’s get back to Excel and you can create a macro using the developer option now developer options will not be readily available in Microsoft Excel to activate developer option go to home and go to the options menu in the last and here go to customize ribbon and here in the second drop- down menu you can see developer option by default it will not be checked click on the check option to activate developer options and and press okay now you have your developer options ready click on developer options click on Visual Basic and here to insert a new macro click on the insert button click on module and a new macro window is readily available for you now control V to paste your code and your function is with the name number to text right now close the macro and here your function will be ready available equals to and the function name was number to text press tab to select the function and select the cell where you have the data close the function press enter now drag the same formula across all the cells and here you have the text converted from numbers so here we have $10.20 and you have $102 $22 and no cense $53 and2 $12 and no cents and $110 with no sense now that’s how you can convert numbers to words using the macro which is predefined for excel in the Microsoft website so for example uh let us imagine that you wanted to create one single cell for all the employees in your company which stes the first name second name or last name including the email IDs at one place right if you want to do so like let us let us let me show you how it looks like so let me copy this here then that’s the first name now it’s your second name along with the email ID now let us imagine that you wanted to store all the employees in the same way right so you can do this by using combine operation in Excel now all it takes is just a simple formula that is equals to and the first cell address that is A2 and you can use an ENT sign now you can use the next cell reference that as B2 and then colon and the last C address that is E2 now press enter so when you press enter or tab you will get this particular answer but this data is completely uh in a state where you can’t understand it right the first name last name and the email ID has got combined all together so you want to use some spaces right so all you need to do is just make a little modification to this particular existing data so you can press another ENT and include spaces and then you can separate the email ID and the name with some colon so now we have separated the first first two cells that is the first name and the last name with the space using the ense and then again we have used an ampers to include the colon and see that we have also included a space between the colon marks that it gets separated cleanly and now let’s try to press Tab and see the result so there you go the first name and the second name is separated by space and the email ID and the complete name is separated by a colon now you can use this to all the cells and there you go all the first name last name and the email IDs have been printed here so that’s how you use the combin operation in Excel and you can see on my screen we have the sales data of one single employee in the month of January okay so this is the sales data of John in January sales now let us imagine that we have this same person’s or same John’s data of sales of all the three months okay so here we have the sales data of John for January February and March and you wanted to Club all these three months and write it down as quarter 1 right so let us try doing it now you can see that uh only January is replaced as quarter 1 and February and March are still uh remaining the same so let us try to delete them so we have deleted them and I think now it looks like uh this is a sales data of one single quarter that is quarter 1 but again quarter one is under column B and anyone who looks at it feels like a this data is of January February and March and all the quarter 1 details are only present in V column but C and D are completely you know different from this one right so you don’t want that kind of an on your uh you know the one who presenting to you so in those situations you want to merge all these three columns and make sure that the quarter one is present somewhere in between the cells so that all the data looks relevant and uh it it defines that these data elements belong to Coto one right so there is an option in Excel to do that so select all the cells that you want to merge and going to home button and in home button get into the alignment group and select merge and center so you can do it directly also you have a couple of more options that is merge and center merge across merge cells and unmerge so we’ll go through it one by one so first we’ll go through merge and center so there you go the cells Cod merged and it has been aligned into center now again if your manager or anyone Superior to you wants this to be you know independent like they want it to be in terms of January February and March so that they can have access to it in month-wise so you want to unmar it back right how to do that now so the same menu and select unmerge and there you go you have your data back in the original form again all you have to do is you know rename a few celles there you go and you have it back right so in a few situations okay you can also add the pters so that it looks more relevant now um you know let’s try to merge this again and merg in Center yeah now again uh let us imagine that you are going through an a pral cycle and you also wanted to add some comments about the sales happening in your company uh regarding uh all the employees right so also we have that here now let me expand a little bit Yeah there so again let’s margin center now uh you wanted to you know uh you wanted to take a review of your level one level two and level three managers so you have all the three um rows here but you can see the cells are not merged and uh you wanted to merge every single row so merging and centering everything rowwise would be a little time consuming I mean three columns is okay but what if you had like uh you had to take a review from a couple of more managers like 5 to 10 right or imagine you wanted to write some random comments apart from review you wanted to write some random comments based on month-wise uh sales or something like that so it would be timec consuming right so apart from that you have another option where you you

know select all the sales and come over here and select the option of merge across and all the sales will be merged all together at once and you will be having those individual rows where you can write down your reviews like review one and so on review two right so this is how the option of merge across works and we already have been through the merge and center and merge is completely similar to merge and center so this is how merge and center merge cells and uh merge across and unmerge cells in Excel now there are multiple ways to add dat to Excel spreadsheet for example equals to today this is a short cut method and you can enter done you will have today state but again there is some problem with this kind of approach so today’s date is 4th of September 2022 now if you open the same spreadsheet after today that is tomorrow or day after tomorrow then you will have a concurrent date that is 5th of September or 6th of September right the date will always vary or get updated according to time now you don’t want to change that that or you don’t want that to be happening with employee state of joining right it should be stagnant it should not vary right so there is another shortcut way apart from using the datetime functions there is a keyboard shortcut where you can add date to excel that is control semicolon so this is the shortcut way to add date to your Excel spreadsheet and this particular date will not change this will remain the same constant date throughout the time now there is a chance where you might also have to add time to your spreadsheet that is date of joining and time of joining right so there is another simple shortcut where you can add time by just pressing three keys that is holding control holding shift and pressing semicolon then you’ll have the time so this is how you can add date to your Excel spreadsheet and add time to your Excel spreadsheet and this date and time will remain constant it will not vary like the 2D function that we have used here so you can see on my screen we are on the Excel spreadsheet and on my spreadsheet you can see dates in column A and different formats in column C D E and F respectively Now by default the data type or the data present in the a column will be considered as general and there are a few situations where even if you try to format the date in your format like you know the customized format you may not be able to do it because it’s still under the general data type so for that for being on the safer side what we will do is select the data and navigate to the data toolbar and in that you have the text to columns option press that and remember to have the delimited icon you know you might be having the dash as your icon or slash as your icon for the delimited thing and select that and next next and here you can see right it’s in general mode so you can press on date and DMI will be a date format that is date month and year now click on finish so it’s been formatted now now let’s copy the same data and paste it in all the four formats so that we’ll see the different formats that we can change to or customize to right so there you go let’s expand the columns a little bit now we have day month and year so now you might want to change a couple of things right for example you wanted to change okay let’s see the menu so the way is to select the sales and right click and select the format sales option and in here you can see the date function and in here you can see different types of modifications that you can do to your data right so you might want to also change your dates based on the location so right now we are in India and imagine if you wanted to you know change something based on us or if you if you’re having your client in us and he wants the dates in US format it you can also change that so here you can see English United States and press on that press okay and you can see it’s been changed to us format where you have years in the first place months in the second place and dates in the last place right and now let us imagine that uh your client does not want the dates all he needs is just months right you can also do that get back to the format sales option go to custom and here instead of uh you know uh month date and year all you can do is just write down month and year and select okay so you’ll have only month and year not the dates now your client is being a little more you know he wants a little more detail and he wants you to add a lot of granularity to your data which includes day time Etc everything right so you can also do that so the same way go to format sales custom and here I think it’s in date itself so let’s navigate a little yeah here so you have the day date month and year press okay so there you go right so that’s how you can do it and now let’s try a little bit more if we have a few more options pending so go to format cells and custom and you also have timings so so here you have date month year and timings press okay and there you have all the timings as well so since these dates are you know I created them just a few moments ago to keep it simple so I did not have to add the diamonds here so if you are Keen about adding the timings you can also do that for example if you wanted to add the timings of the employees logged in and logged out you can also do that using the same format and you can see now we are on our Excel spreadsheet and you can see we have a column of date and on the column B we have age now how do you calculate the age using the date of birth so this is completely simple all you have to use is the dated IF function or if you also call it as date diff function based on your choice we also have a specific entire tutorial based on Dat diff in Excel for further information that video will be linked in the description box below you can go through it or you can use the end screens and ey Cuts linked to this video to get back to the tutorial based on date diff in x now let’s calculate the age of these dates or these people with these date of births so all you have to do is type equals to and type dated F and open a bracket we need three parameters here that is the date of birth that is the first parameter now the second one is the today function because you’re calculating the age of these people as per today right so we have a today function in Excel press on Tab to select it and give a close bracket now comma and if you wanted to calculate the age in terms of days you have to um you know give d as the input yeah here it should be D as the input and don’t forget to use the double codes here and if you use the single codes there might be an error so use double codes if you want it in the day SP you can give days and if you want it in months you can give months for now we want in ear so we will be giving y as the third parameter and press enter there you go you have the age here in 26 years you can drag the same function and you have the ages here as you wanted right so this is how you calculate age in Excel and on my Excel spreadsheet let me expand it we have two different timings that is in and out so here we are considering a scenario where we are calculating the total number of us worked by an employee in an organization so the in time will be the time where the employee logged in and the out time will be the time when the employee logged out so here we have made some minor cell formatting so when you right click on any of the cell you can get back to the formatting sales option and in that option we have selected the AM PM so there is also another option of choosing the 24hour timing that is 1320 uh 13:30 so this represents the 24-hour format but since we are you know working on Office timings let’s keep it as a PM okay so there you go so we have our uh timings of in and out now to calculate the time difference between the in time and outtime so this particular calculation is completely simple all you have to do is press equals to select outtime minus select in time so there you go press enter and you have the total number of asks the m has been working in your organization so here also we have made some minor cell formatting so usually it comes out as Am Pm right but instead of that we have made a minor cell formatting we have navigated into time and we have selected the 24hour formatting so that we have just hours in our output so that’s how we have calculated the time difference between two in times and out times of an employee using Excel now Dax and Excel is a sophisticated formulas type language that comes in handy while working with relational data and extracting information via Dynamic aggregation functions Dax in Excel stands for data analysis Expressions Dax functions are completely familiar to the general and default functions that are available in Excel now Dax allows users to perform slightly escalated and advanced and custom calculations upon various data types like character data date time time intelligence functions and many more and in Dax there are a variety of functions such as Dax table valued functions Dax filter functions Dax aggregation functions time intelligence functions date and time information time logical parent and many more now in today’s session we will look into one such type of Dax function in Excel that is Dax date and time function in Excel now without further Ado let’s get into practical mode and we have started our Microsoft X Excel inside Excel we have opened a new blank worksheet Now navigate to data option in the toolbar and in that go to the power pivot window now we have entered the power pivot window and inside that you can see the option of get external data click on that and you can see a variety of options that is you can get the external data from a database you can get from web servers that is from data service and you have also other forms of data sources and existing connections for now we will take other forms of data that is a Microsoft Excel data which is in our local system select next now provide the location of your folder just browse and we will select Dax employee data open and there you go we have our data connected to our powerpint window click on next and there you go you have the selected table and views click finish and you can see the data getting imported into your power window there you go by default if you want to add any tax related functions into your powerp window you’ll have an external added column over here which looks something like this if there is not an external column you can also add the column it’s not a big trouble now we have some data here that is the employee ID employee name designation of the employee Department of the employee salary and joining date Etc right let’s expand this View and see what’s what’s more in it so this column is the date of birth and this column is the employ joining date right now we have so much of data now let us imagine that we want to calculate the retirement age of all the employees so now let’s rename the column to retirement date so we have our new column that is retirement date now we will make use of Dax datetime functions to calculate the age and find out the exact retirement date of that particular employee so let us imagine that every employee will retire after the age of 65 so we have our date of birth of every employee and the joining date of every employee now we’ll come up with a da de time function and calculate the age and then we will find the retirement date of that employee now every Dax function starts with the same method or the same way as the simple Excel default method starts that is by starting with an equals to and then we will find eate eate and and now our first parameter that is the start date that is the employee uh the date where the employee joined the organization so our sheet name is sheet one now our joining date is in the F7 column select F7 press tab to select it and comma Now how many months so each and every year will have 12 months so 12 months into the age that is 65 Star 65 and now you can close the uh function and press enter and then you’ll find the retirement date of that particular employee so there you go so we have the employee dates that is Employee Retirement dates for all the employees so the first one that is Jack has the retirement date of 19 February 2085 and similarly Jennifer has her retirement date at 15th of August 2084 so that’s how we use the Dax functions in Excel so this is one of the several Dax functions in Excel that is Dax date and time functions in Excel so you can see that I’ve got some data which is first name of the employee last name of the employee and phone number and let us assume that uh your manager has given you a task to identify all those uh employees which did not give an phone number so you wanted to identify them using a check box right like you will be providing a check for all the employees that we have received the phone numbers and you will not be checking the employees which did not give the phone number right so let’s try to do that so to include a checkbox you might want to get into the developer option but for few reasons Microsoft has disabled developer option by default to enable developer option all you have to do is just navigate anywhere on the ribbon here and right click and then you can see customize the ribbon option when you click into it you will be redirected into the ribbon option and here you can see the developer option on the right side right this one so by default you can see that your developer option is not enabled to enable it you have to check in it and there you go you have it now so press okay and you’ll have the developer option now go to the developer option and select the insert option and there you can see the checkbox now draw the checkbox any I’ll draw it over here and there you go you have the first check box right now if you want you can even customize this so carefully click it you can edit the text and and write it as done okay now you can even copy this to all the cells just select and drag and there you go now you can go ahead and check all the employees which you have received the phone numbers and you can eliminate the ones which did not provide you with the phone numbers that’s how you can do it and there’s also another option where you can use this to include it in a formula since this data is only of 25 rows you can manually check in the data and you can leave the data which is you have not received but what if you you had 2500 right then you might need formula so in such scenarios you can use a formula so how do you use that so for example uh if this particular box is checked then you will get a True Value here and if it’s not check you will have a false value then you can use that Boolean value to include in your formula right sounds interesting now let’s try to implement that you can right click the cell and you can find format control then you can see here you have an option called cell link here select the cell link and press okay so here you can see if you have checked this the value is true and if you uncheck this you can see the value turned false now you can use this particular cell reference for including this in a formula now let us also check how to include checkboxes on Google Sheets in Google sheet it’s really simple all you have to do is get into the insert option and you can see readily available check boox you don’t have to use any developer options over here and there you go you can just check now let us assume that you’re giving an important presentation and you’re also requested by your manager to add the Excel document that you have used to create that particular report which would be something like this when you click on it it will open a new Excel document or Excel Window with all the data in it right so how do we do that let’s look at the demo now let’s have a blank slide and let’s get back to the source where our Excel file is located that is in my documents so we are currently in my documents and we have the Excel file which we used for creating that particular report now if we copy and try to paste it on our Excel document it would look something like this and clearly it’s not visible and it’s not accessible right so instead of this there is another way where you can directly add the Excel document in the form of logo which is a rather simple idea all you have to do is just click on the insert option in the toolbar then navigate to the text group and here you will find the option called object click on the object and it will give you a new window where you can identify which type of document or object you want to add either create or create from file so we have the file in our local system so we’ll choose create from file browse and from browse we will go into the documents section where we have our Excel file click on the Excel file and click on okay now if you want the data or Excel file to be displayed in the form of an icon then click on the display as icon section and here you can change the icon so you can choose any one of the given options let’s choose this particular one and and click on okay another okay and there you go the icon will be now displayed on your Microsoft PowerPoint PPD which is completely clickable as the previous one whenever you click on this the Excel document will be opened so that’s how you add Excel document into Microsoft PowerPoint now we are on our Excel spreadsheet and here I’m trying to insert some images onto my spreadsheet so here we have company logos and Company brand names so since we already have the brand names what we need to add here is the brand logos here so how do I add such kind of an image into an Excel spreadsheet that you might be thinking that Excel spreadsheets are just for data not multimedia image of files right so no it’s not it’s completely wrong you can also add your images onto your Excel spreadsheets it’s completely simple so click anywhere on the Excel spreadsheet navigate to the insert button select the illustrations option from the addin group click on that and you know in the drop down you can see the pictures icon or the pictures uh button click on that and select from this device or if you have an online stock image you can take that or you can also check out from online pictures for now I’ll select the device this device and here I have some images the images what we need are simply learn and simply code logos press okay or insert so so here you have them now you can also adjust the size of the image using the small buttons here PR it over here and done so you might be wondering is it all done is there anything more to do uh or just adding an imag is done no most of the times when you create or you work with Excel spreadsheet you will not just you know add some data and add a relevant image to it most of the time you add some graphs or you most of the time you’ll add some charts uh to showcase the data dashboard right so it will be something like this so this is how you add the image or graph onto your uh uh dashboard and sometimes you might not have enough play to uh display your entire dashboard during those situations what you do is you try to hide the row or column so now let’s try to hide this particular row let us imagine that you wanted to show only uh two uh charts and there is no space for your third chart in such scenarios you might want to hide or remove that third chart okay so let’s try to hide it and see if gets if it gets hidden or not when you try to hide it you can see the column A has no data and uh the row number four has been hidden so we have three and five but what about the image it is still present right so if you want to make sure that the row also hides the image then you might have to do a little formatting with it so select the image go to picture format or you can also right click and directly navigate to picture format this opens up a set of options and here you might want to go to the uh third uh one which is picture format third and select the properties and here select the option of move and size with cells so when you select this when you try to hide this it will also I mean the graph of the image will also hide along with the R so that’s how you do it so how to insert PDF in Excel now there are multiple ways to insert a PDF into Excel so we will go through a couple of ways first is here let us imagine that we wanted to insert some PowerPoint presentation in PDF format into our Excel sheet so that it belongs to excel Basics now click on the cell where you want to add the PDF or just click any cell in the Excel spreadsheet then go to the option of insert in the toolbar then navigate to text option click on it and select object and here you can select create from file and then you can can browse and here you have your Excel Basics PDF in my documents click on that select insert so here you can just press okay and the PDF will be inserted now you can minimize the size of PDF to fit the cell there you go the PDF code successfully inserted into your Excel spreadsheet now let’s discuss about the second way now the second way is completely same the only difference is you can add some logo to your PDF so you can see it has been added in direct form of a PDF like what’s the first slide of the PPD but instead of that if you wanted to highlight it as an icon then you can select the display as icon button here and press okay now you don’t have to reformat the size of your PPD or PDF all you have to do is add the logo to your PDF and it will also include the title so this is another way of adding you know PDF to your Excel sheet now another way so a few times you don’t want the first page of the uh PDF to be visible or any kind of logo of that PDF reader to be visible on your spreadsheet sometimes all you want is some dedicated image or a dedicated logo right so this time let’s try to add a dedicated image to our PDF so go to insert again here you can see the illustrations option click on picture and from this Dev device so I will select the simply larns logo and now you have to resize the logo a little bit to fit the cell there you go you can uh you know click on the right click button and and select the option of Link now um select the existing file or web page option so if you are interested to learn more on Hy Link in Excel we have a dedicated tutorial on that please go through hyperlinks in Excel by simply learn which will explain you everything about hyperlinks in Excel how to insert them different types of documents to be inserted and how it works in real time for now let’s try to insert the existing web page and go to documents navigate to documents and inside this you have the Excel basic PDF click on okay and it has been added to your image so when you click on it it will open the PDF document attached to it so when you hover over to the cell you can see it will ask you a permission do you want to continue or not just click on this ignore the warning so you can see the PDF has been successfully open convert PDF into Excel now to do this let’s get back to the Practical mode and try to convert some PDF data into Excel now you can see the PDF document which I’m looking to convert from PD PDF to excel so this particular PDF document has a table so this is the statewise GST collections that happened during March of 2020 now we need to convert this tabula data from PDF format to excel format now we are on the Microsoft Excel now to initiate the process we might want to choose a blank workbook for this so now we are on the blank workbook and the complete sheet is empty now let’s go into the data option in the toolbar and in the data option of the toolbar we have the ribbon of get and transform data in this ribbon you can see get data option select that and you can see various options here from file from database from Azure from other sources Etc now we need the first option that is from file and in that we have a drop- down and in that drop down you might to select the PDF if you have a Json file you can also choose from a Json and if you have the data from XML you can choose that and even you can extract the data from text or CSV as well now we need the PDF option so select the PDF Now navigate where your file is existing so my file is on the desktop and now let me select the PDF document select import now Excel will automatically analyze the tab data in the PDF format and give you the results now according to excel there are multiple table formats table one table two so basically this table is one and the same so all the 29 states are fixed in one table itself but since the PDF is divided in sheets this particular document is considering the first table as a separate table and the table which is present in the third page as a separate table so we have table one table to and there are a few more tables which Excel is assuming that it might be table but it’s not and another table which is page number 002 it is a table and another one is right here now there is an option of selecting all the tables all together at once or you can select only one table which you want to select so if you select multiple items Excel will automatically give you an option of choosing your tables you can just take and select the tables you want or you can directly select the table you want on your Excel sheet so right now let’s try to select multiple tables so I’ll be selecting 1 2 4 and five and this particular one is not a table so I’m eliminating that now you might want to choose the load option so Excel is now loading the data now all the data has been successfully loaded now yeah it is giving us a notification that all the data has been successfully loaded and now just right click on it and here choose the option load to and here select table option and if you want the data to be uh you know loaded to a new worksheet you can choose that and select okay now you can see all the data is been successfully loaded in the form of tabula format in the new Excel sheet similarly let’s try to load another page in the table format new worksheet select okay and the third sheet now get ready to impress your boss by converting all the PDF data into Excel sheet just in a matter of few seconds with few steps and there you go all the four tables have been loaded successfully in the form of excel in just a few steps now this is how you convert PDF to excel that is how to add tick mark in Excel now on my spreadsheet you can see some employee data so they’ve been assigned a task and they want to update the task status as done and not done using symbolic statements that is tick mark and into marks now how to do that it is really simple we’ll discuss two different ways the first way is to do it by conditional formatting so click a sell on the task status go to conditional formatting click on the new rule yes of course we can use the icon settings but we want to automate it so click on the new rule right so here instead of two color scale select icon sets now go to the settings here we don’t want the third set sy so select no cell icon and here instead of percentage number formula let’s add just a simple number and the second one as well just a simple number now in the icon settings select tich Mark you have various types of them you know the circular Tech Mark and let’s select the generic tick mark without any outer circles and into here generic X Mark and now let’s set the values when the value is greater than zero it will be green and when the value is less than or equal to zero it will will be X and the reference value is zero and here also the reference value is zero everything is okay click on okay and done and here you cannot see the logos yet we need to add some formula here which is equals to if click on Tab to select the symbol and if Cell address C2 is equals to done then the value should be one else the value should be zero close the bracket enter right now you can see this particular logo here now drag the same formula it’s done now you can see we do have numbers you can eliminate those numbers as well just edit the rules and here you can see show icon only click okay and the numbers will be removed also edit the second one and there you go the numbers are gone and only the symbols remain now what is the second technique the second technique is available in the developer options you can activated by you know uh going into the options here go to file and here go to options and here go to Advanced customized ribon and in here on the right hand side you will get developer options click on the tick box and it will be enabled now go into developer options and click into insert menu click on the form controls or active X controls select the checkbox and now just place it over here you know you can edit this particular checkbox delete everything drag it as checkbox as well now you can drag the same cell across all the functions and you will have the checkbox as well now you can click on it and say if it’s done or not that is how to add Watermark to excel now on my sheet you can see some data so here we wanted to add some Watermark logo to your uh Excel spreadsheet so that it looks genu and work by you right so that’s the overall idea of adding a watermark now go to the insert window and in the insert window go to the text option click on that select header and footer once you select header and footer you can see something on your screen like this so in this box which is highlighted by a cursor is where you’re going to add the picture on my top in the menu bar you can see header and footer elements in this select the picture element and it will navigate to you to a different option window since we are adding the image from our local system select from file or if you are adding from your Bing or any search window you can also add that or one drive as well but now let’s go with from file it will directly navigate you to the pictures folder in your local system so here is my SARS logo click on it and select insert now you can see the images added in this format which is ENT and picture and you might wonder where is the picture it is actually present to view it click on any cell in the spreadsheet and there you go you can see it now you might be wondering the image is a little towards top and abnormally placed right so no worries you can always you know format your picture just press enter and use enter to move your picture towards the center of your data spreadsheet and also there is another option of format picture alog together here you can adjust the height and width of your image by you know increasing and decreasing width or increasing and decreasing height using the arrow marks also works and apart from this there is another option of picture formatting where you can choose your image to be washing out black and white gray scale or anything so currently I’m going with automatic which will automatically adjust the brightness and you know everything for your image it looks perfectly fine so click on okay and there you go right so now this should be fine right now everything is done and everything is automatically saved if you are having that auto save option on your spreadsheet and let’s go back to the normal view from the header and footer view click on The View and go to normal you might be confused right where is the logo it vanish did I had to save it no it’s already saved everything is fine even the image is there but you cannot see it in normal view to see it click on file click on print then you can see the logo it will be present only on the printed Pages not on the normal view okay so that’s how you work with watermarks in Excel and that’s how you can add and customize your watermarks using Excel how to modify or increase cell size in Excel now most of you might probably want to increase just the cell SI you know just to increase the visibility of the text so one of the easiest way is just to press on the plus icon on the bottom right corner of your Excel spreadsheet so this will automatically I Ally increase the text size and you can see the text more clearly now apart from that if it’s just not that what you want to do you can also modify by hovering over to the line between two columns and right click which will give you the option of format cells or column width so either of these options will help you to maximize or minimize your column width similarly you can apply the same idea for your rows as well so you can either format the cells or modify the row height of your cell and this is another way and another simple way is to just hold that line and drag it so it improves your width of the column and another way is to just over onto that line and hold it and drag it to improvise or increase your width of the cell and same applies to your row so this is another way so apart from that there is another way that is format cells from this particular option in the home button you can select this and here you have the row height autofit row height column width autofit column width for example let us imagine that you wanted to you know just by mistake you U you increase the sell size and you wanted to restore it back to the original thing right so you can just click on the autoit height and click on the autoit column width there you go it happens in that way and now coming back to another s way let us imagine that you are given a lot of data and you are told to autoit all the rows and columns now we have already seen the format cell option where you will autof fit all the columns and width of the column and also the height of the rows Etc right but there is also a keyboard shortcut to do this so all you have to do is select a cell and press CR a to select all the cells in the spreadsheet and once all the cells are selected all you have to do is press hold ALT key and then release it then the combination of keys that is h o i so your column width has been now adjusted now the same formula or the same shortcut key with a small modification press and hold and release ALT key now h o and a to adjust the row height so this is the way where you can increase or decrease or modify or autofit all the cells in Excel now you can see that we have the First Column that is a column and the first set of that is text and all the other cells are numbers but as a whole Excel considers the whole column as a general data format so why are we discussing about this so to create a barcode in Excel you have to make sure that all the elements in the column are of Text data type so the first step is to convert this General data type to Text data type so you can do that by going into the data type and selecting text and now all the elements in your first column A are type text now the next step is to convert these elements into barcode now for that let’s create a new column called barcode now our new column that is barcode has been created now the next step would be is to check for the barcode font so the barcode font looks something like this but let me remind you the barcode font in Excel is not available by default don’t worry if it’s not available we can download it from open source so let’s go back to Google so on the Google you want to search uh for barcode font for Excel so the one that I would recommend is three of9 barcode font now you can download this font by just clicking on the download button over here now I’ve already downloaded this font on my local system let’s now try to install that now the three of9 barcode folder will come in the form of zip folder you have to unzip that and after unzipping you’ll get the setup file which looks something like this which is three of9 new select that that and you’ll be having the installer file over here you can install by selecting the install button over here so I have already installed it in my local system so it is readily available for me on my Microsoft Excel now we might want to create the barcode for this particular cell in A2 so let’s create that so to create a barcode we need to write in a formula that is equals to double codes star double codes and ENT symbol address of the cell that is A2 another erson symbol again double codes star symbol and double codes so you can either use this or instead of star you can use brackets as well so let’s try brackets now select enter now this will generate another type of code in your resultant cell now we will change the font for this particular resultant cell and we will get our barcode now you can just drag all the cells so that you can apply the formula to all the codes now I got all the codes over here now select all the cells get into the fonts and here select the barcode font and there you go you have the barcode for all the numbers you have in your column A so that’s how you create barcode in Excel Excel flashfill is a feature of Microsoft Excel where Excel can sense a pattern in a cell and apply the same logic to extract the similar resultant pattern out of the remaining cells in a table might be a little confusing right so let us simplify it so let us imagine that you have a text in one of the cells in the Excel sheet and you want it to trim a part of that text for example let us imagine that there is an assembly an assembly where the car parts are assembled together to finish a car so each and every part has a code the serial number the product code and the code Etc right and you wanted to separate all those three if you wanted to do that you might want to use the trim function which might be a little tedious to apply to all the cells but what if if I say there is a simple key format using which you can fill all the columns in the Excel sheet within a fraction of second sounds interesting right so that’s exactly the flashfill function in Excel does now before we get started let me tell you guys that we have daily updates on multiple Technologies if you’re a tech geek in a continuous hunt for latest technological Trends then consider getting subscribed to our YouTube channel and don’t forget to hit that Bell icon to never miss an update from Simply now without further Ado let’s get started with the Flash Fill in Excel for that we might want to start the Excel to get in the Practical mode now we are on the Microsoft Excel and remember the example we discussed so this is a similar example now the first column in the sheet is the product detail so this product detail consists of the product code that is 112 next we have the product serial number that is 1 025 637 and lastly the assembly code that is as snx now we want to separate this product detail into three columns where we have the First Column to be storing the product code second one to be storing the product serial number and the last one to be storing the assembly code so now if you want to do that using trim function you might want to apply the trim function here and trim out the left part and again for the product serial number you might want to use certain function again which might go into a little complicated pattern So to avoid the complications and and decrease the time spent we might want to use the Flash Fill in Excel now let us help Excel about the pattern that we might want to generate so the pattern is one12 and the next one is 322 so now you can see that the text was highlighted that was the intimation from the Excel that it understood the pattern now going into the NEX Cel and holding the control key and pressing the e button will help us to fill the remaining cells in the column B so that’s how it is done and similarly let’s try out for the serial number for that the serial number is one2 5 637 now in the next cell we have 13 6582 now we can go to the third cell and press CR e for Windows and if you’re using a Mac operating system then you have to press command e and all the serial numbers will be filled so this will reduce the time in separating the pattern and filling the columns now let’s try the last column that is as SX which happens to the assembly code next we have FG and V now the shortcut method that is contr e and there you go now you might be wondering will it work only for numbers etc etc or the text which is properly aligned or separated using a hyphen no it can also be used for some random text which is like this so let us imagine that we have a text which is of length like 20 or 30 and you wanted to print only a part of it so here I’m going to print the alphabets from position fourth to position 8th so I’ve already tried the first one that is taking out the alphabets from fourth location to the eighth location or the pattern of the text that is i f e from Jennifer Lopez and in the next cell we have the numbers starting from the location 4 to 8 so that is 7767 and similarly we have the other cells consisting of the names of few cars that is Alpha Romeo Bugatti Von and next we have Superman Returns text so now let’s press the shortcut key that is contr e and make sure that all the remaining cells are filled so that’s how the Flash Fill works so the Flash Fill in Excel will reduce the time consumed to fill all the columns by separating the text in your main cell that is the column A which we have here in this example and it also reduces the complexity of using a trim function in Excel as hyperlinks in Excel now hyperlink is something which is clickable and when you click on it it will redirect you to a different web page to a different worksheet or a different location in your local system so there are a variety of options and we will explore all of them using Excel now creating a hyperlink is really simple we have multiple ways now let’s write some text on the Excel worksheet I’ll write Simply longan Now creating a hyperlink is really simple you have multiple ways the first simplest shortcut is clicking on the cell where you want to place the hyperlink and holding control key and pressing K now this will enable the hyperlink menu box or the dialog box this is the first way and let me close it now again we have selected the cell there is another option where you have to click on the insert menu on the toolbar and navigate to Links group click on the link option and you will again have the dialog box of the hyperlink and Excel and the Third Way is right click on the cell and you can see the link option in the last and this will enable the hyperlink option in Excel now let’s create a hyperlink the simplest way again control K now we have a variety of options that is existing file or web page place in this document create a new document and an email address so we will address all of these one at each time so first one existing file or a web page now you can select an existing PDF file or any file in your local system and hyperlink or create a hyperlink to the text or you can select a website link and place it over here and create it as a hyperlink Let’s uh explore both the options first let’s try to explore the web page option so since I’ve have written as simply learn let’s use the website link of Simply learn and create a hyperlink let me open Google new tab and let me type simply learn.com let me copy the hyperlink and now let’s get back to the Excel workbook now here let’s place the hyperlink now you can press okay and there you go the hyperlink has been successfully created now this link is clickable when you click on it it will redirect you to a new simply learns home web page right so this is how you create a hyperlink to a website now we shall explore another option that is using an existing file right let’s create a new text box here let’s name it as existing file and okay existing file should be good again the same you can either click uh you know right click and select hyperlink or control ke now let’s select existing file or web page option now here you can see navigate key press on that and let’s navigate our files let’s select all files you here remember to select all files okay by default it shows as office files now let’s explore our file option so let’s select uh fundamentals of computer programming option which is a PDF file press okay and there you go we have created a hyperlink so when I click on this you can directly navigate to an existing PDF file in your local system and it will be open as a web page click on it and you can see the PDF file now close now another thing when you navigate on to this you’ll see the lengthier HTTP uh address and same happens here right so if you’re a little uncomfortable watching this lengthier link you can also edit it you can choose the option of edit hyperlink and see the screen dip option click on it and here you can change the text display option and write it as click here to know more press okay again press okay and now if you navigate onto it instead of seeing a lenia hyper link what you can see is click here to know more okay I think I made a spelling mistake so I think I forgot an e somewhere over here yes click here to know more and press okay right so here you can see click here to know more let’s try this again over here so edit edit hyperlink screen tap option and instead of the lender text box or hyperlink you can write as click to open notes or PDF click okay and click another okay and you are done so instead of seeing that lengthier hyperlink you can see click here to open PDF right so so far we have explored two options that is existing file and existing web page right now let’s try to explore another option again uh hyper link right click hyperlink and here you have seen places in document all right so which is like uh okay let me show this to you instead of telling you so here what it is doing is you have the cell A5 and you want it to refer to A1 or any other cell in the same worksheet so you can do that right so now for your reference let me cancel it and let me create a new sheet and here navigate me to here right let me write as navigate me to here okay so now what we will do is so here we will create that navigate link from using the hyp link option place this in this document you can see the sheet to option and the cell reference is A1 where we have written navigate me to here so when I click this A5 cell okay let me also rename it write it as navigate cell navigating cell right now create that control K let me select sheet two and the S address is A1 press okay now what did uh what What’s the change right when you click on this you will be redirected to sheet to cell A1 navigate me to here right so this can be like a shortcut when you have multiple sheets like 100 sheets then you can uh you know have a a different column over here and uh add the navigation address to all those cell links you can just click on that cell and go into the different sheet and to the specific cell which you have given the address in our case I have given sheet to address cell A1 right so this is another trick now let’s get back to the hyperlink thing again uh control K and another option is create new document so you might have been through you know option of uh having what’s say some cheat sheets or uh clip on clip boats right so uh let us imagine that you’re working through uh a huge worksheet and uh you wanted to you know uh have a a track of everything and keep notes updating right so it might be a little complicated to understand so let me show it practically so let me write it down as clipboard or sticky note right okay I think this has a hyper letter us okay this can be used no worries back to uh hyperlink option again create new document now here you can create a variety of uh documents right so it can be a text document it can be an Excel doc document it can be a PDF document right for now we’ll create a text document okay uh we’ll name it as uh tracker. txt so this should create as a text document and the location can be anything so you can you know uh take it as a desktop documents download so let me take documents here and select okay so I’ll be having the tracker. txt located in the documents folder and uh you can also choose to edit the document later or edit the document now let us select edit the document now press okay and there you go so you have your text tracker here so let us imagine that we have worked on the Excel sheet and we wanted to write on us a sticky note uh so that we can remember what we have done on the Excel sheet so update one and uh update two now you can close it so ask for a save option save it and done and let us imagine that you did something else and you also updated something else on the sticky note I mean Excel sheet and you wanted to update that on your sticky note so click on it and you’ll see a minor notice over here from Microsoft Excel based on potential security concerns you can select yes and you’ll be having access to your text document again and write down your update again here update three what you have written right the latest update what you have and you can save it and close so that’s how you keep track of your sticky note and you’ll have all your updates right now getting back to the hyperlinks again uh the last one is email address so you can also try to add uh okay let’s imagine that you’re working with a colleague and every time you make an update in your Excel sheet or anything and you wanted to send him out an email right so it would be a little timec consuming that you open your email and uh compose something and send it over here but what if you had a one single click and access to the email compose option right that can be done so let us write down email c b me with the spelling so again the control K and hyperlink select email option and you can write down your email which can be anything so you can write down your friend’s email address so I’m just writing down some random email here friend gmail.com and can write the subject about update and press okay this will navigate you to the Gmail option or the mailing address options click on it and you’ll have a variety of mailing options Outlook Office 365 Yahoo iCloud Google Etc so you can select any one of those since we have written as gmail.com we’ll navigate to Gmail and all you have to do is login you know all the formalities and you’re good to go with emailing so let’s skip this for now so you you know how to do the rest parts so so far we have uh you know covered all the hyperlink options in Excel that is existing file or a web page place this in the current executing worksheet or document creating a new document for your update thing and uh also including the email right so so far we have covered everything around hyperlink and Excel and if you have anything to know more about or if you feel that we have missed out anything important regarding hyperlink in Excel you can feel free to let us know round by formula in Excel now for this particular tutorial we will be using the student data set now let’s get back to the Practical mode and start our Microsoft Excel now we are in the Microsoft Excel and as you can see on my sheet okay let me expand this so as you can see on my screen we have the data set belonging to students so we have 10 students and every one of them has name role number class blood group and marks Etc and at the end we have the percentage and as you can see we have the percentage in terms of float values and we have a lot of decimal values like eight and above so what if you wanted to just have one or two digits after the actual percentage like 80.6 or 8.66 right it would be a little bit more or good to read right so that’s what a roundoff actually means so now let’s work on having rounded off values for the percentage now let’s create a new column let’s name it as um round of percentage great so to actually perform the roundoff uh formula we do have a pre method for that for that you just have to type in equals to round and there you go we have round up and round down so both of them perform the same operation let’s select a round up and this is the m column and the row number is three so we’ll have to press M3 and the number of values after the decimal point for now let’s select um one and there you go press enter and the value should be rounded off now 80. 66 is being rounded off to 80.7 now when you drag the cell to the all the rules then you can see all the values will be rounded off here you can see 75.1 16 has been rounded off to 75.2 and 82.3 3 has been rounded off to 82.4 so we end up with having rounded off so first we will understand what exactly is standard deviation so standard deviation is a calculated square of variance now what is variance okay nothing to worry let us also understand what is variance now the next part variance so what is variance variance is a measure of variability it is calculated by taking the average of squared deviation from the mean now what are deviations so slowly you can understand that we’re getting into the topic of statistics and graphs so uh before getting deep into it let’s understand what is deviation so the deviation is a measure that is used to find the difference between the observed value and the expected value of a variable in simple terms deviation is the distance from the center point so for example when you are going through a graph so you will be expecting some value right and if you get some difference that is above or below the expected point that is called the devision what is the difference between the expected point and the obtained point so that is the deviation now next is the observed value so the observed value is the value that you get in real time unlike the predicted value so now you might be thinking to calculate standard deviation we might need a few more parameters and you’re exactly right so to calculate standard deviation in Excel you need variance and then you need deviation and then you need mean right so all these parameters are supposed to be calculated first and then you will be having the final formula to calculate standard TV now that we understood the theoretical and formula based explanation about standard deviation it’s time we calculate the standard deviation using one of the most popular business intelligence tool that is Microsoft Excel so let’s get back to the Practical mode so now we are on the Practical mode and we have some sample data on my screen right now let me expand it a little bit yeah there you go so as discussed before to calculate standard deviation we might require the mean variance deviation and deviation squared and then we can calculate the standard deviation so let’s go step by step so the first one is calculating sum right right so to calculate average we might need some of all the scores so we have the index values that is 1 to 10 and scores of each index value that is 1 to 10 right now let’s calculate the sum of all values here press tab to select the function select and drag these cells press enter and then you have the scores now you want number of indexes so clearly you can see we have 10 but still let’s count them C N tab space to select and and select the number of cells press enter and you have count now what’s the mean so mean is simply the average of all the numbers right so you can either divide the sum by count or you can simply use the average function so let’s try to use the average function so that we also have an idea of how the average function Works press tab to selected and select all the cells press enter now you have the average or mean value now we have the mean value and now after finding the mean value we are supposed to find out the deviation so remember the deviation that is the difference between the obtained value and the predicted value right so the obtained value is this one which is here in C2 and the predicted value is this one that is 82.6 that’s our mean right according to formula we supposed to eliminate the value of obtained minus the mean right so select uh the cell equals to C2 minus the obtained value that is mean now press F4 to freeze the value and now press enter so that you can freeze the value and drag the formula across all the sets now you have the deviation right now the next step is to find the sum of all the deviation numbers so either you can apply the sum formula to all these numbers or you can just drag this cell over here and the formula will be automatically copied now similarly the count function to count all the values that us drag it and you’ll have it over here right now the next step is to find out the square deviations or the square of the deviations which is really simple all you have to do is equals to select the cell and uh see that small hat kind of logo on the number six use that now into two press enter you have the square similarly drag the same formula across all the cells and you’ll have your squared numbers similarly drag this summation function over here so you’ll have the sum of this and the count number as well now comes the final formula now we have the mean value that is over here let’s color it and we have the variation Square now that is which is this one let’s color it in a different shape and we have deviation as well let’s color it in a different shap now we need to find the variance and after we find the variance the last step is to count the standard deviation or calculate the standard deviation so what is the formula to calculate the variance so for variance you need the sum of deviation Square divided by total number of values minus 1 press enter and that’s your variance now the standard deviation so the standard deviation is really simple you need to calculate the variance to the power of5 and that’s your standard deviation so that’s how you calculate standard deviation in Excel I hope all the formulas and the explanation was clear so you can see that we have got started with Microsoft Excel and on the left hand side we have a simple table with all the teams in an IT industry starting from it admin testing development to client consultant support we have got everything in this particular table now our main idea is to find out the index of these particular elements for example if you wanted to find the index of the element marketing then how could you do it so here let’s try to use the match function in Excel for that we want look up value and position so on the right hand side you can see that I’ve created two separate columns as lookup value and positions so in the lookup value column we will be inserting the value of which you want to find the index now for example let us consider that we want find the index value of Team marketing so I’ll be writing Marketing in this particular lookup value now how to find the index value of the element marketing for that we will be using the match function in Excel now after writing the match function you can see that it is asking for three different parameters so the first one is the lookup value second is the lookup array and lastly we have match type so lookup value is the value of which you are trying to find the index that is marketing this particular cell so we have selected the lookup value which is the first one next we have to select the lookup array that is from which set of elements you want to find the index so the set of elements are this it admin testing the column which we have created the the a column now we have selected the lookup array and lastly the match type is it you’re looking for less than or is it you’re looking for exact match or is it greater than match so for now I want exact match so I will be selecting the exact match that is zero now there you go you have the exact index of the element that is five now we have selected all the 10 teams starting from it1 admin 2 testing three development for marketing five so that’s how you find the index of a selected element in Excel now we just have like 10 elements so we have got the uh writing of the elements or you know uh choosing the elements in a easy way but what if if you had like 100 elements right could be a little different okay so let me put it simple now you wanted to find the the index value of Finance so right now we have marketing and you wanted to type in finance and you missed out a letter A okay now you’re not finding the right index to avoid such problems you can always take the help of data validation in Excel that is using the list in data validation in Excel you can see a small drop- down icon here right you can choose that and here you can see all the tees that we have created in the left column right so here I can scroll down and choose the finance and there you go I have the index value okay again we need to copy paste the same match function in Excel over here equals to match look up value look up array and exact match so there you go that’s how you make use of data validation in Excel and using the list you can comprehend all the list elements in this particular column into the list of data validation and you can choose the team whichever you want to find the index for so this is how you can make use of match function in Excel or index match function in Excel to sort data in Excel so on my spread sheeet you can see some employee data and on the column f and g you can see employee date of birth and employee date of joining for example you wanted to sort the employee data in the form of earliest joining employee and the latest joining employee right that is who is the employee who joined first to this company and who is the employee who joined last to this company so for that you just need to select the column of date so let’s select both the columns and go to home and check or verify if the data type is date or not so generally the data type will be set to General by default by Excel so we need to make sure that we have the proper data type which is State now that we have the proper data type select the entire column and go to the data option and here select the sort option and in the sort option select the expand selection click on sort and here sort by employee data joining and oldest to newest that’s what we wanted the oldest employee or the you can also set it to the newest employee to oldest according to your requirement but we’ll go to oldest to newest according to the case study right now just click on okay and that should be done so Emily who’s a manager is the oldest employee who joined the company and Chris who is A traine in it support is the latest employee who joined the company now that’s how you sort date in now on my screen you can see the sales of four quarters from different regions that is east west south north and Central now you might want to calculate the sum of sales happened from all the regions in q1 or you might want to calculate the sum of sales happened in one region of all the four quarters that is either you want to calculate the sum of all the regions from quarter 1 or you might want to calculate the sum of all the quarters in one region right so to do this you have some simple functions in Excel so you might say me you have some function Etc right

for that you might want to go into the you know equals to mode and fetch some option and subtotal or some you have to select the function from here but what if I tell you that there is one simple easy shortcut where you just have to make one single click and you’ll have all the Su right so that seems interesting so on the top in the home bar select home and in on the top right corner you have the editing group in editing group you have aggregation function that is summation so you have different aggregations here some average count numbers maximum minimum more functions here you might want to select the sum and you can get all the sumission numbers here so I’ll select one cell so the second query where we wanted to calculate the sum of all the sales happened in each region with all the quarters included that is this one C2 to F2 right so let us select G2 and select the auto sum option and here it will automatically select the range for you that is C2 to FS2 if you want to change it can also you know change it like minimize the number if you just wanted to calculate the sum of three quarters you can do that so now we want four quarters so select enter and there you go you have all the sales of all the four quarters of each east region now if you simply drag it you will have the sum of all the four quarters of all different regions now let us calculate the summation of q1 of all the regions that is this one Select Auto Sun and it will automatically select all the cells for you that is from C2 to C6 right press enter and you’ll have the summation similarly you can you know drag it and you have the numbers here of all the Q2 sales of all the regions Q3 sales of all region and Q4 sales of all region now let us try to change the color that you can have a reference that is it’s different it’s it’s a total sum or right you just have a reference to identify it now similarly to this one as well so that’s how you implement Auto sum in Excel now we are on the Excel spreadsheet so you can see that I have five different sheets of the same data so why do we have that so I’ll be explaining you how to sort data for multiple parameters so firstly we will try to sort data in the form of numbers right so let us imagine that this data is being shared with you by your manager and he wants you to sort this data based on the salary numbers so so he wants you to arrange the data in the form of ascending order or descending order maybe which will help him find the employee with the highest salary right so how could you do that so it’s really simple you could sort the entire data just within a few clicks so how would you do that so since you’re focusing on salary select any sell from the salary column only right select this particular column and select any sell in the salary column get into the s filter options and here select this sort of arrangement you need that is largest to smallest or the smallest to largest since the problem statement was to find the highest salary click on largest to smallest and there you go so you have Tony and the designation is senior and he works in it support and he draws the highest salary of 80,000 right and there’s also another one which is Peppa and she works for the analytics team and now the next sheet let’s get into the sheet two and this time let us imagine that you wanted to you know uh arrange or sort the data based on the employe date of joining or date of birth right again if you wanted to arrange the data in which you find the youngest employee or the oldest employee of the organization you can do that click on any cell in the date of birth column and go back to the sort and filter and here you will be seeing the options sort oldest to the newest or the sort the data from newest to the oldest so since we want the oldest employee select oldest to newest and there you go so the oldest employee is Alfred who is an associate designation employee and he works in the admin department and he’s drawing the salary of 25,000 so that’s how you can sort the data when you are trying to sort the data based on date wise so first we try to sort the data on the number wise so you can apply the same for your employee ID salary and if there is any possibility you can do that as well and if you want to apply the same sorting based on dates you can do that as well using the Sorting function in the same way now let’s get back onto the third sheet and here now uh single column wise is perfectly fine there is no issues with that now you want it to you know uh let us imagine that you have two columns okay let’s eliminate a few columns here maybe we can eliminate the employee ID and uh okay let’s keep a few columns so we’ll just keep employee name and employee salary okay so here we are trying to demonstrate if you are uh trying to sort the data using one cell in the column B will it maintain its relationship with the cell a okay uh that’s our query right so let’s see I’ll go a little detail so let us imagine that you wanted to sort this data based on highest salary okay so when you do that will it also impact the cells in the column A so it will basically impact but just uh it’s a query right any of you viewers might have that query will I uh if in case if I try to sort the data based on this will it affect the cells on the rest of the data set okay so in basically it will impact so I’ll try to you know sort the data based on ascending order so this is the smallest to largest and you can see uh the Tony and pepper so since I selected the cell in the column B it also impacted the change on the cells of column A so that’s how the Sorting works now we’ll get to a little Advanced um sorting techniques so here we try to I mean already we try to sort the data based on numbers based on alphabets based on U you know uh date date of birth right so I think we forgot the uh ascending or you know sorting based on alphabets let’s do that as well select any um cell in the column A and go to S filter try selecting a to z or okay let’s try to Z to A okay so here you can see the U names have been sorted based on the descending order from Zed to a right so so far we tried on alphabets so far we tried on numbers date of birth and a couple of more things so let’s dig a little deeper and try to sort based on colors right so for that you don’t uh you know find that uh extra setting here in the regular sortant filter so you might want to get into the data option and here you’ll find another sort function which is a little advaned so that’s how you do it so since we have colored in the cell or column of salary select that salary and we’re going with cell value so in the cell values section select the cell color and and here on the cell color options you’ll have green blue and yellow that’s what we have used in our um cells so let’s keep Green in the first position which is on top and press okay now you’ll see green has been sorted to the first position now yellow and blue are left out so why is that so because you didn’t provide it right so you can do what that as well I mean you can always add uh the setting to it right select any cell go to sort and and add a level and then again select the salary and sell values to cell colors and now the cell color in the second position would be blue and that will be on bottom and I can add another level the same salary the cell values will be cell color and uh cell yellow will be somewhere in between or bottom okay so based on hierarch key uh it will be selecting press okay and there you go so you have sell yellow and blue at the bottom and green at the top position as for your suggestions now we are on the last sheet so here in this last sheet we are going to you know um dig a little deeper into the advanced sorting methods so previously we tried to apply the advanc Sorting methods for colors now we’ll try to apply the advanced sorting methods based on the data set we have here I mean the data we have in our data set right so select the sort option and let’s add a few details right so firstly let’s sort the column employee ID okay so let’s have the smallest to largest or yeah now that would be good now let’s add another level where we will sort okay uh I think we will sort based on employee name that would be a little better so let’s try to uh sort it on employee name here and here will be employee salary okay now the sell values and this would be from a to zed and the salaries will be from smallest to largest so basically what we are trying to do is we are trying to sort the employee list based on employee names from A to Z so the employees name starting from a to zed will be ordered first and another subset of the Sorting will be done based on highest salaries that is smallest to highest so let us imagine that we have three employees with Nam starting from a and their salaries are 10,000 20,000 and 30,000 so how would it sort so it will sort basically uh in the alphabetical order first so first three names will be sorted and then it will also have another condition to sort the data we keeping the lowest salary on top and highest salary in the last right so uh this is how the algorithm works for sorting now let’s press okay and see the output so there you go the names are Alfred and you have the highest salary here smallest to highest so this is 25,000 next we have Banner Barnes and Ben so here you might be seeing why we have Ben in the third position despite he has a low salary and name starts with B right so here it is trying to work based on the alphabets in the order right so B A and B E it’s not just comparing the first letter it’s also comparing the following letters as well right so n comes first R comes later so B is pushed to the second position a comes first and E comes later so B A letters r pushed to the first position and Ben is pushed to the third position so that’s how it works right so accordingly the set for BA is created here 3540 next Ben 12 and next you have Bobby Brian Brock Chris clar right so that’s how the data has been organized and sorted based on multiple levels of parameters you provide for sorting so that’s how you use sorting in Excel slicers and filters in Excel so slicers in Excel are software filters used along with Excel tables or Excel pivot tables over a large amount of data not just filtering out data but slices also help you with an easy understanding of the information being extracted and displayed on the screen now Microsoft Excel slices are compatible with Windows and Mac and tou operating systems now let us understand how to implement slicers in Excel so for that we might want to get back to the Practical mode that is starting our Microsoft Excel now we are on our Excel sheet and as you can see on my screen there is some data available on the Excel spreadsheet and this table is not just any table this table from Microsoft Excel is been converted into an actual table as you know by default Excel considers all the data which has been inserted into the spreadsheet as a database and to implement this sense in Excel we might want to create or convert the format of database into a normal table for that you can select all your data and just press contrl T and that will allow you an option called convert the data into table now since this table is is already converted as a table we can directly start implementing or inserting slices into the spreadsheet now for that select all your data then going to the insert option and in the insert ribbon you can see the filters group and in the filters group select the option called slicer now you will be provided with multiple options since we have the columns employee ID employee name Zone designation Department salary employees date of birth and employees date of joining so we can choose any of the options available according to our columns and create the slices now let me select the first one that is Zone next designation department and let’s also select employee name now press okay and there you go we have our slices now let us try to rearrange these slices all you can do is just select and drag them up and done now let us imagine that we want to see or take a look at the employees who are working in the Easter Zone then we have all the information displayed on the screen who are working in the East Zone they are Jack Tony bner Fred Etc and their Department designation etc etc all on one single screen so this really helps you while you’re presenting your data in a presentation now for a change let’s try to select the department now if your client wants to select the data from only analytics Department then you might want to select on the analytics key on the department SL ISO and there you go you have an employee called Luke hops who works in the East Zone and his department is analytics and his designation is contract based and the salary he is getting is 65,000 now similarly uh you can see that we have only selected analytics and your client also wants data from itop now you can see that analytics is gone but what if you want both analytics and it support then you have an option called select multiple then you can select analytics and it support and if you want HR you can also do that and in the zone if you want West along with East then you can do the same east and west and you have all the employee details and in the designation let’s try to select U senior traine okay select multiple senior traine and manager so that’s how you do it so that’s how it’s done and that’s how you implement slicers in Excel to simplify the filtering options using slicers during a presentation it is really simple to add filters in Excel so we are on a practical mode right now so on my screen you can see an Excel spreadsheet of sales data so here you have various columns regions category state subcategory sales quantity and much more right so now let us imagine that we want to add filters on the region part so we have south west east Etc right so we want to you know let us imagine that you want to extract the data of only vest region and you wanted a filter so doing it manually could take a lot of time so using filters will be helpful now select one cell on the headers part and select the filter option in the data toolbar you can see the data option on the toolbar right so click on the data option and navigate to sort and filter uh group and in that select the option of filter now you can see the filters are been added to all the column headers region category state subcategory sales quantity right now we wanted the West category so when you see or when you click on the drop down icon you can see all the options are selected right the central east west south every everything right but now we just want West one so click on West and select okay there you go so you have everything from the west region now let’s imagine that you wanted to look into uh office supplies only or technology only right you can do the same with the technology ology and press okay and now you’ll have all the technology related sales in the west region right so that’s how you use filters in Excel or that’s how you add filters in Excel goalseek in Excel so for this tutorial we’ll be considering the students database now let’s get back to the Excel so now we are on the Excel sheet and you can see that in this particular Excel sheet we have some student details we have the serial numbers names role numbers class blood group and some subjects like math math science computer statistics social GK and the final marks obtained percentage and total marks right so let us imagine that uh a company has come for an interview so all these students are going to attend an interview and uh the minimum percentage to attend the interview will be like 75% so you can see that we have 75 here and all the students have got above 75 except for the one student which is Mike right so for Mike to attend the interview he needs 75 percentage or above so uh he can make some modifications in one of these subjects right so there is always an exam after the exam called as Improvement exam so if you can like to score some extra marks in the subjects which you have scored less so that you can make up to the percentage what you’re expecting you can do that so here in this particular sheet uh Mike has six subjects right and in subjects you can see he has scored 76 91 45 71 94 and 62 so out of these he have scored Less in one subject compared to all the subjects one subject is really low that is computers so what if he can give an improvement exam and increase his percentage to 75 right so that can be done so we can do some root Force methods like we can change the marks like 55 and then check this particular one so it’s getting 74 right so using the brute force method will be a little bit lengthy so you can do this because it is just a small uh table which has least number of data and you just have one single cell to modify so that can be done in small tables but what if you had some table with hundreds of rows or thousands of rows that’ll be time consuming right so for that we have some inbuilt functionality in Excel that is called goal seek in Excel so for now let’s eliminate the marks here so we have eliminated the marks and the upgraded percentage is 65 now we need the target as 75 okay so let’s uh write it as Mike’s Target right we need mic so mik new Target as 75 okay now to make sure that we need a Mark here which can get mic to 75 percentage we will use the data operation so here on the toolbar which has file home insert Etc we have one other option called as data so when you click on data from toolbar you’ll have the ribbon and in this ribbon we have various options so when you come into forecast group we have an option called what if analysis when you click on wtif analysis you’ll have a set of options out of which we have goal seek now for goal seek we need to select a table cell that is this particular table cell that is M9 so we need the value 75 here right so what is the cell that you need to change here for that you need to select this one and select this particular cell here right and now you can select okay now you can see that Excel has automatically run all the permutations and combinations and has come up with a number so that the overall percentage of mic will be 75% right so the expected marks that Mike should be getting in his computer’s Improvement exam should be equal to 56 or greater than 56 to get the the final Target at 75 so that he can attend the company’s interview so this is how we use goal set or goal seek in Excel we are on our Excel spreadsheet and here you can see I’m trying to create an calendar for the employees in the company where you might have to you know write down the day and month and year or week of your birth date or maybe your joining date or maybe also your last working day right this might be useful for all the employees to you know uh avoid them from writing it down manually so how do I create it so it takes a few simple steps all it takes is some data validation methods and also there is an exclusive video specifically made on data validation in Excel link to which is in the description box below or you can search it on our official YouTube channel now you can see that uh the word calendar is on the first cell that is A1 but we have four cells below it that is A3 B3 C3 and D3 so you might want to add this to all the cells right like may be in the middle so for that you can do the option of mergin Center also there is a tutorial on mergin Center about all the options available in this particular thing so you can go through that also and uh yeah we have done the first step now all we need is day month year and week so in a calendar or in a month you’ll have days from 28 29 30 or 31 days right so let’s create a list or the drop down menu for that so that whenever you click it right so whenever you click on that particular cell you will have the list of all the days available right so let’s get started with that let’s create a new sheet so why are we creating a new sheet you won’t want that all the numbers in your calendar sheet right over here right so for that so we are creating a new sheet and all the data will be available here so here let’s write down the days first and here the second number also you can use the option of Flash Fill so that you can you know uh reduce the effort here so you can see the flash full option over here all you need to do is select the sales and drag them down until you get your required dates right so let’s keep it till 31 days there you go you have the days so these will be your days and here now the next option was month right yeah month and year now using the same flash F option you will you know add the months into your sheet so this will be Sunday so Excel has this smart flash F option where you can just drag the data and everything will be filled according to your requirements so Sunday to Saturday now the next one right that is your month so same as the before process we’ll create January now you can use the flash Bill option and all the way up to December now the last one was the year so 1990 and 1991 so you can select the cells and Flash Fill Up to 2022 maybe yeah 2022 should be good enough now this is The Flash option you have here and also we have an exclusive tutorial on flashfill all together you can go through it for a detailed explanation as well now coming back to the original sheet so this is where you create your drop- down list right so select the cell where you want to add the drop down list navigate to data and then here is your data validation menu so we have a variety of data validation options over here there is an exclusive tutorial on that you can go through it for now we’ll look into the list option only because we want to create a drop down list right so here it will ask for source click on the source here the source bar right now navigate to sheet number two where we have the days options select the range so this will be your range and select okay also you can add some message here right what you can do is uh in case if there is an error or something right you don’t want that to be happening so all you need to do is uh write down and select from dropdown let from drop down only so this could be a message select from dropdown only the title is Select options or just options in case if there’s an error you can write down your title as invalid data and you can write down a messag as please select from drop down only so um in case of someone tries to write as 32 or 33 to check the Integrity of your data validation then they will encounter an error and an error message and then they must be understanding what exactly they try to do and if it’s correct or wrong right so this is to make sure that whatever the data you enter is correct and valid so okay and here you can see select from the drown list only options with with option list as title and let’s try to enter 32 right and when you press enter you will see an error so the error messages invalid data please try to select from drop down only so you can go for a retry and select the drop down right so let’s eliminate them and now select something from the drop down so let’s take it as maybe 10 right so this is how you cleared the day one now let’s try to do with the month same data validation option settings will be list and Source will be this one think I made a mistake here so let’s cancel this and go back to sheet 2 and rename this as our week yeah now coming back to the month again it will be a list and the source will be in sheet 2 navigate to the sheet 2 and select your range and input message the same options select from dropdown only and error alert title will be invalid data this one will be please select from dropdown only it’s okay and that’s done now let’s continue with your as well let’s quickly do the same it will be a list Source will be in sheet two this is your list press okay and lastly the week same process it will be a list Source will be in your sheet two input message options tile invalidator strong down only right so your drop down list is ready now so the month will be anything So currently we have me and year can be anything anywhere so let’s take it as 997 and week can be you know the adjacent week so what was 10th of May 1997 let’s check our calendars was a Saturday so it was a Saturday and that’s how you create drop down list in Excel and if you want you can also add borders to your calendar right so that’s how it’s done so what is data validation in Excel so it is a feature by Microsoft Excel where it can restrict data entry into certain cells by using data validation and it will prompt the users to enter valid data in the cells based on the rules and restrictions provided by the creator of that particular sheet now this would be little confusing to understand so to understand it in a much better way let’s get back to the practical way where we will start entering some data validation rules to our Excel sheet and try to enter data into it now we are on the Microsoft Excel and this particular sheet is based on employee ID employee name employee Department employee salary fiscal year and work timings of the employees now we will be applying some data validation rules to each and every column and try to enter data based on the rules we have entered now for the first one which is the employee ID we’ll enter rules based on the employee ID number so to apply the data validation you need to go into the data tab on the toolbar and inside the ribbon you can see data tools group and in the data tools group you have the option of data validation now select the entire column go to the data tools group select data validation option and you will have this particular popup menu and here you can see different types of options so since we are entering employee ID it would be a whole number so let us select whole number option and now here you can see the option of between not equal to equal to not between greater than less than Etc so let us select between and let us assume that your employee ID has five numbers and uh it should be between 10,000 to 11,000 so let us provide 10,000 and 11,000 now select okay and now the new rule has been applied so now the minimum value of each and every employee ID should be equal to or more more than 10,000 and less than 11,000 and it should have five digits now let’s try to enter a wrong employee ID that is just one there you go you can see that Microsoft Excel is not allowing you to include a wrong number it says this value does not match the data validation restrictions defined for this cell so now you can press retry and try to enter some number which is in between 10,000 to 11,000 now it is 10,901 and this will take the entry now let is assume that because I’m the creator of this sheet I know what should be entered here but what if I give this sheet to you and you’re the person who’s trying to enter the number and it shows the error and you don’t know what was the error right to avoid this kind of confusion what you can do is you can do some uh ways where you can provide the message to the user so that can be done by okay let’s select the sheet again and go to the data validation and here you have the same settings now here you have another option saying input message so before input message let us go to error alert now here the error title would be data entered is not valid please enter this is the error message please enter EMP ID between 10,000 to 11,000 press okay now when you try to enter the wrong number it will show that particular error alert message see data entered is not valid please enter employee ID between 10,000 to 11,000 now this is fine but how long this will be you know what if there is an option where you just hover over to this cell and it automatically tells you to enter the value between 10,000 to 11,000 without having to face the error yeah even that can be done so you can select the entire column go to data validation and here this is the input message this is where you can do that so here you can write the message name valid data please enter data between 10,000 to 11,000 now when you hover over to any cell in this particular column it will automatically show you this message where you can avoid all the errors just select okay see when you select any cell in this particular column it will automatically tell you please enter data between 10,000 to 11,000 so here you don’t have to face any errors right now let us try to enter the valid data 109 02 and it will take it as the correct value and again 1 903 now in case if you try to provide the wrong number it will show show the error see so that’s how it is now we have finished the whole number part now let’s get into the employee name where we have to provide uh the second type that is text length now let us imagine that uh in your company you’re trying to provide ID cards to your employees and you know that ID card is really small and inside that ID card you need to include the employee photograph and your company name employee idid blood group phone number address everything and also you need to include the name of the employee so what if there is an employee with very lengthy name like 30 characters 40 characters yeah in India it is really possible that you might have a lengthy name so what you can do is you can provide the text length where the text is limited to like 15 or 20 uh um characters so you can include that name in the ID card so you can do that by allowing the data validation criteria with text length uh minimum can be anything so minimum can be one and maximum here you can provide 15 and press okay okay minimum will change it to at least uh two and yeah let it be one so minimum is one and maximum is 15 characters and press okay and uh let us also provide the input message enter character type character data please enter valid name and error alert invalid data please enter valid data okay please enter characters less than 50 press okay now let us try to enter a random name okay uh we’ll enter characters more than 15 here qu z uh yeah it’s like 1 2 3 4 5 11 okay okay now this is more than 15 okay I think it’s not more than 15 let’s try to enter a little bit more characters yeah now we have entered more than 15 characters and it is showing please enter characters less than 15 so now we can retry and try to enter some valid name um now we have characters less than 50 so it will take as the proper name now let us try to enter another name I’m just entering some random data so another name maybe great now the next type of data validation is also done now let us get into to employee Department employee department is something really superb so I’ll tell you about it it’s actually a list now let us finish the other ones first that is employee salary physical year and work timings after that we’ll learn about uh the list one now let’s come into employee salary so salary is something where you have to include decimal points so now let us go to uh data validation and inside the values we have already dealt with whole number uh text length yeah now we’ll uh deal with employee salary that is decimal now minimum is okay what is uh minimum can be 1. 0 and maximum can be 1 lakh or let us put that as 10 LHS press okay okay not not just them enter valid salary okay now let’s change it to minimum is 10,000 so the employee minimum salary will be 10,000 and input enter valid salary enter salary between 10,000 to 10 lakhs let us include a comma here too now error alert invalid salary please enter between 10,000 to 10 lakhs press okay now the message and the data validation conditions are apply to this column now let us try to enter some invalid data first it will show the error now we need to enter the valid data yeah now it is taking the valid data let us provide 20,000 and this has 35,000 now the next one is fiscally let us imagine that we wanted to you know work on the employees for current working year that is 2020 to 2021 and or you can 2021 to 2022 not more than 2021 and not less than 2021 for that you can provide the year option as well so for that you need to select the entire column go to data validation settings and inside here you have an option of date so uh let us provide the date option as between and start date is 01/ 01/ 2021 and end date is 01 sl01 SL 2022 and input message let us provide data as current fiscal year Current financial year enter date between 20121 to 2022 let is call copy this and go to error alert error message will be S invalid date select okay now the error message and uh the data input message and the data validation rule has been applied for this column so let’s try to enter some date here you can enter uh 02 of February 2021 it will take as the correct data now let’s try to enter some wrong data which is apart from 2022 02 02 20 22 it will not take this it will throw error so that’s how it works now let us try to enter uh 2021 and this is March it will take it now another data 04 this time and 2021 so that’s how your uh date data validation will work now coming into the next type of data validation that is time so we have time here let us imagine that you are providing some work timings to your employees that should be from 9:00 a.m. to 5:00 p.m. not more than that so you want to keep your work life balanced for all your employees so you just want them to work between 9 to 5 and that should be fine and anything apart from that time should be invalid so you can do that by selecting in uh time option between it should be in between and the start time will be 09 0 0 and this should be uh 17 that is 5:00 p.m. in the evening and input message please enter time between 9 a.m. to okay 500 p.m this should be the input message now error alert invalid time error message okay now okay work timings now this should be okay we can do this as two columns actually let us cancel let us copy this and paste it here you can do it as login login timing and this should be okay this should be a log out so this should be okay so this will be considered as login and log out times now let us provide the login time this should be the right time and uh let’s try to provide wrong timings 08 now it will not take it it will throw as error so it’s working fine let us provide 10 now let us provide the log out time it should be below 5:00 p.m. so let us provide five it will take it okay let’s try to provide something just 1 minute less than five that is 59 okay there is some problem in this let’s check it okay it is taking uh three that is including seconds okay let’s provide seconds as well 05 0 0 0 0 okay still there is some problem okay we have entered four we should we are supposed to enter 24hour timing right 14 okay uh it should be 17 I think this will work yeah now we are following 24-hour timing here so let’s provide another timing that is 16 30 0 0 this will be valid and 1530 yes this is also valid now we have finished almost all types of uh data validation things that is we have finished with any value whole number decimal date timing test length and the last one is list so this is where things get interesting now let’s cancel this now select the employee column now if you’re running a company then definitely you’ll not have only one Department in it you might have multiple departments right so let us consider that you have a software development company so in that the basic departments will be software development team and software testing team so what you can do is you can provide a list so using that list you can just uh H over to that cell select the drop- down menu and inside that you can select the option so we will try to work something like that if we have selected the entire column selection okay yeah let us select the entire column again go to data validation the selection contains some cells without data validation settings do you want to extend data validation to the sales yes now let us provide the list option and here Source you can provide as developer and test press okay okay now input message select one select one error alert invalid data select from drop down only press okay now when you select the cell you can see small drop- down icon right so when you press it you will have developer and tester option so you can select developer for first one and for second one you can select uh tester right okay this is good for uh one or two options maybe three or even maybe like five but what if you have more departments okay let’s go to this uh second sheet where we have the department data so here we have like 14 departments no 15 departments or 15 employe type names so the first one is CEO second is developer tester quality analyst system analyst Finance human resource so so many options are there so you cannot keep on typing all of them right so here it is 15 what if you have like 25 like 50 departments right it will be tough so for this you have another option so let me select all this data and copy copy this from this sheet to our employee sheet let us paste it somewhere here let’s expand this okay now we have our uh list over here now let us remove the data validation from this column clear all okay now everything is cleared let’s select okay now let us erase this data as well now let us apply the list data validation again from scratch go to list now here we can select the source select this particular cell and drag it until here and it has been loaded now go to input message data options select one from the menu or the drop down copy error alert select only from the drop down menu invalid entry yeah now let’s select okay okay fine now you have the icon here you have all the provided options you can scroll down and select any one out of these you can select knowledge transfer for the first one and second one would be system analyist and the last one would be human resources now in the list everything is fine okay this is showing you the menu options and everything so but what if you provide this sheet to your new joiny or new employee in your company and by mistake he messes up something like deleting this okay so we have deleted systems analyst and when you click on the options here you don’t have systems analyst in that place you have blank space right so there is a way where all your U you know data can be messed up so to avoid this what you can do is you can actually um save this data in a different sheet like I did here like Department data you can hide this sheet or you can protect this sheet with password or something so that nobody can mess this up so now let us get back to the employe data and select this column and uh clear everything press okay and let us also clear this and this as well in this one too now let us eliminate the row our sales the employee yeah everything okay now we have basically removed this data from here now let us try to apply the data validation once again now here let us select as list and uh here let us provide the option let us go to next sheet let us select all these options and press okay okay let’s provide input message data options or Department options yeah now let’s select okay now let’s hide this sheet now the sheet has been hid hiden and you still have the options developer or let us provide CEO then we have developer then we have test so that’s how you can protect your how to protect and lock cells in Excel now why do we need to lock or protect cells in Excel let us imagine that there is an Excel sheet with really confidential data and you need to pass that data to your subordinate or your colleague to make some minor edits now let us imagine that the edits are supposed to be done to only one or two columns and the rest of the columns should be left as they are now there is a huge possibility that sometimes unknowingly or unwillingly there might be some edits done by your colleague or your subordinate So to avoid such kind of unexpected mistakes you might want to protect and lock yourselves that you don’t want your subordinate or your colleague to edit so before we begin be kind enough to get subscribed to our YouTube channel and don’t forget to hit that Bell icon to stay updated on the latest it Trends and Tech content now without further Ado let’s get started with our onepoint agenda that is lock or protect cells in Excel now let’s get back into the Practical mode and start our Microsoft Excel now we are on the Microsoft Excel and this particular spreadsheet is related to employee details yeah now the screen is visible a bit better now let us imagine that this is our confidential data and you want to edit only two columns that is the designation column and phone number column now let us imagine that the company has finished one annual year and now there are some promotions happening in the company and let us also imagine that the phone numbers of the employees provided by the company have undergone some changes so now the minor edits that you want to make are related to the designation column and phone number column now you can see that all the columns that is the blood group new salary salary hike current salary and name of the employee serial number employee number everything is editable so in such kind of scenarios when you pass on this data there might be a possibility where your colleague or subordinate might end up making some mistakes right so you want to avoid that so you can do that by locking the celles now let us rename the sheet now the sheet has been renamed successfully so now you can log the cells by the following process so in this process you have two major steps first one is to log the cells and the next one is to protect the cells by a password now when you select all the cells in this particular sheet you can just click on this edge here and you have all the cells selected and now right click somewhere on the sheet and you can see an option called format sales so in this particular option you have some options provided which is number alignment font and you want to go into the protection part so you can see by default Excel keeps all the cells locked now we want the phone number and designation to be unlocked okay so let’s cancel it for now and get back to the sheet and select the columns D and I and now let’s right click and go into format Cs and in the protection option make sure that you uncheck the loged icon now select okay and now okay so you cannot include the merged cell fine we have a cell here which is merged okay let’s remove that okay now again select the entire column right click get into format cells and uncheck the lock option select okay now we have finished the first part that is locking all the cells which you don’t want to get edit and unlocking the cells where you want to make some edits now the second stage is protecting the sheet now right click on the sheet name and you can see an option called protect sheet click that and now here you can see select locked Cs and also select unlocked CS so let us provide a password here so let us use some simple password so that we don’t forget that so I’ll be selecting 1 2 3 and now select okay reenter the password to proceed now let us type 1 2 3 again now select okay and now the sheet is protected now we have successfully locked and protected all the cells in Excel now let us verify that the cells you wanted to protect are really protected and locked or not so we have unlocked phone number and designation and everything else is locked now let me try and edit the blood group so when I double click or try to edit this particular sheet then I’ll be receiving a warning from Excel it says the cell or chart you’re trying to change is on a protected sheet to make a change unprotect the sheet you might be requested to enter a password so it says that this particular cell is locked and you cannot edit it now let us try to edit the phone numbers which we kept as unlocked so you can see I can really edit the unlocked cell here now let me try to change this phone number let me enter some random phone number so you can see the cell is editable now let us go through the designation column and try to edit this particular column now since since I said that there’s a promotion happening in the company so the deputy CEO is now the current CEO of the company and software developer happens to become the senior software developer and the tester as well let us imagine that he will become the senior and so on okay so this proves that this particular sheet is editable not the entire sheet but only the sense that we kept in the unlock mode okay now this is how you lock and protect your sales in ex you can see that I have sales data on my worksheet so uh let us imagine that your manager asked you to find the average of sales happening in your company right so let’s navigate to the bottommost cell and you know write it down as average here okay average sales so here this is a cell where you want to keep your average right so here we’ll be writing a small formula that is average and tab to select it now you must select the array of data right so this is my array since average is an array function and now press enter so there you go you have the average sales data that happened in your company so to understand the page setup in msxl we will go through a demo inventory in Excel where we’ll be considering some restaurant data now without any delay let’s get started with the Practical demo now we are on the Excel sheet and this is the data I was talking about the restaurant data where we have the First Column that is Rank and next we have the restaurant name followed by that we have the sales happening through that restaurant and then we have the segment category that is what kind of service does that particular restaurant offers now this is the list what we made and uh what if we wanted to represent this data in the form of a printed paper right so I guess you can see all the columns and rows here so you can see that we have almost like 250 rows so there is no chance or there is no way to print all those 250 rows in one page of course it is practically possible but when you try to read the content it’ll be so tough to read Because all the rows will be clued together so closely so that you cannot read it so uh you need to print them Page by page so and you need to also take care of the data is aligned properly according to the page size everything and even you need to take care of the margins of your page right so that’s what page setup basically means so we had a detailed overview of our data and what actually we’re trying to make now let us see how page setup is possible in msxl so to go to the page setup menu or go to the page setup options we have three methods let’s start with the simplest method so the simplest method is by just clicking on file and go to print option and you’ll see all the page setup options right over here and you can also go to print menu by pressing a shortcut method that is contrl p so you’ll directly end up on the page set of options now let’s look at the second method so the second method is you can see the toolbar over here right which has file home insert draw page layout formulas data review View and help so the second method we can use page layout option from the toolbar and you can see when you click on the page option from the toolbar you have a new ribbon over here so this ribbon is all about page setup options so it will offer you margins it will offer you orientation size print area brakes background print tiles etc etc right so all these options or menus in this ribbon belong to page setup now let us look at the third method so the Third method is something similar you have view option on the toolbar so just select View and you can see we have few page setup options over here as well the normal page break page layout custom views and we have grid lines formula bar heading zoom in zoom out select to zoom free certain panes right so all these are also the page setup options so we have the three methods to enter the page setup options now we are familiar with those now let’s get started with the Practical mode on P setup for that let me use the simplest method that is holding the control key and pressing P which navigates me to the print option now we have various set of options here we have no scaling normal margins letter portrait orientation cated print active sheets and note one for Windows you can see this option is the printers option for example example if you’re connected to a printer which is the hardware printer then your Ms XL will show the printer’s name here so other than printer you can also make some other arrangements where you can just directly print your complete data in the form of PDF and then you can export your PDF to your recipent that’s also possible okay now let’s get started with the first option that is print active pages okay to understand this better we need to create a new sheet not a problem so you can see that we just have one sheet over here so let us kind of select all the items and create a new sheet and try to paste it over here or let’s try to paste it over here okay now let’s try to extend this yeah this should be fine now let’s rename this sheet sheet uh or let’s rename it as restaurant sheet two for our reference now let us get back to the print sheet option so I’ll use the shortest method that is holding the control key and press P now you can see that here we have six pages in total from the active sheets so the current active sheet is the top 250 sheet so this particular sheet is the current active sheet so if you print the entire data in this particular sheet then we will end up printing six pages now let us select the other option where you have to print the entire workbook right so now you can see that there’s a change in the number that is 12 pages so what is a workbook so basically workbook is the collection of entire sheets in your Excel homepage so in this particular Excel homeage which you have the first sheet that is top 250 and the second sheet that is the resturant sheet to right so the combination of these two sheets make up a workbook so when you select the entire workbook option you’ll have 12 pages so that’s how we use this setting where you select the active sheets the entire workbook and there is another option where you can only print a selected item so if you want to do this then let’s get back here now what if your customer or what if your client wanted the top 10 restaurants only so you can select the top 10 restaurants by doing this now you have the top 10 restaurants let’s go to print so you can see Excel has automatically selected the selection only print the selected content only so you can see we have only the top 10 restaurants or top 11 restaurants that we have selected in our sheet and it is ready to get printed so this is how we use the first option now let’s get back let’s not select that and let’s make the pages normal now get back to the print option again now you can see the next option that is cated right so in cated you have different different options that is 1 2 3 3 1 2 3 and 1 2 3 and the next one which is uncollated 1 1 1 222 3 33 so why are these numbers present here and what does colleted mean anyway so this is your question right now the answer for this question will be a little similar to your examination Hall okay let us imagine that you are in examination Hall and you are the invigilator and you have 10 students in your room so you wanted to provide question papers to all the 10 students okay so you have your question paper distributed into three sheets that is you have marked questions and your questions are fit into three papers right in this scenario we have 250 rows and all the data is split into six sheets that is sheet one or page one page two page three page four right now if we wanted to print 10 copies then the arrangement of papers will be page 1 page 2 page three page 4 page 5 Page 6 in continuous order right that is CED if you wanted 10 copies of different different ways where you wanted to print the first sheet first then you wanted to print the second sheet second and the third sheet third that is you’ll have 10 copies of first page 10 copies of second page 10 copies of third page and so on that particular approach is called uncollated approach and if you’re printing the pages in continuous order for 10 times then that particular approach is called as collated approach so this is what we had to learn about collated and uncollated now let’s get back to the third option now let’s press again print now we have our data here there’s something wrong select all the elements control p yeah now we have our data back now we have the third option that is the portrait orientation okay so when we click that we have two options that is portrait and landscape so you might be having a good idea like when you try to click a picture in your phone we have two modes as well that is portrait mode and the landscape mode so when you click on the portrait mode this is how your data will be looking now to understand the difference let’s click the landscape mode so when you click the landscape mode this is how your data representation will change you’ll have a wider page to print so this is why we use the page orientation for now let’s keep the page orientation as portrait orientation and we have now the fourth option so what is the fourth option we have various sets of options in here that is letter and A4 size there are also some more page options over here where you can select the page types you want to print so basically you’ll be having few more options that is A4 A5 A3 Etc but here we just have two that is A4 and letter so basically you’ll get those options and followed by that next we have margins so here you can see we don’t have any margins for our data okay so now we can add some margins by setting up this one as an option like last custom setting or you can also choose normal wide narrow right so your page will be changed according to your margin size right so this is how you can change the margins now let’s keep it as default let’s set the normal one now we have the next option that is scaling option so here you can see we are trying to fit the page so when you’re trying to print these sheets using no scaling then the actual size of the page will be printed now you can also modify that you can fit and print these sizes so you can remember the first option that I said of printing all the 250 rows in one single sheet this is how you can fit it so fit the sheet on one page where you can see all the 250 rows are fitting into one page but the data is not readable so but we don’t want this type of an approach right so let’s keep it as the default one which is no scaling so these are the variety of options in print now if you wanted to print the all the six pages into the PDF format and mail it to your client you can also do that I think I have explained it in the first place so you can see we can do it by just selecting this option where you can print all the six p just and into PDF format and then you can mail them to your client and you can also select the number of copies you want you can increase the copies to two three and any number of uh copies you want for now I’ll keep it as one copy now let’s print this now let us select the location rename it and publish now let’s get back to documents and see if the page is printed or not here you go here we have the resturant data in the form of PDF so we have our entire six pages of data in the PDF format now we are back on the homepage now we had some limited functions in the print function over here we had try to export the data so you can also export the data or try to print it from the print option over here you can just select that as well anything F PDF yes the pages are printed now there you go we have the restaurant 2 PDF data so that’s how you can print all your data you can either choose the export option or you can either choose the print option now when you see into the print option we have limited number of page setup options over here now let’s check out what we missed so we are in the page layout here so we had gone through the margins we had set all the margins and then we have also gone through the portrait and landscape now you can see this size when we were in the print menu option we had only A4 and letter but here you can see there are a wide variety of options that is other than letter we have tabloid legal statement executive A3 right we have A5 and many more other options and if you want some more paper options you you can go to more and you can always select a few more options that’s how you do it and yeah we didn’t had the break option so remember when we had been through the print option we did not have the break option there let’s select this to normal A4 so you cannot see the break option over here right so here we have the break option so what does break option does right you can actually break the page uh remember we spoke about the top 10 things or the top 10 rows you can always do that so you can just keep the top 10 restaurants in your first page and then break the remaining and to set page breaks you can select the cell now I need the top 10 so I’ll select this particular cell which is in the 11th position and now I’ll try to implement the page break insert a page break and now you can see on my sheet there is a thin line which is separating the two pages that’s how you can see the indication of a page break implemented onto your page now how do you see it you can see it by SEL in control P where you can see the first top 10 restaurants being printed on your sheet so there you go we have the first top 10 restaurants printed on our sheets so that’s how you use the page break now let’s try to eliminate all the page breaks so you can select braks and reset all page breaks so the page break has been eliminated now you can always choose a background for your data as well you just uh if you want you can add a picture to your background I think that’s not available for now okay you can work offline as well let us select this one so you can see that we have added a background to our data we can select all the text files and then we can change the color so that the text becomes a little visible yeah that’s how you do it now if you don’t want the image to be added on your file you can also remove that delete background and there you go all the images are gone now the next important part that is the print titles now why do we need print titles for that let’s try to print this so now you can see the first page in the first page we have the title rank restaurant sales segment category but if you go to the second page you don’t have that title right you don’t have the title rank name of the restaurant sales and their service category so if we want that then we need to add titles now for that let’s select the print titles option now let’s select the row to repeat on top now for that we need the first row select the first row and this particular row will be repeating into all the pages now let’s try to print it so yeah now you can see the titles are being added to all the sheets you can see the page two page three page four page five and page six so you can see the titles added to all the sheets now we are on the spreadsheet so here what exactly are page breaks so page breaks are something which help you during your trying to print your data or present your data in the form of a web page right in those times you cannot fit your entire Excel data in one spreadsheet or one paper or one web page right so in those scenarios Excel will try to elimin a few parts of your spreadsheet or it will try to split the spreadsheet so how exactly it looks like so go to the view option and click on The View and click on page break preview here you can see the dotted lines right so these are the things which separate your data in form of pages so that it can be printable on one single page so some of the times the user or the xuser manually inserts a page break right so how do you insert it just go to the page layout and here you can see the page breaks insert a page break and you have successfully inserted a page break again go to the view go to page break View and here you can see the solid line so these solid ones are the ones which are inserted by the users or anyone who had the access to the data now how do we eliminate them right so we can eliminate them and we can try to you know get the shet back to the normal way so all you have to do is click on the the cell which has the page break which is right under the page break go to the insert page break yeah page layout menu go to the brakes option click on remove page break and there you go you have successfully eliminated the page break and page break preview to make sure that the page break has been successfully removed so you cannot see that anymore so that’s how you try to insert or eliminate a page break in Excel so conditional format is a method to visualize your worksheet we already have the charts in Excel to visualize our Excel sheets in graphical form but what if you had to see or visualize the data in your worksheet as it is so that is where the conditional formatting comes handy now let’s get back to the Microsoft Excel and try to implement some conditional formatting now we are on the Excel worksheet this particular data set is based on a store now we have various columns in this particular data set we have r ID order ID customer name Etc and finally we have quantity discount and profits now let’s go to profits uh let us imagine that we have provided this particular store with a target of minimum 15% profits now let us find out the stores that have hit the 15% Target and the ones which did not so for that let us select the entire column now you can find the conditional formatting option in the home toolbar and in that ribbon the ribbon with Styles has the conditional formatting option click on that and you have various options over here highlighting the cells top bottom rules datab bars data scales and icons so data bars are actually the bar graphs which highlight themselves on each and every cell if you implement them and these are the color scales if you want to implement some colors you can go through that and if you want to represent your C with icons you can also do that for now let’s highlight the sales so select that and inside this select the greater than option and here you can provide the percentage that is 15% and the sales or the stores which hit the target should be highlighted with green color and select okay and there you go you have your stores that hit the 15% Target and the ones which did not hit the 15% Target now if

we want to highlight the ones which did not hit the 15% Target you can highlight them with the color red so conditional formatting highlight the Cs less than 15% with color red and text dark and there you go it’s done now let us consider another example so this particular example is based on train data set and here we have the passenger ID survived passenger class name Etc now we have a tra an accident incident over here now one is indicated that they are alive and zero is indicated that they are not alive now let us use this column and conditional formatting highlight the cells containing the text as one with color green okay and highlight the cells that contain text zero as r that indicates they are not alive and let us select the icons now we have the icons over here the X indicates that they’re not alive and the Green Tech Mark indicates that they’re alive now that is how you use conditional formatting in Excel Excel now here on my spreadsheet you can see some data so this particular data has some color markings so we have used color codes to Mark the designations of all the employees with different colors so for example blue for manager purple for senior and so on right now our duty is to count the total number of emplo present in a company based on the color code this can be done using filters but let’s try with color codes now we don’t have a readily available function in Excel to count cells based on their colors but we can make use of macro now to make use of macro you might want to enable the developer options so by default these will be disabled in Excel to enable them right click on the toolbar and you can see this particular option click on the customize ribbon option and you will be provided with various set of options now on the right side you can see developer options so make sure the checkbox is clicked to enable developer options and press on okay to completely enable developer window right now when you click on developer options you can see various options here visual Basics macro Etc now click on the macro to create a macro now just give a name to the macro function so I’ll give simply long and press on create to create that particular macro function so we have already created a macro that is Count colored cells which we will be using in our current spreadsheet for counting the colored cells now let us erase the newly created function now getting back to the original code so how does this particular count colored cells works so let us understand the function first then we will try to make use of it in the spreadsheet so the function name is Count colored cells as you can see and this particular function will have two parameters current cell and spreadsheet area so the current cell will be the cell address where the color you want to count is present and then the spreadsheet area so what is the range of cells where you want to locate that particular color and count the number of repetition that is the spreadsheet area and then comes the variables used colored cell range color code and color cell count so the colored cell which particular cell is having that particular color and what color code is involved in that colored cell and colored cell count so what is the total count what is the total number of colored cells you have in that particular range that is colored cell count now let us consider color code is equals to current cell interior color that is current cell do interior do color so this is the function which will identify the interior color of a selected cell let us imagine that initially color code is equals to the current cell’s color code okay now we will have the for Loop and that for Loop will include colored cell which is the current cell in the spreadsheet area and if the colored cell the currently selected colored cell do interior do color is equals to the color code that we have set selected then colored cell count the variable which is used to count the number of colored cells is equals to + one initially by default it will be zero in case if this particular if condition is true that is the current cell color and the color code given is equals to same then the value of colored cell will increase by one and this particular if Loop will run as many number of times the condition is true so let us imagine that the condition will remain true for five times then we have obtained five similarly colored cells in the given range of cells in a spreadsheet and once the condition fails then the latest value present in color cell count variable will be displayed which will be a final result so this is how the macro function works now let’s close the macro window and get back to a spreadsheet now let us try to make use of the macro function that we just created so that is equals to count colored cells press tab to select the macro function and the first one is the current cell so this is the current cell where the current color is being provided comma this cell range so our cell range will be from C2 to c31 right so this is the range where we want to count the similarly colored cells that is sky blue colored cells close the function and press enter now you can see the function has identified six repetition of sky blue color in this particular range of cells now you can drag the same formula across all the cells and it will be providing the results of the same so six senior colors that is pink or purple color then two repetition of this particular color two repetition of trainy color five for dark blue and six for green right so this is how the macro function works and the key point to remember here is this particular macro will work only for manually colored cells so there are situations where we have used conditional formatting to color a single cell let us imagine that we have used conditional formatting to recognize the employees with salary above 30,000 as green color and if we try to use that particular green color to be counted by the color count sales function no it will not happen it will not consider that color as a feedback or an input now in future we will also try to design a macro which can recognize the colors made by conditional format as well but this particular function will be exclusively used for manually colored cells only dated IF function is majorly used to find the differences between two individual dates so it is also called as dated if by a few people and a few people also reference it to date diff that is date difference so anything is good now to find the difference between any two dates let’s select a few dates so the first date would be uh let us imagine that you’re an employee and you want to to find out how many years that you’ve been working with an organization so for that you might want to need today and the date where you join the company right so it might be date of joining and today so what’s the difference right so let us imagine that you join the organization somewhere around 2010 01 05 2010 and today so for today can you can give any particular date let us imagine that uh today is 1st of January 2021 or 2022 now we have up both the dates that is the joining date and the current date which can be the current date so the day can be anything so you might be watching this on a different date as well so the date of that day for today would be a little different so we’ll imagine the today’s State as an imaginary date now we might want to find the difference that is in terms of years so you wanted to find the difference in terms of ear so here you can find the difference in terms of ear days and months as well so currently let’s try to find out the difference in terms of years so for years you might want to specify the third parameter in the data function as why if you wanted months you have to give the M as the third parameter and if you wanted to find the days you might want to give d as the third parameter uh so we have discussed the third parameter so what are the first two parameters right so the first two parameters are the first date and the last date so the first date in this situation is your date of joining and the last date or the final date which you want here as your today so let’s find the difference so for that equals 2 so it can be dated if or date diff so date if and the first state which is the A2 and comma the last state that is B2 and your parameter third parameter in terms of ears that is why close the bracket and press enter so there you go you have your date here so it’s been like 11 years that you’re working with your organization so that’s how you find out the differences so we have 11 years because uh we did not finish the 12th year completely so if we had given the month as uh maybe six where we have finished our total years then it will automatically change to 12 years so now for this particular task we will be considering the student database now let’s get into practical mode and start our Excel so on my screen you can see some data related to students now let us try to duplicate some of the rows here so we have selected the rows 8 9 10 and 11 now we shall copy them and paste in so now these are the duplicate elements right now they there might be possibilities about the duplication of class because all the students all the 10 students are in same class so there might be a duplication but we are not looking for such kind of duplications right we are looking for the duplication of the entire row for example we have the details of mic over here in the eighth row which has the role number or serial number as seven name as mic role number class blood group and subject scores percentage round of percentage and total marks so the entire eighth row is been copied here and it is in the row number 12 we have the exact same details so what if you have the exact same rows duplicated so that’s what we’re going to deal with we’re going to eliminate the duplicate rowes all completely together now to carry over this task we have to select the data from toolbar so you have various options file home insert Etc so you need to select the data and inside data toolbar we have the ribbon and inside ribbon you have got the duplicate values or remove duplicates uh option in the ribbon so select all the data select remove duplicates and now you can see that we have all our uh column names over here and make sure that you have selected my data has headers and then select okay and now you can see that Excel has automatically removed four duplicate values so four duplicate values are found and removed 10 unique values remain now another type of uh remove duplicates can also be done so you can see that here we have another data set which has phone numbers or phone names that is phone makers that is Samsung Huawei VI Oppo Etc so there are some duplicate values in this I’ve copy pasted them so now you can also do that so just select all the data and now go into home and select conditional formatting and here select highlight a cell rules and inside that you have duplicate values selecting this option will help you identify the duplicate values in your data set but not to remove them so you can select that and you can see the duplicate values are highlighted over here in the red color now again you can get back to data and uh select the option of remove duplicates and select okay and the duplicate values will be automatically eliminated so that’s how you delete or eliminate duplicate values in uh data set and you can also see that we have another duplicate in this particular row and if you wanted to select a particular row and eliminate the duplicates you can also do that now for that you need to go to the same process remove duplicates and here Microsoft Excel is asking you if you had to expand the selection to the entire data set or you want to continue with the selected data set itself or selected column itself so for that you need to select the continue with the current selection and remove duplicates and press okay and you can see one duplicate value was found and it has been removed and six unique values remain so that’s how you use the function of removing duplicates and Exel so what is sumers and Exel now you might want to calculate uh the total sum of sales right so let us assume that this is your entire stores sales data and you wanted to calculate the entire sum of sales so there is a sum function in Excel where you just have to you know select all the sales and apply some function onto it and you’ll get the sum of all the sales right so with something like this you’ll select all the cells and then you’ll apply a sums function and you’ll get the sum here and average everything right so this is fine but what if you just wanted to find the sales that are happening in only western region as you can see our column f is based on region so we have four regions South West East and Central so your manager asks you to find the sales happening in suppose say west region so how do you calculate it would you manually go into each cell and check if it’s West and Cal that will be time consuming right so what if you had a method which could do it for you just in a matter of few steps or few clicks right so that’s exactly sus so it will basically add a condition calculate the sum of sales where the region is equals to West simple to like or similar to seal query right so that is exactly what we’re going to do in Excel today that is using summs now let me add here Sales of West Region now in the next cell let’s add uh sums function remember there are multiple sum functions in Excel so when you type in suum you can see so many options based on some right you just have some followed by that you have some if it is just some if not some ifs today we are concentrating on some ifs so not just some if we’ll go to some ifs so we’ll be having an option of placing multiple if conditions there so let’s also try that more on that later now let’s press tab to select our sum ifs function now okay we forgot another important step so before we apply sufs we need to convert our table into a table format yes it looks table but right now it’s not in Tabo format it is in the format of database we know that Microsoft Excel considers its data as a database by default so to convert the database into table just click anywhere on the data and press contrl T so that you’ll have a new dialogue box and and it will ask if your table has headers just make sure that you have Ted in it our table does have headers so select okay now our database has been converted into a perfect table and it’s ready for applying sums function so now you can see our database has been successfully converted into our table now let’s begin with our sum ifs now again remember we are using some ifs here not some if or sum so select Su if and press Tab and we have our sus function now the first step which column are we looking at what are we finding out right which is a sum range what sum do you want for now we need sum of sales so select the sales column and we have a simple key function here let’s hold control again press shift and hold shift together so we’re holding control and shift key together and now we’re pressing lower Arrow key once yes the entire sales column has been selected comma Now where do you want to look so we want to look I mean which part of the table you want to fetch right so this is the region part we want to fetch right now so again hold control and shift together lower Arrow key the entire column is selected now the next last part so we want to look into the both of the columns that is sales column and region column now which type of data you want so for now we want Western type of data that is the sales data which is happening only in West right so we’ll select this cell with the data as West or you can also manually enter it for now let’s select the data so I’m selecting the cell F7 which has uh data as West right now let’s close the parenthesis and press enter so there you go you have the sales happening in the western region now you can also try to format it in the form of currency so let’s use uh dollars since it is based on American states so let’s use dollars so there you go now we are having the sales data of West now let’s try to copy the same to all the for Cs and uh now here let’s type in East and this can be South right and this can be your central there you go right now you can also copy the same formula and make minor edits to it so here instead of f8 you can select uh East so where is East here and press enter so you have the sales related to East now let’s try to edit F9 with South select South Region enter so you have South sales and what remaining is Central so let’s edit Central as well and press enter so there you go right now you have all the separate sales data from West west east south and Central now again uh you might want a bit more granularity in data right or in your reports right like you wanted to find the sales data happening in West and you wanted to find out the category based on only Furnitures so your manager will ask you okay a fantastic job so now just give me another minute detail on the data I want to calculate the sales happening on West based on category Furniture right so he wants furniture or he wants office supplies only right you can also do that it’s not an issue at all now let’s try to copy the cell and paste it here and sales invest let’s add another input here on furniture right now you wanted to calculate the sales happening in west region only on furniture so you can also do that now we can use the same formula as well just copy paste the formula here right and you can add few things here when you try to add a comma it will automatically generate the next criteria so it is expecting that you are looking for adding another criteria right now which column you want you want category so let’s select category you want to select all the cells same trick control shift lower key and again press comma and you want it to select only uh Furniture so select on furniture cell there you go now press enter so there you go we successfully have the sales data from west region based on category Only Furniture so that’s how you do su and Exel you can also add a few more details to it like in Furniture you can also look only for tables so here you can see in west region we have furniture sales data and we have sales data of West Region based on furniture which includes only tables you can also do that using sums function in the same way all you have to do is Select this subcategory column and select the cell which has the data as tables so this is how you use Su in Excel now creating a pivot table is just a way from a few clicks trust me it’s just a couple of clicks and you’ll have your pivot table ready to operate now click any cell or select any cell on your spreadsheet which has the data and navigate to insert menu on the toolbar and select pivot table and that’s how simple it is now automatically Excel will choose your data you can see the line L over here dotted lines that means the Excel has already selected the range of data that you want to put into your pivot table and you can either select the existing worksheet or a new worksheet I’ll select a new worksheet over here and just press on okay and there you go you have your pivot table ready now here you can see your pivot table is a little empty all you need to do is drag and drop the data elements that you want on your pivot table so here you can see on our spreadsheet we have some business data related to our store which has has furniture and states and subcategories of the furniture and all the you know in in category you have furniture office supplies technology Etc right so those have some subcategories as well and different states and the regions as well and the quantity total sales happen right so using this business data we can find out some key insights of this particular data using our pivot table right so here we’ll add the data now let me drag the region into rows click and drag and let me drag uh categories into columns which are the different categories which are involved in the sales data and values what are the sales happened right and there you go you have Furnitures office supplies technology as the three different categories and those are the sales happened in central East South and West regions and this is the grand total and instead of regions you know you have all the regions over here right right so Central East Southwest or instead of uh all the regions or instead of all the categories you can you know place a specific category in your pivot table for example let me push the category into the filters and here you can see the total sales happened in those particular regions now what if someone asks you to find the sales of Only Furniture right so your manager comes to you and he’ll ask you getting the sales of only Furnitures you can select that and there you go you have the furniture sales in all the regions right or you can also do the vice versa you can also drag uh regions into the filters and if you wanted to find out the region wise sales of furniture you can also do that right so here we have furniture and here you have all the regions and let us try to find the sales of furniture in the central region and there you go right so this is how um the priv table works and you can also remove the regions for example if you wanted to remove a certain element from filters or anywhere if it is columns rows anything you can just drag and drop it right so that’s how it works and also you can increase the level of detail or improve the granularity right so here we have U categories on our uh you know columns so you can also include subcategories into the column right and and you have the region wise sales so in the region filter select all press okay and in the category select all press okay and you have the furniture here office supplies here and Technology here and also if you want to include the quantity how much or how many number of um you know things got sold in those particular categories and subcategories you can also do that so here in the furniture section books these are the sales and these are the number of quantity or elements sold in in those particular you know sectors so you can you can also improve the level of granularity you can also improve the level of detail using pivot tables in now AutoFill in Excel is a feature where you can add some series automatically using Excel for example let us imagine that you wanted to add index numbers right so starting from 1 to 10 so manually you will be typing in the numbers and you’ll be doing it right so instead of this what if I said you there was a simple way where Excel will fill all the data for you right so just start with one two and select these two cells and you can see the flash logo over here right so that’s the indication that Excel has understood your pattern and it is ready to fill the remaining numbers so as long as you drag this logo or that ending part where you have a small square box that will fill all the numbers until where you have draged it so that’s how autofill works and you might be wondering will it work only for numbers no it will also work on some Logics as well okay this was the first part let us also look at some other tricks with autofill now most of the time time you might be just adding one number and try to drag that cell and the result is it’ll copy the same number all the time right so you can change it by clicking on this menu you can click on fill series and it will change to series and this was one more trick with numbers now getting back to the next type so let us imagine now the next type of series you want to add is weeks in a day right so you’ll be having Monday Tuesday save and stay right so you can also do the series of weekdays using AutoFill in Excel as well so drag that cell and it will give you all the days or week days in a week now let’s try January and this will give you the months in a year in the shortcut TOA right since you just added the first three letters of the month it will recognize the pattern and it will do the same for you now let us try the full names of months right and now let’s try to drag it it’ll fill all the full names of all the months now let’s try the dates so let us imagine that this is the first day of the current year right it will now give you all the dates of that current month or until the end of the year as well there you go now let us imagine that your manager tells you to add the dates of working days in the month of January so how can you do that it’s simple all you need to do is select the cell go to the fill option select series and here select column wise since you w the dates and columns and here in the type select date date unit should be weekday and the stop value should be the next month right since your manager asked for the weekday of January so you stop value will be the 1st of February press okay and there you go so since the 1st of January is Friday it’s selected over here and the rest two Saturday and Sunday are eliminated similarly we have all the dates here of working days only so that’s how you use AutoFill in exit so on my screen you can see a simple spreadsheet with student names and their marks on my sheet so we will be calculating what are the total marks obtained by the students in overall subjects and calculate what is the percentage now we will carry forward a few simple inbuilt functions in Excel to calculate that first we will be calculating the sum of marks so here equals to sum function and select the range of cells close the bracket press enter so you have the sum now so we have to calculate it repeat so by clicking on the the same formula now we have the total of all the subjects for individual students and now let’s calculate percentage so usually we use the you know divide by option that is divide the total number of marks obtained by the total number of marks available that is we will be dividing 47 by 500 and then we will be multiplying that into 100 so that’s how we calculate the percentage so cell G2 divide by cell H2 press enter and you will end up with you know uh the decimal format that’s perfectly all right now we have also extended the same formula for all our cells now select this overall column or select the highlighted cells right and get into the data type here you have General so that’s why we have got that uh decimal format but when you press percentage you’ll have the actual percentage of all the students according to their marks achieved now we are on our Excel spreadsheet and this spreadsheet has some values of employees that is their employee ID name designation Department salary date of birth and date of joining now our concern is to highlight some cells which are duplicate in this or some rowes which are duplicate so for example here you can see on rule number seven we have the details of Mara and you can see the same details of MAA in the row number 14 as well right so you need to eliminate those cells or you need to eliminate those rows now you can say there is a quick way just few clicks and those will be eliminated that is conditional formatting yes that is also one way but I’ll show you what’s the problem with that okay so let us select the entire table and get into conditional formatting and here you have duplicate values highlight cell rules with duplicate values and there you go the problem so here we have designation which is duplicated in certain ways department and salary state of joining right so there are certain conditions or scenarios where you cannot directly identify which is the duplicate rowle again you can use the same for this right so you can select the entire uh column of employee ID and you can uh identify the duplicate cells here since the employee IDs are unique for every one so this is a way but let’s dig a little deeper and understand the way of highlighting duplicates with an advanced technique so let me cancel this and for that let’s create a new um column and let’s name this as duplicate flag e flag so the new column has been created which is D flag so here we will be using a simple formula that is Count F and here press tab to select the formula and here we will be adding our range that is which range are you considering so the range will be the employee ID since employee IDs are unique for every employee and and let’s press function F4 to fix it and now uh again the criteria and the criteria will be the same cell that is A2 and now close the bracket and press enter now let’s track the same formula to all the rows okay now here we have now what you can do is uh sort it in an advanced way go to sort and filter and custom sort and here you’ll be sorting by the D flag and it will be smallest to largest so now uh you can apply the conditional formatting to highlighted you can select the column H or the D flag go to conditional formatting highlight cell rout and here you can get into greater than and give the value as one okay so all the cells which are you know repeated multiple times will be selected here and they will be highlighted with a selected color what you have given so I’ve given Red so now you can select these cells and highlight them or delete them from your spreadsheet and now all your data in the spreadsheet is unique and clean now let’s quickly get onto the Practical mode where we will have some data sets over which we will be trying to apply the charts now there are various types of charts in T and those are the pie chart the column chart the bar chart column versus line P chart and sparkline charts so we will discuss one after the other first let us discuss about the pie chart so as you can see we have a small data set on my screen which I have personally created and uh this deals with the companies and this deals with the shares of the automobile industry so now for this let’s create a pie chart select all the data and then get into the toolbar and inside the toolbar you can see various options and inside that we going to use the insert option and when you select the insert option you will have a ribbon here and inside the ribbon you can see groups tables illustrations addin and here you go these are the charts so now we needed a pie chart so select on that icon and you have various types of pie charts you have two dimensional pie charts three dimensional pie charts donut type of charts Etc right so I would like to go with the three-dimensional pie chart as it looks a little more appealing and easy to understand and now there you go this is the title of the chart and these are the legends of the chart and this is the chart area and these are the values now we can uh know kind of add the data labels as well so you can just have to press the plus icon over here and you’ll have the options you can add the data labels which will give you a lot more interesting values and uh you can also turn this around as you can see we on double clicking any part of the pie chart you’ll get this option which is called as format data point and uh let’s imagine that you wanted to show the information related to this particular one which is Volvo which has the biggest share so this is in front right now now what if you wanted to show the information related to data which is over here right for that you can select this particular Arrow key and you can just twist it and there you go it is coming in front this will be uh a great way of presenting your data to your clients right yeah and there is another option where you can directly explore this like you you can pick it out you can see this right Point explosion where you can split it out and you can show that especially like you can highlight it and show it so that’s the you know a great way of presenting your data so that’s how you can work with pie charts in Excel now let’s quickly move to the next one that is the column chart and in the column chart we have the data related to some company and uh the profits of that company based on a so you can see that the year has started from 2008 and it has gone until 2021 and these are the profits of that company year after year so since we are dealing with column chat I’ll tell you the simplest way to create a column chat there is a shortcut key for that which is alt F1 and there you go you have the chart right on your screen now you can uh expand the chart just by dragging it like that and you can see that there is some problem with this chart that is we have numbers here instead of ear right you can see that the First Column is the es which is 2008 to 2021 but here you can see we have 1 2 3 4 which is not proper right so to change the axis that is you can see the axis which is 1 2 3 let me expand my screen a little bit Yeah so if you look at my screen we have two different columns one column is about the ears and the second column is about the revenue now what we want to do is we want to create a line graph where we have ear on the x-axis and revenue on the y- axis and we will be generating a line graph based on the data we have now for that we have to select the entire data what we have then we need to go into the insert option in the toolbar and then you can can see a lot of chart options in the insert ribbon now here you can see that we have a line chart or area chart option select that and here you can see 2D line graphs now let’s select the first one and there you go you have the line chart here now let’s rename the title and there is one problem with the chart here you can see that the x-axis is not actually pointing the ears you can make a change to that no worries just right click and then you can see the select data option and there you go you have the edit option here just edit it and now select the range I am selecting the ears now let’s select okay and there you go you have the years here you can just try to expand it a little more yeah so now you have the revenue on the Y AIS and year on the x-axis and this shows the growth of Revenue in your company so this is how you create a line graph in Excel C on now let us imagine that you are the CEO of an IT company and you have taken up multiple projects let us imagine that you wish to keep track of all the projects so what if there was a tool which could keep track of all the projects in the form of a detailed visualization with the percentage in the form of a graph or a bar chart interesting right that’s exactly what we going to design today using Microsoft Excel so without further Ado let’s get started with our onepoint agenda that is progress tracker in Excel now to design a progress tracker in Excel let us get back to the Practical mode where we might have to use our Microsoft Excel now we are on the Microsoft Excel and we have taken some sample data to make things look simple so here we’re considering a set of students and their attendance percentage so we will be using this particular data and design a progress tracker now let us try to increase the size of the cells now select all the cells in the attendance column now we have selected all the cells in the attendance column and in the toolbar select the Home tab and inside the Home tab you have styles group inside the Styles group select conditional formatting and inside the conditional formatting option select new rule so so in the new rule we want to select the first option that is format all cells based on the values now here you can see format style since we trying to create a databas we need to select the option of databas here and under the datab bar options we have some more options on the drop- down menu so here in the type select number and the minimum number is zero it is automatically stored here and the maximum value is again a number and let us provide it as one now here you can select the color for your pass now since we have already chosen green for all the column headers let’s choose blue and select okay now here you can see that the values are being indicated using bar graphs right and you can also see the percentage values but we can make it look a little more better by shifting them to the left side and text could be given as white so that it’s more uh vibrant to look at and now we can also apply some conditional formatting onto these attendance columns so let us try TR to highlight the students having attendance less than 65% so highlight cell rules less than 65% attendance with red color select okay and there you go you have the progress tracker right on your screen and and using the same principles you can track the attendance for all the students and also you can apply some conditional formatting onto all your cells and highlight the ones which are not on the track now this is how you can Implement progress trackers using Excel now for this particular example we going to use the employees data now let’s quickly get back to the Practical mode and enter into Excel now you can see that we are on Excel sheet right now so let me expand my screen a little bit so that the data is a little more visible yeah so here on my screen you can see that we have employees data so the First Column is the name of the employees and the second column is the start dates of the employees that when have they started working with the organization and when they have ended or resigned to their position in that particular organization and the duration gives us the number of days they have worked in that particular organization so to create a g chart is really simple you just have to select the data and then go to the insert option and in there you can see the charts icon and select all charts and in that select the bar chart and here you can see the Stacked bar chart select that and press okay and there you go you have the Stacked bar chart right on your screen let’s expand this a little more so that we have the clear visualization of the dates as well now you can if you want you can change the title as or RG data or employe data and now we are partially done with our chart now the next thing we have to do is select the bar chart right click on it select data and here select the add icon now you need to select the series name so the series name is duration for our gchart and series values are let’s select this and select let’s move a little yeah so these are the data series let’s select okay and you can see the Gan chat on my screen right here select okay and it’s done and still now it’s not complete yet so to finish it you need to select the blue colored bars here and right click on them and select format data series go to the fill icon and select no fill and it’s done for now and you can see that there is a difference in this particular arrangement we had Joe at the first place and Susan at the last place but here you can see Joe is in the last place and Susan is in the first place so we need to make some arrangements here for that right click select format access and then here you can see categorize in reverse order and there you go it should be done and there you go you have your Gant chart right on your screen so window here we have some data set so we have row ID order ID order date Shi date Etc so these are the rows over here let’s quickly select the entire data set and remove any filters that we have so the filters is gone and uh at the last you can see country region product category subcategory and extending further we have sales data quantity ordered discount and profit so now let’s proceed and try to build one single dashboard okay now imagine yourself in a situation where you’re working for this particular you know um store or a company which sells products and you have a team meeting with leadership and you are supposed to be hunting for simplicities in complexities and you need to present an interactive dashboard which gives a visual representation of what exactly is happening with the company the sales the quantity order profit Etc right and if you show this particular data set as it is in the form of named rows and columns your leadership might not be able to understand it or they might not be able to justify what exactly needs to be done in the future to keep the numbers same or improve the sales right so in that scenario an interactive dashboard could be beneficial so in today’s session we’re going to create the scene and creating a chart that is an interactive chart or a dashboard which is interactive everything lies on one single point that is the pivot tables and pivot charts if you’re good with pivot tables and pivot charts you can create interactive charts you can create dashboards and much more so the process is simple but in case if you need a quick overview of how exactly a pivot table is created or performed then you can check out the link in the description box below which will give you a complete detailed description and to understand how to create a pivot table and a pivot chart in real time and move further right now we will continue with this particular topic for today which is creating a dashboard now click any where in the cell select the entire data set using control a and go to insert option over here and choose pivot table right from the table range should be the option here you can see the table range has been selected and uh you also have two more options which will help you understand where exactly to create your PIV table so we will be creating that in a new worksheet so click on a new worksheet and press okay there you go you have the Pu you know table here and let’s say we want a few charts so here we have a region wise sales country wise sales and shipment majorly used subcategory uh category segment and let’s say we also want quantity wise country and quantity right or let’s say Okay country and quantity so how many number of orders basically you receive from each country right so let’s say we want all these charts now how many number of charts do we have 1 2 3 4 5 6 and seven remember creating a chart which is interactive relies on pivot table now so far we have created one pivot table or one pivot chart or one pivot sheet but we want seven pivot charts how to do that it’s really simple just hold control and drag that sheet and you have a new pivot chart right you can do that few more times seven so we have seven pivot tables as we required there you go and now let’s get back to the first sheet and let’s see the first option we looking for so we want region wise sales right we have five different regions north south east west and Central and we want region y SS in a pictorial way for that let’s go to the options over here we have the row uh names or the metadata you can drag region into either columns or rows wherever you want I’ll Cho and just drag and drop it in the columns and now go back to sales and you can drag sales to rows values sorry sales in h region right now you can go back to this particular pivot table go to home home eliminate any and go to pivot table analyze and here you can see pivot chart click on that and now you have a all charts window on your uh desktop I mean screen you can choose the one which you uh feel is good right so I’ll prefer a bar chart column chart here click on okay and there you go now you can edit this particular data set and chart and you can also remove any of the things you don’t want so for for example I don’t want Legends so I’ll remove Legends and uh this is what I have here you can also edit for few more things right now I can simply copy this particular chart and go to the dashboard so let’s create a new sheet and name it as dashboard merg and Center can add a color Bo now here you can paste the first chart now you can rename this chart title so you can rename this as region wise saes so therefore you have the first chart we here you can also increase or decrease the size of the chart by just dragging the corner points and uh let’s go go to the second pivot table we have the second pivot table right here what was our second request the second request was country wise right now close this the country and drag it to columns or rows let’s go with rows this time and SES go go to pivot table analyze pivot table chart and here you can choose a pie chart since you’re going with the country wise and click okay now you have the by chart over here you can rename that as country wise you can copy this and paste it onto the dashboard in case you want to you know uh keep the size of the pie chart and the column chart in the same uh you know width and height you can do that just go to uh format here you can 5.6 and it can be 9.9 and similarly you can go with 5.6 this can be 9.9 just so that you can accommodate a few more chats in the uh dashboard you can align them like right now our next request test is sub category shipment sorry so go to shipment so this is the fifth uh sheet so we need to go to the third spreadsheet where where is where we have the pivot table so close the format shape and we have shipment here ship mode so select the ship mode drag it to rows or columns Sal to here and we have uh or you can count it right you can change it to count okay so you have standard class with the highest number of um you know sales happening so many sales which are happening in your store choose the standard class of shipment right so very least people choose first class where or same day shipment which is highly expensive and standard shipment will take minimum pricing and most of the customers have chosen that now you can choose the same data here go to pivot table analyze and here we have pivot charts and of this you can select anyone let’s say if you want to go with the tree map or if you want to go with the bar or anyone you can go with that so let’s go with the bar graph press okay and here you created now rename this particular chart as ship mode now now you can copy the same chart and press paste it onto the dashboard can close that if you go to format you can do the same setting 5.9 and 9.9 4.6 and 9.9 there you go you have everything lined up and this space that we have over here we can add a few more things which will come under slicers and filter do so we’ll have to wait for that until we finish the rest of the charts now we will go to the fourth sheet so what was the fourth request let’s check our list here so subcategory wise sales now we can check the category subcategories over here yeah we have the subcategory select that and track to rows or columns and sales to values okay and there you go and if you want to sort you can also sort by right clicking and sort it to minimum smallest lar largest to smallest there you go so the highest number of sales are happening through mobile phones next comes the book cases next come copers etc etc now select this and go to pivot table analyze pivot chart and you can choose any one of those we can go bar chart or the column chart and you can can also rename this as subcategory device you can copy it based it on the dashboard and you can also make few Arrangements if you want you can resize it 5.6 and this will be 9.9 the next request is about the category wi sales and segment so we have the category here drag it to row and sales here you can keep it the way it is or you can go to Pivot analyze and here go to charts choose the one you want and proceed copy it and go to dashboard you can paste it over here there you go country wise and segment quantity so now you we have country over here country to rows and sales to columns or you can yeah let’s go with sales since this is a sales dashboard this should be beneficial now we have uh we can also sort it again sort to largest to smallest and we have France with the highest number of sales I can copy that or go to pivot table analyze and here pivot chart we can go with by chart you can rename it as country wise there you go and copy this paste it on the dashboard I think we already did a country wise sales so I think we can proceed with the next type of uh chart which is segment wise let’s go to the same sheet where we created the country wise sales and close the format delete the chart instead of country we can select segment so which segment has the highest number of sales past it over here format to adjust the size of the chart there you go so we have region wise sales country-wise sales ship mode subcategory wise category wise and segment wise sales now we have a dashboard but to make it a little more interactive we might require a few filter like options which are also called as slices so when you add slices onto the sheet or the dashboard what you can do is you can select the options you want let’s say I want the region wise sales in Belgium then you can identify that let’s say you want Australia’s or Austria’s shipment modes what kind of shipment mode is most used in Austria you can you can find out it and let’s say you want to find out the Finland segment wise sales then you can find out this is only possible when you try to include a slicer into the dashboard now let’s go ahead with it now if you select any of the charts let’s say I want to go with the first one now go to insert and here you can see filter options right so here you want to insert slices now here you have a slices right now okay so you can select the slicer you want so I want the slicer for region I want the slicer for Country I want the slicer for ship mode which is right here and I want subcategory wise slicer I want country or category wise slicer so category and segment wise which is here so I want six slices there you go I’ve got the six slices created let’s minimize to make it look a little more better there you go and uh we will paste the slices right here you can also you know modify the size of the slices let’s try to make them fit here and uh the next one should be right here there you go now let’s drag this here the last Slicer in the last section there you go now we have an dashboard but is it interactive I guess not so how to make it completely interactive so you might have a doubt let’s say I want to click on machins now only one out of the six charts is you know uh reacting let’s say I want to click on papers it is giving me the data for phones and Etc and if I click for Belgium you can see only one chot is being interactive right now what should I do so that every chart which is on the dashboard gets completely interactive and shows all the data in real time that can be done all you have to do is select any of the uh slices right click and go to the option which says report connections so select all the pivot tables pivot table which are present in your uh chart right now sheet one sheet 2 sheet three sheet four sheet Five sheet six and Sheet 7even press okay now all the chart cards are interconnected with each other and now if you click on any one of the options let’s say I want the data for Austria country and every data changes correct report connections you need to do that with all the slices press okay there you go now if you select Finland Denmark or Austria you can see the charts are changing right every chart is now interactive so that’s exactly how you create an interactive dashboard now you might be having a doubt okay it’s working for the existing data but what if I add some new data so here we have data until 2022 and this is the new data until 2023 now if I add this particular data to the end of this particular data set right here and remove the row heads and go back to dashboard go to Pivot chart yeah on data dashboard we need to go to data and here click on refresh all then you will get the updated data set and now you have the updated results as well and with that we have come to an end of the session on sales dashboard in Excel or realtime interactive dashboard using Excel in today’s video we are diving into Power pivot in Excel so if not aware power pivot is a powerful tool in Excel that allows you to import analiz large data sets from multiple sources for example if you have any separate data sets for sales transactions and product details the power pivot enables you to link them together using a common identifier like the product ID create custom calculations with Dax like the total or average sales and quickly generate interactive reports like the pivot tables basically it simplifies the complex data analysis making it easier to work with the large amounts of data without relying on traditional formulas and help users create meaningful insights in a more efficient and error-free way by the end of this video you will be equipped with everything you need to master power pivot in this video we will cover activating the power of pyo as an Excel addin creating relationships between tables calculating the profit total profit and more and wrapping it up with kpis to filter data like a pro this video is packed with exciting and super informative tips to level up your Excel game so I am inside Excel and before going to the pivot table I have a list of data over here I have basically three tables the salaries transaction and the employee and we can see that some columns is common like the employee level the employee level over here and in the salar in the salary Street and the level column and the employee sheet they are the same so let’s get started with installing power pivot for that we need to go to file and then options and here in the addin as I have already activ ated it so it is in my active application addin you will find it over here in the activate application addin if you have not activated and you can just click over here and in manage Excel addin you can go for com addin as it is a type of com adding and then click on okay so I am inside Excel and before going to the pivot table I have a list of data over here I have basically three tables the salaries transactions and the employee table and we can see that we have some columns in common like the employee label in the salaries table and in the employee table we have a level section these are basically the same so let’s get started with installing power pivot for that go to file and then options and here in the options then you have to go to this addin and select Microsoft power pivot for Excel it is in my active application addin as I have already activated it you will find it in an inactivated application addin if you have not activated it so you have to just click on it and in spite of excel addin you have to go for com addin as it is a type of com addin and then click on go and when you click on go you will have a drop down over here for in that drop down you have to select Microsoft power pivot for Excel and just click on okay and there up in this section you can see this power pivot just got available and now we can close the file and open a new Excel file where we will do the calculations and Analysis a blank workbook so we need to cross this and in the new Excel file you can click on power pivot and then click on manage and this will take you to the power pivot in Excel sheet right now we don’t have any data so let’s import data from the external sources so let’s go to external data from other sources and you just need to scroll down and you will find the Excel file over here and then click on next and when you click on next you will get this Excel file path basically you need to locate the place where you have already saved your Excel file so click on browse and as I have already kept in it my downloads I will just open this I will take this box as use first row as column headers and click click on next and now you will see the three available tables over here and I want to import all the three and hit on finish after it is being initiated you can close this and when you close this now we can see everything is uploaded over here we have employees salaries and transaction now that we have whole data over here you can do the diagram View and see let’s go back to data View and try to delete this delete yeah now we can go to this diagram View and let’s build some relationships we can now basically connect staff ID over here with that staff ID of the transaction table so you can just click over here and attached to this so it has created a relationship same goes for the employee level the employee Level under the salaries table and this Level under this employee table we’ll connect this so it got connected so now that we have basically added connection it’s no longer just three tables but one large data model now we will go back to this data View and we can basically add columns if we want as we have the selling price and the cost price we will find out the profit in add a column you need to write here just equals you have to just click the selling price minus this cost price and just click enter over here this is basically our profit and now we will rename this as profit now we have the staff ID what if we want to know their names as well not only their staff IDs now basically we will write over here equals related and you will get a suggestion over here as related and then if you click on enter you will get all these options now basically I want this employee name to be written and click enter and close this parenthesis and finally click enter and see you have got the names now what about measures asume we want the sum of all the profit we all meet we will go down somewhere over here and select a sell and over here I will write equals sum sum and click on enter and then choose profits and I will close this parenthesis and put on enter see it’s done now I can rename this as total profit as it looks good and click on enter definitely it will change here in the cell as well now we are all set to begin the analysis and click on just pivot table and then click on existing worksheet and just okay it may seem like a normal pivot table but it’s not we actually have three tables over here employees salaries and transactions let’s assume we want to see which employee is getting what Revenue so under employees we will drag the names to rows we will drag the names to rows and we want the revenue that will be under the transaction table selling price and I will drag you to values then if you want to see the level they belong to under salaries and the salaries we can often go to employee level and add it to the columns now it looks good now when you move forward just beside this measures we have kpis and click on kpi new kpi we can have an absolute value like for example I’ll give 20,000 that is a target value basically and I will choose this icon and I’ll click on okay now I will clean it a bit okay I will only have profit and values under it so under the transaction we will go to this total profit I’ll click on status and see I have got this Anna and John is basically not doing well they have basically failed to achieve the Target and the whole team may be not doing very good this Alex and Sam they are basically having a not so good one but yeah they have passed it and Jones too so Microsoft 365 co-pilot is one of the latest AI products launched by Microsoft so the Microsoft 365 co-pilot will be your AI assistant for all your office sus from Microsoft so it can help you EAS up your process of making PowerPoint presentations it can help you write down the notes on Microsoft Word and many more but today we will be using this particular 365 copilot for our data analytics using Excel so let me remind you this particular AI tool works with the versions of Microsoft Office 365 and later right now there should be a new feature added upon to your Excel on the top right corner of your home button but again if it’s not it’s completely all right you can use your Microsoft home button where you can find the Microsoft 365 Co pilot so let’s navigate to the home button yeah now I’m on my home button and here you can see a small icon which is completely new out of nowhere this is your co-pilot right and you can just click on it and you can fire your co-pilot and uh today’s point of discussion is about co-pilot with Microsoft Excel so when you are starting Excel there are some prequisites when you’re working with copilot So currently it is in the preview mode so it is capable of using some data set which is in the table format I have converted this into a table format it’s really simple contr a to select all the celles and then contrl T to convert this table uh the option my data set has headers and okay so your data it will be converted into a table and another prerequisite is when you pop up the Microsoft uh co-pilot it will asks you for a data set which is under 1,000 kilobytes so my data set here is about 800 kilobytes which should be here so the only process is you just have to click on this particular option which says attachments go to the data set that you want to work today so I’ll be selecting my sales EU copy and just press open it it will take a little time because it’s completely new so it might take a little time for that so the only uh catch is Microsoft co-pilot is a little slow compared to the other competive co-pilots or AI modules it’s not a big deal they will catch up soon let’s wait for some time while the D set loads and then you can fire some of the commands let’s say I have given my command here please help me create a regional wise sales report with this data set and can also give a few more commands right so it’s loaded right now you can see the icon here now you can write down give me country wise sales report and just fire the command you can also um you know perform all your data analytics what you regularly do right when you have a sales data set you might be wondering what it can do and what it cannot you just have to build a story about the report what you want to create create and then just you know write it down to the co-pilot and it will generate the report that you are looking for currently it is working on the country-wise sales report so it should be giving me the report shortly it’s okay so there are some problems with this so maybe it’s the data set data type so here we have uh country and the data is General so you might want to change that to text format or character format so you have the text data type here and just okay now save it back now you can ask the copilot once again okay or let’s try to do a different one okay now here we have the order date and column C right now let’s say I wanted to find out which day did they inquisit right is it a Friday is it a Saturday or Monday right so just try to ask the copilot let me write it down can you help me find out which week of the day was an order placed you we have a column named aate column is C we need a new column that tells me the day of the week when an order was placed so let’s file the command now it should give us a column D which is an empty column right next to order date or it should give us the steps to do the same just by the command it might take a little while okay here we have it certainly I’ll create a new column D and you D set great this is what we needed and so let’s try to ask another query can you tell me name of the customer with highest sale record in the data set so the previous query which we fired at will not be reflected on this particular D set but it can be reflected on the basis that shared with the go pilot here so currently I don’t have a

direct connection with my Excel over here I think it should be taking some time for getting me an update over here but anyways it will be updated in the say that it is currently dealing with that’s not a problem now let us see what’s the answer I apologize but it seems that I’m unable to extract any text content from the uploaded file it’s okay let’s try to file there are some discrepancies but it should be resolved soon but let’s let’s try some other thing like region wise sale so let’s say you are an Excel expert so you can do it within a few fraction of seconds you can just apply filters and get that data but there are a lot of people new to excel so for them the co-pilot from Microsoft could be a boon right but down the line there are improvements rolling out so I could predict that it could be a lot faster and can have seamless integration with your Microsoft Excel and your co-pilot and things could be a lot easier right so far we have the result over here so it is giving us a few results and it is finding a little difficulty to extract a few that shouldn’t be a problem in a few couple of days where the new updates roll out so um proceeding ahead let’s try to give it another query or so so let’s check the data set so here we have the categories and sub categories I think we can give it uh okay can you give me the category wise profits so here we can identify which category is performing really good and giving us highest number of profits so I think let’s check out if we have a profits column yes we do have a profits column over here so let’s check that brilliant right so it’s giving us distilled reports in one prompt so that should be helpful for any of the data analysts which are aspiring right and which don’t have have any idea about how Excel really works okay it seems that I’m able to extract text content from uploaded files okay let’s try to copy this and write it down as okay is it category okay let’s copy this as well I think it’s about the case right category subcategory okay let’s let’s first subcategory category sales report okay it’s giving us the pre answer to the previous query okay I think this should help it’s unable to extract a lot of answers so far currently there should be some discrepancy but down the line it should be fixed able to extract any text content from the uploaded file okay so basically that’s how you can work with your co-pilot in Microsoft 365 Exel so there are some discrepancies so far so it should be fixed down the line so that’s how you can use copilot in Excel for your data analytics and and with that we have come to an end of this session on Microsoft 365 co-pilot for Excel and if you have any queries regarding any of the topics covered in this session or if you require any of the resources that we used in the session like the data set that we used which is in tabular format and under 1,000 k byes please do let us know in the comment section below and RM effect Parts we’ll be happy to resolve all your queries on the aist let us know your experience working with co-pilot and Excel and we can learn a thing or two from you as well hey everyone welcome to Simply learns YouTube channel today we will learn how to use Microsoft power query that said if these are the type of videos you’d like to watch then hit that like And subscribe buttons and the bell icon to get notified now without further delay let’s get started with the topic which is how to use Microsoft power query so imagine you have a lot of data it can be an Excel file it can be a PDF SQL database cloud or anything if it is Data it’s your data right so you have a lot of data now you have the source of the data after that I’m absolutely sure that the data is not clean enough to perform some analysis so you go through another step where you have to clean your data from unwanted rows and columns which doesn’t make sense or might have some invalid data right so you need to make sure that your data is completely accurate and has some standards for your analysis right so that’s the next step which is clean and transform after the clean and transform step you have the next step which is load that particular data to your platform it could be Excel it could be some data visualization tool like TBL power VI Etc right after that you generate some meaningful information of that you create some pivot tables pivot charts and uh line graphs Etc right so which makes the some sensor of that data you will understand what what exactly is happening with your business how many leads or how many traffic orders what’s right and which is the best performing product which is the worst performing product and you need to take some decisions on your business which can make some impact on your overall profit or Revenue right so imagine if you want to do this for an year if you get one year’s data and you do it in a day or two it’s fine and if it’s on a monthly basis you get month-on-month data and you want to do it okay it could not be worse you can spend one or two days and it’s fine but if what if it’s week on week you start to think right what if it’s a daily task it’s a mundane task right you have to do all these Steps step by step repetitively and it it doesn’t make any you interested anymore in that particular type of job and uh the major point of this is you end up spending more time on cleaning the data transforming loading it and the worst part you don’t get proper time specific time which you want to actually dedicate to plan out something and bring up strategies to improve your business right so what if you could automate this right what if there is someone who could perform all these steps for you in in the way you want and you can actually have some time to produce some pivot tables pivot charts and then understand what exactly is happening with your business and find out some critical points where you can improvise and bring up some good Revenue what if there was someone who can perform all these steps for you clean your data transform it the way you want load it to your platform and help you create your P charts and P tables and actually save you a lot of time where you can spend all that time understanding your critical points where you need attention you can fix them and plan some strategies out to bring out some good Revenue right that exact someone who can do all these steps for you and automate your data cleaning data transformation and loading tasks for you is exactly the Microsoft power query so you can use Microsoft power query either in Microsoft Excel or Microsoft PI right now let’s uh kind of generate some data so uh this data will be generated using chat GPD and we will not generate data like which is not small like for a week on WE analysis or a day-by-day analysis we will create data for years so we will take five consecutive years starting from 2020 to 2024 and we will have some uh data generated using chat GPD and we will Auto me that data and try to get some analysis done right let’s jump on to chat GPD so before we go to chat GPD I have a prompt written here so this particular prompt will guide or explain chat jpd what exactly you want right so giving some uh like the Excel data right over here we have audit date order ID shift mode and customer name customer ID everything right so we have the sales quantity discount profit Etc so in the same format or a similar format if not the same format we are explaining chat gbt that we need these columns the order ID order date delivery date Etc and we want all these files in a downloadable Excel file links right so you can also specify this column should have certain certain things and this column can have certain certain things right so we will copy this prompt and head back to chat GPD and you can just paste the prompt and and hit enter there you go now your request has been analyzed and shortly you should be receiving some downloadable Excel files or some recommendations from chat GPD I’ve already performed this process and we have already downloaded some data so there you you go you have the data from 2020 to 2024 you can just click on this to download the file so I’ve already uh done this job and U I’ve downloaded the files so so those files are exactly in my downloads here so if you go to downloads here we have ERS data for 2021 2022 2023 and 2024 so this orders data has just one file which is orders 2020 so we will perform the data cleaning so first we will specify the source of the data then we will perform the data cleaning and transformation process then we load this particular Excel 2020 data into Excel and then we load this Excel data into the visualization tool we’ll use Excel for this and then generate some pivot tables and pivot charts we will only do this for one file which is 2020 right now what’s the surprising part is this particular file will also get data continuously for the next year 2021 for the next year 2022 for the next year 2023 and the current year 2024 right when we just copy paste or cut copy paste these files into this particular folder the same transformation steps the same data cleaning steps and the same data loading steps and also including the analysis will be done for you in the Excel pivot table right the process has been just automated right so you can see that happening for that let’s open a new Excel file so I have the Excel folder right over here so a new blank Excel workbook will be opened and if you go to data here you have get data as we said it can be a file it can be an Excel file XML Json PDF it can be from cloud it can be from a SQL database any any other source if it’s data you can work from it so we will give a file here right so just uh uh okay so so we will give a file here so select file and go to the last option which reads us from folder right so go to downloads and select that AIT data yeah go to downloads and select that a this data remember this particular folder should have only one file according to us which is 2020 data the first year data right select the folder and open and this should include the data of only one file which is AUST 2020 right so if you have have multiple files you can either combine transform and load if you have just one file you can just go with the transformation option over here or you can load if you are comfortable with what you have so I feel there are some minor changes which I would like to make to my data so I would go with the transform option now the power query window will shortly open now with the power query window opened you can select the orders 2022 Excel folder and it will be loaded now let’s try to cck click on the content button over here which should load our data now you can go with the first file so here’s the preview as we expected we have the order ID order date delivery date Etc just press on okay so the data has been successfully loaded right now we have the First Column as Source name which we will not be needing anymore and you can just remove that order ID is fine order date is fine is it no right so you can just select both the columns and change the data type right so here you have the option of change the data type where you will change the data type from whole number to date so that you get a date right so you have that the First Transformation step changing data type has been recorded here so this is like uh we uh Excel vbx or macro which will save all the steps and will apply uh to all the uh upcoming files right you have to change the type of delivery date as well so we will be finding uh the how many days it took to deliver or if if the delivery got delayed right so we can test that and here if you see uh yes we requested customer ID and customer name so we got customer ID along with the name so we don’t want that we want that in two separate columns we can do that so you can just select the entire column go to the split column option over here select by D limiter so I think it all automatically recognize that for us but there is one loophole we have a space Del limiter space option so just press okay and they should be helping us with the customer ID so let’s rename the customer ID to just customer ID and this to uh customer name space name right and that’s done here we have product which is fine quantity is fine traffic is fine leads is fine orders and here comes the money part so we have Revenue cost to company so we don’t know the profit yet right so to calculate the profit what you need to do is substract revenue from cost to the company and automatically you will get your profit so in some instances you might get a negative value don’t worry about that because uh that can be a discount offer or some 50% off 75% off that you regularly sell out your products which are selling in less num so that you can just you know uh move out the products from the store so that can be done and order status so we have order status as delivered in transit not delivered yet or order cancelled right so we might have to rule out some uh status here right right so we are calculating profit here so we don’t want the profit for cancelled orders or not delivered okay maybe okay okay not delivered orders uh this might be considered as the cost of company and revenue because uh it takes some delay to refund the amount to the customers so we can just add a filter to this particular column and and uh we will unselect not delivered products and Order cancel products so not delivered happens when the vendor is not available to deliver the product to the delivery agencies so in that case uh the order gets automatically cancelled and uh the order will be the money will be refunded to the customer so we will rule out these now the data is clean now uh as we thought to calculate the profit select these two columns first Revenue then cost a company because we are subtracting cost to company from revenue right so we will go to add to column and standard and here we have some options so we will subtract that so we will get the profit here so now you can name it as profit done so we just move that column to the money part of this particular data set so profit cost to company and revenue are the money parts so we will change data typ from just values to currency right so then that should be converted into the dollars format now the first one we don’t need this Source name so you can just rule out this you can just uh remove this column and there you go now you have a clean data you have the order ID order date delivery date yeah we forgot uh the another part of this particular data set transformation where we wanted to find out the number of dat it took to deliver the product okay I think we changed order ID so we don’t want this so the first okay let’s change this to the to the whole number as it was okay so order ID fine now we wanted to find out the number of days it took to deliver the product so we will select the delivery date first and then the order date second go to add column and uh we will select subtract in days and we should have that now let’s change the uh substract subtraction name to days to Der and you can move this column right select the whole column and hold it drag it and you can move this column along with the dates part of this data set where we have the ordered date and delivered date right right over here and you will find how many days it took to deliver a certain product now um let’s recheck once order ID order date delivery date dat to deliver customer ID customer name what product did he or she ordered and what quantity and uh the traffic which we received to the website the traffic which we received to the website the number of leads we got out of those traffic numbers the number of orders we got out of those uh uh lease and what’s the revenue we got out of those orders and what was theost the company and what is the profit that we made out of that order right and we also have the order status remember we only considered remember we only considered two types right uh we considered in transit and delivered statuses only we ruled out cancelled orders and not delivered orders so that we have accurate results of our profit made and revenue made out of this right now I’m completely satisfied with my transformation and cleaning of my dat set now let’s go to home and here we have the option of close and load so we will go with that and this particular dat set should be loaded to the data visualization where we have selected Excel right uh so we have the ERS data for 20 20 correct okay let’s not add date here because after all we will have some more data for 2021 2 3 and four right so let it be the way it is and if you just check the filter here we have only one year and if you just check the filter here you will have only one year and if you just check the filter here you will have only one year 2020 and if you go to the delivery date which let’s say if you have an order placed on December 31st and it got delivered on January 5th or something so you’ll have a little bit of a part of 2021 data which is completely all right not to be worried about so the main important thing is audit date so we want the audit dates of 2020 so that is loaded here right now you can just select the whole data set over here and uh uh you can add or insert some pivot tables here right from the selected range and uh let’s go with the default option which creates a new sheet and everything in a new location right here you have it now let’s say you wanted to make out some insights from this uh data set let’s delete the other sheet which we don’t want and let’s name it as pivot now the products will be loaded to the columns and uh profit will be loaded to values so you have a data set over here sum of profit from beds chairs cupboards sofa tort so here you have the pivot table which has sum of profit bed chair cupboard soofa T and grand total sum of profits made from these these these and these now select this entire data and go to the sech option here go to the pivot chart and uh here automatically here you can see that it is you know suggesting or recommending us to go for the bar chart which is a lot more better to s okay and you have your PIV chart here right and see the grand total here 22 4811 4.15 now this is only for one years of data now what we will do is go back to the downloads folder select the remaining years which is 2021 2 3 and 4 add that to the file location so let’s quickly go to our folder here and go to downloads select the folders I’m going to cut them from here go to a data and paste them here right now our job is done if we go back to the data here go to home and data okay so now that we have added the data to our folder go to the a data and here select the data segment and just select refresh all so everything is refreshed now let’s check the audit date filter and we will have all the five years from 2020 to 1 2 3 and four and let’s press okay for that and if you go to the pivot table you can also see the changes here just press refresh all and there you go you have the updated data right over here now that saved a lot of time for you and now that time can be utilized to plan a strategy and focus on the lower parts of your business and improvise them and bring a big change to the revenue and with that we have come to an end of this session on how to use Microsoft powerquery so here you can see that I’ve got some sales data of various car manufacturing companies and I’ve also got some slices so using these slicers I can get the realtime information from the dashboard so I’ll select an E from the first slicer and I’ll go into the second slicer and I’ll select a company now I’ll select BMW and SUV type so we have the data of all the SUV types cars manufactured by BMW car manufacturing company in the year 2018 now let’s start and create something similar to this one so how did I create this mis report let’s go through this in a step-by-step way so on my screen you can see that we have created a completely new Excel workbook and we have some sample data with five rows and 20 columns so this particular data is is based on the manufacturer year and the car manufacturing company and the type of the car manufactured and number of cars manufactured in that particular year and also the price of that particular car now to create Mis reports we need to play around P tables so we also have tutorials on P tables and you can go through that in our simply learn YouTube channel and also we will try to link those in the description box below now let’s select the entire data and go into the insert ribbon and there you can see the first option that is pivot table so after selecting the pivot table option it will show this particular dialogue box where it will ask you for the range of cells you need to select and the next one is to create the P table in the same sheet or a new sheet so we’ll take a new sheet here now select okay and there you go you have the pivot table here so first you have an empty pivot table and on the right side you can see we have p table Fields now you can either drag these options into the rows and columns or you can also click it so now let’s drag and drop these first we will select here and car followed by that we will take type quantity and price to columns so there you go we have our pivot table now let’s select all the data in the pivot table table and again let’s get back to the insert option and here you can see an option called pivot chart select that and you will have various pivot chart options here now you can select any one which you can prefer or which you like or whichever you think can represent your data in a best way possible so now let’s go with column chart first let’s select okay and we have our column chart over here now this happens to be our first chart now let’s create a few more charts so to create few more charts we’ll go back to the same original data select again insert and pivot table now again a new worksheet so here we have another Mt P table in the similar way let’s drag the same data into Ros and columns there you go and again we will select all the data and create a pivot chart go to insert option pivot chat and now let’s try to select pie chat select okay and we have our pie chart over here now let’s try to to create one more same procedure select table select pivot table then create new worksheet for the new pivot table and now drag and drop the data now let’s go to insert again let’s select all the data go to insert option and pivot chart now let’s try to select the bar chart select okay and there we have our bar chart now remember the first chart we created that is in sheet two this one so we will try to move all the charts to this particular table or this particular worksheet so let’s get back to the sheet number three right click and you can see an option called pivot chart analyze so from here you can move the chart select the option of moving the chart and don’t select the first one select the object in option and select the sheet number to which you want to move this chart for now we want to move this chart to sheet number two select that press okay now we have the chart moved to the sheet number two and in the same way let’s go to the sheet number four and let’s move this particular chart to sheet number two there you go the chart got moved to sheet number two now you can insert the slices so we have selected the third sheet or third chart and inside the pivot chart analyze option we have an option of inserting the slicer now we will insert the slicers for ear car and type now select okay and you will have all the three slices onto your sheet now let’s rearrange them so I’m just organizing them in a neat way there you go and you can also customize your designs for all the charts so that they look a little more better now if you see if I make some changes only one chart will be interacting for this right so if I select Ferrari and year 2020 and option as Sports you can see only one chart is interacting to these particular slices why because all these slices are connected to just one chart here so you need to make sure that all these slices are connected to all the three charts what we created so let’s erase all the filters and select one slicer at a time right click and you will see an option of report connections select that and you see that the connections are only connected to the pivot table 3 so select the remaining pivot tables as well select okay and in the same way select the second slicer select the report connection option connect pivot table 1 and two and select okay and in the same way the third one so now all the slices are connected to all the pivot charts now if you make some changes here they will respond automatically in the same way now let’s select the for company the year 2019 and hatchback option and you have all the cars which were made in the year 2019 from Ford Company in the segment of hashack so this was the sample data set that we worked on now you can also work on some complex data set such as this Superstore data set now one thing you need to make sure that when you’re working with Exel Mis they need to make sure that all the macros are disabled on your data set and you convert the entire data into the regular table format of excel right now Excel is considering this particular data as a database so for that you need to select all the datar Press contrl T and then convert the entire data in the form of tabular data and also don’t forget to click this icon which reads my table has headers so the first row is the headers now let’s select okay and your entire data will be converted into tabular form now let’s reset this to the normal type which has the clear color not all the fancy colors now the entire data is converted from the dbms to the tulet form and now you can start implementing the Mis reports and PIV tables and uh so why exactly do we need to do time series analysis typically we would like to predict something in the future and uh it could be stock prices it could be the sales or um anything that needs to be predicted into the future that is when we use time series analysis so it is um as the name suggests it is forecasting and typically when we say predict it need not be into the future in machine learning in data analysis when we talk about predicting we are not necessarily talking about the future but in Time series analysis we typically predict the future so we have some past data and we want to predict the future that is when we perform time series analysis so what are some of the examples uh it could be daily stock price the shares as we talk about or it could be the interest rates weekly interest rates or sales figures of a company so these are some of the examples where we use time series data we have historical data which is dependent on time and then based on that we create a model to predict the future so what exactly is uh time series so time series data has time as one of the components as the name suggests so in this example let’s say this is the stock price data and uh one of the components so there are two columns here column B is the price and column A is basically the time information in this case the time is a day so the primarily the closing price of a particular stock has been recorded on a daily basis so this is a Time series data and the time interval is obviously ly a day time series or time intervals can be daily weekly hourly or even sometimes there is something like a sensor data it could be every few milliseconds or micros seconds as well so the size of the time intervals can vary but they are fixed so if I’m saying that the it is daily data then the interval is fixed as daily if I’m saying this data is an hourly data then it is the data is captured every hour and so on so the time intervals are fixed the interval itself you can uh decide based on what kind of data we are capturing so this is a graphical representation the previous one here we saw the table representation and this is how to plot the data so on the Y AIS is let’s say the price or the the stock price and x-axis is the time so against time if you plot it this is how a Time series graph would look so as the name suggest what is time series data time series data is basically a sequence of data that is recorded over a specific intervals of time and based on the past Valu so if we want to do an analysis of Time series past data we try to forecast a future and uh again as the name suggests it is time series data which means that it is time dependent so time is one of the components of this data time series data consists of primarily four components one is the trend then we have the seasonality then cyclicity and then last but not least regularity or the random component sometimes is also referred to as a random component so let’s see what each of these components are so what is Trend trend is overall change or the pattern of the data which means that the data maybe let me just uh pull up the pen and uh show you so let’s say you have a data set somewhat like this a Time series data set somewhat like this all right so what is the overall trend there is an overall trend which is upward Trend as we call it here right so it is not like it is continuously increasing there are times when it is dipping then there are times when it is increasing then it is decreasing and so on but overall over a period of time from the time we start recording to the time we end there is a trend right there is an upward Trend in this case so the trend need not always be upwards there could be a downward Trend as well so for example here there is a downward Trend right so this is basically what is a trend overall whether the data is increasing or decreasing all right then we have the next component which is seasonality what is seasonality seasonality as the name suggests once again changes over a period of time and periodic changes right so there is a certain pattern um let’s take the sales of warm clothes for example so if we not it along the months so let’s say January February March April May June July and then let’s say it goes up to December okay so this is our December D I will just mark it as D and then you again have Jan FB March and then you get another December okay and just for Simplicity let’s mark this as December as the end of the year and then one more December okay so what will happen when if you’re talking about warm clo clothes what happens the sales of warm clothes will increase probably around December when it is cold and then they will come down and then again around December again they will increase and then the sales will come down and then there will be again an increase and then they will come down and then again an increase and then they will come down let’s say this is the sales pattern so you see here there is a trend as well there is an upward Trend right the sales are increasing over let’s say these are multiple years this is for year 1 this is for year two this is for year three and so on so for multiple years overall the trend there is an upward Trend the sales are increasing but it is not a continuous increase right so there is a certain pattern so what is happening what is the pattern every December the sales are increasing or they are peing for that particular year right then there is a new year again when December approaches the sales are increasing again when December approaches the sales are increasing and so on and so forth so this is known as seasonality so there is a certain fluctuation which is uh which is periodic in nature so this is known as seasonality then cyclicity what is cyclicity now cyclicity is somewhat similar to seasonality but here the duration between two cycles is much longer so seasonality typically is referred to as an annual kind of a sequence like for example we saw here so it is pretty much like every year in the month of December the sales are increasing however cyclicity what happens is first of all the duration is pretty much not fixed and the duration or the Gap length of time between two cycles can be much longer so recession is an example so we had let’s say recession in 2001 or 2002 perhaps and then we had one in 2008 and then we had probably in 2012 and so on and so forth so it is not like every year this happens probably so there is usually when we say recession there is a slump and then it recovers and then there is a slump and then it recovers and probably there is another bigger slump and so on right so you see here this is similar to seasonality but first of all this length is much more than a year right that is number one and it is not fixed as well it is not like every four years or every six years that duration is not fixed so the the duration can vary and at the same time the gap between two cycles is much longer compared to seasonality all right so then what is irregularity irregularity is like the random component of the time series data so there is like you have part which is the trend which tells whether the overall it is increasing or decreasing then you have cyclicity and seasonality which is like kind of a specific pattern right uh then there is a cyclicity which is again a pattern but at much longer intervals plus there is a random component so which is not really which cannot be accounted for very easily right so there will be a random component which can be really random as the name suggests right so that is the irregularity component so these are the various components of Time series data yes there are conditions where we cannot use time series analysis right so is it can we do time series analysis with any kind of data no not really so so what are the situations where we are uh we cannot do time series analysis so there will be some data which is collected over a period of time but it’s really not changing so it will not really not make sense to perform any time series analysis over it right for example like this one so if we take X as the time and Y as the value of whatever the output we talking about and if the Y value is constant there is really no analysis that you can do uh leave a time series analysis right so that is one another possibility is yes there is a change but it is changing as per a very fixed function like a sine wave or a c wave again time series analysis will not make sense in this kind of a situation because there is a definite pattern here there is a definite function that the data is following so it will not make sense to do a Time series analysis now before performing any time series analysis uh the data has to be stationary and uh typically time series data is not stationary so in which case you need to make the data stationary before we apply any models like ARA model or any of these right so what exactly is stationary data and what is meant by stationary data let us take a look first of all what is non-stationary data time series data if you recall from one of my earlier slides we said that time series data has the following four components the trend seasonality cyc and random random component or irregularity right so if these components are present in Time series data it is non-stationary which means that typically these components will be present therefore most of the time A Time series data that is collected raw data is non-stationary data so it has to be changed to stationary Data before we apply any of these algorithms all right so a nonstationary Time series data would look like this which means like for example here there is an upward Trend the seasonality component is there and also the random component and so on so if the data is not stationary then the time series forecasting will be affected so you cannot really perform a Time series forecasting on a non-stationary data so how do we differentiate between a stationary and a non-stationary Time series data typically or technically one is of course you can do it visually in non-stationary data the the data will be more flattish the seasonality will of course be there but the trend will not be there so the data May if we plot that it may appear somewhat like this right it’s a horizontal line along the horizontal line you will see compared to the original data which was there was an upward Trend so it was changing somewhat like this right so this is non-stationary data and this is how a stationary data would look visually what does this mean technically this means that stationarity of the data depends on a few things what the mean the variance and the co-variance so these are the three components on which the stationarity of the data depends so let’s take a look at what each of these are for stationary data the mean should not be a function of time which means that the mean should pretty much remain constant over a period of time right so there is there shouldn’t be any change uh so this is how the stationary data Outlook and this is how a non-stationary data Outlook I’ve shown in the previous slide as well so here the mean is increasing that means there is an upward Trend okay so that is one part of it and then the variance of the series should not be also a function of time so the variance also should be pretty much common or should be constant rather uh so this is a if we visually we take a look this is how time series stationary data would look where the variance is not changing here the variance is changing therefore this is nonstationary and we cannot apply Time series is forecasting on this kind of data similarly the co-variance which is basically of the ath term and the i+ MTH term should not be a function of time as well so co-variance is nothing but not only the variance at the ith term but the relation between the variance of the ith term and the I plus MTH or the I plus n term so as again once again visually this is how it would look if the co-variance is also changing with respect to time so these are the all three components should be pretty much constant and that is when you have stationary data and in order to perform time series analysis the data should be stationary okay so let’s take a look at uh the concept of moving average or the method of moving average and let’s see how it works we’ll do simple calculations so let’s say this is our sample data we have the data for three months January February March the sales in hundreds of in thousands rather not hundreds thousands of dollars is given here and uh now we want to find the moving average so how do we find the moving average we call it as moving average three so moving average three is nothing but you take three of the values or the readings add them up and uh divide by three basically the way we take a mean or average of the three values so that is as simple as that so that’s the average first of all so what is moving average moving average is if you now have a series of data you keep taking the three values the next next three values and then you take the average of that and then the next three values and so on and so forth so that is how you take the moving average so let’s take a little more detailed example of car sales so this is how we have the car sales data for the entire year let’s say so rather for four years so year one we have for each quarter quarter 1 2 3 4 and then year two quarter 1 2 3 4 and so on and so forth so this is how we have sales data of a particular car let’s say or a showroom and uh we want to forecast for year five so we have the data for four years we now want to forecast for the fifth year let’s see how it works first of all if we plot the data as it is uh taken the raw data this is how it would look and uh what do you think it is is it stationary no right because there is a trend upward Trend so this is not a stationary data so we um we need to later we will see how to make it stationary but to start with just an example we will not worry about it for now if we will just go ahead and uh manually do the forecasting using what is known as moving average method okay so we are not applying any algorithm or anything like that in the next video we will see how to apply an algorithm how to make it stationary and so on all right so um here we see that all the three or four components that we talked about um are there there is a trend there is a seasonality and then of course there is some random component as well cyclicity may not be it is possible that cyclicity is not applicable in all the situations for sales especially there may not be or unless you’re taking a sales for maybe 20 30 years cyclicity may not come into play so we will just consider uh primarily the trend seasonality and irregularity right so Random it is also known as random irregularity right so we were calling the random or irregularity component so these are the three main components typically in this case we will talk about so this is the component and um we will see how to do these uh calculations so let’s take a look red draw the table including the time code we will add another column which is the time code and uh this the column and we’ll just number it like 1 2 3 4 up to 16 the rest of the data Remains the Same okay so we will do the calculations now now let us do the moving average calculations um or ma4 as we call it for each year so we take all the four quarters and we take an average of that so if we add up these four values and divide by four you get the moving average of 3.4 so we start by putting the value here so that will be for the third quarter let’s say 1 2 3 the third quarter then we will go on to the next one so we take the next four values as you see here and take the average of that which is the moving average for the next quarter and so on and so forth now if we just do the moving average uh it is not centered so what we do is we basically add one more column and we calculate the centered moving average as shown here so here what we do is we take the average of two values and then just adding these values here so for example the first value for the third quarter is actually the average of the third and the fourth quarter so we have 3.5 now it gets centered so similarly the next value would be 3.6 + 3.9 ided 2 so which is 3.7 and so on and so forth okay so that is the centered moving average this is done primarily to smooth the data so that there are not too many rough edges so that is what we do here so if we visualize this data now uh this is how it looks right so if we take the centered moving average as you can see there is a gradual increase if this was not the case if we had not centered it the changes would have been much sharper so that is the basically the smoothening that we are talking about now let’s go and or do the forecast for the fifth year so in order to do the forecast what we will do is we will take the centered moving average as our Baseline and then start doing a few more calculations that are required in order to come up with the prediction so what we are going to do is we are going to use this multiplicity or M multiplicative model in this case and this is how it it looks so we take the product of seasonality and uh the trend and the irregularity components and we just multiply that and in order to get that this product of these two We have basically the actual value divided by CMA YT value divided by CMA will give you the predicted value on YT is equal to the product of all three components therefore St into Y is equal to YT by CMA so this is like this is equal to YT right so therefore if we want St into YT the product of seasonality and irregularity is equal to YT by CMA so that is how we will work it out I also have an Excel sheet of the actual data so let me just pull that up all right so this is how the data looks in Excel as you can see here year 1 quarter 1 2 3 4 year 2 quarter 1 2 3 4 and so on and this is the sales data and then this is the moving average as I mentioned this is how we calculate and this is the centered moving average so this is the primary component that we will start working with and then we will calculate since we want the product of St into ITT that is equal to YT by CMA so if you see these values are nothing but the YT value divided by CMA so in this case it is 4 by 3.5 which is 1.14 similarly 4.5 by 3.7 1.22 and so on and so forth so we take we have the product St into it and uh then the next step is to calculate the average of respective quarters so that is what we are doing here average of respective quarters and then we need to calculate the deseasonalized values so in order to get deseasonalized value we need to divide YT by St that was calculated so for example here it is 2.8 by .9 so we got the decisional value here and uh then we get the trend and then we get the predicted values so in order to get the predicted value which is basically we predict the values for known values as well like for example year one quarter one we know the value but now that we have our model we predict ourselves and see how close it is so we predicted as 2.89 whereas the actual value is 2.8 then we have 2.59 the actual value is 2.1 and so on just to see see how our model works and then continue that into the fifth year because for fifth year we don’t have a reference value okay and if we plot this we will come to know how well our calculations are how well our manual model in this case we did not really use a model but we did on our own manually so it will tell us the trend so for example the predicted value is this gray color here and you can see that it is actually pretty much following the actual value which is the blue color color right and the gray color is the predicted value so the wherever we know the values up to year four we can see that our predicted values are following or pretty much very close to the actual values and then from here onwards when the year five starts the blue color line is not there because we don’t have the actual values only the predicted values so we can see that since it was following the trend pretty much for the last four years we can safely assume that it has understood the pattern and it is predicting correctly for the next one year the next four quarters right so that is what we are doing here so these four quarters we did not have actual data but we have the predicted values so let’s go back and see how this is working in this using the slides so this is we already saw this part and um I think it was easier to see in the Excel sheet so we calculated the St it the product of St and it using the formula like here y by YT by CMA we got that and then we got ST which is basically YT so this is average of the first quarters for all the four years and uh similarly this is the average of the second quarter for all the four years and so on so these values are repeating there are they are calculated only once they get repeated as you can see here and uh then we get the deseasonalized data and that is basically YT by St so we calculated St here and we have YT so y YT by St will give you the deseasonalized data and uh we have got rid of the seasonal and The Irregular components so far now what we are left with is the trend and uh before we start the time series forecasting or time series analysis as I mentioned earlier we need to completely get rid of the non-stationary components so we are still left with the trend component so now let us also remove the trend component in order to do that we have to find the or we have to calculate the intercept and slope of the data because that is required to calculate the trend and uh how are we going to do that we will actually use um what is known as a regression tool or Analytics tool that is available in Excel so you remember we have our data in ex Excel so let me take you to the Excel and uh here we need to calculate the intercept and the slope in order to do that we have to use the regression mechanism and in order to use the regression mechanism we have to use the Analytics tool that comes with Excel so how do you activate this tool so this is how you would need to activate the Tool uh from Excel you need to go to options and uh uh in options there will be addin and in addin you will have um analysis tool pack and you select this and um you just say go it will open up a box like this you say analysis tool pack and you say Okay And now when you come back in to the regular view of excel in the data tab you will see data analysis activated so you need to go to file options and addins and then analysis tool pack typically since I’ve already added it it is coming at the top but it would come under inactive application addin so when you’re doing it for the first time so don’t use VBA you just say analysis tool pack there are two options one with VBA like this one and one without VBA so just use the one without VBA and then instead of just saying okay just take care that you click on this go and not just okay so you say go then it will give you these options only then you select just the analysis tool pack and then you say okay all right so and then when you come back to the main view you click on data okay so this is your normal home view perhaps so you need to come to data and here is where you will see data analysis available to you and then if you click on that there are a bunch of possibilities what kind of data anal analysis you want to do if there are options are given right now we just want to do regression because we want to find the slope and The Intercept so select regression and you say okay and you will get these options for input y range and input X range input y range is the value YT so you just select this and you can select up to here and press enter and input X range you can for now you start with uh the baseline or you can also start with the D seasoned values so you can just click on these and say okay I have already calculated it so these are the intercept and the coefficients that we are getting for these values and we will actually use that to calculate our Trend here right so which is in the J colum so trend is equal to intercept plus slope into the time code so The Intercept is uh out here as we can see in our slide as well so if you see here this is our intercept and the lower value is the slope we have calculated here and it’s shown in the slides as well so intercept the formula is shown here so our trend is equal to intercept plus slope into time code time code is nothing but this one t column A 1 2 3 4 okay so that’s how you calculate the trend and that’s how you use the data analysis tool from Excel using these two we calculate the predicted values and using this formula which is basically trend is equal to intercept plus slope into time code and then we can go and plot it see how it is looking and therefore so we see here that the predicted values are pretty close to the actual values and um therefore we can safely assume that our calculations which are like our manual model is working and hence we we go ahead and predict for the fifth year so till four years we know the actual value as well so we can compare how our model is performing and for the fifth year we don’t have reference values so we can use our equations to calculate the values or predict the values for the fifth year and we can go ahead and safely calculate those values and when we plot for the fifth year as well the predicted values we see that they are pretty much they captured the pattern and we can safely assume that the predictions are fairly accurate as we can also see from the graph in the Excel sheet that we have already seen okay so let’s go and plot it so this is how the plot looks this is the CMA or the centered moving average the green color and then the blue color is the actual data red color is the predicted value predicted by our handcrafted model okay so remember we did not use any regular for forecasting model or any tool we have done this manually and uh the actual tool will be used in the next video this is just to give you an idea about how behind the scenes or under the hood how fusting Works a Time series analysis how it is performed okay so it looks like it has captured the trend properly so up to here is the known reference we have reference and from here onwards it’s purely predicted and uh as I mentioned earlier we can safely assume that the values are accurate and predicted properly for the fifth year so let’s go ahead and Implement a Time series forecast in r first of all we will be using the arima model to do the forecast of uh this time series data so let us try to understand what is arima model so arima is actually an acronym it stands for autor regressive integrated moving average so that is what is ARA model and it is specified by three parameters which is p d and q p stands for autor regressive so let me just mark this so there are three components here Auto regressive integrated moving average okay so these three parameters correspond to those three components so the P stands for auto regressive D for integrated and Q for moving average so let us see what exactly this is so these three factors are p is the number of Auto regressive terms or ar we will see that in a little bit and D is how many levels of differences that we need to do or differentiation we need to do and Q is the number of lagged forecast errors so we’ll see what exactly each of these are so a is the number of autor regressive terms and which is basically denoted by the p and then we have D which is for the number of times it has to be differentiated and then we have q which is for the moving average so what exactly AR terms so in terms of the regression model Auto regressive components refer to the prior values of the current value well what we mean by that is here when we talk about time series data focus on the fact that there is regression so what exactly happens in regression we try to do something like if it a simple linear regression we do some equation like y = mx + C where there are actually there are two variables one is the dependent variable and then there is an independent variable let me just complete this equation as well MX plus C right so this is a normal regression curve or a simple regression curve now here we are talking about Auto regression or Auto regressive so Auto regressive as the name suggests is regression of itself so which means that here you have only one variable which is your maybe the cost of the flights or whatever it is right and the other variable is basically time dependent and therefore the value at any given time and that we will denote as YT for example so there is no X here there is only one variable and which is y and we say YT which is basically the predicted value at a time interval T for example is dependent on the previous Valu so for example there may be A1 and then YT minus1 and then there will be like plus A2 and right plus A2 and YT minus 2 and uh all right and then plus A3 into y tus 3 all right so basically here what we are saying is there’s only one variable here but there is a regression component so we are doing a regression on itself so that’s how the term Auto regression comes into play so only thing is that it is dependent on the pre previous time values so there is a lag let’s say this is the first lag second lag third lag and so on so the current value which is YT is dependent on the previous time lag values so that is what is auto regression component so this is what is shown here for example in this case instead of Y we are calling it as X so that’s the same and this is represented by some equation of that sort depending on how many lags we take so that is the AR component and the term p is BAS basically determines how many lags we are considering so that’s the term e for now what is d d is the degree of differencing so here differencing is like to for the nonseasonal differences right so for example if you take the values like this which are given for five 4 six and so on and so forth if you take the differencing of one after another like for example 5 – 4 or 4 – 5 the next value with the previous value so 4 – 5 so this is known as the first order differencing so the result is min -1 similarly 6 – 4 is 2 7 – 6 is 1 so this is first order differencing and uh here we call it as D is equal to 1 okay and same way we can have second order third order and so on then the last one is q q is the actually by we call it moving average but in reality it is actually the error of the model so we also sometimes represent as ET all right so now ARA model works on the assumption that the data is stationary which means that the trend and seasonality of the data has been removed that is correct okay so this we have discussed in the first part how what exactly is stationary data and how do we remove the non-stationary part of it now in order to test whether the data is stationary or not there are two important components that are considered one is the autocorrelation function and other is the partial autocorrelation function so this is referred to as ACF and pacf all right so what is autocorrelation and what is the definition correlation is basically the similarity between values of a same variable across observations as the name suggest now how do we actually find the aut correlation function the value right so this is basically done by plotting and autocorrelation function also tells you how correlated points are with each other based on how many time steps they are separated by and so on that is basically the time lag that we were talking about and it is also used to determine how past and future data points are related and the value of the autocorrelation function can vary from minus1 to 1 so if we plot this is how it would look autocorrelation function would look somewhat like this and there is actually a readily available function in R so we will see that and you can use that to plot your a corelation function okay so that is ACF and we will see that in our R studio in a little bit and similarly you have partial autocorrelation function so partial autocorrelation function is the degree of association between two variables while adjusting the effect of one or more additional variables so this again can be measured and it can also be plotted and its value once again can go from minus1 to one and it gives the partial correlation of Time series with its own lagged values so lag again we have discussed in the previous uh couple of slides this is how PF plot would look in our studio we will see that as well and once we get into the r studio and with that let’s get into our studio and take a look at our use case before we go into the code let’s just quickly understand what exactly is the objective of this use case so we are going to predict some values or forecast some values and we have the data of the airline ticket sales of the previous years and now we will try to find the or predict the forecast the values for the future years all right so we will basically identify the time series components like Trend seasonality and uh random Behavior we will actually visualize this in our studio and then we will actually forecast the values based on the past values or history data historical data so these are the steps that we follow we will see in our studio in a little bit just quickly let’s go through what are the steps we load the data and it is a Time ser data if we try to find out what class it belongs to the data is actually air passengers data that is already comes preloaded with the our studio so we will be using that and we can take a look at the data and then what is the starting point what is the end point so these are all functions that are really available we’ll be using and then what is the frequency it’s basically frequency is 12 which is like yearly data right so every month the data has been collected so for each year it is 12 and then we can check for many missing values if there are any and then we can take a look at the summary of the data this is what we do in exploratory data analysis and then we can plot the data visualiz the data how it is looking and we will see how the data has some Trend seasonality and so on and so forth all right then we can take a look at the cycle of the data using the cycle function and we can see that it is every month that’s the cycle end of every 12 months a new cycle begins so each month of the year is uh the data is available then we can do box plots to see for each month how the data is varying over the various 10 or 12 years that we will be looking at this data and uh from exploratory data analysis we can identify that there is a trend there is a seasonality component and how the seasonality component varies also we can see from the box plots and we can decompose the data we can use the decompose function rather to see the various components like the C ality Trend and the irregularity part okay so we will see all of this in our studio this is how they will look this is the Once you decompose and this is how you will actually you can visualize the data this is the actual data and this is the trend as you can see it’s going upwards this is the seasonal component and this is your random or irregularity right so we call it irregularity or we can also call it random as you can see here yes so the data must have a constant variance and mean which means that it is stationary before we start any analysis time series analysis and without so basically yeah if it is stationary only then it is easy to model the data perform time series analysis so we can then go ahead and fit the model as uh we discussed earlier we’ll be using ARA model there are some techniques to find out what should be the parameters so we will see that when we go into our studio so the auto ARA function basically tells us what should be the parameters right so these parameters are the p d and q that we talked about that’s what is being shown here so if we use autoa it will basically take all possible values of this PDQ these parameters and it will find out what is the best value and then it will recommend so that is the advantage of using Auto ARA all right so like in uh this case it will tell us what if we use this parameter tra we set the parameter Trace is equal to true then it will basically tell us what is the value of this AIC which has to be minimum so the lower the value the better so for each of these combinations of p d and q it will give us the values here and then it will recommend to us which is the best model okay because whichever has the lowest value of this AIC it will recommend that as your best PDQ values so once we have that we can see that we will basically we can potentially get a model or the equation model is nothing but the equation and based on the parameters that we get and we can do some Diagnostics we can do some plotting to see how whether there is a plot for the residuals so which shows the stationarity and then we can also take a look at the ACF and PF we can plot the ACF and PF and then we can do some forecasting for the future year so in this case we have up to 1960 and then we can see how we can forecast for the next 10 years which is 1970 up to 1970 and once we have done this can we validate this model yes definitely we can validate this model and uh to validate the findings we use uh

junkbox test and this is how you just call box. test and then you pass these parameters and you will get the values that will be returned which will tell us whether this how accurate this model is or accurate the predictions are so the values of P are quite insignificant in this case we will see that and that also indicates that our model is free of autocorrelation and that will basically be it so let’s go back and into our R studio and uh go through these steps in uh real time so we have to import this Library forecast package is not installed you to go here and install the forecast package okay so that’s the easy way to install rather than so click on this install I will not do it now because I’ve already installed so the first time that’s only one time then after that you just have to load it into memory and then keep going so we will load this data called air passengers so by calling this data method and if you see the the data a passengers is loaded here and if we check for the class it is a Time series data TS data so we can check for the dates we can also view the data in a little bit and start date is 19 49 and January and our end date is 1960 December and the frequency is 12 which is like collected monthly so that is the frequency which is uh 12 here and then we check if there are any um missing values there are no missing values and then we take a look at the summary of the data this is all exploratory data analysis and then if you just display the data this is how it looks and then we need to decompose this data so we will kind of store this in an object TS data and then use that to decompose and store the new values let me just clear this for now and uh if we decompose basically as we have seen in the slides decomposing is breaking it into the trend seasonality and The Irregular or random components then you can go ahead and plot it so when you plot it you can see here let me Zoom this this this is our original plot or observed value as it is known as then we have decomposed the three parts which is basically the trend as you can see there is a upward Trend then the seasonal component so this is some regularly occurring pattern and then there is a random value which is basically you cannot really give any equation or function or anything like that so that’s what this plotting has done and then you can actually plot them individually as well so these are the individual plots for the trend for the seasonal component and the Rand component all right so now let’s take a look at the original data and see how the trend is in a way so if we do this linear regression line it will show that the it is going upwards and we can also take a look at the cycle that are there which is nothing but we have a frequency of 12 right so the Cycles will display that it is January February to December and then back to January February and so on and so forth and if we do box plot for the monthly data you will see that for each of the months right and over the 10 years that the data that we have we will see that there is a certain pattern right this is also in a way to find the seasonality component so while January February sales are relatively low around July August the sales pick up so especially in July I think the sales are the highest and this seems to be happening pretty much every year right so this is every year in July there seems to be a peak in the sales and then it goes down and slightly higher in December and so on so that is Again part of our exploratory data analysis and once again let’s just plot the data now as I said in order to fit into an ARA model we need the values of PD and Q now one way of doing it is there are multiple ways actually of doing it the earlier method of doing it was you draw the autocorrelation function plot and then partial aut correlation function plot and then observe that and where does this change and then identify what should be the values of p and Q and so on now R really has a very beautiful method which we can use to avoid all that manual process that we used to do earlier so what R will do is there is a method called Auto ARA and if we just call this Auto ARA method and it will basically go and test the ARA model for all possible values of this parameters PDQ and then it will suggest to you what should be the best model and it will return that best model with the right values of PD and Q so you we as data scientists don’t have to do any manual you know trial and error kind of uh stuff okay so we got the model now and uh this is the model it it has PDQ values are 211 PDQ and this is the seasonal part of it so we can ignore it for now and so if we want to actually understand how this has returned these values 21 one as the best one there is another functionality or feature where we can use this Trace function or Trace parameter so if you pass to Auto ARA the trace parameter what it will do is it will show you how it is doing this calculation what is the value of the AIC basically ASC is what you know defines the accuracy of the model the lower the better okay so for each each combination of PDQ it will show us the value of AIC so let’s run it before instead of me talking so much let’s run this if we run auto ARA with Trace you see here there is a red mark here that means it is performing it’s executing this and here we see the display right so it starts with certain values of PDQ and then it finds that value is too high so it starts with again with some 0 1 1 0er and so on and so forth and ultimately it tells us okay this is our best model you see here it says this is our best model 211 let’s go back and see did we get the same one yes we got the same one when we ran without Trace as well right now why is 211 let us see where is 211 here is our 211 and if you compare the values you see that 1017 is pretty much the lowest value and therefore it is saying this is our best model all other values are higher so that that’s how you kind of um get your model and now that you have your model what you have to do you need to predict the values right so before that let us just do some test of these values so for that you install T Series again if you are doing it for the first time you would rather use this package and install and say T Series and install it and then you just use this Library function to load it into your memory all right so now that we got our model using Auto ARA let us go ahead and forecast and also test the model and also plot the ACF and psf remember we talked about this but we did not really use it we don’t have to use that but at least we will visualize it and uh for some of the stuff we may need this T Series Library so if you are doing this for the first time you may have to install it and my recommendation is don’t use it in the code you go here and install tseries and I will not do it now because I’ve already installed it but this is a preferred method and once you install it you just load it using this libraries function and then you can plot your residuals and this is how the residuals look and you can plot your ACF and psf okay so this is how your PF looks and this is how your ACF looks for now there is really nothing else we need to do with ACF and PF this just to visualize how that how it looks but as I mentioned earlier we were actually using these visualizations or these graphs to identify the values of p d and q and how that was done it’s uh out of scope of this video so we will leave it at that and uh then we will forecast for the next 10 years how do we forecast that so we call forecast and we pass the model and we pass what is the level of accuracy that you need which is 95% and for how many periods right so basically we want for 10 years which is like 10 into 12 time periods so that’s what we are doing here and now we can plot the forecast value so you see this is the original value up to I think 62 or whatever and then it goes up to 72 this blue color is the predicted value let’s go and zoom it up so that we can see it better so from here onwards we forus and you can see that it looks like our model has kind of learned the pattern and this pattern looks very similar to what we see in the actual data now how do we test our model so we can do what is known as a box test and we pass our model here residuals basically with different lags and from those values here the P values here we find that they are reasonably low the P values which means our model is fairly accurate we’ll be creating two dashboards using a sample sales data set so if you want to get the data and the dashboard file that we’ll be creating in this demo then please put your email IDs in the comment section of the video our team will share the files via email now let’s begin by understanding what is a dashboard in Excel a dashboard is a visual interface that provides an overview of key measures relevant to a particular objective with the help of charts and graphs dashboard reports allow managers to get a high level overview of the business and help them make quick decisions there are different types of dashboards such as strategic dashboards analytical dashboards and operational dashboards an advantage of dashboards is the quick detection of outliers and correlations with Comprehensive data visualization it is time-saving as compared to running multiple reports with this understanding let’s jump into our demo for creating our Dash boards we’ll be using a sample sales data set let me show you the data set first so here is the sales data set that we’ll be using for our demo so this data set was actually generated using a simulator today we are going to talk about descriptive statistics in Microsoft Excel and I will walk you through a stepbystep guide on how to perform this in Excel but before we dive into that let’s first take a quick look at what descriptive statistics really means descriptive statistics is is all about summarizing and describing the key features of a data set it helps you get a quick snapshot of your data by calculating things like mean median mode standard deviation range and more these are essential to understanding patterns and Trends in your data without having to look at every single value it’s the first step in analyzing data before jumping into more complex statistics now that we have a basic understanding of what descriptive statistics is let’s get into Excel and see how you can easily calculate these statistics using the buil-in tools I am in Ms Exel and I have a sample of data in my Excel to perform the descriptive Statistics over there is an amazing feature in Excel that many people are not aware about is a data analysis tool pack if you have not come across this word the data analysis tool pack in Excel is an addin in that provides Advanced Data analysis tools for statistical and Engineering calculations it simp fies the complex data analysis Tas by offering the buil-in features to perform various statistical test and data processing without needing to write formulas manually so we need to ensure first if we have activated the tool pack correctly so for that go to file then options and then addin inside addin at the bottom we have manage and where you make sure you have selected the Excel addin and then click on go and then in the check box make sure you have chosen the analysis tool pack option and then click on the okay button now when you see the topmost bar in the data bar has a data analysis button now we are all set to perform the descriptive statistics to perform this I will click on this data analysis button and from there I will choose the descriptive statistics option and select okay now in the input range here we need to enter the range of cells containing your data for that I will click on this upper arrow and highlight the cells containing my data and press enter the next option is grouped by depicts how your data is arranged in your sheet if it is arranged in the columns just like mine you can obviously choose columns and if it is arranged rowwise then go for rows if you have levels on the first row of your data you can take on the checkbox your levels in the first row I don’t have that so I will skip this then if you go for the output options this is where you want your descriptive statistics result to be returned the first option that is output range is where you can specify a particular cell in this sheet only where your result to be returned second option is new worksheet that will answer your your descriptive statistics in a completely new worksheet the third option is new workbook we’ll enter the result all together in a different Excel file I want to enter my data in the same shet here so I’ll go for output range and I’ll choose somewhere here and I will press enter underneath I have various options available I will take all of them and don’t worry I will explain each in more detail so go for okay and here you go you have got the whole descriptive Statistics over here mean standard deviation and more now moving on the first value we got is the mean basically it is the average of all the data values the mean is actually the sum of all the data points divided by the number of the data points available in the sheet it tells you the central value of the data you can separately calculate it in Excel using the function average now moving on we have the second one which is standard error it is nothing but the measure of the variability of sample means in a sampling distribution of means if you want to calculate the standard error separately in Excel with the formula standard deviation divided by the square root of count now moving on we have median in short it is the middle value when data is sorted if I elaborate it then the median is the middle value in a data set when it’s ordered from smallest to the largest if the number of data points is odd is a middle number if it is even it is the average of the two middle numbers separately you can perform this in Excel by using the function median now we have mode it is basically the most frequent value rather it refers to the value that appears most frequently in a data set we can perform it separately in Excel using the function mode next we have a standard deviation the standard deviation measures the spread or dispersion of your data a higher standard deviation means the data points are spread out widely while a lower standard deviation means they’re close to the mean you can perform this by using the function stdv now coming to sample variance variance is the square of the standard deviation if it gives an idea of how data points spread out from the but in squar units to perform this you need to use a v function now we are going to kosis kosis measures the tailess of the data distribution High kosis means more outl of the heavy Tails while low kosis means the data has fewer extreme values describing the higher kosis and the lower kosis next we have skewness skewness measures the asymmetry of the data a positive SK skew means the data is skewed to the right more lower values while a negative skew means the skewed to the left that is more higher values now moving on we have range range is the difference between the maximum and the minimum values in your data set the maximum value we have over here is 9.23 and the minimum value we have is 11.67 so the difference is 78.5 6 to find out the minimum value in the Excel sheet use the function minimum to find out the maximum value in the Excel sheet use the function Max then coming to sum as you all know sum is the total addition of all the values in your sheet we can calculate sum separately by using the function sum then we have count this is the total number of values in the sheet in my case it’s 20 it will vary in everyone else then we have the largest the first written in the bracket denotes the first largest number that is 9.23 if the number would have been two it will denote the second largest number same goes for the smallest the smallest number in my case is 11.67 last but not the least we have confidence level this is the number we need to add and subtract from the mean the addition of the CL and mean is greater than 95% of the CL the subtraction of Cl from mean is lower than than 95% of Cl welcome to Simply learn in this video we are focusing on chat GPT and its groundbreaking role in data analytics in a world where data is the new gold understanding and analyzing this wealth of information is crucial but as the volume of data grows exponentially traditional analysis methods are being pushed to their limits enter CH GPT a revolutionary AI developed by openi that’s transforming how we approach data analytics but what makes chat jbt stand out in the crowded field of data analytics tools how can it not only streamline complex processes but also uncover insights that were previously hidden in plain sight stay tuned as we unrel the capabilities of chat GPT share real world applications and show you how it’s being used by analysis and businesses alike to make smarter datadriven decisions and whether you are a data scientist a business professional or just a tech Enthusiast curious about the future of AI in data analytics this we video is for you so let’s dive in and discover how CH GPT is not just revolutionizing data analytics but also how we understand and interact with the vast Universe of data and don’t forget to hit that like button subscribe and ring the bell to stay updated on all our future Explorations into the fascinating world of technology now let’s get started and unlock the potential of chat GPD for data analytics together so guys an Excel data analyst always looks for ways to improve their efficiency and gain deeper insight sites from the data that’s where chat jbt comes in handy so chat jbt is an AI powered language model that can assist you in various task including Excel based data analysis and for that data analysis let’s dive into some demos to see how it works so guys as you can see this is the chat jpt 4 and you could see this has the support of D browsing and Analysis and usage limits May apply like we have the version that has some usage limits and for the day data I have downloaded the data from the kar I will provide you the link in the description if you want to download the same data you can and I have that in my downloads so this is the data that we’ll be using so the first thing we’ll be doing is data cleaning and preparation so firstly let’s explore data cleaning and preparation before diving into analysis it’s essential to ensure that data is clean and ready for processing so for that we will write a prompt in chat JB and ask him to clean the data chat JP has the feature to insert the files provide the Excel file to the chat jpt and we’ll ask him that can you help me identify and remove duplicates in this Excel spreadsheet so let’s ask him can you help me identify and remove duplicates duplicates from this Excel spreadsheet from the provided Excel spreadsheet you could see that J has started generating the response and he is telling us that he can definitely help us with that and he is analyzing that so you could see that J has provided us the response so let’s first go to our spreadsheet so this is the spreadsheet order number quantity ordered price of each quantity and Order lines so you could see that first J GPT has encountered an error and that is with the character and coding Mis patch and then he has loaded the spreadsheet successfully with the second attempt and you could see that he has provided a like the smaller or the briefer version of the spreadsheet that is the data set consist of sales data with column such as order number quantity order price each order line sales order date status so he asking us could you specify how you would like to identify duplicates for example should we consider a row a duplicate if all its values match another row exactly or are there specifically columns we should focus on to determine duplicates so we should or here we will be focusing on the column section so here we want to identify column section so is asking which columns they should identify duplicates so we want the duplicates in order number so the CH G has started analyzing this spreadsheet so you could see that CH gpts address the response that they have identified a total of 287 rows in the spreadsheet that have duplicates based on the order number column so this indicates that multiple rows share the same order number suggesting there might be different items or transactions within the same order would you like to proceed by removing these duplicates while keeping either the first for last occurence of each order number or do you have another approach in mind for handling these duplicates so before identifying the duplicates what we’ll do is we’ll first get rid of the extra spaces so we’ll ask chat jbt that first find the Extra Spaces in the spreadsheet and help us remove move them so you could see that it has started analyzing it so he is asking us that would you like to proceed with any further cleaning or data manipulation yes we want to proceed further with data cleaning only and now we will treat all the blank cells if there are any now treat all the blank cells if there are any so the spreadsheet contains blank cells in the following columns with the respective counts of blank entries that is address line two has 2521 blank sales than the state so depending on your preference or the requirements of data analysis we can treat these blank cells in several ways such as filling them with the placeholder value that is not provided using a specific value that makes sense for data that is example a default state or TY but potentially leaving them as if blanks carry meaningful information in the context of your data so what we’ll do we will provide a placeholder provide a placeholder instead that is not provided or not applicable okay so you would see in that has responded that it has replaced the plank cells in the columns that is address line to State postal code and territory with the placeholder node provided so you could see there’s a verification sample showing the updates so this is how you could clean the data and now with chat jpt you can quickly identify and eliminate duplicates in your Excel spreadsheet using buil-in functions and formulas saving your time and effort so that would be done by the chat GPT and you can download the Excel file from the chat GPT only after that you can just ask him that provide me the output or the resulted spreadsheet so if we talk about now data analysis and visualization let’s delve into that so Excel offers powerful tools for analyzing and visualizing data and chat GPT can help you make the most of them so for this also we’ll write a prompt to the chat gy and we’ll write for example we’ll write please create a pivot table and a corresponding chart to analyze sales performance by region so let’s see like this prompt what output does chat Jey show to us so let’s ask him please create a PR table and a corresponding chart to analyze sales performance by region so you would see that jut has started analyzing the data and the spreadsheet and you could see that the pivot table below shows the sales performance per region or the territory so this table indicates that the EMA region has the highest Sal performance followed by regions where the territory was not provided than apek and finally Japan so now let’s create a chart to visually represent this sales per performance by region you could see that it has provided a chart that is a bar chart illustrating the sales performance by teritory so you could see the guys that it has provided us the analysis and J jpd can guide you through the process of creating pivot tables charts and other visualizations in Excel enabling you to gain valuable insights from your data with ease so let’s move to Advanced analysis and automation so lastly we will explore Advanced analysis and automation so Excel capabilities extend beyond basic functions and chat jpt can help you leverage its full potential and for this also we’ll write a prompt to the chat GPD that can you assist me in building a forecasting model to predict future sales based on historical data present in the spreadsheet so let’s see what Chad j respond to us so let’s ask him can you assist me in building a forecasting model to predict future sales based on historical data so let’s see what CH J respond to us so you could see that building a forecasting model to BU future sales based on historical data involves several steps so for this you have to prep prep the data select a model train the model evaluate the model and make predictions so let’s start by preparing the data we’ll aggregate sales by order date to create a Time series of total daily sales then we’ll choose a model based on data’s characteristics so we will grant the permission to chat gyy to proceed with the steps so we started analyzing the data so you could see that that the data has been prepared into a Time series of total daily sales and before choosing a forecasting model it’s helpful to visualize the sales time series to understand its characteristics such as Trend and seasonality so Jad jyy has looed a daily sales data and then he has given the visual Trends and the possible seasonal patterns and the next steps would include testing for stationarity model selection and parameter touring model training and then forecasting so you could follow all these steps with the help of chat GPT and could create a forecasting model if you want we can move to the next step so you could like provide a prom to the chat chipy that move to or proceed with Next Step so step by step JJ will provide you a forecasting model or it will help you create a forecasting model as you can see it is started analyzing it so the augmented D Fuller that is ADF test gives up a P value of approximately 0.33 since this P value is less than the common significance level of 0.05 we can reject the null hypothesis that the time Series has a unit root meaning the time series is stationary so you could see that is asking us shall we proceed with the Sima model parameter selection yes here is the model parameter selection so you could select any based on the trends and the bar graphs ploted by the chat gbd so you could see guys that the chat G has analyzed the spreadsheet and provided the response that the grid search for the optimal Sera parameters based on the lower information Criterion suggest the best fit model uses the parameter 011 and for ARA and 01112 that is for the seasonal component so you could see that it has provided the model and the parameters now he asking us shall we move on to forecasting future sales with this model yes proceed with that so you could see that with chj assistance you can build complex forecasting models in Excel allowing you to make informed decisions and plan for the future effectively so chat jpt is a valuable tool for Excel users and data analysis offering assistance in data cleaning analysis visualization and Automation and by integrating Chad GT in your Excel workflows you can enhance your productivity and uncover new insights from your data so you can try J gbt for Excel data analytics today and take your Excel skills to the new level and you would see that uh this an error in the analyzing and he has encountered an error while trying to plot the forecast with its confidence intervals so this type of error can occur due to data type issues particularly when handling data indices in forecast and despite the cup the forecasting process using the ca model was completed and we were able to generate forecast for the next 12 months unfortunately due to the plotting issue he couldn’t visually display it so we’ll ask him can you try once again so you could see that this time J gbt has provided us the forecast for the next next 12 months that is the forecast have been successfully ploted along with the historical daily data so here we have our forecast model and with the chat G’s assistance we can move with other analysis also today we are going to talk about Anova in Microsoft Excel and I will walk you through a stepbystep guide on how to perform this in Excel but before we dive into that let’s first take a quick look at what Anova really means Anova which is analysis of variance in Excel is a statistical method to compare the means of three or more groups to see if they are significantly different from each other it helps determine if variations in data due to real differences or random chance it’s useful because it helps in finding differences as it shows if groups have different results it saves time as it tests all the groups at once it clears insights and helps make decisions based on our data for example if teacher wants to compare the effectiveness of the three different teaching methods on students Math course they can divide the class into three groups of 14 students each using Anova the teacher can analyze the math scores to determine if one teaching method is truly better or if the differences in scores are due to chance now that we have a basic understanding of what Anova actually is let’s get into Excel and see how you can easily calculate this using the build tools I have a sample of data in my Excel to perform the Anova over there is an amazing feature in Excel that many people are not even aware about is a data analysis tool pack if you have not come across this word the data analysis tool pack in Excel is an addin that provides the Advanced Data analysis tools for statistical and Engineering calculations it simplifies the complex data analysis task by offering the buil-in features to perform various statistical test and data processing without needing to write formulas manually so we need to ensure first if we have activated the tool pack correctly so for that we need to go to the file and then options and then we have to move to addin and here in the manage you have to choose for the Excel addin and click on go after that you need to click on this analysis tool pack and click on okay now when you see the topmost bar that is the data if you click on this data you will see a data analysis button over here now we are all set to perform the analysis of variance to perform this I will click on data analysis button and from there I will choose an over single factor and select on okay now here in the input range we need to enter the range of the cells containing your data for that I will click on the supper arrow button and highlight mys that containing the data the next option is grouped by depicts how your data is arranged in your sheet if it is arranged in a column like like I have arranged choose columns and if it is arranged in a row go for the rows now here in the labels in the first row if you have labels like mine like group a group b and Group C do take this button then Alpha is generated and here in the output options this is where you want your result to be return the first option is the output range is where you can specify a particular cell where you want your result to be returned the second option will enter the answer in a new worksheet and the third option will enter the result in a particularly new Excel file I will chose the second option and we’ll name it as Anova now we have got this result within just one click you can definitely get the Anover single Factor results now I will explain each factor what it means count some average variance SS dfms Etc in the next PP so the first table depicts the summary of the data available in the analysis so the first one we have got is count count is a total number of data points in each group here in group a group b and Group C we have 14 data points now moving on we have sum sum is a total value if you add up all the values in each group so the sum of group a is 958 sum of Group B is 1093 and sum of Group C is 1280 now moving on we have average average is the sum divided by the total number of data points in each group so the average of group a is 68.42% this is the average of the square differences from the mean now the variance of group a is 14134 the variance of Group B is 20 9.60 and the variance of Group C is 11 9.49 now the second table here is divided into three groups the between groups within groups and total so the first row depicts the result when the between rows are classed as a source of variation the second row depic when the source of variation is with within the groups and the finally the last row is just the total now we will see what each column represents so the first one we have is SS SS stands for sum of squares between group SS is the total variation explained by the differences between the groups within group SS is actually the total variation within the groups due to the random error or individual variability and the total s’s is the sum of the between group s s and within group SS so the between group SS over here is 37351 n within group SS is 6115 78 and the total SS is 98597 now moving on we have DF DF stands for degrees of freedom this is calculated slightly differently for between groups DF is the number of groups present in your data minus one I have three groups so 3 minus 1 I have got two to determine this within groups DF is the number of observations minus the number of groups that is 42 minus 3 that is equal to 39 then we have MS Ms stands for mean Square you can think it as the variance for each source of variation to calculate this we can simply divide the sum of squares by the degrees of freedom now moving on we have f f stands for statistic here the F statistic is calculated as Ms between the groups divided by the MS within the groups and it is equal to 11995 4 now moving on we have the F critic F critic stands for f critical value it is calculated easily by Excel or you can perform it manually by looking at the critical value table so the F statistics is then compared with the F critical value if the F statistical value is greater than the F critical value we can conclude that the test is significant now moving on we have the P value the probability of obtaining an F statistic as Extreme as were more than the observed value assuming the null hypothesis is true a small P value that is less than 0.05 suggests that the significant differences between group exist as my P value is more than the alpha level that is the 0.05 we fail to reject the null hypothesis therefore there is no difference between the means of the three groups so now you can see some data on my spreadsheet so we have row ID order ID audit date and ship date ship mode Etc so this means that this particular data set belongs to a a sales data set for a store or something so what I have done is if you look out the videos on our Channel we already have created one of the interact Ive dashboards using the same data set so we try to extract month- on Monon sales region category subcategory sales country-wise sales shipment type sales Etc right so I have uh you know kept the data as it is and all the pivot tables as it is now let’s say we do not know how to create all these pivot tables and pivot charts and slicers Etc we just know that we have the data and you’re new to this and you want to an analyze your data how do you do that chat GPD is here for the rescue so before we get on to chat GPD let’s quickly remove all our reference pivot tables about pivot table so I’m quickly deleting all these they left out with only the data right and again you can do this dashboard using chat gbd 3.5 or in case if you have a premium version which is chat gbd 4 you can detect ly attach your data set onto the chat GPT prompt and chat GPT will do all the analysis you need right but for now let’s experiment using the chat GPT 3.5 version which is basically open source and free to use now let’s quickly hop on to chat GPD so there you go we have chat GPD version 3.5 we are not switching to four so now let’s quickly um EXP explain what we are up to H GPD just keep it simple as if you’re talking to your friend the D set belongs to Superstore sales or is about the data set is about uh Superstore sales report and I need to create a dashboard for mon one month SE so this is the prompt and basically I just explained in a brief way I’m not uh giving a detailed information but hope this works so basically uh what you are supposed to do is uh give uh the requirement one by one but I’m giving it in a single PR so that I’ll get the results in one single Pro let’s move for that so what you’re trying to explain CH GPD is that you have a sales data set and you’re using Excel for for storing it and for manipulating the data and trying to build some Innovative interactive visually appealing charts and you don’t know how to do it so you explain that to your chat jpd and uh what are the uh things you are looking to build what are the charts you’re looking to build so I’m looking to build a month- on-month sales report which can be a quarter on quarter month on month year on Year date wise however the way you like it right so uh make sure that your data is properly formatted first so here let’s check out that your date column is formatted to date data type right sometimes what happens is the representation of date uh changes to user by user let’s say this particular data set or this particular inventory is been allocated to five different people to entry the data right somebody might use this type of you know here you have uh let’s create a new sheet and try to let me elaborate what I’m trying to explain so let’s say U person one person three so let’s say I use this type of uh formatting 15th December 2025 something like that and somebody else uses 15 12 2025 and another one uses 15 December only 25 and also sometimes few people also uh intend or you know may uh follow uh a date pattern which looks something like this December the 31st 2025 right and it’s not wrong so many people will have different uh conventions of writing their dates so you need to make some data cleaning and okay if you are coming back to data cleaning we have listed a video in our descriptions for data cleaning in Excel and uh that would help you in various uh data cleaning operations that are um you know used in day-to-day lives of a data analyst so that should help so basically what you are looking for is so instead of General go back to the data types and here you can check out the data type options and you can either give a short date long date or in the case you want to go for some additional formatting you can also go to more formatting and here you can check out the custom formatting options here you can give a customized option for now I want to go with date and the date I want to go with is this particular one which gives me date month and yeah click on that and you should be good to go right so make sure that all the uh uh dates in your spreadsheet are following one single date pattern so that when it comes to uh month on month quarter on quarter and earby sales that will help you a lot okay it will just give you a filtered option it will give you year on year first then quarter on quarter next and if you expand the option of quarter on quarter you will have month on month and if you expand the month then you will have date wise so you will have a you know better understanding when we perform this operation in a practical Way in real time and then we have the next type of chart where we want to identify country-wise sales then we have regionwise sales so let’s say I have one country here let’s say I want sales from France and uh I want to know what are the uh sales happening in central region of France North region of France so you’ll have region wise sales there and category wise which category is giving you the maximum profits or the maximum sales and inside the category which is that subcategory or which product is that that which is giving you the highest number of sales you can identify that and based on that you can plan a business uh you know you can get up with a business strategy there and shipment modes so which type of shipment mode which should you invest in much so that you can you know offer better services to your customers so everything comes so this is what I want to um you know um extract from my D set so this is my requirement you have explained this to your chat GPD through the prompt and just enter now chat GPT should help you break down the requirements and chat GPT should help you uh how to you know it’ll get tell you how to uh do the process so here it will tell you the line chart so basically it’s a it’s a it’s a rule that month on Monon sales or quote on quote sales basically wherever the time is involved the line chart is the best to represent your numbers so now um it basically tells you how to uh represent your charts in what or how what type of chart to be selected that’s good but now uh can you help me create create the first chart in Excel there you go so it tells you how to create it and sure you have a column for dates and other corresponding values so basically it is telling you to have a properly mentioned or properly defined metadata or column headers then select the data go to the insert tab choose the line chart okay and let’s say uh you wanted to create an interactive dashboard right so to create an interactive dashboard or to basically create a dashboard you need a pivot tables and you don’t know how to create a pivot table you can ask chat GPD to help you create a a pivot table help me create a private table for the first type for all the types okay or for the data set certainly so it’ll mention you the steps to follow to create a PIV table there you go so what’s the first step highlight the range of cells that contain your data set and including headers and go back to Excel and you can just click on any cell and control a all your T set has been selected or these days you can just select one of the cells and go to insert menu and pivot table and now from the table range Excel will automatically select the entire range of the table you’re looking for or you’re working on and in casee if you are having any doubts on that you can just select all the range and go to the same insert option and select the pivot table click on okay in a new worksheet and there you go you have your new uh say U pivot table let’s delete this now remember we wanted to create the month-on-month sale for the first U pivot table and pivot chart so and remember about the uh date formatting so we’ll be looking on that now we will drag odd date onto rows here and you can see here so this is what I was talking about so Excel has automatically segmented your dates we we have about 10,000 rows in this particular data set and it has segregated all the 10,000 rows into four different years 2020 21 22 and 23 and if you expand the selection of year it has uh segregated again into pter one two three and four right and if you expand P one you have month-on-month sales in quarter one month-on-month sales in quarter two and month-on-month sales in quarter three and so on right so this is why I was requesting you to have a proper data formatting for all your dates right which could be really helpful when you want to extract the quarter on quarter sales and date wise sales and year-wise sales right so now we wanted to find out month- on-month sales right or year on-ear sales so where is the sales yeah here we have the sales parameter just drag that onto the values and there you go now format this into the currency type so the currency is dollars American dollars and you can eliminate the leading zeros here if you don’t want them there you go now you have the whole number here you can also do the same for this you can select the entire table go to pivot table okay let’s check the uh options provided by chat GP so basically we have created a pivot table now we want to create a pivot chart how do I create a pivot chart so again it’s making really clear statements and really clear steps so it’s again making sure that you create a pivot table first right so we have a pivot table and uh highlight pivot table data click anywhere on your pivot table to highlight the entire range insert pivot chart with the pivot table selected go to the insert tab on the ribbon then click on pivot chart and uh open the insert chart dialogue box choose the type you want and uh customize the chart select the chart so customizing the chart we’ll look onto it and Fields if you want to keep a few Fields you can and if you want to eliminate a few Fields you can you can also do that refresh data let’s say why refresh data see charb is so brilliant right so let’s say uh I have the sales data until 2023 and now we are in 2024 let’s say we update 2024 onto this particular stret sheet and now we have that particular data in the original spreadsheet but that is missing here in that scenario what you can do is just go to data and here you will find the refresh all option once you click on this you can find the 2024 data updated here for now we have not added yet but in case if it’s added all you can do is just refresh your sheet and everything will change so brilliant suggestion from chat jpt and save and share in case if you want to share so let’s follow the same steps select any cell in the pivot table select all the sheets go to insert Tab and here recommended charts or go to the charts option and select the chart that you are looking for so we are dealing with uh time so I would go with the line chart just click okay but in case if you want to create an interactive dashboard just go to pivot table analyze and here you have the pivot charts and again it’ll give you the same option just select the line chart here and press okay so you have your line chart over here so again if if you are editing this so you can remove the Legends if you want remove um anything else or you can customize that okay there you go and if you want to edit the name of the chart you can also do that so I will do this as M Sales report okay accordingly I’ll change the sheet name there you go right now quickly we will create the other charts as well so the process is same you can hold control and drag this particular sheet and you have the next sheet so the next uh requirement that we had that we requested chat jpd was the country wise sales so everything will remain the same what changes is okay let’s close this and here instead of order data we will have okay let’s remove this from rows and quarters months right country so we will drag country into rows and there you go now we have countries now country wise so you can uh select this cell go to pivot table analyze pivot chart and you can select the bar graph so it automatically gave you the first suggestion is bar graph click on that and you have the bar graph over here and you can also edit the chart you don’t want you don’t want the Legends you can remove them and edit the name of the chart to Country wise sales go and uh quickly drag and drop the sheet again new pivot table and here you wanted categ wise sales or segment wise sales uh close this particular thing be this and instead of country you’re going to add segment to the Rose and remove country and you have segment wise sales select any cell on the pivot table go to pivot table analyze pivot chart and here you can use any of the available um charts here let me use the final chart or histogram bar chart will be better press okay and there you go you have the bar chart same edit your you know customize your uh chart change the name to segment wise sales hold control and drag the sheet now you have subcat wise sales instead of segment you will be selecting the subcategory you can remove segment and you can see the chart also changed here and again you can do the category wise sales so this was segment wise sales you can quickly change the segment to category and you have it we quick quickly go back to yeah so we have done the category Wise subcategory Wise region wise is remaining and shipment modes so quickly drag or drop the region remove subcategory from the list there you have the region wise sales edit the name and the last one which is about the shipment modes remove region and there you go you can create a new dashboard over here and name it as dashboard you can do some customization to your dashboard like selecting these sales giv it a color there you go now you can quickly copy and paste all these uh charts to the dashboard starting from the month-on-month sales copy paste so I’ll quickly do all the uh pas thingss as soon as possible e e there you go you can also manage the size of these charts so that everything fits onto one sheet so for now let’s try to unpen this so that we have a little better visual appearance okay not a problem and now uh we need some filter right so something which can make it a little more interactive that’s when you add slices and let’s say you don’t know how to add slices back to chat gbd and ask chat GPD how do I add slices to my dashboard there you go so is telling you to uh add everything in a step-by-step way and it also is talking about the inter activity right it’s it is asking you to connect all the slices it it’s telling you to report the connections right if you just add the slices based on one single okay basically you need to select one of your charts here and select a pivot table or pivot chart go to the pivot table a chart associate with a slicer and insert and go to the insert Tab and insert a slicer I I’ll tell you that so basically it it’s telling you in a very beautiful way step by-step manner right and even after adding the slicer it it is telling you to connect all the uh basically all the charts or all the um you know chart dashboards and charts you created at this particular tutorial and connect all the charts to that particular slicer using the report connections option and you can get the interactivity right so in in a very beautiful manner it has explained let’s try the way it has explained to us go to the dashboard select any one of it and uh go to the insert option and here you have have the slicer right so now you have all the slices over here so basically we wanted what type of slices so I have created a month-on-month uh chart so I’ll go with audit date slicer which is here then I have created segment wise sales so I want segment slicer country wise slicer category and subcategory wise slicers region wise so region slicer and do I have anything else else let’s scroll down that’s the last one so where is shipment here yeah shift mode country region category subcategory segment order dates and Shi mode so I will have multiple slices in one go right now you have to arrange your slices in such a way that they are interactive and they they look like they are sorted in one place so let me do that quickly we have some space left here in the bottom place of the dashboard you can also keep your slices there so what basically chat GPD meant was if you try to use the slices here it will you know the changes will reflect only in one of the pivot charts not on all the pivot charts so to get that interactivity to get that connectivity between all the charts you need to do a small setting which is called as report connections so select one of the slices over here right click and here you have something called report connections so when you report connections you have all the pivot charts and pivot tables that you just created you can just select all those pivot tables that you created and press on okay so that all these pivot tables are connected to that particular slicer uh you can just expand this and check if all the pivot tables are selected press okay do the same for all the slices I’ll quickly do that e e so there you go we have interconnected all the charts now let’s say I want to find out the sales that happened in the latest year just go to the filters select any of the dates 2023 and you have the data and if you want to select any particular country then you can also do that I want to go with United Kingdom and in United Kingdom we have all the data here let’s say I want to check out only for the phones there you go now you have an interactive dashboard which will tell you the sales that happened on the date of 16th of November 2023 in the region United Kingdom for phones all right and uh segment is home or office ship and mode with standard class and major sales that happen are from nor region and the categor is from tech technology right and that’s how you create an interactive dashboard using chat GPD in Excel so each and every step has been mentioned very clearly by chat GPD and you have all the data in one place so let’s quickly remove all the filters and there you have the entire dashboard now before we get started let’s look at the website through which we want to pull the data now this is the stock analysis website that we are looking at and we want to pull this particular data from this particular data set so here we have some sample data and this is the table that we looking at now if you expand each and everything from this data set we have a few more couple of tables you know go through that but now let’s focus on this particular data right now we need to switch to Microsoft Excel so here you can see you have a lot of options here and if you see into the data here you have an option that says get data and here you can pull data not just from a website you can also pull data from an existing workbook from a database from cloud or any other if it’s data you can just pull it now that’s the best feature of Microsoft Excel now if you just go to the bottom section here which says other sources and here select the from web option and this will open a par quy window for you but before we get started on pulling the data we need to do one more thing which is about copying the URL which you need to paste it somewhere here let’s go back to the website now I can just copy the URL go back to Excel and here you can paste the URL and press on okay now here you go you have established a successful connection with the particular website now here you have a couple of tables in that particular website now just click on those tables and you can see the sample preview of the data you’re looking at table 0o table one table two Etc just look at the preview and select the data table that you are looking forward to have it in your dat set now let’s say I want to go with this particular one you can just click on load or if you have some transformation to be done let’s say you wanted to categorize this based on name like first name last name or if you wanted to make sure to do some calculations or find out the rate of the product or anything as such mathematical calculation or data transformation that you want to do you can go with the option which says data transformation or if you’re feeling happy with the data that’s currently on your data set then you can just click on load now go with load for time being and it’ll run some queries and your data will be loaded and also just in case if you wanted to know if this particular dat set is really dynamic or not let’s say somebody does some an update on the particular website since this is a stock trading website maybe there are updates u based on per day or based on week right and someone adds some new data onto the website and again you cannot carry out the same operation right in such scenarios you just go to this option which says refresh all and you can refresh the data and automatically the new entries will be added to the same table you can also see some of the queries running right now it is quick so you can see that you can see an option that says query is running in the bottom section of the Excel spreadsheet let’s look at it once again while I press the refresh button run in query background that’s how it runs and you have the updated data table on your Excel spreadsheet imagine combining a Simplicity of excel with the power of python sounds exciting right you must be wondering if it requires a lot of coding what if I tell you that with almost negligible coding with python in Excel lets you perform the Advanced Data analysis you don’t need to be a coder or a developer to use it with python and Excel you can analyze large dat dat sets creates stunning visualizations with libraries like mat ploted and even automate task like report Generation all within excel’s familiar interace it’s a game changer for anyone looking to work smarter and faster with data no matter the coding experience in this video I’ll show you some amazing things you can do with python and Excel from creating data frames to filtering data with the simple queries it’s packed with features that make your work easier but before before we dive in let’s take a quick look at what python in Excel is all about python in Excel is a feature in Microsoft Excel that integrates python directly into the Excel environment allowing users to write python code and execute it within Excel shets this integration combines Python’s powerful data analysis visualization and automation capabilities with excel’s familiar interface now that we know what python is in Excel let’s explore how we can use it so I am inside Excel and you must be looking for python over here so basically you can go to this formula section and see insert python option available over here you can get started just by clicking on the icon or you can just click one cell and you can write equal to py and then press tab now the python mode is activated so as we are working with data the first step is to send the data to that python because it needs to see it so that it can actually work with it to do that you need to select the whole data set for that I’ll select this and now you can see over this section that it is written the data range I mean the sales range and headers is equal to true as we have headers over here now press enter now you can see that it didn’t happen anything only it went to the next line for me to run this we need to press control plus enter Control Plus enter and see what we got we got a data frame over here if not aware data frame is a two-dimensional TBL data structure in Python provided by the Panda’s Library it is similar to an Excel spreadsheet or SQL table consisting of the rows and the columns now take a look at beside the formula button here this is actually the python object and even we have a drop down over here so it is written python output and we have a python object that is the present form and the Excel value now I can switch to this Excel value and we get my whole data available over here this is basically dates so we have imported this data set over here now as it is taking too much space I can go back to the python object and make it compact now if you’re interested in knowing what’s inside this data frame you particularly click on this image and there will be a visualization appearing for you the first five sets over here and the last five data sets over here it is basically the beginning and the last part part of the whole data set this data frame is a fundamental part of a specific python Library that’s called the pandas pandas is like your goto toolkit in Python for working with data it makes the handling tables like spreadsheets or databases like this super easy with this data frame structure so whether you’re cleaning the messy data or analyzing Trends or marging data sets pandas has covered everything plus it works great with the libraries like numai and matl so you can explore and visualize data effortlessly so better you can go and research about it I will talk about this later but guys now I’ll tell you what all cool things you can do with this now I’ll go to another cell then switch to python mode py and tab and then take the reference of this previous data frame and I’ll write dot describe open and close parenthesis and then Control Plus enter see I got another data frame back so as I got a new data frame I’ll switch to this Excel mode value and let’s see it’s a date so we have some information so the total count of quantity we have is 20 the mean is 23.7 and the sales mean is also 168 7.6 minimum is this and everything we have got now we’ll move to python object it basically gives a quick Insight of the data set now it must be planning to perform various calculations using this data set so it’s better we give it a name so that you don’t have to reference to the cell again and again for that you need to go and select the first data frame and then write in the formula bar here just type the name given to it I will give it as DF which represents the data frame before everything and then um you can press control enter so I have already defined the name to this so every time I don’t need to take a reference of this data frame now now basically we can now go and write DF do describe control enter now nothing has changed now let’s talk about the shortcut keys like the quotations now suppose if I go to this Excel value and I want my product details over here so for that I would go here DF do product do describe and control enter now you can see that the total product count is 20 the unit products we have is eight and the top selling product is headphones and the frequency of that headphones are five now keep one thing on mind that now my value for this header is just product if I would be having like product details like having spaces and everything I can’t write product over here I need that third bracket on and third bracket off so keep that in mind unless you don’t have a space in your head and name you can type like this you can write DF do product. describe now there are lots of functionalities in P I repeat now there are various functionalities in the Panda’s Library some of them that all are familiar with is a sum and average so let’s suppose I want the total cells over here so I’ll shift to this python mode and I’ll write DF dot sales dot sum and open and close parenthesis then I press control enter for running it and you can see the total sales has come in the similar way you can even get the average you just have to replace this sum method with mean and then Control Plus enter and now you can see the average value of the sales so you must be thinking right now that this can be done with Excel functions as well so why do we need python don’t worry I have got you covered so let’s take this tutorial a little forward let’s think we were a total sales for each date available over here then for this I’ll switch to a cell and I will activate this python mode and then type DF that is this data frame initially we have dot Group by this is a function in Excel then open parenthesis and we’ll write date then close parenthesis dot sales dot sum just like the previous one we made and then control+ enter and I want an Excel view of this whole series so let’s see this may be loading and you can see the date over here and the corresponding sales it works so wonderfully that you can do data filtering and data analysis in just a few seconds so now I want everything on a

monthly basis so for that I’ll do I’ll get inside this group by and I’ll write PD dot dot grouper first bracket on and will write key equal to date comma frequency equal to M and close parenthesis and control enter so it has basically given C for February for March for April May and in this way you can get the whole monthly wise sales now I want to give this a name as chart type as and I will press enter now I will write chart Dot Plot xal to date comma y = to sales comma kind equal to line and I will close this parenthesis now press control enter and you will get a very little chart over here have to wait for some time and you can see a great thing very interesting one over here now I’ll show something more cooler than this so I’ll select one cell over here now I will select something over here equal to Python and tab and then I’m using pd. melt start the first parenthesis DF that is a First Data frame comma ID verse that is equal to date comma product close the third bracket then comma value verse equal to third bracket open quantity comma sales and control enter and we’ll see something amazing we’ll go to this Excel View and we can see the date product variable and we have actually merged the quantity and the sales and this is basically the date so with this you can do very amazing things in Excel using python so there are much more than this a cell address is a combination of column letter and a row number that identifies a cell on a worksheet basically each cell will have an Associated column number column letter and a row number so you have to keep in mind it will be always be a column letter and a row number each Excel sheet will have suppose for instance if you take row five rows will be in numbers and the columns will be in letters column a column B column C column D and so on and the numbers will be for the rows so for instance if you take this particular uh cell the cell address is D5 row column D and row five so this is the cell address now let’s move on to the next one now you will be asked what is relative cell referencing and absolute cell referencing in Excel so relative cell referencing is usually the relative references change when a formula is copied to another cell depending on the destination’s row and column okay so this is called relative cell referencing absolute cell referencing irrespective of the cell you know you don’t have to depend on the value of the cell destination there is no change when a formula is copied so this we I’ll explain it in the uh next Slide the basic difference is this type of referencing is there by default in Excel relative cell referencing you just insert the formula you don’t need to put a do dollar sign in the formula whereas absolute cell referencing if you don’t want to change in the formula when it’s copied across cell then absolute cell referencing requires you to add a dollar sign before and after the column and row address so C for instance this is relative referencing you know if you see this this particular cell is having a we put the value as A3 into B3 so what it will do is it will multiply A3 and B3 and it will give the product this is relative cell reference whereas absolute cell referencing is again the same thing but you have to put a dollar sign before the column and the row number so here your specific Ying this as A3 into B2 okay A3 into B2 and it will give you this particular answer irrespective of that it will give you it will calculate what is there in this and it will give you the answer okay now we move on to the next point is basic question when you scroll across an Excel sheet sometimes you have a header on the first row and if you scroll down you will not be able to see the first row so there is a process or the there is a trick to freeze the pains in the Excel so you just need to have the rows locked so how do you freeze pain this is the question so what you need to do is you need to select the view tab go to the view Tab and go to freeze pains it’s a basic thing and you will see this if you see here select the third row and click freeze paines so you just select this and click freeze paines okay so you’re going here and you’re going to the third row and you are going to view Tab and you’re selecting free Spain so what happens is first two rows will be locked okay these two rows will be locked similarly for uh if you want to freeze the columns okay okay it’s the same thing I am going to select this particular column and then click on view and then click fre spin so what happens is the first two columns are locked A and B will be locked and if I scroll right you will always see the uh customer name and category column so these two we have locked and the next will be scroll so this is the function of freezing pains okay now coming on to the next one and you will be asked and you have an Excel sheet or a spreadsheet and you want to restrict you want to protect the data for from anyone or from someone cop from copying the cell for your worksheet so how do you do that you need to select that particular data that you want to protect and then click control shift F and then you will see the protection tab okay you just need to go to the protection Tab and select Lo okay and you will be asked to put a password wherein you will be getting the review tab where you you you need to select the sheet put a password and just save it so I will show you across in one of the examples here so this is particular uh data that you have and you need to protect you select it so here as I said I selected it and then I just just press control shift F so here you see the protection tab click the protection Tab and then click select and then uh locked and then click okay and then you need to go to the review Tab and then click on the protect sheet and you having the you need to select this protect worksheet and contents of locked cells so you’re selecting these and you are protecting the content and you just need to uh put some password okay and then click okay okay so this is how you protect the data on a worksheet and you are selecting this area control shift F and just put up a password and select lock sheet so this is how you protect the sheet from anyone to copy it the cont now the next question that you might be ask is what is the difference between a function and a formula in Excel so you will be asked this question and you need to remember this formula is like an equation which is typed in by the user you are typing it suppose A1 + B2 you are typing this formula in one particular cell okay whereas function functions are predefined calculations it is like a formula which is already there in Excel and you can use it so as it says here it consumes more time and it has to be typed in manually you this is as per the need basis and this is particularly it’s very quick and very efficient you have inbuilt formulas in Excel the sum and multiplication product and various other things that you will come across so this is the basic difference between a formula and a function in Excel okay the now the next question that you might be ask is uh or you need to know basically is the order of operations used in Excel while evaluating the formulas so what is the order you need to remember this acronym pad Mass p d m a s or in other simple terms you can use this also please excuse my dear and Sally so these are the acronyms p e d m a s now let’s see what happens first and you uh in math when you do some calculations you have order of operations okay Bard mass is the one of the order of operations now in Excel similarly in Excel when you put up a formula you Excel will calculate it in a particular order and this is called the order of operations and the Order of Operations is first it will calculate what is there in the parenthesis it will perform this function and then it will see if there are any exponents in it and if it is there it will do that calculation the next and after that it will see if there is any multiplication or division so p e d and then it will see there is any addition okay and then the last one will be the substraction so Excel knows this and you have to know this so that when you put up a formula you will know what is going to happen first and you will not mess up with your formula okay this is the order of operations it is one of the important questions in the interview for a beginner Excel level now the next one is uh how will you write the formula for following multiply the value in a cell A1 by 10 and add the result by five and divide it by two it is quite simple okay see I’m just giving it an example in the slide and you might be ask something else so you will be given a task to calculate or put up a formula for this so so when you are asked multiply the value in a Cell of A1 by 10 so this is particularly thing okay A1 is the particular cell that is being given and you’re multiplying it okay you put it in parenthesis and then add the result by five so it will calculate the parenthesis first okay and if it sees if there are any exponents you have to think in that way if there are any exponents in it or not and then first it will see the parenthesis and then exponent there are no exponents here and then it will do the multiplication and then the addition and the division okay so you will get this particular answer and if you put it simply in this way your answer is wrong because it will multiply it into 10 add 5 and divide by 2 so you have to check which one is right and you have to make sure that you’re putting the right parenthesis okay so this is the formula okay the next question is uh there is a difference what is the difference between count counter and count blank these are three particular important things that you need to these are similar but they are quite different when you actually see it okay so first we will see what is count count is basically it counts the number of cells which have numeric values as the name suggest it is count it will count the number of cells which has numeric volumes okay if you see this column and we at A1 we putting it as count equals to A10 to A2 to A10 so you’re taking this range and you’re finding out what are the number of cells which have numeric value if you see this 1 2 3 4 5 so five cells have numeric values it counts the cells which has numeric Val and the next thing is the counter okay what counter does it counts the number of cells which has any form of content it can be anything it can be a number it can be a alphabet it can be anything it will see what are the uh number of cells which has any form of content okay for example this is the same example we here taken here and we have put the function as counter A2 to A10 now see 1 2 3 4 5 6 seven so it sees that there is seven cells have some content in it it is numbers and letters it can be anything but it has some content so count is the fion for this and the next one is Count blank okay as the name suggests it will count the number of blank cells only so again the same examples count blank A2 to A1 okay it will see what are the number of blanks okay if you see this is blank and this is blank so two cells are blank so it will count the number of blank cells only okay now the next one is uh what is the shortcut to add a filter to a table why do we use filter and it is one of the basics uh function in the Excel where you need to do some sorting and it can be done by using a filter what is the shortcut key it’s very simple control shift and L this is the key that is used to put up a filter you just press this control shift L all together and you will find the filter and you can sorted now the next question that you’ll come across is uh how do you create a hyperlink in Excel so it’s quite simple there is a simple shortcut control K you press these two together and you will get the option you will select the it will select the cell where you have to insert the hyperlink hyperlink basically it redirect to any other document it can be a web page it can be a Word document it can be another Excel sheet or so on okay so these are the things okay now another important questions uh that is uh how to merge multiple cells text strings in a Cell so how do we merge the text strings in multiple cells into one cell there is one particular uh simple function that you can use used which is called called as concatenate concatenate function is used to merge text strings present in multiple CS okay and uh it’s a very simple thing you just need to put this equals to concatenate and then if you for example this is the formula concatenate text one text 2 text three or this is concatenate A1 comma B1 comma C1 this is the data in our uh three cells X cell is one in A1 B1 and C1 so now if you want to put them all in one and you can merge it in one cell using the concatenate function and it’s very simple concatenate in parenthesis A1 comma B1 comma C okay and you will get it all merged in one particular cell okay so this is how you use the concatenate function and you can also use the and operator to combine cell values it is the same thing you can use e and operator instead of commas okay and I will show it to you in the example here okay now we have this I’ll just copy this thing to here okay and let’s make it simple and now I want to put this here equals con concatenate and A1 comma B1 comma c i just close it and I put enter so you see this this all three the different text is merged in one particular cell and it will you can perform various merge functions using the concatenate function it’s a very simple thing and it is a frequently asked questions in the interview okay the next question uh it is very very important one again and very basic as well so how can you split a column into two or more columns you have some particular text or a sentence written or data written in your cell or a column and you want to put them across in two or more or many number of columns so how do you perform this function it’s very simple again you need to select that particular cell so for instance we have it here is India is a democratic country India space is space a space Democratic space country so the it’s a different text here and you want to split this particular sentence into different columns okay you need to select that cell and then go to the data Tab and then choose text to columns there will be an option where in you need to select text to columns okay and you will see this screen okay and you need to select the choose the delimeter here and what we are specifying here is first it is delimer and then we are selecting a delimer as space because we see that that is space here which is very common and we want to split it so you will see a preview here which shows what your output will be like India in one column is a democratic country so the dener is space here and and you need to select this and then click next okay so you will see the options select the columns data format and choose the destination now you see the data Pro and you need to select the destination where you want to put this output as and you select that and then click finish and this one what it does it it it splits the text into multiple columns okay so you see this you have selected this as the output and it starts here India is a democratic country so uh you will come across some data which is you know huge and there are spaces or OBS or anything that is uh differentiated it with and you need to put them in different rows or different columns so this is the function or that you need to use to split the text into different or multiple columns okay okay the next uh question can be very simple one or most widely used in fact and what is the use of vooka and how do we use it so what is this particular thing in Excel vup function is used for looking up a piece of information in a table and extracting some corresponding data or information so you have some set of values in one particular column and you want to retrieve or extract the data corresponding to that particular column or a cell in the whole sheet okay so the syntax is something like this it is you need to go to one particular uh cell where you want the output as and you type the function we look up and you are selecting the value where is the cell exactly where you want the output to be and you’re selecting the table here and the you’re specifying the column index and range lookup so value this indicates the value that you have to look for in the First Column of a table okay and then the table table basically this refers to the table from which you have to retrieve a value we will show this in the example in the next slide and the column index column index it provides the column in the table from which we are to retrieve a value okay you will specify by the column index which one you are looking for the next thing is range lookup which is optional true with uh if you put true it is approximate match which is default and false if it is exact match if you’re looking for the exact match so what is the use of V lookup and how do we do it okay so find the product related to a customer name Richard okay you have this sheet and in this one you want to see what Richard has bought okay what is a product that he has bought and you can do this with the vooka function okay so you just go here and you type in the function V lookup you’re naming it as Richard and first thing is the value it is H4 okay and then the next thing is the table okay table is A2 this this is the table okay and you’re looking for customer name Richard okay and then you’re selecting this the whole column index which is E15 that mean you’re selecting this whole table till 15 okay E15 you’re selecting this and then the next thing is optional which is giving you the uh range lookup okay what it does is it’s optional it is you’re looking for an exact value or an approximate by default it is approximate map so how it performs the function okay so it gives you the answer as scam it goes and look ups for Richard in this particular it will give you the output here and the A2 is the table that it will look for the customer name and it will search for Richard and then it will give you the output as cam now the next thing will be we lookup different from lookup function how different they are we look up lets the user look for a value in the leftmost column of a table so as we’ve seen in the example it uh allows you to look for a data in the leftmost column of the table and Returns the value in a left to right way okay it sorts in left to right way where lookup function lets the user look for data in a row column and Returns the value in the another row or column it will give you the lookup funion in the next row column okay not very easy to use as compared to the lookup function okay as we see uh it’s a bit complicated when you compare it to the lookup function it’s quite simple and it is used to replace the V lookup function okay so this is the different lookup and V lookup function now uh Excel is basically used for reporting mainly used for reporting to management you have to extract different kinds of reports and what are the report formats that are available in Excel this is one of the uh important questions again uh for a beginner level and there are three formats basically compact form outline form table form okay these are the three formats that are available report formats that are available in Excel okay the next question is about a function which is how does IF function work in Excel okay the F function in Excel it actually performs a logical test and you will give a condition it performs the test and returns a value if the test evaluates to true and another value which you again will specify if the test result is false okay for instance we have here a simple example which is shown in the slide and what we doing here is a written record is valid if age is greater than 20 we have age here specified and salary is greater than 40,000 else return the record is invalid so we are giving two conditions and it actually checks and evaluates whether these conditions are met and it will give you an output whether record is valid or invalid based on the two conditions that are specified okay and F22 XIs which is this this uh column we are specifying it should be greater than 20 and G2 to G6 which is the salary column and we are specifying the condition to be greater than 4,000 So based on this two things it will check and perform if these conditions are uh met then it will give the desired result okay so this is the function that is used in Excel IF function okay the next thing is sum IF function okay again the sum function adds the cell value specified by a given condition or a criteria so you are giving a condition and you are actually doing another function which is performing the addition okay it will add the cell values based on a condition again it is shown here the total sum of salary where salary is greater than 75,000 again for example the salary column is G2 to G6 and we are doing a sum IF function what the result will be it will perform the addition of salaries which are greater than 75,000 so it will see which values are greater than 75,000 and then then the the output will be it will be adding these salaries which are greater than 75,000 okay now coming to the next uh slide we will discuss a another important function count F and we’ll find the data I result based on the data that we have and the count F function so we have a slide uh data here and using the co data find the number of days in which the number of deaths in Italy has been greater than 200 okay it’s not uh shown here for some reason but I will show you in the exal sheet okay so this is the data that we have and we will try to find the function so we’ll use the count function and count function is again simple count if you are specifying the column that is the uh source that you’re looking for that is G2 the column G and it is two it starts from two row two G2 till g357 which is the end of the column and what you’re looking for is Italy you’re specifying it in codes Italy and then the next column that it will look for is the E column the number of cases okay here we have the number of cases e22 again we are specifying the range and what we’re looking for is number of cases which are more than 20 so we’ll perform this function and it will show you the output okay I’ll show you to you in the Excel so here is the sheet and I will uh try to get the answer here and the so we performing count F okay count F and you’re giving the brackets parenthesis G2 which is the countries column okay countries column here who has specified the whole range 3 5 7 it is Bally uh a long long list of uh data and you’re specifying the r and what you’re looking for is particularly uh any country you can pick up like uh Algeria okay Algeria and you specify it in codes okay comma then what is the next Target that you looking for is the column e where is it is mentioning the number of cases okay so you specify the column range for the number of cases which is again e and then uh the 3 5 Tri 7 I mean it’s a basically long list of data that you’re looking for and then you are what is the condition that you want to know and you have to specify it at C and what you’re looking for is number of cases which are more than and you hit enter okay so it give you the output as 143 so there are 143 days in which the number of cases were more than 20 so so let’s uh refine our search further let’s see 30 and it gives 140 so another example that you can take is let’s pick Afghanistan Afghanistan and so there are 11 19 days that uh you will see the number of cases were more than 30 and this can be done with the count F function so so the next question is uh about the pivot table so what is a pivot table it’s basically is a summary of table of the data set I mean the data that is there that can be you know multiple number of rows and columns which has different uh data that has to be uh that is there in the reports and you need to analyze those Trends and you need to create a report and basically present it to the management or in a presentation so pivot table is a summary of table you know whatever data is there you can put it in a summarized format they are useful if you have long rows or column that hold values you need to track okay so you have long list of data and you need to summarize it and put it in a presentation or a you need to track the values so it’s very simple you have to select the data and then go to the insert Tab and select fav table okay and then it will show up like this and you need to uh select the table which is a table or range and then you need to specify where you want to put up this private table okay and it’s quite simple and I can show it to you in one of the examples okay so what you need to do is you need to select this and once you generate or as we have seen in the previous slide you need to select this and you need to uh select the output where you want to put the PIV table and then once you do that you will see something like this and you need to select these particular fields and put it in value so it will for example you need to select the death number of death you can just simply click this select this drag and drop it in the values okay so these are the different fields that can be put up in the table okay we can show it to you in the example here so this is our data and we need to show it in a p table okay select this and then go to the insert Tab and click private table okay select that and it will show you the uh table or the range and now where you want to put it okay I will put it in the existing worksheet okay and I’ll just select which color I’ll put it here for example and it will show you this and click okay so this is the table and now you need to select the fields that you want to show in the table for example we need to see the continents the number of cases as per the continents okay I selected and put it in the row and we see the immediately we see it in a table where you see the number names of the contents and now I want to see the number of cases and I simply select it and put it across in the value so this is quite simple and very informative very short and crisp form of presenting the data in a pivate table okay so this is how it is being used and it is being presented you just need to go to the insert tab fa table and it will generate the table and then you can select the fields all right so the next question here is uh how do we create a dropdown list in Excel this is particularly useful when you need to sort uh particular data with the drop- down list where number of uh different variables are there and you need to select one particular uh field and sort the data so you can do this by creating a drop-down list using the data validation option present in the data tab it’s quite simple you select the data and you go to the data validation tab in the data and click select data validation so once you select that it will ask you to specify a range so you need to select what data you need to sort and put a drop down so you need to select this and click data validation and you select the list option which shows you that there is a different option okay I’ll show it across in the Excel for example what we have here is uh some particular data and we have different variables we need to sort or put a drop- down list so just go to data as in as said in the slides and go to data validation and click data validation now as you click it it will ask you to data validation settings okay and in the drop down go and select list option so it will ask you to specify the source so when you asked uh to specify the source just click this particular column and click okay so here I’m mentioning the source is column B okay B 3 T B4 Okay click okay and then it will give you the option so here you can uh you can put this in anywhere across the Excel and click the option okay okay so this is the way to drop down using the data validation option so in the next example we will see so how do we apply Advanced filters in Excel we use the advanced filter option present in the data tab so this is the scenario wherein you have multiple set of datas and you need to sort it and it’s it’s actually huge data and you need to sort a particular column or a Fe with this criteria and you can select it and specify the criteria and specify a range what you want to uh select or based on what criteria the range can be specified and you can just get it in a single click so this is the option you have to go to data tab Advanced and you have to apply the advanced filter and then you need to specify the list range that is the basically the source and then the criteria wherein you specify the criteria present here I mean you are specifying in this case we will take an example where we are trying to sort the data of the number of cases based on number of deps and in a particular country and we are specifying the output we the copy to field is the output where you will see the output so I’ll show it to you in the Excel so here we have a spread sheet wherein you will see all the uh data covid data that we have and based on the countries and the continents and the number of deaths number of cases and so on okay and it also has different field like the date uh year and month so so here I am going to sort the data which is particularly for Europe and which has deaths of more than 200 in a day so how do we do it go to data advance and the you need to select copy to another location okay and this is the list range so it’s basically given in this countries okay and the criteria range you have to specify this so I am going to select this as my criteria okay and then I have to put the output in one particular cell so I need to select it again let’s say here okay and then I just click okay see it quite simple instead of running through the whole thing we can just do it with a simple function okay so it shows me the deaths which are more than 200 and for which particular country and for which particular uh continents all right so this is basically made very simple with this option the next question is uh you know you need to highlight some particular cells using using a particular criteria in this case we are trying to analyze or highlight those cells where the total sales is more than $5,000 so what we do is we use conditional formatting to highlight the sales based on the criteria it’s a very useful tool in analyzing data and Visually it helps you know you can have a look at the data in quick flash you will see the data and is quite visible using the conditional formatting so how we do that is I will show it to you now so as said in the slide we have the data of the sales that is provided to us and we need to see who has done more sales which is greater than the $5,000 so just go to home and you need to say go to conditional formatting so for that you need to highlight or select this go home conditional formatting highlight okay and you have different options here you select greater than and you specify the value here my criteria is $5,000 okay we can select which color so let’s go for green okay see this you will immediately see the option you don’t have to dig or look in deep into the data and find out which one is more than 5,000 or any particular value okay so conditional formatting now moving on to the next question the index and match function you must be familiar with the index and match function and why it is used basically index uh function is a very powerful tool where in you know you for example you have a table of planets in our solar system and you want to get the name of the fourth planet Mars so you can do it with a formula using the index one fun and at the same time you can use the match function okay with the match function together you can play wonders with it okay match function is another function that is designed to find the position of an item in a range for example we can use the match function to get the position of a word or uh look or in this case we have a name and we can use the index and match function to find the city how we do that is shown here okay it uh it looks quite complicated here when you see the formula but uh I can show it to you in the Excel and explain it further okay so here I have and I want to know where these people are and where they belong to okay so let’s see how it goes as we have seen it and we use the index function okay index okay now when I have to specify the range okay so the range is A2 it shows it selects the name and I want to select it from A2 to a s okay E7 sorry e call on E7 okay so as you see it highlights the whole table okay now what I’m going to do is I want to match it Okay match it with a condition I am I am specifying a condition a 10 why because I have to specify a name here and it will show me the city where he belongs to okay where it shows is a 2 okay if you see A2 it shows the name through A7 I have to specify the range here okay not just one name we are specifying the whole range as as you see if you put the values it will show you the selection okay a and what it should be it should be the exact match so zero denotes the exact match parenthesis close and I am putting another match condition okay what is this then this will give me the output what output is okay B9 okay this is my city B9 9 is the city where I’m trying to find from okay and what it should look for is a column A A1 through E1 okay it you select these this particular row and what it should be it should be the exact match again okay let’s see how it go it will give you an error because you haven’t put the value here okay so let’s see Andrew okay hit enter and you will see the city where he belongs to okay now let’s see where Anna belongs to enter and show Dallas okay so this is the one other function index and match function being used and it can be asked in frequently in the interview questions okay the next question will be uh how to find duplicate values in a column okay there are two ways that you can actually do this and one is uh basically the very simple one which is the conditional formatting and the other one is we have seen this before count if function okay how we do that you need to Simply select the data and go to conditional formatting and select duplicate values and it’s quite simple and there is another way which give you the color coded conditional formatting okay and there is another way that is the count count if function how we do that is again we you have to put another column and put up a count if criteria cont function wherein you see that you are specifying the range and the the value which is being twice or enter duplicate and you have to put up a condition I’ll show it to you in the X so here we have the data and I need to find the duplicate values here so I just select this and as I said it’s quite simple go to conditional formatting form and then go to conditional formatting and select highlight cell rules and simply go down and select the duplicate values okay it will give you with color you want you can simply select red or anything as you see the moment you select you will see the duplicate values highlighted okay so I just cancel this and there is another way then count a function so I’ll put another column where it says duplicate names and I will put up a cter function here okay so let’s see how a cter function works here to check the or find the duplicate names so as I said I will put up a formula or function here for the count F and we’ll drag it to other CS okay count it and uh uh since it’s an absolute uh reference I have to put up a dollar symbol okay my reference here will be H the column here h 2 okay and again dollar because I’m using it as an absolute reference colum through dollar symbol again nine okay so it drag still at the whole it drags still the all the names okay the H9 all right and then what I’ll do is I’ll put a comma in y I want to do is I have to select h two okay this is my criteria I mean it is repeating twice all right and I have to close the parenthesis and if it is more than one okay so this is my formula I just put enter and it should say true so this is the condition and it is true okay I simply drag it the whole thing and whether events is uh repeated yes it’s true Andrew it’s a duplicate entry false me is a duplicate entry and it says true and as you see me and events are duplicate entries so this is how we use the count function and the conditional formatting to sort duplicate entries in the date now let’s move on to the last question for the beginner level and since we have duplicate entry there is also a problem to remove duplicate entri so how can you remove duplicate values in a range of cells okay to Simply do that you can delete the duplicate values in a column by simply selecting the highlighted cells and press the delete button so you go in each column and you see the duplicate values select it and delete it okay and this is one tedious way of doing it and you can also after deleting the values you can go to the conditional formatting choose clear rules to remove the rules from the sheet so this is one way okay the next thing is again a simple button that is there in the data tab that is the is one of the tools present in the data tab which is simply called as remove duplicates it’s quite simple and it’s there in the data tools let me show you in the Excel so here we are and uh we have this data and we need to check and remove the duplicate so as I said go to the data Tab and simply click on remove duplicates and when you click on it it will ask you you want to continue or expand the selection I just say continue with the current selection and remove duplicates okay select all click okay two duplicate entries that were removed previously we saw that events and uh Anna were there Emy were there so that has been removed okay so that’s it for the beginner level and we’ll go to the intermediate level in the next slides choose from over 300 in demand scales and get access to 1,000 plus hours of video content for free visit skillup by simply learn click on the link in the description to know more so here we are at the intermediate level questions and these are like uh higher level or intermediate level compared to the previous things that we have discussed with the basic level questions uh for the Excel interview so let’s move on to the next thing and so there are there are some scenarios where you enter the date or uh some dates in particular data sheet and you need to find out what is the day of the week okay so you might be asking a question how do you find out the day of a week or a particular date so that is the function we we have a specific function and that is the weekday function to find out the day of the week or a particular date okay so as we know these are the seven days of the week and we just put the function as it says equal equal to week day and we need to enter the column or the area or the cell address here so week day is the function and it will give you the which which day it is of the week okay week as it says one it denotes Sunday okay and three is again Tuesday okay so this is the function that is used to find the day of the week so now we move on to the next one and there is a there might be a question what are the wild cards available in Excel so basically Excel supports three types of wild card which are asteris the star it represents any number of characters it can be used in different formulas and all like multiplication and all so it represents any number of characters okay the next one next Wild Card is the question mark it represents one single character okay you just need to memorize this in the back of your mind that it represents one single character okay whereas asteris is it represents any number of characters and the third one which is rarely used in Excel it is the TAA it is used to identify a wild card character that is Tilla ASX question marks in the text okay and it is very rarely used so you need to memorize these three things that the there are three types of wild cards we can see the functions of these in the later sessions okay the the next one is we have a question here what is the data validation illustrate with an example you might be asked this question and you have to know what is data validation what is what is it used for and you you should know how to set up in example okay data validation is a feature in Excel that is used to control what a user can can enter into a cell okay so you have with the data validation you’re not allowing a data kind of data that should be input in the cell okay for example you have the authority uh by setting up the data validation that you can enter either a number or a text or a just number and so on okay using the data validation and where is it available it is in the data tab okay select data validation option present under data tools okay and you just need to select the particular cells where you want to set up the data validation I’ll show you to you in an example so this is how it looks like you just need to go to data tools and click on data validation and it will show you and you have the options here allow and if you click on the drop- down you will see different options like I will show it to you in the example here okay for this particular thing if I want you know this column should have only names and it should have if you insert a number you will be thrown with an error okay you will get an error message saying that this is not a valid option okay so there are some columns where you have to put only names or you have to put only numers so you can set this up with the data validation technique okay you just allow it or customize it as per your requirement so this is how it looks like when you set up an so here we have set up a data validation saying that it should not allow you to put any text okay so you will get an error when you put a number here the value does not match data validation restrictions defined for this cell okay so here as an example I have some data where I am putting the names here and I’ll put the salary here I want to make sure that you know we cannot enter any numbers here okay it should be only text it should have only name so how do I perform that how do I restrict any user to that they should not be able to enter any number and it should only enter the text okay so there is a function okay you just need to go to data validation click data validation and here in the settings I’ll go to custom there are different options here you you can choose whole numbers decimal list date time so you these are the option and I go to custom and I’m giving a particular formula here okay what is that it should be only text okay so it’s a simple thing it should be text and I need to define the range okay so how I’ll Define the range I just select this okay and I select the range okay so I have selected the range here and if you go to input message and error alert you can customize it and here we are taking the default one and this is the input message if you want to set or customize something okay so let’s see how it works okay I have set this and then I try to put a number here and it throws me an error the value entered is not valid because we have set a restriction a user has restricted values that can be entered into the cell so this is how the data validation work okay the next thing is you will be given a situation wherein you have to uh you will be given data and you have to fun perform a function like in this example we are taking a condition where in you will have data and you have to specify the result based on the data you have to formulate okay so given below is a student table write a function to add pass or fail to the results column based on the following criteria you will be given a criteria so this is the student table you’re giving the student names marks and attendance and then based on that you will have to specify a next uh a a formula wherein you will see the result okay based on the pass uh student data you have to put a pass fail results in the column based on the following criteria what is the criteria and for example here in this example what they’re saying is you have to say this the student is passed if his marks is more than 60 and the attendance is more than 75% okay so how we perform this function as it says you have to use the IF function and check with the and condition to fill the results column okay so let’s see this in the example here here so here is the example and we will perform the IF function and check with the and function so how we do that is here okay so I have to put the IF function here okay and check with the and function okay and I have to specify the conditions I have to specify where it should see the or check the conditions okay so we are checking the conditions here and the marks should be in row I mean the column U and it starts with u5 so let’s see u5 okay it will immediately go to column U and five row five okay and then what is the condition we are satisfying here it should be greater than 60 okay and the other condition is uh the column V that is the attendance column okay and what is the condition we are specifying V 5 should be greater than 75 okay and we just close this conditions with the parenthesis and now we have to specify the result whether it is pass or fail pass comma in codes again F okay so let’s see how this works okay okay see this works okay the marks is 50 and attendance is greater than 80 so he is fail because his marks are 50 his attendance must be more than 75 but yes he is he has not scored marks more than 60 so we drag the same formula to the whole thing and you will see the result okay this is quite simple and you will see this formula and using the if and check and check with and condition okay now moving on to the next uh question you might be asked to you know this is simple function wherein you can you will be asked to calculate your age in years from the current date okay so how we do that there is a particular function and it’s very simple use the ear fraction or dated IF function to return the number of whole days between start date and the end date so you specify a start date which will be uh today’s date and the I mean the birth day and then the end day will be today’s date for example okay and you will get to know the age using the year Frack function and dated IF function okay so here is a small example and this is how we use the ear Frack function okay you specify this uh function and then specify the input dates that is the today’s dates and the date of birth and the uh today’s date okay and this is one of the ways to get it and there is also dated F okay this again it is day to-day function and you specify the input cells okay so let me show you an example for the same so here we are and U we have today’s date that is 4th of May and date of bir for anything it could be so I will specify the ear frag okay equals ear rack okay and then I should as soon as you enter you specify the start dat and the end date okay and I will specify the start date as today’s date it picks the column and then I put the comma and then the end date should be this thing okay and just close it and it will give you the age okay so this is the age for example if you want to find out my age I don’t want to reveal my birthday but it’s okay okay let’s see if it calculates I’m 32 years old okay all right so this is one of the ways and and similarly you can use the dated F function shown in the example all right now moving on to the next question you have nested if statements this is very important and you will definitely be uh coming across this question how are nested if statements used in Excel what are nested if statements the IF function can be nested I mean it can be Loop when we have multiple conditions to meet okay it can be nested the false value is replaced by another if function okay you have specified some condition and you are uh putting up a condition and if that condition is not there or not met then if it will be replaced with another IF function so uh the syntax will be like this below is an example so we actually we use two if statements in conjunction okay so here is an example here we are are specifying a condition where in you know uh the result is excellent if it is more than 80 and if it is less than 160 it is bad or average so this is very simple you want perform one if condition and if that is not met it will go for the next if condition so we are nesting two if conditions we are joining to if statements okay uh I’ll show the same example here in the Excel so here we are we have some data and the students and their marks okay and we are specifying a condition wherein uh if the result or marks are more than 80 the result is excellent and if it is less than 60 it is bad or average okay so how we get this is we use two if conditions if statements so uh as we have seen it if if now the first condition is uh our source or the source is B2 okay so b 2 and what I’m specifying is it should be greater than 80 all right I just close this and the result should be excellent okay excellent if it is more than 80 and if this condition is not met it will go to the next if statement okay we are nesting another if statement what is the condition here for the next statement it will check B2 is less than or equal to 60 you can specify any marks all right so if it is less than 60 it should give the result as bad or average okay specify anything and you okay and just close the double parenthesis so let’s see how it works okay see it works like this now let’s pull up the same formula the for the other results okay see if it is more than 90 it is 90 it is excellent so it is checking the first thing if it is greater than 80 it is excellent okay now in this case for Mark it is bad why because it will first see whether it’s excellent or not if it is not excellent then it will check the other condition if it is less than 60 it will give you the a bad result all right and similarly so on for the other marks all right so this is how we use the nested if statements you are adding two if statements the first condition and the second condition with another if statement okay okay when it comes to excel it is basically involves a lot of data and a lot of data to be analyzed and we have some powerful tools which are used in Excel to analyze the data one such uh important tool is descriptive statistics that is used to analyze the data so we might come across a question and you will be given a data or a table and you need to find the descriptive statistics of the columns using data analysis tool okay so you will be given us maybe for example anything and you will have a lot of data you have to use the descriptive statistics option in Excel for the data analysis okay how you do that is you have to add a pack okay okay you should be knowing that you need to add a pack which is called the analysis tool pack which you go to uh file options and then just click on the addin and select the analysis tool pack click uh Excel addin and just click go then it will add the option and then when you select the data you have to go to the click on the data analysis option which will be which will show up when you select the addin or when you add the addin okay then you need to select the descriptive statistics what we need to do is we need to analyze this data and it will show you the values like mean and the you can also customize you can you see you have this data and for you to check each and every row and find the mean the smallest the maximum number and things like that so this can be easily done using the descriptive statistics for the data analysis uh I’ll show the same thing in the Excel how it can be performed so here we are and I’ll show you first how to add the option to it okay go to add and select analysis tool pack as shown in the slide and you need to click go if you just click okay it will not add so just click go and then you need to select analysis tool pack okay it will give these are the different options uh for now now we are selecting analysis tool p and then click okay as soon as you do that you will see the data analysis this option gets enabled when you add that pack so this is the data that you have you need to find or analyze using the descriptive statistics so as you see it click data analysis and click uh select descriptive statistics okay and it will show up the option like this and you need to select the input range okay okay for some reason it’s already there and if you want me to show I will show it to your across you have to select the whole dat okay this is my input range and you need to select this labels in the first row so that you know it doesn’t take the first row okay I’ll show okay and now I’m putting the output in another worksheet okay you can specify or you can pry a new worksheet and these are the options that you can select you can you are getting a summary statistics which is the default and you can select the confidence level that is the mean value and you can set it up by whatever value percentage you want and you are selecting the largest one and the smallest number so all these data will get analyzed and it will open up in a new sheet and just click okay and you will see this so these are the if you see this this is our data paid organic social and revenue so this is uh okay make it more precise okay so with a single click all our data is analyzed okay this is the mean value and this is the minimum is zero maximum is this is the total and the number of count is thousand so you don’t need to scroll down and check what is the largest amount that is paid so this is the largest amount for the paid okay and so on so for the largest revenue generated all these things are generated with a descriptive analys okay descriptive statistics with a data analysis tool so the next question is about a pivot table and this is more refined or more advanced compared to the last oneth that we discussed in the uh beginner level so here you are asked to create a pivot table to find the total cases in each country belonging to their respective continents you are giving you are being asked to uh put up a table or pivot table with two variables basically each country and their respective continent so again we have the same data and we need to set up a pivot table which shows the continents in the countries with the respective continents the number of cases okay so let’s see how we get this in the example so here we are we have the same data it shows the days months year cases countries and the continents okay continents here and so on okay so I am I’ll go to the insert Tab and select the pavot table okay again the same thing I will be asked to enter a input range okay so I select this and since it’s huge I’ll just put the number to be 7777 okay let’s assume now this is our input data and uh where you want the output to be it’s already selected you can put it anywhere I’m putting it here okay just click okay and it will give you the option to select the fee s now what we want is number of cases okay which will show you the value and the countries and territories their respective continents so okay so this is how it looks like and we have to check now it is asking us to find the countries okay so with their respective continents you see this you see Africa as a continent and you will see okay you will see Africa if you just remove this you will see the number of I mean the cases with the respective continents and if you want to include these countries territories where the respective continents you will see as such if you just expand this you will see the countries that are having the cases in the continent Africa okay so country wise sorted with the continent okay this is another Advanced step to get the data or show the data in the prev table okay another question that you might be ask this is a basic and we have already seen this in the previous example that I have shown how do you provide the dynamic range in data source of a pivot table you have to select a particular data source in your input table of for to show up in the piver table so you have to select the input range but how do you create or how do you create or provide a dynamic range in this data source so just need to create a name table to provide a dynamic range so where is the data of your table so as we have seen in the previous example you will be able to select the input range and you just need to put this value any number so that you know it will pick up the dynamic range for your input source for the tape Okay so Now we move on to the next one and is is about about the pivot table again is it possible to create pivot table using multiple sources of data yes yes you can create a paper table from multiple worksheets sometimes you will have different data in different sheet can you create a pivot table for all the worksheet in a single payot table yes you can but there is a condition there should be a common Row in both the tables so you cannot have different types of data there should be a common row okay so then only it will act as a primary key for the first table and the forign key for the second table okay so this is something that you have to remember and you need to create a relationship between the tables and then build the pivot table so you have to analyze what kind of data it is it should have a common Row in both the tables on both the sheets and then you have to establish a relationship between this table and then build the table okay there is a visit for that we’ll see that later now let’s move on to the next question so the next question is again you know with the pivot table uh wherein you will be asked to further refine or uh you know refine your search and show it in the data so here we have with the covid data example again you will be asked to create a pivot table to find the top three countries from each continent based on the total cases using the co again and we have done this before we have created a prev table for this and we need to further refine it showing the top three countries with the number of cases and I will show that same thing in the Excel and we already have created a table and we’ll refine it further to show the top three countries which are having the highest number of accounts in the respective count so here we are we have the uh table uh already with us and I just just click on the show field list it will show me the countries and territories what we are asked is you know to show the countries with the top three that is number of cases so you just need to go here and you need to select the value filter there is a filter which you can select with the value and now I select top 10 and what I need is top three it’s very simple and you just need to know this thing okay and based on the Su of cases okay this is our field already then just click okay and it will show you the top three countries so it’s quite simple and it is very important to know this uh field and how you play with the value of the filters for each particular uh field in the pivot table so it shows you these things all right and now you can refine it further with the continents and all okay so different continent and you can see this so you go there and there is a value filter you can set up all right you have set up a value filter okay okay now there is another one how do you create a column in a pivot table okay like you will be given a situation where you need to add one more column and show it in the pivot table with a particular calculation or with a particular value and you have you don’t have that actual value in your your data but you have to calculate it and show it across in the table so there is another option which is called pivot table analyze and you need to create a calculated field from pivot table analyze option so when you go to your table and then go to pivot table analyze you will see the option to add a calculated field okay just go there and click select calculated field and you need to Define so in this example we are going to Define another column where we calculate the bonus of the sales and there is a particular formula the formula is you put an if and statement and then you calculate the formula you specify what is the bonus and what is the way that you’re calculating the bonus and it will particularly added another column to your table so let’s see how we we do that in the table actually so here we are we have this table and I have inserted a pivot table and I am putting it in output here okay then you will get the table okay now you need to select the customer name and the unit sold unit price saes okay so we’ll add another column to it how we do that is this go to pivot table tools and then you go to analyze Okay click on field items and set okay you need to select calculated field here select that and we are defining a new field here which is the bonus bonus and as I said we will put up a formula for this and we will Define it how we calculate the bonus okay with an if and statement which we have seen before how we uh put up a and if and statement okay now I’m going to say it as a like this sales my sales should be I’ll specify a condition how they will calculate the bonus if sales is greater than 4,000 and the unit sold okay I am trying to put it as the unit sold it also depends on the unit sold is greater than th000 okay for example let’s say th000 a person who is uh able to do uh sales of th 4,000 and the unit sold should be more than th000 then the sales what is this the bonus will be sales into that is the amount of sales he has done into 5% okay let’s say 5% bonus and sales is if it is 2% okay okay we are adding this field bonus and click add okay okay so we have added this and we have put up a calculation for the formula and you will see this in the so this is simple way of adding the column to your existing data and we are doing the calculations and showing it up okay so this is one way go to pivot table analyze and field items and sets you can select this option and add it okay you can customize this as I said with adding different fields this is pretty handy in analyzing the data which does not exist in the table and you add some value to your favor table okay the next uh question will be about slicer you must be familiar with what a slicer is and a pivot table and how do you use it what are the purpose of using it and how do you put up a slider in the pivot table so how does a slicer work basically slicers are used to further filter data in the pivot table suppose you already have some data and it’s for ease that you can do it by just adding a slicer you can select particular uh data in or a field and you can see the output for that particular field that you have chosen in the slicer okay so it’s very simple go to the insert Tab and select slicer under filters okay and then it will be like this okay and here if for example you see this is our period table we have added two slicers to filter our table that is month and countries and territory so this will be the general pivot table that looks like and we have added another two slies that is month and Country so if you go uh for example if you want to see what is the number of cases and some of the deaths for a particular month and for a particular country you can just do it by a single click and it

will show that particular data only in the table let’s see and do this in our Excel okay so there is a table uh pivot table already created for this and I want to add a slicer so how do I go ahead and do this is I go to the options and insert slicer okay and the moment you click on it you will see what are the options that you want to add you can select different fields and uh select the slicer for it uh for this example we are choosing month okay this is one of our sliders you can just put it here adjust to the and again this will be our slider okay let’s add another slicer here okay and this will be the countries and territories Okay click on that and you will see two simple badges here that you can choose from so if I want to know in the month of Feb how many number of cases were there for particular let’s see the moment I choose the month it will show that particular number of the corresponding table for the whole and now I want to further refine it to a particular country so for example Australia okay so there were total number of 18 cases and zero deaths at the same time if I go for Algeria it is like this so as you see it goes like this okay so this is one of the very important tool that you can use to show the data in a much simplified Manner and ease okay so the next question is about the pivot table again what is the percentage of contribution of each country and continents to the total cases again the same example for our code the covid one and this time we want to show the output as the percentage of contribution for each country and continents to the total cases so we have the same data and we generate a pivot table and we should show it as the sum of the cases uh to be percentage okay and this is how we do it this is our uh data and I’m going to create a pivot table for this okay so it shows the table and here I have to show what is the fields that we need to select okay for E we just selecting the cases and the contr and territories okay so cases to be the values okay okay so this is how it looks like now when I see let me show it to you see it shows the number of cases now if I just want to refine it further and see it as number of percentage percentage as the number of cases okay so how I do it show field list I go here and I go to Value field settings okay then again number format show the value as okay sorry show the value as you need to select this thing percentage of grand total and then just click okay and you will see this to be the percentage so it shows the data in the form of percentage okay this is very simple and you just need to remember as we have seen before show field and then value field settings okay this is the thing that you need to check okay Grand percentage there are other options also and you can select from whatever you want to do it in this case we are showing it to be the percentage okay okay guys now the next question is about very important aspect of presentation when we come to Pivot charts how do you create a pivot chart in pivot tables this is very basic or very you know important aspect of pivot tables that you can represent a data in a in the form of a chart and there are different types of charts which I’ll show it to you in the uh example okay so we have a data here and we want to show it in right now it is in a table form okay we have put up a pivot table for this and now the same thing can be put up in a fav chart okay so what you need to do is go to the insert Tab and select the pivot chart it depends on different versions of excel that you have different uh forms or different buttons so I will show it across to you and this is how it looks like okay it’s very simple it can be a pie chart it can be a bar chart it can be different forms and we can see that in the example here okay so let’s go to the example and so we have the uh pivot table generated here already what you need to do is you need to select the table table and go to insert and see the options there are there is a column chart there is a line chart there’s Pi Bar area scattered and other parts okay there are different forms okay so right now what we do is we will select the column chart here okay you need to select the pivot table and click on the column chart again there are different forms which can be seen uh in some time now so this is the basic form okay and it will show you the countries I mean the it will show it as a form of a chart okay again you can change the chart type you can change it to Pi okay this personally is very good in presenting or doing presentation and you can select different forms different styles okay will also show you the percentage so this is one form of presenting your table into a chart okay again bar type is also there so this won’t suit here in our example there are different ones I’m just showing it to you as how it looks like so depending on your I mean the aesthetic you can see and select what kind of chart is best suitable okay so this is how you put up a pivot chart in pivot tables okay so this is then last for the intermediate level and what are macros in Excel create a macro to automate a task basically you have some daily task that you perform in Excel okay and you can do this with quite ease using the macros okay it basically is a program that resides within the Excel file and it is used to automate task in Excel some daily task that you run like run when you come across in any data and you have to scrub that data and you do some daily routines and by removing some columns or adding some formulas and you know do doing some adding some colors and changing the fonts or beat anything that you form and you have to do a repetitive task so all that can be done by recording a macro and this is what macro is used for in Excel so how you capture those steps in Excel is through a macro to record a macro you can either go to the developer tab in the Excel and click on record macro or you can use or access it from The View tab Okay so these are the uh ways to access macros okay just go to the developer tab and click record macro where in you know when you click record macro it will record the steps that you performing in each step and it will capture that and you can save that it is like a daily routine that you run and you can do all these multiple steps maybe n number of steps within a single click by running that macro later on okay so you record macro and run that okay you do it through the developer tab go to developer tab and click record macro and it records all the steps that you are performing okay you need to name it and you just need to perform the actions and it will record the macro and you just save it later on whenever you come across the same daily task that you run you can just click it by running that macro okay B so in a single CLI it will perform all the actions that you have done or steps that you have performed on that particular Excel sheet or any other Excel sheet okay this is very handy when you have similar data and you do the similar task each day okay so this ends the intermediate level and in the next we slides we will see the advanced level so now we discuss the advanced level uh interview questions for excel and when it comes to the advanced level you will come across definitely you will be asked about what if analysis how does it work how does it how does what if analysis work in Excel so what if analysis as the name suggest uh you have to have an analysis done okay with the help of different complex mathematical calculations like formulas and using different formulas and calculations you can experiment with the data and you can analyze if this particular input changes what will be the scenario how will your output turn out to be so as you can see uh it is about different variables to see how your changes would affect the outcome of a situation so this is what uh what if analysis is and the same thing can be done with Excel and how it is done is you need to go to the data Tab and click on the what if analysis under forecast okay so there are three options and one is the scenario manager goal seek and the data table so these are the three situation or three tools which are available in the watf analysis in the data tab okay so goal seek is basically for reverse calculations okay and you have some idea you have some set goal in mind and you have certain variables and what you need to do and what you need to achieve to have certain set goals okay you have you will set a value for the goal and with the goal seek option you can get to know what value you have to achieve to come to that level okay so this is what goal seek is it is one of the simplest sense sensitivity analysis tool and uh so for example you know that you know a single outcome you would like to achieve like you have a set goal that you have to achieve this particular grade okay and the goal seek feature in Excel allows you to arrive to that goal by mathematically adjusting a single variable within that equation so you set the goal and you will do the what if analysis goal seek uh option to know what you have to do or what you have to achieve for the set goal the next option is the data table and it is basically uh used for sensitivity analysis okay so in this uh scenario you the data tables allow the adjustment of only one or two variables within a data set but uh each variable can have unlimited number of possible values okay so basically they are used for side by side comparisons and it makes it very easy to read the scenarios okay one but you need to set up the data table correctly okay and what you do is uh you give the input in the table and then you set up the formula and for instance you need to calculate the monthly payments for a loan okay you provide the principal amount like uh whatever amount you’re taking 2 lakhs three lakhs and you set the interest rate in a formula okay and uh you set the term in and then you need to uh provide different uh input options like what loan amount that you’re taking and you set the formula and go to data table and I mean go to what if analysis and select the data table stretches across and then you will see the monthly payment options or the monthly Emi that you can calculate there are different uh things that you can calculate you can calculate the Target or the sales bonus or things like that okay giving different scenarios in the variables okay but you need to set up a data table it might be a little challenging but yes it is a very powerful tool okay so the next one is the scenario manager it is a bit more complicated compared to the other two but then it is uh more advanced than goal seek as it allows you the uh to adjust the multiple variables at the same time okay and uh this is very complicated compared to the other two and it is even I mean it gives more better output when it compares to the other two wtif analysis tools so here when you go to wtif analysis and the scenario manager you have to select the data and provide different scenarios that is different values for each scenario and then it will create a it will analyze calculate and create different scenarios okay so it becomes very easy for you to analyze what if you are changing the value of your interest amount or the uh term of loan or your targets like uh monthly targets or an yearly targets and things like that and you just have to uh see what the scenario will be when you set this particular value for a table or for data whatever targets that you need to set you can use this what if analysis in Excel for the different scenarios and different calculations okay these are very powerful tools and you need to know this now as we move on to the next one you might be asked what is the difference between a function and a sub routine in a VBA okay even though these two are used us quite frequently that is uh pretty much different from each other okay so a function always returns a value of the task it is performing okay so when you are uh writing a module you will have a function when you have a function it will always give you a value okay for example you are performing an addition it using the function it will give you a value for sure whereas sub routine it does not return a value of the task it is performing functions are called by a variable okay you can uh set up a variable and you can call the function okay where sub routines can be recalled from anywhere in the program in multiple types okay in many different ways you can recall a sub routine like we have seen uh we write a sub routine and we put up a button and we can when you click the button it will recall the sub routine functions are called by variable okay you have have to set up a variable and when you enter it it will come up okay functions are used directly in spreadsheet as formulas whereas Subs cannot be used directly in spreadsheets as formula okay this is very important difference and the next thing is the functions can be used to perform repetitive task and return a value whereas users must insert a value in the desired cell before getting the result of the sub so this is particularly limited okay whereas functions can be used to perform different repetitive task and return a value user input is not required whereas if you see the sub routines user must insert a value okay in the desired cell that to in a particular cell which is defined in the sub routine to getting the desired result okay so these are the differences between functions and sub routines now the next one is what is the difference between this workbook and active workbook in VBA so when you work on modules and different Excel spreadsheets and workbooks you will have these different workbooks open and there is a particular difference and you might be asked what is the difference between this workbook and active workbook so as the name suggest this workbook refers to the name of the workbook where the code is actually running from okay you are running a code VBA code and it is the actual workbook where you are running the code from and that is this workbook okay and you have multiple spreadsheets open and you’re working on particular suppose for example you’re working on uh sheet X okay and you active workbook is the workbook that is currently active from the different open workbooks you have different open workbook but you are working on one particular workbook and that is called the active workbook so this workbook is the refers to the name of the workbook where the code is actually written whereas active workbook is the one that is currently open currently active okay so this is the difference between this workbook and the active workbook in VBA as shown in the example this is a simple uh sub that is written a code that can be written to find out which workbook is the uh uh which workbook is the uh this workbook in the VBA and the active workbook as well okay so this is a simple thing that you can run to determine okay it shows the active workbook and the this workbook okay so as we move on to the next one so this is the question how will you pass arguments to a vbf function okay there are two ways basically arguments can be passed to a VBA function as a value or as a reference so this is uh an example that you can see it is by reference the key word for this is by reference okay so when you are passing an argument by reference the keyword should be by RF whereas uh by value your specifying a value and the keyword is by V value okay so these are the two ways that you can pass an argument in VBA so when you pass an argument by reference in a procedure the variable itself okay the variable itself is accessed by a procedure and it is to the location or the address in the memory okay the value of the variable is changed permanently by the procedure in this case all right okay so to pass an argument by reference you should use by ref that is the keyword before the argument okay so in this example it is clearly shown what is the keyword that is being used okay and by reference is the default in the VBA unless you specify something else which in this case is by value okay and as I said the keyword for by value passing the argument by value is by V okay so when you set the keyword by Val the variable uh what happens is the by value argument function or argument uh uh is passed through by value okay the number function is called here which means it assigns a value to the variable X here okay because the variable was passed by value in the function any change to the value okay any change to the value of the variable is only the current function so it ends after it performs the function okay then it revert back to the value when it is declared again where it is set to zero so if the variable has been passed by reference in the function then the variable would have permanently assumed the new assigned value so this is the basic Difference by reference and by value so now we move on to the next one so there might be a question that you will be asked that how do you find the last row or a column in a VBA okay so to find the uh last row sometimes you have long list of uh data and it has like n number of rows and N number of column so instead of scrolling down all together to find the uh last row you can use this uh VBA code you can write this code it’s a very simple one and it will give you the last row you will find the last row with a single click okay let’s see it in the VBA so here I have a sheet which uh you know it has long list of uh rows and instead of scrolling down I can just find out the last row with this VBA code okay I just click on this and as seen in the slideshow I have just return it and you will see the you just run it and you will see the number of it will give you the last row in the sheet okay similarly we can do this for the column as well okay in case if you have long list of or large number of columns instead of scrolling right you can just uh run this VBA and you can see you can know the last number of column okay number of columns so as we’ve seen in the last row now we’ll see the code for the finding the last column it’s the same thing uh instead of row you will see it as column all right and it will when you run it you will give the it will give you the last column okay today I am here to show you how you can start earning extra money with Excel even alongside your 9 to5 job with just an hour a day you can create a steady second income stay tuned as I work you through a stepbystep guide to turning your Excel Sals into a profitable side hustle imagine turning your Excel CS into a steady source of extra income in today’s world where costs are always going up having a second income is not just nice it’s a smart move with just your Excel knowledge you could earn up to 30,000 or more every month helping you manage expenses and chase your dreams you don’t need to be a pro to start beginners can join in too whether you are freelancing analyzing data or creating custom Excel Solutions the possibilities are endless with practice and consistency you can grow your income while building your skills don’t let your Excel knowledge go to West use it to create a flexible financially secure future Excel is not just a tool it’s your key to success and freedom let’s get started and make your skills work for you suppose I have a data set like this and just imagine you have received this from the client’s end so the work will basically be on data analysis and you can have five 00 rows or you can even have 5,000 rows and even have more than that or even less than that so don’t worry it won’t be a manual work for sure with the help of AI that is artificial intelligence we can analyze data in Excel in just a short time now you must be feeling how much they are earning by performing the data analysis in Excel so I have opened here Fiverr if not a is one of the top freelancing platforms that is available and here you will find the various gigs out there when you search for this Excel data analysis now if you look nicely you will see people charging 2,695 and even much more than that and sometimes even less now if I open something like this that is a top rated one you will see an overview see this is the basic there charge for 2,695 and here I will do excel dashboard development and Excel data analysis so if you see minutely you will even have this comments over here they have got from their clients and even they have their overview they what they’re doing uh and what he is building like we build templates off and everything this is a standard one uh he is charging for 8,984 for the um 3-day delivery and n divisions he has done and premium is much more you can even imagine that is 22458 so in a nutshell on an average if you see this whole one you will find that you can earn 1,615 just an hour with your Excel skills now if you open one of the ranking freelancer any of this you will get an overview now I will cross this and I will go back to this data set now we have columns like population on males population on person females literacy rate females and everything and so on so just assume that the client’s requirement was give me the top five City by the average literacy rate females as a pie chart and he will pay you a certain amount for that so the basic part is the client may be un aware of how to do it or maybe having lack of time to do the data analysis in Excel so what you have to do is you have to select this whole data set you have to select this whole data set it will take time as it is so much long and go on the top right side of this Excel and you will find analyze data Under This Home tab so you click on this analyze data and it will take some time for processing after clicking it it will process the data no human interference is required it has automat ically discovered some Data Insights as you can see it has even made this bar graphs and somehow plotted this and even you can get this insights now simply what we need to do is we need to pay attention to what my client requires and simply we need to type that requirement over here and then ask a question about your data and the question to was give me a top five City by average literacy rate females as a pie chart so I will type this question over here so I will type over here the question give me a top 5 City by average literacy rate females as py chart and enter and see I have got one so automatically it will generate a pie chart according to the request M given over here and all we need to do is to click on this insert pivot chart over here so that it will be inserted in a new worksheet sheet two so this is basically nice because you will even getting the five cities that are having the greatest literacy rate of the females and you can earn up to 33,000 with just minimum skill set in Excel with just basic Excel knowledge you can get start a second income stream while your initial earnings might be modest consistent effort and practice will soon help you scale up to 30,000 or more per month as you can experience your skill will command higher pay as a freelancer so I have a pro tip for you start with the competitive rates as a beginner in the freelancing market with time and persistence you will position yourself as a top earning freelancer the journey is worth it your Excel skills can truly transform your financial future so that’s a wrap on a f course guys if you have any doubts or question ask them in the comment section below our team of experts will reply you as soon as possible thank you and keep learning with simply learn staying ahead in your career requires continuous learning and upskilling whether you’re a student aiming to learn today’s top skills or a working professional looking to advance your career we’ve got you covered explore our impressive catalog of certification programs in cuttingedge domains including data science cloud computing cyber security AI machine learning or digital marketing designed in collaboration with leading universities and top corporations and delivered by industry experts choose any of our programs and set yourself on the path to Career Success click the link in the description to know more hi there if you like this video subscribe to the simply learn YouTube channel and click here to watch similar videos to ner up and get certified click here

By Amjad Izhar
Contact: amjad.izhar@gmail.com
https://amjadizhar.blog

Affiliate Disclosure: This blog may contain affiliate links, which means I may earn a small commission if you click on the link and make a purchase. This comes at no additional cost to you. I only recommend products or services that I believe will add value to my readers. Your support helps keep this blog running and allows me to continue providing you with quality content. Thank you for your support!

The provided text from “01.pdf” serves as a comprehensive guide to using Microsoft Excel efficiently. It begins by explaining various keyboard shortcuts and mouse actions for navigating within worksheets and workbooks, along with methods for data entry and cell editing. The text then covers essential formatting techniques, including adjusting cell dimensions, aligning content, and basic visual styling, emphasizing the difference between data and formatting. Furthermore, it introduces concepts of inserting and deleting rows, columns, and cells. The guide also explains number formatting options, allowing users to customize how numerical data is displayed. Conditional formatting is discussed as a way to visually highlight data based on specific criteria. The text details the “Go To Special” feature for advanced cell selection based on various attributes like blanks, constants, formulas, and more. It thoroughly explains “Paste Special” functionalities for selective data transfer, including formulas, values, formats, and operations. Finally, the document covers the “Find and Replace” tool and demonstrates using random data generation formulas and lookup functions like IFS, FILTER, and a basic INDEX/MATCH.

Excel Fundamentals Study Guide

Quiz

1. Explain the concept of a cell reference in Excel and provide an example of a relative cell reference.
2. What are the three fundamental types of data that can be entered into a cell in Excel?
3. Describe the order of operations that Excel follows when evaluating a formula containing multiple operators.
4. What is the purpose of the SUM function in Excel, and how would you use it to add a range of cells?
5. Differentiate between using direct numbers and cell references within an Excel formula, and explain why using cell references is generally preferred.
6. Explain the difference between the “Fill Series” options for “Linear” and “Growth” trends, providing a scenario where each would be useful.
7. Describe how the “Text Join” function works and provide an example of how you might use it to combine text from multiple cells.
8. What is the purpose of the LEFT, RIGHT, and MID functions in Excel, and how do their functionalities differ?
9. Explain the function of the IF formula in Excel and describe its three main arguments.
10. How does the RANK.EQ function in Excel determine the rank of a number within a list of numbers, and what is the significance of the “ref” argument?

Answer Key for Quiz

1. A cell reference is a pointer to a specific cell or range of cells in a worksheet. It allows formulas to refer to the values in those cells. A relative cell reference changes when the formula containing it is copied to another cell. For example, if cell G3 contains the formula =C3+D3+E3+F3, and this formula is copied to cell G4, it will automatically update to =C4+D4+E4+F4.
2. The three fundamental types of data are numbers (numerical values used for calculations), text (alphanumeric characters, including words and labels), and formulas (equations that perform calculations on data).
3. Excel follows the standard mathematical order of operations, often remembered by the acronym PEMDAS/BODMAS: Parentheses/Brackets, Exponents/Orders, Multiplication and Division (from left to right), and Addition and Subtraction (from left to right).
4. The SUM function adds all the numbers in a range of cells. To use it to add cells A1 through A5, you would enter the formula =SUM(A1:A5) in the desired cell and press Enter.
5. Using direct numbers in a formula means manually typing the values. Using cell references means pointing to cells containing the values. Cell references are preferred because if the data in the referenced cells changes, the formula result automatically updates. Using direct numbers requires manually editing the formula every time the underlying data changes.
6. The “Linear” trend in “Fill Series” adds a constant step value to the previous value in the series, creating an arithmetic progression (e.g., 2, 4, 6, 8…). This is useful for creating sequences with a consistent difference. The “Growth” trend multiplies the previous value by a constant step value, creating a geometric progression (e.g., 2, 4, 8, 16…). This is useful for creating sequences with a consistent percentage increase or decrease.
7. The “Text Join” function concatenates (joins) text strings from multiple ranges and/or strings with a specified delimiter between each text string. For example, =TEXTJOIN(“, “, TRUE, A1:C1) would join the text in cells A1, B1, and C1, separated by a comma and a space, ignoring any empty cells.
8. The LEFT function extracts a specified number of characters from the beginning (left side) of a text string. The RIGHT function extracts a specified number of characters from the end (right side) of a text string. The MID function extracts a specified number of characters from a text string, starting at a specified position.
9. The IF formula checks whether a condition is met, and returns one value if true and another value if false. Its three main arguments are: Logical_test (the condition to evaluate), Value_if_true (the value to return if the condition is true), and Value_if_false (the value to return if the condition is false).
10. The RANK.EQ function returns the rank of a number within a list of numbers. The “ref” argument specifies the array or range of numbers to rank against. Excel compares the “number” argument to all the numbers in the “ref” range to determine its rank.

Essay Format Questions

1. Discuss the importance of using formulas and functions in Excel for data analysis and manipulation. Provide specific examples of how different types of formulas (e.g., mathematical, text, logical) can be applied to solve common data-related tasks.
2. Explain the concept of cell referencing in detail, including the differences between relative, absolute, and mixed references. Illustrate with scenarios how each type of reference can be effectively used in creating and copying formulas.
3. Describe the various “Fill Series” options available in Excel and analyze their utility in generating different types of data sequences. Discuss specific situations where the “Date” series options can streamline data entry and analysis.
4. Compare and contrast the functionalities of several key text manipulation functions in Excel (e.g., LEFT, RIGHT, MID, TEXTJOIN, LEN, TRIM). Explain how these functions can be used individually and in combination to clean, format, and extract information from text data.
5. Analyze the role of logical functions, particularly the IF, AND, and OR functions, in creating dynamic and decision-making spreadsheets. Provide detailed examples of how these functions can be nested and combined to handle complex conditions and automate outcomes based on data values.

Glossary of Key Terms

• Cell: The intersection of a row and a column in a worksheet, identified by a unique address (e.g., A1).
• Cell Reference: A way to identify a specific cell or range of cells in a worksheet, used in formulas to refer to their values.
• Relative Cell Reference: A cell reference that automatically adjusts when the formula containing it is copied to another cell.
• Absolute Cell Reference: A cell reference that remains constant regardless of where the formula is copied, indicated by dollar signs before the column letter and row number (e.g., $A$1).
• Mixed Cell Reference: A cell reference where either the column or the row is absolute, but not both (e.g., $A1 or A$1).
• Formula: An expression that calculates the value to display in a cell. Formulas can contain numbers, operators, cell references, and functions.
• Function: A predefined formula in Excel that performs specific calculations or operations on data.
• Argument: A value or cell reference passed to a function, providing the data it needs to perform its calculation.
• Operator: Symbols used in formulas to specify the type of calculation to perform (e.g., +, -, *, /).
• Order of Operations: The sequence in which Excel performs calculations in a formula (PEMDAS/BODMAS).
• Range: A contiguous group of two or more cells specified by the cell addresses of the top-left and bottom-right cells, separated by a colon (e.g., A1:B5).
• Concatenate: To join two or more text strings together into a single string.
• Delimiter: A character or sequence of characters used to separate data elements.
• String: A sequence of characters, treated as text in Excel.
• Logical Test: An expression in a formula that evaluates to either TRUE or FALSE.
• Criteria: Specific conditions or rules used to filter or analyze data.
• Array: A range of cells containing values that are used in a formula.
• Rank: The position of a number within a sorted list of numbers.
• Round Off: To approximate a number to a specified number of decimal places or to the nearest whole number.
• Data Validation: A feature in Excel used to control the type of data or values that can be entered into a cell.
• Filter: A way to display only the rows in a list that meet certain criteria, hiding the other rows.
• Sort: To arrange data in a specific order, either alphabetically or numerically.

Briefing Document: Analysis of Provided Sources

This briefing document reviews the main themes and important ideas presented in the provided excerpts. The sources primarily focus on basic Microsoft Excel functionalities and formulas, explained in a conversational and tutorial-like manner.

Source: “01.pdf”

This source is a transcript of an Excel tutorial, covering fundamental operations and formulas. The main themes and important ideas are:

1. Basic Formula Construction and Cell Referencing:

• Summation using direct cell references: The tutorial begins by explaining how to calculate the total of marks across different subjects (Hindi, English, Maths, Science) for a student. It emphasizes using the “=” sign to start a formula and then adding individual cell references (e.g., =c3+d3+e3+f3).
• “You know g3 = c3 + d3 + e3 + f3 ok”
• Understanding cell relationships: The tutorial highlights the relative nature of cell references. As a formula is dragged down, the row numbers in the cell references automatically adjust (e.g., g3 referencing c3:f3 becomes g4 referencing c4:f4, and so on).
• “so you understand one thing as this is your g4 this will be g5 this will be g6 this will be g7 in the same way this will also be c4 this will be c5 c6 will be c7, d4 will be d5, d6 will be d7, so it will keep increasing in this manner, okay, you have understood one thing, we are talking about cells here…”
• Difference between cell references and direct numbers/text in formulas: The tutorial explains that cell references update when a formula is dragged, while direct numbers and text within a formula remain constant. Text must be enclosed in double quotes.
• “Numbers: If you are writing a direct number, if you are writing a number then it is always fixed, it will never change and in the same way, if you are writing any text, it is always fixed. The second thing is that the number is written directly, the text is written inside the double ted comma, okay now these things are now.”
• Summation using the SUM function: The tutorial introduces the SUM function as a more efficient way to add a range of cells. It emphasizes the syntax: =SUM(number1, number2, number3, …) or =SUM(range).
• “If we say equals to sum then we will put equals to sum and tab and always remember one thing, never listen to any person in the formula, you always have to listen to the formula, you have to do what the formula is saying, what is the formula saying number one comma number two comma number three comma number four comma and so on it has come then we will do number one comma number two comma number three comma number four and turn off the parentheses and hit enter.”
• Using ranges with the colon operator: The colon (:) is explained as a way to define a range of consecutive cells (e.g., c3:f3 means all cells from c3 to f3 inclusive).
• “if I say now what does it mean, add a1 to a2, then plus th, then plus four, plus fv, I can also write it like this, from a1 to a5, when you have consecutive numbers, there is this colon in between. What does this colon say? What does this colon say? It says from to means this is a range…”
• Quick Sum using Alt+=: The tutorial introduces a keyboard shortcut for quickly summing a contiguous range of numerical cells above or to the left.
• “The easiest way is that wherever you want the sum, you go to the cell and keep a condition along with it that there should not be any gap in between and then After that, if you press Alt Equal Two together then the formula appears to be the same.”
• Basic Formatting: Simple formatting adjustments like using the format painter and adjusting column widths are briefly mentioned.

2. Filling Patterns with Series:

• Linear Series (Addition/Subtraction): This section explains how to use the “Series” option (under the “Fill” dropdown in the “Home” tab) to create sequences with a constant step value (addition or subtraction). It demonstrates creating sequences like 2, 4, 6… and 100, 95, 90…
• “Whenever you have to do plus or minus, if you keep it in linear, then you have to do plus or minus. You have to do plus. Well, how much plus has to be done. Step value means, how much has to be done, then you have to do two and when to stop, what answer should come, stop when you reach 100, stop where the last 100 comes, then stop .”
• Growth Series (Multiplication/Division): This section explains how to create sequences with a constant multiplicative or divisive step value. Examples include 2, 4, 8, 16… and 100, 50, 25…
• “Second, the one that comes to you, comes to you, growth and growth deals in what , deals in both of these, in multiply and divide… when you use growth, it will be 2 * 2, then it will be 4, but 4 * 2 will be 8, 8 * 2 will be 16, 16 * 2 will be 32, 32 2 * 2 will be 64, that is this.”
• Date Series: This section details how to create sequences of dates, with options to increment by day, weekday (skipping weekends), month, or year, and with a specified step value.
• “Within the date, I have already told you in number format but still let me tell you what does date date mean today? … one way can be that I keep increasing every day from today, one way can be, I can show month wise and one way can be, I can show year wise…”
• Using the SEQUENCE function (briefly mentioned): The tutorial briefly introduces the SEQUENCE function as an alternative for generating number sequences, available in later versions of Excel. It advises against using it for now due to potential issues with references if rows/columns are deleted.

3. Understanding Constants and Formulas:

• Defining Constants and Formulas: This section clarifies the difference between entering a value directly into a cell (constant) and entering a formula that calculates a value (formula). The formula is visible in the formula bar, while the calculated value is displayed in the cell.
• “side I wrote I give, this cell is mine and here I write 100 and on one side here is the cell of mine, I write the sum a1 a10 then the answer is this is my formula will be visible in the bar but the answer is mine what will be visible is 100 so here which is only value there is no formula so what has become constant and here the value is there but is this value constant is it just value no check the formula b what? There is some formula attached to it.”
• Types of Constants and Formulas: The tutorial distinguishes between number constants, text constants, logical constants (TRUE/FALSE entered directly), and error constants (errors entered directly). Similarly, it discusses number formulas, text formulas, logical formulas (resulting in TRUE/FALSE), and error formulas (resulting in errors).
• Using “Go To Special”: The “Go To Special” feature (Ctrl+G, then “Special…”) is introduced as a way to select cells based on their content type (constants or formulas) and subtype (numbers, text, logicals, errors, blanks). This allows for targeted actions like formatting or editing specific types of cells.

4. Filtering Data:

• Introduction to Filtering: The tutorial briefly introduces filtering as a crucial Excel feature for analyzing data by showing only rows that meet specific criteria. It highlights its importance for reporting and understanding data.
• “Filtering is very important. Filter and Sorting is one of the most important topics of Excel. The best feature is the single which helps us in many things, which also helps us in a lot of reporting, it helps us a lot in understanding something after seeing it, especially with the data…”
• Conceptual Explanation of a Filter: A simple analogy of a water filter is used to explain that filtering removes unwanted elements (impurities) to show the desired outcome.

Important Quotes Highlighting Key Concepts:

• (On relative cell references): “so it will keep increasing in this manner, okay, you have understood one thing, we are talking about cells here…”
• (On the SUM function): “always remember one thing, never listen to any person in the formula, you always have to listen to the formula, you have to do what the formula is saying…”
• (On the colon operator for ranges): “What does this colon say? It says from to means this is a range…”
• (On the difference between constants and formulas): “here which is only value there is no formula so what has become constant and here the value is there but is this value constant is it just value no check the formula b what? There is some formula attached to it.”
• (On the purpose of filtering): “The best feature is the single which helps us in many things, which also helps us in a lot of reporting, it helps us a lot in understanding something after seeing it, especially with the data…”

Overall, “01.pdf” provides a beginner-friendly introduction to essential Excel concepts, focusing on formula creation, cell referencing, efficient summation techniques, generating sequences, understanding data types within cells, and the basic concept of filtering. The explanations are conversational and emphasize practical application.

The analysis of the remaining sources will follow in a similar structured manner to provide a comprehensive briefing document. Please provide the text from the subsequent files (“02.pdf”, “03.pdf”, etc.) for a complete analysis.

Excel Basics & Formulas FAQ

1. What are cells in Excel, and how do they relate to formulas?

Cells in Excel are the individual rectangular boxes where you enter data. Each cell is identified by a column letter and a row number (e.g., A1, B3). Formulas in Excel are expressions that perform calculations on the data in these cells. When you write a formula, you often refer to cell addresses to use the values contained within those cells in your calculations. For example, =C3+D3+E3+F3 in cell G3 adds the values in cells C3, D3, E3, and F3, and the result is displayed in G3.

2. What are the three basic components of an Excel formula, and how do they behave when dragging the formula to other cells?

The three basic components of an Excel formula are: * Cell references: These refer to specific cells (e.g., A1, $B$2, C$3). When a formula with relative cell references (like C3) is dragged, the cell references automatically adjust relative to the new row or column. Absolute references (like $C$3) remain fixed regardless of where the formula is dragged. Mixed references (like C$3 or $C3) have one part fixed and the other relative. * Numbers: These are constant numerical values entered directly into the formula (e.g., 90, 27). Numbers remain constant and do not change when the formula is dragged. * Text: These are constant text values entered directly into the formula and must be enclosed in double quotes (e.g., “Pass”). Text also remains constant when the formula is dragged.

Dragging a formula applies the same underlying calculation to adjacent cells, automatically adjusting relative cell references based on the new position, while keeping numbers and text constants.

3. What is the SUM function in Excel, and what are the different ways to use it to add numbers?

The SUM function in Excel is used to add numbers together. You can use it in several ways: * Adding individual cells: You can list individual cells separated by commas, like =SUM(C3, D3, E3, F3). * Adding a range of cells: For consecutive cells, you can specify a range using a colon, like =SUM(C3:F3). This adds all the numbers in the range from C3 to F3 (inclusive). * Adding non-adjacent cells and ranges: You can combine individual cells and ranges, like =SUM(A1:A5, C3, F1:F10).

A quick way to use the SUM function for a contiguous range is to select the cell where you want the total and press Alt + =. Excel will often automatically detect the adjacent range of numbers and insert the SUM formula.

4. How can you fill a series of numbers or dates automatically in Excel using the “Fill Series” option?

The “Fill Series” option in Excel allows you to automatically populate a range of cells with a sequence of numbers, dates, or text based on a defined pattern. To use it: 1. Enter the starting value in a cell. 2. Select the cell (or a range of cells establishing a pattern). 3. Go to the Home tab, in the Editing group, click on Fill, and then select Series. 4. In the Series dialog box: * Choose whether you want the series to fill in Rows or Columns. * Select the Type of series: * Linear: For sequences with a constant increment (e.g., 2, 4, 6…). Set the Step value. * Growth: For sequences with a constant multiplier (e.g., 2, 4, 8…). Set the Step value. * Date: For date sequences. Choose the Date unit (Day, Weekday, Month, Year) and set the Step value. Weekday will skip Saturdays and Sundays. * Autofill: Extends existing patterns. * In the Step value box, enter the increment or multiplier. For dates, it’s the number of days, weeks, months, or years to add. Use a negative value to decrement. * In the Stop value box (optional), enter the value at which the series should end. 5. Click OK.

You can also often drag the fill handle (the small square at the bottom-right of a selected cell) to automatically fill a series based on an initial value or pattern.

5. What is the difference between “Constants” and “Formulas” when using “Go To Special” in Excel?

The “Go To Special” feature in Excel allows you to select cells based on specific characteristics. When you choose either “Constants” or “Formulas,” you are selecting cells based on how their values are derived: * Constants: This option selects cells that contain values entered directly into them. These values can be numbers, text, logical values (TRUE/FALSE), or errors that were directly typed in (not resulting from a formula). If you further refine the selection within “Constants” by checking specific data types (Numbers, Text, Logicals, Errors), only constants of those types will be selected. For example, selecting “Constants” and then only “Numbers” will select all cells containing manually entered numbers, including dates (as Excel stores dates as numbers). * Formulas: This option selects cells that contain formulas. Similar to “Constants,” you can further refine the selection by checking the “Numbers,” “Text,” “Logicals,” or “Errors” checkboxes. This will select formulas that result in those specific types of output. For instance, selecting “Formulas” and then “Numbers” will select all cells containing formulas that calculate and display numerical results.

The key difference is whether the value in the cell is the result of a calculation (Formula) or directly input by the user (Constant).

6. How do relative, absolute, and mixed cell references work in Excel formulas, and when would you use each type?

Cell references in Excel tell formulas which cells to use in calculations. There are three types: * Relative References (e.g., A1): By default, cell references are relative. When you copy or drag a formula containing relative references to another cell, the row and column parts of the references automatically adjust relative to the new position. Use relative references when you want the formula to apply to a range of similar data, and the referenced cells should change accordingly for each row or column. * Absolute References (e.g., $A$1): An absolute reference is specified by adding a dollar sign ($) before both the column letter and the row number. When a formula with an absolute reference is copied or dragged, the cell reference remains unchanged. Use absolute references when you want a formula to always refer to a specific cell, regardless of where the formula is copied. This is useful for referencing constants, tax rates, or other fixed values. * Mixed References (e.g., $A1 or A$1): A mixed reference has either the row or the column part absolute and the other part relative. $A1 keeps the column fixed but allows the row to change when the formula is copied down. A$1 keeps the row fixed but allows the column to change when the formula is copied across. Use mixed references when you want either the row or the column reference to remain constant while the other adjusts. For example, when calculating percentages of a total where the total is in a single row but you want to apply the formula to multiple rows of individual values.

To quickly toggle between relative, absolute, and mixed references for a selected cell reference in the formula bar, you can press the F4 key.

7. What are some common text functions in Excel, such as LEFT, RIGHT, MID, LEN, TRIM, LOWER, UPPER, and PROPER, and how are they used?

Excel provides several functions for manipulating text strings: * LEFT(text, num_chars): Extracts a specified number of characters from the beginning (left side) of a text string. * RIGHT(text, num_chars): Extracts a specified number of characters from the end (right side) of a text string. * MID(text, start_num, num_chars): Extracts a specified number of characters from the middle of a text string, starting at a given position. * LEN(text): Returns the number of characters in a text string. * TRIM(text): Removes extra spaces from a text string, including leading, trailing, and multiple spaces between words. It leaves a single space between words. * LOWER(text): Converts all uppercase letters in a text string to lowercase. * UPPER(text): Converts all lowercase letters in a text string to uppercase. * PROPER(text): Capitalizes the first letter of each word in a text string and converts all other letters to lowercase (also known as sentence case or title case). * TEXTJOIN(delimiter, ignore_empty, text1, [text2], …): Joins two or more text strings into one text string with a specified delimiter between each text string. ignore_empty is a TRUE/FALSE value to specify whether to ignore empty cells.

These functions are used to clean, format, extract, and combine text data within your spreadsheets.

8. Explain the IF, AND, and OR logical functions in Excel, and provide examples of their use.

Logical functions in Excel allow you to perform conditional tests and return different values depending on whether the conditions are true or false: * IF(logical_test, value_if_true, value_if_false): Checks if a condition (logical_test) is TRUE or FALSE. If it’s TRUE, it returns value_if_true; otherwise, it returns value_if_false. * Example: =IF(B2>45, “Pass”, “Fail”) in cell C2 checks if the value in B2 is greater than 45. If it is, “Pass” is displayed; otherwise, “Fail” is displayed. * Example with empty cell check: =IF(A2=””, “Pending”, “Payment Done”) checks if cell A2 is empty. If it is, “Pending” is displayed; otherwise, “Payment Done” is displayed. * AND(logical1, [logical2], …): Returns TRUE if all of its arguments are TRUE; otherwise, it returns FALSE. * Example: =AND(B2>5, C2>4) checks if both the value in B2 is greater than 5 AND the value in C2 is greater than 4. It returns TRUE only if both conditions are met. This can be used within an IF function: =IF(AND(B2>5, C2>4), “Bonus Eligible”, “Not Eligible”). * OR(logical1, [logical2], …): Returns TRUE if any of its arguments are TRUE; it returns FALSE only if all of its arguments are FALSE. * Example: =OR(B2>5, C2>4) checks if either the value in B2 is greater than 5 OR the value in C2 is greater than 4. It returns TRUE if at least one of the conditions is met. This can also be used within an IF function: =IF(OR(B2>5, C2>4), “Meets Criteria”, “Does Not Meet Criteria”).

These logical functions are fundamental for creating dynamic and decision-making spreadsheets.

Excel Navigation Keyboard Shortcuts

Based on the sources, there are several keyboard shortcuts for page navigation within Excel.

• To move to another sheet within the same workbook, you can use the following shortcuts:
• Control Page Down: This will move you one sheet to the right (or downwards in the sheet list).
• Control Page Up: This will move you one sheet to the left (or upwards in the sheet list).
• To move between different workbooks that are open, you can use the following shortcut:
• Control Tab: This will jump from one open workbook to the next. You can repeatedly press Tab while holding Control to cycle through the open workbooks.

Additionally, you can use the mouse to navigate between sheets by clicking on the sheet tabs at the bottom of the Excel window. You can also go to another workbook by clicking on it if it’s visible, or by selecting it from the Window menu (which can be accessed without clicking, though the exact keyboard shortcut for this menu is not specified in the sources).

For fast movement within a single sheet (not between sheets), the sources mention:

• Page Up: To quickly scroll upwards.
• Page Down: To quickly scroll downwards.

These shortcuts help you navigate large datasets within a single worksheet.

The name box can also be used to jump to a specific cell within a sheet by typing the cell address (e.g., A1, Z100) and pressing Enter. While not directly page navigation, it’s a method for quick movement to a specific location within a potentially long sheet.

The sources emphasize using these shortcuts for efficient work within Excel, especially for repetitive tasks.

Managing Multiple Excel Workbooks

Based on the sources and our conversation history, here’s a discussion on workbook movement in Excel.

Our previous conversation established that you can move between different open workbooks using the keyboard shortcut Control Tab [our conversation history]. This allows you to cycle through all the Excel workbooks you currently have open.

The new source provides further context related to working with multiple workbooks:

• You can open new workbooks by going to the “File” tab, then “New”, and selecting “Blank workbook” or choosing from various templates. Templates offer pre-designed layouts for different tasks, saving you from starting from scratch.
• You can also open existing workbooks by going to “File” and then “Open”. This will allow you to browse your file system to select the workbook you want to open. Alternatively, you can use the search functionality within Excel to find and open workbooks.
• The source also mentions the concept of a “workbook” as the entire file you are working in. When you save your work, you are saving the entire workbook. Multiple worksheets can exist within a single workbook.
• Interestingly, the source details how you can move or copy entire sheets between different workbooks. To do this:
• Right-click on the sheet tab you want to move or copy.
• Select “Move or Copy…” from the context menu.
• In the “Move or Copy” dialog box, under “To book:”, you can choose a currently open workbook or select “(new book)” to create a new workbook for the sheet.
• If you want to create a copy and keep the original sheet in the current workbook, make sure to check the “Create a copy” box. Otherwise, the sheet will be moved to the destination workbook.
• The “View” tab in Excel also offers options for managing multiple workbook windows:
• “New Window” allows you to open another window displaying the same active workbook. This can be useful for viewing different parts of a large workbook simultaneously.
• “Arrange All” lets you tile or cascade all open workbook windows on your screen. You can choose from options like “Tiled”, “Horizontal”, “Vertical”, or “Cascade” to arrange them in a way that suits your workflow.
• “View Side by Side” helps you compare two workbooks (or two windows of the same workbook) next to each other.
• “Switch Windows” provides a dropdown list of all open workbooks, allowing you to easily select and switch to the desired one.

These features, along with the Control Tab shortcut, provide comprehensive ways to navigate and manage multiple workbooks in Excel. You can open new and existing workbooks, move content (sheets) between them, and arrange their windows for efficient multitasking.

Excel Cell Data Entry Methods and Techniques

Based on the sources, there are several methods for entering data into cells in Excel. These methods cater to different user preferences and situations:

• Direct Cell Entry: The most straightforward method is to simply select a cell and begin typing. Once you have entered your data, you can press Enter to move to the cell below or press Tab to move to the cell to the right. This is the initial way to input new information into a blank cell.
• In-Cell Editing (Double-Click): If you need to modify existing data within a cell, you can double-click inside the cell. This action places the cursor directly within the cell’s content, allowing you to make changes at the desired position.
• Formula Bar Editing: Another way to edit cell content is by using the formula bar located above the worksheet. When you select a cell, its content is displayed in the formula bar. You can then click in the formula bar and edit the data directly. This can be particularly useful when the cell contains a long formula or a significant amount of text that might be easier to view and edit in the expanded space of the formula bar. Pressing Enter after editing in the formula bar will save the changes to the selected cell.
• Using the F2 Key: A keyboard shortcut for entering edit mode in a cell is by selecting the cell and pressing the F2 key. This action places the cursor at the end of the cell’s content, ready for modification. The source also notes that on some laptops, like HP models, you might need to press the Function (Fn) key along with F2 to achieve the same result.

Beyond basic entry, the source also touches upon efficient data entry techniques:

• Fill Handle for Series: For entering sequential data like numbers or dates, you can use the fill handle. After entering the initial value (or a pattern of values) in a cell, a small square appears at the bottom-right corner of the selected cell. You can click and drag this fill handle down or across adjacent cells. For numbers, if you only enter ‘1’ and drag, it will copy the ‘1’. To create a series (1, 2, 3…), you need to either enter the first few values to establish a pattern or click on the drop-down arrow that appears after dragging and select “Fill Series“.
• Auto Update Settings: The source briefly mentions a setting in Excel that can automatically extend data ranges and formats based on patterns. This setting can be found under File > Options > Advanced. Turning this setting on allows Excel to automatically recognize patterns and apply them when you enter new data adjacent to existing data. Turning it off will prevent this automatic updating.

These methods provide flexibility for entering and modifying data in Excel cells, whether you are starting fresh or editing existing content. The choice of method often depends on personal preference and the specific task at hand.

Excel Data Entry Shortcuts: Efficiency Tips

Based on the sources, there are several useful shortcuts to enhance data entry efficiency in Excel.

• Moving Between Cells After Entry:
• Pressing Enter after entering data in a cell will automatically move the cursor to the cell directly below. This is useful for entering lists of data in a column.
• Pressing Tab after entering data will move the cursor to the cell immediately to the right. This is helpful when entering data across rows.
• Editing Existing Cell Content: When you need to modify data that is already in a cell, you can use the following shortcuts to enter edit mode:
• Double-clicking directly inside the cell will place the cursor within the cell’s content, allowing you to make changes.
• Alternatively, you can select the cell and then make your edits in the formula bar located above the worksheet.
• Selecting a cell and pressing the F2 key will also put you into edit mode, with the cursor typically positioned at the end of the cell’s content. On some HP laptops, you might need to press Fn + F2 to achieve this.
• Filling Data in Adjacent Cells: Excel offers shortcuts for quickly populating adjacent cells with similar or sequential data:
• The fill handle, the small square at the bottom-right of a selected cell, can be clicked and dragged to copy the cell’s content or extend a series into neighboring cells. For a numerical series, you might need to establish a pattern (e.g., by entering ‘1’ and ‘2’ in consecutive cells and then dragging) or use the “Fill Series” option from the AutoFill Options menu that appears after dragging.
• To quickly fill down the content and formatting of the cell directly above the currently selected cell(s), use the shortcut Control D.
• Similarly, to fill right the content and formatting of the cell immediately to the left of the selected cell(s), use Control R.
• Entering Multiple Lines in a Cell: If you need to enter text on multiple lines within a single Excel cell, you can use the shortcut Alt Enter to insert a line break at your desired point.

These data entry shortcuts can significantly speed up your work in Excel by reducing the need to constantly use the mouse for navigation and repetitive actions. Understanding and utilizing these shortcuts can lead to a more efficient data entry process.

Excel Basic Formatting Guide

Based on the sources, basic formatting in Excel involves modifying the appearance of your data to make it more readable, understandable, and presentable. It encompasses various aspects, from the fundamental structure of workbooks and worksheets to the visual styling of cells and their contents.

Workbook vs. Worksheet

Before discussing formatting, it’s important to understand the distinction between a workbook and a worksheet. A workbook is the entire Excel file you save. Think of it like a notebook. Inside this workbook, you can have multiple worksheets, which are like the individual pages in a notebook where you do your work. Your manager might ask for a specific worksheet (a single page with certain data) or the entire workbook (the whole file containing all your work). You can add more worksheets by clicking on the plus (+) sign.

Saving Your Work

To preserve your formatting and data, you need to save your work. Excel provides two primary options: Save and Save As.

• Save As is used when you save a file for the first time. It prompts you to choose the file name, location on your computer, and the file format (e.g., Excel Workbook, PDF).
• Save is used for subsequent saves after the initial “Save As”. It saves the changes to the same file name and location without prompting you again.
• The shortcut key for both Save and Save As (after the initial save) is Control S. If you press Control S on a file that hasn’t been saved before, it will act like “Save As”.

Basic Formatting Steps

The process of basic formatting typically involves these steps:

1. Selecting Data: Before applying any formatting, you need to select the cell(s) or range of cells you want to modify. You can select the entire current region of data by clicking anywhere within it and pressing Control A.
2. Adjusting Cell Dimensions: You can adjust the width of columns and the height of rows to better display your data.

• You can double-click the right border of a column header to automatically adjust the column width to fit the widest content.
• Keyboard shortcuts for adjusting column width include Alt H O I and Alt O C A.
• To adjust the row height automatically, you can use the shortcut Alt H O A.

1. Understanding Data vs. Formatting: In Excel, there’s a distinction between the raw data you enter and the formatting you apply to it to make it presentable. Formatting includes things like colors, borders, font styles, and alignment.

Common Formatting Options

The “Home” tab in Excel contains the primary tools for basic formatting.

• Alignment: You can change the horizontal alignment of text within a cell (left, center, right) and the vertical alignment (top, middle, bottom). Left alignment generally looks natural for text, while center alignment can be suitable for headings.
• Font: You can modify the appearance of text by applying styles like bold (Control B), italics (Control I), and underline (Control U). You can also change the font type (e.g., Calibri, Arial) and font size. Additionally, you can change the color of the font.
• Cell Styles (Fill Color): You can change the background color of cells using the “Fill Color” option (the paint bucket icon). This can help to visually highlight specific data.
• Borders: You can add borders around cells or ranges of cells to define them visually.
• You can apply all borders (thin lines around each cell).
• You can apply a thick outside border to emphasize the edges of a selected range.
• The “Borders” dropdown offers various border styles.
• To access more border options, you can go to “More Borders…”.
• To remove borders, you can select the range and choose “No Border” from the borders dropdown.
• Shortcut Keys for Formatting: Excel offers several shortcut keys for common formatting actions:
• Accessing the “Home” tab functions starts with pressing Alt H. After pressing Alt H, letters will appear over the various groups and commands within the “Home” tab.
• For All Borders: Alt H B A.
• For Thick Outside Border: Alt H B T.
• For More Borders: Alt H B M (likely based on the pattern).
• For No Border: Alt H B N (likely based on the pattern).
• Bold: Control B.
• Italic: Control I.
• Underline: Control U (source says Control Ya – likely a typo and should be Control U).
• Merge & Center: To combine multiple adjacent cells into a single larger cell and center the content within it, you can use the Merge & Center option in the “Alignment” group of the “Home” tab. Select the cells you want to merge and then click “Merge & Center”.
• Turning Off Gridlines: The faint lines that appear around cells (gridlines) can be turned off for a cleaner visual presentation by going to the “View” tab and unchecking the “Gridlines” option in the “Show” group.

Number Formatting

Excel allows you to display numbers in various formats. You can access these options in the “Number” group of the “Home” tab.

• General: The default format.
• Number: Displays numbers with decimal places.
• Currency: Adds a currency symbol (e.g., $) and decimal places.
• Accounting: Similar to currency, but aligns the currency symbol and decimal points in a specific way.
• Percentage: Multiplies the value by 100 and adds a percent (%) sign.
• Comma Style: Adds a thousand separator (comma).
• Increase/Decrease Decimal: Allows you to control the number of decimal places displayed.

You can also access more number format options by clicking the arrow in the bottom-right corner of the “Number” group. This opens the “Format Cells” dialog box, where you have more granular control over number formatting, including date, time, fractions, scientific notation, text, and custom formats. The Text format can be useful for displaying numbers with more than 15 digits, as Excel might otherwise convert them to scientific notation or round them.

Date Formatting

Excel recognizes and formats dates in various ways. You can choose from predefined short date and long date formats in the “Number” group or access more options in the “Format Cells” dialog box. Custom date formatting allows you to specify the exact way you want dates to be displayed using codes like d (day), m (month), and y (year).

Conditional Formatting

Conditional formatting allows you to automatically apply formatting to cells based on specific rules or conditions. This is found in the “Conditional Formatting” group on the “Home” tab.

• Highlight Cell Rules: Allows you to format cells based on criteria like greater than, less than, between, equal to, text that contains, a date occurring, or duplicate values.
• Top/Bottom Rules: Allows you to format cells based on their ranking, such as the top 10 items, bottom 10%, above average, or below average.
• Data Bars: Fills cells with colored bars that represent the value in relation to other cells in the selected range.
• Color Scales: Applies a gradient of colors to cells based on their values.
• Icon Sets: Adds icons to cells that visually represent their values relative to other values.

You can clear conditional formatting from selected cells or the entire sheet. You can also manage conditional formatting rules to edit, delete, or reorder them.

Table and Cell Styles

Excel also offers predefined Table Styles and Cell Styles that apply a consistent set of formatting to tables and individual cells, respectively. These can be found in the “Styles” group on the “Home” tab and provide a quick way to format your data with a professional look.

In summary, basic formatting in Excel is crucial for organizing and presenting your data effectively. By understanding and utilizing the various tools and shortcuts available, you can create clear and professional-looking spreadsheets.

The Original Text

Hey, have you brought a resume? There is neither AI nor chat, GPT. There is no need to bring a resume like this. The formula does not solve it. Everyone says drink tea, drink tea, the problem will be solved. Drinking tea does not solve the problem. Got my sister married. Did 99 workshops. Did thousands of interviews. Neither did I get a job nor did Excel come. So what happened ? What happened? What happened? Forget it. Now let’s talk a little about the real thing. Single compress features and The formulas range from basic to advanced and now there is a twist of AI in it, so in this video I have covered all the important features and formulas which are important for you if you want to survive in the corporate world. Here we have created such creative dashboards. If we talk about data, we have worked on huge data here, so whether you are a beginner or advanced, we have covered all these things here. What else will be the benefit? If you complete this video, then you get free certification and access to it. You can get data for practice on our app. Yes, you will also get the data which I have used in this video and apart from that, you will get extra data. You can check it under the free content inside our app. Mam, how to know what all I have covered in the video, for that you can check the description where pay time. If stumps are given, then you can go there and jump to your topic in a single click. So, if you want to do live training with us, that too on many accounting software’s, data analytics and finance, then you can join us. You will get all the information in the description, so check it quickly, like it, comment and don’t forget to subscribe because a lot of courses are coming, be it Excel. Pabi I have SQL, SAP, Telemark busy, so many courses, don’t wait too long, let’s start this video right here, let’s get started, now stop wasting, watch it, let’s start from the very beginning. If you want to read about Excel, then first of all you have to open Excel, then go to your search engine and type excel from here, after that you can open it from here, it will hardly take 5 seconds and your Excel will be open with you. There may be different versions, the version we are using here is 2021, it will take a little time and will open, see that it has opened and here we will maximize it so that the entire screen is visible to you, now it is possible that if you are opening it for the first time, then all these files will not be visible to you, whatever options you are seeing, all these will not be visible to you and if you are already working. Your files will be visible here, after that you can see Home New Open here , we will read about them later, here you can see that there is a blank workbook in which we work and apart from this, many templates are also made, here you will get more templates, so basically what are templates, see, it is simple, when suppose you are doing some work from scratch, then you will go to the blank workbook, but what are templates? Let me explain with an example, suppose you have 10 pictures and now you have to make a video of them. So what do you do? You go to some app, put those 10 pictures and choose a template and put it. There are many effects inside that template, there are a lot of stickers, there are a lot of text, there are a lot of frames, it automatically gets applied on your pictures and a video is prepared for you very quickly. So that which is ready in a second, what is it, that is your template, so in the same way, if you do not want to do any work from scratch, then here you have many templates available, you can use these templates, all you have to do inside it is your data, you can save it in it, you can do whatever you have to work in it, like this is a bill page checklist, you have to do some work in it, you open it and do the work inside it. You have to do something else, this is some weekly attendance report. If you want to work in it, you can do it in it. It has already created many templates in this way, if you want, you can use them. Here you also get to know how Ekal works, like Get Started with the formula, the formula is explained in detail, Power Query, Pivot Table, Pie Chart, if you want to see then you can see these also. Above you have it saying that suggested search, if you want to do any search, search from here, if there is any template related to it, then it will appear in front of you, here you get lots of templates, okay, let’s go, now we will read further, because we are studying from scratch, so what will we take, we will take a blank workbook because we have to learn to create all the things ourselves, so what you are seeing right now is Excel as is. You open Excel, you get this type of interface. Now the first thing we are going to do is to do an interface overview. What are we going to do? So let’s do that. To do that, I have found a way to do that, just because you have understood everything, so I have already taken a screenshot of this entire screen. From that screenshot, now I will be able to draw, I will be able to explain each and every feature to you very well, so I did one, now as soon as I move it down a little bit. And let’s zoom it from here so that it becomes easier for you to understand and from here we take the draw, see if there is a different feature visible on the top or any feature is visible somewhere else, then you do not need to worry, these features can be added to you too, how will it happen, we will add it now, okay, after that, now we start reading, you will see the Excel logo at the top most, this will let you know that you have opened Excel, after that You have the option of auto save, for now it is off, you can also keep it on so that the work you are doing gets saved automatically. In any case, you were doing some work, you were working on a big data and suddenly the light went off, your system is not charging and it is switched off, then in such a case, even if all your data is lost, it will continue to be saved. You can save it from here , at any place like let’s say this is the option you are seeing. Let’s say Quick Access Tool Bar, what is Quick Access Tool Bar ? There is an option of Redo and Undo, so you can do it directly here only. If you want to keep something else here, then you click on it. Whatever you want to keep here, you can keep it here, like Touch Touch Mouse Mode, Sort Ascending Descending, Spelling Check, Quick Point of Email, Open key, New key, whatever option you want to keep, you can keep it here. I find these options to be the most useful like there is an option to save or undo and so on. There is an option of Redo, I find these the most useful, so I have kept them here, you think something else, don’t do anything, see where my cursor is going, click on this dot drop down and add any option from here, OK, now let’s move forward, when you open Excel for the first time, then by default the name that comes here is Book One, so this is your file name, this is the name of your file, basically this is the current name of your file. The name given is Book One. Can we change it? Yes, of course we can. Is it mandatory to do so now? It is not at all mandatory. You can change it even when you are saving it. You can give whatever name you want to give. Yes, of course you can give it as per your wish to save it. You can do it by default. What comes is Book One, Book Two, Book Three. Now I open another file just because three files are already open, so by default that is it. What name will come, book four will come, you can change the name if you want, you can do it, after that you get this search engine inside which you can search, earlier if there is any file created, if anything is created, then you can search it here, after that look above, you will see all the same options, because we have taken the same screenshot of this, so that you can understand easily, here you can see my picture here. It is coming and here you will write ‘TS’, see, ‘ Not for now’ it is writing ‘Coming’, the picture is visible. Otherwise, the initials of your name are also visible here, so here I can tell you that this is just because I have logged in, this is my licensed version, so your picture will be visible here or the initials of your name will be visible. These three things will help you to minimize and maximize. You can save your screen by using this cross. You can also close it directly. After closing it, as soon as you cross it, it asks you whether to save it or not. It’s totally up to you. If you want to save it, you can do it. Look, these are the options here. Okay, I was talking about these options. Let’s go here right now, we are not going to get any other option in the left most left. That’s it. There were options which we have explored. Now let’s move towards this side a little bit. See, always remember this thing, whether it is single or any software, it is full of features and Excel has a lot of features but do we have to learn all the features. Do we have all the features visible on the screen here? So the answer is no. Okay, we do limited things which are useful to us, we do those things. Now as you can see, here I use a different color like you can see here. It is File Home New Tab Insert Draw Page Layout Formula Data Review View Help Acro, you may not have some options in the middle like it is not a new tab, whether it is a draw or not , then this is the one of Acrobat, it is okay, we can add it, I will tell you how to add it later, but what do we call these, what do we call these, what do we call tabs, what do we call tabs, file tab is home tab, new tab is insert tab, draw tab is page layout. If there are tabs, then these are your tabs. Now you will see a color difference. Here you are seeing a color difference, which is charcoal yellow and sorry, charcoal gray and this one above is black, right, meaning there is a box inside this black, what do we call this box, what do we call this box, what do we call ribbon, what do we call this ribbon, what is ribbon, so basically there is a tab at the top, there is a box below the tab, inside which all the features are given now about it. We will read in what is that box called ribbon, that is, there are things given inside the ribbon, okay after that you can see that there is Clipboard, then there is a line, there is Alignment, there is font, then there is a line, there are numbers, then there is a line, there is style, then there is a line, look, the same thing is there in other tabs too, there is insert, then there is tables, then there is a line, there is illustration, then there is a line, there is charts, then there is a line, there is spark line, then there is a line. What is this basically that you are seeing, what is this, so let us read it, these are our groups, if I talk about what is alignment, what is font, what is clipboard, what is number, what is style, what is cell, what is all this, what are your groups, what are groups, basically if suppose I have to do some work related to font, then the whole Excel has been put in this group, then inside it you will get all the options scattered like this. No, if it is in a very organized way, then this is your group, this is a group of fonts and inside the group, like this is visible to you for the font, this is the BiU border color and all these things which are there in the paint, so these are what are inside and what are the features, these are the features but the group that has been formed which means within which these features are, each one that is visible written below is your group. If I talk about insert, then the table is a group. Illustration is a group, Chart is a group, Spark line is a group, Filter is a group, but if I talk about page layout, then theme is a group, page setup is a group, scale to fit is a group, sheet option is a group, arrange is a group, so in this way it is a group and all the things that come inside it are its features. Got it, no one understands anything, there is no doubt anywhere, please let me know in the comment section, this is the whole thing . The session is going to be quite long, so there may be n number of doubts in it, so you keep writing down the entire doubt, wherever it is, you can tell it in one go, you can tell it separately, no issue, but you must tell it so that it can be replied to and you can get clarity about it. Okay, so you keep writing the note down and after that you will tell it because you are going to read it completely, right, so let’s go a little more. Let’s move ahead. After moving ahead, we leave these two options. This or 28 and this is visible. We will understand later. Now we will go down. What we see is this sheet one. So we call it sheet. What do we call sheet and with this plus sign, we can insert more. Add, insert is the same thing, we can insert. Now suppose I have created many sheets here, I want one more sheet, I come to this sheet, once the last sheet is here, I did plus, then look, another sheet has been created, I have this sheet inside it, it is by the name of sheet 14, it is fine, I have to delete it, I right clicked on it, I have deleted it, I come to the first sheet, look, by following these three dots, these three dots will appear in your sheet only when this one of yours. The portion will be filled on the screen. This portion will be filled only when there is nothing to do further. Otherwise, the option to do further will not appear. Okay, from here you can increase more sheets. After this, the options that you see are these options. Here on one side there is this and on the other side there is this, both of them do the same work, do the work of movement, do the work of which one do the work of movement and The movement it is doing is basically the one which is taking you left to right, left to right and the one above is taking you up and down. What is it taking you up and down? Okay and what are these two called scroll bars? What are scroll bars called? Okay, we call them scroll bars because it is helping us in scrolling. Now I am also showing this to you by zooming. If I am telling you, what I am doing is going left and right here and there like this again and again. If I want to go up and down then I use this, so these are our scroll bars, after that the options you will see are these three types of views. Okay, there are three types of views, so what do they mean? Look at what they do. Understand that, which is the first view. I take it for a second, which is the first view, what is the first view, what is your first view called? The first view is called normal view because it is the normal screen and you will see it in normal view, so what will we call it? Normal view which is the second view and is your page layout view. Well, if you go near it, it will automatically tell you the name. Like, if I moved the cursor here, this name came automatically. What is page layout? What is page layout? What does page layout do? Suppose you have to check this because you have created the data and then after that. Obviously, if you take a print out of it, then you have to know that later on, if I take a print out of it, then my data is not getting cut in the print. If I do this, in any case, if you want to check this thing, then you can do it like I suppose, now I click on the page layout, then it is showing me that if at today’s time I go to print it, then my data will be cut in this manner. You can see in different pages, it will be cut in this manner, so now. I can adjust my data accordingly and on clicking on the normal view, the normal work that we do is good, after this comes the page break view preview, so you can also see directly how the page break is happening, so it is showing me the page, in this way, this line is visible, this will become one page, this will become the second page and the rest will go in the third page. These four pages of yours are being created because you have written below also, in this way. This gives us the view, for now we have taken this normal view, so from here you understand the three types of views. Okay, after that see what is the option you are seeing here. I take it for once. Yes, after that what is this option you are seeing? Just give me a minute, look, this is what you have, to zoom in and zoom out, you zoom in and zoom out to zoom in and zoom out. From here, look at the zoom of your screen. If it is zoomed then it is at 175. Now if we zoom in then it will reduce. If we have to do more then it will become more. So if you want to zoom in and zoom out then you can do it directly from here. So here you have learned most of the things about the interface. Now let us move a little further that inside the interface you will see this in the middle. Just because when we started Excel, it was looking like this, so here they are coming in the form of boxes. So, what do these boxes mean? What are these boxes, what are they called, why are they called, why are they there, now we are going to understand the meaning of all these. Okay, now you have understood what we are going to understand, as much as you have understood is enough, now we are going to read about these boxes, so let’s just give me a minute, we have come here, look, you know that we are going to read about pay boxes here and the boxes that you had read till now, in what way were they coming, a line was coming like this. One line was coming like this and then one line was going like this And one line was going in this way and after that it was coming in the middle as a box, it is coming in the same way, look at the side, see this, a line is coming from here, a line is coming from here, a line is going from here, and a line is going from here, by doing this this box is getting formatted and what do we call this box, I am talking about it, so what do we call this box, we call this box, okay, what is this? Let’s say cell, let’s say OK, I understood that all the boxes in our Excel, we call them cells, so from now on, whenever I say something, I will not say box, I will say, is this work to be done in this cell, is this work to be done in this cell, okay, let’s go next. We see that you are looking at the top A B CD, so I can say that this line is a, this line is b and you are seeing numbers written on the side. So I can do one thing, I can write this as one, I can write this as two, so that means this cell is made up of a and b and one and two, so what do we call a and b, what do we call a and b a column, what do we call a column, this is a, not a b, from now on we will not say that a is b or b is a line or c is a line, there is a column, we call a column, so from now on, what will we call a, column a, what will be the meaning of column, then this a As far as this is, the entire line of b means the entire line of b means the entire column of c means the entire column of c. The entire column of n. The entire column of What is completely there is called row, we do not call it line, we call it row. Okay, so now I can say that look, to make a cell, I need columns and if I need rows, then I can say what is needed to make a cell, column is needed, row is needed in plus. What are your columns? What are your alphabets, which you can see on the top and what are your daily lives, they are numbers. Okay, together with them, your cell is formed. Now suppose we will understand which cell is which cell? They understand that suppose I am on this cell, look, now not only the grid lines are off, that means the lines themselves are off, the cells are still being formed, so let’s do one thing. I ask here, here I explain to you how we understand the cell. Now this is a cell. You look above, the color of all the others is of the same type, one has become a little darker, that means this is the income column, this is the eye column, also look here, which one is this 90, so this 90, so what does it mean? This cell is made up of what is it made up of? Aa is made up of columns and 90 rows. Because now you have not understood that a cell is made up of what? It is made up of a column and a row. So what is this cell made up of? I is a column and a row is 990 so what is its name? The name of the cell itself is called aa 90 and look here i 90 that is why we call this box the name box. If you go to this , this is our name box, that’s why we call it name box because it tells us the name of the cell, so that’s your name box. Okay, why is the name box telling us because it is telling us the name of the cell? How will the name of the cell come? Now we will find the name of the cell. Look, we have come to this cell, quickly tell me which cell is this. Look, what is this cell? Look, what is darker from here is j and from here 67 That means j column consisting of 67 rows. This cell has been created and what is the name of the cell j 67 So here is your g67 Suppose I have to do the same thing here now so tell me what is its name its name is q So we will see our column from here 66 Your cry So what is the name of this cell q6 66 So you can see here it is coming by writing q66 Got it understood one or two more let’s see here Suppose I clicked here So what is the darkness here Look at the dark color here What is darker is v and from here darker is 65 that means v column 65th row and what is the name of our cell become v65 ok this is how we do our interface this is how we name our cell this is your name box now you have learned three to four things what have you learned look at all the alphabets written here all the alphabets written what are your columns and see all the numbers you have seen here You can see the numbers here , you can see the numbers, I am just telling you this, okay, these are your daily occurrences, okay, and here, this is a box which is made, we call it a cell, now you have Learned Name Box. Now suppose you write something inside a cell. Now I am telling you to write inside the cell and after that I am explaining the difference in it. This cell is yours and inside it you start writing anything, so if I am writing anything then it is visible above here. So, whatever you write inside a cell is written here also, that is why it is said that if suppose it comes outside the cell and I have to make some changes in it, then to make the changes, if I If I directly change from here and write the taan here then see it has taken the taan here also. If I have written the taan here then it has taken the taan here too. If you have not written anything in this cell then look above it is empty. If it has been written in this cell then see your writing has come in it. You have written something in some cell. Look and it is being written here and the other way around. If this cell is empty then this cell is empty. So in this way, whatever you write inside any cell is written here also. This is why we call it the formula bar. Later , when you will put the formula and write it inside the cell, you can edit it by looking here instead of looking inside the cell. So this is your formula bar where your formula will be shown because the value is shown inside the cell, so this is the formula bar. Gradually, I will explain it better. I will explain it better where we will learn to do data entry. Now I will be able to explain it well. I zoom it out and make you revise the whole thing for once. As you saw, you get exactly the initiative cross, after that you get this file, home new tab and all these, what are yours, these are your tabs, if I go to home, then if I ask you, clipboard, font, alignment , number, what are all these, these are your groups, inside the groups, what are all these available to you, these are your features available, this is yours, this is your name box, this is your formula bar. Your A B C D E F G H What are all these, your columns, all the numbers you have written, these are your days, all these things are made below, this is your sheet, with Plus, you can create more sheets from these, with which we go left, right or up and down, what are these called scroll bars, what are your views, the first one is the normal view, the second one is your page layout view and the third one is page break view and from here you can see it. If you can zoom, here we have completed our interface. Now let us read about our next topic, which is workbook and worksheet. Now we will understand workbook and worksheet, what is workbook, what is worksheet, let’s understand with an example. Okay, Raju is a student. Raju is a student. Okay, and he goes to school, he goes to school, he has four He studies subjects basically Hindi, English, Maths and Science. Okay, he studies four subjects. So now you tell me that if he makes a joint notebook of all four subjects in which he writes the homework of all and does all the work inside it, then will it be okay? Can he do all the work in one notebook? Tell me, can he do all the work in one notebook? The answer is no. He cannot do all this work in one notebook. What will he do? That Means will make one notebook for one subject, that means there are four subjects, so there it will make four notebooks for each subject, inside each notebook it will do its work, Hindi inside this, English inside this, Maths inside this and Science inside this, oh ok, in the same way Raju makes each notebook for each of his work, That Means makes a separate notebook for each of his different subjects, in the same way, when we work, we are different. They create files, what did they create, notebooks, what did they create, notebooks for their different works, but what do we create to do different works, what will we create, we will create notebooks, we are not studying in school right now, we will create workbooks, basically, inside Excel, when you create different files, we call them workbooks, you have seen so many of these things files here in the file tab, these are different files, right, that means these are my different workbooks, that is why. Here it is written Recover Unsaved Workbook More Workbook What is the meaning of workbook this blank workbook is ok so what is the meaning of workbook this is this file this is this file and there suppose now Raju has to work Raju has to work now let’s take another example he is making a Hindi notebook he is making a Hindi notebook and there are 10 chapters inside it how many chapters are there in 10 chapters okay so what will he do what will he do one Will take only one page and will write 10 chapters inside it. Isn’t it possible? And anyway, if a page ends at the top line, you still go to the next page because I have to start chapter two from a separate page, chapter three has to be started from a separate page, chapter four has to be started from a separate page, so we call it that we make separate pages, that is yours, what is called here. Now as if I have to explain it to you, I only know the basics of Excel but here I have created an interface for you in the first sheet, I have created a workbook for you in the second sheet, I have saved the file for you in the third sheet. In this way, whatever topic I will be teaching you, I have created it here so that it becomes easy for me, so in the same way, the pages in the notebooks are pre-defined. What does pre-defined mean that the notebook you buy? It depends on whether you have bought 200 pages, whether you have bought 300 pages or bought 500 pages. This happens in the sheets. You can insert as many sheets as you want here. You just keep clicking on the plus plus sign and you will get that many sheets. We here, the pages are already available, they are already given, we do not already have the sheets. If we have to do any other work, do a plus and create another sheet, so here are our pages, basically the pages inside the file where we will work, that is your worksheet, so now you understand, workbook is the whole file, workbook is the whole file, and inside the workbook there is a worksheet, inside the workbook there are worksheets, so now if your manager is telling you that Tarun, I have taken a random name like this, Taran, you send your worksheet. If you give, then you do not have to send the entire file, you have to send the sheet where the particular work has been done, they want the sheet and if they say send the entire file, that means if you have done let’s say five-seven tasks in it, then they have to see all the work of yours, so that is the main difference of workbook and worksheet, its use will be that now you will understand when there is a conversation, there is a conversation about Excel, now you know. What is workbook and what is worksheet and this example was just taken from me so that you can relate it to it. Now your topic has been completed here. If we talk about the interface, we have covered the maximum things, we have completed the interface. Now I am going to teach you the next thing. See the save file. When you work, it is obvious that you would like to save that work. Suppose my This is the file on which I am explaining different things to you. Obviously, I would like to provide you this file, so to provide this file, I have to save it, so we save it by going to the file here. After going to the file, you get the option of Save and Save As. So now let’s understand it a little bit. What is Save S and what is Save. Let me just zoom it on my screen first, so I have this here. I have zoomed in and here I have taken the pen, see there is an option save as and add a save. Save as means in which way do you want to save it. When you save for the first time, it gives you the option of save as, that is, it asks you at the initial level, in which way do you want to save it, do you want to save it in Excel file or want to save it in some other form, where do you want to save it, where in your laptop. Do you want to save it, under what name do you want to save it, he asks all these things at the initial level. Now suppose we will take today’s date, that is, today you have saved it on any date, now tomorrow you will open that file again, if you work beyond that, then you will not have to give it name and location again and again, you have done it on the first day, after that you have to save what you say in the subsequent subsequent times, now after that for the first time. After this, every time you save, you will save the same thing. If you have to change something, then you will do the save as again. You will go and save in the other wise. The shortcut key for both of them is Control A. If you are pressing Control A, then if it is a file for the first time, then automatic save as will come and if that file is already created, then it will automatically get saved. By saving this, you will get the idea that OK, fine now, save as. There is no option, it means that this file is already running and already saved. Okay, so in this way we would have two options. The first one is save as, the other one is save. For the first time, when you save, the save as comes. By pressing control s, we are able to save it. Now I have to press control s, control s, then this pass option comes. If suppose I do not press control s, then what kind of option would I have, it comes in this way. If I do save as, then basically I have to browse here. I have to tell me where I can save it. If you want to find a place in your laptop where you can save it, then you take the option of browse, you click on it, here you can check any location, where do I have to do it, I have to do it in my volume D, I have to do it in Accounts Expert and from here in Advanced Excel course, going to Sheets, what we are doing right now is that we are doing the basics of Excel, inside this we have to save it here and that too in what name to save it Part One Over Part One Interface Overview I want to search by its name, so I saved it here. If suppose you want to change any format, then here you get many formats, you can save it in that format, you can even save it in PDF, you can save it in CSA, you can do it in whatever you want, but now in which we will do it, we will do it in Excel workbook, so we clicked on it and here we saved it. After saving, now we have saved it, right? Now suppose I cross it out, I have crossed it out, okay, we have crossed it out, now we go to that folder of ours, go to the new volume D, go to Accounts Expert, go to Classes, sorry, no classes, this is your file youtube0, you click on it and it will open and you will get all the work that was yours as it is. Okay, now whenever I have to do some more work, I will not save it. Now suppose I write something else here that this is how we Save the files, then I write something else here, here I write what is the shortcut key or what is this, I write this is the shortcut key, I have written this, now suppose I want to write the shortcut key in my new file because earlier I had not saved it, now I have not saved it, I pressed control S, then see this is what happened back then, now I cross it out and after that go back to the folder and open it by double clicking from here. After opening, see this is automatic in my Now suppose I have written the shortcut key here, let me tell you here, suppose I have written the shortcut key , okay now I am not saving it directly, I am crossing it out and why am I asking this again because it is saying that you have not made any changes in it, have you made any changes in the previously saved one, now do you want to save it or not, now if I want to do it, I will have to tell him. Save because I was going to cross directly, if I wanted to do control s, then it would have been saved as it is. Now after this, whatever I keep doing any work, that is why if you are working in a big data, then you can do control less again and again so that it keeps getting saved. Okay, so here we learned how we save our file. Let us move a little further. How can we do movement inside Excel. What is movement, let’s say this. This is my cell and after that I have to go left, I have to go right, so whenever we learn anything here, where we have to learn shortcut keys and other things too, we will always work in two expectations. What are those two expectations going to be? The first expectation will be yours. Here, if we have to do any thing directly with the mouse, then how can we do it? The next one is the keyboard that I am telling you how to do anything with the keyboard. When we talk about the keyboard, then obviously our short tricks come to us that how can we use the short tricks and make it work directly. There are many such short tricks for many things, but I will tell you the main things, which if you think, this is my repetitive work, remember its shortcut keys, there is no need to remember them all, because if you remember so many, you will get loaded. End After that, you will not be able to remember everything, you cannot even remember everything, it is not practically possible to remember everything, that is why whatever repetitive work you do, those things are your shortcut keys. You can remember all that in that, so see, now we are going to start now the shortcut keys that we will do or the things that we will do that we will learn about what are we learning about the movement means to move here and there in Excel, so how can we go, if I talk about moving here and there in this cell, then wherever you click with the mouse, you can go there, second thing, if I want to go to other sheets, I can go to other sheets by clicking anywhere. The third thing is, if I want to go to another workbook, then suppose I open another workbook and this is I have opened one workbook and I have opened another workbook, this is one workbook, so in such a situation, if I want to go to another workbook, then I go here, I do not click, it will come automatically. In this way, I can go to each one, so it was like going with the mouse, but if it comes to the keyboard, then what do you have in the keyboard, first of all, your The only thing you need to go anywhere are your arrows. What are the arrows? What do you get in the arrows? You get to go to the right side, you get to go to the left side, you get to go up, you get to go down. You can go in any direction here through the arrows. Look, I am moving through the arrows, okay, this is what we are moving through the arrows, I understand, okay after that. The thing that you get, the arrows are also for now, what do you do later, as soon as you start working, you start practicing, your work starts increasing, then there you have more keys also, if I talk about going to the right side, where to go to the right side, then you can go to the right side, you can go to the right side by pressing tab, by pressing what, by pressing tab, now my cursor is near D, which means it is in the cell, now we are pressing tab, so we are going to the right side, if I have to go to the left side right there. If we have to go down then I will tell you what to do. For now we will understand what we will do if we have to go down and after that if we have to go up then what will we do. Basically when we have to go down then we press enter, then see it is taking us down by entering, then press enter. See, you have learned about right side and learned about down. As soon as we start doing its opposite, meaning the opposite of right is left and opposite of down is up, then our keys remain the same. Tab is just put shift in front of them then it will come shift shift tab and it comes shift enter what comes shift enter ok now suppose I want to go right side then obviously I will press tab ok now I want to go left side then I will hold shift and go while pressing tab then it will come here automatically. If suppose I want to go down then I will keep pressing enter and if I want to go up then I will keep holding shift and If I keep pressing enter, it will go up, so this was your move from one place to another cell within the sheet, then you can use it in this way. Now it comes to the point that suppose I have to go from one sheet to another. See, no matter when we read, in which direction do we read? In which direction do we move? In this direction means in the direction from left to right, we go right, so whatever we will read now. You read it in the same way, if you have to do movement inside the sheet, if you have to do movement inside the sheet, that means you have to go left to right, if you want to go left to right, that means you want to go in the forward direction, then what will you press: Control Page Up, Page Up, Page Up, Sorry, Page Down, that means you are going downwards, no, you are going downwards, so what will you press here, Control Page Down, down and right there, you are coming right to left, that means going upward. Well, it starts from here, I am going towards this side, so I am going page down. The beginning is here, so I have to go upwards. Basically, I have to go here. From left right, I am moving towards left left. So what we will do here is control the page up. Okay, this was the point when in the sheet, if I have to move within the workbook, that means I have to move from one workbook to another. If I want to move from one workbook to another workbook, then I press the control tab and automatically jump from one workbook to another. What did I do? You hold the control tab control, it is okay and go while pressing the tab, then you see, I have gone to another sheet also, so it is fine here like this. I understood that if anyone does not understand anything, then I keep saying this again and again that you You can tell in the comment section, I will reply to it directly and whatever doubts you have, keep writing along with them. Either keep telling together or make a note together. Lastly, you can tell it in the comment section. So here we have learned our movement. This is what I am doing with the scroll bar with the mouse. If you want to go up, which one can you go? Either you can use the arrows or you can press shift and enter. You can go up by Shift Enter, you will go down by Enter, you will go down by Shift, Tab, you will go left, Tab, you will go right. Okay, from Control Page Up, you will go to the interface overview workbook, from Down, you will come back here, so this is the way you work. Now suppose you have a very big data and you have to scroll down and go down, then it will take a lot of time to scroll down, so in such a situation, if we page up, then of course you will reach the top, just page up and page down. If we do this, then we can do fast movement down below. For fast movement, within the sheet, you can use page up and page down, so I write here. If you want to do fast movement within the sheet, you have to do fast movement with in the sheet, just because you are going to get this sheet, that is why I am giving you everything hand written, so that whenever you open it later and see, if you do not get everything, then write it for fast movement. So what have we done, when we have to go up, what do we use? Page Up, just press Page Up, OK, don’t press anything else, and if we have to go down, what do we press, Page Down, let’s go for a second, okay, till now we have done all the keys for our movement. Now what we are going to do next is to do data entry. So far, we have learned all the things, that is, how to move, what is anything, what can we say, now the work that has to be done has to be started. So now we will start our data entry shortcuts. Initially we will learn the shortcuts that how to write things inside a cell. Now see the data entry shortcuts that we are learning. Suppose you go to a cell and you obviously have to enter data. So either you go to the cell and start writing anything directly. Like I wrote my name, I started writing directly and pressed enter and what comes from enter comes down, so this came down if I was in the cell. And after writing, if you press tab, it goes to the right, hence these keys are used. Okay, you were here, you started writing anything directly, you wrote it. Now I understood that oh my God, what did I have to do, I had to make T of Tanu bigger and S of Single, now I have to make some changes inside it, so understand how the entry inside the cell is done. Now if I have to enter inside the cell, then either I will double tap, in which position I go. Here I am, I want t, I went here and double tapped, then my cursor came here, after that I put control t here, which means A from here, I will write it in capital, okay fine, one way was this, the other way, what is this, the second way is that suppose now I had to do it in small, I have written it wrong. The second way is, I can go to the formula bar and fix things directly, whatever I want to do, that is why the formula bar is there because of the cell. The same thing is written there, you press enter, then this is yours, okay, the third method and I will tell you because if you do not want to double tap, you do not need the help of mouse, if you want to go directly, then you can go inside the cell directly, you go inside your cell. Now suppose I had to do it in capital only, then you press the function f2 or press f2 directly, then your cursor will come at the very last, now you wanted a single or from the side arrow. You come to the side and make it S and you come to the side with the side arrow and you make it T and after that you enter, then your name will appear in this way, so what are the ways you have to enter any cell, basically what we were talking about here was about entering the cell, how to enter the cell, how to enter the cell, so if I talk with the mouse, then you can enter directly, there is no problem. If I talk about the keyboard, then what all you got in the keyboard, you can do it directly with the mouse and also for the formula bar, you will need a mouse, so I do the formula bar in the keyboard, you can either go to it and double tap or double tap and your cursor is there. It has gone inside or you can press f2 or in some laptops like HP laptops, this thing is also seen that you have to press f2 with the function, then go and enter f, then you will get a key on the side of the control, press f2 with the function, you will go inside that cell, in this way we enter inside the cell, in this way we write our data, now we will enter the complete data in actual. Now we will learn that if we have to write inside a cell, then how to write that also. Now let us move towards our entry. See, now what we are going to do is we are going to do data entry and for data entry, first of all we went to the first cell. Now whatever I want to write, I can start writing directly just because there is nothing inside that cell. So now I wrote the serial number. After that I wrote the party name. After that I came to the side and after that what I wrote here is cells. For now, we are directly creating a small data, so we have created a very small data, after that I wrote one here, here in the party, sorry, party name, I have given the name of some party, I have written my name, after that I come here, I have written any amount here, after that I will write two here and here I will write any other name. Now see how tiring it will be. I write any amount here. It is so tiring that again and again I have to be serialized. If you have to write numbers then what will you do to avoid having to write serial numbers like this again and again, then delete the second one, first write whatever you have written there and then look inside it, look here, now your cursor is like this plus and as soon as you go to it, another plus is formed. A small square is visible, so as soon as you go to it, click on it, hold it and just drag it down, so for now, what it did is it copied it. The same data which is written above has been written below because we had written one, so one has been written, so now click on this drop down on this box and choose fill series from here and after that it will fill the series and give you it, so you could drag as much as you wanted, you could drag it directly. Now if you want, you can write all the names here, you can write any name here, okay, you will keep writing any name and whatever is your data will be created here, I will quickly do something else. I write the name here, you can take the help of your shortcut keys, movement and all these and can use them only. Okay, so we did this and we will write some more names here like and here we write some amounts. Okay, so here you have created your data. Okay, in this way you write your data. Whatever you write in it, inside your sheet, in this way we enter our data. If you want to edit something, then you can double tap that cell. You can go in or you can go with f2 or you can correct it with the formula bar, so this was the way of entering your data, the way you have done it now, let us move ahead towards our selection, see how the selection is done, for this I have already taken a data, here now let me tell you a little bit why I am doing the selection, what is the need, what are you going to read, selection means that suppose you select something or something. If you want to apply for Pay then you will have to select it first. Let’s understand from an example. Suppose you are using your phone, okay, you are using your phone, you are using your phone, okay inside the phone, you will go to WhatsApp2 inbox and go there and paste it and whatever you had to copy there and after pasting it there, you will send it. Correct, you do the same thing, if suppose you are directly forwarding a message, there will be a forward arrow like this. If you are using this too, then this is also selected first, then you understand that no matter what the software is, when will you be able to apply any work, when will you be able to select that work first, the thing you select and the thing you apply will be applied only on the thing which has been selected, the message you select is forwarded, the same message is forwarded, the rest do not get done, to do the rest, you will have to select the rest as well, so here what is We are going to learn that selection, we are going to learn that when we work inside the data, we should know the selection , how can we do the selection, so look at the first expectation, so like I always tell that we study in two aspects, the first one is mouse and the other one is Keyboard, you can select the whole thing with the mouse. In this way, you click once and then hold it, do not leave it and take the selection till the selection you want to make. What can you do apart from this, apart from this you can learn with the help of the keyboard. Now with the help of the keyboard, the thing we are going to learn is the first thing we are going to learn, we will learn complete selection. What will we learn complete selection? Suppose, let me give you my data. If I want to select the data up to where the complete data is written, then I press Control A because I have made complete selection means all data selection, all data selection now all starts with All starts with A, so we have put Control A. Okay, now let’s do this selection, first of all we selected it and then came here and selected it. Click anywhere in the cell. Okay, press Control A there till the data is written. Selection will be done, OK, you click anywhere, after that you will use control A, then as far as the data is written, selection will be done, that is done, if we want to do complete selection, then how can we do it, after that comes single click selection, you can write this, these are some terms, we create them to understand ourselves, it is not that things will work on the basis of these terms, so what will we do now, single click selection, but there is one thing in it, you will be able to go till that point. Selection has to be done as far as the data is written. I give here as far as the data is written. The data is there or is there. Okay, so if you have to make a selection till then, what do you have to do? You have to hold the control shift and then use the arrow. Now the usage of the arrows is up to you whether you have to go up, go to the right, go to the left. It’s all up to you, so right now the data you have, suppose I tell you that you are on the reference number and you have to go till 10. If you want to select up to 15, then if you press control A then the entire data will be selected, but we do not have to select the entire data. We are here and we have to select up to 15, so we will hold the control shift, after that press the down arrow, then the entire selection will be done. In this way, we have to select till the data is written. Suppose I am on this entry and till this data is written . If I want to make a selection, then if I press control A, then the entire data will be selected. I hold the control shift and after that press the right side arrow, it will come till the data is written, suppose I write any values ​​here also, write anything here, dozen matter, we have written this here, okay, after that I come here to five, hold the control shift and press the side arrow, so as far as the data is written, the selection is done, understand. Hey everyone, I hope you all have understood, but if you don’t understand, if you have any doubt for a second, then you can ask me in the comment section. So here we have understood that how we can select a single cell with a single click, how we can select till the data is written. Now comes the third thing. The third thing comes to you is that suppose you have to select a single cell, that means you have selected the entire cell in one go, right? If you want to select a single cell, then till now you were doing it by holding both control and shift. Now you have to hold only shift and then use arrows. Okay, then use arrows. So let’s do this and see what I am telling you. Look at the reference number. Suppose you are on the reference number and you have to select up to 10. Now if you assume that if you hold control and shift, the entire data will be selected, then this is also not required. After that, if you assume that you are on the reference number. If you go and use control shift down arrow then selection will be done up to 15. If you don’t want this then what will you do. Don’t even touch the control. You have to hold the shift and just tap it tap tap tap tap tap. You keep doing it. Down arrow will come to you and you will select one cell. What did you do by selecting one cell each? Okay, it is all up to you as to how you want to make the selection, so it was your selection that if you want to select a single cell. So you press shift and after that all your selection will be done. So the thing you learned here was that whenever we have to do any work in the data, how do we do the selection? You must remember that if you want to select the complete data, then control A will be used single. If you want to click selection then these controls will be used shift and arrows and single cell selection sorry in single click selection and if there is single self selection then we will use arrows by holding shift. Now let’s do our basic formatting just because we have data entry. Selection has come so let’s understand a few more things. Now let me explain to you. For adjustment adjustment, let ‘s take another sheet for once. We are on the selection, after the selection, we tapped and after that see rename it here. If the sheets do not have a name then we will not be able to do so, so we will right click and rename it. What will we do with the adjustment? So let’s move on to the next thing that we will learn. We will learn what to do with adjustment. Now let’s see what adjustment is to be done. Suppose I write my name here Tanu Singhal. Now you see what I have done here. The name is written, it is written in b2, but the name I can see is also visible inside c2. You are able to see, I can see it inside this cell too, so have I written something inside this cell c2 also? Look inside b2, Tanu Singer has been written. Nothing is written inside c2. Your formula bar can tell you this, so what is happening here, what is happening here is that all the cells of ours have a particular width. If you You write some data inside it which is bigger and we will have to do its width adjustment ourselves. Now its width will remain the same but now we can adjust it. Now how is the adjustment done. You pay attention to my cursor. For now, which way is the plus? This is the plus of this way. As soon as you know where you have to make the adjustment, where is the extra coming inside C? Is it coming inside C, right? If the space between B and C increases then your work will be done. You will go to the middle of C and see your plus has changed. You are seeing that your plus is changing. Correct, your cursor is changing. Cursor is changing. What does it mean? Now you can make a selection. You click on it, hold it and just drag it as much as you want to drag. You can do this much, you have to do this much, you have to do this much, you have to do this much or you have to do this much, it is your choice, I have dragged this much, so look at your cell. The width must have been increased. It is in between these two that you will have to select the complete column. You can do it in this way. Similarly, if you have to increase the height also, as you are going to this, your plus is getting changed. You can do it like this. Okay, you can do it in this way, but I was just telling you about the width, but what happens is that if we assume that I have done this with the mouse, we will not do everything with the mouse, we will also learn from the keyboard. For now, for the time being, you can do this directly with the mouse, but the thing is that right now Tanu single could have come in so many cells but I have done so much by dragging, so look, it is possible that I could have done this much by dragging by mistake or it would have remained like this again and again, doing it like this, like this, this looks right, this looks right, this seems right, doing this can be very tiring, so what would you do in such a situation, suppose you have selected the cell like this. So you will go between B and C, this plus has come, right, after this plus comes, you do not have to hold anything, do nothing, just double tap, this will automatically adjust it. Yes, yes, if suppose your cell was like this, it was not like this, nor was yours, you go between B and C, go here, just double tap it, so it has corrected it here, so this is the way you make this adjustment, so I have explained to you in a single cell, here in which way you have done it. You have made an adjustment by double tapping. Let’s take a data from here. Just give me a minute. Control A did control C did. I went to the cell with my adjustment and did the control here and after that we saw this data. Now look at this data, you are able to see this party name. This party name has been reduced because what I have brought is to keep the width of everyone’s cell correct. Now in the process of keeping the width of everyone’s cell equal, the rest of the things are not coming properly. Now what will we do? We will fix it, but first of all, let us tell you about what we learned from the mouse. What we learned from the mouse. From the mouse, we learned that either you take the cursor there, hold and drag, learned this one method, learned the second method, take the cursor there and just double tap it, we learned these two methods. Now we will come to the keyboard related things, that if we have to fix something from the keyboard, that is, with the help of shortcut keys, then see how to do it. So here

you have it, if you want, you can go here and fix it one by one, but do you have to do it like this, is it a very time consuming process, you don’t know how much to fix, how much to do, if not, then what will we do, we will use shortcut keys, we have to use it on the whole, it is not so, if we have to fix one thing, then how do we select the entire data in one go, you click anywhere and use Control A, if you press Control A, then you have pressed Control A. After this, you have to use shortcut keys which is Alt AO I, then by pressing Alt AO I, it automatically got whatever width it should have had. Now suppose your data was in this manner, at some places its length would also have been going on. In this manner, the data would have been there. Now you have learned how to correct the width. You have selected the data. You have selected the data, by pressing Alt AO A, its length will also be corrected. Correct, this length will also be correct, so you have two. Just learned the thing from me here, if I have to correct the width, there are two keys to correct the width, if I want to correct the width, then there is Alt H O, Alt H O I and one more is Alt O C A, this will work in some people, OK, what is it for height or what will be Alt AO A for length, so basically this is the difference between I and A. Last, the rest is the same, now you do not remember the keys, now you just listen to the keys. How to remember, I will teach you the whole memory technique so that you will say oh my God, it was so easy and I was so nervous, okay so don’t memorize the keys right now, you just learned the adjustment, the main adjustment was that we will double tap from here and adjust things, okay now we have entered the data, made the selection, made the adjustment, now we will move into our basic formatting that when we enter the data. If we do this, the data is created. What we are going to do is do our basic formatting, but before doing this, we should know a little theory. Whenever we talk about Excel at the initial level, we talk about two things, one is data and one is formatting. Now what is data, what is formatting, let us understand a little bit what is the meaning of data. Look at what you will be working on, that is, if you are working in Excel, then what is Excel for? You can do calculations, you can present it in a good way, you can make reports from it, you can make dashboards from it, then you can take decisions for yourself from it, you can take decisions for your business, so basically whatever work we do, we do it on data, but data means when you have seen the data, you have seen the data even in the past, there are many things like this inside that data, there are colors, there are borders, your figures may be different, their size may be different. Basically, when you present it, you do it in a slightly different way, don’t do it like this, see what I have written above, this is the entire data written, you will see the data in this way, what will you see in it, what will you not understand, you will not be able to understand, right, you will not understand in this, why will it not come because it is given in this format because only data is written here, there is no formatting done, if I speak in these lemon language. Decorating is basically when you decorate your data, you make it presentable. I have presented my data in such a way that now the person in front can understand it, that is your formatting. So the thing we had learned till now was that data entry was just taking a data and going into the cell and entering it, but now we have learned to make that data beautiful and also to make it presentable, now we have learned it inside it. You are going to learn to make a presentation. Like see, in this also I will make you remember many shortcut keys. Cut keys will be remembered by you. Trust. Now I will make you remember all the shortcut keys. It is clear that we will use only what we have learned till now. Now initially we know that we have to correct something or apply something, so first of all we have to select it and if we have to do this within the entire data, then what do we have to press to select the entire data? Just tell. I will have to click anywhere and press control e. We will have to press control e. By doing this, our entire data will be selected because whatever work we have to do, we have to do it on the entire page. Now we have to fix its width because you can see that some are bigger and some are smaller, so to fix the width we can press Alt OCA. Otherwise, if you press Alt AO, it will also be done. Now it looks a little better to me. Does it look worth seeing? Does it look worth seeing or not? It looks absolutely fine. Now let us correct our data. The first thing we have to correct inside the data is to correct the alignment. Now we will carefully see that all the text written here is written on the right side of the cell. Look, this is also written on the right side, this is also right. They are written on the side and only there you will notice the text, all of them are written on the left side, so suppose I select the entire data and look at the options here, either I do everything on the right side, it will look a bit strange in reading but it still looks better than the first one, but if I turn it to the left, then it looks right on the left, why is it looking right? Psychologically, you can apply a small logic in this, that is, we If I am reading Tanu Single, then I am going like this. Tanu Single Right, then we read anything like this. So to our eyes, if something is in left alignment, then it looks fine. It does not look a bit strange to our eyes, it does not look strange, that is why the left still looks fine to us, but which one is best for us? Which one is the best in the middle? Which one is this in the middle? Is this one in the middle okay? So, we have done the middle. Are you understanding everything right now? Is the text right? What is all the things? So this is what happens in our Alignment. What is Alignment? That means whatever we select, we can move it to the left or right or in the middle. Now I have made it in the middle. Now, what are these top three portions? You will see carefully, this is at the very top, this is in the middle and this is at the bottom. You will not understand the difference now, but now you will understand. Suppose right now it is celled in this manner, now I have selected it, or I can put it at the bottom. Do you want to keep it at the top or want to keep it at the top? See, for now, when your data is absolutely accurate, when the width of your data is absolutely accurate, then there is no difference between the top and bottom. It seems that you select the entire data and look at it from top to bottom. Not much difference will be visible. When does this difference become visible? Suppose at that time your data is shifted here and there, if your alignment is down or up, then it will be visible in this way. So, since you have done this in the middle of your data. If yes, then make it in the middle from here also. Now suppose even if your length increases, it will still remain in the middle. Okay, now you fix it by double tapping from here. You have fixed it, so you always have to keep the align ment, what is the align ment to keep, if you want to keep the center center, then what is the align ment to keep, if you want to keep the center, then I keep writing the points below that what have we done, so that we can remember that later, okay, this will be fine, we write the pay points here. What are we going to do? So first of all, what we are going to do is that we have done the right alignment. And what we have done right in the alignment is that we have done it in the center. Okay, we have done it in the center. Basically, we have done middle middle, so we can say that we have definitely brought it to the center. Even if I talk like this, I talk like this in the center. If I talk like this in the center, then also in the center, we have brought him to the center. Second thing, let us try and see. Second thing, what will we do? We have gone to our data now. Now what we will talk about is the heading, what can we do on the heading, so in general our heading which is the heading you will see, now we are seeing in the adjustment one, you are seeing that there is a color on the heading, it is slightly raised, then the data is looking good because it is emerging, it is understood that what is written above is the heading, the data below is written as normal data, so in the same way we will have to create this heading, now I will have to create my data from here till here. If we have to select from reference number to amount, then what do we have to select, what shortcut do we have to press ? As soon as we press control shift side arrow, control shift side arrow, we will have all this data selected and that too within a single click. Now it has been selected. Now if we want, look, go inside the home tab and here you will see the rest of the things which you have to do, so do them one by one. Let’s say you want to make it appear a little raised, you want to make it appear a little thick. Yes, right now the words are written thinly, so you can bold from here, so see it has come in this way, I will close it, see if you can see the difference, then you can see the difference that you have bolded. Given italic, it becomes a little tight. We do not want italics. Underline brings the underline below them. We do not want underline. If you want to change their font, you can do that too. Generally, we professionally use Caliber and Arial. Okay, so you can use them also. You have to use this, you have to use this, you have to use this, you have to use Arial black, whatever you want to use, you can do it normally. Used this and it looks very thin, so we use the normal caliber. Okay, after that you get the cell color and that means first we see the size. For once, here you get the size. You can write the size yourself and can also select from here. As you keep increasing the size, its size is increasing. As you keep decreasing, its size will decrease. 12 I think okay, what will we do after that? Just because you are seeing, now because of this heading again, it is not coming complete, so we will do control A, we will do control A anywhere in the data, we will do Alt OCA, then it has adjusted itself, now we have to color in it, so we will select it, now understand one thing, which is this, what you are seeing is this box, let me just take the pain fast, what you are seeing is this box, which means what we call a cell, inside the cell, if I have this If I filled it like this, then what color is there inside the cell? Red and on top of that, if I write something with white color, then what will we call that white colored thing or what is written as font? So what we write inside is our font and this is our cell, so the color shown here, this bucket, this bucket colors that cell, so suppose I color it yellow, then what to do, yellow bucket means I have colored the inside of every cell and there is a font inside it. Meaning, for now, suppose I make it red, then look, it has become red, but I don’t like red, I make it white, so it has become white, now I take this one, I color it green or I color it blue, this one is blue, then look, it has become of this color, so basically this bucket colors your cell and this is what is written, it colors your box, whatever you write and keep something inside the cell, it colors it, okay , I understood. Now we write everything here, what other things have we done, what things have we done? Pay attention, we will write some things here, we have bolded it, after that we have italicized it here, then what else we have done here, we have underlined it. Okay , after that, what have we done right now, we have not done anything else, just colored the colors and the font, no problem, now you will see that the data is visible fine but there is no error anywhere inside it. Oops oops, there is no border anywhere inside it, so now we will put a border on it, what will we do, we have to put a border on the entire data, we will select the entire data, after that we will go to the home tab, inside the font group in the home tab, here you see an option which we call border, if you go to this, then look, after writing here, thick outside border will also appear, you click on this drop down, after clicking on the drop down, you will have so many options. Are there options, ma’am, do you have to remember so many options? The answer is no, all these are for drawing a single line, you do not need to remember this, you have All Borders, so you take all these borders, if you click on All Borders, then a thin border will appear on everything. Now with All Borders, you have seen it in this way, but do you remember in your school, when you used to make drawings, you used to make sketches, You have made a sketch, filled the color inside, after that you are busy in darkening it, brother, we will make an outline on the outside, we will make all the thick outlines so that the sketch of yours can emerge, in the same way, we have to make our data beautiful, so what will happen by making it beautiful, you selected the entire data, after that you selected it and after that you used thick outside border, then you see, it has become thick on the outside, it has become normal on the inside, do you want it or not, ma’am? I have to put different types of borders, so don’t look anything else, I will tell you three to four, you see exactly that, after that you look straight and don’t look for anything in between. Come here, Thick More Borders, More Borders, Here you get the option, suppose you want to apply this thick, right now it is this thick, it would have been this thick or suppose you want to apply dotted, then I took this one. After you see where you have to put it, there is no need to put it one by one, here you can put it whether you want to put it on the outline or you want to put it on the inside or if you want to put it on both sides, then turn on both, here you can see the preview. I only wanted to put it on the outside, not on the inside, so I did nun here and then took the outline and did OK. So now see, it is on the outside and the rest have been removed. Okay, so in this way we put our borders, so what did we learn today? Meaning, for now what we learned is, look at what we put inside the borders, first of all we put all the borders, okay, all the borders, then what we put thick outside border, so we put thick outside border, we are writing this because later we are going to remember the shortcut keys of all of them, ma’am, so many shortcut keys, yes exactly so many shortcut keys, more borders and after that what we are going to do is what we are going to do, tell me one thing about all the ways. You have put a border but what can you say in English to remove the border, no border, we don’t need any border, so you have no border. Now, if I ask you to do all the work that you have done, but if I say this, you will have to do all this work with shortcut keys , then will you be able to do it? Let’s make this data exactly the same as before. See, what is the first thing you have to do. If you want to remember any key, then in your laptop, in your computer, press Alt. Press Alt. After doing this, look upwards, H is visible everywhere, all this is visible, no, whatever work we are doing, what kind of work we are doing, for once, I go here, now I press Alt, the work we are doing, what are we working in, in which tab we are working, we are working in home tab, no, home tab starts with what does it start with, read the spelling of home, H O M E, home starts with H, so here. Your H will appear. Look, H is written here, what does it mean? If I press H, then a key will appear on top of all the functions inside the home. Now we are going to talk further. Okay, first of all, I will scape it that I do not want this. Here you have understood the activation. If I talk about activation, what is it? Alt is activated. What is the key of home? What is the key of home? Whatever function we are working on, where is it present inside the formatting, all that is present in the home tab. Right, to reach the home tab home tab, we will have to press all touch. Now the thing is that how to do the align ment, then the align ment starts with a and we have to center it, so we will press a. So this is its shortcut key, understood. Let’s understand one or two more, then you will understand that all the borders are there, how to do all the borders. Suppose your What are the keys starting from Alt, then after that you are going to home, then after that you are applying border and which border are you applying. If you are applying alt border then your key will become Alt H BA. Remember one thing that the key is activated from Alt, from home to home we are doing all the work so h will go and after that b will come. If there is a thick outside border then from alt we activated it. From h we went to border home. From B we went to border and If there is a thick outside border, then thick starts with T, then it will come here. Okay, more borders. From old, we activated it. From H, we went to home. From B, we went to border and from here we applied more borders. So, in the same way, what will happen to no border? Alt HBA has nine borders. So see how easy it was. It is very easy to remember these shortcut keys. You just need to know your work and the system, how you are doing any work. Wherever you get that work, pick up its initials and you will easily remember it. Well, for bold, there is control one. If you try this, Alt H and here it comes by writing 1 2 3, so if you want, you can do Alt h1 23, that will also work in the other wise. Control and Bolt starts with B, then Control B. Italic starts with I, then Control I and Underline starts with Y, so this is your Control Ya, in this way we remember all the keys. One thing, I will tell you the bonus here, just give me a minute. Here we will take the red color. After taking the red color, I will tell you here, did you see the one with width and length , ma’am, width and length? Yes, you were doing it right now, no, what were you doing right, what were we pressing, I did not remember at that time, right? Alt AO I and Alt ho A Now I understand why these two things are taken because inside the home tab, you will get this feature, then press Alt H, look at O, where is the format, we take it here, okay, inside it, as you click, I have clicked that by mistake, Alt H O, and inside this, there is auto fit height and auto fit width, so I and A, so these keys of ours are made here, these are the keys, it is okay, so this is Alt AO I and Alt AO is A and in this way we do all the things. Okay, I hope you have remembered all the keys well. If you have any doubt anywhere then please ask me. Now let me try and tell you for once. Suppose we do the border, then first select the entire data with Control A. With Alt HB A, I have removed the borders from the entire data. I did Control A, did Alt ABA, then did border on everything Alt. If we have done HBT, then there is a border on the outside, in this way we can do whatever work we have to do quickly and very easily, so what we learned here was our basic formatting and we have done the entire basic formatting very well with all the shortcut keys. Okay, if you want to note down, you can note down other wise, so you will definitely remember it, still you are going to get this sheet as it is, so don’t worry about this. Now we have done the basic formatting, now we will understand a little bit about one more topic, which is insert and delete and after that we will move to the advanced topic, what is the meaning of insert, if we look at it in general sense, insert is insert any thing, that means they are adding any thing. Now suppose I saw this data and after seeing the data, I understood, oh no , I have not added any heading inside it, so now in such a case. What will we do, do I erase the entire data and after that go and see that oh my God, now I will go and write the heading and only after that I will make the entries, then it means that there is no problem at all, no, we will not do this at all, what will we do, we will add one more row for ourselves right here, if I add one row for myself right here, then how easy it will be for me, so what will I do, I selected it, look after selecting it, any. If you add something, then what is the plus sign? If you delete something, or if you delete anything, then what is the sign of minus? If you do a minus, then you have to press the plus sign with control, then it will automatically add a row. Now you can write a heading for yourself here, in the same way you had to add it somewhere else. Suppose you have to add here, you do control plus. Now, if I don’t want this thing, then what will I do, I will make the same selection and make it control minus. So, in the same way, now I have told you how to add a row or add and delete a column. Similarly, with Control Plus, you can add a column and delete a column. Now you have learned this thing that when you have to add a row and a column, now if you want to add a cell , you can do that too, but why do you have to add a cell? When we are adding a row column, then look, suppose you have a data written in such a way that a data is written above it. There is a data written below also, now what do you have to do or not to make any changes, that is, do you need another column in the above data, before the name of the party account, you had to write something else, okay, now suppose you select C and do control plus, then this is added below also because it adds the entire column whereas it is required in the data below, otherwise we cannot do this. This is what we have done wrong, so what will we do, as much portion as we want to add, we have added our portion. After selection, I did control plus, now it asks, okay, I have understood the selection you have made, you have to add so many cells, but tell me, what will I do with the remaining data, then what can you do in such a case, you will give command to it, Antays has nothing to do because if I had to antays, then why would I select the cells, if I could have directly selected the entire row and column and done control plus, then these two options would have been useful. Don’t even look, look at the two options above, it is asking where should I shift the remaining data. If I shift down and do OK, then for him it means that I have to make space for you. What are you telling him, I have given it by doing control plus, make space for me, I need space and after that he is asking OK fine, I will make space but tell me what should I do with the earlier data, then you say shift it down to me. I don’t know, make space for me, so he shifted that data down, but did we have to do this? No, we did not have to do this, so what did we have to do? Control Plus, now what am I saying, okay fine, do one thing, shift the earlier data a little to the side and then shift it to me, then the data that is shifted here will be shifted to the right and you do OK, then your data has been shifted to the right and as many sales as you wanted have come here for you and Even if your data below is not corrupted, then in this way we add our data to any row, column and cells inside the data, then here we write it, for one time, use the shortcut key so that you remember later that we have to add any thing, we have to add or insert, then what do we do and if we have to delete any thing or write substack, then what do we do, basically these two things are happening. In which sense it is happening whether it is row or column and whether your cells are dozen matter, you will do control plus to add or insert and control minus to remove it. Okay, so in this way we insert and delete any row column cells. Let’s move the cells inside our excel. Now let us move towards advanced formatting. See, what we are going to do now is to do advanced formatting. Those are the features of that as well as separately. There is no feature but we take it a little advance. See, now suppose we suddenly remember that the heading has not been written, then how can we do the heading? For now, let us keep from deleting the entire data. What we have learned now is that we will select it and do control plus, then we have one row, it will be inserted. We do not have to do that. Right click here, insert option comes, so it will be inserted in this way also. Now I want to write here in the middle, ABC Limited, I want to write the heading, ABC. Limited, so what should I do, tell me quickly, should I do it like this, okay fine, there are three here, there are three here, so I write in D, it will come in the middle, we can do it like this, no, what do we have to do, we write here A B C Limited Limited, okay, we have written this, now what do we want in the middle, neither where in the middle, so first of all, select which one we want in the middle, we want it in the middle, after that you go to the home tab, in the home tab, you are inside the Alignment group. You get only one option of Merge N Center, you click on the drop down of this Merge Center or click on the Merge Center, after clicking it will appear in this manner. Okay, our ribbon is now removed, so now what we will do from here is that if we click on it, it will come in this manner, so see it came in the middle, what did you do in it, merge all the cells we have selected and after that, align them, what do you do with them, center. If you do this then Merge and Center has come here. What did Merge and Center do? After that you can give any color. I give black color that would be better. You can make it bold, you can show it in some other color, you can do some font. In this way, now suppose you had to write this also just because this is a sales report, so you selected this also, Control Plus, Control Plus is not happening, it’s okay, you have inserted it from here, here is another one. You are still able to see that there are separate cells, it has become one cell because you have done the margin center. Now you will write the sales report here, okay and after that you will select this also and then you will click on the merge center and then you will give it a dark color too. In this way, now think about it that you have to do separate work for both of them, so this is not making the work a little easier, it is making it difficult, so when you have to If you have to do more work like this, if you select it and make it merge center, then it will tell you that the top most value which is written will come, if you do OK then only this will come, then don’t do this, what we will do is click on the drop down here and merge means merge in this way, click on merge across, then automatically it will come in this way, okay, this was your merge across, apart from this, suppose you want to unmerge them, you click on this. Click on unmerge cell, it will come like this, now I will do the merge across, so what have you learned here, what have you learned here, two things, what have you learned, three things, you have learned, the first one is merge and the center, you have learned this, the second one, what have you learned, you have learned, merge across, you learned this. And third, you have learned unmerge, okay now you know where all the three things are, we are working in the Alignment group of the home tab, so basically how to activate the home tab, that is, with the activation key, we go to the alt home tab, from H, what have you done after that, after that, you have merged and centered, then your shortcut key will come, merge and center, what have you done, you will activate it from old, go to home from H and here. Merge Across, Merge Across, you should not know the feature, what keys have to be used, the keys are created automatically , Alt H, Sorry, Alt H, now unmerge will happen only when merge is done, first if something is merged then only then it will be unmerged, then M and then you will use U, then in this way, these three shortcut keys of yours have also been prepared, you see, you have to memorize so many shortcut keys in such a short time and trust me, you will not forget once you have memorized it in this manner. Once you start practicing, you will not forget at all. Okay, so in this way, we have done a little more formatting here. One more part of the formatting is left, which is wrap text and one small thing which increases it, I will tell you in the next topic, which is wrap and shrink. See, when we did the interface, inside the interface, I had forgotten to tell you one thing. I am so sorry for that inside the interface, when you will see let me just. Zoom at my screen, you have zoomed this and after that you have come here, you will see here, look here, this is this mark, what is this mark for, see, you can also see here, what is this mark for, I write this mark here, we call it extension, what do we call extension, now what is this mark for, what is that, let’s go to our place and understand, there is no problem in that, okay, we will come to our place, what were we understanding? Wrap End I was thinking, let’s zoom it a little, okay, now it’s okay, so let’s see what it is for. Suppose you have a lot of features. I am saying that Excel has many, many, many, many features, so are there many more features related to fun, and there can be many more features related to alignment, and there can be more, so in such a case, is it possible to show all the features on the screen? Is the answer is no, is it not possible to show them all? So what do we do? There is a symbol of extension in the corner near the group. Look, this extension is not in every group. Look , it is not in Styles, it is not in Sales, it is not in Editing, it is not in Done, it is inside this one. Why is it there because wherever you have it in this way, you have some other options too, but here if they are not visible then the extension comes there. If you click on this extension, a window opens inside, then you have more options to explore here. You get to do another ​ ​No, to fix the cell, I do not want the width of my cell to increase, I want to keep everyone equal, I do not want to increase it too much, so I want to increase the width of my cell, there is no problem if the length increases, but I do not want to increase the width at all, so what will I do in such a situation, I will click on this and I will wrap my name in the text here, wrap my data in such a way that it will be its width. Its width is neither increased nor increased, then in such a case I will click on the wrap text. Now it is here, now it does not mean that it has become like this forever, as if you are clicking on it, then you are seeing here that it is written ‘Tanu Single’, it means that it is written ‘Tanu Single’ and it is written like this, this is just because you have clicked on the wrap text and now the width of this cell cannot be increased, so this happened, now increase the width of the cell, this is fine. It will come, okay, so where you do not have to increase your width, you can increase your length, there you will use it in this way, in this comes the next one, suppose I write the stems single again and they are going out, now I am saying that I am imposing a restriction but now I am saying I am saying that the width is not increasing, it is fine, but the length should not increase, if the length also increases, then it will not work, so what can we do in such a case, it is obvious that the length should not be increased and if the width is not increased, then the obvious thing is that I will have to shorten the font, now if I try to shorten this function manually, then I will not be able to understand, okay, it looks fine in the ate, maybe in the ate ? If he is going out in the nines, then I will keep doing the same thing, otherwise what do I do in such a situation, I go to this extension and here it says shrink to fit, shrink my data to such an extent that it fits inside this cell, then you click on it and do OK, then it fits inside it, okay, it fits inside it very well, we call it shrink text, you can see it here in both the cases above. In both the cases, Tanu is written as single, but I actually want that no matter how much the width increases, how much length increases, but our data is that Tanu comes down by writing single, so what can you do in such a situation, if you write Tanu, if you move your cursor down, after pressing enter, the cursor will not come down, the cell comes down, your cursor is missing, you have come out of the cell, then how will it be written, see what you will do Tan and when you have to bring the cursor down, now you Do not press enter but press alt enter, your cursor will come down, now write, you enter single, then see here also in your formula bar, it has come written in this way. The formula bar shows the same thing which you write in the cell and the way you write correct, so now it has shown it tan single in this way. Look here, it was showing together, here I reduce the width, see it has come in this way, still it is showing it like this because We have written as it is here, we have written it as it is, so it is being displayed in this manner, so here we have completed our wrap and shrink text. This comes within the advanced formatting itself, so within this we have covered it, we have chunked a lot of the basic, so miscellaneous things also come inside it and along with it, the group with clipboard is also included, which means we are going to add some features in the group, so let’s do the work first. Let’s look at the Clipboard feature. Basically, what do we get inside the Clipboard? You can see that we get features like cut copy paste and so what is the meaning of copy? Here you data. Whenever you have read Excel, you have come reading two things inside Excel. I had initially talked about what are the things we are reading in Excel initially. We are reading the data and we are reading the formatting. Right, so when you copy any data completely, the copy is done. What does it mean, we do Control C or you can copy from there by right clicking, then when you copy, there is data in it, whether there is any formatting, no matter what kind of formula is there, all of them come up in that cell, that is your copy and wherever you have copied it, after that what do you have to press to paste, you have to press control v. Now let’s assume that this is where I bring this data, so first of all I am in advanced formatting. What will I do, I will select the entire data from Control A. After selecting Control A, after that I will do Control C. After Control C, you are seeing these dashes running on the side, that means its selection has been done, after selection, Control C has been done. Now I will go to Sheet Two here because I have not named it yet, it is right in front of you here. Let’s pay here. If I do Control V, then as it is data has come. Alt OCA. Do it as it is, the data has come, let me do it a little like this, as it is, your data has come, if you do this, copy this data and paste it on the side, it will come, that means there will be data here and here too, the data will be right, but if suppose you select the data and do not copy it, cut it, do that means control Basically, what is meant by cutting, data goes from there, what is your shortcut key to cut ? Control You should have selected the data, Alt OCA, done the data, okay, now suppose I want to copy the construction company from it, then I want to copy this, let’s do one way, so let me do this control C and keep controlling v here, control c control v control c control v, so how much tiering process is there, how much tiering process is there, no, I have to do it one by one, so we will not do this, so I deleted it, okay, but now what we will do is let’s see what else we do. You can do this for multiple selection, what can you do, hold the control where you are selecting, then wherever you are clicking, you see that it is being selected, it is being selected, okay, now you control it, it will not take, then it means that for multiple copies, this control one which does the selection method is also not working, then what does it do, what does it do, you open the clipboard in your home tab, keep clear all from here, it should become clear here. Select Control C, go on selecting anywhere, go on doing Control C, Control C, Control C, Control C, I am doing this but I am not holding anything, I am going there with Control C and wherever I feel like, you go to that cell and paste it wherever you feel like. You go to that cell and here there is an option of Paste All. If you click on it, then all these things are there, it has pasted here, all the things are pasted here and after that, clear all from here, then all your things are there. If you want to paste multiple copies here, then this is a shortcut method that if you want to paste multiple copies, then you can do it from here. I hope you have understood, I had to tell you only these things in the Clipboard group for now, there is one more thing I need to tell you. Suppose you want the same formatting for another table, then what will you do. Suppose you will copy from here, paste it and then delete the data. There is no need to do so much fuss, you select this data and here there is an option like brush. If you go to this, then its name comes Format Painter Painter, meaning are we the one who is going to paint, who should do the formatting, then if you want the same formatting, then click on it, see the selection is done here, wherever you leave it, this same bean will come after your formatting, so in this way, we use Format Pinter, now I should name this sheet, so I name it, I give it a name, Clipboard Clipboard Group, we have Here we have completed it, now let us move towards our miscellaneous topic. In the miscellaneous topic, the first thing I have taken is the clear sheet. What does the clear sheet tell you? The meaning of clear sheet is that if I want to delete the data then how can I do it? What can you do to delete it? Let me show you a data. Here we can see this data in the clipboard itself. Do you have this data? You selected this data and after that you deleted it. If you press the option of , then the data is gone but your formatting is not gone. If this problem arises, then here we are going to solve the same problem. You get this feature inside the home tab. Now we will remember its shortcut keys. Now we will remember what happens here for deletion. Firstly, we have called the content data here as content or you want to delete the formatting or you want to delete everything. Which is all, then this is fine. Three things come to you, now let me tell you just because it is in the home tab, so from old you will activate all the keys, you will go to home, from old you will activate all the keys, from old you will activate all the keys and you will go to home, what will come for content, clear, what are we doing, we are clearing all these things, we are clearing right, so for clear, the key it has taken is E, E is taken E. Now you don’t need to do anything, if you are clearing the content, then put ‘C’ to clear the formatting. Just put ‘f’. If you want to delete everything, then put ‘A’. Now let’s see it on our own. I would personally suggest you to delete the content, don’t do anything. After making the selection, you can directly press the delete option, that too will be easy for you, but for formatting and other things, you can do this like you can do with clipboard. Now you have this data and you have to delete it, so I directly pressed delete and it got deleted. Now suppose you have to delete the formatting, then suppose you selected this in the formatting and if you delete it, it will not get deleted. Because there is formatting, then you came to Alt H home, see from E, this is the option of clear, E is for clear and F for formatting, so see, it is completely cleared, if suppose the data and both of these have to be removed, you select the data, activated Alt H, E was for clear and if you have to do everything, then do A, then the entire data will be gone. Okay, in this way we do it, after that you have two more shortcut keys. What is Undo and Redo? What is the shortcut of undo and redo? Suppose you have done some work. Undo means suppose you have done some work but that work was not to be done, then you do undo and for any work that has to be brought back, you read it. For the work that has been done, you press control root that I want it back, meaning I have done it. After that, if I want to bring it back, then I press control w. Now suppose I have to delete what I am writing because I have done it. If I have written wrong, then I will keep pressing control, then by controlling j, all these steps which were mine have been removed. Now if I control yy, then look, all the things which were mine have come back. So this is how it works. Which is your undo and redo? Let’s go. Now let’s see what else comes to us next. Insert and Delete. What is there in insert and delete? Suppose, if you want to add any sheet, then from here you can insert from plus. You can do this and if you want to delete any sheet right there, then you click on it and if you delete it, this sheet will be deleted, so in this way we insert or delete, I right click here and write here that on right click you get these options. Till now I was giving name to the sheet, so to give any name, you have to right click. On right click, you get the option that you can name that sheet like this. If you want to rename, click on Rename then we can give this name. Okay, everyone understood in this way, we check the option for tab color as well. Here we get the option of tab color. If we want to give any color to our tab, then look, I want to give red color, so look, this red color of my clipboard has come. I want to give some other color to Miscellaneous, I took the tab, I want to give green color, so look, my green colored Miscellaneous tab has arrived. Okay, as soon as it is open, it will appear gradient, otherwise it will appear solid color, so in this way you can also give different colors to the tabs, so here we have covered the basic things which are very small things of Excel, now what we are going to do next is to do the basic formula. Further, we are going to start from the very basic. Let’s talk about the formula, so first understand a little theory. See, whenever you are talking about Excel, then Excel is more about the calculation that it makes your calculation part very easy, so whenever we do any calculation, how do we do it, we do the calculation only by taking the help of formula, so formula is a very important aspect of Excel, so all the formulas there are here, they will be taught to you in a very easy way. Now the point comes that ma’am. Formula is maths, I am afraid of maths anyway, so what should I do so that I don’t have to do formulas and it is going to be so typical, so how will I be able to do it, so see here you need a general understanding, a basic understanding, you need a basic understanding, if you have a basic understanding of maths then you will be able to do this work, you do not need many such tricky knots in this, you just need to know that you need to do it. What is your work, what do you need, what is the answer, if you know this then you can definitely apply any formula directly here. If there was a need for typical maths here, then why would we be doing Excel? We would not have done the maths on our own, but this makes our work easier, that is why we use the formula here. When any formula is started inside Excel, then what is the initiative? Equals to It happens that first of all we have to apply equals to and then we have to work. Now you will say ma’am if you don’t understand then you will understand easily. Keep a little patience. You just remember each topic which we have done till now. Name of the cell, what makes up a cell. You just tell me that our cell is made up of one column plus row. If I tell you this is a cell and the name of that cell is a1 then what is the meaning of a1 a is the column one is the row. Just keep this thing in mind, after that I I will explain all the things automatically to you. Let’s take a scenario and after that let’s understand it in a better way. You will understand better here. Here you can see that I have taken a data here. What is the data? Let me tell you, first of all you are given the serial number, after that the student name is given, after that the marks of Hindi, English Maths and Science are given. Now if you want to find the total, then if you want to find the total, then basically what to do is to sum. Now do the sum. In which do you need even, which cell is g3 in it, it is okay, you keep looking carefully, which cell is this, g3, please understand this thing carefully, because if you miss this topic even a little, then there can be problem in the future topics, this is your g3, what answer do you need inside g3, do you need total, whose total do you need, one is needed of c3, one is needed of d3, one is needed of e3 and one is needed of f3, okay then basically you You know g3 = c3 + d3 + e3 + f3 ok now let me say suppose you are here you are here which is your g10 which is your g10 so if you come to g10 then what you need is obviously c10 d10 e10 f10 so you understand one thing as this is your g4 this will be g5 this will be g6 this will be g7 in the same way this will also be c4 this will be c5 c6 will be c7, d4 will be d5, d6 will be d7, so it will keep increasing in this manner, okay, you have understood one thing, we are talking about cells here, now let’s apply formula to it and see, we will learn to do sums in different ways. See, this is a very basic thing, when you do maths, you used to study maths in school too , then the thing that was taught to you at the initial level is when it comes to the calculation part. So that was your even, so here also we are going to even, we will spend full time in even, the rest will not take time, okay let me just remove it, first we remove it and after that we do further work, now what do we have to do, have you understood that the answer we want in g3 g3 is c3 + d3 e3 f3, so what we have to do is we just have to write, when we start any formula, what do we start with? Let’s start from equals two, so equals two, now what did I tell you, what is needed here, c3, so I went to c3, what to do plus, then what is needed, d3, then what to do, plus, then what is needed, e3, then what to do, plus, then what is needed, f3, then what to do, if you don’t want to do anything, then go till f3, you have to do plus, press enter, then this answer will come to you, now you can drag it, so see this is yours. The answer has come, what is the answer, you can check here, this is g4, then yours here is c4 d4 e4 f4, suppose you are here, which is your g9, then here you can give the formula, c9 d9 e9 f9, suppose you are here, which is g12 c12 d12 e12 e f12, so basic, we drag and bring the rest of the formulas ourselves. Initial formula. We have to put it in ourselves, so one way was this, you had another way and take it out, okay, later we will fix its formatting, okay, I will do it like this by going to the home, giving the format to the printer, okay, for now, let me assume that I have told them to sell, if I had done something directly, then equals to 90 + 27 plus 10 PS 47 174. Now should I drag it, what will happen to everyone when I drag it? The answer is 174. Why did this happen? Look, it is a very simple thing. We give three things in the formula. Three things consist inside the formula. I am telling you this very basic idea. There are three things in the formula, one is a cell, one is a number and one is a text cell. It gets changed by dragging, it gets changed by dragging and the main thing is that if you want to fix it then you can do it manually. What can be fixed can be fixed manually, we will have to apply some formula by ourselves, which fixation will also be learned later on. Numbers: If you are writing a direct number, if you are writing a number then it is always fixed, it will never change and in the same way, if you are writing any text, it is always fixed. The second thing is that the number is written directly, the text is written inside the double ted comma, okay now these things are now. You must be feeling that it is very confusing, you have to read it just once to understand, so read it, you have to understand it, understand it, very good, it did not come, there is no need to worry, because now when we will do this with the example, then you will automatically understand something. If you do not understand the theory, then hold on. Because that thing will be understood in practice, not everyone understands everything in theory, not everyone understands everything in practice, so here I have covered both the expectations, okay now we have come here, now tell me one thing, what happened here, just give me a minute, okay, this is not erasing, what happened here, I had given them the value by taking 90 plus 27, plus 10, let me make it 47, now the numbers are If there is no change then here too the formula remains the same. Here also the formula remains the same everywhere. If the formula remains the same everywhere then the answer will be 174 everywhere. What is the second thing? Now suppose I did 20 here then it will change because when we give cell in the formula then we tell them that look, add c3 plus d3, add e3 plus f3, now the formula does not make any difference inside c3. Whether you write 10 or 100, what it means is that he has understood that whatever happens inside c3, I just have to total it and now write 1000 inside c3, even if I come here and here and write 1000, the answer has changed because it does not care what you have written, it just means that he just takes the command in this way in which you told him to add c3 to plus d3. Make a plus on e3, make a plus on f3, then he has just taken the cell. Now whatever you write in the cell, he will do a plus, but what you have done here is that you have told the values ​​yourself, turn 90 into a plus by 27, turn the plus into a 10, turn the plus into a 47. You have already given the values ​​here, so that is why it has not changed it. Okay, and later also when we drag the cells, they drag. If there are any, then they get changed, like here there was c3 + d3 + e3 and f3, here the same thing happened c4 d4 e4 f4, those cells change automatically but here you have given the value, the value never changes, it remains as it is, so this is the problem with us, if we apply the formula in this way, then we will get the wrong answer. Now the next thing comes, I will take one more for once. Okay, I am here and I have selected it and controlled it. Okay, it’s okay, it’s okay. Okay, let’s go. Now we are going to learn another kind of total. Now see how much tiering it will be if I go to each cell and do plus plus plus. So let’s say there were four values. If I have more values, then what will be my benefit? If I do it in the calculator, then in such a case, we will apply the formula to add. What do we call sum? If we say equals to sum then we will put equals to sum and tab and always remember one thing, never listen to any person in the formula, you always have to listen to the formula, you have to do what the formula is saying, what is the formula saying number one comma number two comma number three comma number four comma and so on it has come then we will do number one comma number two comma number three comma number four and turn off the parentheses and hit enter. If you give it, your answer will come. Now drag it to you and see the correct answer will appear. You can check whether you have written Equals to Sum. Pressed Tab. By pressing Tab, the sum will automatically be in capital letters and will open your bracket. Whatever things are written inside your formula, keep writing them. It was written there, number one, comma, number two, comma, number three and so on. So, we gave him this formula, so how easy it was now. Our formula has become automatic. If we change anything, there will be changes inside the formula. Now comes one more thing , control c control v. Now comes the thing that see what it has taken here d3 e3 f3 and along with it g3 because it has understood it as further, so we delete it. Okay cell, when we write neither, they move, that is why our answer keeps getting auto updated. Now tell me one thing, you have applied the formula. Sum is written there too, you have to select each cell and put a comma. Is it easier than this? I will use a calculator, so to make the work easier, look at what we do, when we know that we have to add something continuously, then we write it in a different way, like suppose you have now understood what Equals to Sum is, equals to sum and numbers have to be given inside a1 a2 a3 a4 a5, okay five. The numbers were one way, so this is the second way, if I say now what does it mean, add a1 to a2, then plus th, then plus four, plus fv, I can also write it like this, from a1 to a5, when you have consecutive numbers, there is this colon in between. What does this colon say? What does this colon say? It says from to means this is a range, what is a range, we have You have selected a range that is from a1 to a5, if someday you make it even like this, a1 a5 means what is written in a1 and what is written in a5, add both of them, add both of them, then only two numbers will be added in it and here where you have given the range, it means from a1 to a5, if there are five numbers inside it, then all five of them will be added. Now how does this come, let me tell you first. Funda told you here we will apply the formula of sum, equals to sum tab, after that number one number to number three, don’t do it now. Consecutive numbers are going to come, so you select it, there were consecutive numbers in the same heavy, they were together, then you selected it, now comes c3 colon cf3, sum from c3 to f3, enter and now double tap, it will appear everywhere from d4 to c4 to f4, see this, from c6 to f6 everywhere. Now suppose I will tell you another way, if you had done it like this, I delete it, I would have done it like this, here you would have done equals to sum tab and you would have done c3 f3 and enter, then look, it has given you the wrong answer because it will give wrong answer to all the others because for that you have put a comma, meaning now it is totaling which ones, it is only totaling c3 and f3 and not totaling anything else but us. What was actually needed was that I color all the wrong ones red and here we go red and this one we will give light to this one. All the wrong ones we have colored them in this way and this one is fine. Okay, still I say that I have understood one way how to do it. Well, let me tell you the one which is even. You total it like this. Do it like this. Its total is 184 na ya see below the average count. And all these three come in writing but this is only for reading, that is why we have to learn the formula because we want to write it in actual. Now tell me one thing, now we are doing the sum but how much time is it taking, no, it is not taking time, so now I am going to teach you the best one which is the best. The easiest way is that wherever you want the sum, you go to the cell and keep a condition along with it that there should not be any gap in between and then After that, if you press Alt Equal Two together then the formula appears to be the same. The formula for sum is from c3 to f3, you want the sum, but the thing is that we have not set it, it has become automatic. Now you enter it and obviously you double tap it, now you will get all the answers in the same way. Suppose you wanted the total here, what would you have done if you press Alt Equal Two and enter, then see this sum. It’s ok, we don’t need it right now, so I erased it. I want to fix this formatting, so what can I do? I selected it. Alt HMC Alt HMC. We had just learned this. We have corrected this. I have to fix its width. Do Control A. Do Alt OCA. Use this. Look, my table has been corrected. Here, we have corrected all the formulas. We have shown the total in different ways in which we can sum in different ways. What do cells mean? What do numbers mean? How do they behave ? How do we drag? So here we learned the basics of the formula. In plus we learned the formula for sum. Now let us move on to the formula. Now suppose you have the same, I am giving an example of a basic formula. You have the same data. You have marks and also the total. Now if you want to know or any student can do it by himself. Want to know ma’am, I had total four subjects, how many subjects were there, let us understand a little theory that what we want to find out, then the total subjects we have are four subjects, here there are four subjects, each subject is of your 100 marks, so your total marks become yours, your total marks become 400, your total marks become your 400, now the marks of any student are 300 is the first student, the marks he has got are 300 marks, so obviously how much is the remaining, it is 400 – 300, if I say, he has got 100 marks less, then this is the thing we have to find out, we have to substack there, now the thing is understood here, I have done this calculation for the first student, that means marks for the second student, let’s say 200. So how should I calculate the remaining portion for him? I will calculate the remaining portion for him in the same way – 400 – 200 and after that my answer will be 200. Now suppose a There is another student, now suppose we have another student, the third student, his marks are only 100. Now I have to calculate his remaining marks, so how do I calculate his remaining marks? His remaining marks will also be calculated in the same way. 400 – 100 = 300. So, you must have found one thing common in all the three scenarios and that common is that when you are applying the formula. Minus will always have to be done from 400, 400 or 400. No matter how many marks you have got, whatever marks you have got are secondary, you are putting them here right but right now what is fixed is 400, so just here we have this funda. I wanted to make it clear to you that here, when we apply the formula, 400 is our fix, so 400, we will write something in the number when we have to fix it. The number is always fixed, so we can write that number directly, the cell keeps changing, we fix the cell in a different way, we fix it manually, but if we write the number, it always remains fixed, so we will write the number here, what to do is to subtract it from 400. Now see – 174 has to be subtracted here, then 150 has to be reduced to 108. This is a thing that keeps changing, that is why we are here. But instead of taking the number, we will take the sale of the sale lane because the marks are written here itself, who knows, if any number is changed later, the total will be changed here, it will be automatically reflected here, so you can enter it and after that you will draw it. Look here, out of your 400, g23 should have been laced, g23 is laced. Suppose you are here, which is your h27, then it is in 400. Cess g27 should have been minus, the same thing is happening, so it means that you have found the correct answer, everyone has understood it, if you feel that you have any doubt or are not understanding any formula, then you can tell me in the comment section. I was telling you earlier also that write all the doubts together so that you can convey me and at the same time, I would definitely like to tell you that look very much now, generally we have 40 50 There is time as much as hours or there is a minimum time of 40 hours. One is that time and one is this time within which we have to cover all the things in a limited time, so there is definitely a little time constant which is not there in live. In live, no matter how much we stretch, in how much detail we read our things, there is a slight difference, but I will try my best to make you understand all the things that I teach. Okay, here we are on Substack. Learned to do, now let’s move on to our next formula. Now our next formula that comes is this, we are going with the basic fundamentals. I also did plus, minus, if we multiply, then it is basic. Here, just like a sheet of sales is made, it is just like there are party names, there is quantity, there is rate, so you need the amount. How is the quantity and rate amount arrived at, that is, we multiply the quantity. Obviously we get the amount from the rate, so we will equalize to that we need the quantity , basically we will give it, we cannot fix it here, you cannot write this, 442 * 985, if it changes later and you have to put it for everyone too, then you will not write this, what will you do, you will give a cell, then you have given c46, you have to multiply it, for multiplying, you will get a star above the eight, you can use that star. Do this and after that give this cell that this d is to be multiplied by 46, enter it and in this way your answer will come. Double tap it and you will get all the answers. Now suppose you are on e48, then on e48 what do you want that is c48 * d48 then you can see your answer that it is c48 to d48 so in this way we multiply. I have also taken the divide in the same way. This is a little bit of its opposite, suppose you have the amount given, the rate given and now you have to know the quantity, how much has been sold, this is the normal way in which we used to do maths, this is not normal maths, okay, there is not much hard and fast rule, so what will we do inside this, see, let me explain to you a little math inside this so that you do not face any difficulty, so here is what we did initially, what we did initially and what we are going to do now, I will tell you that. Let me tell you both the scenarios . In the beginning, we have multiplied the quantity with the rate and the amount has come. Now what is the amount? We have given quantity, our quantity is x, for example rate is given to us, 10 is given to us, amount is given to us 100 and quantity is given to us, that is, it is not given yet, so what do we do to find out x. 100 / 10 because This is in multiplication, so what will it become in division, then we come to know that our answer is 10 because we cut it from this, so the value of Basically you will go to your place, if you want to calculate the quantity, then what was equal to the amount? You will take the cell with the amount, for divide you will use slash and after that you will enter the rate and after that you double tap, your answer has come correct, okay in this way you can get this c67, in up, this is d67, this is c70, then d70, this is c75, then d75, that means your correct. I hope you have understood all these things, we have done the arithmetic formulas here, we had to do these basic formulas at the initial level, now I will move ahead where I will tell you about the features, when it comes to statistics, Average Maximum Minimum Count Count, this is the thing, we do one feature, after that we will continue or we are going to explore another new feature. Which is a number group, then inside this we will number. Formatters are going to do format work with a very basic understanding. Let’s go through the theory. Okay, so I do one thing, I turn off the grade

lines. So, I turned off the grade lines. All the lines that you see, we call them grid lines. Now, what I am going to tell you is what formats are actually available to us, what do we write inside Excel, so what do we write if we look inside Excel. Normally, if we talk in normal language, if we talk in a normal scenario, then either we write numbers as you have seen, we are writing our cell, we are writing marks, if there is anything, we are writing numbers or what are we writing, we are writing text that means we have written the name of a party, we have written the name of a student, till now we had understood only these two things, now many things come inside these numbers like That number one is also 23 and number one is also 23 and number one is also 23 and if seen then number one is also on 23, okay so all these are numbers but in a different way this is a normal number, we can say that in accounting we take care of points points also, we take care of so many money too, so in that way it is written in decimal, we can say that currency is attached with it, this is for accounting. Inside we also put money, so here we have put currency, it is written in percentage, so in this way we have only numbers, but we can also show the numbers in different ways, so in the same way, we are going to read about many number formats here, now here comes another thing, whenever I explain anything to you, I also explain even formatting, so I have always said one thing that first you have to select something and then after the selection, you Do you apply anything beyond that? For example, I have given you WhatsApp2, so first we will select somewhere, after that we will apply this thing on that thing, so now let us see by formatting the number in actual, like first I will come to you here, after that we are also going to read the theory of number format here, okay, I did this by mistake in the third portion, no problem, in the third portion, we do it here and here we have drawn our grid lines. Suppose I write one of my numbers here : 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9. So we have written a number. Now when you click on this number and go to the home tab and see here, journal is written. So the way we write the journal number, it has become your journal. If I change the format of this thing and put it in number format, then it has brought it in decimal. The thing which I explained to you here is that 23 can also be written like this and can also be written like this. It’s totally up to you as to how to show it. If you think that later on in my data, things can come in points, things can come in decimal and I want to show it in decimal, then you can go for this format. After that, if I take, let’s say, another number, let’s say I have taken the same number down here and if I want to put currency on it, then what can I do? I am doing this by clicking on this drop down and when I click on currency, then ready currency is also shown on it. Currency comes, if suppose you want to put something else on it, like ₹ 5 is 45, you want to put currency on it but want to put Indian Rupee, then you click here, you will get English India here, for now we do not have it here, it is added, we will learn this later, we have to change this thing from the setting of the computer, but for now, we have dollars, so we will click on dollar here and in this way we will add our currency, now suppose. In any other way, you write a number here, write 45 6 9, and you want that decimals should also be included in it. If all the things like currency come automatically, then you can directly choose accounting. Because accounting is like this, see, comma has also been placed here, along with it, other things have also come along with it. Okay, accounting has been written here too, this is also in the format of accounting, this is also in accounting, comma has been placed, decimal has also been placed along with it. At the same time, if you put dollars then this is the format of your accounting. See, there is no need to open it again and again, you can do it directly from here. Suppose I wrote a number here and you want to put comma in it directly, then you click on the comma, then it will come. If you click on currency, then it will come. So, it is totally up to you whether you want to do it directly in accounting or you can do it from here. Next comes suppose I am writing something here. 10 20 And right now I have to write 30 but if I have to write the percentage then I have to do it manually like this 40 but if I have to do it in this way then now you do not need to achieve so much, you select it, click on the percentage here, now whenever you write something in this area, the percentage will appear automatically so that is your a custom format like you would have seen at many places, for example, do you have a steel business and In that you have to write the quantity, you have to put ton behind each quantity, so what you did was to set the format in it in such a way that as soon as you write the numbers, turn will be written automatically. You do not need to write ton again and again. If you are writing turn again and again, then where is our work easy? It is hard, isn’t it? It is done in this way. Suppose now I write a value, this is the value I have written, then if I want this and that in that. To show it, I have zoomed it and dragged it like this, otherwise if I keep reducing it, it will show me less decimals. For now, I have shown all the decimals. If I want to increase or decrease my decimals, then I have both these options available. Either I can decrease or I can do more. As soon as you leave it, like this is three three, then it will remain three. As soon as you press it, it gets automatically rounded off. Okay, you can do this by clicking here. See 5 6 9 OK and I take this and I reduce it, then see it automatically reduced it to 65, which was 65, yours was 6596, so it automatically reduced it to 66, that is, it rounded off, so it automatically rounds off yours, so these were your number formats. If you click on the extension of number format, then you get a lot of options. I will make you explore more options. There is also a text inside it, if the value is Take any date you have written, like I have written this date and which is in slash, this short date is written, how 2 24 25 is written like this, then it is short date, you can do short date like this, if you want to do this same date in long format, go to this drop down, click on long format, this hashtag error comes when your width is less, then in this way your long date will come fine. And in that you get the percentage. If you want to do something in the fraction, you did it like this and by selecting here you did the fraction. Now you write here 2/3 and 2 s 3, that is, write 2.5 like this, then it will come by writing 2 1 a 1/2. If you write 5.3, then it will come by writing 5 2 and 7. So in this way you can also bring in your fraction whatever you want, any scientific number. I need it, if you write too many numbers then it gets converted into scientific number but it is a small number and you have to change it to scientific, then you can go and click on scientific from here, then it gets converted into scientific number, in this way you get the option of text in the last, if suppose you have written any number which is more than 15 digits, then I teach you a third step here which tells you that if any number is 15 Dialog if it is more than 15 digits The last digit will not come in the box, Excel will convert it to zero, so what can you do in such a case, when you have a scenario like this in which it says 15 digits and if yours is more than 15 digits, then it converts it to zero, so in such a situation, what will you do, you will convert your number into text, what will you do, you will convert its format into text, then with this it will take the number fine. Let’s remove the ink for once and go there and see this thing. Let’s go here and suppose I write a number. Just give me a minute. Here I wrote 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16. So see, it did it in this way in the end. If suppose I go to home and go here and convert it into text right now 11 11 Digits 15 Digits Yes, so now look, it has taken the text, now it is in the text format, it has taken it, above 15, it comes in scientific, above 11, you can convert it into text, in this way it will be converted into text, now no, what I have to explain, you have to explain less because of the custom format, this is the most important, the rest of the things can also be applied directly, so let’s go now. Let’s move towards our custom format. If we are going to do custom formatting, then in custom formatting, the things that I will teach you are according to the date format. What is the date format? First of all, let me tell you a little bit about how we are going to read about the date format. You have any date, let’s take any date like today is 2402 2025. Okay, this is the date and for now, for once, I will move the cell to the side. Okay, now what is the date consisted of, first of all you have day, what is today’s day, then after that comes month, generally what we write is month and after that comes year, what comes year, so now look at their initials, to write day, d is needed, to write month, m is needed and to write year, y is the same thing. If suppose, in what other way can you write them, I just want to explain that to you now. In what other way can you write these? Can you write in this way that NN is Sunday, February and 2025, so instead of writing 2025 like this, I can write 25, it is 25, can I write this date like this? Yes, and what kind of date is written on this date, will it be in short form, we can say that it is in short form, it is a short date or can I write like this, Sunday February 2025, so can I? I can call this date a long format date. Yes, of course I can call it a long format date. Okay, so now I have told you the result of how the general result is done, how your short date is written and how your long date is written, but now let’s convert it into the format. Whenever you are seeing this format, if you have to write this, then we define the day with D, then D will be written, then there is a slash, month. If we define Ko with M then it will be written as m and year we define it with Va and this year is written in full 20 25 So when we have to write anything in complete then we write four times so it will come like this Look, if you want to write any thing in short then write it twice then here DD because Sunday is in short MM because Fab is in short but 25 is also in short so YY Now look here Sunday is written in full so D D D D D February is completely written as M M M M and Yer is completely written as y Wa Wa Wa. So remember the basic. If you want it in short then you have to write it single time. If you want it in short and in text then you have to write it two times and in other wise it has to be written four times. This is a fact because you will check. You can check your month even in the month. You can write June, write April. Everything is in three letters. You can check your days whether it is Sunday, Monday or Tuesday. Wednesday, Thursday, Friday, Saturday, Sunday, check anything, all of them are of three letters only, so it is pre-defined that if you write two times, that means you want this type of answer, if you write four times, then you want this type of answer. Now let’s proof it a little and see, let’s say I write a date here, what is the control, I wrote this date with semi colon here. There is a slash, now I don’t want a slash, I want semicalculus, I will go to home, click on this extension, then click on custom and you can see here, why is there MGM, so the short is two. It means m is given a month ago just because m is here, if I had written d here first and then did DM and then OK, then look this date has changed, 24th February, now it has come like this, I have understood what is the meaning of this format, I have gone to custom, now d is also written single time, m is also written single time, hence single single date has come and y is 2025, that means complete, so it is written like this, neither is it four times, if I If you would have made it two times and I would have given it OK, then look, it is written as 20, 25, it is okay, it will always be written as two times or four times, it cannot be written as single time, OK, if now I have to write the same date in dash, then how will it be? I clicked on this, clicked on extension here, went to custom and as soon as there is a dash here, there is a slash, here we will put a hyphen, say hyphen, say dash, put a hyphen, then we will do OK. It will be converted into hyphen. It’s all up to us as to how we want this thing. It is very important to know the formatting. If these date formats are not available, then you will not be able to know many other formulas too. So, it is very important to have these formulas. Let’s take one more date. Let’s take one more date. Let ‘s say I want a little more of this in the anchor version. So I clicked here, went to custom and here now we will write as per our wish DD D AM D. Wawa y wa four times it was written that 2025 is written in full, so look, in this way your complete date has come. Whereas if suppose we want it in the langar version, then we clicked on it. Come here, we will go to the customs. After going to the customs, D D D D D M is kept small. Let’s keep M M W A Y Y Y OK. So see, Monday has come in full writing, just because I had kept the month short, I had kept it in MA only. Two came and 20 25 I had kept complete, so it came complete, let’s take another date, you will understand that this date was taken, after that went to extension, after going to extension, went to custom and here we write D D D D D M M M M WA Y Y Y and we did OK, so look, it has come to us with complete date written, so this is your custom format of one date, I have explained to you very well which In many ways, you can format your dates yourself. Whenever you make a sheet, you need dates in many ways. So now you do not have to worry about making dates. You can make dates as per your wish. We do this in our life just because they are not used that much right now. This marathon is based on usage, the number of things you use are taught in great detail, here is a For the bar, you can go through the theory that let’s say T is the rate, what does it do for you? It is a place holder. You wrote some text, you wrote it forever and after that you put T the rate, then if you write any text later, this thing will keep coming in front of it. Now what is this ma’am, let’s try it, let’s say okay, we take it here. Let’s say I took this space and I went to the custom, after going to the custom, I took it here and first of all I took the T in the journal. We put the rate, then we opened the double inverted comma, gave a space, wrote tons and then closed it in the double inverted comma and we wrote OK. Now I write 20 here, 30 here, 40 here, 50 here, then the automatic has come with turns in front of it. Why, because what is T the rate tells you that where you are writing T the rate, you can write anything as per your wish. You can, but you have fixed what has to be written behind it. What have you fixed that you told him because I always tell you that whenever we talk about any text, the text is always written inside double inverted commas, so you gave space first, that is why there is space in it too. If suppose you do not give space here, you deleted the space here and you did OK, then see, the space will be gone from here also and see, I had not selected the one here, so in this. If there is space then we can do our format in this way. Now if you want then just ignore the error and your data will come like normal data. There is no problem then in this way you can find your sum. Okay, after that if you want, you can read the star from here that it pats the character, other things are not so important, the date one is the most important, so we covered it in detail, so here we have explained our number format. complete it Now let’s move towards our conditional formatting. They will do conditional formatting. Now what is conditional formatting? Let’s take a small third portion for once and understand what is the meaning of conditional formatting. As is its name, so is its work. What is the name of conditional formatting? Whenever we talked about formatting, when we did the initial formatting, what all did we talk about whether we We talked about the alignment, then we talked about the font, then the font color, the font became the color, after that we saw the fill option, then we saw any kind of color, border, we had done these types of things in the formatting, so now we have to format our data, so it was understood that we are going to decorate it in this way, but there is a condition in decorating too, we will give it a condition that if anything like this happens then this Do it otherwise don’t do it. For example, you made a list of students in which there were marks of the students. Now inside that marks you wrote that if any student has got more than 33 marks, if he has got more than 33 marks, then you make him in red color, otherwise you make him in green color or put the opposite, then wherever there is red, you will understand how many marks he has and wherever there is green, you will understand how many marks he has, so basically. You gave him a condition, let’s take another example, suppose there is a report of sales and you are writing that whoever has sales more than ₹ 10 lakh, we have sold to whomever has entry above ₹ 10 lakh, make it in green color, then wherever the amount is more than ₹ 10 lakh in the entire sheet, there will be green color automatically and by doing this, you will directly know to which party you have sold more than ₹ 10 lakh. This is the condition for matting that there will be a color, there will be a border, whatever you want to do, everything will happen but with one condition. If we talk about the condition, here it was at 33. If we talk about the condition here, it was 10 lakhs or should be above 10 lakhs. So that is your conditional formatting. Now let’s explore their options. Conditional formatting is available to you inside the home tab. You will go to the home tab called conditional. You will get the option of formatting here. Now it comes to the matter, as I always say, if you want to apply anything, first its selection is very important, so here is the selection I am taking. First of all, I want to know the maximum rate to whom I have sold. If I want to know the maximum rate to whom I have sold, then I select this data. I go to conditional formatting. I have clicked here, I have not clicked, I am just coming, so the option has opened automatically, after this you will go to Greater Dan and write here, I want to know, all those above 650 or 700, color them or those above 750, you color them, I have to do it in red color, different colors are available here, I have to do it in red, I want to do it in yellow, I have to do it in green, let’s say I want to do it in green and I did OK. So, whoever was above 700, you will be able to see the color here, whether the color has come automatically here, what we have applied on one data, can we apply something again on that data, the answer is yes, just do not over rule, if you over rule, then the next one which you apply now will take it and will make the first one null and void, so basically now suppose you want to do the same in this only by going to the highlight cell role. Less than means now you have to know more, now you have to know less than 600, if you want then color it red, you did ok, then you realized that Less than 600 have come to you in red color and More than 750 have come to you in green color, so now you will understand just by looking at which color defines what, okay, after that let us assume that we want to see in quantity, we have selected a range. We will go to the condition formatting and we said between, we want to check the quantity between 300 and 400, I want to check who I have sold between 400 and 500, let me know that and all that mine comes in yellow color, then I did ok and it told me, to whom I have sold the quantity between 300 to 400, then I came to know, now I am also able to know from here that the load should be seen twice, urban. I have sold these in medium quantity to Binds and Ekta Creation but at low prices and here I have sold both of them at high prices, so in this way you can get a lot for yourself by applying different colors. You can take all the decisions, you can check the decisions of many, you can check all the things, now this was that normally you have got greater than, less than, you have got between, like we do in our maths too, now comes the next option, what do you get, equals to, suppose you know the exact amount and that exact amount, you want to capture where that exact amount is. It is written for example, I have selected everything and I want to capture the exact amount 376. Where is it written, so I selected it, went to Highlight Cell, went to Equals 2 where I have to go, where 376 is written and after that I want to give a different color of my own which is already pre-defined, if she does not want to give it, then come here to Custom Format, see, the same dialog box opens inside Custom Format, First of all, by opening the extension of Alignment font, it opens and the same key appears, so with more options, you will not feel that oh my God, I don’t know this option, you know, okay, we give purple color here, go to the font, we make the font white, bold and bold, do OK and then OK, then it told me that in the entire data, the amount of data I had selected, if seen inside it, there are 376 here. If it is written, then in this way we can check where something is written, if you know the exact amount, whereas till now all the things we were doing were related to the number, now whatever comes, comes related to your text, like your next comes the text that content, suppose look at the text, if you want to check the text, then there should be data of the text only. I checked this, now I just did not remember much or the name of the party, I just remembered that. Behind that party, it comes with no solutions, so I clicked on the solutions here and said, brother, color the solution written there, so that I can see it and then I will know it, fine, I had talked about it, so now I did OK, then it told me OK, these two entries come to me in the name of solutions, okay, so if you have a chunk of some text and remember the same and you want to find the complete text from it. You can also do this by highlighting the text with that content. Next comes the date ring. Suppose you have selected the date just because. If you want to do the formatting of a number then the number should be selected. If your selection is correct then you will get the answer also correct. If you select the number then you will get the number. If you get the selection of text then you will have to apply conditional formatting related to the text. Now Next. The option which is going to be related to our date, so we have chosen the date, you go to the condition formatting, go to the highlight cell rule and after that you go to the date array, after going to the date array, you get the options here that you say yesterday just because today is 24th of February, so here is yesterday, if I do it today, then today is coming, tomorrow is coming. I have to highlight yesterday, I have to do it with green, so I made it green and I did OK, so you can see this here, you can also check the date, our date today is 24 Feb 2025, so the date we see here which has been highlighted is 2025, sorry, 25 Feb 2025. Okay, if you want, you can highlight yesterday also in the same way and inside this you will get more information. You get a lot of options, which is like last week and this week, next week, last month, this month, next month, you get a lot of options, you can explore it here, the main thing is that you should know what are you going to do in conditional formatting, what is our use case, what do we want to know, whatever you want to know, you can explore it here and different different. You can see by applying options in it, here then you are left with the duplicate values, that is, if there are duplicate values ​​anywhere in the entire data, then remove them, but before doing this, look, we have made it so colorful, so first of all, find out that if I want to remove all this, then how can I do it? So, when you go to the very bottom in Kandi formatting, you get clear rules, then here you get two options, one is clear rule. From the selected cells that I select a cell and remove the condition formatting from it or I call it clear rule from the end there might be chances right now it is very small data It has been taken that there is huge data, there is a lot of condition formatting, you are not even able to understand where it is included and where it is not included, then what will you do in such a case. In such a case, you will clear the roles from the entire sheet, but before clearing it, I will teach you the management once, after that, clear because I have just cleared it, then how will you learn the management? So let’s see the management now, maybe you have some I did the conditional formatting and later suddenly it came to my mind that this purple looks a bit strange, it has become too dark, all the other light colors are there, so we have to change this color, so what you have to do is go to the conditional formatting, you will come down here, in Manage Rules, after coming to Manage Rules, you are not able to see anything because you have not made any selection, you have directly reached the conditional formatting that I So if you want to change then look above, you are seeing the show formatting rules for whom, then you show this worksheet from here, then all the conditional formatting done on this worksheet will be shown to you here. Okay, you have to change this one, you select it and look above here, there are options like this: New Rule, Edit Rule, Delete Rule. What you have to do is you have to edit, you go to edit and after that you Obviously you want to change the formatting, then you go to the format, from here you choose any other color, I take blue from here, okay and we have done okay, now we can apply it, you can also do okay, so look at this, it has been applied in this way, I like it much better than before, so in this way you can make changes. Now suppose I select this cell and after that go to condition formatting and clear rules. If I go to the selected cells and from here, I go from here only , I go from here but I don’t go anywhere there and I go to Clear Rules and want to remove it from the entire sheet, then your conditional formatting will be removed from the entire sheet. Now let’s do what we wanted to explore. Next, let’s explore the one with duplicate values. Suppose I want to know whether there are any duplicate values ​​in the entire data. Not checking in dates, so I selected this and it is talking about values, so text will not work, so we took this, let’s consider text also, so we took this, after that we went here, came to duplicate values ​​and whether to take duplicate or take unique, it is totally up to you that you have to color the unique or whatever is not repeating, so obviously it is the complete data which is not repeating. If you want to duplicate it, then how to color it, you can do it here. Now suppose I make it 521 here too, then it will also be colored. Now suppose I make it 314, then it will also be colored because it is a duplicate. Suppose I make it a color, then it will also be colored. It also works on text, so because it is a duplicate, okay, so in this way all your things work if there are duplicates everywhere. If you want to check, then you can check in this way. Okay, next you get this. What does Top Bottom Rules do? First of all, we have to select the item in which we want to check. Suppose I have selected this and after that I want to know what are my top 10 items. Only two items are 13, so knowing the top 10 is a bit weird, but you see, top 10. If you want to know less, you have to know the top five. So you can also do the top five and from here you can color them, I gave yellow and gave OK, then it measured all of them and colored the top five out of them. Similarly, if you want to know the bottom 10 also, then you select it. Go to the conditional formatting and take the bottom 10 items from here and if let’s say you want to get the red color in it, then you did OK, then the remaining ones are in the bottom 10. Oops, we have 10 should not have been taken because in bottom 10, obviously it will take the rest of the data also, we come to the bottom 3. Okay and did OK, then it told me that your data comes from bottom 3. Now it was normal and directly wrote to you that bottom 10 is needed, bottom 3 is needed, top 2 is needed, top 3 is needed, top 5 is needed and color has come. Now more options come in it, on top 10, on top 5, on bottom 10. But what is it at the bottom 5? Basically if you suppose the whole is summed up and how much comes out at 10, off the total output at 10 will tell you. If you have conditioner formatting then go to the top bottom rules and if you want to color the top 10 para in red color then it will appear on your top 10, there can be more than two values ​​at the bottom, there may be more than one value, your top 10 para is falling on it, there might be chances that it is falling on it too much. Well, you can also change the percentages from here. If you want, then you can make the bottom at 20. But you have to know about 20 and you have to fill green color in it. Look, in this way you can fill more than one value can fall, even one value can fall, so in this way you will get the values, so this is what you have learned now, learned the highlight cell rule, learned the top bottom rule, after that you are going to learn the data base color scales and icon set which is very simple but for that, first I clear this data, so I have just selected. And now I can also do selected cells. Now suppose you want here that the one which has higher rate means the color should be filled inside our cell in such a way that the higher date can be understood. If the one with higher rate can be understood, then you will go to the data bars. Here you get two options. The first one is gradient and the other one is solid. What is gradient? It is the one which keeps the shadow like shadow. Look, whatever color you are doing. If yes, then see the shadow is coming in the last, it is becoming a little light in the last and what is the gradient? What is the gradient? What is solid, sorry, solid is not a solid color, it will look exactly like this, okay, if you want, the gradient is solid, you get the same result, you can click on it, which is more, then that cell will be filled. Now what is it, I can tell by looking at this cell completely, 932 is the highest because the whole cell is After that I can tell that this is 9907 which is the second highest because it is just a little bit left after that, it seems to be 855 or you can say it is 876 or you can say this. In this way you can judge by looking at these colors which one is more and which one is less. It is totally up to you whether you want to show it or not, whether you want to show it with gradient color or with solid color. It is totally up to you. To you, you can show as you want, okay , let’s go next, let’s say I want to show something in quantity, then what do the color sets also do? What is there now? In the data bars, there was only one and it was showing you in the form of bars. What is there in this? Shade shading is like, you will get different shades like middle, so it means the one which is least is dark, then it will be less than that, then in this way you will get less than that. It will be visible in the form also and just like this shading is happening, you can also put the icon in the same way. If you want to put any icon, it works exactly the same way, the lowest number is red, the normal number is yellow and the best number is green, like our traffic light thing, so look, if you put this icon, it came in the icon in this manner, then it was 932 highest, so see green is visible, after that 856 green is visible. After that 855 green is visible, okay, so in this way you get these highlighted and this was your conditional formatting. In conditional formatting, let me tell you one more thing, these are the clear rules, we talked about manage rules, let’s talk about the new rule. Inside the new rule, you get to explore all the same options which you have explored on the outside. If you want to read it in detail like Format All Cells. Based on the values, we just did the format cells that cells that content, so we did the values ​​that contain , format only top and bottom ranked values, we did the top 10, take a look, it is also written in this, you can turn on top 10 or percentage or format and only values ​​that are above and below average, so above and below average, you get it here, let me show it to you. Click below you get to know the average 2499 28 And if you want to color then you can go to this and you can color the above average in one color, if you want to color the above average in red color, if you want to color the below average also, then from here you can give a yellow color to the below average and in this way you can color the below average also, you can get this directly here too, it is ok format only. Unique and Duplicate Values ​​We have tried this now, this is one option which you do not get directly, whenever you want to explore, you will have to come here, that is Use a Formula to Determine Which Cells to Format, meaning formatting has to be done here using a formula. Now till you have Unless you learn the formula, you cannot do it here and even after learning the formula, you do not have to do anything here, just like you write a formula somewhere outside, you just have to come here and write it and after that, if you are satisfied with the formula, then you can get that color done here. We can look into it further, but here we have covered all the other things which were there in the conditional formatting and that too very good. If you have any doubt anywhere, please let me know in the comment section, I will definitely help you and I am constantly saying that you go while writing your doubts and if you feel that I want to learn better in this thing and want to do it, then you can definitely come to the live course also, all the things will be found in the description and what happens is that in live, you can discuss with me which is the best. The most main benefit is and the other thing, now you will get this sheet also, so daily when you get the sheet, do you practice something daily, either you do it in one sitting, then there are more chances of forgetting it, or slowly and gradually, if you start absorbing it in your habit, then we start getting comfortable, so that is the main purpose of life that there are many people who have already excelled and are still doing it. There is only one major area, no, it is that normally, what do you do, what do you learn and then the end of that, yes, we have learned this, the certificate has come and when you do it live, you practice it, now somewhere when you listen to something daily, you understand more, so that’s all, so here we have completed the condition formatting, now we move ahead, see inside the home tab, we People have done the number condition formatting. Now we complete the table cells style and the rest of the things. The remaining chunks are completed and after that we will move towards our remaining basic formulas. Data entry and the other thing is table creation. In normal data entry, you do not have to do things manually, whereas in table creation, you do not have to do things manually and it keeps running automatically. Your data is basically a dynamic one. This is done in the form which is updated automatically, that is why table creation is a better option. In comparison to the data entry and when it comes to the formula, neither is the formula. The bigger the formula, then obviously ranges are given in it. Initially, when I had explained the formula of sum to you, I had explained that brother, we will give the range, then your formula is applied on the same range, so what is a range here? Suppose you have given a range somewhere from a1 to a1, but later you have written the data in a101 and now your data is written in a200, then later when you have written normal data, what will you have to do? You will have to update your formula there. You will have to give the range from a1 to a200 because now your range has increased, now you have entered more data in it because of daily new. The data is being entered but when it comes to the table, initially when you give a range in it, it does not take even a 200 or 100 and will write it like this. The table will write the range in such a way that later whether you enter 200 or even 2000, it will automatically give their sum, it will automatically update your answers, so this is the biggest and most effective use of our table. Mainly, this is very useful in the formula. Now if we have to talk so much then it is important to see how the table will be made. So look, first of all we have to make the table. Let me tell you one thing, whatever heading is there on the table, we call it a header. What do you call header? You select your data. Oops, I am so sorry. You took this, you select your data. Now you have two options, either you go to the Insert tab and here you select the table. There is an option, click on it or what you can do is you can press control t. Table starts with t tab. So if you press t with control, then you will have this type of OK, my keys are not working. It’s okay. If you go here and click on the table, then you will have an option like this. Now what is it saying, My table has headers. If you turn it off then it thinks that the data that you have It is given in the first row in the first column that dates are written party name quantity rate amount is this also your data is it your data no which is at the top It is written that it is a header, it is possible that sometimes you have data in such a way that there is no heading above it, then you should not turn it on. Now it is necessary to turn it on. My table has headers and if you do OK then now your table has been converted into a table with a header. Always remember one thing in Excel. When we insert something separately in Excel, then if we have to make any changes in that inserted thing, then a separate tab is automatically created. Otherwise, you have as many tabs as you have , but it comes as a separate tab. Now like I have inserted this table, in a way, I have converted my data into it, in a way, I have inserted the table, so whenever I click here, I get the above format of a table design. Look, click somewhere outside, it will go, click on this, it will come, isn’t it coming because it thinks that I have inserted a table, now whatever. If you have inserted, then whatever changes we want to make in it, we will do it through a new tab. First of all, whatever work you should do, what work should you do? Even if you are doing any work in your real life, you are creating a lot of tables inside it, if you are doing a lot of work, then I would call it mandatory, so that you can make the work easier and make it better. What should you do for that? After creating the table, you should name the table here on the very left side of the table design. And here you don’t have to give space. If you give space then the name will not be taken. Okay, so don’t give it space. Name it anything. I have given the name of Sales to Sales, so what will happen in the future, whenever you have many tables, suppose you have a lot of tables, some are Purchase tables, some are Sales tables, some are tables of employees’ details, there are many tables and you have to go somewhere and apply a collective formula. If you have formulas somewhere, then this is yours. There is no table one, table two, table three, what did I just explain to you? Look, normally, what happens is that a1a 200 is done in this way, but in the table, he takes the range of the table and writes the table range, so now table one range would be written there, then you will go around wondering what is this table one, now go and check whose table one was, table two whose it was, table three, so if you name it that is the sales table or the purchases table, then now. Even when you apply the formula, it will come by writing ‘Sale’ or ‘Purchase’, it will not come by writing ‘Table 1, Table 2’. Table 1, Table 2 was coming only when you had given that name to it. Along with this, you can see above that these filters come. We will learn later how to use the filters. This comes by default in it. You can go to the table design and change any color from here. If you want any color and type of table, then you can convert it into that. It is totally up to you that how do you want your table, I want it in this way, I want it in this way, I can keep it like that and inside the table design, what are the options you get? Header, we want total, we want total in this row, below is the total. If you don’t want, then you can turn it off and in this way you get other things. If you want to remove duplicates from it, then you can remove them directly. Have you removed the duplicates? Yes, check among these. Is and after that you can check in it, if nothing happens then it will not be deleted. Now we have learned about the normal things about the table. Now it is very important to understand the difference between main data and table. It is okay to have made the table but it is also very important to know what is the difference. So, let’s do one thing, take one data and after that we will know easily. So, I copy only this from here and enter control alt vv. Now why did I do this, I will tell you this slowly later on. I will explain it to you there, you will get better clarity. Now if I sit to explain, you will not be able to understand and I will not be able to explain because you have not got that understanding yet. Let me format this data for once. As you can see, these are numbers whereas they should come in dates. So what will I do? Now, I had explained to you the number format, I will go to the number format and convert it into short dates. If I want to select this data, then control a. I can select this data with Alt AB A, I put borders inside it, with Alt ABT I put borders outside it, and just because for now, I have converted it to normal values, so this is not our formula, so we will apply a formula, quickly equals to this multiply by this enter, so like this Now double tap on it, you will have these formulas. Now we will start understanding the difference. How can the difference be understood? Suppose, now I have to make a new entry here. Let’s enter from today’s date. So I entered today’s date. Here I name anything. Stella Stella Rojo. I named something like this and look here, automatic zero has come, that means it has automatically updated your formula here, do not wait. Here it is 2000, here I have given 100, so see, it has updated automatically, so does it do the same thing here, it will do the same here too, but why does it do it, I will definitely tell you the difference, here I write Stella Roger and then here also I write 2000 ok here also I write 100 and here also we are getting the answer, so ma’am you were saying that all the things in the table get updated automatically. But it is not happening here, it is happening here, look why this is happening now, let me tell you the reason. Now as you can see, here it has automatically applied the thick border that I had applied here, it has taken it automatically in the correct manner, so you can see that here it is not in the correct manner, one thing, so you see this, the second thing, I had shown you here already zero, it has automatically updated your formula, that is not the thing here. I was waiting to see if any value came. Is this happening? Why is this happening? Due to a setting in your Ekal, there is a setting inside Ekal that if you make three-four entries in the same pattern and after that you keep writing something, then it automatically considers it as a pattern and starts answering. Now where is that setting, like you will go to the file, you will go to Options and from here you will go to Advanced, then you are seeing that you are allowed editing directly in the cells. Extend data range from the formats and formula, you do one thing, turn it all off for once, turn it off, after that you do OK, now I will make an entry here and after that you will see, now we are going to make an entry again with today’s date and now I would have written here robot robot robot chucks, after doing this I have written anything, I have seen random 500, this zero comes already, this is a great thing. Okay, so I have come to this, now I do the same thing with robot text and now look, it did not even take this, it did not even correct the alignment, earlier it was correcting the alignment, 500 150, and no answer, why because you have turned off a setting of your Excel, then there is a setting due to which your data keeps getting auto updated, otherwise it does not get auto updated in the normal data, now suppose I turn it on and go to the options. After going to the options, I go to the advanced and turn them on. We turned on all the settings that were there and from here also turn on the automatic search. Now when you do it, it will take it automatically, then we delete it, do it again. Here we will take robotics. There may be chances that he may or may not take it because we have already entered once, now he has taken it because now he has followed the pattern and we have turned on that setting. That the pattern which is written above should be extended below also and take it in that way. Okay, so this is what we have, how to make entries inside our data, what difference do we see in the table . Now one more main chunk, I am going to tell you about the table creation, I am going to tell you one advantage, which is the slicer. Let us now look at the slicers of the table. See, we get the slicer inside the table. Now what is the function of this slicer? It allows us to easily access our data. For example, suppose one, these are filters so that if I want to see anything, just want to see something of Aqua Pure Solution, then it has shown me the data, so in this way we can see from the filter, but how big is the process of filter, you will go to this filter, select it, after that, you will check, it seems quite time consuming, it seems to be a big process, so what can you do in such a case, you can insert a slicer, now you can insert something. If you want to do this and that too is related to the table, then you will have to go inside the table, then click somewhere on the table and go to table design and here you will see the option of insert slicer. It is asking you whose slicer you want to insert, meaning for which thing do you want a date slicer, whether you want to filter your data according to the date, whether you want to filter it according to your party names or according to the quantity, rate and amount. So I take the party names, I do OK, now I adjust it here, anywhere else, for once, I adjust it here, clicked on Aqua Pure, Bharat Craft has come, Ekta Kapoor, Sorry, Ekta Creations, what has come on Green Leaf, Organics, what has come on Innovative Solutions, if you want to do multiple things, then if you want one, then turn off the filter, this crossing means filter. Only off, if you want multiple, then you turn it on, it is on, Aqua Pure Ekta Heritage Mastek, now everything is selected, no, remove it, I want these, so this has given me the answer to these, in this way you can do this, you have also inserted this slicer, if you click on it, there is a separate tap for the slicer also, see, I always say that if you insert anything in Excel, then there is nothing in that inserted thing. If you want to make changes, then you get a separate tab for that and you should make changes within the same. Changes can be made from within the same. If you want, you can also keep your slicer related to this, so that is a beautiful one, it will show you that, you cross it, the complete data will come, you can also adjust it, you can make it smaller or bigger in this way, now I delete it, you can show the slicer in this way or else I can control it here. I do plus plus so that we have a little space and I select it and do Alt AE A so that it gets deleted and I place my slicer here. In this way, the slicer is automatically placed. I can make the color a little better, so I take green. It looks a little better on the screen. So, in this way, we create our data. In this way, your table creation is done in this way, all the things are done. I hope you understood it completely. If there is any doubt anywhere then please let me know in the comment section. Let’s move ahead a little. The other thing is cell style. What does cell style do to you ? Like suppose you have taken this data, you have taken this data and copied it. I just create another sheet, rename it with cell style, do end ok and here I enter control alt vv so that my data comes in. Okay, exactly the same way as I had fixed its formatting earlier . Similarly, if its formatting needs to be corrected, then I will quickly correct its formatting. When you do this work again and again and you see it being done again and again, give it all. I also had the option that I can prepare everything in advance, but this thing is known to you, what happens, we will not show you the process right now and will tell you all the things directly, then how will you be able to relate because in your life, you will also have to correct similar things, so that is why we do it in this way. So see what the cell style does to you or does it help you directly ? Now I do one thing to do any kind of formatting. Now I do one thing to make it normal. Now what I do is select the entire data, take control A and after that I go to the cell style and select anything. Here, I can directly do the formatting of the table in the way I want, it will give it to me directly, after that if I want to make any changes then you can do like That now it seems a little light to me, so I made it dark, I want to make it black, I want to make all this black, so it has come in black, I like it better, now I want to give it any color, so I can color it, so in this way you can change it later, it seemed beautiful to me, so I made it in this way, so this was your cell style. Colors are pre-defined inside the cell style. If you want, you can change the themes of these colors as well. Right now you are seeing one set of colors here. If you want that this set of colors should not be visible , if you want to see some other set of colors, then you will go to the page layout. Here you will go to the theme. Inside the theme, here inside the colors, you get many different types of palettes. Suppose you have taken this palette, now you will see in the cell style according to that palette, then the color has changed here. Now you are seeing the colors. Look in this way, I have seen this cell. Selected and went to sell style and I took this color, it looks so beautiful. One of my favorite color. Okay, so this looks so perfect. If you wanted any other palette, then you can take another palette in the same color from here. See, whenever you change the palette anywhere, overall because you have done this work using a single palette, then overall the entire theme of the system gets changed. Now you will go to the home and look here, you will see that the theme of colors has changed, there will be some other colors first, you are not able to understand. Once you remember these colors well, what kind of colors are there, okay now I go to the page layout, go to colors and here. So now you go to your home and see the colors here, the theme of the colors has changed, earlier it was in a slightly reddish reddish color, now look, it has come in this way, so with this, the colors can be changed not only in the cell style, but also in the cell style, which seemed to me one of the beautiful, one of my favorite seemed to be not here because I changed the theme from there, so it does not change only here, it also changes there in our home font. If it is changed then it is a cell style so that you can do any formatting directly, you do not have to do much hard work, this was one thing, the second thing is that I would like to tell you about a shortcut, let’s say do Control C and enter Control Alt v v here, now you just change its format and nothing else to do, you did the short date, did Control A, did Alt and C A, did your data, now suppose you want to do any formatting directly, you should do it in this. If you don’t want to do any hard work, then what you have to do is, you have to select this data, after selecting the data, you have to press Alt O A, then after this a window like this will open in front of you. What can you do from this window, whichever way you want to format, you can do a lot of formatting inside it. Suppose I like it, I have given OK, then this formatting has been automatically converted into it. If you want to do any formatting directly then this is the direct formatting. You can also do this in this way, what have I pressed, I write the shortcut key here, which is Alt OA, okay, your shortcut key, I have written here Alt OA, so in this way we work in our A cell style, now let’s move ahead, so look, till now we have completed our cell style, after that if you see any feature, then those features are visible here for insert, so we have already made you know where you know how to insert the cell. How you have to insert a row, how you have to insert a column, we have learned its shortcut keys, after that comes the delete key, we have also learned how to delete something, after that comes the format. Inside the format, we have learned the row height, the column height, it has to be auto-fit, all this, now comes the turn of hide and unhide, if suppose you want to hide something, suppose till now. You have done this work and now you have to hide this cell, if you want to hide this column, then you can hide it from here also by right clicking or you have this option inside the format also, so why do you have to go so far, you have to right click from here and then click on the hide option . Here something is hidden, if you right click and unhide it, it will be unhided, so in this way we hide or unhide something, in the same way, if we want, we can hide or unhide any sheet too, like I have hidden it and if suppose later I want to unhide it, then I will click here only and unhide it here and it will tell me that I need to unhide this file. If there is more than one file, then you will see it here. If you do OK, then your file will come back here, that is, your sheet will come back. So in this way, if we want, we can hide or unhide our daily columns or our sheet. You get this option here also, but there is no need to go there and do such a long process. You can get this option by directly right clicking. This option is there in almost all the formats. If you get it by right clicking, then I like the right click option better like now you have the next option, take rename, take tab color, take protect sheet or take mover copy, take hide and unhide, then here you can check hide and unhide rename sheet. Move Copy Sheet Tab Color Protect Sheet Lock Cell So almost all the options we get by right clicking, you get the same options here too. Now let us move a little further in this Rename Sheet You know this thing how it is done, you click on any cell, any sheet and rename it here and you can rename it, okay, we have given that cell, after that suppose you want to color, then you right click and tab. Press on the color and you can do whatever color you want. I had made it purple, so we will keep it purple. When you are on that sheet, then that gradient fill will be visible on the sheet. As soon as you come out of that sheet, if you are on any other sheet, then you will see that solid color. Okay, after that, the most important thing is that there are two things here, the first one is mover copy sheet and the other one is protect sheet, so I am giving you both of these. Here, I am going to teach you, first of all, what we will learn is mover copy sheet. Suppose now you need another sheet which is exactly the same as whatever work has been done on this sheet . In this workbook, I am explaining to you by taking three scenarios. For now, I want a copy but in this workbook. Now either, what is the first method I have that I select the entire data and do control C and then create another sheet and do control V in it, then it is a time consuming process. How can we do this work directly? What do you do to make it exactly the same? You are on this sheet of yours, after that go to the format, click on move and copy sheet here, understand a little what it is asking you, first of all, the names of all your sheets are coming here like number format is theory, number format is theory, so in all the sheets, whatever number of sheets you have, that is, whatever number of sheets are created in the workbook, that name is coming here, The Other. The thing is that what do you need, whom do you want to copy, now suppose I have to get the cell style done, so I clicked on the cell style, OK fine, after that what do you have to do, create a copy or not, yes, you will have to create a copy, okay, I did it, the cell style has come here, look, the cell style is the same, you will not even be able to tell the difference, it will come in the name of Tatu, but you say no, we don’t want, we need it in some other file. Meaning, this file should remain here and should also be moved to another file. Okay fine, if we do this then what will we do, we will send it to cell style two, we will do the work, then we will go to format, move and go to copy, select cell style two. Now we are saying that the copy of the sheet that we will send there should also remain here, meaning that sheet should remain here and in the one in which we will send it to the new one, so here we will turn on create copy, now you have to send it somewhere else, that’s it, right? If you want to send it somewhere else then now you will have to choose another file, first you have to select the place where your file is, then as soon as you click on the place where you want to send it, you will see all the files which are open in your Excel, you have to keep them open in whichever workbook you want to send it or the other way is that if you want to create a new workbook, then New Book is also written here, so suppose I want to send it in Book One and OK. So here I had another Book One open and Cell Style Two has arrived here in exactly the same way. Okay, in exactly the same way your Cell Two has arrived here. Okay, suppose we come to this only and Cell Style Two. Now we will send it again but will send it in a new book and now we want it to go from here, it should go from here, it should not be here because what will we do with two sheets of paper here, then we will go to Cell Style. Now we will not click on create a copy because in such a situation it copies it. Now we will directly click on the new book that we want in the new book and do OK. So see, a new book has been created. Look, now you will say that it is not the same as Book One. Look somewhere in Book One, there are Sheet One, Sheet Two and other things. This is a sheet in itself and another sheet has been created with the name of Book Two and has come to you, so in this way you can get it very easy in Excel. You can move your data here and there, you do not have to select the entire data again and again by using Control C Control v. For example, suppose you are seeing the data till here, now here below, there is some data written at the very bottom, it will not be copied but it will remain because you have not seen that data, so when we copy and paste manually. So there might be chances that we make a mistake or leave some data but in this way your sheet is exactly moved there and also copied, whatever you want to do is done directly, so this was the way we have to move and copy, now it comes to you that you want to protect your sheet, meaning if suppose you have done some work, now you have to go for a break or an important call has come and now you Do you want to say, hey, I will go, if someone does something in this time, my work will get ruined, so we have to protect our work, we basically want to protect our work, we want to keep some kind of protection in it inside our system, then what can you do, you will go to format control, that is, you will go to format A, from here, click on protect sheet, make sure that these three arrows are selected, basically let them be locked and unlocked. The type of cells can be either locked cell or unlocked cell. Now if you select both then it means that all the cells will be locked. Okay and after that you can give any password here. For now I am giving 1 2 3 password and it will ask us to reenter 1 2 3. We gave it and we will do OK, so in this way now this password has been protected. Now how will you know whether the password is protected anywhere, you can do anything. If you try to write, it will not let you write. The cell and chart you are trying to change is on a protected sheet. To make a change, unprotect the sheet, you might be requested to enter a password. OK, so what will you do? You can do it from here again, you can do it on the sheet as well, it is the same thing, you will go to the unprotected sheet and enter your password here. 1 2 3 And OK, if you do it, look here, now you can enter your password. If you want to write anything, you are able to write, it is allowing you to enter. Okay, if you want to do this temporarily or not, I have to do this thing, put the password again and we are going out, you can go for a break, no one can write anything, we are trying to write something, it is not allowing us to write. Okay, so in this way you can protect your sheet. This option is also available here in the format. Look at the home tab, which is a summary. Most of the features are inside the Home tab of the entire Excel and there are some features in the Home tab which are for the overview, you will get those features later too, like here I unprotect it for once, like you saw the Protect here in the Review tab, when you go inside the Review tab, you get the option of Protect Sheet and Protect Workbook here, but if you do not remember there, then you will get it here under the Format too, if it is not there then also. If you right click, here also you get the option of Protect Sheet. Basically, you are protecting the particular sheet. Okay, so in this way you can put the password here. Now we have completed this which is our format, after that what comes to you is Autos. You have already done the rest of the things. These are the functions, we will do them only when we do the statistics, after that I want to teach you this series. So, we will start very basic. If we start from basic, then first of all I will give it a name. Okay, here we have

different different things. For once, I will also give it some color. Now, when we are giving color to all the things, then it is not this, which color should we give? Give us blue, what about blue, okay, see what it does basically. The first thing I will tell you is that you have to fill any thing, see what is this option, this is the option that you will get. It is visible that this is the option of fill, and what is the spelling of fill, it is FI, so remember that what is this option, it is the option of fill, what will be the spelling inside it, it will be FI, so now if you have to do anything inside the option of fill, then see how its shortcut key will be made. Let’s draw once for the shortcut key and just give me a minute, we will adjust it and We have come to the draw page and see what our activation is, what does it mean from alt to home page, where do we go from alt to home page, what is the spelling of fill better than H, F I, so remember now, whatever work we will do in this entire sheet, it will remain as Alt H F I, next to this, that thing will keep changing, after this, whatever you have to fill, the name will keep coming according to that. Everyone must have understood very well that what is Alt, what is H, what is F a. What is ok, now let us work in actual, see what is the first option that comes, suppose I write here Tanu Single, I have written this name, ok, I auto adjust it with double tap, fill some color inside it, like I wanted to fill a good color, this color is good and we have filled this color, given a border in it, in a way it looks quite good, ok, if I want the same content at the bottom, that means exactly. We want that thing in the cell below, so basically what we want is that the shortcut key to fill down fill down is Control D. I am telling you exactly the shortcut key. If you want to go directly from here, you can go from here too, but I will also tell you the way to go from here, but remember this one, Control D and if you want it on the right side, then Control r. Now let me tell you one thing, what does it do? Basically exactly the same if there is any other color here. If there was a different color font here, then it would also have chosen a different color font. If there was a different size font here, then a different size font would have come here too. Exactly copy paste does exactly copy paste. So to know us about fill down, I write here, what we did for fill down, what is our shortcut key for fill down, fill down and fill down, control D and this is what we did, fill right and What is the shortcut key we have for fill right? Control R is fine and at the same time if I want to go according to the home keys because you get this option in the home tab then Alt HFI and it is found D and right is called R. So if you want, now you have two shortcut keys meaning one more thing, meaning the easy one, if you do not remember this then what shortcut key can you use because now you have generated the shortcut keys from the home tab also . Alt H means Home F I Fill and after that it is D, it is D, neither is it D, and here Alt A A I D D will not come, what will come, this is right, otherwise r will come, okay, this thing which I have just told you has been done for down and right, if I talk about the same thing for once, I copy it and paste it here, if I have to do this thing in the upward direction or if I want to do it in the left direction, then I have There is no shortcut key. We don’t reverse anything anyway, we don’t go up, so that’s why the main thing is used only. If you have to do something on the left, then you will go to the left cell and after that you will click on the left, then it will be filled in the left. If you have to go to the up position, then go to the up position and then go up. Okay, we can do this directly, they do not have any shortcut key. Okay, I understood, generally we either We move towards this or move like this, that is why their shortcut keys are available with us. Okay, everyone understood, so what did we learn here? We learned these four types of fill: Down, Right, Up, Left. After this, what we are going to fill is a series of fills. Which is the most important thing, so let’s listen to how the serious feel is. First of all, let me look at you in the serious feel, first I will give you the complete feature, and then one last one. I will also write a formula, okay, let’s write a series, first of all, let me tell you the normal series. If I want to write a normal series, then I wrote one and I can drag, one way, I have this and I can do the fill series, one way, I have this, I take it a little to 10, it is okay, the second way, what do you have , the second way, you have this, you write the initial number here, one and go to that initial number and here in the series. Go, after clicking on the series, a window like this comes to you, now what does this window say that what you have to fill, you have to fill it daily, you will come to fill it daily, otherwise it will go like this, it will go like this, I will do it one by one, let me tell you how the daily works, keep it in daily like this, linear means what is linear used for, plus is used for minus, so plus minus means we are adding one number one by one, isn’t it technically you? When you see the series 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9, if you check it technically, then what are you doing? You are doing the same thing, then here you write one in the step value and assume 10 in the stop value, because you have to write till 10, then if you have given OK, then it will write it in this way and give it to you. It is okay, but you did not want to write the column in this way. That’s why we choose columns instead of rows, we have taken columns, we have taken linear, only one plus has to be done and here if it stops at 10 or 10, then till here your value will come directly. Now you will say that ma’am, we can do this by stretching, that is, we can do it by dragging, why should we achieve so much, these were also 10 numbers, so that is why you are feeling that I can do it by dragging, but if this is the same thing I can do to you. Say, if you want to do it for 1 lakh entries, then till 1 lakh you will keep dragging and here you have to write the amount by just one go, so you will write it directly. Okay, so this is what we do, this is our series. Now let me tell you another way. Suppose you have to write some pattern. You have to write the pattern. 2 4 6 8 10 If you have to write the pattern by doing something like this, then what is happening in this pattern. What is happening in this pattern that I have started from 2 . Starting with that, we write the numbers, OK, then what is happening + 2 4 + 2 6 + 28 8 + 2 10, so basically two are being added, so in this way, if we have to write any pattern, then we will go to this, we will go here, meaning we will go to our fill, we will go in series and what do we have to fill in, first of all, why do we have to do it in the column, now you have understood because every day, he will give us all the answers like this . If you want an answer, then this is your column. The second thing is that you have to keep it in linear. Whenever you have to do plus or minus, if you keep it in linear, then you have to do plus or minus. You have to do plus. Well, how much plus has to be done. Step value means, how much has to be done, then you have to do two and when to stop, what answer should come, stop when you reach 100, stop where the last 100 comes, then stop . If you do OK then 2 4 6 8 10 12 14, see, you keep going on till 50 values ​​till 100 is reached. Everyone has understood the guess. If you don’t understand then you can do the same thing. Let me show you in some other pattern. Let me show you in some other pattern too. Let’s say I is 100. Keep subtracting F from it until the answer is zero or till the answer is one. Okay fine 100 is written in the series, now what do you have to do in the column but now you have to do minus F because now you have to do minus and for how long when the answer F does not come, for Apple you have to do it till the answer F comes OK then 100 95 90 will keep decreasing and it will keep going till the answer F comes in the last, okay so it is up to you how you can implement any feature. When you use your features, you get to do it in this way, whatever is linear is for plus minus, just remember this, I will write these things to you, what we have done first and what we have done for linear, what we have done first and what we have done for linear and use for plus minus. Okay, so those who use linear, they use for plus minus. If you have a basic understanding of how the pattern is being filled, then you will understand these things. Now let me do one thing here and delete it so that we can talk about the second series below. Second, what do you see here, if you go to the series, then next comes to you, growth growth, which is growth, which deals in multiply and divide. Second, the one that comes to you, comes to you, growth and growth deals in what , deals in both of these, in multiply and divide, you will say that this See what kind of pattern it is, suppose you have written two, till now what was there was that you wrote 2 + 2 4 4 + 2 6 6 + 2 8 8 + 2 10, it was going on like this but now when you use growth, it will be 2 * 2, then it will be 4, but 4 * 2 will be 8, 8 * 2 will be 16, 16 * 2 will be 32, 32 2 * 2 will be 64, that is this. If it will grow in the same way then you go to the series and select the column. Now to take growth, what do you do here? Write 2 here and stop value 100. Then stop till 100 is reached. Do OK then 2 * 2 4 * 2 8 8 * 2 16 16 * 2 32 32 * 2 64. Now 64 * 2 becomes 128. 128 is greater than 100 and you had given the stop value as 100, so beyond that it did not give the answer. Okay, in the same way, if you want, you can divide it. Now like you have written 100 and after 100, you have gone to the filter, that is, you have gone to the fill, gone to the series, gone to the column, gone to growth and now you have to change the step value to 0.5, keep deleting by half the number and till the answer. If you don’t get five then ok let’s try 100 Did Ba 2 50 / Ba 2 25 25 / Ba 2 12.5 12 Did Ba 2 A 6.25 makes half of that, it has come, you just have to be a little careful that what values ​​should I put in it so that I get exactly the answer I want, then putting those values ​​is your main here. The work is going to be done, if you have put those values ​​properly, then all these things will come to you in the correct manner, so that is your growth and linear, you have also done the growth, now the main one comes, the end date of the day comes, this part of the date is used the most. Within the date, I have already told you in number format but still let me tell you what does date date mean today? You can see the date of 25th Feb 25, this is today’s date, so what is inside it, day, month, year, okay, so one way can be that I keep increasing every day from today, one way can be, I can show month wise and one way can be, I can show year wise, right now I am not able to understand it, it’s okay, now we will understand, okay if you see the example, you will understand, suppose I have taken today’s date. I took the date and after that I want to drag it, then it will get dragged, either I can drag directly, we do it when we have small data, we have to drag for some time, like for a second or two seconds, within three seconds we can do that thing by dragging, so we obviously do the drag thing but when it is taking more time than this, then do not drag, after that what do you do this Take the date and suppose you want to write from 25th to 26th, then you will go by dragging for a time, then you will have to pay attention that when 26th 25th February 2026 comes and then you will have to stop and there is one way – go to home page, go to the series, go to the column, why are you going to the column. You know this thing, go to the date and there are two things in a day, one day comes that is a normal day, the way other things are coming and so on. If a week day comes, it will automatically remove your Saturday Sunday, that is, you don’t need Saturday Sunday at all, if your days come without that, then this is also a liberty in it and the good thing is that if suppose you have to write only working days in this way and want to remove Saturday Sunday, then it will write it to you. Now suppose you want to write it only till the third March, then three three just because will remain till here, so okay, look here. Now suppose it has come, now you have seen that the step value is also written there. Now if you wanted to write a date in which if two days are lost, then you will go to the column, here you will write two in the step value and after that you will write 03 03 2025. Okay, so look, 25 has come, 26 has been left, 27 has arrived, 28 has been left, 20 first of match has arrived, second has been left, third. It has come because you have given two values ​​so that by adding two plus it comes in it, then in this way, if you want to fill any pattern, then you can fill the pattern, you check your step value, it will come only by adding or minus to the step value. If you want to reverse it, then put a minus, like suppose if I write 03 03 2025 here and then go to fill, go to series, go to column, go to date. I do -2 and I say keep writing till 25th January or 25th February comes, then see 3 1 27 25 You can also do this in reverse, what have you written this time, if you have written -2 there, then it happens in this way, now I will tell you the week day thing about the same thing, if you have to write the week day, then on the week day, first of all we will do this thing, then we will do this, then we will do this, so that you understand the difference, okay for the week day, you will do the same thing. First take today’s date, after that you go in the series from here, leave one in the column and from here take the week day and take it as 03 03 20 25 and ok so this came to you 25 26 27 28 and one and two he has removed it May be one and two Your Saturday is falling so one and two he has removed it Directly three has come Now the same work if we have someone in it If we want to do addition then we can do that too. We have this value. After the value, what are we doing? What should we do in the gap of two days? After that, we went to the series. After going to the series, we took the column, here we put two and this time we took the week day and the stop value, we took the same 3 3 20 25 and did OK, so see 25 26 is gone, 26 is gone because we called it two step value. If it was then it will give according to two values ​​and after that 28 is also gone because 28 will not come, the next one was supposed to come from that, why did the next one not come because it was within the week day, two did not come, so these three dates are left, like this we can do the reverse also 03 03 2025 And here we went to the fill series, after going to the series, went to the column and after that we went to the week day and here is the pay step value which we have Given -2 and the value that should be stopped here is 25 2 2025 and Okay, so we have these three dates. Okay, last thing, what is left with you for the month? Suppose, if you do this three times and you want only the month to be dragged, then what will you do? After going to the series, we will go to the date in the left column and will do the month. Now till how much do you have to write, suppose you have to write till 25 12 2025, then see 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 These middle ones are increasing. Which is your month? Okay, if you want to do the same thing for the year, then write down today’s date and after that you go to the series. After going to the series, you take the date from here and go to the year. Whether to increase by one year or by two years, it is your choice. I am trying to increase it by two years. I have shown this and after that, I am trying to reach where I have written 25 to end, okay two dashes. It took 20 15 ok then 25 27 29 see the date in between is not changing, only the year is changing and it has come to 49. In this way you can write the date of whatever pattern you want, you can write series which is fill series, it is mostly used for date, it is mostly used for date, now it complements the series itself, if you believe that then this is the feature. If you do not want to use this, then you can use a formula. Which is equal to sequence? What does the sequence do? Tap on it, write as many numbers as you want, directly want up to 1000 or only up to 10, you write this, enter it, see, a series up to 10 will appear, this is your formula, ok, date is needed, something has to be done for the date, Equals to sequence tab, sorry search, the tab has come, right? How many are required daily, let’s say 10 days are required and 10 dates are to be written, how many columns do you need, that is, how many columns are to be written, suppose I have to be written in two columns, then two OK, where to start, if it starts from today’s date, then you can write today’s date or you can apply today’s formula, let’s do this thing further, just because right now you will not know the today formula because we have not made those formulas, so normally you can understand. That we can do this even by applying the sequence formula, but it is better if we do not apply the formula because the references come from the formula, we can mess it up later, if you remove anything in between, it will create a mess, so that is why we should do it in this way by using this option, rather than you use any formula, we will learn the complete formula for this later, but for now, we have learned this much. If you have any doubt then you can tell me in the comment section. I say this again and again that all of you either tell me your doubts one by one or keep writing those doubts as you are reading because it is difficult to cover the whole thing in one go, so your doubts will come continuously. Slowly, slowly, slowly, you will get the answer and solve it and if you think, I will see everything in one go and After that, if I ask all the doubts in one go, then it is totally up to you. If you want to ask like this, you can ask like this. Okay, here we have completed the series. After the series, we get a clear all which we have done. After that, we get the filter. Filtering is very important. Filter and Sorting is one of the most important topics of Excel. The best feature is the single which helps us in many things, which also helps us in a lot of reporting, it helps us a lot in understanding something after seeing it, especially with the data, so now we will do sort and filter filter and sorting. What is if I talk about filters, then let us understand a little bit three times and after that we will get a little better clarity about it. So just give me a minute, so see us here, I will make a filter, just ignore my drawing. Okay, so we made a filter, okay, how does a filter generally work, for example, if you put 200 liters of water inside it, okay, 200 liters, you put water inside it and what is coming out is 185 liters, that means, what are the impurities in 15 liters, the 15 liters of water that was impure has been removed and 150-185 pure water has come, okay, so what is the effect of applying a filter? It happens that you separate the things, whatever you had to separate into pure and pure, the filter has done it, so in the same way, suppose there are many things written inside a data, like you can see the data, here date is written, name is written, category is written, product is written, state is written, there are many things if you want in your mind. It came like this, okay fine, many states are written here, I want to know how many sales we have done within Assam, do you want to know how many sales have we done within Assam, you just want to know, now if you sit down to search on your own, how much time will it take, it is a very time consuming process, so in such a situation, you will filter out, what will you do to filter it out, okay, let me tell you how the filters are applied, whenever you have to apply filters, you will go to the heading of your data. You will go to any heading. There is no mandatory whether it should be the first heading or the last heading. You go to any heading and click on it. What will you do after clicking? In the home tab, I will tell you the direct feature once, after that I will tell you about the shortcut key. Okay, so what will be the direct feature you will have. Look here, this filter which I made and told you about, you can see the same shape now, so you will click on it and there is an option of end filter, its shortcut key is also written next to it. Which is Control Shift L, then you click on it, your filters will be applied, drop downs like this will be applied, the way to remove them is also that if you go to this and click on the filters, then they are removed. Now I have to apply filters anywhere, obviously filters will be applied on headings, so if I click on any heading, I will press Control Shift L, then my filters will be applied. Now we were talking about how filters are used for. Example, if I want to see, now I have different categories, electronic, decker, fashion, etc. If I want to know how much electronic I have sold, then it will consume a lot of time to check it myself. I will click on this drop down. Just give me a minute. I will click on this drop down. After clicking on this, I will get a window like this. Whatever data you have, write here all the unique values ​​in that column. Now you have to see only electronic data, so this select all is already selected, remove it and after that select electronic and after that you do OK from here, by doing this only electronic data has come on your screen, rest of the data is gone, you are able to see, you have only electronic data, I will show you from here, see only and only you have electronic data, then in this way you can filter out, now you have filtered but if you want to go back. If you want, then there are two ways, either you directly press control shift L, then the filter is removed, removing the filter means that the entire data as it is will appear in front of you, the second method is that you will click here and it is written here, clear filter from the category, you will do this like this, the filter which was applied from the category will go away. Okay, the next question of yours is that ma’am, can we apply more than one filter inside one data? Yes, absolutely it is. We can take an example and let’s go with the same, suppose I wanted to know how much electronic has sold in the category, then I did how much electronic has sold, how much electronic has been sold, it came, after that you know that electronic is fine but I want to know further that how many laptops I have sold, so we did electronic, inside electronic, we had to know how much we have sold laptop, so we got laptop, then you say, ok, about laptop too, but I want to know how much the females bought and how much the male bought, I said ok. Then we will impose fine on gender, how much did the mails buy, okay, but I want to know how much was sold in Rajasthan, so you will select it and remove it, we will keep checking below, Rajasthan starts with R, so here Rajasthan is and after doing okay, we have only these four entries in Rajasthan and this much has been sold, so it has come to us, so look everywhere, there is a symbol like this above the category, there is a symbol like this on the product name, there is a symbol like this on the state too. There is a symbol like this on the gender too. Having this symbol means that there is a filter on it. Now suppose you suddenly remember that no, I don’t want to remove it on the product name, it means I don’t want to put a filter on the product name, I had to put it on the rest, so now either you will control it, then the whole work will be removed, so in such a situation, what will we do, we will click on whatever has to be removed and here comes Clear from the product name. If you click on it, then look away from here. there is space left You applied the rest later on like state, gender but still they are there. Okay, so in this way you can remove your filter even from an individual and you can automatically filter out your data and see it. So in this way, our filters work for us and help us a lot. Now suppose I want all the data back. So what to delete after going to each one. Directly press control shift l and control shift l and the drop down will come back. Okay, in this way you Let me tell you one more thing, if you click on the filter, you will see some options above here, Sort A & G. If you click here, then the options you see are Small to Largest. If you click here, you will see Oldest and Newest. So what does this mean? Look, one thing is very simple. Let us understand that if you want to filter out anything, then filter it out in the same data. Now let’s talk about the text. If we talk about the text, then if the text has to be arranged, what has to be done, if the text has to be arranged, then how can it be arranged? How can it be arranged? So how obvious is it that for its arrangement you have to do A, either A to 2, I don’t know why it is not working, A to 2, you can do J to A, right, these are the two arrangements that can be made. In what other ways can you arrange the alphabets? You will put it in the same way. If there is any customization, if you want to put it in a different way, then it is a different matter, then we will look at the custom, but the general thing is that whether it will be A to 2 or Z to A. If I talk about numbers, is it possible in the arrangement in numbers ? If we can put smollet, then it is possible for the date in the same way. Is it possible to make the smollet largest or not from A to Z? Will it be oldest to newest or oldest to newest or new to old, should the oldest one be placed first or the newest one should be placed first, then this arrangement will be done in this way, otherwise it is possible in the same way as our arrangement, that is why the features that you see here are those on the text, if there is any filter somewhere. If you are looking here then you see A to two and J to A. If any filter is being applied on some number, then what you see is small to largest and largest to small and if you check on the date, then on the date you see oldest to new and newest to oldest. Okay, there I will make you check one more thing. As soon as you go to any text, you see text filters here. If you go to a number, then you will see number filters here and if you go to a date, you will see date filters here. Okay, now you have understood why something is written there, you have got the answer to the question, okay, there is a green color here, okay , I have to find that, so how do I do that? Suppose, sometimes what happens in the data is that we apply some color to highlight it, then you can sort that too, you click on it here. And here after writing ‘Filter by Color’, the color comes, now I am saying that somewhere it has got green color by mistake, so it has happened here, now I can change it by going to the home, suppose I have done this, I have made it charcoal grey. Now look, it has come in the text filter, it is fine, but I made it white just because it was done by mistake, okay, I had to do it here, I made it white, okay, now for you, I will tell you the data once in this way. How to color Control Shift L Control Shift L No problem, it is not working for us. Okay, let’s color one place at a time. By holding any control, I have selected this data and I am going to color at various places. Okay, and I will color it here. This one is fine, I have colored it at various places. Now I have to sort it, so what can you do. Okay, I will take another color, single color, so you know, so I have colored it here. But I have selected anything from here, you are not even able to see it, I can’t even see it, and we have selected such a small, small, small one , and here we have red, see how many yellows, okay, now I have zoomed it, just for once, I had to do it, now suppose if you have more than one color fill at some place, then you can filter it out, you will go to this, fill by color and here you will see all the colors, you want yellow first. Look, yellow has come, all the yellow ones have come, okay, so this is definitely a way, when you can filter any of your data according to the color, if you removed it , then this data of yours has been removed. Okay, now I tell you, if I ask you, do you know all these text filters etc., text filters and so many filters that are shown to you, you will say, ma’am, I am learning new things and you are asking me whether I know it or not. You don’t know, you know all of them, now how to see that. What you just learned from me was that you had learned conditional formatting, so now let’s move on to it by meditating a little and relating it a little and we will also understand a little what conditional formatting does, see, for once let’s talk about what does conditional formatting do and what does a filter do, okay if I talk about conditional formatting and on one hand what I talk about, I talk about filters. If it is ok, then what is conditional formatting doing? If you give any condition, if you give any condition, then I will do the formatting instead of that. I told you some condition that if it is so, then do this, then only that data is there in it, let’s say this data is of 1000 entries, the data of 1000 entries is okay and inside this you have to highlight the duplicate values ​​and 50 There are duplicate values, for one time, it will color it in 50, it will change the border in 50, it will do something or the other in 50, but here the data that you will see will be of how many entries, only 1000 entries will be visible, only that much is visible, wherever we want to highlight people, there is a color there, then what happens inside the filter, no entries, only 50 will appear, the answer is the same. Will come but the method of representation changes. How does the method change? Now when you apply filters, 1000 entries will not come, only 50 entries will be shown, no color, nothing, only 50 entries will be shown, so it is up to you as to how you want to keep the representation. Features are all the same, you will see that if you go to text from here, if you go to text filters from here, Equals to does not equal to begin with and. With does not contain condition was done in formatting and not written in solution then tell me if anything is written then tell me then all these are the same as if you go to custom also then you have the same, you have the same, greater than equal to whatever you had read, when you go to number format, you will go to number filters, equal does not equal greater than greater than equal to less than top 10 Top 10 Below Average Above Average All these things are the same, isn’t this the same, you can check in the date, when I told you about a date in the date, I did not tell in it, Yesterday, Today, Tomorrow, This Week, Last Week, everything and that is the same, okay, so in this way you can do the same work here in the conditional formatting, here you can do the same work in the filter, what is the difference in the conditional formatting, 1000 If there are entries of 1000 then 1000 remain but what comes in color but what is in the filter comes out after being filtered, the rest of the data goes away, whatever is asked for as it is remains the same. Okay, so you know all these filters, definitely practice. If you have any doubt on any of these, please let me know in the comment section. I will definitely tell you but there is no point in repeating it here. Because we have done that, we know it already, we will not waste time there. Now whatever we can learn, we can learn sorting. So, now we will learn sorting manually. The thing that we know is sorting which I just told you about the arrangement. So the arrangement itself is called sorting. We have to sort. Suppose now you can see that the names are written in different types. There is no such thing as A, A, T, Z, Z to A. If it is written then you can do that thing, you click on it and from here you click on A to Z, then see that in this way your data has been sorted in it. Okay, suppose you want to do something else, you want to do according to the number, then you can go to the number. If you want to do the largest to smallest, you click on it and see, a sorting icon has also appeared on it. Let me just show it to you, then see a sorting icon has appeared on it. And look, the number which will be on the top will be the highest and accordingly the entire data has been changed here. Let me tell you that earlier the data which was there was Harijan Wellness and later when we made it from largest to smallest, now it is Bright Harijan Venture. Okay, earlier we had done the price, so that is something. And it was showing that here we had done the price from largest to smallest, so here it was Radiant Health Club, so in this way we can sort the entire data is about the same thing, if suppose I want to arrange the data according to the date, from newest to oldest, then the new largest data which is written is written according to that, the entire data is arranged here, Zenith has come here. Now okay, one thing is that when you do the sorting, then you can undo the sorting. It doesn’t happen. We have done it hand to hand for now. If you think that sorting is left, then I have left it. Later, I will do the same data again, then that thing does not happen. Now, what I will teach you will make you aware of sorting also. As soon as you have your data here, after that, you can go to Sort and Filter here and click on Custom Sorting. On Custom Sorting, first of all you can see all the headings inside all the data that you have. This means that it is asking you that the custom sorting you have to do should be done according to what. For example, if we have to do it according to the name, then we have done the name. After that it asks you according to what we have to do, according to the cell values. We have to do it according to the cell color. We have to do it according to the font color or there is some condition formatting icon. So let’s say, from here I take the color only. When I took the cell color, I took the cell color and now as soon as I took the cell color, my options have changed here, now it is asking me which sorting to do, for example, I want to take yellow, but there by default yellow was coming, which was yellow by default, it was only bringing and giving yellow, now this is sorting, not a filter, it is sorting, so what will happen in the filter, it will bring and give only the yellow color, the rest of the data will go, sorting is not done like this. It keeps that data as it is, it just arranges whatever arrangement you want to do, now as I want it to come on the bottom, that means all the yellow data should go at the bottom of the data, I have done OK. Now look, go to the very bottom and whatever data you had, see the data is getting finished. Here, that entire yellow part has come down, that portion is fine, so in this way, if you want, you can do custom sorting. Okay, everyone understood, here you will get custom. The option of sorting is available here, it is completely up to you as to what you have to do and what not to do. If you want to delete any level, then you delete it. If you do OK, then your sorting has been deleted from here. Those who will be sorting from here, look from here for a second. All the sorting which you had done is gone and your yellows have again come from scattered places. So the custom sorting which is done from there is done by you. You can also delete from there itself. So here we learned to do normal sorting. If we want to do text then it can be A to 2J to A. If we want to do with numbers then it can be small to largest and largest to small. And if we want to do date then it can be L to newest to oldest. We also learned custom sorting that how we can go there and do our according sorting. Let’s do filters here. And we have completed the topic of sorting, now we move ahead, the next topic comes to you , Go To Special, how to use Go To Special, for what, first of all we have to know that and what is the meaning of Go To, why is Go To Special being used, when we know this, then we will be able to apply it easily. See, Go To means to jump directly over any cell. Now this thing is asked many times in your interviews also, if you agree, then we will be able to apply it easily. Let me say this, we have come here on this side and I tell you that I do not want to go to Rs 1 lakh. If I want to reach Rs 1 lakh, then what will you do by scrolling, will you go scrolling like this or will you go down using your keyboard, use the page down, then how much tiring will it be if you have to reach Rs 1 lakh, then better than this you can use Gotu. Now there are two ways for you to use Gotu, one way is where you directly. You can use the shortcut key and one way is known to you that we will explore the feature directly, so what you have to do is, first of all you will go to Find and Select on the Home tab. After going here, you will click on it, then here you get the first option of Go To. If you click on it, then you will get a window like this. After this type of window comes, here you will have to write the reference where you had to go. a100, you had to go to a1 lakh, after that you press OK, then it has taken you above a1 lakh, you can see that this is our sale, it is above a1 lakh, but I would not personally suggest you to use it, for once, I will definitely tell you its shortcut key, go to starts with the g, so what happened to its shortcut key, what am I saying that go to starts with what is go to. Starts with the G. Hence, its shortcut key is Control G. Okay, now Control G. If you press Control G anywhere inside your sheet, then this window opens to you and you can write directly here, but I say this is also a big way, we will not do it in this way also. If in any case, if you are told that I have to reach K 3965 3, then where will you do what, you go directly to your name box and write here k. 3969 8 You had to reach here, just enter, then see it has taken you to 3969 8 and from here you can see that it has brought you to the place of that sale by jumping directly, so instead of using Go To, use the name box. Go To adds more features in itself. There are many features which are very useful, so we will do that, but here my job is not just to tell you the features, my job is to tell you in this way. Let me tell you the features that should be so effective so that you can do your work better and use the name box to do better. It will give you better results. Well, what is he doing here on the side by jumping directly to the cell? Now suppose your interviewer told you that you have to select the entire area till 1963, so in such a situation, you will do the same work, you will write in the name box : 9 63 5 2. 8 You can write anything till the selection and after that now you will not directly press enter, if you press shift enter then here it has given the entire selection till the point where you have written here 963 U which is your number, not sorry 3969 8 So it has given till here yours is ok so we can do the selection in this way, suppose I am here and from here till how much do I have to select. If you want to reach m10, then I wrote m10, after that I pressed shift enter, then put the first cursor till m10 and after that, write jump on the cell where you want to reach and after that press shift enter, then the entire selection till there will be automatic. Why do we learn selection? I have always told you in Excel that whatever work you do, first you have to make a selection and only after that you can apply something beyond that. Yes, right, that’s why we are doing selection here, so that first we get to know different types of dynamic selections, after that we can do anything. Till now, if I talk about what you had learned in the selection, then you had learned the basic selection. Now what was that basic selection? The basic selection was this. If I told you to do a complete selection, select the entire data in one go, then what would you do ? If you used control A, then the entire data would be selected, then I used to say, brother, do the selection with a single click, how was the selection done with a single click, it was done with control shift, then you used control shift arrows and the entire selection was done, after that it came to you that you have to select a single cell, then the single cell was also selected, you held the shift and after that used the arrows and here a single selection was done, but I am saying . Yes, this is the way to select the data. I gave you the data and said in the data, select all the blank cells. Then brother, how will this happen because neither can you select the entire data. How much pressure have you put in it that select all the blank cells. Well, I tell you to select all the text written inside the entire data. Now look here, there is text written in between the values ​​too, they should also be selected, so you will keep watching like this. For this type of dynamic selection, we use Go to Special. As soon as you press Control G, you get a special option below. Click on it. You will get a window like this in which there are many options. If you do not want to explore it from here, then you can also explore it from the Home tab . Go to the Home tab, go to Find Select, here also you will get Go to Special. Where does it go? Now we have to see what options are available inside it and how can we use it. So see, we will control A so that our data gets selected, after that we will control G so that we have this option, after that we will go to special. I would personally suggest you that whenever you go, control G and then go to special. First of all, let me tell you that it is very small here, so you may not be able to see B, so below each word. There is an underline, there is an alphabet inside every word and there is an underline below the alphabet, then that alphabet is its key. In the same way as home, when we press alt , one key does not come, similarly, there is no key here, the one under which there is an underline, that is its key. Okay, the other thing, the first one is notes. Let’s say I put notes here at different places with shift A2. I put some random notes here at different places with shift f2, okay. And now you want to select wherever these notes are present. Suppose you have a huge data and now you have to highlight wherever there are notes, so that you can see where there are notes in the entire data. So before applying anything, we need a selection, so we will do Control A, Control G, we will go to Special, we will select the notes and we will do OK, so see where the notes are present, that selection. It is done, now I have colored it in this way, so now I will always see in my data that OK fine, there are notes here and there, OK, now suppose you want to remove this color again, then you will do Control A, Control G, after that you will go to Special, after that you will select the notes and you will do OK. Now if you want, you can remove their color, I have made it white and look, all these selections have been removed, so in this way you select the notes, after that you can see. Do Control A, Control G, go to Special and you get the option of Constant and Formula. You will have to understand it in a little detail but before understanding it, let us know one thing. See, when you click on the Constant, these four options are active, the first one is number, the other one is text, the other one is logical and then the error and even when you click on the formula, these four remain active, so are these four for both? Yes, can you explore them together, that is, you can choose which constant and formula together. The answer is no. When you do it for a constant, it will be a constant thing. When you do it for a formula, it will be a formula thing. These are their common options which you can use. Now you need to understand what is a constant and what is a formula. In this entire table, the most useful ones that you will find are these two options. You will get constant and formula, that is why it is very important to understand the difference between these two. If you do not understand the difference between these two, then understanding the whole go to special will be useless, so let us understand it a little carefully. See, here you get two words, the first one is constant , the other one is formula. Suppose from a1 to a1, some 10 10 digits were written like this 10 10 10 10 On one side I wrote I give, this cell is mine and here I write 100 and on one side here is the cell of mine, I write the sum a1 a10 then the answer is this is my formula will be visible in the bar but the answer is mine what will be visible is 100 so here which is only value there is no formula so what has become constant and here the value is there but is this value constant is it just value no check the formula b what? There is some formula attached to it. Yes, so suppose this is your formula. Okay, so the first thing we understood is the constant and formula. Let me give you one more example. Suppose you had written some ‘A’ and ‘Your’ marks here. Okay, now you have written directly inside the cell according to the marks, if someone’s no came at 30-40, then if he passed, then you wrote ‘pass’ after seeing and on one side, what did you do here, if you put the formula that if. If it happens then do this or else do this and then after that means you applied some formula here, you calculated pass from that formula and if you failed then the answer will come here then you will see pass but inside that when you checked in the formula bar, the formula was written there, so this is your constant and this is your formula, so now you have understood this at the initial level, what? Is it a constant and what is the formula? Now see, when you write a value, we call the value a number. Here also the answer is your value. If your answer is 100, then this is also a number. So this number is the number of a constant, meaning that number is the number of a constant. And this number that has come has come after being extracted, what has happened, has it come after being extracted, that is why it is the number of the formula. Now you see here, when I control you and tell you, go to the special, see, a constant also has a number option and a formula also has a number option, but there is a difference between these two, what is the difference, now you understand what is the difference, one will be the number of a constant and one will be the number of your formula, in the same way, if I talk in the way we have talked about numbers, in the same way, if I talk, it is of text. This is about the text, is there any formula written here or did you write the pass directly? If you write the party name, then what are they directly? Some generate it from some formula and do not come up with it. You normally fill the name directly yourself, do some data entry, so that is your text. What kind of text is the text of the constant? And here you have applied some formula to find out whether the student has passed or failed. If you have done anything like that then it is by applying a formula. If you did not understand then that is the text of your formula. If you understood then now you have understood two things – the number of the constant, the number of the formula and the text of the constant and the text of the formula. After that you have two more options. What are the other two options that come to you? Here we will explore both the options which is logical and after that what is an error logical? Anything written as true is false. What will be the logic, either this or that is logical , then what is written is true and false, that is logical and error, you must have seen that in the formula there is such a value error, by putting a hashtag, such an error comes, a name error # a # spill # divide, you have errors in many ways, then you have got these errors, so if we assume that there is an error in a constant, then it means that an error occurs when a formula is applied. If the formula’s error and other wise are written directly, then directly the error is the error of the constant. If you apply any formula and the true false answer comes, then the logical of the formula and not come means it is normal. Directly, we ourselves have written true false as per our own wish. That is your constant. Now even if you did not understand it so well, then it is okay because now we have explained it in great detail here. Let’s see it practically, this is our data, okay, inside this data, let’s say, let me tell you, you will constantly keep looking at the formula bar here, like I zoom it a little here, we clicked on the date, the date is coming, that means there is no formula, clicked on the name, the names are coming, there is no formula and look at the product name, state, gender, quantity, the value is coming in the quantity, there is no formula, cost, price, no, no, this price is coming. The value is directly written in it but when it comes to the purchase cost then look at the formula written here, the value is visible but the formula is there, click here, the formula is visible here, the value is visible here, click here, the formula is visible here, the value is visible, click this, the formula is visible, but the text is visible, click this, the formula is visible, but it is visible. Okay, so here you are given two things. You can select the formula numbers and text and all the things, so now accept that I tell you, tell me the number of the constant, then select the number of the constant and tell me, then I will do control A, I will do control G, after that you will go to the special, from here you will select the constant and here, leave only the numbers selected and OK, so see, the constant date is always counted inside the number. Let me tell you this thing, the date is always counted in the number. So, here, these numbers are there as well as the quantity because there was no formula in it. I just showed you that it was not included in the cost, it was not included in the price also, but when it comes to the purchase cost, sale cost, sorry, sale price profit, so your formulas were included inside it, so it did not select which one , which one was selected which were just constant numbers. Now if you want, you can do anything with it separately. Can you give them some color so that I can color them and highlight something like this? What I have to do is tell you what you can do. My main job is to explain how the selection will be done. Okay, so here we did the go to special thing. Okay, next here we did the constant number. Now the same thing, if we had to do the formula number, then we will control A, we will do control G, we will go to special, we will go to the formula, we will select the numbers and do OK. So see, the numbers have been selected from here, but you see carefully, this is zero, this is a, this is the value, this is this. There must be some digit written directly in B, so it has not selected it , you go down here and check if there are any other errors, see because the value in itself is an error, it is a text in itself, it is a constant text, so here we had told him to select the formula number and then he is so pressed that he has not taken those things from the middle which are not your formula number, which is the formula number, he has taken that, okay let’s go. Next we will see Control A will do Control G will do the same goes with the text, if you want to take the text of a constant then how will you take it, all these names and names written are your text, these are constants, you have written them yourself, not generated from the formula from somewhere, but right there, by doing Control A, Control G, if I go to special and if I take the text of the formula and do OK, then it gives me the text here, now you will say that Ma’am False True False This is also a text, yes text is datchi, so what does he consider as true false? He always considers logical true false, he will not show it as a text here, a thing can be one thing, it can be either text or logical or it can be an error. Now if there is an error then the value is also written. If the value is text in itself, then is it in the text? If he will not count it, he will count it in error and one thing cannot be counted in two things, he will have to count only one thing, Hans, what is written here, the value, is your error, True False, what is written, is your logical, that is why all the texts were there, he has given even, here you will believe it or not, here ok, you will believe it, yes, we had taken the text with formula, neither have you taken this one, now I have taken the one with constant. You had to tell me more in the text, control ji will do special and I wanted to check one more time with the constant one, I wanted to check it once more, you see, from here, he has selected this, so we saw it, you look here, see, for one second, we came to the side that yes, look here, he has written the text here, neither has this also been selected, he has not left that data, if you have told him the constant text, then he has selected this also, I had to show you this, we had gone to the data on the side. By mistake, here we have done two completes, which is the first one is number and the other one is text, after that if we talk about control, we have done it directly, no problem, we have come to special, after that we will go to the constant and we want to check the logicals, will we get the logical in the constant here, tell me from which, the answer is no from my side, if yes from your side, then you are facing some difficulty in understanding and we will explain it well, see, okay. So look here, we had not selected the data anywhere, so it checked here in the blue one, this is the heading, I had to check here in this one, Control A, do Control G, do special, and here, go to the constant, and here I have to take the logical, and do OK, so there is no logical here, saying no cells and found, why because what is logical here, what is true false, is that true false, from whom did this true false come, see from whom did this true false come, look above. The formula is attached, it has come from the formula, so if I do the formula one, control a does control g does special and after taking the formula and then taking logical in it then it comes again see then it has made the selection but here it was not in the constant na look for the constant, I have created a separate data so that you can practice control a did control g did special and here you took the constant so here you can do OK with it so look here this Why did you make the selection? Look at the selection here. Click on it. Check your formula bar at the top. Is there any formula written there? No, all the text is written, so the text is written and true. If false is written, then what happened to you, it became logical, which constant one is it ? Similarly, if I talk about the error, then look at the control a, the errors are written here, the error is written by itself, here the error is not coming from any formula, okay, then you will control a, control g will go to special and from here you will take the constant, from here you will take the error, okay, then look, it has selected all these errors, okay there. If I talk about the formula, then see these are the errors. For the formula with red heading, see this, we have applied the formula and after that, if any error has come, now you control a, control g. If you go to special, go to constants and take an error here, then it will say no cells found yes because all the errors here have actually come by applying the formula, so you have to control g special. We have to go to and select the formula from here and select the error from here and click OK, then it will select all the errors, so here we have completed all the options which are the main options of Gotu Special, in which we have seen all the four options inside the constant and we have seen all the four options very well inside the formula also, now next is our We will see what comes close, we will do control A, we will do control G, after that we will go to the special, the most important comes blank one of the important. Suppose and this is also asked many times in the interview, that is why I am going to create this data in front of you, we had created this data earlier and here we do one thing, why did it happen like this for a few seconds, yes brother, it is okay, I am making a selection by holding the control, because I have to do multiple selection, hey, I used the control. Don’t hold it, I will make the selection from here, okay and here I have made the delete option and now look, you have this data, now there are many blanks inside it, if I tell you that you have to delete all these blanks, then are you going to sit there and delete them one by one? Otherwise, if you start doing it one by one, then it will be a very time consuming process. Now, if I have to delete all these blanks, then to delete them, I have to do the selection first. And what do we use for selection? If we do Control A, then sorry, we do Control G. Now can I select the entire data with Control A? Try it, it will not happen because there is space in between, hence we will have to do the complete selection from here in this way. You have made the selection, I have made the selection with Control Shift Down Arrow, after that I press Control G, I go to Special, select the blanks and do OK, what is it now, right? In these blanks, we can directly do control minus. What happens with control minus, our sales get deleted. We will delete the sales here. We will not delete the entire raw because there may be some data in the surrounding as well on our side, so we do not want to spoil our data. We do not want to spoil the whole sheet, so we will do control minus. We will delete the sales. Do control minus. We do not want to antagonize. Now we will think that we have to do ba sales. I have already explained to you how to delete cells. But understand it a little more carefully , what do you have to do with the assisting data. Do you want to move the assisting data to the left? Do you not move it to the left? You will bring your remaining data upwards only. If the cell in the middle is empty, then delete the cell and shift the remaining data to the top. If this is what you want, then shift the cell up and do OK. So in this way your data will be completely shifted, now there are no blanks inside it, okay in this way there are no blanks, the first thing you learned is this, the second thing I teach you is that suppose what you do is that you have a blank, there are a few blanks at some places, there are a few blanks in the whole data, now here there are a lot of them but there are a few blanks, okay now inside those blacks all the same values ​​are going to go and you in that You do not want to fill one by one, you want me to write something so that it fills all the blanks in one go, then how can you do it in such a case, suppose the first thing you have to do is select the data because you will select the blanks, only then you will be able to do something, so first of all you have to select your data. Select it, OK, after that use control G, after that go to special, after that select the blank from here and do OK, then all the blanks you had will be selected. Now you have to write anything that you want in all the cells together. For example, I write my name here, single for once or write any value or write anything, I write 1000, so I I have written 1000. Okay, now I want it to appear in all of them, so if I press enter, what will happen? What happens after entering? We enter in the next cell and the entire selection will be off, so we did not do this. Now you can do one thing, instead of enter, press control enter, then that 1000 will be written at every place, here if you are thinking that ma’am, you have written 1000. Why did this format come? It is date based, that is why it came in the other wise. You will write the same value everywhere. Okay, I understood what you have to do. You just have to make a selection and start writing directly. It is not like you are clicking in a cell. As soon as you click, the entire selection gets lost. So do not click. Start writing directly. After that, control has to be entered because the selection is already done. If we click once more in the selection, then The selection gets turned off. We don’t have to turn off the selection. You directly enter control and your data will go everywhere. Okay, now I do control Pressed k, pressed enter and you have got this selection, do control minus, we will do shift cell up and do OK, so in this way our data will be fixed, okay, we have learned this here, after that I will tell you one or two more options, before that , first of all, I will cover all the important things which are important and after that I will make you explore them normally. Okay, after that you will have the information which is important. Option comes , that comes, let me tell you first option control g special and inside it there are two options, row difference and column difference and these are very useful, they are very useful, that is why I am telling you this, see how it is, raw difference and column difference, like suppose you have a small scenario and the real life scenario is that you suppose you do data entry, okay, your business is there, 99 invoices are made in it for January March. It is okay that 99 were made in the month, you put 1000 invoices in LI and in your Excel there were 99 or it could be its opposite or there is a difference in some value, that is, you have written all the details here, here you have written in Excel and first of all, when the recount comes, first of all we check the values, suppose there is a difference of 5000 in both your data, then first of all you will see this and not directly I can find this out. Where is the difference in the values, then if suppose you ever want to check the difference in two values, you have two days here and you want to check the difference in them, then you can use this trick. Basically, what you have to do is to select the data, selected the data, did control G, went to special and took the raw difference and did OK, then in this way, wherever the values ​​were different, the rest are the same. Look, this one is different, this one is different, this one is different. This one is different, just color it, you will come to know, yes, it is different, everything else is the same, so in this way you can find out, it also has a shortcut key, now we have gone to Control G, its shortcut key is Control and forward slash, control and here your forward slash will come, so you can do this work by using it too, how did I do it, let me tell you back, why did I take it, why ok fine just give me. Minute OK, I selected it, went to home and made it white from here, OK, what did I do now, control selected it and pressed forward slash with control, did control forward slash OK, that works, sometimes my key of my laptop, the key of my system is not working, but you try using this, your work will be done, you can also do this, control A did OK, control A did control G did and went to special And from here you took the row difference and you did OK, then it will come in this way Control A control data select control G special row difference OK and just color it OK, similarly if suppose your data is in this format then you do the column difference, check the columns, there is not much difference, it is just the same thing, so you selected the entire data with control

shift side arrow, after that control G made it special, after that you did the column difference and then OK. Wherever there were differences, they have come, now you can color them, so here were the differences here and you have these differences, okay, so these were the major two options which are very used, when you recalculate any two values, then you can do it directly in this way, after that if I show you the option in special, then here we will not do the current region and array, right now we will do the object, we will understand the object also but here But before that, we can see President and Dependents, what do we mean by these, so let’s see, we write a simple formula, here I write 10 * 2 = t this multiply by this enter so basically 10 * 2 * 20 if I convert 10 into 20 then 200 this is working, suppose I took this data and controlled g, then went to special and after that If I did presse dents and direct only or all levels then did direct only and ok then it told me after doing 10 * 20 this is 200. What is president basically you have it here just give me a minute look at this way you can see like suppose you are here then what is president where is this particular 200 from where did it come from? Multiplied 10 by 20. If you want to remove 200 aya then you can remove it from here. If you want to see the reverse of it then say let’s say where these 20 are being used. If you want to check on what it is dependent on then it is dependent on this. If let’s say you want to see the same thing for 10 then you can do it from here. So in the same way when you have to make a selection then you can also do the selection by controlling g, you will do special, you will do presidents and end. If you do OK, then it has selected both of them. Now suppose here I write 50 here and here I write yours equals to this cell multiply by this cell. So now tell me once that the dependency it has is here also. If I make it 20 here, then see everything will also change, so we have created a dependency. So if I click on sorry dependents from here, then it is dependent on here, okay. If I remove array this President, I go here and click on it, then it is dependent on these. If you are understanding it, then it is okay because we will do it in detail later also, so here what we have to do is remove the arrow once and after that make this selection, then control G, after that go to special and we took President and did it at all level and did OK, then it told me all the dependents. Similarly, if I want to see its opposite, then I did a special control and here I came to the dependents and if I want to check at another level, then the dependents are there, these two values ​​are dependent on some or the other, then it has come to you, so basically whenever you want to see the formation of the formula, where has this particular value come from, from which values ​​has this value come, then you check this. You can do it, okay or here you can also say that we have covered this topic a little bit, which is Trace President and Trace Dependent, if we explore it further then we will do it but it is not so useful, just whenever you want to check, you can also check directly by going to the formula bar, but if you are not able to understand, you have to check that movement, then you can check that movement from here, okay after that you have. Another option comes which is your special, go to you, last sale comes to you, sometimes you do not know where in this whole sheet something is written last, so what can you do, you will do last sale and ok, then here you have this is your last sale, because you must have some entry here, then it told me, this is my last sale, okay , you can jump directly to the last sale, after that you will get more options . You have just done the conditional formatting and data validation. Conditional formatting has not been done. Suppose you have applied some conditional formatting here. I have this data. Let’s apply conditional formatting for once. Here I do control A, after that I go to home, here I take conditional formatting here, here we take the text that content and here we come inside the decker, where it is written decker, it gets filled in red color, then this is what I do now, control A, I do control G. I go to special and I say, do you want to know the conditional format, do you want to know all or do you want to know only, I have done all, that is, if the same is of the same kind, then it will make the selection, do all, then look, it has selected it and given it, where is it applied conditional formatting, then we have it in the whole, when you have applied the condition formatting, then it is in the whole, now the decor is in the whole, now tell me one thing, I will write the decor here, please write the decor. Okay, I have written this wrong, haven’t you written decker, so it is coloring it too, it is not a big deal because we did it with a little selection, we had selected the entire data, so it has given us the selection of the entire data, after that the option you see is data validation, which we have not done yet, so we will do that. And there is also an option for the objects objects. As soon as we insert, there is also an option for the object. If you tab, the pay will be covered there. Okay , so here we have completed our go to and go to special, that too in full detail. Now let us move towards our pay special. So now the topic that comes to you is what is the pay special of pay special. So what is normal special and normal. What is paste? So basically whenever we have taken any data here, we will select it, after that we will control it and if we go anywhere else, we will control it. v If you want to do this then that will also be done and or if you want to press paste directly then that too is done then normal copy paste all two, you have already learned that I have taught that they pick up all the content and bring it to you as it is ditto but now you do not want as it is, do not want normal work, you have to do something different, you just have to bring the formats, you just have to bring the formulas, you just have to bring the notes, you just have to do some more work. In such a case, you can use Pay Special. Well, here as soon as you click on paste and many icons visible here are all Pay Special ones but it is very difficult to understand directly from the icon, hence if you click on Pay Special here, you will get a window like this. Now look at this window, Pay Special is used a lot, so either you go directly from this window. If you do not remember the shortcut, but if you want to remember the shortcut, then control like you used to paste normally. Inside this, you just have to add Alt, then hold Control Alt and just press V, then this special window will come to you, then after that you can do whatever selection you want, so here for once, I will delete it, I do Alt AE A, it is deleted and after that, now we will explore it one by one, what are the options available inside it, I first took some data here, like this is what I did. I have taken control c of the data, I will come here and do control alt v and after that look, first of all, see the above options, no, we will not explore all the options, we will explore only the most important ones, so that is the rest of the things, we will explore. Like, I will tell you what is happening in this thing, but mainly we will see the examples, as many of your important ones are there. First of all, we will see the above options, which is paste the first one. It is all as it is, it should come as it is, which is also being done by control c and control v. So if I have to do the same then why would I waste my time by coming here, I will not directly control c and control v, so there is no use of all here. Okay, so here you do not have to do anything with it. Next formula. Suppose you have a formula inside the data and you want to take it as it is and take it somewhere. There is no formula here right now. It is already there, but can we apply it here? Can we apply it at all? For once, we apply the formula here. If you enter Equals to this Multiply by this amount, then this formula has been applied. Double tap it. Okay, now let’s say you have applied it. A, let’s take it here, copy it and paste it here, so do n’t you get the amount? You have copied and pasted it. Now here you do p special and try control lt vv, sorry v, I didn’t want to do the formula. Okay, I did it. So here you have the formula n3 * o3 o3 * p3 o3 * p3. So see, look at the formula. Here, he has dragged it like n3 * n3 * o3. Here too, he has dragged it in the same way. Formula has brought only the formula, it has not brought the rest of the content. What did you say in it, just bring me the formula, so it has brought the formula but has not brought the rest of the content. What it does here is it brings all the content, there must be some formatting in it, there must be some color in it, anything can happen, it brings everything. Whatever you want to choose, if you want exactly the same thing, you can bring it from there, okay, I select it here. I remove it from Alt HEA. Let’s see next. Next, what do we get? I copy anything for once. After that I go here and do control alt v. Next tells you the value. What does the value say? Suppose, you will learn the random formula in future and you will learn other types of formulas, then what happens in such a case. You can say, assume this is this thing, this is the amount, as soon as I copied the amount. And when I come here and paste it, obviously all the values ​​have changed but I say no, I have to put this amount somewhere in the report or I need this amount somewhere, so what will you do in such a case, you take it as Control C and go to any place where you want to take these values, put Control LT v, then it will convert it into values. See, the values ​​which are there now are extracted from your formula. If it has been extracted from the formula, then that is the formula, you will see in the formula bar, that is the formula, you can see the answer of the formula, so basically, that is the formula, if you convert it into value, whatever you are pasting here, do it in the form of value, if you do OK, then all your values ​​will come, now will it not change, okay, so in this way, whenever you have any data which You want to see that this data never changes because the formula is based on the reference and the reference can change. If any reference changes, your formula will change. So in any case, if you think that you do not want to change your formula, then what you can do is simply convert all your formulas into values. To convert them into values, you can We will select control C, go anywhere here and do control alt v. Like I told you in Got Special also, the alphabet under which there is underline is its key, so its key is v. Values ​​value starts with the v and you press enter, then your values ​​will come here. It is used a lot, that is why I also remember its shortcut key. Personally, you can also remember its shortcut key. Its usage is very high if you correct. You have learned how to use it, look at the features, the features are the same, it is just that how can you apply it on which situation, it is totally up to you. If you have learned that thing, then the work is sorted, then you must remember this thing because it is very useful. Okay, we learned about values. Next, let’s see what we have. We did control C, we did control alt v here, after that comes the format. Suppose I have this same table somewhere else. I want but only want the format, then you can do it, choose the format from here, do OK, then look, the same table has been created here, now I go to scape here, do Alt AE A and remove them, just I wanted to tell you that in this way you can format, there is another way to take the formatting there, if I had to take the formatting somewhere else, don’t trust me, I do not use pace pressure because we have another one. There is an option which is control a and format printer, I would have taken it and just clicked, then this thing would have happened here, okay, so this is it, look at us, there are many ways to do the same work inside Excel, it is up to you which method you remember at that time and which method seems suitable to you, okay, let’s see next, you selected it, did control c, did control alt v, after that comes you Comments and Notes Comments and Notes I’ll leave a comment or two for this Now suppose you have selected all this data and after that you have done control C and after coming here you have done control alt v and you have selected only comments and notes and OK, so wherever there are comments and notes, that selection has come and exactly your comments have also come. Exactly your comments have also come. Now you Wouldn’t you think that all my data should come because you have selected that comment, it takes up a lot of size, as if only the formula had come in the formula, its formatting had not come. If you have selected the comment and notes here, then only those will come. Okay, here you can delete it. Which is Alt A and A. Okay, now I have to delete both of them, so what do I have to do? Obviously, by selecting it and using control g, we can go to special. From here, we can select the notes and do OK, both will be selected , we can press Alt HEA, both will be deleted, then you can use this method effectively, like I just realized that why am I deleting one by one, I can do it together, so I used it and if I did not remember that, then I too would have been deleting one by one, this is what we call. We can use it effectively. Okay, let’s go next. Let us learn that we selected this data, did control C, went here and did control alt v, after that you have validation validation. You have not learned it yet. When we were talking about control G also, data validation came in it also which is go to special. What is data validation? Let me give you a little overview so that you have clarity so that you do not get confused like this. Data validation is not done there either. Data validation is a type of drop down which we create. It is available to us inside the data tab. We will learn to create it. Okay, we will learn it in detail but for now we leave this option. Later you can see. All using source means same, almost same data comes. All accept border means complete data comes but borders do not come. Column width column width. A. Like once I make you click ‘All Accept Border’, OK, everything is there but the borders are not there, you can check it, ‘A. Control Jd. Suppose, you want to make the column width, then you did control alt v, after that, you made the column width. What is the column width? Suppose, sometimes we have data where we have adjusted the columns by stretching them one by one, so now we want that next whenever we create the data, the width of our column. If the width is the same then you have done OK, then see here the party names extra is coming, here also the party names extra is coming and rest of the space you can see is the same, the rate is coming small, so here also the space is small, so in this way you can control the column width, lt v will do next, you have formula and number format, now only formula was going from there, number format will also come, values ​​of number format all. Merging condition formats, as per your requirement, you can use these combinations. This is completely situational. If your situation is like this then you can use it. Next, let us move towards our operations, which is very very very important which will help you a lot in doing any work effectively. Suppose I have all these digits. Okay, now I am not 500 in these digits. To add, these are old, wrong digits are written. 500 is written less or 1000 is written less. If I want to increase it, should I increase it one by one? Should I not increase it one by one? What do you have to do? You have to write 1000 somewhere, okay, you copy it. You can paste this copy here anywhere, so I want to increase all of them or select the one you want to increase. Suppose you have to increase this, this has to be increased, this has to be increased, this has to be increased, this has to be increased, okay, then you do control alt and now you see in the operation, what you have to do is to add, multiply, subcut, divide, divide, you have to add, okay, you do OK, look, this has been added to your values ​​and this is not a formula, this is also the most sorted thing that this is not a formula, so you can immediately It will be sorted and there will be no change. You can delete it later. Yes, there will be no change. Your data will also be updated. Suppose you have to do the same thing here. I have to do 1000 laces, try doing 1000 laces, try control C, in this I selected the entire data, did control alt v, from here I took the substack and after that I did OK, then look, the value has been substacked, I selected it, put it here with the format printer and delete it, what difference does it make? Similarly, now in the multiply one, I can take another example like suppose you have the complete cells. Like I will draw here and tell you, this is the sheet of the entire sale. Okay , now the empty cell will not be written in the sale. The sales return will also be written. Now here the amount of one sale is written. The amount of one return is written. Now here you have to calculate the net sale. Now tell me one thing about the net sale. There will be cell minus one SR. And your sheet here is the sheet. It may be of first second, third entry sale, fourth entry may be of SR, fifth six. But there is a difference that in front of the sale, something is written as ‘SAIL’ and ‘SR’ is written in front of it, ‘SR’ is written in front of it, so now in such a case, how do you mean that you have calculated the net sale here? In such a case, suppose I leave the pay sale positive here and put a minus in front of every sale return, then it is automatically plus minus minus, it will become minus when the final calculation is done. If you understand what I am saying then that is the last calculation. If you have to convert something into minus, then how do you do it? This is just one scenario. In any scenario, if you suppose you have to convert something into minus, then how to do it. Now let’s see what you have to do. Do you know that plus minus is minus and if you multiply any number by one, then only one will come, that is, sorry, only that number will come. So you write -1 somewhere. Okay, after that you copy the entire data. Select control alt v do v do sorry v don’t do this I have got into a bad habit this is good multiply ok do it then see all these numbers multiply these will be in minus. How did all the numbers become in minus? Now you have this, you can also delete -1. Similarly, if you have to divide something then you can also divide. Suppose you want to divide all these by 10 or by 100 . So what you will do is control C, select control TV and from here select divide and do OK, so in this way these are your numbers, okay I selected it, did Alt H app and selected here, okay why did I do Alt H f p, you should know this, I am not telling you right now, you should know okay, so here we have completed it, even after this we have one or two options left like you have this data. In what format is the data? If you are seeing headings inside each column, then this is the data. I can say that it is in vertical format. In which format, if you wanted to make this same data in horizontal format, then in what way could you have made it. So see what you will do, you will select this data, you will do Control C, you will go anywhere and do Control Alt v. One, if you have to work on all the data, then All and what you have to do is Transpose Pose, which means the data. It will be in a different format than the one in which it is, like if it is vertical, it will become horizontal. If it is horizontal, it will become vertical. So, if you did the transpose ok, then look, now the data is the same, y 269 591 -11 28 is the same, it is 1479, it is the same, it was in the vertical format, it came in the horizontal format, okay, so this was yours, I will get your transpose option . Let us write 1000 and 365 963 853 963 1000. Okay, suppose you have some data which has some blanks inside it and what will come inside those blanks is written in a separate data. Suppose it is written here 635 965 and 523. Now you want that these values ​​should come inside these blanks, then how will you do it, you do not have to do anything. Selection has to be done here because like this then it will take time. If someone starts writing here manually or by applying formula, something will have to be done, then something or the other will have to be done in it to fix it, so in such a situation, what can you do, you do one thing, select this data, whatever data is equal to it, select all the data, select control C, now come here do control alt v and after that do skip balance and do OK, then see 635 has come here. 965 is here, 523 is here, now delete these values ​​if you want. Your data has been completely updated. Blanks of skip balance means that the blanks have been filled as per the data given by you, but remember that your data should be next to those blanks, only then the cell will understand that wherever there are blanks, I have left them and I will fill the rest of the data here. So, suppose you have written 635 here, then it will clash from here, then if it will not be able to do it, then this is a little. There is definitely a bit of a draw back but yes when such a situation comes then you can use it. Now let me tell you one more most effective thing. Okay, I create a little space here, just give me a minute. We have to create space here, so control plus shift right does not work. I take it, do control C and control v below here. Exactly the data has come. Now suppose you want some data where the data at the second place and the data at the first place change. If I do this, if the data gets changed at another place also, then we can do this work directly without any formula, so what will you do, like suppose I have taken this data, I did control C, here now I will do control alt and not, and here below there is an option of paste link, you do it, now not only data comes inside it, formatting is not available, what can you do for formatting, select it, click on format printer and it comes from here now. Suppose I have made it 100, then see it has become 100. Here, suppose I have written Tanu single. Tanu is here. I am writing anything. No, see, changes are happening here. I have deleted them here, so see here, they have become zero. Here I set the control, so the value has come here too. So basically, the changes that are in our first will be in the second. Will the changes that we do in the second be in the first or not? Because this data has come from data one to data two. Data two has come from data one, so the changes that happen inside it will reflect the same changes here but the changes here will not reflect here. Okay, so you have to be a little careful and in this way you can do this thing. So here we have completed, we have completed all the features on the special, now let us move ahead. Next topic comes to you, find. And replace has the same function as its name suggests. First of all, where is it found? Find and replace is found by going to the Home tab or Find and select. Now you can see that there is an underline under F in front of Find, so we can also find with control f. The second thing, let me tell you, first of all, this feature and the next thing is that there is a formula for find and there is also a formula for replace. Okay, so what we are going to do here is that we are going to feature. We are not going to do formulas here. Okay, what is find? Basically, if you want to find something inside the entire worksheet, then he can do it, or if you want to find something inside the entire workbook, then he can do it. The second thing is that you have to decide, see, first of all, what to do, either you do journalize control, then it will be done in everything or if you want to find something inside the particular data, then select that data and after that, like I did, select this data. I have done control f and after that look, this find and replace are together, so if you do not remember the two shortcuts, because the shortcut key for replace is not control r, because with control r, then we fill right, it is control h which is our replace, so if you remember control f also, then it is fine, then you can go to replace here. Okay, what is the find in find, for example, you have to find. Where to write crafts, so where to write crafts, so I have written C is big, craft is written, okay, window is going to remain the same, so we will keep the window as it is, after that see what option do you have now, we will not do any formatting right now, we are trying to do normal work, first thing with in means where to search, do we want to search in this entire sheet or in this workbook, we want to search in the sheet, we took the sheet, search by everyday, go to everyday. Look, go to the column column and see, so we are fine in the daily routine, we have to check in the formula, we have to check in the values, there is nothing like this in the notes, let it be as it is, match case, what is the meaning of match case, the case which I have written means C must be big, r must be small, A must be small, in this way match case has to be done. What does not match the entire cell content like suppose now if I put any color in it then it should be exactly the same as it is? I want to do the normal one for now so I did find all then it told me that in the more basic feature in the sheet with find and replace, Bharat Craft is written inside this cell, so look you can see here, this is the Bharat Craft, it has also brought the cell here, if suppose I write crafts here. Even if I give and then do find all, it is finding because we have not turned on match case here. Now I turn on match case, now I do find all. What is saying is we can’t find what you are looking for because here you can see all the numbers are in small letters but we have made them in capital letters here. Now I remove it and then I do find all. So look, it is fetching me if let’s say I am a workbook. And after that I do Find All, then he told me at different places where this is written, so look, P is also written here, it is also written in the condition formatting section, so wherever this is written, he told me all of them. Okay, if I had done match case and did Find All, then it is saying that it is not there anywhere. Suppose I am here, you understand its meaning, right? I do this and did control A, did control F, and after that now I search. When I do Find All, then look, it has searched and told me because now this graft is in capital letters, okay, so in this way you can find out anything, you can find out anything, it means if you are not able to find something, there is a number, there is a name, you have found out and now you have to find that thing, then what will you do, you can use control F and find any thing inside your data, after that you get the thing that let’s say you have this. Is it Craft? You have to write something else in its place or Creations have to be written instead of Creations. Ok, if you want to change anything then first either find it and then change it or you can directly replace it. You do the same thing, you press Control H and it opens directly to the replaceable one. In the other wise, you can also go to Replace with Control F. The thing is the same, okay, first of all we need to find Craft, that is, Find Vt means in whose place you have to go. I have to make changes. I have to change the logistics solution of the bytes. I have written the solution here. OK, my caps luck was on. The solution is fine. Match case is also fine. I have done that, remove whatever case or match case, remove the match case. If you feel like I do, something is written differently everywhere, then you can turn on the match case, otherwise you can remove it. Now I have to replace it. From the solution, I have done the solution and if I want, look here, find all, where are they, because it was a workbook, I should have done the sheet, and when I came here and find all, then these two solutions are written, and now I want to replace all, then it is saying that two replacements have been done, and look, now these are the solutions here, earlier there were solutions here, okay, so in this way you can also do the replacement. It is very easy, first inside Find What, write what to change, which word to change, and inside replace with, write what you want to change. Okay, ok, let’s do one more thing. Suppose, I take some random data like this and inside it, I gave any color like this, gave it yellow color. Now suppose I am not liking it, I am not liking this yellow color, so I selected this data, did control H and then After I replace, first erase these, erase them because then they will cause problem. Format set means we can also search the formatting. If suppose I will search and tell the formatting first, after that I will replace and tell. Suppose I just want to know where my data is written in yellow. So what will you do? You will go here to format and from here go to fill, choose yellow color and do OK and find. All sorry, sorry, sorry, sorry, find all, so it told me where all my data is in yellow, you can see, it has made a selection here and told about all of them, okay, I accidentally replaced all of them with only the empty one, so I do it again, it got clicked by mistake, after that let’s control A, like suppose I had accidentally replaced it and this replaced one was empty here and here. There was no format on it, so that’s why he left those cells empty. Okay, so you can understand how effectively it works. Now suppose wherever there is yellow color, what have I given in the Find What? Now I have to replace it with something, so I can replace it. I checked the change here. Let’s take the green color and go to the font and make it bold. Make it white. Then the preview will also come and it will look like this. If you do replace all then see that your entire data has been replaced, wherever it was in your yellow color, it has made changes there. You do not have to do anything, you go to control A and see, if you write something, it will appear here that you want to make a change, then do it here, but if you want to change some formatting, then do it here. Now see, whatever is written is also visible first, now it is already visible here, now what do I have to do from here first, in clear format, this is green. If I want to change this too then I took it here fill green font bold and I have to change this thing ok and what to change inside the format I just have to change the fill color to red ok rest is ok so I did replace all, now I am not able to find it out because even I have not understood what is formatting so I chose format from the cell, I took it from inside this cell ok replace all then it did six replacements. Now we know why it has done six replacements because there is date format inside it, we had told it what is this format, it is journal color, not only colors are formatted, your numbers are also formatted, now like here it is, it is a number format in itself, it is a different format, so it did not change, here it was text, here there were formats, it changed it, okay, so here it should have changed these also, we converted them into values. Okay, so in this way you can use Find and Replace very effectively. You can change anything anywhere, whether it is your value text or any kind of formatting. So here we have completed our Find and Replace and Find and Replace. As soon as I complete the Find and Replace, I can say that the major thing which is our home tab, we have almost completed the home tab. Now we We will move towards our basic formula because it is very important to do that. As soon as we get the formula, our grip in Excel will get stronger, so now let us do our formula. We are going to start the formula from the statistic formula. First of all, you get the sum. You have already done it. I told you about its shortcut key, so you will enter Alt equal to two here, then you will see that your sum has come and just double tap. You can drag it from here and just double tap it, then you will see your answers. Now let’s talk about the average. What is the average? First of all, I will tell you another way to calculate the sum. Like we did it like this, here we get the sum, here we also get the average and we also get the count and this is the formula we are going to apply. Secondly, all these formulas are going to be applied in the same way as the sum is calculated, only your calculation will change. What is the average? As you might have heard, now let’s see, RF Sharma has 90 in one. He is very good but in English he has 27, in Maths he has only 10 and in Science he has 47, so on an average, how many marks does A R V Sharma have? It is very normal. Let me give you an example, like if you watch cricket, if you watch this sport, then you know that there are six balls in one over, now it can happen. On some balls he may have hit a six and on some balls he may not have done anything, then after that an average comes that how many runs we have scored in a particular over, so that is the average which we are going to calculate here. If you want to calculate the average, you will apply the formula Equals to Average tab, after that number one, number two is coming in the same way as it comes in the formula of even, that is why now we will give the range here. No, the reason is because we have already done the sum, so why are we giving the range here, you enter it, after that you can double tap from here, you will get all the answers, you can check whether this is the correct answer or not, you take your number here, see how much is its average, see, this is the answer here, after that you get the maximum minimum, maximum minimum means this. Suppose you have these four subjects of RO Sharma There are marks and now you want to know how many maximum marks he got and how many minimum marks he got. The method of applying them is exactly the same, just what you have to do is to write the sum directly, what is there in the average, what is there in the average, you have to write the average directly, but in maximum and minimum you have to remember one small thing that what we call maximum in short is max, then whatever formula is given will be called max and what we call minimum in short. If there is Min, then the formula used here will be Min formula, so here we will tap equals to max, this is also saying the same thing, number one, number two, number one, number two, means we have to give the range, enter it, it will give it, it will tell what is the maximum, see, if you do not give the correct range then no matter how correct the formula is, the formula will be called wrong, if the range itself is wrong then you will get wrong answers too, hence you have to give the range carefully. Ok, let’s set the minimum, tap as per your wish, after that, take all the numbers and enter, then your minimum will also come from here and just double tap it, then you will get the answer from here, you can check, like suppose I check in this only, then which number is your biggest inside this, 74 68 27 32 74, then your answer is 74 and which is the smallest, which is 27, so come here. Gaya Your 27 Okay, so here we have done four formulas, what is the sum average, maximum and minimum, let’s move forward to the count, we will have to learn things inside the count, a little bit, so we take a sheet of three here and call it statistics here, okay, we delete it, here we come with the three, so we bring it here, so that’s what we have with the three, let’s go now, what are we going to understand in the three. We are going to understand the three formulas and how they work, we are also going to understand which formulas are we going to do here, are we going to do the count formula, what is the count basically, we are telling you by counting, we are telling you by counting, so look at the data you have in the count, what are the things you have inside the data entry, either you have numbers or you have text or characters, I can speak text or characters, okay so. What all do you get inside the numbers? Some values ​​come , whatever the values ​​are, or you get the date, or your percentage, or your time, that too is written in the format of numbers or I have already written your date. Okay fine, so we count all these things inside the number. Whatever is left inside the text goes inside the text. Also, I can write this, the non-MT cell which is empty is empty inside it. So if there is nothing, then we can say non MT cell or text or character, it goes, so suppose you have some data here, there is some data, there is a list and inside it, number, text, number, text, some empty text is also given, now you have to check how many numbers are there inside it, then you can apply count formula, if you want to know only the numbers, then what does Count A do? Count A also counts the things with count and also counts the things with text, like I will tell you a small one. Let me tell you this in tabular form. See, if I talk about count, I talk about count a and then I talk about count blank. These are the three formulas that I am going to give you here. Okay, see what count does for you. Count only counts numbers. Date percentage time counts these. Count a counts whom. It counts all the things that count, what count formula does, apart from that and text. Character or I can say non MT cell but at the same time count black like its name is how many blanks are there so call it blank cell or call it force or call it MT cell it counts it okay so now see we will see it according to the formula meaning we will see it by applying a practical formula so that there is better clarity Now I want to know what to know here how many if we assume this is the marksheet of my marks if I have to just count the numbers if I am here I will count the number and here it comes, four is four numbers are written, that means I have done all the entries, right, if I have written three, then that means either there will be some text there or it will be MT, only then it is showing three, it means we need to check, so in this way, you can apply it in any situation, we have tabbed the count, inside it, just did not write the number and wrote the value. The method of applying is exactly the same, you have to give the range, you have to enter, three numbers are written, now double tap it, now where it is two, you have understood that the person in front has given only two papers, that is why all the marks obtained in the exam are written, the rest are not written, whereas when it comes to count A, see here you have understood, we have to check only the numbers, when it comes to count A, now count A will also count the numbers and It will count the text also. Suppose someone is absent, if he has written absent, then if he has written that text, then he will count that too. In such a case, what result did you get? Did you get the result that I will come to know that I have not entered by mistake? If I have entered, whether marks have been written or absent, I have entered but if I have not entered somewhere, then I will know, that is why we have the formula of Count A. We will put it here, we will give range to him and he will enter, then here he told me that there are four entries, so now I know as soon as I see three entries here, that there is no entry here, seeing three entries here, I realize that there is no entry here, as soon as I see three entries, I realize that there is no entry here, why is it not because, either see, I must have written the number, if any student has come, his marks must have been written, if someone has not come, then I must have written absent for him, but in some case, I If nothing is written then that is my default and this count is one which is telling me the numbers as well and is also telling me the text. The count is only telling me the numbers. Now the count is blank, it will tell you the blanks, tab it, hit enter, then here it has told you that wherever there were blanks, it has told you that only these three will be blanks. So looking at this from here, you get a lot of things. See what the count blank means. Zero is blank, four is blank, that is, all the entries are there, out of which three are numbers, one is your text, see, there is no blank here, four entries have been made and all four are numbers, here one of yours is blank, three entries have been made and all three are numbers, here you have one blank , three entries are made and all three are numbers, even after looking at this, I have not even seen it, trust me, I told you just by looking at this, what is here You must have kept the entries because whatever formula you apply, the result comes out in the same way. You can find out all these things from that result, that is why we apply any formula, so here we completed our four formulas, these were Sum Average, Maximum and Minimum and the other one which we completed, which is count, count A and count blank. After this, we move ahead with our cell referencing. Cell Referencing: What is cell referencing? Basically, till now, whenever I had taught you the formulas, I had explained one thing in the formula, what I had explained was that the formulas which start with equal to two, how do we write them, so for once, let us repeat that thing once so that you can remember the thing and understand why we learn cell referencing. Here we are basically looking at the answer to why we are doing this. We are going to talk about the topic, why are we doing cell referencing? Okay, so see, whenever we write a formula, we write three things inside the formula. We will write three things inside the formula. One is where we write the cells, one is where we write the numbers and one is when we write the text. The cells which are there are always keep changing. Now what is the meaning of keep changing? It will keep changing as we drag, as if something like a1 is written above and When I drag, it will be a2 a3 a4 a5. What are the numbers? What are the numbers? They are fixed. If you write a number, like we learned in Total, if you write a number, then that number remains as it is and the text also remains fixed. Whatever you have written manually, how will you write the number and text manually? If you write by giving a cell, then it will go into keep changing, that is the cell. If you manually write any number and text, then they are always fixed. Okay, one more thing is added to the text. Whenever you write in a formula, you write it inside a double inverted comma. You do not write it directly. Whenever you write a text inside a formula, you write it in a double inverted comma. Now tell me one thing, the number is fixed, the text is fixed, it is keep changing, so suppose I have any such reports etc. She has to make a place If I have applied the formula, will I keep applying the formula everywhere because sales are ever changing and suppose I ever have to fix it, if there is such a situation, then we have to fix it, then we can fix it, but we can fix it manually, we will have to fix it separately, when to fix it, when not to fix it, what is the need to fix it, this is the learning we call sale referencing that we do in this way. We will learn when we have to fix our cell, when not to do it, why we have to do it and how to do it. We learn all these things inside cell referencing. So now you have understood that we will learn in cell referencing. In cell referencing we are learning that when we have to fix our cell and when we have to keep it in keep changing. Okay, now let us take the topic of referencing a little further. Cell referencing. Okay, let’s talk about cell referencing. How many types of cell referencing do you have? There is no need to remember it but as a la for general knowledge or if you understand these few topics then you will understand things in a little detail. Just for that there are three types of reference. The first one is relative reference, the second one is absolute reference and the third one is mixed reference. Okay now what is relative reference ? What you are talking about till now in reference is relative reference, meaning keep changing. Whatever I will talk about here, I will talk about sales, I will not talk about numbers and taxes about anything else, I will talk about sales because whatever work we are doing, we are doing it for sales, so what comes under relative reference, keep changing, it will keep changing. What is there in absolute, fix everything, fix everything. This is what we were going to talk about in referencing, what to fix and when to keep changing, then in relative, always keep changing, in absolute, everything has to be fixed, now what is mixed, what is mixed and mixed means it does relative plus absolute, now both are fighting among themselves, change everything, no, fix everything, no, change everything, fix everything, so now me. Tell me the solution to this. If there is a fight between these two, then what will be the solution? Tell me, if one person is saying everything, I just want to explain, one person is saying change everything and another person is saying fix everything, then in such a situation, if you have to give a solution, what will you give? Fix half of the solution and keep half of it changing, otherwise what, do 50 50 brother, half of you agreed. Half of yours, assuming the work of both is done, then we call such a reference a mixed reference. Lad, this is a part of the theory. You may be wondering why we are reading all this but it is very important. Now, as soon as we do the practical, you will say that it has come out so lightly and it is very important to learn it. You will understand why it is so important now. Let’s do one more topic. After that, we will move towards the practical. What is the small topic and what is the topic? It comes that you just have to remember one thing, this is a cell, this is a sieve cell, so C is the column and one is the raw and what does a cell get? It is formed by R in the column plus and when we give a cell inside a formula, we give a cell inside the formula, then the names of the complete cells come, you will see that if you apply the formula of sum, then a1 to a10, then those are the names of the complete cells, you just had to keep this in mind, now let’s move towards the formula. After that, you will understand all these things. We come inside the cell reference. The first thing that comes to us is the relative reference. What does the relative reference say? Look, I have to put the sum here. Tell me the way to put the sum. Here, how can I put the sum? I can put it by doing Alt equal to two, I can enter and double tap it. The answer will come. Till now we have not put so much mind into it, now we will put a little bit of mind into it so that we can understand what is happening and what should we do. Have understood this thing, what had to be done till now has been done, but the thing has been understood, which cell is your h3, what is your h3, what is the even you want inside h3, what is the even you want, what is the even, you want from d3 till g3 here, okay what is this h4, what is the even inside h4, what is the need from d4 to g4, then what will come, h5 will come, then what will be the even, from d5 to g5 and so on. Suppose I reach h100, then what will I want, what will be the even, what will be the d. 100 to g100, tell me one thing, the h3 here is also changing, h3 h4 h5 h and along with that, the simal new, along with that, you are seeing that d3 d4 means along with that, these are also increasing, so what is this whole scenario? So when the whole scenario is changing, we have to change, so we don’t need to fix anything, that’s why what we were doing here was taking the formula and double tapping and my formula was being applied all over the place, you see d3 to g3, if suppose you are on h9, then this is d9 g9, if you suppose you are on h16, then d16 and g16, so there was no need here, now we will do one more. Let’s take an example, which is going to be our absolute reference, so see, we are going to calculate the percentage of these marks within the absolute reference, so here you learn two things at the same time and also calculating the percentage, but my main focus will be to teach you cell referencing, along with that, learning the percentage will become automatic, okay, so let’s first understand how to calculate the percentage, okay and then Later we will understand this scenario a little with the study of A. Suppose there are students here, let me make five students, this is your A student, this is your B student, this is your C student, this is your D student and this is your E student, okay now here the marks of A student are 200, marks of B student are 300 marks of C student are Marks of 350 students came to 250 and end marks came to 275. Okay, these marks have come. Now suppose you have to find out the percentage of all these students and how many subjects they study. If they study four subjects, then how do you have to find out the marks. What is the formula of percentage? What does Total Marks Obtain mean? The number of marks obtained, so let us put the number on the right and upon. There is an exam of total marks, we will keep it below, now tell me one thing, how many are going to be below the total marks A, 400 because there are four subjects, one subject is of 100 marks, then you will have to see the marks above 400. If suppose I calculate this percentage of A for A, then how will I calculate it, then how do I calculate the percentage for A, 200 / 400 * 100, so here is my Now here we are in Excel, so even if we do not put 100, it will be fine because we have applied the format of percentage. If I calculate the total percentage for b then how will it be 300 / 400. If I calculate for c then how will it be 350 / 400. If I calculate for d then how will it be 250 / 400 and if we calculate here for e then what will come out is 275. / 400 So tell me one thing for everyone, we have calculated the percentage in this way and you have come to know how to calculate this percentage, now we will travel a little, whatever we do, we should do a little traveling in it, we will understand the things, let’s travel, let’s travel for a second, so first of all, what did you take, first of all, what do you have to take, the number of any individual, then it means you took the marks, okay and the marks were taken for a, tell me one thing. So there is a different mark for B. There is a different mark for C. There is a different mark for D. There is a different mark for E. So what are the marks? Keep changing and keep changing is happening again and again. What is the keep changing thing? Cell number text. You can write these three things in your formula. What is the keep changing? If it is in the cell, then it means to choose the cell. Here, OK for divide divide. We have put slash below we need total marks total marks how many are there 400 here how many are 400 here how many are 400 here how many are 400 here and how many are 400 here so that means is a fixed thing now tell me one thing we can write three things in the formula we can write cell we can write number and we can write text 400 text is there otherwise this one gets cut off now let’s talk about these two The number is always fixed. The number is always fixed, so either we write the number directly or we write a cell which we have to fix manually. In both the scenarios, our answers will come because what we need is to fix that number below, that’s why we can write the number below or we can also give a cell. Okay, so now we will apply our formula in both these scenarios and find out our answer. Let’s do it here. First of all, I take the total, Alt equal to enter and after that I double tap here, so here our totals are here, now it comes to the percentage, first of all we will do it, which is the easy way, whatever we know is fixed, we will write the number, it is always fixed, so we do the same, so equals to, first of all, we will have to take the marks because we knew the thing. The marks are being changed, we have taken the comma, sorry slash, after that what will we write, we will write our 400 and enter, then see you have got the percentage, just double tap it, see, double tap, we are able to do h32, for here obviously we need h33, so we will do h33 because it is in the keep changing, now you know but suppose I say that we have this cell, marks are written inside it and now we We are going to calculate this percentage through cell, that is, I put equals to total here and slash it and after that I give this cell and hit enter, still my percentage is correct, now I double tap, so do we have all the percentage here? No, why is it not there because if I double tap the number g30 in the divide, then it will go to the key changing. Now after g30. Is it g31 ? Is it science? If you divide it by science then only the value will come. Do you divide it by 34? Will you divide it by 37 47 93? See, the values ​​will come in the same way because it is keep changing. Look, after g31, it becomes g31, g32 becomes 33, then tell us one thing that you should not do this. Even if your answer is here, whatever you have to write, take it as h. You have to write h32 diva ba g30, you are here, suppose this is your h36, still divided by g30 is required, you assume this here, suppose your h is 42, still divided by g30 is required, then g30 is g30 g30, below everyone else is g30, you know this thing, everyone needs 400 below, so what will you do in such a situation, you will fix g30, now let’s learn how to fix it, this small thing. The concept is that we will learn how to fix any thing, here we come to our third part and from here we will learn how we fix. Suppose you have to fix any thing, any thing has to be fixed, we are learning to fix the cell. Inside the cell, let me assume there is a cell, then I will tell you how to fix these two. Look, the symbol used for fixing is dollar, now dollar is also above the fourth key, so Do not put dollar manually with shift, you have to press press f4 and there are some systems in which f4 will not work. If f4 is not working in your system, then hold the function, press and hold the function and then press f4, then it will be okay. a is also fixed and one is also fixed that means column is also fixed raw is also fixed the thing which has dollar in front of it is fixed like suppose if I write dollar a1 then here what you fixed fixed this column now when you drag it what will come # a2 is sorry # I am saying dollar a3 dollar a4 a will remain fixed if suppose I write a one then now when this would happen when now this What would have come if we had dragged? If we had dragged, what would have come? If suppose I am dragging it from this side, then it would have come ‘Bud 1 S Dove D Dove’. Why because I have not fixed ‘A’ then ‘A’ will keep changing but if I have fixed ‘One’ then it will remain ‘One As It Is’ so basically the thing which has a dollar in front of it becomes that thing. Okay, so here you don’t memorize it. What do people do, they memorize it so many times? If you press f4 then just dollars should come here. Hey why should they come and why should it be fixed? We have to learn this. Now we will apply the formula again inside the cell reference. See equals two, we will take our marks and divide. Now we need g30. Tell me one thing in g30 whether I have to fix g or fix 30 or fix both. Let’s see, you press f4, you tell me one thing, g30 was required completely no matter which cell. Go in, you wanted divided by g30, then g has to be fixed and 30 also has to be fixed, so I took the cell, pressed F4, dollars appeared in front of both, that means both are fixed, just double tap it and in this way your answer will come, okay, in this way we can fix our cells, it is very important not to memorize at all , if there is any data doubt anywhere, please let me know in the comment section, it is okay Let us now move towards the third reference, now you have come to relative, absolute has come, then mix has come, okay, there is no need to panic, but still we will do it a little more carefully. Okay, if you have understood this one, then after this you will be able to make any kind of formula for yourself. Here too, if we have to find out the percentage, then percentage. You already know the method of calculation, so here we will calculate the percentage, take equals to marks, divide by 400, write whatever you want, take this, take this and fix it with f4, you know I want the whole cell, so you have fixed g61 here, now enter, after that you double tap, you will get the correct answer, now you have the next thing, this is a case study in the way. We divide our marks by the total number of marks, in the same way I say that what is my percentage of Hindi within this 189, what is my percentage of English within this 189, so if you want to find out something like this, then you will have to apply the formula here, now like what we were doing there, we keep as many marks as we got, above, so that means, if I have 41 marks in Hindi, then I will put above in And Upon. The total marks here is how much is the total marks 189 so I will keep 189 ok next this is your Hindi, after that you have to find out English then 39 diva is 189 after that 75 / 189 then find out like this now look what is 41 41 is your d3 so basically what are you doing d3 divided by what is your h63d was 63 this and upon In h 63 if we talk about next then d63 / 63 divide by h 63 that means your h 63 is fixed h 63 is coming in everyone everyone needs it otherwise if you drag then it should remain fixed that h 63 is coming in everyone so let’s now apply the formula so we will apply the formula here How many marks are there in Equals to Hindi this is the comma because d63 Then e63 then f63 so it is changing but the one below is h63d 63 / h 63 should have been this e63 / so look here also here also h is 63 if I assume that I am going here then here also h is 63 tell me one thing if you have to do this for 27 75 68 79 then will you check according to 189 then you will make it for 249 According will check the meaning, understand the meaning of this , it means that suppose you were doing this one here or this one here, f e your 73 so what you wanted here is 73 divided by h 73 if I talk about this then what do you want here d69 upon h 69 if I talk about this then what do you want d65 h65 and now yes ya to hindi ka nikala ka karenge then f65 / h65 so In this way it will keep increasing, so now I understood one thing that it is true that here we need h 63 but here again we need h 64, here we need h65, here we need h66, that means this h is remaining fixed 63 64 65, these are changing, so do not fix the thing which is changing, right now you have fixed both of them in the formula, that is why the problem is coming, don’t fix them at all. We do not fix the things which are in keep changing, that is why now we will apply the formula here again, so see, you remove this and after that apply the formula, take equals to marks, divide, now we will take 189, h will take 63, we will press f4 so many times that we get the desired desired result. Now what is our desired result that we have to fix h. But do not fix 63 because it will become 64, 65 will become 66 , then keep pressing f4, keep doing this until the dollar appears in front of h. No one will remember whether to press two times or three times. If you are remembering this, then you will not be able to make any formula by yourself, that is why this is being done in such detail so that you can make the formula by yourself, so here you are wondering why h. Why is 63 not being fixed and if h has to be fixed then dollar should come in front of h then just keep pressing F4 as many times as the dollar comes in front, I see, I press it again, I am gone, it is coming on both, it is coming in front of 63, that means 63 is fixed once more, it is done, no memorization, it has to be done like this, enter it, now you drag it, drag it. After check below this 63 63 h 6363 correct and now drag it for a second now look I am here I this is your g70 so h70 is coming below d70 it is not so h 63 is here h70 is coming here so h is 74 is coming that means now your answers are absolutely accurate so what did you do here you fixed half of it and left half of it so it is the same It was when I explained to you in the mixed section that half should be fixed. What is the solution? Fix half of it and leave the other half for keep changing. Okay, so this is what we have done here, so this is where our cell referencing ends. If there is any doubt anywhere, please let me know in the comment section. In the live class, we do it in a lot of detail, but we know that here we have a little restriction of time, so here we have done it in as much detail as we wanted. Still, if there is any doubt, please let me know in the comment. Section and let us move ahead towards our next formula, so now the formulas that come to you are tax formula, how are tax formulas which are related to tax and let me tell you one thing about these formulas, all the formulas that you will see are very easy to apply, without doing anything, we have just told the text that if we want to make any change then in which text we have to make it but then what is the difficulty in it . So there is nothing but you have to keep in mind that whenever you have a situation, you should remember that this formula will be applied in this situation, the challenge is only that we have to remember that oh we have this situation, now we have to apply this formula, there is no problem in applying, it is very easy to apply, okay, first of all we will directly take the three formulas together and talk about the three formulas. Okay ma’am three yes yes three suppose you have some data like this a one let’s take some data here ok suppose you have some data here I write abc 1 2 3 xyz this is your ID some code is written now suppose you take this abc from inside it each meaning here there are 100 entries from inside that you want to extract the initial three words you understand this we can extract any text How to read, we read from left to right. Okay, now let me quickly explain from the left side. Now from which side you have to do this extraction. If you have to do it from the left side, then what formula will you apply? Will you apply the left formula? What do you think in the left formula? You will tell from where to extract from. From here, we have to extract from this text. Suppose a1a, so you have written a1, after that how much has to be extracted. A, B, C, three letters. If you want to extract, then you write three here and your answer will come, in the same way, suppose you have to do 11 will come at number 9 10 11, that’s fine, so you will not be able to extract it, how will you not be able to extract it, because it will go from left to there, you cannot write this, extract the number nine, if you write nine numbers, it will extract all the numbers and give it, then you cannot apply the left formula from here, you cannot go from the left side, now from which side will you go, you will go from the right side,

that is why what formula will you use? You will put right, now when you go from the right side, what will you get , which number is it on? One, first tell me which text you want to change, you have to change it in a1 and on the right side, how many texts do you want, if you want three, then you have done three, then your answer will come to you, third comes to you, what does mid say in the middle? It says in the middle and if there is a middle, then we will not decide the middle, that means it will not decide the middle itself, we will tell you which middle has to be decided. middle you left right if you don’t remember both then middle can also work ok what do you do in middle first of all tell which text you have to change a1 has to be changed then tell where will be the start from where will be your middle start from suppose I am starting from 1 2 3 4 four so I have made four after that how many extractions do you have to do let’s say 1 2 3 three If I want to extract, I made it three, then my answer will be 1 2 3. Okay, so the middle works in this way. It’s totally up to you, what you have to extract, depends on your situation, what you have to extract and according to that, you will apply your formula, so let’s apply the formula. See, here we will go to the formula. We will apply the left formula for ourselves. To apply the left formula. We will write equals to left, tab ups, we will tap equals to left, we will give text, we have come here, comma number charge, which is written Na C H A R S, its meaning is How many characters will you go here, how many characters will you have to take from there, you have to take a, you have to take r, and you have to take that dot, I told you that here the spaces are counted, so you have to take m, you have to take r, you have to take that dot, then how many numbers have become, they have become three numbers, you will enter three, so here it is, now you double tap all the initial numbers that you have, they are there in keep changing. You already understand that, but you have got all of them, okay, just like that, now suppose I have to extract all this from the right side, M A O K L M So look, it has come with a dash, I said no, it counts, okay, you read it, Oops, Oops, Oops, I’m so sorry, I’m so sorry, you double tap it, you will get all the answers. Let’s talk about the middle, what do we call the middle in short, when we say mid, then the formula you think is the mid formula. Equals to mid tab. After that, the text will come. What will the text come? Here is your text, okay, this is your text, this is what it means in which. We have to make changes. If we have to make changes inside this text , then this text came. Comma start number, start number, what does it mean, where to start that middle, then a One second, how many characters do you need, comma four, okay, enter 5678 and just tap it, okay, then it would have come to you in this way, if you had done four here, then it would have counted the dashes and given the answer from 5 to 6, because it counts the dashes also, and it starts giving you numbers from whatever you start the middle stew, so you just have to pay attention to this small thing. We have to keep that in the middle, the rest of the things are directly in the left and right, so here we have completed three formulas: The first one is left, the second one is right and the third one is mid. Okay, let’s move next towards our length. If we have to apply the length formula, suppose you have an ID. The ID is written in this way. Okay, you have made 1000 entries and you have the data. Now you want to check whether all the IDs are written correctly or not. Look, if there is any problem in writing, we cannot tell right now how we will check or what we will do. But we know that our ID is only of 12 numbers or 13 numbers only. Just like you know that there will be only 10 digits in the contact details, you know that there will be only 10 digits in the contact details. So suppose somewhere I tell you that here 11 digits are written, here A is written, nine digits are written, then you will not even check what is written, you will tell me straight on the face that it is wrongly written, so this is how you came to know, you checked the length because its length is fixed, the length of the number is fixed, that is, it is of 10 digits, so whatever. If it is of 10 digits, whether it is more or less, then obviously it is wrong, otherwise we check the length in this way. Now we call the length in short. What do we say in our formula? If we say AA lane, then we will put the lane formula here. The suffix was not supposed to come here, we will put the lane formula. Equals to Length tab and what to do in it. Always listen to the formula, do not listen to anyone else, what does the formula say? If you want to take the text, then you take the text, you have taken the text and after that you enter, it will come here and just double tap it, then your complete length will come. Okay, let’s move ahead with this, here we have completed the length, after that comes to you. Trim formula. What does the trim formula tell you? The trim formula tells you that suppose you have some data which has a lot of unwanted spaces inside it. What are the unwanted spaces? I am writing here that there are unwanted spaces, so if you have to remove those unwanted spaces, then now you will sit down and start doing it one by one, then how time consuming is the process, one by one. What will we do in such a case, in such a case, we will apply trim formula here so that all the unwanted spaces will be removed, so you apply equal trim here, tab, after that give that text and hit enter, then in this way all your unwanted spaces will be removed from here. After that, double tap, then all the unwanted spaces there will be removed. Okay, so in this way, when Whenever you get any data, like any data comes from a client, in which data cleaning has to be done, then trim formula is used a lot in data cleaning, because no matter how the data comes out there, suppose sometimes you copy something from the website and bring it from anywhere, then this mistake happens there too, then how can you correct that entire data? You can correct that entire data in such a way that you apply a trim formula and then After this, all your unwanted spaces will be automatically removed. Okay, now let us move towards our next formula, which is not the text formula, we will do the text formula later, after that we will do lower upper and proper. Now what is this lower upper proper? Basically, let me tell you a little because we are going to do three formulas together, let us do a small overview. See here what we are going to do in lower. We will do upper and one we will do what is lower upper and proper one second prop what is lower like your alphabets A B C D this is lower what is upper what is your A B C D this is your upper and what is proper if I have to write tanu then T A N N U S I N G H A L So see the first letter first letter what came first letter capital came and all the other smalls came that is your proper which is your sentence Case, what do we call this? We call it sentence case. If you want lower case, you want all the letters in small letters , then use lower formula. If you want all the letters in capital, then use upper formula. But if you want everything, that is, you can use proper formula. If you want it in sentence case, then you will go here to the text formula. And after that, for a second, look here, all the things are now in sentence case, then you will use small letters. You can do this for small letters, don’t write small, you have to write lower, tap will give the text, meaning what changes are to be made inside it, enter it, then your formula will come and just double tap it, all your formulas have come, in the same way, if suppose you have to do all the things in capital letters , then equals to upper tab, after that you will give the text and enter, then here you have all the things. If it has come in capital letters, then you can convert it to capital letters in this way. When it comes to the proper means sentence case, then already you can see that it is in all the capital letters, so now we have to convert it to sentence case, so to convert it to sentence case, we will apply the formula of equals to proper, tap, after that give the text and enter, then here in this way you will Look, all these things have come in the sentence case, easily the data has come automatically in this manner, so this is what we have completed here, three formulas, the first one is lower formula, the other one is upper formula and the third one is proper formula. Now let us move a little further and let’s see what other things are there. You get tex join flash fill is also of the same. There is an alternative which is not available in every version. It will be available in the versions after 2019. It is very easy and first of all, let us move towards our formula. Suppose you have two types of text and here we will read one more topic, so read it a little carefully. Just give me a minute. Suppose you have two texts here, you have to join both of them, then you can apply the formula like text join. As its name says, its function is also text join, text join, text join, tub came, now read it because I will explain something in it and after that we will apply the formula, first comes the delimiter, then comes the ignore f mt and then comes the text one text two text thi, it goes on. Okay, you have read this, now we will understand it, first after that we will do something, so see, what is a delimiter, it is very important to understand, okay daily pea, this will come in more formulas later on. While going on, understand this very carefully. It is easy to understand. Okay, look, what is a daily pea? It is a thing that joins two things, just like we read in English. Not a conjunction that joins two things. So, in the same way, it is a daily pea. Suppose I write like this Tanu Singhal. Now, there is a space here, a small so t space, what is a daily meter? Suppose I write here tan single, so this is the underscore, what is this daily meter, I write tanu comma single, so this is the comma. What is this delimiter, I write Tanu Sl single, so what is this slash which is there, what is this daily meter, what is daily pea, then what is daily meter, which is connecting any two things, even if there is no space, then space is also your daily meter, okay, you just have to pay more attention to the space thing, that if you put anything because of space, whenever you apply the formula, then you can get confused in the space thing. If yes, then do not get confused in the thing with space, space is also your daily pea. If you want to join two things and there is a space between them, then that space will also be called your delimiter. Okay, now let’s apply the formula here. Equals to takes join tab. After that, we need daily pea. What is daily pea? What have we given daily pea? Suppose R Sharma, how do we want to join it, we want to join it with a space. Okay, now look, I had explained to you that you can either give cell or Then you can give number or text or character along with text, I have said character along with text and character. Right, so the space in text and character is like a character, so whenever we write something in text character, in what thing we write, we write in double inverted comma. Right, then we will turn on double inverted comma. Now for space, we will tell him that if I want a space, then I will give one space, how much space is needed, I will also give one space. Look, sir, I went ahead of him. After this, I will turn off the double inverted commas, I will put commas. Now what are you asking next? True False is never to be memorized. It always happens like this. Whatever formula you are applying, True False is coming in it. Suppose now this data is very small, if later on the data becomes very big and there is an MT cell in between, then do you want it to be ignored or do you want that MT cell to also be included, then there will be a lot of space in between, then what kind of answer do you want? Obviously if it is included, if the MT cell is included then it will become empty, nothing will be shown, then you will make true, false, okay. Now there is comma, text one, text two, then text one, what to add, OK, text two, what to add, enter it, so look here, Aarav Sharma, one is connected to it, if let’s say , I will show this thing by doing it one more time here, text join, don’t get confused, tap delimiter, now I have to add comma, so I put a comma in the double inverted comma, after that I closed the double inverted comma, then put a comma, after that I made true, now you know that this is done twice. Why is the comma coming once again? The comma is to move ahead from that formula and the comma in the middle is for the delimiter. This is called the true sense of the formula that you are able to understand its true sense. Now you are not memorizing the comma and after that you have taken the comma and then the text. If you enter then Rohan comma, okay, it is done in this way. Let us double tap the same formula and come here. Now we have to do a lot of processing inside it too. We had to look at all the things and came up with an easy version of the same, but the easy version works on a little pattern, so we will talk about that also, let us move ahead, we do the same work with flash fruit also. See, any particular work can be done in more than one way in Excel. It is totally up to us that which thing we are remembering at that time, which one we understand better in doing, which one we think is easy and which one we can do in the best way. In that way, we do this work, okay, now where do you get this feature, it is found here in the flash fill inside the data tab, okay, but we will do it with the shortcut key and its shortcut key is control e, what is control e, I write it along with it so that we always remember control e, okay, the flash result works by using control e. Now a little talk about how the flash fill works. And after that we will use flash fill as I told you that the flash fruit works on a pattern like flash f. Okay, now see what is the function of this pattern. It works in two ways, one is input and as soon as we need an output, now we can call input output as question and then we need answer. The thing is the same that you give a question, that means you give an input and from that you get the output, that means you give a question, from that you get If the answer is found, then there should be a pattern in giving the question. There should be similar questions because you need an answer by dragging and there should be a pattern in taking the answer. If there is no pattern then you will not be able to get the answer. The only thing is that if I tell you that after looking at this data then the flash result will definitely work in it. It is possible that the flash result may not work on it, then there is no such guarantee of the flash result but if it If you have understood the pattern then it will give you the answer. If you have not understood the pattern then you will not get the answer. Now let us give you an example of this. Let us assume that you will understand the pattern of the question. Then you will understand the pattern of the answer. What is the pattern of the question that on one side all the first names are there and on the other side are the last names. So are they written pattern wise? Yes, the same work has to be done in all of them, not first name last name first name last name first name last name first name last. Name is something different, something is changing, not changing, neither the pattern means the same, what is the answer to the question, what is the answer, we need Aarav Space Sharma, Rohan Space, Aditya Space, Mehta, Vikram Space, Malhotra, Rajat Space, Bansal, Arjun Space, Thakur, same is required for all, pattern is being formed in the question, and from the same, when we have to extract the answer, a pattern is being formed in it too, so when the pattern is being formed, Will the flash fruit work here? Yes, of course. Now how does the flash fruit work? How does the flash fruit work? You have to give him a command, you give him a command, explain it to him, sometimes it is not possible with one command, then you can also give two commands or three commands, but from my personal experience, I tell you that whenever he had to work, he would do it in one command and when he did not have to work, no matter how many commands you give him, it is okay if he does not work, then you will give him a command here, after giving one command, he will do your work. It will make it automatic and it will understand the pattern, what do you want the answer to be, then the first command we will write here is A. Okay, as you write, it will come A. A. R. A. Correct is to be written. The first command is you have to give correct . If you do not give correct then the answer will not come. Okay, I have given correct and I have given space here Sharma. Now I do not have to do anything. Come to the cell below and press control E and see your yes, see your answer has come, your answer has come, this is the answer for everyone. I wanted, yes, let’s see one more example, suppose it is the reverse of this. Now think what is the pattern here, think what is the pattern here, what is the pattern here, here is the full name, how is the full name also given, there is a pattern in everyone, Arf space Sharma, Rohan space Iyer Aditya space Mehta Vikram space Malotra Rajat space Bansal Suresh space Reddy, so all these are written in a pattern that there is a name, there is a space, then there is a name for them only we know. What is tex split? In my version of tex split, we are using version 2021. It does not have that formula. Inside 365, you will get that formula. What is tex split? Just like we have joined the text, it says to split the tex, so here we will do this work with flash feel, how will we do it, we will give our commands and after that he will understand now what is the command , what do I want Arav here, so here comes Arav. After that, what is the command that I want Sharma here, then Sharma comes here, okay, after coming here, press control e, after coming here, press control e, and this has done your work, okay, so in this way, we can use the very effect of flash fruit, wherever you want to extract any of your things, you have to do anything, you can use your flash fruit there, so this is your flash fill, we have completed it here, let’s do one more formula here. Let’s make some substitutes. Before substituting, we do one thing. We text the text formula. What does the text formula tell you? There is one thing in the text formula which I have taught you very well. It is going to be used here. It is going to be used here. I always say ‘Bo’. Suppose you want this date given. No, which day was it on that date, just like you don’t write your birthday, we write the birth date and you are asked in interviews etc. that which day was that day, tell me which day it was on that day, tell me, if you want to know this, then how will you tell, see, we will apply the equals to text formula, we will tab the value, what is the meaning of the date, the date has to be given, the meaning by which you want to know, you are asking about the comma format, what is the format? You have to know the format of date according to the date, how is the date written inside the date, D D M M Y Y Y or it is written like this. Now if you want to know the day, then that means you have to write DD, but if you want to write the day completely, then how many times can you write it by writing it four times. Now you have understood how many times D has to be written four times. Now what is D in itself? What is D, is it a number, is it a one? What is text? What is that character? What is text? So there is a text and any text is written in double inverted commas. So here you will turn on double inverted commas. Here you will turn on double inverted commas. You will write D D D D. You will turn off double inverted commas. You will turn off parens and enter. So you will get your answer here. Now you can double tap it, you will get all the answers. What did you do, if you wanted to know the days, let’s say. If you want to know the month , then go to Equals to text tab, after that give the value, meaning give your date, in the format of comma, you write four times mmmmm. When you enter the parenthesis off, then look, it has told which month it is – June, September, July, April, July, November, March. So, you have all the months here, so in this way, you want to get the days. You know the format, you want to get the months, you know the format, you want to get the year. Do you want to get the format written, you know the format, you should know the format and now I have got the format done so well for you, so you know the formatting, why we wrote four times D, why we wrote A, don’t memorize it, people here memorize it, write four times D, the answer will come, write four times A, the answer will come three times M, the answer will come, no, the logic behind it. Now you know the logic behind this, why we write four times only, we three. Why do we write only times? Why do we write only two times? Why don’t we do something directly? Why are we writing at all and why have we put double inverted commas in it? Now you know all these things. So here we have completed our text formula. Now let’s move ahead. Now we will do our substitute formula. Substitute formula. We will do it very easily here. What does the substitute formula say? What is a substitute? What is a substitute? What is my substitute? Someone else has come in my place, today I am teaching you Excel, okay, someone else has come in my place, so he is my substitute, someone else can teach Excel in my place, so that is my substitute, if suppose you are not using Excel, you are using G sheet instead, so goel’s has been replaced and in its place, we can use it. Suppose, you can write with a pencil and you can also write with a pen, but if you have picked up a pen instead of a pencil, then what have you done? Is pen a substitute for pencil or is it meant for writing? Yes, both the tasks are being done by it. Yes, there is a difference but what both the tasks do is only for writing. Neither is pen. Pen is the substitute of pencil. In the same way, if there is something inside the data which we want to change, then we can do it with some substitute formula. Then, Equals to Substitute tab. After that, we have to give the text, then which one should be changed. What is the meaning of the text? What type of change has to be done? Do the commas have to be used in it in a single single because there is not the same change in everyone. If there was the same change in everyone then we would have done this. It will not be able to be dragged. Okay, now we have to tell the old text what to change. 56 78 so 56 78 is the number so you can directly write the comma text. What text do you want to write? Let’s say I want to write here 1 2. 3 So I have to write 1 2 3, I have to do something else, if I don’t understand anything else then just finish it, enter the formula, see if the text is apx600, then you will give it in double inverted commas, p, k, r, you will write exactly the same so that it can understand and, what have to be written in its place, suppose you want to write a b c, then you are writing the because text in double inverted commas, right? If you want to write enter then it has written ABC. Okay, so in this way you can replace anything. Replacement here is this one. Why did it mean that we have substituted? Replace is basically a kind of replace but it is not a complete replace thing because we have to do it differently in each case. If you want to replace a particular thing with a particular thing, then you can do that directly. Okay, this was your substitute formula. Now we will move towards our date and time formula and if we are talking about date, then first of all let us learn that the current Which formula is available for date and current time and which shortcut is available? Shortcut: Yes, you can get your current date and current time directly through the shortcut. If we talk about current date, then you will know the current date. Here we apply the formula to get it. Write today’s today formula, tab it and see, I always say, listen to whose formula or listen to the formula, what are you saying brother, nothing else is required, direct parenthesis. Do it, I will give you the answer, then it’s ok, then if he doesn’t want anything, then don’t give it. Turn off the parentheses. If you enter, then the current date will come. Similarly, if you want to get the current time, you can get the current time. For the current time, you have to use the formula of now. I will tab and it also says, I don’t want anything, just turn off the parentheses, so we turned it off and entered, then it gave me the current, okay, I checked today’s time. Have you just put the formula ? Okay, there is a date here, we have to do the time, so look, it has given me exactly the time. You can check the time formula from here. If you make a little mistake in the date formula, if the time and date of your system are not in the correct way because they are captured, then somewhere, how is it able to find out on its own what date it is and what time it is, then suppose anyone’s answer is wrong here. So please check your time setting, is it accurate, whatever it is will be shown here is fine, so you make sure that in any case, if your answer is coming wrong then the reason for that is in your right corner that your things are not correct here, if things are correct here then your current date and current time will be accurate. In the second method, I will erase this. Let ‘s not erase it. Let’s do it here. If you agree, Take the current date, if you want then control and you have to press the colon control and after pressing the colon, you get the date in this way, then look at what you pressed for this, the control is fixed, just remember that for this we press the colon and for this we press the semi colon, the only difference is, now remember the semicalculus, if you do not remember the semicalculus then remember this, just for this we apply shift. Applying shift means using semicalculus. If we are pressing here control shift semi colon, if the colon one is pressed then basically semi colon will be automatically applied, then your timing will come. Okay, you remember this colon colon control colon, your date has come, control along with shift and put it, then use the colon, then your time will come. So in this method, we find out our current date and current time. Okay, now we will move ahead with the text formula. You already know that by pressing it, take a look at the text tab for once. We gave the value D D D D, turned off the parenthesis and entered and here our formulas have come. We had just learned the text formula, so there is no hard and fast rule in it, as you all know that inside a date, there is a day, there is a month and there is a year, so if you want to extract the same thing, then you can directly extract it. It is a very easy formula, like it is very easy, okay, so what you have to do is to apply the day formula. You have to tab the serial number meaning if you enter your date then the day will come. Okay to get the month equals to month, this is very easy. If it comes in handy in any situation then it is very rarely used directly like this then you enter then your month will come and in the same way if you want to get the year then the year tab serial number means if you enter the date then your year will come. Okay so in this way you can get the day month year, it is very easy. Why do let’s say you have a date, it is 9823, it could be like this, it could be 9th August 2023, and it could be like this, it could be 8th September 2023, isn’t it a possibility? Look, it could be like this, 12th month of 2014, who knows, it could be like this, 14th month of 2014, who knows, it could be like this, 14th December 2014, anything can happen, so to know this, you have read Day Month. Year done now you know 14th will be taken in 2012 ok so sometimes such situation comes you don’t know in which format it is written you don’t know Within this date, which is the day, which is the month, which is the year, then you can extract it directly from the formula by applying the formula of day, applying the formula of the month and applying the formula of the year, I hope you have understood, there is a doubt somewhere, let me know, okay, now we will do it. Look here, the day formula tells you how much day is there in that date, when I say days of any two dates. When you find the difference in between, there will be only days, otherwise now the formula we will apply will apply the days. Basically, what does the days do? Here is the formula applied in between two days. Okay, I have to remove this formula. Okay here, how much gap is there between the two dates, how many days have gone by. If you want to know, then what formula will you apply, what formula will you apply, what formula will you apply, the two dates of the days. How many days have come in between, then what will you do? Don’t memorize all these formulas, you have to do them according to what is written. If you go to memorize all the formulas, you will mess up all the formulas because in some, the start date comes first and in some, the end date comes first. In such a situation, you will get confused, you will not even be able to remember the formulas, they will start looking typical, that’s why they seem typical, so that’s why you don’t have to memorize these, put the days formula and tab it. Two and after that see what is written end date end date meaning when is ending end what is happening here comma start date start since when start when is it starting from here enter 42 days have come ok I for once just hold it with control I shift it here for once ok and control minus it from here left ok for now I shift the data for once Took because I wanted to make you do Days 360. There is one day which tells you how many days have actually passed between two dates. That is where Days 360 comes in. We know that look, we go with a very general understanding about our year, which means our entire year, how many days are there in it? Tell me quickly how many days are there in a year. Normally there are 365 days. There are 366 days in a leap year. Okay, if I remember maths, we used to do calculations in maths and in maths, marks were given like this, calculate the number of days below every question, like there are 360 ​​days in the whole year, so what does it mean, what is the meaning of 360, 360 divided by 12 is 12 months, so it means 30, it will not even consider in which month. It doesn’t matter which month has 31, which month has 30 or which month has 28 or which month has 29. It doesn’t matter to him what it is, he has to know that I will agree that in every month even if it is your February it has 30, your May also has 30 and your November also has 30. I don’t care in which 31 comes, in which 28 comes and in which actual 30 comes, I am I will take 30 out of all and give the answer according to that. So in such a case, the formula we apply is Ear 360. Sorry Days 360. Sorry Days 360. Sorry. Sorry. Sorry. In such a case, the formula we apply is Days 360. What is Days 360 doing now? What was Days doing? The Days which was giving you the answer was 365 on Edge or 365 on Edge and Was giving according to 366 which is actual but how will it give you as per month on 30 days but month month as per month on 30 days is ok now when you apply the formula then you will understand see I am going to give the same date here the difference will come in the answer equal to 2 days 360 tubs after that start date brother see it is in this start date look at that and end date was taken earlier. Start date first, take start date, take comma, after that end date, leave it for once, enter it and see if the answer is coming, is it yes, leave it, don’t enter it, then see, here it was 220, here it was 217, here it was 43, it was 44, then the answer changed, no, why did the answer change? Just because of this difference , somewhere it must have considered exactly 31. 30 A must have considered 29 28 must have considered because 24 isn’t 24 is the leap year so maybe B He must have considered 29 but he has considered 20 everywhere Sorry everywhere 30 It doesn’t matter to him So that’s yours What is your days 360 So here we completed two more formulas Which is days and days Let’s go 360, now let’s move ahead, which is your network days and network days intel. Look, now you understand a little, now you were given a date for example, you were given a date from 1125 to today’s date, let me write this today’s date is 12 3 2025, what to find out the exact in between. To calculate it exactly then we need days formula. To calculate the according of 30 days in between, what is needed to calculate the according of 30 days, so we need 3 days. Well in this I should say exclude weekends and weekends also only Saturday Sunday off, then what formula will you use for network days and if I say look see what I just explained to you that I want to know how many days are there between two dates. But among them automatically it will turn off Saturday Sunday and tell me that if I take it from here to here and there are six Saturday Sundays in it, then it will remove six and tell me that it was not doing this thing, Days 360 was not doing this thing, who will do this thing, the network will do this thing, but the network will do this thing, but one situation has come, what do you get for the second situation? Now let us read the second situation here, let’s read the second situation here. It comes to you that you say that ma’am, it is fine that they are giving Saturday off but my company does not give Saturday off, I only get Sunday off, that means you are excluding the weekend, you want to exclude the weekend but here you want to customize the weekend, meaning it can be as per your wish, you get it on Monday, I get Sunday off, someone gets Saturday off, someone else gets Saturday off. Some people get off on Monday, Tuesday, some get off on Friday, Saturday, so many things can happen, so in such a case, the formula we apply will be network days intel’s, then you will be able to notice this thing there and you will be able to understand well which thing is there and why it is written. Okay, so here you just understand that the network is also doing the same thing, it is giving you the difference between two dates, but what it does is that it Saturday removes Sunday, where when it comes to the network day int64, then you have applied. Now comes to the network days and network days, ital network days. We have to do this after reading and reading. After reading, all will be done. What is the network days tab asking for? Start date, take the start date. What is the comma asking for? End date, take the end date. Okay, now first of all I will show the answer by bringing it normal and then We will also consider the holidays. If there are any holidays other than Saturday and Sunday, then it is okay to consider them too, but we will talk about it after two minutes. First, we will understand it directly. Answer: Look, 31 has come, look, I had given the same date, in this also I had given the same two dates, in this also the same two dates were given and in this also the same two dates were given, but the difference came here and here, it has removed Saturday Sunday and told me, so how many less days are there. If you have gone and seen, you will get the difference everywhere, then it has removed Saturday Sunday automatic. Now I have one more here, one second control control plus, no, from here, control plus, I don’t know what kind of data is below, so let’s write it, let’s do control R and here we write holidays that we are considering holidays also. Okay, what is there in holidays? You have to tell them the date that my holiday is only then when you tell it, right? So what is there in that, he will consider, if suppose your holiday is falling on Saturday and Sunday, then he will not deduct it twice, he will not deduct it twice, he will not deduct it once, if you directly write the number of the holiday, then he will not be able to understand it. How many holidays are there? Will consider if any of these dates is falling on Saturday Sunday then should I count it only one time OK then you will have to pay for holidays also here and pay attention to cell referencing Look here now look at Network Days tab Start date this is taken comma end date Oh hey hey sorry end date this is taken comma Now these are holidays, when I take them for the first, then also all those holidays are for the last. Loo, there are holidays in all, you will have to look at the same holidays for all, otherwise what will you do, fix it with f4, enter, 31 has come, tap it, then look, there are four holidays here and there is one holiday here, why because it has now considered some holidays there, she might not be falling at all, so you have not taken it, then you should also fall, if it is not falling at all, now these three, four, these 8. From 11 to 20, 12, three or four does not make sense, so it will not fall, so it does not come in it. It is okay, if we had written any holiday directly, then it would not have understood, it would have given the wrong answer, so that is why we should tell them the dates of the holidays. He will check himself whether she falls within that time period or not. Is there any of those dates which is falling on Saturday Sunday? So he will not deduct her double time, he will deduct her single time. So that is your network days. Okay, now network days intel, when did I tell you, I write holiday inside it, network days ital, when did I tell you, then I told you when you have to do customization, look at network days ital or it seems exactly. In the same way, customization is done in the last one, start date is taken with comma, end date is taken with comma, then look, it has automatically opened the list, I have not pressed anything, it has automatically brought the list, now check, Saturday Sunday off is required, was it available only in network days, Sunday, Monday, Tuesday, the answer will be the same because only two days have to be removed, yes, changes will come, it is ok because of the date, Wednesday, Thursday, Friday. Friday Saturday, I want only Sunday only. Either I bring it down like this and press tab or directly write 11. Ok tap comma. After that, Holidays. If we are not taking holidays for now, then we enter this. This is the answer. Look, it was the same thing, but now your answers are different. Why is the answer different in all, because the demand is different, here something was coming exact. According to 360, here Saturday is coming without Sunday. Here along with Saturday, holiday is coming with Sunday. Here we have removed only Sunday and here now if we remove Sunday and also remove holidays, then what will we do? Network days, itel, tap ups, sorry, tub, start date, start date, see, whatever formula is there, see, it is written here, so you can also read the end date from here. You will take comma, after that you have written the same 11, if you want, you could have tapped from there, after that Holidays, Holidays, you will take this, you have to consider this for everyone, you will fix it with f4, hit enter, then look, the same thing has come because there was no holiday considered there and it has been changed. Here, holidays must have been considered, so here he must have changed because he must have checked from there, so in this way, we will make this network of ours. days and network days are used by intel, if you have any doubt then please let me know, I have explained it in very detail so that you can understand it very well, now let us move ahead towards our next formula, which is start month, e date and e month, ok, what do you do here, like you calculate the average due date, that is the work of average due date, understand a little here. It will be better with an example . Let me adjust it for once. This is adjusted. For once, we will understand the theory. Let’s take a case with us so that we can understand it better. Suppose this is you. Okay, Mr. He bought clothes worth Rs 10000. Now he is saying payment of Rs 10000 is fine. So Sir, I will not be able to make the payment right now, I will do it after two months. I don’t have the money right now. So Mr. Don’t you know how many people would be coming in a day? So , he records what Mr. I was patient for two months, now I have to pay my due date, so you should know it, and how to know the due date, it is on 12th March, if you add two months in plus, then what will come in March, April, so your due date will be made in May, so you have added two months, right, so in this way, we calculate our due date, so this is the work which you have done manually, this formula. If you want to do it with then use the formula of e-date, end date, basically end date, then you will put e-date, you will tab it, I have said the same thing, you have to do it after reading it, not by rote learning, what is asking, start date comma, okay, now some people may say, ma’am, if there are days, then there are days. Convert it to months, brother, if the date is days, I tell you, first take the months because you cannot do it with your formula, I have this, so what should I do, no, you did this, after that you went to home just because it is on the journal, we need the date, so here we took the short date, this is the date, one more, I create it here so that you can understand, control plus or control R, I would have removed it if you agree, you say. If I have this month, I will make another one, this is the days, write the days 60 90 65 52 62 32 45 85 45 62 If you have these dates, you do not have these, if you do not have a month, then how will you do it. Look, you will have to give the month in the formula, now how will that month come out, you have to know that, equal to e date tab start date taken comma after that take months. Now there is no month, forget the month, there is no month, you have days, how do you get months from days, how many months are there in a year, if there are 12, then divide by 12, no brother, month will automatically calculate , enter yours, 84, enter did you take this date? Well , there are 30 days in a month, so we will not do it by 12 months, we will do it by days, but it will not be standard, that means, in some, 31 will come, in some, it will come, then this can be messed up, okay, here that thing can be messed up, here two is written, here it is 90, that’s why here I write three, your answer will be correct, equal will come, okay, so here I have standardized it. I have divided it by 30 but you will have to convert it into months. Okay, if you want to be very accurate, if it is normal then you can enter the answer in this way. You will not get confused after seeing these two, because they are written randomly, don’t look at it right now, it is written as one, so here I write 30, the answer will be correct. If three is written here, then if I write 90 here, then the answer will be correct here. It is written here that if I write 60 then the answer will be same then this is different because random is written here just to tell you ok this was your end date, after this another formula comes end of month, now what does it mean, this is the formula which I had understood, within this formula I add one more condition, after that you will understand better, now what is the next condition, this person says this thing. It is true that I have to do 10000, it is true that I will do it in two months but but what does it say but sir, whatever date I follow your due date, take the end date of that month, end date of that month and date of that month, what do you say, oh sir, it is very easy, you are telling me, I did the transaction today, yes yes, then you are saying that my due date will be on my 12th, yes, I am on 12th. I am not liable to give it, I will be liable to give it on 31st May, O then your due date should follow anytime, on that day you will be liable to follow that due date which is the last date of the month, K Yes, now if you understand it right, then if such a situation arises, then you can use end of the month, see equals to e, O month which is the end of the month in which you started. Date taken, start date taken, comma, same months have to be taken, here you have to enter months, then look here, your answers have come, now look, it is the same, you had put the same thing in this date also, you had not done anything different, so here, look at 31, 8 is 31, 20 is 31, 23 is 30, look, all the last dates are just months, if yours is June, then tell me what will come, your date is that date. What is the due date? If it is June, then 30th of June. If your second is September, then 30th of September. If your third is of November, then 30th of November is your last date. If it has gone up even by one day or has fallen, then I am liable to give it in the end of the month. You see your formula, so that is your end of month. Okay, after this we move on to our next day. That is a very very very good formula. It is okay but it will be understood very easily. To understand this, let us consider a small case study and from that we will get better clarity. Okay, see here, he has asked to give the resignation. Now what does the manager say, OK fine, calm down brother, you have to give the resignation, there is no problem, but remember that after giving the resignation, you will be given 21 days’ notice. You have to serve your notice period. You have to serve your notice period. What do you have to do? You have to serve your notice period. Oh shut up, meaning I am here today on 12th March and Now I have 21 more days, which means that if I work, it will go till 3rd April, and this means that I will go till 3rd April, I have to work till 3rd April, but no problem , I will work till 3rd April, I will definitely leave, I am very fed up from here, so he has done the calculation directly till 3rd April, but the manager there says no, son, it is not like what you have done for 3rd April, in that you have also counted your weekends too, have you counted the weekends? Obviously your working days will not be counted. What have I said? 21 working days, 21 working days have to be done. If you have to do 21 working days then your Saturday and Sunday cannot come in it or whatever your weekend is, that is also customization. You know this thing that we do customization inside Intel. Okay, so Saturday Sunday cannot come. They say, OK, so now calculate and tell me till when will I have to work . We will tell you who will calculate and tell. Let’s calculate and tell. See, you came here in work days, after that you enter the formula of work days here, tab it here, it is written work day, it means it gives you the last date, I was saying work days by mistake, I am really sorry for that, like you see, when you did the day formula, do you remember in the day formula, you were getting the date as to which day is within that date, but like you said days. If the formula was done then the difference coming between two dates was net work days because in it the difference between two dates was coming, these were network days. I have also made the mistake written above, I will change it now but this work day by day day means that particular day, that is why he gives the date. Okay, we will take the start date, we will take the start date, comma, what is it saying after that, how many days have to be served, let’s say there is no holiday to serve 50 days. Will we talk about holidays later? Will we talk about holidays later? Let’s enter and here I do one thing, I take it from me, I go to home and here I come in short date. Okay, here I do a control plus A, A, I write it and here I do control R. Okay, here we will do the holiday one, then the holiday one too. You have to explain that if any holiday is considered in between, then neither the manager will consider that. Do it, it’s a holiday, work a little bit, so here you have the work day here , it ‘s ok, so here your work day has come, you double tap it, you will get all the dates. I was talking about today, right, I will show you today’s also, you did it here and we had taken out 21 days, so how do we take out its work day tab, after that was the start date, we did this with a comma, after that we gave this and entered, then we have 10th off. Where will April come? He was sitting there with ‘Third of April’ in it, do Alt HEA, then it will be deleted. Okay, so here we will calculate the working days now according to the holidays, so it is the same step of holidays which was in your network days, you take the start date, put commas, tell the days, take commas, for holidays, you have to tell this and this has to be considered in all the holidays because it is going to remain the same in future, so you Fix it with f4 and enter, your answer will come and here we go, so here you can find it in this way, if suppose you want to do customization, here by default it has considered Saturday Sunday as weekend, but here, if you want to consider Saturday and not Sunday, you want to consider something else, if you want to consider only Sunday, then you can do that also, you will enter the working day, tap the start date. You will take start date, you will go here and put comma, after that you will take days, you will take days here, you will put comma, after that you have to do customization here, what will you do for customization, you have to show only that of Sunday, otherwise you write 11, put comma, after that you have to consider holiday, if there is anything, then we will consider the holiday later, so I removed it and entered, so see this in working day only it considers both Saturday and Sunday. Here it has taken a consideration, so the date has changed, if I suppose I do the same thing here, I take it, I control it like this, and here I take the holiday, we write the holiday here, we write the holiday thing, holiday and we turn off the parentheses and enter and here I am going to consider the holiday also, so we will apply the formula again, how to do equals to work day, take the intel tab here, after that you should start. Date Start date How to take Start date is your comma after that you want days then for days you have this After that you need Sunday only, to take Sunday only you have taken 100 sorry 11 taken I am really sorry for that 11 taken com, now you need Holidays, I have told you about the holidays, select it, fix it with f4 and hit enter, then see it is the same thing but now your only holiday has also been added in it, so your answer has changed Holidays. You have understood the concept, you had done the same concept in the network days and the same concept is there in the work days also. I am so sorry. Okay, so here we have included all the possible formulas related to our date which are used the most. Here we have completed them. Now let us move towards the time formula. There is nothing much in the time formula, it is a very easy thing which you have just learned about the date. What are the things written inside a date? Inside a date, your day is written, month is written and year is written, similarly what is written inside a time, an R is written, a minute is written and a second is written . Because for now it is in this format, so what format will we do it in? No general format will come in the time format, okay ninth R means ninth R is going on, we will apply the minute for minute formula, we will tap, after that you will take it and enter, then it is 10 minutes, from how many minutes it has extracted, we will tap for second, after that we will take the serial number, we will enter, so so many seconds are written in it, okay, we do not want it in this much, we will take it in this. We have rounded it off and given it. We have given it by rounding it off. If you want, you can do it in this way. You can show it normally to two seconds. By rounding it off, we can take it from this. Okay, so in this way your R comes with minutes and seconds. So here we have completed all the possible formulas of our day and time formulas which were most used. We have completed them here and also. We will do the formula further, let’s move ahead, see till now we have seen, now let us start our logical formula. What is the logical formula? The first formula inside the logical formula that we are going to learn is the if formula. Now before learning the if, see how if is called in Hindi . On the basis you will be asked what is the answer, basically you will be given a condition and according to that you have to answer. If you did not understand the thing, let us understand from the example. Suppose there is a Raju, Raju goes to school. Okay, now Raju has given the exam. Now what is said in the exam that if he gets more than 45 marks then he has passed, otherwise he has failed. What did I say that if Raju gets more than 45 marks? If he comes, then he is passed, otherwise he is failed. Okay, so what is the condition that we have given? What is the condition that we have checked his marks, are they more than 45? What is the condition that we have given that the marks are greater than 45? If this is true, then either this will be true or this will be false. If this is true, then write PASS there and if this is false, then write FAIL there. Have you understood just one thing? You have to understand the condition very well, after that you can do this work like suppose we will travel again for now this is student A, this is student B and this is B and this is student C and if I say his percentage then it is 55. If I say his percentage is at 40 and if I say his then it is 75. So now tell me whether the one who is a is pass or fail is pass or fail is pass. If I talk about b then it is pass or fail is fail and if I talk about c then fail of dice is pass then if you tell me this then you know how to apply the formula, we just have to understand a little bit of the formula, basically what will we know by doing time travel, first what did we check, did we check our condition whether the marks are greater than 45, what did we check whether the marks are greater than 45 and look at the marks, it is such a thing. Marks percentage is the same thing, okay percentage is something which is different for this person, it is different for this person, it is different for this person, that means these are the marks. How are the keys changing, so what does it mean here, what will we select , we will select a cell, that is, we will select the cell with marks and then greater than 45, 45, whether it is this or this, the condition is same for everyone that it should be more than 45, so here we can write the number at 45 because the number is always fixed, so here we understood one thing that the first thing we have to check is what we have to check is to check the marks. Is she greater than 45 days? Then we time traveled that as soon as we get to know about the marks, that means we get to know about a condition, sorry, we erase it. As soon as we get to know about a condition, what do we have to do? Now that I have got to know about the condition, what will I do now, I will think about the condition. Is it yes or no, that means, has this condition been successfully achieved, if it has happened . So what will pass and if it has not passed then what will fail? Okay, what are these two? What is text and what do we write the text in? We write the text inside double inverted commas. Okay, now we have understood this but I have explained these things, why what is their logic? Let’s see what formula I am making you here. Right, just give me a minute . Why is it showing like this? No problem, here we will write equal to if tub here. Read what is the logical test value of true and value of false, so now we will elaborate this formula a little bit, after doing it in detail, we will understand it completely, okay, so here I write the F formula which is what is our logical test value if true and value false and the formula we have just given, we will understand it according to the example we have just given, so that we can understand F in detail. What is Logical Test? What is Logical Test? Check the percentage of marks. Is it true of the individual? Is it greater than 45? Value if true, if the condition becomes true then what to do is pass and A value false. If the condition becomes false then what to do is fail. So in this way you will be able to apply your formula here, that is why I told you the value of true by making this condition one condition two. Because value of true value of false also comes in your formula, so now you know what is value of true value of false, you just have to think of the condition properly, after that think about the condition whether it is true or false, after that you can apply your own, so see, here we will apply the formula practically, we will go with the same thing, whoever has more than 45 marks, he will pass, otherwise he will fail. Here we will write equals to if tab, after that logical test, what is the percentage in logical test? The only thing to be checked is the percentage of every student. Take the percentage of every student and obviously now Aarav Sharma will be next. Riya Verma will be next, then Anaya will be there, then Karan will be there, then Sanya will be there and then Rahul will be there. Meaning, the things that are changing will keep on changing, so don’t fix it. Okay, keep it at Greater Day 45. Greater Day 45 will be there. Do you check the comma value of true? If this is true then the condition is true then you have to write pass and if this is false then you have to write fail. Now you don’t know what you have learned till now in so many formulas and in that way. Now you will never get troubled by looking at formulas or symbols. Half of the people get troubled by seeing what are the symbols that why did you put this double e and inverted comma and then why did you put comma after that. Why is this greater than given? I will not be able to understand the formula or they will come. Now look, double inverted comma is text, hence we use comma for any next command. Greater given is given because we want to check this condition. If you hit enter, it will come close to here. Double tap it, then look, it is failing here, why 27 at 33 45, we have not put equal at 45, if we want to assume that If there is equal, then put the equal sign here, enter and now double tap. Now the one who was at 45 also passed. If you want that the one who was at 45 should also pass and the one above him should pass then you can do it like this. Okay, is this working or not? Once I check it, I made it 20. In this side also his marks will have to be 20. So see if he has failed, then in this way you apply your if formula. If you understand how the IF formula looks, take one more condition and tell it in another statement. Suppose any party name is written here. Party name is ok. I write any party name here. A A B C B C D E F G H I have written the party name here. Now I write the amount here and write the status here. I am explaining it very easy. Look, let’s go with a condition that see, this is my party. Now if any payment comes from them, then I write it here otherwise this cell remains empty and now I have to put the status. Suppose from here I have received a payment of Rs. 10000. It is okay from B. No payment has come from C. No payment has come from D. I have received a payment of Rs. 20000. After that I get F. A payment of Rs 63000 has come from H and then I have received a payment from H of Rs 52000. Now I have to update the status here that from whom has payment been received and from whom has no payment been received. Okay, now what will I do here, wherever the amount is written, that is, wherever the amount has come, then I have to write payment done and wherever the amount is not written, I have to write pending. So now what is the condition whether the cell is vacant or not? What will I think here, what is mine, what do I have to check, I have to check the cell, is it equal to MT, if this is true, that means, if it is MT, MT, then yes and no, yes and no, if it is true, the cell is empty, then what should come here, cell is empty, it means payment has not come, it means pending should come, and if we assume that cell is not empty, it means payment has come, then yes, payment received, understood, confusion, tell me once more. See what I am saying, come in the third, I am saying here we are going with a condition, see what is the condition, we have to check the cell whether it is MT and if it is MT, the condition of MT thing is yes and no, if yes means cell is empty, when is it empty, when payment has not come, payment has not come, it means pending and if it is not empty, that means payment is written in it, that means amount has been received, then payment is done. If it comes , then you know the value if true and value of false. You know that pending and payment done have to be written, but this is a logical test, how to write it? What am I saying in the logical test, you have to check the cell, whether it is MT or not, then it means that you have to check a1, then you will take a1. In the logical test, a1 is equal to two. How to show empty, there is no number, any number of text or character or anything other than the number. If it comes in double inverted comma, then double inverted comma. Now you have to show it empty, right? If you have to show space, then you give space. If someone has to show you a symbol, then they write that symbol. You have to show it empty. Stop it as it is. It means nothing. If space is given, what do we sometimes do? We give space to show empty. If you have given space here, then he will understand that there should be space inside that cell which you have shown in double inverted comma. What you write will come, now you will not write anything directly, you will turn off the double inverted comma, this means that it is empty and if it is empty, then it will come, so let’s try it for once, then you will understand better. We will go to logical formula here, we will put Equals to If tab. What is the logical test? What is the need to check this cell, what is the need to check whether it is empty, then I turned on and off the double inverted comma, but did not do anything in it because Only then it will appear that it is empty, there is nothing to be done, comma, if this becomes true then it is really empty, then it is empty, it means the payment has not come, that is, pending, see what happens, sometimes we think negative situation, sometimes we think positive, that is why I explain the logic, if you understand the logic, try the condition by making it yes and no, then we will find the correct answer, otherwise we may get confused, okay. Pending

comma value false means the cell is not empty that means when the cell will not be empty then when the payment has come then we will do the payment. Pens of enter then see if you do this then see here the pending is coming. Now I delete it here, this is also pending. Suppose if I write any payment here then this payment is done. Okay, in this way we can effectively use if. If one like this. There is a formula which is used a lot, whether you are doing small work or big work, whether you are making a report or doing anything. If is used the most, that is why if you have a doubt about understanding If very well, then please let me know in the comment section. Here we have done it in great detail, just like we did If, similarly in logical functions, there are two more formulas in the logical formula. Other two formula R and and R and and R Now let us give a little logic to this We have to understand what is the meaning of ‘and’ and what is the meaning of ‘and’ and after that we will be able to work well. Okay, now what I am talking about is ‘end’ and ‘or’, these are English people, they are English people, now how come this is my friend Mr. I will eat pizza and burger and on one side I sent a birthday card and wrote what all will happen, meaning this is a fictional kind of example ok and there it is written pizza and burger in English and there is either pizza and burger, can we get both? The answer is no, where else comes to mean either A or B, one but where end comes, means A and B means both and both are ok, so this is the basic difference. Now why did I explain this in between is and and and and, I am talking about logical, I am talking about condition, I see where I have reached, here also it is a matter of condition, like suppose till now you had what was being talked about inside if and what was being talked about, single condition is ok, now it has come to the case of if condition, multiple condition, you have more than one condition and now there are two situations, either both the conditions are satisfied. Only then will some work be done or if only one of them is satisfied then it will work. If both have to be satisfied then apply the ‘And’ formula and if any of the two conditions, suppose you have two conditions, if any one of the two will be satisfied, then apply one more thing. Well, one more thing. The ‘if’ formula is more flexible and gives more customization. How inside the ‘if’ formula, you tell yourself that I have to write a pass, I have to write a fail. I want to get payment done written, I want to get pending written, I can get anything written but there are such formulas which will give you the answer not only on the basis of true and false, remember Go to Special, inside which there was a formula from which true and false were taken out, that is why when we were saying that brother, only where true and false are there, he considers it logical, why do he consider it logical? These and and and and whatever they are, they come from the logical formula. You will answer only and only in True and False. Through these you will know whether your condition is satisfied or not. Now if you understand it with a practical example, you will understand better. Whenever you do not understand the theory, no problem, we explain the theory only so that you can understand the core of it. If you do not understand there, it is okay. Not everyone understands the theory, then you will understand through practical. Now we have an example. What is the example that our manager is telling us to make a list of all the persons who are eligible for the employment like bonus. I said ok, it will be fine, we will make it. What is the condition, the experience of the employee should be greater than 5 and his rating should be greater than 5. If it is so, then he will get the bonus, otherwise I will not get it. Said right, meaning he needed both the things that he should work for more than 5 years and his rating should also be good, only then he will give the bonus. Okay, so in such a case, we will apply the formula of end, what is the end tab logic one, I have to check the experience, is that greater day equal to 2, because even if it is five, it will work and after that we have to check the rating, is that greater day equal to 4, if you enter it, the true answer will come. And double tap here, always look at us, here we are giving sale to whom, we are giving experience and we are giving rating and this is in keep changing, that is why we have not fixed it, now see, here it is six years and if it is 4.1, then your pay here has come true but here it is 3 years, it is 3.8, even if I make seven years of pay here, it is also false, if I make five years of pay here, then go. It is true that means both the conditions should be satisfied, I made it three here, then why did it come false, because the experience here is less than 5 years, he has to satisfy both the conditions, what has to be done, if both the conditions are satisfied, if even one condition is satisfied, then it will not work, see where the thing with one condition works, same is the same example, everything is the same, same is the data, here if even one condition is satisfied then let’s go. If you go to that is your or formula tab, you have to check the logic, Greater than = 5, comma after that, if you want to give logic two, then you will check that the rating is greater than equal to 4. If you enter it, then it will come here. Now let’s see here what was 65, so 65, so it will remain true, assume it is 4, this is 4.5, that means the rating is good but the years of experience are less, still he is giving true, if this of mine becomes three and this also becomes three, then it will go and give false saying brother, if neither of them is failing then if even one thing is right then it will give true to me, what else is that single condition also. If it is satisfied, then it will give you the answer. True and what are both the conditions, that is, all the conditions which you want to impose will be satisfied, then what is more, even if even one condition is satisfied, it will give you the answer. By default, the answers they give are in True and False, so here we have completed our logical formula. Now we come to you some miscellaneous formulas. First of all, we will learn that we have to rank. Now we will understand the method of calculating the rank from an example and then after traveling in the same way, we will make the complete formula. Okay, so let me draw five students here for you. Let us write the students here like this. Student A is one. He is at 60, the marks of D are at 85, and the marks of E are at 45. Now tell me the rank, who will come first, who is the student who will come at the first rank, who has the highest marks, then you will simply look at it and say that D is the first, then you will say for second, B is the second, C is the third, the fourth who will come will be A and the one who will come fifth will be E, and if you If you have given the same answer, then you have given the correct answer. Okay, now it comes to the fact that we will travel. Basically, what did you do? If I have to get the rank of a student, I have to get the rank of A. If we are taking an example, then first of all what I check is, I check the marks of A, that is, that person’s own marks. So, are these marks going to be different for A, different for B, different for C, different for D, different for E? Yes, of course, A’s own marks. B has its own marks, C has its own marks and D has its own marks, so this is keep changing and keep changing means that we are not writing anything on our own, we have to take cells only, the leaves of both numbers and text are removed, only cells have to be written and because there are individual marks, after that, what did you do in the second step, you can tell by just looking at A, what rank he has got. Unless you look at the other students, then to check the same rank, you have to check the same rank. Also checked B, it is 70, which means it is more than A. Well, it is 60, which means it is more than A. Okay, its 85 is more than A. Okay, if it is less than A, then according to this, whatever A will be, it will be on the fourth, so it means to check the rank of A, what did you check? So the second step comes that check the whole lot, basically the whole data. Okay, now tell me one thing, if you find it for b, then find it for b first of all. B’s marks are checked, O is 70, okay fine, after that, you will not do this. C’s is 60, D’s is 85, E’s is 45, okay, you will check A’s too, so no, we move ahead, we check all of them, it means for B too, you will have to check all of them, for C, we will check C’s marks, after that we will check all of them, only then we will be able to tell what is its rank, so basically the whole data remains fixed. If it is sales, then we will fix the sales manually. What is the meaning of fixing manually? We will apply dollars beyond that, then in this way your rank will be determined. It is very easy to get the rank but still you make mistakes in this, then we will also see what mistakes you make and we will correct it and will also see the correct answer. Now let us try it practically, so here we will put the formula here, we will have equals to rank, here you have it, tap the number, the number means which. What is to be checked? What is to be checked? Percentage is to be checked. Have you taken the percentage? Okay, comma is saying that reference means which one should I check? I check in these and I do one thing. For now, I will not fix it and after that we will check the rank. Okay, comma is asking for order. Now don’t memorize here, we will take zero, we will take one. Hey, here it seems to be zero, here it seems to be one, whenever things like this come, true false comes. If row one comes or any thing comes then in such a case you have to read that thing, you read why it is getting written and zero. Why am I writing this? Now I want to know why I am saying this. Generally, we take descending in rank but sometimes the opposite can also happen. You are carrying a negative situation. If you are checking your date, then in the date, the person who is lowest for you will be the one with good date. The one from whom our debt is less, so those are good things. If you use ascending there, then when will you be able to use it now. You will be able to do this when you have understood the logic in it, now you have not understood the logic only, you have done only 01 01, then you will make a mistake, then you will think that how will this happen, here we will do zero, which is descending and parent off, we will enter, we have got the rank, double tap it and the rank is correct, what is it, see, the first rank here is at 78, then the first rank is at 62, then the first rank is at 6051, what happened now ? Let’s check for once the mistake that people generally make, the mistake about which I had also told you that here we checked the rank, what did we check? Firstly, i3 is what is written in i3 and after that we checked from i3 to i17, it is okay, i3 is the individual marks and from A3 to i17 are all children, after that we came here, we had to find the rank within what is i k4, so here we will check. i4 as well as what is staying here from i4 to i1 means what did it do. If you are getting the rank here for i4 then it has been taken from i4 to i 18 whereas in 18 there is no data here, there is no data here and where did it start from. Sorry here, there is no data here and where did it start from here, it did not even check this 51. Then accept it if you are on i6. If you are coming, then it is checking from i6 to i20, it is increasing like this because you have not fixed anything, then in such a case, will it give you the correct rank or not? That is why this was the mistake, so now we will correct it. Just give me a minute, I have to remove all of this and then we will put our formula again here. So we took this, after that we erased it, after that now we will put the formula here. Equal to rank tab ok rank average taken by mistake I took the tab number take the number comma after that take the reference take the reference I took this and now fix it with f4 comma ascending penis off enter and now see now you double tap then your rank has come here see if these failed were failed then see the last rank is 12 15 14 okay so in this way you have to find your rank so here we have another formula. Completed, what is a rank formula? Now let us move ahead. We will do the round formula. What do we do? Whatever you round off, you get it rounded off. Now how will the round off be done? Let’s learn to round off a little bit. I will write a number and according to that I will teach you the normal round off, like suppose you have written 9635 6949. So first of all this. Understand, if I tell you that I want a number up to two digits, then it means that I am saying that I want a number only up to two digits after the decimal, so I want five, so I will write as it is and after that I am here, I want this number up to the second digit, neither this till the second digit, as far as we need, it is dependent on the next digit, if our next digit is If it is above five or equal to five then it gets converted to the next number and the other way it remains as it is, so now the number here is nine which is more than five, so now we will write this number by taking it here, then it is completed in two digits. Suppose this number was 96 3.56 449, then what do we do here in such a case. 9635 Now see on which it is dependent, on the next step it has to be checked whether it is greater than five or equal to five, so here it is four, which is less than five, so we leave it as it is, it comes to zero, okay, it is five, it comes to zero, let me tell you another number, let’s think of rounding it off, see here 89 7.65 5 3 2 I have two. Do you need round off till digits, what will you write 8976, what is the next number, five is equal to five or more than five, then what do we do with it, we round off, so that is your normal round off, now this is the normal round off, I understood when to do it and when not to do it. Here are two formulas and come out which is round up and round. Down tell me one thing, let’s me in this, we will understand this one and I will take its example, okay, I am taking the same number but changing the example a little bit 8 9765 432 Now tell me the answer to this, what will happen on rounding off 8976, this f is dependent on this four, four is small, f is as it is, now what these two are, what is the normal round off? Normal round off, but at the same time, let me tell you some different round off. Suppose I have got this situation here that I have got this number and now I have to apply the round up formula, then the round up formula says whatever the number is, I don’t care what your number is 8976 5 432. If this number is not there then it is smaller than f but still 8976 6 will give the answer, he will always round up no matter what. It doesn’t matter whether the number is above five or not. Okay, this thing, now let’s try it by rounding down. We use this formula to round down, see 8 97.6 5532. Now tell me one thing, technically this number after five is five, so it should become six, but rounding down will give you the answer 8976 5. That means he keeps the number as it is. It doesn’t matter to him whether the number on the side is higher or not. It is less, he keeps it as it is, so that is your round out, now we apply this practically, I explained this round off because people get confused about the decimal thing, so now you will not be confused, so see here, we will apply the round formula, apply the round formula, one second, we will do the equals to round tab, after that look, the number is saying, number has to be taken, meaning which number has to be changed, check, this one has to be done. The comma after that is saying the number digit. I had asked you how many digits to keep, so here we keep two digits or if you want to keep three digits, you can keep three, but after entering two, it has been sen. Now we will read this. First, we double tap it. See, after six, nine was and if it is more than five, then it was sen. After three, two was and if it is less than five, then we left three after six. Two was which is less than 5 so left it as six so in this way you have rounded off now let’s see the round up if the numbers are the same round up Tom after that we will take the number we took the comma the same one is asking the way of putting the digits is exactly the same situation will come different so you have to see ok now see this is the same number here now there was two after three so let it remain three but round up says I don’t care after Whatever number I have, I will tell him by increasing it, even after 63 there is a two, he makes it 64. Even after six, even after a two, he makes it seven. After five, even after a four, he makes it six. So that’s yours. Round up and same stubborn, ours is round down. He says, I don’t care, I will keep it rounded down. If I round it down, then we will take the number. After that, we will take the number . Comma digits two, you need to turn off the parentheses, enter end, you can double tap it, then here the answer comes, see it is 37, because after that there is nine, then it should increase, but it did not increase, it did not increase, it does not increase, it says, I do not care, this is fifth here, after two, there is five, it should increase, but it did not increase, it says, I do not care, I am stubborn, I will do it like this, so the round is your normal round off. Round up always keeps the dozen matter up, what is the next number and round down always keeps it on the down. Dozen matter, what is your number? So here we have completed all the three formulas very well, which is round, round up and round down. Now we will do some such formulas which tell you what is written inside the cell. Now you will say what is this, yes, I am telling you there is a list of formulas inside it, this formula is different. There is no point in doing this but let’s keep it in a little understanding like suppose you know what is written, a number is written, a formula is written, then you can check it, is the number tab, after that give the value, enter is this a number, yes this is the number, it is true, ok equals to is text, whatever you want to check, tab, did I give this value, enter, was this a text, then it gave false. Given, if suppose I do the text tab here, after that I give it and enter, was it text, yes, then it is True, in a way, it is behaving like a logical thing. In True False, it gives you the answer. Let’s tell whether that content is there inside that cell or not, like now you put equals to is here and you are getting lots of them here, you are okay, here you have to check if this is the formula, so you tap on it, give you this, enter the value given by you, is this a formula, yes, there is a formula inside it, then true, if I do the same thing somewhere else, then I would have given this formula tab and this Pooja Deshmukh enter here, was this formula no? That was the name I had written, the text was the constant text, you know this thing, you have already learned about the constant thing and the formula thing, okay, so here you will know, okay, next we will check is the error, is the error tab, is this an error, so you checked this, enter false, now see is this an error , okay, this is close, so we get this here, equals to is the error tab. After that we took this enter, so is it an error? Yes, if there is an error, then it gave true. In this, another formula comes, what does E E R R E R E R E R do, it also tells the error but it does not consider N. It is an error and considers all the errors but E E R R does not consider N and considers all the others. You take this, enter it and it will come true, it is ok. After that, more come to you in the same way like this error e error we have done ok fine after that comes to you e even meaning we have to check whether this number is even check yes this number is even in the same way if it is not an even number then it gives you this false and you get the formula in it see you can read from here like is a like e r r it does not do a but does the rest is a for particular a. You have to check whether there is any error with ‘A’ there or not, this number is good, this is weak number, so here you have many formulas which you can explore, I would like to do something else in this blank like took this blank, took tab, gave value, gave enter, so what was the blank here, otherwise if I remove it, then false comes, then yes, true, this is blank, so in this way, there are many many things here. There are formulas which are logical formulas, they are used very rarely, they are used along with some formula, their usage in themselves is less but if the situation arises then you should remember that yes, there are some formulas of this method too. All the terms that we have taught you, all these formulas are related to those terms in the data. Okay, so here we have completed these formulas, we have many good formulas. That’s done for now. Now let’s move ahead. I have done this for some advanced formula. I have been doing this in basic only but this is in kind of advanced. It is a good formula. Which is Sum F. Now let’s see it in detail. When I talk about the Sum F. So, first of all, look at its name. What is Sum F? How many words is Sum F made up of? Sum and F. Sum. What is the meaning of total? To total something if Had you read a condition just now? Had you read the if? Had you read the else? So this is what you had read for the if. One condition, one condition, two, check it in that. Now and in that condition, I am saying that you have to total. Now you have not understood the point, no problem. Let us understand from the example, this is your manager. The manager has a report. There are 10000 entries in the report and within the entries, there is data of North South East West and the manager has told you that Mr. Raju, you have to prepare a report. In the report, he gave this report to make a report. He wrote this, North, this, South, this, East, West, this, he wrote the total and did it like this and said, brother, fill in the values ​​here, fill in the values, meaning, tell me how many total sales have I made, take the data of these 10000 entries from me and check with me, what are the entries of North, what are the entries of South, what are the entries of East. What are the entries of West, what are the entries of West, total them and after totaling, make such a report and give me such a report. I want to know how many sales have we made in the entire North region, how many sales have we made in the Southern region, how many sales have we made in the East region, so what is the condition here, what is the first condition, first condition will we apply, so what is the first condition, what is to be found for the North and what to do, then if we get the North, we will get the entire North, then what? If you have to make even, then when you have a single condition and you have to make even, because you have to know the total sale, what has he told you, this is what he has said, I want to know the total sale of North Region. In such a case, what is the condition, what is the answer, what is to be done, then what formula do we use to sum, I have understood the condition, okay, I have understood the example, now let’s read the formula for once, after that you will understand better, it is sum, ff, tub, range, criteria, sum, range, ok, range, criteria, sum, range, I write it and after that I explain it to you completely, then we have another color, we work equal . To Sum F Tab Range Criteria Sum Range, this has to be understood carefully because they will understand that if they did not understand this one, nor did they understand the portion, then they will understand the reporting that you do in advance as well as the formulas used there and at the same time, if you are able to do all the work with the data using any formula you have, then you have to understand it very carefully. Okay, yes, first of all we will not talk about the range, we will talk about the criteria. What is the criteria? What is the criteria to search? Now tell me one thing that I have to search. Above, I gave you the example where the manager gave the report to you Raju and said that I want the sum of note South East West, then Raju will search whom, whom will he search for North, he will search only North, he will search only North, the amount is written in front of it, but whom will he search among all the entries, this is the amount, isn’t it? Will start searching for North. North will start searching for North. If all are found, then the amount is already written in front. So whom will he start searching for? North, here what will be his criteria, what will be North then for South, for South for East, for East for West, then what can I say? Can I say that the region is asked for region wise report, neither is the region within the report, within the region report within the report, so I wrote the report because the one with the report should be found inside the main. If you are thinking about the data, then what is your criteria range, meaning in which to search, in which to search, now tell me one thing, I am saying that you have to find the region, okay, you have to find the North, okay, you will search in the data given by the manager, you will search in that only, then you will search in that and tell me, North, okay, this is the entries of North, so in which you have to search, so what will you do here, if you take the region from the main data, then check in the region. You will do North North North North North North North North North and from that you will get to know the sum range which you have to sum means your amount which will come and where that amount will be written in the report. What has to be written in the report, if we have done the total, then what will you get in the main data, so basically now think about it, it was logical, but we have put it in the formula, how is it logical that there is a big data with 10000 entries in which North South East West has entries, so logical. Right, I want to know the total sum of North, so obviously I will first find out all the North, first I found out who I need to know, okay fine, I want to know the North, then I sorted out all the entries of all the North and after that I did all the sums separately and after that I took the total of all the amounts which were here, this is what you do, now we have brought this work inside the formula, how easy is it, so if I start making the formula here, if I start making the formula here, like this example. If I start making the formula, what will be the formula? Look, if Equal to Sum F Tab Range, then what will be the region in main data, what will be the criteria, what will be the region in report and sum range, what will be the amount in main data. If you do not understand this thing, then there is no need to panic. Let’s put an example practically. This is an example with me. What an example. See, here I have party names and also party names. What are the entries of the sale here, see how many entries have been made, one person comes many times to buy the goods, so look, we have a lot of entries, what is it now, I know that I do not have that many people, I have only so many customers, these people come again and again to buy, so here they are, now someone told me that I have to go, according to the name swift4, okay, so now you have come to a new example, leave that example. Now understand this, here there is an entry of sales, name of each party is given, there is sale next to it, you want to know how much sales have been done, then we will put it because if I search for swift4 in the name, then I have taken comma, now I am doing it for one, after that I will tell you how to put it for complete, so who did this comma criteria? If you want to search, then look, it gave me the answer 80586, okay, everyone understood, if I want to check this, then with control shift L, I applied the filter here, from here I searched for shuff nova, sf nova, ok and heavy go, then this is our total, look here 805 869, so here our total will come 80586, understood, okay, we remove the filter here, now the thing was, we have removed one if this is the thing, if I If I drag and bring all the answers, what are the correct answers? What are the correct answers? Look, he is choosing the range from b5 whereas our range should have been from b4. That means there might be chances that this is correct but no, this is the wrong way. We should not do it this way. We will use the right way because what I just said, there might be chances, I was not accurate, so we have to do the accurate work. Equal to Sum ​ ​ ​ ​So brother, do f4 or fix it with f4. Take all these criteria about comma criteria one. Okay, we have to remove comma for this. After that, even range, even range, tell me one thing. Sf Nava also has to be found in this. Same range for blue puck also, same even range for a cross. So okay, then when this is for everyone then take the even range and fix it with f4. Okay, enter your You will get the total of all the passes . Now you can do Alt Equal to here and enter. You have got the total of the sales. So, how much time did you spend in this method and was it a method that we will apply filters, we will find the answer of North, we will find the answer of South, then how hectic it would have been. So look here, you have to find all the answers in one turn, then this was your sum. If the way we calculate the sum, what do you think in that way? The average is also calculated and the count is calculated in the same way, so in the same way, no matter how much you read excel in the whole series, wherever it seems to be even, understand it automatically. Similarly, the average and count will also start calculating in the same way. Now suppose you want to know about Swift Nova in the same way. On an average, how often does it buy, what does it buy, meaning how much, what does it buy? Now imagine that there is a party which comes only twice or thrice in the whole month and It takes such a major chunk, that is, 30-40 business comes from only that, so we will see or say that three or twelve times it comes in the whole month, but if we look at the average, then brother buys in lakhs and there is a party which comes 20 times but buys in thousands, then from the average we come to know how much a person is buying from us. On an average, how much is he buying, then the method of calculation is exactly the same. Average Average F Tab is exactly the same. Range criteria now. Last comes the average range. Look, obviously if you are doing sum, then the sum range will come by writing the average. If you are doing average then you will write the average range. Doing is of the same values, otherwise the range in which we have to find is the same, so we will take this party name. Do you know that we have to fix it, why do we have to do this because comma criteria is same for everyone, meaning what we have to find is obviously, we have to find these only, comma average range, we will take the one which is in the sum range, the even range. If the average is even, the average will be in the range, we will fix it with f4 because it is the same for everyone, enter it, then see on an average, here is how much they do, if you do not want decimals, then you can remove them from here, okay , so you have this, now comes the point, this was also very easy, the main part of the average comes the count of sales. If I ask you, those who think that you have this for one month, it was a sheet of sales for one month, okay. Now I ask you, how many times does the person who is SF Nova come to you and buy from you, then if you concentrate on this thing a little, then think about it, if any person comes to you, he will buy something from you, if he buys something, then you will enter in your cell, you will enter, it means that every time a person is coming, he is entering in ours, so if I want to know how many times that person buys from me, then I check his name. How many times has his name been written in my entries? If I find out how many times his name has been written in my entries, then it will definitely become a fact. That he has bought something or the other from me as many times as that is why I have included him in the entry of the sale. So, we will do the same thing here. So think about it, here I have to check about a person how many times he has come but is there any consideration of any value in this? Rather, I am checking how many times his name has been written, that is why inside the formula, when you apply count if, then you will do a second tab, then here there is range, there is criteria, but There is no value because we don’t need the value, so we have to count how many times it is written in it, so you have taken the range in which you have to search, fixed it with f4 and after that you have done comma which means the criteria to find, you have to search for them, just enter, then it has come to you, see SF Nava, it is 28 times in the whole month, see the maximum, Golden Leaf has come to you, no, the maximum has come to you, True Harvest or Organics, so this is If you understand it in a very simple formula, then it is a very simple formula. From this simple formula, you have taken out all the insights about how something is going on in your business, so that is your sum formula. If any doubt arises anywhere, then please ask, I know this thing remains a constant for some time, but here also we are doing it in great detail, still if there is any doubt. Please note that you keep commenting, keep commenting because you will get their reply one by one one by one one by one one by one. Now let us move ahead and look at the formula. We have completed the home tab. We have completed our basic formula. Now we should move a little towards the tab. Now what we are going to do in the next tab is insert tab. So see, we have completed our home tab, we have completed our basic formula. After completing the formula, now we should move forward a little in tabs only. Now what we are moving towards is Insert Tab. Here is your Insert Tab, inside which there are different groups, Which is Table, Illustration Chart, Spark Line, Filter, Link, Comment for Insert Tab. If I summarize one thing and say that the Insert Tab is mostly used, then you can create and link the Insert Tab with this. Creativity. Mainly creativity, if you are creative or doing some work like creativity, then you need insert tab. Along with this, you can also do the work like reporting easily through insert tap. Now through creativity, you also get dashboards, so the most important for you is if any tab comes after home, then comes insert tab. Inside the insert tab, you can see the options, which are tables, inside which we can prepare tables. After that comes the Pivot Table. Pivot Table in itself is very useful for reporting. For now, I am giving you an overview of the Insert tab. After that, we will do the groups one by one. After that, you have the Illustration group. Inside the Illustration group, there are different types of things like there are pictures, there are shapes, there are icons . We will talk about all these now in the charts. Basically, I am going with a scenario here and that scenario. This is that we have Pivot which is useful for reporting, Charts in Plus which help in generating insights in creating your dashboards, if they help, then in Plus you will see filters which are your slicer and timeline. You have already used the slicers for the table. When you were reading, now the use of timeline will come with your pivot only, so I can say that there is a group of filters which has slicers and Timeline is the end, so these things are not complete in the complete reporting. This is a huge chunk in itself, which we will not do with the insert tab. We will do it separately and will do it at the end. Why do we do it at the end because what is the result of anything? It has the insight from which we will take the decision. There is a dashboard, so if I put it in the middle now, then it will not be relevant, you will not be able to connect because half of the things are available, half of the things are not available, now the advanced formula is there. If you don’t even know the advanced formula, you have to do it, so only after that, if we do the reporting, we will understand it better, that is why we will do it later, then what is left, the illustration, we will do it now, we will do the spark line, we will do it now, we will do the links, we will do it now, okay, so let’s complete the overview here, now we will do the insert tap. We are going to do that, we are going to do the illustration group. One second, if something comes first in the illustration group, then what is it? As soon as you click on the drop down, you will get three options, this device is stock image and online pictures. You can insert any picture from wherever you want. If you do this device, then it will ask you the location inside the device. If you do stock image, then the stock images will be shown here which you can directly insert . For online, it will be shown online. Now like I insert a picture from here, okay, I have inserted the picture of the boxes, so look, this picture has come here, now I have to arrange it a little, so I arrange its size in this way, look here. Okay, see, one thing is journalized for the insert tab, so understand it very carefully. From the insert tab, you insert anything, whether it is a picture, whether it is a shape, whether it is a table, whether it is a pit. Be it a table or a chart, if you have to make any changes in it, then you cannot make changes from the insert tab. Then we will say ma’am, then what can we make changes in, if only in that, we will have to make changes. See, whenever you insert something, what you do is click on that thing, then you will see that a tab is created above here, look, I am clicking outside, the tab is gone, I am clicking on this, the tab is clicked out. The picture format has been done on this, that is because if I have to make any changes inside it, then I will click on it here and I will get all the options here, I will get all the options here or I can right click and go to the format picture, then I will get all the options here. The options which are here in the extensions too, like these extensions are not visible here in full, they are visible here on the format control. You go to anything right click. Do format, go to picture or go to format, then you get all the options here to change them. So you understood. You insert anything from the insert tab. If you want to change any thing inside it, then a separate tab will be created. Changes will be made directly from it. There will not be a separate tab. I don’t understand. Right click on the same thing. Go to format. You can explore all the options from there. What did we learn here? Insert a picture. Now picture. I clicked on it from here, suppose I have to remove the background, I can do correction, I have to change any color, see, I wanted to show this kind of color, I have shown it, no, I want to show it a little brighter, so I have shown you the way you want to show the color, you can show it, okay after that, you have to show some artistic effect, what kind of effect should come or any other kind of effect, like this kind of, then you can show the effect in this way, I did not like it so much, I made it normal. I want to keep it in this way, I have kept it, after that you want to compress, the size of your picture is very big and you want to reduce it, then you can do that too. Here, if you want to change the picture itself or reset it, you can do that. After this, you want to frame beyond them. Look, if you want to do the framing in this way, then do it. This frame looks fine to me, it looks beautiful, so I did it, okay, I understood, after that suppose you want to change the color of the border of the picture, then I did. If you want to apply any effect on the picture, like I took this yellow color for glow, then it came, after that, the picture layout, if you want to show your picture in some other way, then you can do it like all text, if you want to put any text etc. in it, suppose you have done it here, if you want to make another copy of it, then what you have to do is either you select it and do control C and go to the side and do control v, then one way is to copy it. Look, I have made a picture here, the second way is this, you go to any picture, click on the end control and hold the roll, just drag it down, just drag it down, just drag it down, so in this way you can make many copies. Okay, now as you have done this, if you go to the picture format, suppose you go to the picture format, then bring forward send backward, this means to bring it forward, let’s say I am this picture . If I want to bring forward from this picture then I will bring it forward, so see that it has not come outside, I have to keep it behind this but if I want to keep it in front of the one behind then In this method, if you want to change anything on your pictures, you can do so. Now let me tell you one more thing, whether it is a picture or a shape, how will you know that it has been selected. As soon as you click on it, whether it is a shape, a picture, or whatever, you click beyond that, then bubbles come in the form of these bubbles. You are seeing these points. Yes, if you are seeing these points everywhere. That means there is a selection there, these are not visible, that means there is no selection, these are visible, that means there is a selection, okay, so from here we have learned about the picture, you want to crop it, you can also crop it, you have learned about the picture, after that suppose you come to the insert tab, I click outside, in the insert tab, Next comes to you, there is a shortcut key of the picture which is good for shape, I will also tell you the shortcut key of insert. It is N, like the shortcut key of home is H, its N is N, press Alt, see N is visible and the picture starts with P and stock starts with S, so S, then look, this window opens with you, whatever thing you use very often, just remember its shortcut key, okay shapes, look, shapes starts with SA, so if I press Alt and S H, then the shape will come, okay from here we can take any shape, I took this shape. I have made it, so here I will teach you a lot of good things in the shape later. I will do simple things. Now I have to make any changes in the shape, so look, I cannot do it from the insert tab. If I click on it, then look at the shape format. If it was a picture, then the picture format is this shape. So the shape format has to be changed. The shape has to be edited. You can do it from here, you have to write something inside it, double tap, your cursor will go inside, you will be able to write inside it too, okay. Okay, from here you have to change the color of the shape, you can change the color, let me assume that this color looks good, so I have taken this color. Look, this is the cursor, you can move it here and adjust it. Okay, after that, you want to change some color here. You can do that. If you want to keep some outline, I want to keep the outline yellow, so I have kept the yellow outline. If you want to give some effect like you can get the effect of glow, then you can change the glow in this way. Take the effect. Well, here if you say in the text, you write some text inside it, you Accounts My Bad Accounts Expert, you had to write this, you took this, after that, suppose you fill the text, you want to make it in black color, you want to outline it in black color, you want to outline something in white color, if it is not looking good then you make it black so that it looks darker, do you want to apply any effect, do you want to apply some reflection in this way, then see this reflection has been done, you want to fix it. Yes, you have selected it, gone home, normal, aligned it in the way you do alignment, formatted it in the way you do formatting, see how well it has come, you are not liking this effect, go here and change the text effect, reveal, you can also do this method, see, you can change anything in this method, OK, now assume that Bring Forward and Forward are exactly the same, you click on this. Do it, hold it with control , bring it backward, so you can do it in this way, okay, I have to delete it, I have deleted it, after selecting it, you had this for the shape too, if you right click on it and go to format shape, then you will get many options here, just as there were for the picture, you get all the options here also, it is totally up to you from where you access it, after that you go inside the insert tab. You will see the icon. Click on the icon. Let me tell you that as soon as you click on the picture shaped picture or the stock image, then look from here also. You can go directly to the icon cutout, people, sticker, illustration, cartoon people or you can go to the icon separately. If you want to go to the icon, then you can also go to the separate icon. From here, suppose I take an icon, I took this plane, I inserted it, this is my icon, now if you want to make any changes inside this icon, then I can go to this icon. When I click on it, the graphic format comes up. By clicking on it, the shape format comes up. In the graphic format also you have to change the shape of the graphic. Let’s say you have to change some color, you have to fill something inside the graphic, you have to make the outline of the graphic yellow in color and if you have to apply any effect on the graphic, then I have kept all these look, similar, similar kind of off. So that it looks good, bring forward backward, you know all this, you have to crop, all these things are same, right click on it and format graphic, then the options will come here, all the things are exactly the same, go to insert, after the icon, I tell you the 3D model, in the 3D model, you click, from here we take the emoji, there are very cute emojis, trust me and from here we took this emoji and will insert this emoji, look at the pot once. For this, I made it a little smaller and placed it here, after that I do a little bit on the side. What is a 3D model? You can move it in any way, okay, it’s totally up to you, how do you have to keep it and just look at the face, yes, it is a cute emoji, so now you have to change anything inside it, click on it, the 3D model comes up, you have to reset something from here, what is the way to do it, if you do not understand, then you can do it like this. Or you can move it directly from here, it is fine. Bring forward a backward. You know that by right clicking on the format 3d model, the main thing is to get the rotation done here. In this, you can get the rotation done directly from here. You can get the rotation done manually by entering numbers there. It is the same thing, in this way you can also insert the 3d model, after that you get smart art. Smart art is done in a way that your diagram does not. As soon as it is listed, it is processed, it is processed, if you want to show any type of relationship of cycles, then like you, I took this process one and I did OK, so it came here, now I decrease its size a little, not a little, but I decrease it a lot. And if I have to make any changes inside it, then I can make changes inside it too. How I clicked on it and here both smart art and format came , what is the format for the things inside. To change and smart art means I have to change only a shape, for that suppose I want to make the shape fill orange, so this is not looking good to me, white is fine, it is fine in this way, well, it looks fine for now, if you want to make any changes inside it, then you can do it directly from here, all the features are the same, you can also format the shape by right clicking, next comes to you, go to insert and screenshot screenshot . Let me tell you, if you do this in the screenshot, then if I do not have any screenshot in my system, then it is not showing. If you already have any screenshot, then it will show the other wise. Screen clipping, what does screen clipping do? Now, this will appear on my screen and suppose I take any screenshot, from here, I have taken any screenshot by doing like this, I have taken a screenshot of it. Okay, so look at this screenshot, it will appear here. Let me just adjust it. First, I have added this image here. Okay, now I zoom it, see, this is my image, the screenshot that came is coming in the picture format, I have to make any changes, I can do it by right clicking on it, doing format printer and clicking on it, then the effects etc. which were applied on it, will be applied here also, okay, you can use format printer also, so here we have completed our illustration group, now let us move ahead with our spark. Before reading groups towards line group, I remembered one thing which I have to teach you, what is a picture insert in a shape, so let’s see, suppose I have taken a shape, sometimes what happens is like we are making an invoice or anything, then we have to put a logo, so we keep adjusting it, so it is better that we take a shape and insert a picture inside it, now you will say, yes of course you take it. Right click, go to Format Shape and from here go to the fill option, here you get picture and texture fill, click on the picture and from here you can choose your picture, after inserting it, I take a stock image, from here we take these buttons and insert it, then in this way you can insert any picture inside your shape, first thing, then this is the second thing, let us assume that you are someone very creative in this. Shape has to be given, sometimes what happens is that you have taken a laptop with green screen and you want to show something inside that laptop, then how can we do such a thing, we will right click and here there is edit points, click on edit points. If you do this then you will see that points have appeared everywhere. Now your cursor is also changing. Now you can make anything happen with it, like made it like this, then from this point we made it like this, any kind of shape, like suppose I have to make it like this at this point. It has to be made like this. It is becoming kind of A, isn’t it? It is becoming kind of A. Now I will take this shape a little and make it look tight, now I understand. That is , if I want to do more on this point, then I will right click and do edit points and I have to stretch this one a little bit more, stretch this one and move it here a little bit and now I have to make this shape tight like this, so look, I have made a shape, I was just making a random shape, ch is a a, now suppose let’s look at another shape, we have taken a shape, we have taken a rectangle shape, right click here. Okay, now the picture has come, this picture has come, okay, now I will right click on it, I will do edit points and let’s say okay A points, so I have made it like this, look, it looks exactly as if there is no screen, it looks exactly like that, look exactly like we have created a separate LED kind of that screen, you can make any shape in any way, see, you can make any shape, anything is fine in this way. You can edit their points and create any shape. This is a problem for general people, but it can be done very easily here. Now we can move towards our spark line topic, for that we will need a data, so quickly let’s see what will happen that there are charts made inside the cell itself. There are very small charts which tell you about that data. We understand the charts as soon as we see them, so they are not charts, basically they are There are spark lines which we can create. Now suppose I want to see all the marks of Aarav Sharma in the form of a chart here. So what will I do. I will go to the cell in which I want to show it. I will go to that cell, after that I can do whatever I want to create a spark line. First of all, whenever you have to show a trend, you use the line, then you will take the line. Here you have to take the data range, the data range means which you You want to show that you have taken the data range, location range, I had already told you, go to the cell where you want it, if you do not go to that cell, then here you can put it in the location where you want it, you do OK, then it has come to you in this way, see, it has come in this way, now I will make it 60, it will come in this way, now see, I had just explained to you last that if you insert anything from the insert tab, then you will have a tab for that. One way it comes out is that I can drag it directly, then I will have to go through all the formatting one by one, I will have to change the thing or I will have to change the entire selection, so now what I do is, I click on it, I go to the spark line, first make changes in it, later I will drag it. Okay, what is the edit data here, meaning if you want to change the data itself, then you can do that here on the line column, let me say this. If I want like this then I can do it directly. There is no need to go and do anything. Look, high point means what is the high point of this entire data. 47 60 2040’s 60, then see second is high point, what is low point, 20 which is maths, what is negative point. Negative edge is true, we do not have any answer. What is the first point, from where it started, meaning 47, what is the last point, where it ended, 40 markers. Which will show these markers, like high point, low point, negative point, if we have turned it on then it is showing all the points through the markers, okay, now you know which point is which, okay, I have also told you from here, according to what I am telling you, if you want, you can also change the color of the spark line. Firstly, the spark line means the line that remains, if you look, I have made it red, then the line itself has become red, okay, if you want, you can change the color of the spark line. You can also change it. I am keeping the color of the spark line black, after that you can change the color of the marker, like leave the negative point ready, whatever the marker is, you can show it yellow if you want, or you can show the marker green if you want, I have taken green, or we can show the marker with some other color too. Which is blue, so we have taken these blue ones, after that we show the high point with green. Okay, we show the low point with red, you can show the first point with blue, so look in this way, blue green red red, now you will understand by seeing this, you can drag it, you are not able to see it, so I do one thing, I fill it with color so that you can see it a little better, now you can easily do not fill it just for the sake of showing, it will look very strange, just now you can see this thing clearly, so I have inserted it, just like when we have the spark with the column. If you want to make a line then you can do that also. You have started applying the formula. You go to the Insert tab and then go to the column. Give the data range here, after that you do OK and you have to change any things inside it, like here you have to make the negative points, the high point, you have to make it green, you have to leave the low point red, you have to make the first point blue, just double tap it or drag it and your spark lines will appear. Similarly, you have to do the same for Win Loss. You will go to the Insert tab, you will go to the Win Loss tab, the data will give the range, you have given the range, after that you will do OK, so this is where you got the markers, now you have understood how the markers work, then in this way you can change the colors of the marker, okay, it is up to you, in which way you want to see, in which way you want to show your data, you can use it at that place, so this was your group with Spark Lines, where we have completed about Spark Lines, this is it. All the options were there, after this the link comes to you. Now we will read about the link because of the filter, we are going to read with the pivot. Now we will read about the link. What is the link? For the link, I will need a sheet where we have many sheets like we have this sheet. Now suppose I create a main sheet and write anything here. First of all, I write a name which is written here. Data creation is ok. Creation, we have written this name here, Data Creation. Now suppose I want to put a link on it so that if I click on it, I will either reach the data creation sheet, then in such a case, we can insert the link. You can either go to the cell and click on the link, this window will come up or what can you do or what can you do directly by pressing the control, because what do we call this link, we call it hyperlink. If you do control H then the replacement will come K is the last alphabet so control key is fine, you can remember control key. If you press control key then you will get a window like this. Now let’s see what is there inside the window. First of all assist file and web page. If you want to tell any web page then you can tell. Okay place in the document. If you want to link to any document which is inside this workbook then you can do it from the document. Create a new one. If you want to create a document or want to attach an email address, then you can do it. Now we are going to explore both of these, like place in the document, so we had taken data creation, this data creation is here, comma, click it, OK, now see that it has changed, now you will click on it, you will go directly to the data creation page, okay, which sheet were we on? We were here, now this does not mean at all that we need to have a sheet. I have to take the same name like there is date and time formula but I write Accounts Expert here, okay and by going here, controlling it, going to Place in the Document, I link it to the date and time formula here, so it doesn’t matter what is written here, if I click on it, then access to the date and time formula is okay, so it doesn’t matter at all, it doesn’t matter at all what you have written, where has our sheet gone. Okay, we were here and we come to sheet one, okay, so here we learned, now after this we have to learn one more thing like suppose we have to do a web page, now I copy the link of our website here, here we took the link of the website and from here I copied it, now I go to my place in the sheet, write here web page or website, okay, here we did it with control, after that we took the web page one and we get here the browsed pages, current folder, all this, so Go to browse pages, enter the address here which I want to link, I have linked it, I have done OK, now I have one more thing to do. I will delete it from here so that you don’t think that we have taken the same link as before, we have taken the end here and okay, we have opened it, now we go and click on our link on the website, as soon as we click, it will take a little time just because this is the work of the internet and see, it has directly redirected us, directly on our website, we have come to our website, so in the same way, if you want, you can add any kind of link in it. You can attach it, it will redirect you there itself, okay, how do you have to do it, press the control key, your hyper link will come from there, that thing will be attached, here I have told you both the things, place it in the document and in which way you can also place the web page in this, the third thing is that your email comes in it, you have to log in for the email person, so you can log in that thing or you can directly create a new document, so here we have told The major point is that the link has been completed, after that you get the comment. What is the difference between comment and note? You are also hearing the note when we were doing go to special. We were doing special in pay special. In go to special, there was both comment and note. There was note in go to special. So, what is done with shift f2, like what is done with shift f2, this one is fine and one is this, you get this. Comment is fine. Comment, you can write anything like. Defaulter and Anything Okay, now what is the difference between these two, look for the difference, we need a data data, if we get it, then we can tell the difference, like suppose I have this data, one second, I take some good data, just give me a minute, we have taken this data, okay, we have this data and suppose I have added it here by doing shift f2 in such a way that the payment is pending for this person, so we have to take care of his payment pending in the next time, do this, OK and here. Also, I showed it through shift auto that the payment is done, I showed it here, so this is a note that whenever I go, the same will be visible to me and otherwise I can’t do anything in it, only these notes will be visible to me, only that girl can add a comment here, to add a comment, I showed payment pending here, I did this and I see, it is written here, if you press control enter, then it will be posted, then it is posted, now you will go to this. So the comment is coming but here it gives you the option that means his payment has not come till today, never mind, his payment has not come till tomorrow, never mind, the payment has not come till tomorrow, no problem, the payment has come today, so obviously you want to remove it, then you can right click on it and here you can resolve the thread that the thread is resolved, now whenever you go to it, resolve will show that brother, payment first. It was pending, now it has been resolved. Now let’s say, if you want to delete it, you can delete it. Now, if you want to delete it, you can delete it. Okay , so this is the difference between the comment and your note. This was your comment which got resolved, which you can delete. These are your notes which are visible as it is. You cannot do anything inside it. What you have written is there. It is done in that way, okay, so here we have completed the comment, you have given the link and also the comment, after that the text comes to you, the text is nothing, this is a text box, you will say that it is a text box, I don’t understand, see, it is very easy, the way you have inserted the shape, then you will go to the shape, then the first thing that comes is the text box, don’t you see, this text box has come, so the same text box is directly given separately here, this is also a text box, see, it is the same, you will click on it. Even if you click on it, the shape format comes, so it is the same as I told you about the shape, it is the equation equation or symbol equation, I tell you many equations are already there, ink equation. Suppose you want to write an equation and now you have like you are using a pun tub like me, then you can write any equation here like Why is he considering, he is considering the sum, he is not considering anything, 3 4 is not considering anything, he is considering the fear and the rate as zero, that is, in this way you can make any equation, like I have made this equation, it is behaving like an equation. Let me make one more equation and show it, it is not of much use but still if you have any use of it then you can use it ok just give me a minute equation, we will take ink equation and like you can write this x up in y = 239 in upon 435 multiply by 3 That equation will come, then this was a method, so whatever creative thing was there, it has come in the insert tab. We have completed our insert tab here. Now we will move ahead towards our page layout tab. Now the next tab that comes is the page layout tab. What does the page layout tab do? See, whatever you are creating data and doing, if you are obviously reporting, then there might be chances that you will need all that in hard copy also. So, if you want everything in soft copy, then in such a case, you will need a lot of Page Layout tab because it helps you in printing. Okay, so first of all, let’s have an overview here for once. The group that comes here is the theme group, which we have also read with the cell style, that if we have to change all the colors, then how can we do it? You can do it from here, like I have changed the palette here, so whatever is the initial a which is our home. The palette that was there inside the tab has been changed. Okay, here inside the cell style also, the colors of the palette have changed. Okay, if you want, try changing any palette here again and make it green. Now you go to home and check your palette from here and check the cell style from here. It has changed. Okay, so these are our palettes, which we are here to change things in the entire data. After that, we have the page setup, scale to fit sheet comes. Option comes and arrange comes then mean these three come here which is page setup scale to fit and sheet option ok so before we do this let me tell you why we are doing all this so that we can print right then print how do we select our data and take control . It is also visible that we can connect the printer, that thing is different, the properties of the printer etc., I am not talking about all this here, I am talking about all the other settings related to print, if you setup its end page here also, then other settings will open, then you, I am defining this thing here so that there is no confusion, the settings here and the settings here in the page layout are the same, it depends on you, from where you like to do it, do you like it better that I am here. I make the changes and after that I go to see the preview, then make the changes there and if you think that no, I do not understand what I have to do and what not to do, I want the changes to be reflected, so you can make the changes from here too, those changes will be reflected to you here, okay, so we will make some changes from here as well as from there, but don’t get confused, that is why I have already told you that this thing is going to happen in this way, let’s go now. We move towards one group each. The first group that comes is the page setup. So we know how will the work be done without theri. Our work cannot be done without theri. Our alt okay just give me a minute right now, first of all we will come to the page layout, we will come to the page setup work. First of all, what is the margin? Now what is the meaning of margin? What is the meaning of margin? So we hear profit loss margin, there is that margin over there. Don’t you see, this is your paper. Okay, I ignore the drawing. Do it, this is your paper and I am talking about the paper that comes to you generally and when you look at that paper, you can see the lines inside it in this way, there is another small line in it, okay, this is how the paper is visible and here a slight extra is left so that you can turn to the next page, so tell me one thing, here you are left for the title and for other things, here you can write the serial number etc. and you can write the other things. Yes, this one is left blank space for you and if you talk about exam, then you yourself come here with a line so that the teacher can write his marks here, then what do we say to the one who leaves this area on the side? What is called margin? What is called margin? We say that we have left margin on the side and the middle area which is now I make it a shaded area, a second shaded area which will be this middle area, this one which will be the middle area, inside this you write correct, inside this you write, then the outside area you have left is called margin. Now I will show you or tell you one or two things right there itself. One, you have seen the normal thing, two more things come that let’s say. You have this notebook here or this page of notebook, okay, one is this page and one is this page, okay one, I have done this where also I will do the yellow part, that is your writing portion that you can write here, so we did it here and it is here now I highlight the writing portion where you can write, you can write here and here you can write in this, you can write in this portion, okay so you one Tell me one thing, when you talk about the margin inside this one, you are seeing that the margin on the side is very high, so this margin is called wide margin. What is called wide margin in which there is less space for writing and more space on the side and right here, if you see that there is less space on the side and more space for writing, this is called narrow margin. And how basic understanding or common sense is that if you assume that you have large data, then obviously you You would like that the data on the side should be less in space and my data should come on the same page, then you will use narrow margin. If suppose you have a little data and it should look a little better in the page, then you will use wide margin so that space is saved on the side and my data should come in the middle properly. And if you have a normal situation, then you will use normal margin and not the normal margin as it is then it is fine. Similarly, now you understand the three types of margins, go to the page layout. There are three types of margins within the margin, normal, wide and narrow. We can also customize it. To customize it, we can do it by ourselves. It should be so many centimeters. It should be like this. We can do this by ourselves. It should be horizontal. It should be vertical. Look, it is visible here, the horizontal center on the page should be horizontal and vertical. So, you can do all these things. Now how to do this, once we Let’s look at my data here, if I go to control, my data is coming in this way, the complete data is not coming, then what do I do? Look from here, either I take the margin narrow from here and now go to control, then see more data is coming, first it is coming till the product name, now it is coming till the state or look here also there is an option of margin, you can click here also, you can do custom margin here, I make all the things zero, I definitely want

margin. Otherwise look, the space is gone from here by mistake, it was removed from me, we will go back to the custom margin, we will make everything zero 0 0 0 Row and OK, so look at this whole page, even a little bit of space in the whole page, now the data cannot come on the side, there is no sheet, there is only this much data, so that is why it has done till here, so here I have not left any margins at all, my data is coming in the whole page in the whole page because I have set it myself, customized it if you want. If you don’t customize then you have normal wide narrow. Now if I did wide then only this much data would have come. If I had done normal then this much data would have come in normal. If I had made narrow then I would have had data in this manner. But what I had done at that time was that I had customized everything, I had made it zero, so I make it zero for once , from here I made it zero, made this also zero and did OK, so my data has come in this manner. Okay, next we come to orientation, now let me explain the orientation a little creatively so that that thing can be remembered, now I am telling such a thing and if it is not remembered then what is the use, so just give me a second, now let me explain it to you, see, all of you must be taking selfies, taking pictures, so whenever you take a picture, you have held your phone in this way and now you are taking a picture, so which mode is this mode? Let’s say portrait mode. You are holding the phone in vertical form. The form in which your reels come and shorts come in which form does it come in portrait mode? Suppose I do it like this. Now if I am clicking your picture or clicking any picture, then in which mode am I clicking? Which mode is it in landscape mode? This is landscape mode. If you are giving a picture or youtube0 video, obviously most probably you will be watching it in this way. Right, by doing this in this way, then in which mode are you watching? In landscape mode, if you were watching it like this, then in which mode would you be watching? In portrait mode, then it is fine. Similarly, we can adjust our data, it is up to us, how do we want to print, click on the orientation, look at the portrait, the picture is also visible here, portrait or landscape, we have the data is big, we need to show it in landscape, then do it in landscape, if you want to do it in portrait, then do it in portrait, from here, let’s say for now, I control p, control p for a second, then I have the data coming in this way, okay, let’s say now I once from here I will also tell you from there, I will control p, then look, it is coming in landscape mode, look, now everything is coming after writing till the price. I was not getting the columns in landscape at that time because there are more columns at the top, so I should have done landscape. It was not coming in portrait. Well, you can change it from here also. I told you that all the settings are there here, you can do portrait from here too, it is not looking good in landscape, that’s why we do it here because here we have to do it. You get a direct preview of what is there outside, then we have to come here and check, this is giving me a better clarity, this is giving me a better feeling, my data is visible in it in a very good way, so I will keep it in landscape, okay, so here we learned the next thing, that is our landscape or portrait, which is the orientation, after that comes to you the size, you click on it, many types of things are already given, so either you Pick it directly from there that I have to pick this, I have to do this, I have to do a legal document , I have to make a statement or I want a3 size, I want a4 size, do this, I will definitely tell you a very basic way to understand it, whatever document we make, whatever documents we print, all of them are done in A4, okay and if there is no problem in understanding, then I will tell you that as this number decreases, I will say a3. a2 So that means the size is increasing, the size is increasing, okay and as soon as I say a5, a6, it is getting reduced, now let me give you an example, there are documents in a4, inside a3, your sketch which you make is so one page, the thick page comes, that is your a3 and there if you talk about the pages of the notebook then a5 will come and if it is a small notebook then a6 will come, okay then it is the reverse. It is said that as the number is decreasing, the size is increasing and as the number is increasing, the size is decreasing. Okay, so in this way you can see that the normal document that we prepare is within A4, rest it is totally up to you that in which you have to do it, then that is your size, after that comes the print area. Now think of it, you are in your data, here you control p for a second, by controlling p, the complete data comes and you are seeing. Yes, there are 52 pages coming below, this is such a huge data, but you say no, I don’t want all this data, I only need the state and that much data, I only need this much data, so select the amount of data you want, after that you go to the page layout, after going to the page layout, click on the drop down of print area and set the print area from here, this is done, now you go to control page, only that data will come which you have selected, rest of the data will not come, look below, it is one page. Earlier, how much was coming, 52 pages were coming, so what did you do here, set the print area, what did you do, set the print area, okay, if you do not want to set the print area, then you will go here Clear Print Area, now look, press control, it is complete, right here it is complete, if you want to set the print area, then you can set the print area from there, after that you have the option of breaks, what does it say that if you want to insert any break, then we have inserted break here. So look at this line, my data was here at that time, look here for a second, I had put a break in my data here, so my data is here. Till now everything else is coming below, in this way you can apply brakes, you remove them for once, then these brakes are gone, one second reset all page breaks, look at ours, I take it in normal view, our data has come in normal view, I go here, only after three headings, I insert the break here, okay, one line has come, now I control p, so see, two lines have to come on the initial, in everything else. The data is coming in two lines in the initial because I had put a page break. After two lines, only two lines are coming there, so you can break it as per your wish. Now you have put this break wrongly. So what can you do, go to the break point, reset all the pages, now do control p, then your data will come in the same way. Basically, suppose you have to put any type of break anywhere, you have to show the entries till here, you just go here and break it and then Press control and see that you have got so much data. If you want to leave then simply go to break and reset all pages. After that press control and see that all your data is coming in the normal way. So in this way, if you want, you can also insert a break. After that comes print tiles. Okay, sorry. After that comes background. Suppose you have this Excel file which is visible behind you, which is Excel like this. If you want to insert something in the entire Excel, it looks beautiful. If you want then you can put it, we don’t use it, but it is not used that much, but if anyone wants to do something creative, then you can do it. Let’s say I take the logo from here, I don’t have any pictures like this, we can take a picture from here, so see, this is how the logo will be placed, it is present in the entire workbook, it is present in the entire meaning sheet and if you want to remove it, then just delete the background and it will also be removed. Okay, after that comes the print tiles. Inside the print tiles, there are many settings which help you in printing in different ways, like if you click on the print tiles, then look inside the print tiles, there is the page, there is the margin, there is the header, there is the footer, there is the sheet. Let us know about the page. Suppose my data is not being adjusted. Now I want to adjust it, so I have two options. First of all, look at the orientation. I have done the scaling. You can also do the scaling here. Will read, if the option here has come inside it, then you can read there also, after that the print quality is OK, fine margins are there, which I have read, the header is the footer, which we will read and all the things inside the sheet sheet, whatever we have to change, look at what is there now, print area, print titles etc. You already know that turning on the grid lines means that if you want that whatever I want to print, the grid lines should be visible, then you can turn it on, you want that the black end. If the data is in white then you can turn it on. If you want draft quality or heading of row and column, then you can turn it on. We do not want that. Down the over over the down. The way you want to order the pages, you can do it. Now we have done the down the over, which is right and you do OK. Now look, you come by controlling p and see that the colors have gone from the heading because you had taken black and white as an option there. Now if you do not want black and white, then you can print it. Go to the tiles , go inside the sheet, turn off black and white and do OK. Now turn control panel and see that the colors have come back. It is totally up to you how you want. From here, go to the print tiles. If suppose you do not want the grid lines, you can remove them. Okay, now I will tell you one more thing that suppose you turn the control panel and here the heading is appearing on your first page but the heading is not appearing anywhere on the second page or third page. In such a case, you If you get worried about not being able to see the data, then in such a case, you can get your heading repeated again and again here. You will go to the print tiles and look inside the same sheet. It is written here, ‘Row to repeat at top’ or ‘Column to repeat at the bottom’. There is nothing on the left like if I want to repeat, then I will not take that. If your data is horizontal then you can take it. Right now our data is vertical, so we need row repeat. We have to do this, we will select it, select it and do OK. Now look, now you control p, after that look, you go to any page, look, I look below, I am on page 20, 21 , but all your headings are appearing in every page, so this In this way, you can put any heading you want to put in every page. If you want to remove the heading, then go to the print tile in the same way and remove it and do OK. Now when you control p, your heading is no longer coming here. If you want to put it, then you can go and add it. Okay, here you guys have learned this setting, now we are left with two settings of the page which are Chch is page which we will learn inside scaling and from here we will Okay, so now let us learn both of these things. First of all, let us learn our header footer . What are header footers? Suppose, let’s take a page here. Here we have taken a page and inside the page you will see that there may be a name of your company at the top or anything else you want in every page. If you want, you can write the page number at the bottom. So what we write above is what we call header which we write in the space above. And what we write in the space below, we call it footer, so it is okay, you can also customize your header footer inside your document, so how will it be, like in the page layout, first I go to my data, it can be in two ways, either I can go to the print tiles and from here I can go to the header footer and write here. Ah, either I can choose from here what I want and or else I can write a custom header here, I want it in the center, I want it in the left, I want it in the left. I want it on the right. I want it on the right. I want it in the center. Suppose I want to write Accounts Expert. I wrote Accounts Expert and OK. And here in the footer, I want to write pages. So look, I will not do custom footer, I will take pages from here. Page one, page two, page one. Took and I have given OK. Now I will take a preview tomorrow. I will do a p here just because we don’t have space. Look, page three is also being written and accounts export is also coming on top. So let’s do one thing, this is the margin and we keep it narrow, so see here Accounts Expert is written below. If you are going to page one next, then Accounts Expert is remaining as it is because we had customized it and the pages are going as you are moving. Look, it is going on in every page of yours. Okay, you can do it in this way. If you want to customize the footer, you can do it. As of now, Accounts Expert is visible in the middle, if you click left and right. If you want, you can do it from there itself, there was one way, see what is the second way, you get different views here, you will also get it in the View tab and here also, you go to the page layout view and directly from here, if you want, you can write something else, like let me say here, I write Accounts Expert in small letters in short, earlier it was written there or wait, I write Accounts Expert Accounts Expert app.com, which is our website, okay. We wrote this and entered it and after that I have come to the normal view. Now I did control p, so look, now above here the account is written as expert.com which is a website and see it is being written in every page. Okay, so in this way you have two ways. Either you can write directly by going to the page layout view or you can go to the page layout and see that the page layout is the same and this is also the page layout, so the thing is the same but as per your choice, what do you remember? What do you want to use, then you can either do the page layout from here or go to the print tiles and customize it by going to the header footer here. You see it visible here. If suppose you want to remove it, now you say that you want to remove it, then the methods of removal are the same. Either go to Easy Out there and remove it from there or remove it from here, then they will be removed. Okay, I will keep it here now, so here we have done the whole group of people with page setup, now the thing is. Now comes scale to fit. Suppose I control p. So look here, 64 pages are being made. I don’t want it in 64 pages. I want it in 50 pages. Look, to do it in 50 pages. There is anything to be done in 50 pages. Look, what is the maximum that can happen? One, I can reduce its margin. Okay, I don’t want to reduce the margin because the data has to be shown in a small way. So what can I do after that, which is the data, the size of my data. If I can reduce the size, then how will I know how much to reduce the size? Look, I have two options either I keep reducing the size myself, like I kept reducing the size in this way, it is okay and after that now if I control it, then it will be more. It is able to take entries. Look, my data has become smaller. Now it is able to take more entries. Is it okay or what can I do like custom scaling? I will tell you, wait for a second, click on it here, the same window comes, you come here, either I told it what size to take, I don’t want to tell it the size, I don’t want to tell it the size, I keep it at 100, just keep it at 100 for a second, I I want to tell you how many pages I need to fit in, I need it in 50 pages, now you do it, okay, now according to you, he has taken 62 because he knows because I told him that brother, I need it in 50 pages, now brother, you see, after how many pages you need to do it, will you give me the correct answer, if you give me the correct answer, then now it is 50 pages for me in 20 pages, okay, because we had made the height wise, we fit in two pages. Will do one second one and wide by okay t and from here we will do 25 and okay let’s see once let’s look at it now it has come to 50 pages and it did it comfortably and what it has done is scaling on 81 has shown that whatever multiple we get na I took the multiple that the width of two pages and the height of it in 25 pages adjust it in this way you can adjust it from here also you can adjust it from here also You can do this or go to the print tiles and from there you can also do the page settings from here. You have all the options from where you have to do it. It’s totally up to you. After that you get grade line views and print view. If you want, you can turn it off or turn it on. You will see the same according to whether you have put borders or not. If you have not put borders, let’s say Control A, I do Alt H B A, I do Control A, Alt H B A, I did one second. So my data is gone, even though I am on control, see grid lines are coming, I have removed them then why grid lines are coming then why should it not come because in our page layout the grid line is on, now I have removed it, now I press control, then see now grid lines are not coming, if I turn on these here, now I press control, then see now grid lines are coming, so even if you have not put a border, turn on grid lines, that border kind of off you. It will be visible okay, same with the heading, if it is in view, if I have removed it, then press control, it has come in this way, now the heading is not visible to you, whatever heading comes above, you turn it on, these headings have come, okay, bring forward etc., all these things are the same, we have covered the main ones in the print settings here, now what we are going to do next is that we will do the formula just like the formula, so this one. We are not going to tap the tab. Now what we will tap will be the review tap and then we will tap the view. As its name is, its work is basically giving you review by doing things and helping you in doing things. The first one comes for spelling. Let’s say I take some data here, let’s take a small data like I took this much ta, copied it, brought it here and pasted it and just I did it like this, okay, control A, did Alt OCA, now assume. Take, I make some spelling mistake in electronic, removed this in fashion, removed this in fashion, okay now suppose I want to get it checked, I took this and after that press f7, either press f7 or click on spelling, the thing is the same and it is giving me a suggestion here that look, you wanted to write electronic here, did you write it wrong or wanted to write electric or wanted to write electronics or wanted to write electronica. I remember yes I had to write electronic so now you chose this one. After that see, you have the option Ignore once or everywhere if there is a mistake then ignore all but I don’t want to ignore it, I have to change it. Now the question comes whether the same mistake is still happening somewhere else too. So suppose we do one thing only at one place, I do it here at the same place, copy it, do it here too, do it here too, okay look now, selected the data, pressed f7, now it is saying ‘Electronic Aana’. Okay, if I ignore the one here, then you have understood the thing. If you accept that I make a change here, if I make a change, then it is fixed here, it has not happened in other places, it has not happened in other places, it is showing for other places, if I do change all, then it has been changed everywhere, okay, now it goes to the next page until it is clear that everything is there. The spelling is correct, it will keep telling further, it is saying here, do you want fashion, yes, I want change all, so it was everywhere, now it is saying spell check complete, you are good to go, now you can go, it is absolutely correct, so whenever you feel that your spelling is a mistake, you can check your spellings, it will suggest you that it is a spelling mistake and now you can correct it, inside the complete data, after that comes to you Thesis What is the thesis? It is a synonym in a way, suppose you have written a word, you have written answer and answer is such a basic thing, don’t you want me to write some advanced word for it, I will write answer here and will search for it, that is why I told you that you can call answer as response, you can also say reply, you can also say reaction, you can also say resolution statistics, you click on this, how many words are there inside this workbook, first look inside the workbook statistics. First of all it is telling about the current sheet, which sheet is open, about that sheet, the end of the sheet is g17, the cell with the data is 39, the tables are zero, the formula row is Sheets four, the cell with the data is that many cells and after that it is telling about the workbook, so whenever you want to know anything about your workbook, you can go for the workbook statistics, after that comes to you, check accessibility, now what is good and what is bad inside my report. It is better for me to search for a person to know this than I ask Excel itself to tell me what is better or not so I will click on check accessibility here so it told me here so what is it telling me hard to read text contrast so where is it saying here it is difficult to read okay so here it will suggest you current text color is hard to see consider a high contrast color so That the text is clearly visible because here if I had made dark green color here then it would have become more visible okay like I have crossed it out okay sorry we will go to the review to check accessibility okay so this is our clear missing all the text so see here the text is missing so it is telling me okay after that our rest of the things it is telling me okay the default sheet name is saying there are three sheets which have the default sheet name so you are seeing. If you don’t give the names of the sheets , then we won’t know which sheet depicts what, what does it tell, so in this way it has checked and told me and it will make me correct all the things one by one so that the report I make is at least a little better, doesn’t it help me, that is your check Accessibility Translate is normal, we do not use New comment Add a comment which is the same thing that we learned from shift f2 and then notes Notes: You have already learned where we had added the protect sheet. Here we had protected the sheet inside the format inside the home tab. The same protect sheet is now inside the review. There are so many options that they are found in many tabs, some will be found in the home tab too and some will be found in other tabs too. If we do the same work then there is no problem in that. We have done hide ink. Suppose I am using pe ink here, I have used pe ink here, anything. Ink has been used. Now suppose I want to remove it, then it gets hidden. Hide all ink on sheet or delete all ink on workbook. It gets deleted from the entire workbook. It gets deleted from this sheet or it gets hidden. If I delete from the sheet, then I deleted it from the sheet. Okay, so here we have completed our review tab. I am doing a little tab. If you are also like me, then I have completed my review tab. While practicing, you want to write. I use the pen tab. If you also want to do the same, then I am telling you for that. See, this prop is your pen, there is a brush whose thickness you can increase or decrease, so you can do this normally, like I am writing, you can write anything in this way, okay, after that you also get this pen, this eraser comes with you with which you can erase anything, after that this marker comes. With which you can highlight anything, after that suppose you want to delete the whole thing, then you select it like this, you can move it here and there and can also delete it, after that this arrow comes. Suppose you want to use the arrow instead of the pen, then you do the arrow. If you do not select the arrow, then it remains only a pen, after that comes to you Ink to Shape, so what will you do in Ink to Shape? Suppose you have created a shape like this. After rounding and then in Ink to Shape, I select it for a second and then I go to Ink to Shape, then see it has been converted to shape and it has literally been converted to shape, you click on it, see that the shape format will come, I will make another one and tell you like I have made it here in this way, now I will select it first because my selection will be from this and after that I will click on Ink to Shape, then this is my right. The angle triangle has been formed and now let’s say here I select it with arrows, then see the shape format comes here. Okay, ink to math. Just like we had written the equation, it is exactly the same that you can write the equation here, which we have learned in the equation. Replay of these, let’s say here I have done Tanu single here, anything like this, I have done anything like this and I want to see the ink spread, so look like I have moved my ink in this way. This has come in the format of video, okay, I erase it and okay, we can also delete it, so this was your draw tap, it was very easy, I thought that if you use it, then you should give an overview for once, so this was our draw tab, now we have moved towards our view tab, but still there is one thing left in it, so that is for that one thing, so we will definitely see it, rest I will tell you the most in the view tab. First you get the views: Normal Page Break View, Page Layout, Custom View, then you get this thing from here, so you do not need to worry about going there, you will go to the View tab, then you will see that the work is being done in an easy way, we should do it in an easy way only, so you can see it directly from here, after that, Grid Lines, lad, all the grid lines I was turning on and off till now, I was doing it with the shortcut key T, Alt , you can do it from here. You can also turn it off. Look, I had turned it off for now. Now it has turned on. Do you want to remove the formula bar? Remove the formula bar. Do you want to remove the grade line. Do you want to remove the grade line? Click on these three dots and do the Always Show ribbon here, now the ribbon has come back. Now from here you can turn off the grid lines and the formula bar and also the heading, so in this way, if you want, you can show the entire data on the entire screen, you can also make changes for the ribbon, you can remove the grid lines, remove the formula bar, remove the heading, okay, after that you get the zoom option, so you can use the zoom option. It is better if you explore from here itself, then you will click here, see here, you have to do 100%, 100%, if you want to zoom, then this list has come, if you have to zoom a lot, then you have to click on this, then it is in this way, it is better if you explore directly from here, if you want that list, then click on this, then this list will also come, so you do not need to waste your time by going to the view tab. You can do it directly from here, after that comes a new window. Suppose, the way I taught you, inside the format for the sheet, inside the home, you can copy it from here, then as it is, a sheet will be created. Similarly, if you want, as it is, a workbook will be created. Now our workbook or insert tab is basic. If suppose I make a new window, then the insert tab has come to basic two. Now suppose I want to get it arranged. So I have arranged all, how do you want to arrange it? Horizontal Vertical, I want to arrange it vertically. Okay, so look, all the files that were open have been arranged vertically in this manner. I did not want to arrange in this manner. It’s OK, I did not want so many files. Where were we, we were here. Okay, and we have arranged all the files for once, so in this way you can arrange . Only after this, you will get this view side by side, which view do you want with this, which class do you want with this, so these two views have come, now there are a lot of files synchronizing, if I do this, view side by side, due to there being a lot of files, this is not happening right now, you can also see it in the same way in the other wise, by moving here and there, OK, switch window, switch window, now we are free. First of all, let’s see what is the switch window? Suppose, I can directly jump to any file from here, but if I am confused from there, then I can see it directly from here. Like, if I want to go to Insert Basic, then I have come here. Okay, I right clicked on it, it came completely. After that comes Freeze Pin. What does Freeze Pin do? If you see, now I go down, my heading is not visible, so I am not able to see which thing is which, so if I want to freeze my heading, so how can I do that, whatever you want to freeze, you select the area below it, after that you go to the freeze pane and do the freeze pane, after that see, okay, we have selected the area wrong, we said okay, unfreeze from here and here, come here, from here and after that you come here, okay, now do the freeze pane, freeze pane, then see, this is how your data is being done, okay, directly here too and you If you want to unfreeze , then unfreeze your beans will also be done from here itself. Okay, at the same time, you have the option here, freeze top row directly. Even if you do this, it will become the top row. You do not need to select anything. Suppose you want to freeze the first column, then you see the top row is also there. If you go here and there, your date will remain as it is so that you can see this date is this and the rest of the things will remain like this. You have to unfreeze. Unfreeze it, okay, so in this way you can see your data, so here we have completed our view tab, now what we will do, let’s see what we will do now, I will teach one formula, I will teach two to three formulas that if you are looking at the data, then how are these data created, if you want to learn this, then now you can learn this in a very accurate way. See, first of all, what do we need, first of all, we should know this. Suppose I want the serial number, then I have given the serial number. After that I wrote the number , I want a party name, so I wrote the party name, after that, suppose you want any amount, then write the quantity, write the quantity, after that you want the rate, you write the rate, after that you want the amount, you write the amount, I make one data, I make another data and tell you, let’s make two data. Okay, what can you do for serial number, normally you will write serial number and just drag it as much as you want serial. You need a number, here you can take 10 serial numbers, which is enough and take one more, okay, we are making 10 entries for the party name, now let me tell you for the party name, you can use Chat JPT, all two here too, you can integrate your AI but we will do that later, but now we will use Chat JPT, what will you do, go to your account, write Chat JPT here, you will enter, after that you will You will go to the official Chatpati from open, you will click on it and here without logging in, you can do whatever you want with it, you will tell him give me 10 random Indian business names, then he will create it and give it to you and now you can copy it, okay copied and you go to your data here, after that paste it here, then you have these names, quantity for quantity and rate, amount for amount, then this will come quantity to rate. But for quantity * rate, if you need some values ​​here, then here we will apply a formula, what is the formula? One is Rand formula, all the formulas are Rand, all the formulas are random, okay, what is random now, we will apply the random formula equals to rand between one, so let me explain the formula to you, first let’s do one thing, Rand formula, what does Rand formula do? It gives a random number between one and one, put rand formula, tab it, what is it saying, I just don’t want anything, I just turn off the parentheses, turn off the parenthes, hit enter, then look, it will give a random number, okay, what does rand between do? Equals to rand between tab, it asks you, in between which range do you want the number, like I want a number between 100 to 200, so I asked what is bottom, what is 100 up. Top what is 200 pence of enter so it gave me the middle of that now you notice this changed rand formula whenever you apply it or do any activity the whole formula changes like suppose I have written a here it has changed write anything here d whatever I am doing this will keep on changing so this is a draw back of it but I will also teach you how to correct it okay so first we rand You will fill your data here using ‘Between’, after that I will teach you another formula. ‘Between’ tab, after that at the bottom you have to write which is the quantity, neither 500 is good, you can write 50 to 150, Pens of Enter, so here we have written the quantity, what can we do in the rate, Equals to Round, ‘Between’ tab, after that at the bottom, take 1000 in the highest. Take 5000, turn off the pens and enter it and double tap here. Here you can put any formula of yours. If you put the formula here and just check then you have created the data here. Now what is its biggest draw back is that it will keep on changing, so what will you do to ensure that it does not change. Select all the data, select both of them, do Control C and go to the same place where it is, do not go anywhere else, do Control Alt v at this place and in which Now change it, this is the formula, convert it into values ​​and do OK, then see that now the values ​​are written here and the values ​​do not change, the formula changes because there is a reference in it, so now it will not change. Now you can do whatever you want, after that you can do whatever formatting you want in it. If you do not feel like doing formatting, simply press Alt O A. This is a shortcut key of your auto formatting. Where you can use any key and give OK, its formatting is done, you just correct its alignment, then look, you have data ready, you get worried like this, let’s create another data, here I will take the rest from here, I have taken this thing, instead of party name, I will take student name, okay and here I want student name, here we will call only four GPTs, give random 10 Indian names. With first and last name, okay, we have entered and it will give us, okay copy it from here, come here and paste it, so it comes to us, now we will write here Hindi, here we will write English here, we will write maths here, we will write science here, we will write total here, okay now look, I need marks here, I know I need 10 rows, 10 rows have to be filled, four columns have to be filled, total, so I will get it later, so here we will put the formula. We will tap the array, see how much is required per day, how much data is required, 10 is required, 10 entries are required, then write 10, how many comma columns are required, Hindi, English, Math Science, four columns are required, four commas are minimum, if there are marks then minimum can be zero, maximum can be 100, minimum row can be maximum 100, if you want to keep some more minimum maximum then you can keep comma, now it is asking for integer, see if you want that Decimal number will also work in the result, so put false for me, but if you want it or not, I don’t want decimal number to work, then put true that I should get complete integer, then it is totally up to you, what do you want, I have to do true because I want complete number, I turned off the parens and entered, then look, it came in one go, but there is a problem with it, do anything, if there is a change, then there should be no change, what did we think for that, what did we do to select this data? We will do Control C, we will do Control Alt v, we will enter, and see, in this way your data has now been converted into values, now you do not have to do anything, here you press Alt equal to 2, here it comes Control A, do Alt o A, press A here, let’s say I want this formatting, I have done the formatting, okay, your data is completely prepared, so in this way we prepare the data for ourselves, now we will enter our advanced formula. Let’s move towards advanced formula. First of all, I am going to take the formula that we have. If I talk about ifs, then look, we have done no ifs. Okay, so now we are talking about ifs. What is ifs? What is ifs? It is the one where there is multiple condition. When we talked about ifs, what did we clearly write when we talked about ifs that brother, single condition is single. We had written the condition, just like when we talk about ifs, we have this plural word, so now we have a multiple condition, now it can be any multiple, which is more than one, okay, so here we go with a normal scenario like now see, here the rating is given and here the name of the party is given, so what is inside this scenario, we take two things because there is more than one. We have to see the condition that if the rating of a person is below three or equal to three then we call him good and if he If it is above three, then what do we call it? We say excellent. Okay, we can keep these two things that if it is like this, then this is this, if it is like that, then this is the condition here, so what can we do here, we can put ifs formula, ifs tab, okay, this thing, no, we can do more than one, just because now you have made only a single condition, so now we do with two conditions, okay, so what will we apply logical test here. What logical test will be applied, who has to be checked, who has to be checked, you see these things, no, I have already made you know that now all the terms will come, you have already done the logical test, now you do not have to do it again, now you have understood it, so we have to check the rating, we have checked the rating, what have to be checked, is it greater than equal to 3, what if it is greater than equal to 3, then first let us take the Smollett one. Is it equal to 3 then what do we have to write that it is good and if this rating is greater than 3 then what do we have to write that it is excellent. The value of true value false does not come in it. It just has to be told directly in it that write this, then see it has come in good, you double tap, see it is five, I make it four, then see it has come in excellent, I make it six, that’s it. If I give a five, then see if it comes in excellent, then in this way you can do these things. If suppose you have multiple conditions, how will you do it in this way, then you may have to apply more look ups, you may have to apply Will tell, okay, I take it like this and delete it, okay, I had prepared this report, on this side, I have taken the names of all the parties, on this side, I have taken January, February, March, this is my data, inside which I have a look, let me tell you, date, month, name, category, product name, everything is okay, what do I have to do now, I want to know the total of the particular party, right now the same party must have bought many times, so I want to know in January. How much did you buy in February, how much did you buy in March and there is date and month written next to it, so I can find out this too, so here generally when it comes to sums, I take a sheet here. See, when we talked about sum if, if you remember, okay, we saw that you had a sheet with 10000 entries given by your manager, in which North, North East, West South entries were given, so you sum them. Now the same manager is saying to you that yes, it is okay that you have taken out North, now in North also tell me how much in January, how much in February, how much in March, how much in June, now he had single condition in North and put one more condition, how much in January, how much in February, so now what have you got, multiple conditions have become multiple conditions, so there are multiple conditions, so it seems ifs, that is why we will put even ifs, okay even. If you apply Ifs then you get the same things. See Equals to Sum Ifs tap, what comes out of that, Sum Range Sum Range, what to sum, Criteria Range, Criteria Range One, Criteria One. Look , let me tell you a little difference for once, so that you can understand well, here we will first put Sum F. Sum F, here was our range Criteria and here was our Sum Range, okay and here what will we do, Equals to Sum Fff, now this What is taking even range criteria range one criterion neither then criterion range two criteria two and so on because if you can take more than one then tell me one thing tell me one thing let me first ask what is this range in which you look for so here what is the criterion range do you look for the criteria no there is more than one criterion here so I have written criterion one and here I have written criterion range one. It is the same here, there was only one, so there was no need to specify whether there is one or two. Here the specification is done only because there is more than one criteria here, so here I wrote criterion one, here I made the criteria range one, here also you used to select the range first and then select the criteria, here also you are selecting the range first and then You will select the range of criteria, then a criteria of the same will come, okay, here the sum range was given, it was given in the last place, here you have given the sum range earlier, the only difference is that everything else is the same, now we will put the sum ifs, earlier I have shown you the data, we will put the sum ifs here, let’s do the data, yes, okay, we will do the sums, let me go here for once and I will put this data in one go or else one. Let’s put it in both the bars one by one, first find out the answer for one time, then find out the whole answer together because cell referencing, now we have got the hang of it, now we are talking about advanced things, so equals to sum, ifs tab, sum range, we need the sum range in our data, obviously we will take the sum of sales price, we have taken the comma, after that look at this formula, read the criteria range, one criteria, what is the names, is the names of the names. If you are searching for the names then in which name then you have taken the named range, okay comma, what is the criteria, what is the criteria, you go here, Bharat Innovation is in even F, comma, after that, criteria range two, now you have January, February, March, this was also your condition, so now you will go here and where will you get to see this, whatever you have made for this month, you got this, after that you have f2, okay, don’t fix it now, comma, after that you have this. Here, who has to be checked, I have to check January, enter two answers, it may not be of Bharat Innovation, it is good, this is the way we enter this data, now what is it, I tell you how to calculate complete, in this there may be only zero answer, no sale was done in January, that is why it is here, then I delete it from here, they will sum the complete of complete, if that means we will tab all the completes, will give the sum range here. What will come, we have to take our amount, so from here we will take the sale price, this is the entire amount taken, tell me one thing, the even range is going to be the same for all, did we do this thing in Even F also, yes, it is going to be the same for all, fix it with f4, fix a comma after that, what is the criteria range one, what is your name, then what will be the range, there will be a column with its name, we have taken the name, is it going to be the same for all, with f4, it is going to be the same? Fix comma after that, if your criteria comes then what is the criteria? Whatever you are going to search, you are going to search all these names, na select all of them in one turn, comma after that, second, what are you going to search, this is January February, so first of all you have to take the range, then you will go inside your data, you will take the range from here, from where will you get this monthly range, have you selected this, is it going to be the same for all? It is going to be the same , fix it with f4, do the comma, I think, okay, I think, I will tell you later, okay, now what criteria do you have to take, so this is all in one go, if you want the answers of January, February, March, then select all of them, do not take the total till December, enter the complete answer till December, our data was such that selective sale was going on, so see, the entire sheet has been filled in this manner, so if you also want, then it is in this manner. Let’s see what we have applied, you may think that I have done it very fast, but if you apply, then do it very slowly with patience, reading each and every thing and understanding each and every thing. I will once again revise it to see what I did. First of all, I had to sum the range, so whose sum had to be done, I had to sum the amount inside my main sheet, Criteria Range, Criteria Range, what was to be taken, brother, I had to see according to my party name. Where will I find the party name? Inside the party name, in the main data, there is criterion one which we are looking for, criterion two in our months and criterion two which is inside our report, so in this way we have applied this formula and have prepared our sheet. Through the formula, if you were to apply the filter yourself, how much time would it have taken, then here you can create it directly, so here we have completed all the ifs. Well, there is a very small formula which is left with us, which is sub total, so we would like to see it further and see what is the benefit of sub total. I just want to tell you that, so I do one thing, I take a little data from here, let’s just take this much, okay, we will copy and paste it here separately, let’s do old OC. Now what do I do, I sum here. To do this, what do I have to do here? To make even, what do I have to do here? Tell me, I have to do alt equal to. I made alt equal to enter, so here I have got even. I do a little formatting on it. Okay, here I have got even. Now what do I do here? With control shift A, I apply a filter here. After applying the filter, I do any filter. I have to check the decor, so I did the decor and OK. So now I am not getting even here, then it is a big problem, so what do we do in such a case, we put sub total here, instead of sum, whenever we work, we should use sub total, what benefit does sub total give us, put sub total, do the tab, see what sub total says, it has a lot of options, so you can use any one in it, what do we have to do now, we have to sum, how much is the sum, is it nine pe, or I go like this. Should I tab or directly write nine like this, comma after that is sum like the formula of sum seems to be reference one reference to that means he is asking for the number then you will give the range from here, you will enter then your total will come, now you see, press control shift A, after that you take dicker from here and do ok, then see now it will show you the sum of whatever you want to sum, you can do car excrement from here, do ok then see it will show the sum. So this was your sub total formula which helps you a lot, so whenever you are working on any of your big data, you know that I have to apply a filter on it, later if I want to check the total then apply sub total instead of normal sum and it will give you a better result, so here we have completed our sub total formula. It is about advanced formula and not about look up. How can it be like this, what we are doing now. They are going to do their look up formula, what are they going to do? Look up formula is ok, look up formula, now why did I say this, so let me tell you its logic too. Look, we do three formulas, we do look up, A is look up and Bring it, search it, bring it, now you will say, what does this mean? I don’t even understand it. Suppose this is your manager. The manager has a complete data in which there are lakhs of entries. Now the manager has selected you out of 1 lakh entries. He has given you this and here he has made a report in which there are 100 entries in it and has told you to extract the data of these entries and give it to me. Take this data of 1 lakh entries. Take this from inside it. There are 100 entries, take them out and give them the specifications. Take out these 100 entries and give me these 100 entries. Will you apply a filter or not? Will you find out from there? No, this is a very time consuming process. So, what do you do? Do you use the look up formula? What will the look up formula do for you? We will go inside this data and will give you the answer of these 100 entries from this data. Okay, so now you understand this. If I talk about lookup formula in general, then how does lookup formula help you? If you want to extract some small information from big data and you want to extract some information from big data, then lookup formula is used. Now you will say that ma’am, lookup formula is used, so what is this and lookup H lookup And look up then comes to us A look up and then comes to us What is horizontal data? Do you remember I had made a special on you in which you were transposing the data, then the horizontal data had come, your that is your horizontal data is fine and single access data, why are we saying that, we will understand further, now suppose you have understood, why is it called v look up, why is it called h look up, both the formulas are the same, I do it like this, both the formulas are the same, if v lookup comes When I went, h lookup came. The only method is that when the data is vertical then apply v look up and when the data is horizontal then apply h look up. Now I am talking about these two, so h look should not feel left out, it should feel the most modernized. Why should it feel? One, x look up is a new formula, it is not in every version, it is in the versions after 2019 and the x look up is optional. Whose alternative is v for look up and h for look up, it is okay if you don’t know v look up, h look up doesn’t come, no problem, x look up comes, all the work will be done, if v look up comes and the rest don’t come, then there is a problem because h look up will not happen, h look up comes, even if v look up does not come, there is a problem, but if The same will be useful, this is an alternative and I would say it is an easy alternative if you have not learned V look up. Suppose you are in an interview and in his system only V look up works. Let’s see, I am going with a scenario that this is your big data or this big data with lakhs of entries, party name is written here, category is written here or product name is written here, region is written here, contact number is written here, is it okay in some way, this is your A column, B column, C column, D column, E column is okay and now you have to find the data inside it, so here you are making a report inside which the first name is written Raju, now you have to bring its contact details, what should you bring? If you have to bring the contact details, then basically you have to find Raju, who do you have to find, if you want to find Raju, then how does the look up formula work? When suppose this data, suppose I am creating a dummy data here, inside this data, this one here, I do not want to spoil anything, so I am creating it here. Suppose Raju is standing here, that means there is a person standing here who has to find Raju. Okay, so he should know that he is searching for Raju. If I I will not tell him that I need Raju’s contact details. I need Raju’s contact details. Will he search ? That’s why whenever they start the formula, they should know who they are looking for. Whom we are looking for, we call it look up value. What do we call look up value look up? What do you call look up value? Look up means whom to search for, go and bring whom to bring, that value, Raju is the look up value when your formula is started. If that person goes inside and searches, then he should know in advance that he should keep roaming around for a while, then you will tell him that wait, I had to find Raju, it will not happen like this, so when he starts the formula, right from the beginning, he should know what is the look up value, if we want to find Raju, then from here itself, our first question arises, what comes out, I write down here, the first question that comes out is that our look up value is extreme. It should be on the left because look, there is vertical data, so first it will go to the first column, first it will go to A. How do you read AB, CD, this is how you read, that’s how you check, isn’t it a systemic way? Check B first, then check C, then check A, then check G, then check G. Don’t do it like this. It will go to the first column, then to the second column, then to the third column, then to the fourth column, then to the fifth column. He will go and then he will find out, oh here is the contact details and I wanted the contact details from here and that too of Raju, he will find Raju here only, this Raju is here and after that he will go and check the contact details in each and every column, then the first requirement is that your look up value should be in the extreme left, if your look off value is not in the extreme left, because see, if any person starts searching for something. If you do it, it will go left to right, it will go left to right, you are going A B C D, if you are looking at yourself then you are going left to right, then if your look up value is not left to right, if your look up value is not in the extreme left, then your look up will never give the answer and mainly people make the same mistake. They know how to apply V lookup but they do not understand the parts of V lookup, that is why. If it doesn’t work then you understand its meaning now. If you apply it then you will understand better. Second second comes to you, what is Ajman? No duplicate look of value. Now let’s say no in this. No duplicate data. Data can be duplicate. Look up value should not be duplicate. Meaning if I say there are two Raju’s then you will not get confused about which Raju either tell him in a simple way Raju Sharma Raju’s anything but if you tell him only two same person’s name is in it then get confused. This will happen, then it will bring wrong data, that is why the look up value should not be duplicate. If the subsequent data is duplicate, then it will work. Look up value should not be duplicate. These two conditions are there. If these two conditions are satisfied, then you can apply V Look Up on that data. It will bring you the answer and give you the answer. Now see what all the things are there inside V Look Up. Now V Look Up works like this, now I will tell you more about the look up. Here, if A look up happens, A look up happens, in v look up, what does it do? It is checking each column. In H look up, it will just go to each column and check. It will go to the first row, then it will go to the second row, then it will go to the third row, then it will go to the fourth row. So the movement here is from up to down. Okay, this is the only difference, it is the same ajman, that is everything. Now let me tell you both the formulas here like what is the Equals to v look up tab. Look up value table array column index number and range look up So let’s write it and after that tell you like here we look up what is coming inside it look up value table array what is coming after that column index number and what comes after that after the column index number your true or false ok I will also tell you the look up h look up also here and tell you by writing h what is the meaning of look up h look up look up value now you will be able to understand the difference in this. Look up table array raw index number and true and false. Now see the difference between these two. Look up value. Look up value. Whom to search? Whom to search? So whom did we have to search there? If we had to search Raju, then Raju is yours. Look up value is the table array in which we have to search and in this we give the entire table so to search in which we do not give any specific thing. Like within the range, Pressa easily used to say, search in the party name, it is not there. If you give the complete data in which you want to search then the complete data is complete data but remember that the range should be on the extreme left which is your look up value. This is what I told you. Look at the column index number. In V Lookup, it checks in each and every column, hence the column is the index number. Inside it is the raw index number. What is the difference between the two, in which the answer is written, the column with the answer or the raw number and you tell this number by counting yourself and After that you get True or False True. You use Approximate to match whether you want an approximate answer or not. We will put False because we need an exact answer. Okay, now let’s go ahead and see if you understand. I will look at our data first. Name is Category. Product Name is Region. City is everything. After that you come here to v look up. Here we will apply the formula for Harmony Foods is equal to two. v Look up tab one second I had to zoom it a little bit here equals to v look up tab look up value Harmony Foods are looking for comma table array table array is where we have to tell all the data to it so you take your data and remember whenever in the table array, your look up value should be in the extreme left, there is no look up value in the extreme left because he will start looking from the left, your look up value will not be found in the left. And if it will not give you the answer, then from here on the extreme left our look up value, we have selected the data, comma, after that it says the column index number, what answer do we want, do we need a category, count the category, on the first page comes the name, on the second page comes the category, then what is your column index number, so you have taken two, comma, after that, what do you have to do, should I put true or false, we will get the exact match from true. If we want the answer then we will take the exact answer, tap on it and close it from here and enter, then see our answer has come here, okay now I will tell you by adding one more thing in it like I have added the serial number here, serial number and here I do one and here I have done this and made it a fill series, I take this and go to home. I took this format post, I clicked on it, once again and I am here to tell you that we look up, which is the mistake that people generally make and after that they say we look up doesn’t seem to look, we look up tab look up value look up value, we have to search this: comma table array table array, take the table array, they take it from the serial number, so you take it from the serial number, now tell me one thing, is your look up value in the most extreme left or not? That’s why the answer will not come, I am telling myself right now, the answer will not come, but let’s look at the column index number. First of all, there is the serial number. One second number is the name. On the third number, there is the category. If you want a category, then you will write three, comma, after that, false tab. Panis of enter. The answer will not come. Will A not come? Now the answer will come. Look at the answer. Equals to V. Look up tab. Look up value. Look up value. You have to search for a value. We are here. Okay sorry, had to take a look up value, I put back equals to v look up tab look up value, we took the look up value, comma, after that we will take the table array, table array, we have to take it here, now we cannot take the table array from here, what will we do, we will take it from here because what we need is in the extreme left, whatever look up value we need in the extreme left, we have searched from here, comma, after that now we will take our column index number, then the column index number. Now should I write two or should I write three because there is also a serial number, so we always have to count from where the range starts. Now where does our range start, it starts with the name, so the name is the and the category is the two. Whichever range you give, it seems to be the same, its data does not know the data before and after it, so that is why if you write two from here, then write two directly here, make a comma, do false, tap on the pencil. Turn it off and enter, you will get the answer. Okay, understand. Now suppose you can drag this. If you drag, will the answer come? What if the wrong answer has come? This is the wrong answer for you. Okay, so how will you bring the correct answer. To get the correct answer, see, we need the product name here. If I am doing it here, then it is 2 to 2, so ours was that, 2 is our category, so this is this . How to fetch the answer because it has look up value a2 and here it has taken our look up value b2, it has taken the look up value fashion, so what look up value is our fashion, otherwise you cannot do this, so now if suppose I have to do something simultaneously, then how can I do it, so either I have this method that I keep changing the column index number for each one, three for this, four for this, five for that, so this is a time consuming process. How can I put equals to we look up tab look up value comma, after that we will take the table array table array, now we will take it by name only, you know why we are taking it by name and whether the table array is going to be the same for all or not, then we will fix it with f4, comma, now tell me one thing , what answers do I need in the column index number, what answers do I need, I need category, product name, region, city, state, meaning if I count again. If I start doing 2 3 4 5 6 7, I want the answer till seven, then should I do it one by one because I write two manually and it is fixed, so when I drag, there is not even three in place of two because it is fixed, so what will you do in such a case? 7 Turn off the curly brackets, after that, remove the comma, remove the tub, turn off the parenthes, enter, your answer will come in one go, it is correct, see how correct it is, a2 is its look up value, a2 is its look up value, a2 is its look up value, ok, I still have one complaint from here that I had not kept this or that, so if you want, you can fix it, what can I do now ? I select it and just drag it over here, then see, it will give me all the answers, okay, this was one method, but this method with curly brackets does not work in the old versions, so in such a case, you can put a column formula here, what can you put a column formula, if I delete it here, then I tell here, the column formula will appear here, equals to and look up tab, look a value look a. Value taken comma table array will take table array you took and it is going to be same for all so fixed it with f4 now look column index number we cannot take curly brackets but We have to take something like this that if it starts counting automatically, then we will put the column formula here, then what will we do in the Column Formula tab, after that, if we want to count from here, then we will come to our V Lookup and wherever it is, then we have to take it, okay, after that we have to turn off the parentheses, put a comma, after that, false , turn off the parentheses, enter, so see, it has given me the answer, okay, so one way is also there, if in your If the curly brackets don’t work then you can use the column formula. Okay, this was your nested formula. Nested formulas are when you put another formula inside a formula. Here we have put a column formula inside a formula so that we get the answer. So this was your nested formula. So in this way we put our and look up. If I had to put H look up, for H look up also I have If there is data to be passed, then what do I do? If this data is visible to you, if it is in horizontal form, then we will apply H look up, okay, but before that, H look up is normal, it is used very less, so now what we will learn is that we will learn X look up, look inside Can’t go here, can’t go there, it should be on the left. There is no ajman, it does all the work with ease. Second thing, let me tell you what values ​​are written inside x look up . Array, just like you did not do in range, you used to directly choose the party name. Now in this also, directly choose and return array. What is the meaning of written array? Answer, just as in that, you did not do it by taking the same range. You used to take the same range or return it. Meaning, we have to tell what is the answer, find out what is the answer, what type of search is to be done and who has to do this search. Okay, so now we will put our Look up is done very easily, so we will directly take care of equal to We will fix the comma, after that return array answer, what is the answer, what is the answer, what is the answer, what is the answer, if we want the category answer, then we will take the category answer and enter, then see here, I should have fixed it because it is going to remain the same for everyone, enter and just double tap it, then you have the answer for everyone, but what should we do so that it gives the answer for everyone, so tell me one thing about us, if I have for everyone. If we want an answer then our look up value is going to remain the same and when the look up value is Y then the look up array is also going to remain the same, the only answer is what we have to change, what do we have to change in the written array, what should we do in the written array so that we have all these answers, right? We have to set it in this way, so let’s put it again. Let’s check once in which way we put it. We can see by putting lots of combinations, then look up X. We will tab, we will look up value, we will take comma, we will look up array, we will go to our data, look up array means where we will find it, where we will find it in the name people, we will find it in it, we fixed the comma with f4, now we need return array, in return array we need answers, from category to gender, so I selected till gender and the selection is done till the bottom, now it has come from c2 to h30 331. If I enter it directly, it will give me the answer. Is it Maharashtra Pune Male Gender Is it correct We check Voman Dress Yes is it correct and then now I drag it and bring it down Is it giving me the correct answer Fashion Suit South Kochi And see what answer was coming here I delete it and it was getting the answer here All West Vadodara Gujarat That means our X look up is wrong here Is it wrong They check so that If we want to understand it right, then look here there is a2, here a2 a3 a4 a5 is coming, it means it is coming right. But here also this thing is coming fine, that means the look up value is coming fine, the look up array is fine, now it comes to the point, now tell me one thing, if we want to find the harmony force, then our range is from c2 to h33, okay, here our same will remain the same, here it is from c3 to 332, here it is from c4 to h33, it means c should remain common and the numbers are increasing, the numbers are increasing, but We have to keep the number number the same. We also have to keep the number the same, so what will we do, we will put a dollar in front of C so that C is fixed, let’s try once and in front of H, now let’s see by entering. Hey, I should have done it here, let’s fix it with A4, let’s try and see only by doing, we will know where what mistake we are doing. When we entered, then see, now it is here. Now I go and drag it, then there is no impact on the answer, why not if I am here? If we had taken leti, what would have come to mean that C was already fixed, we should not fix C, we have made this mistake, now let us fix two and see, we put dollar in front of two, fix it with f4 and here also we fix it with f4, okay let’s enter, so what we did here is that the number is changing, right basically C and h remain the same, the rest of the numbers are changing and see your answer has come, what were you doing? Change of s and h to c and h was the same but the number was changing. Now I will try to explain it again so that if you understand it better then equals to If you want the answer then take the answer till gender but remember to press f4 so much that your numbers get fixed. C and H are fixed anyway but these numbers should also be fixed because the range is going to be the same for everyone and you press enter, you will get the answer and after that you can drag it because if you have not fixed the look up value then it will keep moving and you will keep getting such answers, then in this way From this you can apply ​Yes, let me do HMC like this, here I will write any name, like what we do is that inside this filter, we create a drop down with data validation, okay, I am going to teach you this later on, but for once here, let us create it, okay, so here we have the name, we will write any name here and after that we will have its formula, meaning its data will come in it, no matter how many times it is written, everything will come, so first of all for this. We need that whatever is your data in which you are going to search, I am going to search which also has duplicate entries inside it, so if there are duplicate entries inside it, then we are going to search in it, we keep this data here, it is okay for once, we are going to search inside it, now the thing is that we have to keep the same heading there and the other wise, our data will not come in the right way but remember that according to whom you are searching, your heading should start from there. If you want then we will take comma from here, copy it and go to our filter here and paste it here, so in this way your data has come here, now we will put the formula here, Equals to Filter tab, after that we will take the array, inside the array you have to give the complete data, so you will give the complete data from here. Well, the data you have to give is to be given by name, it is not necessary, you can give the complete data, you have given the complete data, comma after that it says Include according to whose name you are looking for. According to whom you are looking for according to the name,

then you will select it, you will do equals to and what should it be equal to, what should this cell be equal to, this cell should be equal to this cell, whatever you are searching should come inside this, enter it, so here just because we have to take it like this, in the date format, okay, so here he has brought me all the entries, whatever his Look, if the entries were not completely copied here, then here it has completely copied and brought it from the date, so all the entries that we had to take, all the headings which were to be taken should have been taken from the date, so it has locked it and if I say some other name from here, then look, it has locked the entries for that too, if I do something else, it has brought it’s entries and given it. You click any of them, it will bring all the entries and give it to you, okay. So in this way, if you want, you can apply a filter formula, if you have duplicate entries, then it brings that too and gives it, so this was your filter formula, you see, making a search box, this is what it means to make a search box, in this way, you create a box, write your name in it and your complete data comes below, then they say that the search box has been created, the name is written above and the complete data is below, so this is what happens, that search box is fine, next we move ahead. Look, till now you were working with this actual data and what was inside it. There was a look up value in the extreme left. There was a look up value in the extreme left. Now I do this work with the look up value. Whatever is there, I bring the shift category here. Hey brother, no problem, do control plus, sometimes things do not work, control v and delete this, okay. Right now I say that I want a category according to the name, then you will say that there is no look up value in the most extreme left, otherwise how will we look up? I will apply Datchi’s formula. Now how does the index max work, which is an index? Equals to the index tab. So look, what is required in it. Are arrays required? Raw numbers are required. Column numbers are required exactly the same way as we use in Laka etc. Raw numbers are required, are column numbers exactly the same? How does this work? It works on the intersection, basically it will find the data in two ways here, it will also find your vertical data, then it will also find the horizontal data, where the intersection will come, it will bring you the answer. Okay, so now how will we use this intersection, how will we do all the things, let us see, we will put the equals to index formula here, we will tab it, we will give it, we have to give the complete data, so we will give the complete data from here, it does not matter, you complete it. Give the data, don’t think that brother, yes, if it is a serial number, then don’t give it. Give a comma. After that, the raw number. If your data is vertical or horizontal, if it is vertical, then you can give the raw number in the vertical. What can’t you give, then instead of the thing that you cannot give, I am telling it in a very simple way. I have not gone into much detail because you will get confused. The formula is like this, that is why I am telling a very logical thing, the vertical data is raw. You can give numbers, you can not give, you know that we are applying a different formula of combination, then put the match. If there was horizontal data, then we could have given the raw number, then we could not give the column number, then there we would put the match formula in place of the column number, now here we will put the match formula in place of draw, put the match formula, do the tab, what does the match say, look a value, what to search, then you see what to search here, we have to search this name, isn’t it the name? You have to search comma, after that look up array, where will you get this name, it is exactly the same as you will get this name, right here inside this column, comma, after that you want exact match, less day, greater day, obviously exact match, do zero, turn off the parentheses, so till here you have put the column number, you have not put the column number, now you will tell him what is the answer, so you had chosen from the serial number, right? If you want answer category, then 2 is your column number. Is there anything left after that? Will we use comma? No, there is no need to do anything after that. Turn off the pennis and enter, then it has given me the answer. Fashion is ok, can I drag it? Try it by dragging. No, why can’t it? Why can’t it because the answer has already been given? I have given it a column number. Can I bring it like this? Yes, I can bring it like this, but here I have to do it. We will have to check the match because even inside the match we have given a look up value, is it correct? We will have to check that thing once again for the product name. What did we do? We took the array and took the array. We will select the entire data from here and the array is going to be the same for all. Yes, so it has been fixed. Comma after that, can you give R number in the raw number and vertical data? No, apply the match formula. Tap Do after that look up value. What is the look up value? You see, you need according to the name. You have taken the name. You have taken the comma. The look up value has to be changed again and again, so we will not fix the look up array. Look up array. Where will you get it? It will be found here in the name. So you have taken the name. The look up array is going to be the same for all. Yes, so you fix it. After that, we need zero exact. Take off the commas. Do the comma. After that, what do you need? Column index number. What do you need the answer to? Now you need the product name. The product name would have come anyway. There was no need of a match. There was no need of an index, but you tell me. 1 2 3 4. Forth on the fourth number and enter. Here the answer will come. Woman dress. Just drag it over here. So you have all these answers. Now we can drag it. Can’t we? Okay, so in this way you can use the index match. I just wanted to tell you a little bit, you all. Work can be done with v look up Lo, even if I change my heading in this way, your answer should change. Now this work cannot be done in V Look Up, why because there is column index number in Select it, OK, you have selected it, put a comma, after that the field means what is the answer you want, what is the answer saying, what do you want, give it whatever is written in this field, it is not there because we can change it, so give that comma, after that criteria criteria, you already know what we have to find, but here we give the criteria with the heading, when we enter, then this answer has come, now look, I am here. If I am changing it then look, the answer will change, this is me, no one of any kind will give you any error here, let’s put it once more like D gut did tab did what did we do in the database, we give the complete data in the database, give us your whole load data, okay, these are multiple criteria, then it comes in handy, you gave a comma after that, what is it asking from you, you will check this field field, whatever is written about it, give a comma after that, criteria. So the only criteria here is that it has to be given along with the heading, enter it, your answer will come , you check it, you change it, then see that it is getting changed, okay, so in this way we apply the D Gut formula, after that you get D Sum, D Sum also works in multiple criteria, so we will put Ds here, like Sum If is an upgraded version of Sum If, so if DCM is to be applied, DCM. Put the sum, if it seems easy, then put that, there is an alternative to that, tap the database, take the database, we have to get the complete data in the same way, we have taken the complete data, after that do the comma, after that it is saying tell the field, then from here we will tell the field, we want the amount answer, so we took this comma, after that it asks us in D Sum to tell our criteria, so now the D Sum is such that within which we have to give the criteria along with the heading, we have If you enter the given then this answer will come, okay what you have to do, everything is the same, you have to give the same database, you have to give the same fields, you just have to keep in mind that whatever criteria you give, you will give it along with the heading, so here we have completed two more formulas, f is d sum and d is gut, after this let’s do a formula which is large and small. Basically, assume that you have this data and you want to know that it is rank wise and not rank wise. We are extracting but give those five numbers which are the highest or give those five numbers which are Smollett, then in such a case you can apply the formula, see here you put large equals to large tab, after that array means from which you have to find, then you have to search from this, so we have taken this comma k means which values ​​12 2 3 4 5 This is what we need, top one is needed, top two is needed, top three is needed, then you take this and enter. If you do, the top five values ​​will appear before you. Similarly, the opposite will be given that if you want small then small will also come, just tab it, you have to give an array, give it a comma, tell him the meaning of top small, he will tell from the bottom, he says no, your rank came from the bottom according to that which is the lowest, according to that, he has gone away telling, so it was very simple but it should have been done, so I got it done for you, after that it comes to you, a we are mostly at our place. We have covered all the formulas that we need to know in advance. In this, I will teach you one more formula which is the finance formula. Finance formula. I want to explain it to you in complete detail. So let’s complete it with a case study. See, here we will take a very simple example. Suppose you have bought a phone. Okay, you bought the phone and you bought that phone for Rs. ₹ lakh. It’s okay. And on which interest of NM 12 is going to be charged, now you figure out how much its installment will be, so 1 lakh and you are going to pay it in 1 year, you are going to pay it in one year, then you see how much you will pay within 1 year, 1 lakh, then you have to pay the principal amount of ₹ 1 lakh, so its cost is ₹ 1 lakh, plus its discount on ₹ 12 means interest of ₹ 1 lakh on 12, then you will have this amount. How much becomes 112000, it becomes okay, now you have to divide this amount by 12, that much will be your installment. For example, for once, let us take 8000, that is, your 8000 is being made, so within 8000, you know that you have withdrawn only a little of 1 lakh, this is also the 12th installment, so your 8000 is being made. Your principal amount is also going inside it and along with it, your interest amount is also going there. Right, whenever you have to calculate the installment that how much money will I have to pay, then you apply PMT. PMT calculates the installment and gives it. When out of this installment, when you want to separate how much interest has gone and how much principal amount has gone, that means brother, I have paid how much principal amount and how much interest has been paid, then I will calculate the interest amount. For this, you apply IPMT and calculate PPMT to know the principal amount, then I can say that whatever is logical for you is fine, there is no such equation, PMT is equal to IPMT plus, PPMT means your installment, what is formed from the principal amount in interest plus, so this is how the formula works. Now let us see one or two things in the formula here. What are one two things, one two factors, one. So what is the factor that principal amount is the principal amount which is the main amount on which you have bought it. Okay, secondly, what is the rate rate? The amount of interest you have to pay, the interest you have to pay, now the interest you get generally, when P is written, that means enum means for the whole year. If I write this on 12, it is for the whole year, then how much will it be for the month, because of our formula. If it asks us in months then Ch is 12 but divided by 12 then it will be % of every month. Okay, after that it asks for time. Time means in how much time you have to repay it. Suppose if you have to repay it in years, then our formula asks us in months. So 2 * 12. We will answer 24 that we have to repay it in so many months so that because your installment goes, it goes as monthly installment. If it does not come for this reason, then what will we do here? Now apply our formula and see, here it comes to you, you can see what is the loan amount, it is a loan of 1 lakh, your interest is being charged, so how did you withdraw this much monthly, if you have done it at 10/12, then the monthly installment has come, sorry, the monthly interest has come, the loan term is said to be five years, so the period month should obviously be 60. It is 5 * 12 for 60 months, so now if you want to withdraw the installment, then what will you apply? PMT, will you tap? You have already calculated the rate, so you take the article, calculate it in advance, divide by 12, otherwise you will have to put a comma in the formula, after that on n, on n, what will be the time taken, to be repaid in 60 months. Comma after that, PV means the principal value will be this much. Enter, then you have this answer. Principal amount is an outside world, meaning we have to give this value, it is outwork. If you show this value as negative inside your formula, then this value will come positive. Otherwise, you can also keep the installment in negative. You have to know the principal amount. Now that you know the installment, you want to know that if my installment goes, then it will be in that. How much will the principal amount go to, then we will tab PPMT, we will take the same rate, comma after that, what are you asking but for how many years it is going to last, that is, we have to find out the number of years, how much principal amount we are paying in a year, or in that one comma, how much is the total going to be, go after 60 months or comma, what is the PV after that, enter lakhs, then see, this amount from this installment is your principal value and right there. If you take out the interest on pay then IPMT tab, after that you will give the same rate. You have to take out the year on the comma, but the year comma is once in a year and after that what are you doing on N meaning your months comma after that enter your PV then this much is your interest. If you total both of them then which is 21 24. This much is your installment going. This much principal amount goes inside the installment and this much amount of interest goes. So here we have done the basic, meaning it is basic, if you understand it well, then it will be basic. Other wise, you will get confused in this also. In the basic funda way, I have given you the finance related formulas here, so here we have covered all the formulas from basic to advanced. Now we will move towards our main topic which is going to be our pivot, where we will learn from reporting, where we will learn about dashboard. After all this, we will tap the data tab and developer, now let’s move on to it, so if you have watched this video till now, then I can definitely say that now you must have understood Basic Excel and Advanced Excel very well. Unfortunately, we have to stop this video here and the reason is that youtube2 If I am explaining pivot table to you, making you a dashboard, making you make a power query or making you make an AI tools and in the middle that video has to be ended there. That’s why we will bring part two of this video where we will cover all the similar topics, be it your pivot table, charts, dashboard, power query, DAX, VBA, macros, AI tools, all of them are going to be covered in part two of this, so you will stay with us, as well as all the content I have used here, you can access it on the app on top of our app. Go above and check the free content there, you will get all the sheets. Apart from this, if you want to do professional training, do live professional training, then you can join us. We deal in accounting software, data analytics and finance, so all the software related to this, you can explore them on our app, on the website or if any query comes, then you will meet directly on call or whatsapp2, till then you will get your Don’t forget to give feedback because from your feedback we get to know how we should bring content to you and how we can deliver the best for you. So let’s meet in the next video till then goodbye.

By Amjad Izhar
Contact: amjad.izhar@gmail.com
https://amjadizhar.blog

Affiliate Disclosure: This blog may contain affiliate links, which means I may earn a small commission if you click on the link and make a purchase. This comes at no additional cost to you. I only recommend products or services that I believe will add value to my readers. Your support helps keep this blog running and allows me to continue providing you with quality content. Thank you for your support!

The provided text offers a comprehensive guide to using Visual Basic for Applications (VBA) within Microsoft Excel. It covers a wide range of topics, from recording and editing macros to creating custom functions and user forms. Key concepts explored include variable declaration, data types, control structures like loops and conditional statements, and object-oriented programming principles. The text provides practical examples and step-by-step instructions to automate tasks and enhance Excel’s functionality. Debugging techniques and strategies for error handling are also discussed. The ultimate goal is to equip readers with the skills to create sophisticated Excel-based applications.

VBA Macro Programming: Study Guide and Reference

VBA Macro Study Guide

Quiz

1. What is the purpose of commenting your code in VBA? Comments are used to describe the code’s functionality and intent, making it easier to understand and maintain. They also help in recalling the code’s purpose after a period of time.
2. How do you rename a module in the VBA editor? In the Project Explorer window, select the module. Then, in the Properties window, change the “Name” property of the module to the desired name.
3. How can you access a macro stored in another open workbook? You can access the macro via the View tab (Macros -> View Macros) or the Developer tab. Make sure “All Open Workbooks” is selected in the “Macros in” dropdown.
4. Explain the difference between a Property and a Method in VBA. A Property is a characteristic or attribute of an object (e.g., name, color). A Method is an action that can be performed on an object (e.g., clear contents, activate).
5. What is the purpose of the “Option Explicit” statement? “Option Explicit” forces explicit variable declaration. This means all variables must be declared before they can be used, preventing errors caused by misspelled or undeclared variables.
6. Explain what “scope” means in the context of procedures. Scope determines where a procedure can be called or used. Procedures can be public, private, or undeclared; undeclared defaults to public.
7. Describe the purpose of the Immediate Window in the VBA editor. The Immediate Window is used to test code snippets, display the values of variables, and execute commands directly during development and debugging. You can execute or print by either typing “print” or a question mark.
8. What is a user-defined function (UDF) in Excel VBA? A user-defined function is a custom function created in VBA that can be used in Excel worksheets just like built-in functions, performing calculations and returning values.
9. What does the term “debugging” mean in the context of coding? Debugging is the process of identifying, tracing, and correcting errors (bugs) in code to ensure the program runs correctly and produces the expected results.
10. Explain the purpose of a “breakpoint” in VBA debugging. A breakpoint is a marker inserted into the code that causes the program execution to pause at that line. This allows the developer to examine the state of the program, inspect variables, and step through the code line by line to identify errors.

Quiz Answer Key

1. Comments are used to describe the code’s functionality and intent, making it easier to understand and maintain. They also help in recalling the code’s purpose after a period of time.
2. In the Project Explorer window, select the module. Then, in the Properties window, change the “Name” property of the module to the desired name.
3. You can access the macro via the View tab (Macros -> View Macros) or the Developer tab. Make sure “All Open Workbooks” is selected in the “Macros in” dropdown.
4. A Property is a characteristic or attribute of an object (e.g., name, color). A Method is an action that can be performed on an object (e.g., clear contents, activate).
5. “Option Explicit” forces explicit variable declaration. This means all variables must be declared before they can be used, preventing errors caused by misspelled or undeclared variables.
6. Scope determines where a procedure can be called or used. Procedures can be public, private, or undeclared; undeclared defaults to public.
7. The Immediate Window is used to test code snippets, display the values of variables, and execute commands directly during development and debugging. You can execute or print by either typing “print” or a question mark.
8. A user-defined function is a custom function created in VBA that can be used in Excel worksheets just like built-in functions, performing calculations and returning values.
9. Debugging is the process of identifying, tracing, and correcting errors (bugs) in code to ensure the program runs correctly and produces the expected results.
10. A breakpoint is a marker inserted into the code that causes the program execution to pause at that line. This allows the developer to examine the state of the program, inspect variables, and step through the code line by line to identify errors.

Essay Questions

1. Discuss the advantages and disadvantages of recording macros versus writing VBA code from scratch. In what situations would recording a macro be preferable, and when is it better to write the code directly?
2. Explain the different levels of variable scope in VBA (Procedure, Module, and Public). Describe how each scope affects the accessibility and lifetime of a variable, providing examples of scenarios where each scope would be most appropriate.
3. Compare and contrast the different types of looping constructs in VBA, specifically Do While/Until loops and For/Next loops. Explain their use cases, advantages, and limitations, providing examples of when you might choose one type of loop over another.
4. Describe the purpose of error handling in VBA. Explain the different error trapping options, discuss how to implement error handling using the On Error GoTo statement, and provide a detailed example of an error handling routine.
5. Explain how the Select Case statement and the IF/THEN/ELSE/END IF structures achieve the same purpose. Discuss the scenarios in which one might be more suitable than the other.

Glossary of Key Terms

• Argument: A value passed to a procedure when it is called.
• Breakpoint: A marker in code that pauses execution for debugging.
• Calling Procedure: A procedure that invokes another procedure.
• Called Procedure: A procedure invoked by another procedure.
• Code: Instructions written in a programming language.
• Collection: A group of related objects.
• Comment: Explanatory text in code that is ignored by the interpreter.
• Compile: To translate source code into machine-executable code.
• Constant: A named storage location that contains data that cannot be changed during program execution.
• Data Type: The classification of a particular type of information (e.g., Integer, String, Boolean).
• Debugging: Identifying and fixing errors in code.
• Declaration: Specifying the name and type of a variable or procedure.
• Explicit Declaration: Declaring variables before use (using Dim, Private, Public, or Static).
• Implicit Declaration: Using a variable without declaring it (generally discouraged).
• Function Procedure: A procedure that performs a calculation and returns a value.
• Immediate Window: A VBA window for executing code directly and displaying values.
• Intrinsic Function: A built-in function provided by VBA.
• Loop: A programming construct that repeats a block of code.
• Macro: A series of commands and instructions that are grouped together as a single command to accomplish a task automatically.
• Method: An action that can be performed on an object.
• Module: A container for VBA code (procedures, declarations).
• Object: An entity in VBA that has properties and methods.
• Object Browser: A VBA tool for exploring available objects, properties, and methods.
• Parameter: A variable passed to a function or subprocedure.
• Procedure: A named block of code that performs a specific task (either a Sub or a Function).
• Project Explorer: A window in the VBA editor that displays the project’s files.
• Property: A characteristic or attribute of an object.
• Public: A scope that makes a variable or procedure accessible from any module.
• Private: A scope that restricts a variable or procedure to the module in which it is declared.
• Run Time: The period during which a program is executing.
• Scope: The region of a program where a variable or procedure is accessible.
• Statement: A complete instruction in a programming language.
• Sub Procedure: A procedure that performs a task but does not return a value directly.
• Syntax: The rules governing the structure of a programming language.
• Variable: A named storage location that can hold data that can be changed during program execution.
• With…End With: A VBA construct that simplifies code by allowing multiple operations on a single object without repeatedly referencing the object.

VBA Macro Recording and Editing Fundamentals

Okay, here’s a briefing document summarizing the key themes and ideas from the provided text excerpts:

Briefing Document: VBA Macro Recording and Editing

Overview:

The provided text is a transcript from a course or tutorial on VBA macro recording and editing within Microsoft Excel. It covers various aspects of working with macros, from recording and cleaning up code to understanding procedures, scope, error handling, and using the Visual Basic Editor (VBE). The text emphasizes practical, hands-on learning, with numerous examples and step-by-step instructions.

Key Themes and Ideas:

1. Macro Recording as a Starting Point: The text highlights the value of recording macros as a way to generate VBA code quickly. It suggests recording, then modifying the generated code. “We’re going to record a macro again to get this lesson started, and along the way… whether we’re recording macros or we’re writing VBA code from scratch, we’re also going to be using properties and we’re going to be using methods.”
2. Importance of Code Comments: The document stresses the significance of commenting code liberally for clarity and maintainability. “ments are meant to describe your code it’s a good idea to comment your code liberally i’ve written code before and didn’t comment it and six months later i had to figure out what the intent of the code that i wrote was so comments are really good.” The comments generated from the macro recorder serve as a basic form of documentation.
3. Understanding VBA Code Structure: The text explains the anatomy of VBA code, including modules, sub procedures, function procedures, and the With…End With construct. It illustrates how recorded actions translate into specific VBA commands (e.g., Rows(“1:1”).Select, Selection.Insert).
4. Procedures: Sub vs. Function: The document differentiates between sub procedures (which perform actions) and function procedures (which perform calculations and return values). It explains how function procedures can be used as User Defined Functions (UDFs) in Excel worksheets. “a function procedure performs a calculation and returns a single value or an array of values so differs from a sub procedure.”
5. Module Management: The transcript stresses the organization of VBA code through modules and the importance of giving modules descriptive names. A prefix “mod” is suggested to identify modules in a list. “You want your module names to be as descriptive as possible… we don’t want them to be module one module two module three module four so we’re gonna use the properties window to make some changes to properties so we’re going to start with renaming module 1… we’re going to use lowercase mod mod to indicate that it is a module.”
6. Properties and Methods: The course material makes the distinction between properties and methods: “properties to change the name of a module we use properties to change the name of this particular sheet tab and a method is an action that is taken on an object so you’ll learn how to access methods along the way as well.”
7. Scope of Procedures: The importance of understanding procedure scope (Public, Private, Undeclared/Public) is discussed. Scope determines where a procedure can be called from. “Scope determines where the procedure may be used…If a procedure declaration is preceded by the keyword public this makes the procedure accessible to all modules in the visual basic project…If the procedure declaration is preceded by the keyword private this makes the procedure available only in the module where it resides.”
8. Variable Declaration and Data Types: The text emphasizes the importance of explicit variable declaration and assigning appropriate data types. Implicit declaration can lead to errors. Various data types are mentioned (Byte, Boolean, Integer, Long, Single, Double, Currency, Date, String, Variant). The Option Explicit statement is key to enforcing explicit declaration.
9. Intrinsic Functions (String Manipulation): The document introduces built-in VBA functions like Left, Mid, and Right for manipulating strings. It demonstrates how to extract specific characters or substrings from a larger text string (like a VIN number).
10. Conditional Logic (If…Then…Else, Select Case): The transcript covers conditional branching using If…Then…Else constructs and the Select Case statement. These are used to execute different blocks of code based on specific conditions. These control structures are analogous to the IF function in Excel.
11. Looping Constructs (Do While/Until, For…Next, For Each): The document introduces looping constructs for repeating code blocks. It covers Do While and Do Until loops, as well as For…Next loops for a specific number of iterations and For Each loops for iterating through collections (e.g., worksheets).
12. Object Variables and the Set Keyword: The course material explains the use of object variables, which hold references to objects (e.g., worksheets, ranges). The Set keyword is essential when assigning objects to variables.
13. With…End With Construct: The With…End With block is presented as a way to simplify code by avoiding repetitive object references.
14. The Offset Property: This property is discussed as a means to easily reference cells relative to a starting cell using rows and columns offsets.
15. User Interaction (MsgBox, InputBox): The transcript shows how to use MsgBox (message box) functions to display information to the user and InputBox functions to prompt the user for input.
16. Event Procedures: Event procedures are introduced as a way to trigger code execution based on specific events (e.g., worksheet activation). The example given shows how to run a macro when a specific sheet is activated. “as soon as we activated that sheet it ran our get new inventory calling procedure.”
17. Error Handling: The text provides an overview of error handling in VBA, covering the types of errors (logic, runtime, syntax). It introduces the On Error GoTo statement for trapping errors and creating error handling routines. “We’re going to get into trapping errors with the on error statement which includes understanding the error object writing an error handling routine and working with inline error handling.”
18. Debugging Tools: The transcript refers to using debugging tools in the VBE, such as breakpoints, stepping through code (Step Into, Step Over, Step Out), the Immediate Window, Locals Window, and Watch Window.
19. The Object Browser: This tool is described as a way to explore available objects, their properties, methods, and events, as well as to get online help. “The object browser allows you to browse through all available objects in your project and see their properties methods and events.”

Quotes Highlighting Key Concepts:

• “Apply a counting format to columns we’re going to make that plural columns g and then and h and when you move away from that line it will turn green again indicating that it’s a comment.” (Illustrates commenting and how the VBE recognizes comments.)
• “Clear contents is a method of the range object it would empty the cells delete everything that’s in the cells in the range add is a method of the workbook’s collection object and it’s used to create a new workbook and then you have activate and that’s a method of the worksheet object it’s used to activate a worksheet” (Illustrates the use of methods on objects)
• “the scope of a variable determines not only where it can be used but the circumstances in which the variable is removed from memory.” (Highlights the importance of variable scope.)
• “We need to tell it what values to assign to each variable and now we’ve told it where to display those variable values which column and cell to display it in by using our offset statements within the with end width structure.” (Highlights the importance of assigning values and specifying where to display)

Overall Impression:

The excerpts provide a solid foundation for learning VBA macro recording and editing. The practical examples, step-by-step instructions, and emphasis on code organization and error handling make it a valuable resource for beginners and intermediate users alike. The course’s emphasis on troubleshooting and debugging is especially valuable.

VBA Macro Programming: Recording, Modification, and Usage

Macro Recording, Modification, and VBA Basics

1. What are the benefits of commenting code in VBA, and how are comments created when recording a macro?

Comments are crucial for code maintainability and understanding. They explain the purpose and intent of specific code sections, making it easier to revisit and modify the code later, especially after a significant time has passed. When recording a macro, the descriptions entered in the “Record Macro” dialog box are automatically inserted as comments in the generated VBA code.

2. What is a “With…End With” block in VBA, and what purpose does it serve?

A “With…End With” block is a construct in VBA that allows you to perform multiple operations on a single object without repeatedly specifying the object name. It improves code readability and reduces redundancy. For instance, when modifying multiple formatting properties of a cell, you can use a “With Selection” block to apply changes to Selection.Font.Bold, Selection.Alignment, etc., without rewriting “Selection” each time.

3. How can you rename a module in the VBA editor, and why is it important to do so?

To rename a module in the VBA editor, select the module in the Project Explorer window, then go to the Properties window (usually found below the Project Explorer). Double-click the “Name” property and enter a descriptive name for the module. Renaming modules helps organize your code into logical sections, especially when a project contains multiple modules. Using a prefix like “mod” is helpful for quickly identifying modules in a list.

4. How can you access a macro stored in one Excel file from another Excel file?

To access a macro stored in one Excel file (e.g., vehicles.xlsm) from another, the file containing the macro (vehicles.xlsm) must be open. You can then access the macro by going to the “View” tab, clicking “Macros,” and selecting “View Macros.” In the Macros dialog box, you can choose the macro from the open file. The macro will be listed as [filename]![macroname].

5. What are properties and methods in VBA, and can you provide examples?

In VBA, properties are attributes or characteristics of an object, while methods are actions that can be performed on an object.

• Properties: Examples include changing the name of a module or a sheet tab, and you can do this using the properties window.
• Methods: Examples include Range(“A1:B11”).ClearContents (clears the contents of cells), Workbooks.Add (creates a new workbook), and Worksheets(“Sheet1”).Activate (activates a specific worksheet).

6. What is the difference between a Sub procedure and a Function procedure in VBA?

• Sub Procedure: A block of code that performs a series of actions. It does not return a value. Sub procedures are commonly used to automate tasks or manipulate data.
• Function Procedure: A block of code that performs a calculation and returns a single value or an array of values. Function procedures can be used in VBA code or directly in Excel worksheets as user-defined functions (UDFs).

7. What is the “Immediate Window” in the VBA editor, and how can it be used for testing Function procedures?

The Immediate Window in the VBA editor allows you to execute VBA code directly and view the results immediately. To test a Function procedure, you can type a question mark (?) followed by the function name and its arguments (e.g., ?MSPRStatus(10000)) and press Enter. The result returned by the function will be displayed in the Immediate Window, allowing you to quickly verify its correctness. The print command functions the same as the question mark.

8. Explain the difference between implicit and explicit variable declaration in VBA, and why is explicit declaration preferred?

• Implicit Declaration: Occurs when you use a variable without first declaring it using a Dim statement. VBA automatically creates the variable, but its data type may not be what you intend, potentially leading to errors.
• Explicit Declaration: Involves declaring each variable with a Dim statement, specifying its name and data type. This is the preferred method because it forces you to define the variable’s purpose and helps prevent errors due to typos or unintended data type conversions. To enforce explicit variable declaration, you can set the “Require Variable Declaration” option in the VBA editor’s options. This will automatically insert Option Explicit at the top of every module, forcing you to declare each variable before using it.

VBA Programming in Microsoft Office Applications

VBA (Visual Basic for Applications) is a Microsoft programming language integrated into Office applications like Excel, Word, PowerPoint, Outlook, and Access. It allows users to automate repetitive tasks and extend the capabilities of these applications.

Key aspects of VBA programming include:

• Object-Oriented Programming (OOP): VBA is an object-oriented language where everything in an application is an object with its own features (properties) and actions (methods). For instance, in Excel, the application itself, cells, worksheets, charts, and shapes are all objects.
• Automating Tasks: VBA enables automating recurring tasks, creating user-defined functions, and controlling other Office applications. It can attach code to events, allowing it to run automatically when an event occurs (e.g., activating a worksheet).
• VBA vs. Macros: While Excel macros are powerful, VBA offers advantages like attaching code to events, decision-making capabilities, looping structures, and the ability to create user input forms and dialog boxes. Macros have limitations because you are restricted to tasks that you can perform in the Excel interface.
• Excel Object Model: VBA uses a hierarchical structure of Excel and its objects. The application resides at the top, followed by objects like workbooks, worksheets, and ranges. VBA accesses these objects by moving down the hierarchy using the dot operator.
• Collections: These are groups of objects of the same type, such as all open workbooks (the Workbooks collection) or all worksheets in a workbook (the Worksheets collection). VBA code can loop through members of a collection to perform actions on each one.
• Modules and Procedures: VBA code is stored in modules. Sub procedures define specific tasks, while function procedures return a value. Procedures have naming rules and conventions.
• Variables: Variables store data in the computer’s memory during procedure execution. They have naming rules, scope (where they can be used), and data types (e.g., Integer, String, Boolean). Explicit declaration of variables is preferred to avoid errors.
• Language Elements: VBA has language elements like variables, data types, and intrinsic functions. Intrinsic functions are built-in functions that perform specific tasks.
• Control of Flow Structures: VBA uses control of flow structures to make decisions in code. These include conditional branching (If Then Else, Select Case) and looping constructs (Do While, For Next).
• User Forms: VBA allows the creation of user forms with controls (text boxes, check boxes, etc.) for user input. Code can be applied to these controls to perform specific actions.
• Debugging: VBA includes debugging tools to identify and correct code errors. The Visual Basic Editor has a debug toolbar for stepping through code, setting breakpoints, and inspecting variable values. There are three types of errors: logic errors, runtime errors and compile errors.
• Error Handling: VBA provides error trapping options using the On Error statement to handle runtime errors.
• Object Browser: The object browser allows browsing through all available objects in a project and see their properties, methods, and events.
• Code Protection: VBA code can be password protected to prevent unauthorized access.

Excel Macros and VBA: Automation Guide

Macros in Microsoft Excel are a way to automate repetitive and recurring tasks. While macros and VBA (Visual Basic for Applications) both contribute to automation, VBA offers more advanced capabilities.

Here’s a comparison of Excel macros and VBA:

• CapabilitiesMacros are limited to tasks that can be performed within the Excel interface.
• VBA allows for more complex operations, such as attaching code to specific events (like activating a worksheet), decision-making processes, looping structures, and creating custom user input forms.
• LimitationsWhen recording macros, users are restricted to actions achievable through the Excel interface.
• VBA removes these limitations, offering greater flexibility and control over Excel and other Office applications.
• Code Access and ModificationVBA enables users to write and modify code, including the code behind recorded macros.
• Users can access the Visual Basic Editor (VBE) to view and edit the VBA code associated with macros.
• Saving Files with MacrosWorkbooks containing macros must be saved in a macro-enabled format (.xlsm) to preserve the VBA code.
• Failure to save in this format will result in the loss of the code.
• SecurityExcel has security measures that, by default, disable macros upon opening a macro-enabled file.
• This is indicated by a yellow band with a security warning.
• Users can enable content from trusted sources.
• Trusted locations can be set up to avoid security warnings for files from known and secure sources.
• Creating MacrosMacros can be created by recording actions within Excel or by writing VBA code directly.
• The developer tab in Excel provides tools for recording, viewing, running, and editing macros. If the developer tab isn’t visible, it can be enabled in the Excel options.
• Macros can be initiated from the “View” tab or by using the shortcut Alt + F8.
• Running MacrosMacros can be run using a button in the developer tab or using Alt+F8.
• Macros stored in one file can be used in another if the file containing the macro is open.

Visual Basic Editor (VBE) in Microsoft Office: A Guide

The Visual Basic Editor (VBE) is the environment used to write, edit, and manage VBA code in Microsoft Office applications. Here’s a breakdown of its key aspects, based on the sources:

• Accessing the VBE: The VBE can be accessed from the Developer tab in Excel by clicking the “Visual Basic” button. A shortcut key, Alt + F11, can also switch between Excel and the VBE.
• Environment Overview:
• The VBE opens in a separate window from Excel.
• It has a menu bar with options like File, Edit, View, Insert, and Tools.
• Toolbars provide quick access to frequently used commands.
• Key Components:
• Project Explorer: Located in the upper left corner, it displays all open projects (files) and their components (modules, sheets, forms).
• Code Window: This is where VBA code is written and edited. To view a code window, click on a module in the Project Explorer.
• Properties Window: Displays the properties of selected objects (e.g., modules, forms, controls). Properties can be modified to change the appearance and behavior of objects.
• Immediate Window: Accessed via the View menu, this window is used to test function procedures and execute single lines of code. For example, ? msrpStatus(10000) will print the result of the msrpStatus function with the argument 10000. The question mark is the same as print in VBA.
• Modules: Containers that store VBA code. There are different types of modules:
• Standard modules
• Class modules
• UserForm modules – each form has a built-in class module that contains code related to the form and its controls
• Customization:
• Options: The Tools > Options menu allows customization of the VBE.
• The Editor tab includes code settings, such as “Require Variable Declaration,” which forces explicit variable declaration.
• The Editor Format tab allows changing the font size and style of the code window.
• Toolbar: VBA commands, like comment block, uncomment block, and compile project can be added to the toolbar. Right-click on the toolbar and select “Customize” to add commands. The compile project icon checks the code for errors.
• Debugging Tools: The VBE includes a debug toolbar to investigate errors.
• Breakpoints: Breakpoints can be inserted to pause code execution at a specific line.
• Step Into: Executes code one line at a time.
• Locals Window: Shows the current value of variables.
• Quick Watch: Displays the value of a selected expression.
• Object Browser: The object browser (View > Object Browser, or F2) allows browsing through all available objects in a project and see their properties, methods, and events.
• Help: Context-sensitive help is available by pressing F1 when a keyword is selected. This opens the Microsoft documentation for VBA.
• Code Protection: VBA code can be password-protected via Tools > VBAProject Properties > Protection tab.

VBA Procedures, Functions, Modules: A Developer’s Guide

Procedures and functions are fundamental building blocks of VBA (Visual Basic for Applications) code, serving to organize and execute specific tasks.

Here’s a breakdown of procedures and functions in VBA:

• ProceduresA procedure is a named group of statements that execute as a unit to perform a specific task.
• A sub procedure defines specific tasks, such as inserting a new row or adding column headers.
• Sub Procedures:
• Begin with a Sub statement and end with an End Sub statement.
• Can be executed in several ways, such as through a macro dialog box, by calling it from another procedure, by attaching it to a button in the quick access toolbar in Excel, or by attaching the procedure to an event.
• Event Procedures:
• Respond to specific events within the application.
• To create an event procedure, you must access an object’s events.
• Typically, the names of event procedures should not be changed.
• Property Procedures:
• Allow a programmer to create and manipulate custom properties.
• Outside the scope of the training course in the sources.
• Calling Procedures:
• A sub procedure can act as a calling procedure by bundling multiple other procedures together.
• A calling procedure calls other procedures to execute them in a specific order.
• FunctionsFunction procedures perform a calculation and return a value or an array of values.
• Begin with a Function statement and end with an End Function statement.
• Can be called from a sub procedure or another function procedure, or used in a worksheet formula.
• When created in VBA, a function procedure can only be executed in two ways:
• By calling the procedure from a sub procedure or another function procedure.
• By using the function in a worksheet formula, where it becomes a user-defined function.
• Can be tested using the Immediate Window in the Visual Basic Editor.
• ModulesModules act as containers that store VBA code.
• There are two main types of modules:
• Standard Modules: Used for storing standard code.
• Class Modules: Used for creating one’s own objects.
• Naming Rules and ConventionsProcedure names can be up to 255 characters long.
• They can be alphanumeric, but the first character must be a letter.
• Spaces and special characters are not allowed.
• Procedure names must be unique within a module.
• Conventions include starting names with a verb and using proper case for each word.
• Scope of ProceduresDetermines where a procedure can be used.
• Public: Accessible to all modules in the VBA project.
• Private: Accessible only within the module where it resides.
• Undeclared: If a procedure’s scope is undeclared, it defaults to public.
• Executing ProceduresProcedures can be executed or run in different ways within VBA:
• Using the macro dialog box.
• Using the run sub user form button on the VBE toolbar.
• Calling the procedure from another sub procedure.
• Adding a button to the quick access toolbar in Excel.
• Attaching the procedure to an event.
• Running it from the immediate window in Visual Basic Editor.

VBA Object Variables: Declaration, Assignment, Scope, and Benefits

Object variables in VBA are used to make code more concise and avoid lengthy object references. Instead of repeatedly typing out the full reference to an object, you can assign the object to a variable and then use the variable name to refer to the object.

Here’s what you need to know about object variables in VBA:

• Declaration:
• Object variables are declared using the Dim, Public, or Private keywords, just like regular variables. The Static keyword can also be used.
• Instead of a data type (like Integer or String), you declare the variable with an object type, such as Worksheet or Range.
• Example: Dim mySheet As Worksheet
• Assignment:
• To assign an object to an object variable, you must use the Set keyword.
• Example: Set mySheet = Worksheets(“Sheet1”)
• After this assignment, you can use the variable mySheet to refer to the “Sheet1” worksheet.
• Scope:
• The scope of object variables is determined by where they are declared (module-level or procedure-level) and the keyword used (Dim, Public, Private).
• Dim or Private: The variable is available only within the module or procedure where it’s declared.
• Public: The variable is available to all procedures in all modules.
• Benefits:
• Conciseness: Object variables shorten code by replacing long object references with a simple variable name.
• Readability: They can make code easier to read and understand.
• Efficiency: Although not explicitly stated in the sources, using object variables can improve performance by reducing the need to repeatedly resolve object references.
• Example (Based on the sources):
• This example is based on information in the sources and demonstrates the use of object variables to sum the selling price in a column and place the total two rows below the last populated cell:
• Sub AddTotals()
• Dim lastCell As Range ‘ Declares object variables
• Dim totalFormula As String ‘ Declares object variables
• Set lastCell = Range(“I2”).End(xlDown) ‘ Sets lastCell to the last populated cell in column I
• lastCell.Select ‘ Selects the last cell
• ActiveCell.Offset(2, 0).Select ‘ Offset moves the active cell 2 rows down
• totalFormula = “=SUM(I2:I” & lastCell.Row & “)” ‘ Formula for total
• ActiveCell.Formula = totalFormula ‘ Enters the formula in the offset cell
• End Sub

The Original Text

hi everyone i’m trish connor cato welcome to the excel 2019 visual basic for applications video course this course is for beginning users looking to automate repetitive and recurring tasks in microsoft excel vba is microsoft’s programming language and it’s built into the office applications our focus during this course is on excel specifically you’ll be equipped with the basics to start writing your own vba code modify the code behind macros you’ve already recorded and have an understanding of how vba lends itself to creating efficiency in your daily tasks we’ll start with the basics where you’ll learn the types of things you can do with vba versus recording macros in excel as well as some key terminology which will help in your vba journey and you will get to edit vba code you’ll learn the importance of macro enabled workbooks and how to save them as well as how to modify some security settings we’ll move on to understanding the excel object model collections and how to reference objects in vba code once these basics are covered you’ll be ready to move on learning about the different types of procedures creating procedures learning the scope of procedures and working with methods you’ll also learn how to get vba context-specific help from within the visual basic editor if you’re enjoying these videos please like and subscribe if you want to earn certificates and digital badges please become a member of our patreon the link is in our video description if you have any questions you want answered by one of our instructors please join our off-site community the link is in the description as well as always if this course has exercise files you’ll find them in the video description below in our first lesson getting started you’re going to be learning about an overview of vba that includes what type of language it is why you would want to use visual basic for applications versus recording macros and advantages that it can give you in terms of efficiency we’ll move into recording a macro and running it in excel and then we’ll go into the visual basic editor environment and you’ll get an overview of the environment before we start editing a macro in vba you’ll learn how to save a macro enabled workbook and the importance of doing so you’ll learn a little bit about macro security now in this lesson we’re going to be using two files that are in the video description there both excel files one is named vehicles and the other one vehicles two we will be creating a vehicle’s macro enabled workbook during this lesson and the name of that workbook is shown on the slide you will not find it in the video description at this time so what you would want to do is grab those two excel files vehicles and vehicles too from the video description and put them somewhere on your system where you have easy access to them before we get hands-on let’s go ahead and get an overview of vba so as mentioned in the introductions vba is a microsoft programming language that is currently built into the excel word powerpoint outlook and access applications it’s one of the many programming languages that evolved from the basic programming language which was developed in the 1960s it was first released in excel 5 and that was in the office 1995 suite since then it evolved to encompass the applications that are mentioned in this slide vba is known as an object-oriented programming language oop this means that everything within an application is an object including the application itself objects have their own set of features and uses known as properties and methods respectively here’s an example of object oriented programming so the example using excel would be that excel is an object that contains other objects for example cells worksheets charts pivot tables shapes etc each object has its own properties for example a worksheet has a name a workbook can be opened and closed and these are a couple of a workbook’s so methods are like actions you will work with objects and manipulate them via their properties and methods throughout this course so why vba it can give you the ability to run macros automatically create user defined functions which can be used in the excel application you can use vba to control other office applications and mostly to automate recurring and repetitive tasks don’t get me wrong the power of macros is excellent in excel but vba does have some advantages so for example there are no limitations when you’re recording macros you are limited to those tasks that you can perform in the excel interface with vba you can attach code to events so that it runs automatically when the event occurs for example activating a worksheet would be an event vba allows for decision making and it has several decision-making structures ensuring code only runs when certain conditions are met the looping structures in vba ensure code runs multiple times based on a condition and then there’s forms and boxes you can use vba to create user input forms dialog boxes and message boxes in excel so we’re going to get started i have the vehicles excel file open from the video description and we are going to be recording a macro in this file now the thing is we want to prepare excel for recording a macro there are several ways that you can start a macro recording but we want to add the developer tab to the ribbon as that is one of the ways that you can record your macros review your macros so on and so forth so the first thing we’re going to do is right click on any ribbon tab home insert page layout whatever and when you right click on a ribbon tab you’re going to choose customize the ribbon in the customize the ribbon options box on the right side everything that has a check mark is a tab that’s showing on your ribbon we want to check the box in front of developer and then at the bottom you’re going to click ok and now you have the developer tab on your ribbon and let’s navigate to that tab so for parts of this course we’re going to be using this make vehicle information so we have make-believe then numbers we have year we have make model classification color dealer cost and manufacturer suggested retail price columns in here and we’re going to record a macro that is going to apply the column headings and also a little bit of formatting so on the developer tab of the ribbon in the first group the code group you’re going to click on the record macro button and don’t worry it’s not going to be recording until after we clear the dialog box so when you click that button the record macro dialog box opens and you have to give your macro a name well you don’t want your macros to have generic names so make them as descriptive as possible now of course there are rules to naming macros macro names must begin with a letter can be alphanumeric and can contain the underscore character no spaces so we’re going to name this macro capital a add capital f formatting almost together so it follows the naming convention we’re not going to assign a shortcut key to the macro to make it run later we don’t need to do that here and you have choices as to where the macro is going to be stored so by default it’s going to just be in this workbook the file that it’s going to be recorded in this workbook your other choices are a new workbook or your personal macro workbook if you store it in the personal macro workbook that workbook opens in the background every time you open excel and so the macro is available to any and all excel files we’re going to leave it on this workbook and there’s another way that you can access it from another file that you’ll see a little bit later i like to add a description to a macro so that if anyone comes behind me and they need information about what the macro is going to do the description will cover that so we’re going to type in a description box add column headers comma bold and centered period apply accounting format to column g period autofit columns a through h so that is the intent of the macro that we’re going to record so at this point once we click ok everything we do until we stop the recording is going to be recorded and i like to say this while you’re recording the macro if you make a mistake and you correct the mistake you don’t have to start all over again because it’s recording both the mistake and the correction so go ahead and click okay you’ll notice on the developer tab now where it used to say record macro we now have our stop recording icon there and we’ll use that when we’re completely done going through all the steps that we’re saving in our macro so for right now the first thing that we want to do here is right click on row heading 1 and choose insert so we get a blank row a new row one and that’s the row that we’re going to be adding our column headers in and so we’re going to click in cell a1 and we’re going to type then v i n and i’m doing it in all capital letters so vehicle identification number i’m going to press my tab key to get over to b1 and i’m going to type year tab make tab model tab again classification the next one is color the next one is dealer cost two separate words and lastly in all caps msrp for manufacturers suggested retail price after that one i’m going to just press enter so we have our headers in where they need to be and then we’re going to select row heading 1 again and we’re going to go to the home tab of the ribbon in the font group we’re going to make it bold and in the paragraph group we’re going to use the center alignment button so the headers are centered within their cells now we’re also going to add in adjusting column width in here so don’t worry about that right now the next thing we’re going to do is we’re going to select column g by clicking on its column heading so the entire column is selected and on the home tab in the number group we’re going to click on the dollar sign for the accounting number format and then the last thing we’re going to do is we’re going to select column headings a through h and i just clicked on a and dragged across and we want to auto fit these columns with right so that’s what we want to do we want to auto fit and we do that by going to the cells group over to the right on the home tab of the ribbon and in the cells group you’re going to select the format drop down and from that drop down you’re going to select auto fit column width so now every column is wide enough to display everything in the column and if we were to make entries and they were wider than what they are now it would automatically adjust the column width now typically when i’m done recording my macro before i click stop recording i just like to click on any blank cell just to make sure that nothing is selected we’re going to go back to the developer tab and choose stop recording in the code group typically you cannot undo the effects of a macro so we just recorded this macro while we were recording it we were doing the steps now what i’d like you to do is i’d like you to press ctrl z which is undo and the only thing it undid was the column auto with everything else our headings are there they’re bold and centered we have our accounting format and column g and it just undid the column autofit so we want to redo that step so we’re going to just do control y which is redo and we end up again with the result of our macro you will learn some workarounds for undoing the effects of a macro later on but for right now we want to test this macro on a different sheet so we’re on the inventory sheet tab in this file we have two other sheets let’s go to sheet two sheet two has the same data that was on sheet one initially when we came in here and this is a good sheet to test our macro on so we can go on the developer tab in the code group this is where you can use the macros button to access any macros that you may have in this file so we’re going to click on macros and we only have one ad formatting it’s already selected and on the right side you’re going to click the run button so at the end of the day you should have those column headings they should be centered and bolded and the auto width the column auto width is in effect and you have the accounting number format in column g so while we were recording our macro it was generating visual basic code in the background visual basic for applications code in the background now on the developer tab we can get to visual basic you will learn other ways of starting macro recording without using the developer tab you’ll learn shortcuts throughout the course on how to switch back and forth between visual basic for applications and the excel interface but for right now on the developer tab the first button in the code group is visual basic let’s go ahead and click on it visual basic for application opens in its own separate window and so you literally have this window and your excel window open at the same time and we’re just going to focus on the vba window right now and so before we get started in here we’re ultimately going to edit the code behind the macro we just recorded but i just want you to get acclimated to this environment this is known as the visual basic editor or vbe just so you know it doesn’t have a ribbon interface it never updated it still has the old school menu bar where you have file edit view and everything and then underneath it it has some tool bars that we use this was like pre-ribbon days how excel itself and all the other office applications used to be on the left side of your screen you may have two different panels open you have a project explorer window at the top and a properties window at the bottom if you don’t have both of those panes showing you can go up to the view menu and you can click on project explorer and then come back to view and click on properties window and you can see the shortcut keys for both of them or you could do ctrl r to bring up project explorer and f4 to bring up the properties window let’s talk about the project explorer window first for every excel file that you have open you will have a separate project so right now i only have one excel file open it’s the vehicles dot xlsx file so it creates its own vba project and it has the name of the file afterwards now i may have a few things here because i have some add-ins that create projects as well if you don’t have them you’re fine but this is a cautionary tale here because there have been times when i’ve had like five excel files open and i find myself doing some coding and then i look and see that i’m doing it in the wrong files project so i can always cut and paste it to the right project but you do want to be aware of what project you’re working in when you click on vba project vehicles.xlsx it expands and you can look up at the title bar and it lets you know that it is in that project now so just kind of get in the habit of making sure you’re in the right project it has two folders in that project microsoft excel objects those are your sheet tabs so we had the inventory sheet we had a sheet 2 and a sheet 3 and then the entire workbook is an object as well so it lists that then you have another folder called modules that folder was created when we started recording our macro actually when we finished recording our macro it created that modules folder your code is stored in modules so expand the modules folder and it created a default module it names it module one and if we were to go back over to excel now and record another macro it would also put it in module one if we were to close excel saving it properly and then reopen it and start recording a macro it would create module two it would always give it the next number module two module three you can also rename modules in here which you’ll see in a little bit so if you click on module 1 you will actually see the code window and that is everything that it created while we were recording our macro so it converted our steps into vba code and we’re going to edit this in just a little bit but i want you to have your editor window be as comfortable an environment for you to be working in so one of the things we’re going to do is we’re going to go up to the tools menu and click on options we will revisit some of these settings later in the course but when you go into options you have four tabs editor editor format general and docking one thing one setting that i want to make sure that you have checked well like make sure all of the code settings have a check mark in front of them and as we work in the course i’ll explain what these settings mean your windows settings you can actually have all of those checked as well go to the editor format tab and this is where you can set your font size so i have my font set to 14 point which is comfortable for me i can bump it up to 16 and then at the bottom i’m going to click ok so font size and if you want to go back in and change the font i’m cool with the code looking font courier font um that works for me i’m just so comfortable with it it doesn’t bother me so i just wanted you to know that you can change some of those settings in the environment for yourself and for the ones that we are going to be utilizing in the course we’ll go back in there and talk about what those settings are actually doing the other thing we want to customize before we edit our code is we want to add three icons to the toolbar that we’ll be using frequently throughout this course so what i’m going to do is i’m going to just right click in a blank area of any toolbar and go to customize and the customize dialog box opens you want to make sure you’re on the commands tab at the top and then you’ll see a list of categories that mimic the menus that are up there file edit view insert so basically you’re gonna have to tell it where it resides on the menu in order to add it to your toolbar so under categories we’re gonna select edit and then all the commands from the edit menu show on the right side of your screen and on the right side of your screen you’re gonna scroll down we’re looking for two commands the first one is comment block and the second is uncomment block so what i’m going to do when i find comment block i’m going to click and hold on it and i’m going to drag it right after the question mark on my toolbar and then i’m going to grab uncomment block and drag it right after comment block now we have one more command that we’re going to add up there under categories we’re going to click on debug and the command at the top of the list is compile project i’m going to grab that and drag it right after uncomment block so i have comment block uncomment block and compile project when we get ready to use those commands i will explain what they’re going to do for us they’re going to be kind of helpers for you let’s examine the code that was generated while we were recording our macro first of all let’s look at the information starting from the top we’ll talk about the option explicit statement a little bit later in the course don’t worry about that right now what i want you to focus on is the name of our code ad formatting it comes after the word sub and you’ll notice that both option explicit and sub are in blue that means those are visual basic for application keywords they mean a specific thing in this code and should only be used for their intended purpose it creates what’s called a sub procedure to contain our code so it starts with the sub statement and if you scroll down at the very bottom it concludes with an end sub statement you have to have both if you have a sub and not an n sub you’re going to get an error message but it did this automatically while we were recording our macro it gave it the name that we named it ad formatting and then after it it put a set of parentheses some procedures have parameters that need to be defined and that would happen inside the parentheses we’re not there yet but that’s why they’re there and they need to be there then you’ll notice several lines that are in green beginning with apostrophes those are comment lines so when we were filling out the record macro dialog box right we named it ad formatting and we put a description in add column headers bold and centered apply accounting format blah blah blah comments are meant to describe your code it’s a good idea to comment your code liberally i’ve written code before and didn’t comment it and six months later i had to figure out what the intent of the code that i wrote was so comments are really good and so when you put a description in the record macro box it comes in as comments they’re informational when you run your code or execute your code the comments do not execute and we can do a little bit of clean up there um we don’t need that blank apostrophe at the top so i’m going to just delete it and then i’m going to delete the two underneath because they’re not necessary either and then it starts our code well the first thing we did is we right clicked on row one and inserted a new row so that’s rows one colon one dot select and then selection dot insert right and so it moved everything it shifted everything down and gave us the blank row at the top and then we clicked in cell a1 and we typed it in so that’s range even though it’s a cell range a1 dot select notice the quote the double quotes inside the parentheses there surrounding a1 and an active cell which is now cell a1 don’t worry about formula r1c1 right now but activecell.formular1c1 equals whatever we typed in that cell then b1 c1 d1 e1 f1 g1 h1 same thing and then we selected row one again so at this point we’re all the way down here in the code when we selected row one again and once we selected it we made it bold so before that selection dot font dot bold would equal false when we made it bold it changed the false to true and then you have what’s known as a with end with block starts with the word with and if you go down several rows it ends with an end with statement and this is an interesting thing you’ll learn more it’s known as a construct right you’ll learn more about this construct as we go in the course but this allows you anything that you do in the paragraph group on the home tab is included in this width block bold is not in the paragraph group on the excel ribbon right but your alignments are the ability to wrap text your orientation whether you’re going to indent merging cells all of that is included in the paragraph group on the home tab in excel so all of these settings here are those things that mimic the paragraph group and what we did is we centered those headings so what happened is when we did that the dot horizontal alignment equals excel center it was changed from excel left because typically things are left aligned in a cell so all of these other settings are the default settings the only thing that changed was excel center one of the things you you want in your code is for it to be as concise as possible we don’t need everything that’s in that with block we we really would just keep the horizontal and vertical alignment but we didn’t do any wrap text orientation indenting any of that kind of stuff so we’re going to select the lines from wrap text all the way down to the dot merge cells equals false statement we need to leave that end with statement underneath that so once you have dot wrap text through dot merge cells line selected go ahead and press delete and then i’m a little ocd so i’m gonna shift tab to get the end with statement back in line with the with statement so if i have to troubleshoot code i want to make sure that i can see with and end with at the same margin if that makes sense and when we start putting our code together i’ll be walking you through how it should be formulated so when we were recording our macro we formatted column g as currency column g is the dealer cost column and we should have formatted the manufacturer’s suggested retail price column column h well it says currency in here but it’s actually accounting okay so we want both of those columns to be formatted in accounting underneath your end with statements you’ll see columns and then in parentheses in double quotes g colon g dot select the second g you’re going to change to an h so now we’re telling it when this macro runs select both of those columns and apply the format on both of those columns and that’s what we want to do and then we have where we selected columns a through h and we did our columns autofit and then i said at the end before we stop recording click on any blank cell whatever cell you clicked on it will say range and then in parentheses and double quotes that cell dot select we’re going to change whatever that cell is that cell reference we want it to be a one and so we just modified the code that was generated for our macros now we’re just going to modify our comment our second comment line here to make it accurate so apply a counting format to columns we’re going to make that plural columns g and then and h and when you move away from that line it will turn green again indicating that it’s a comment now that we’ve edited our code and we’ll test it shortly um we want to change the name of module one you want your module names to be as descriptive as possible um it’s kind of like folders that you’re organizing your code in so we’re gonna have several modules throughout this course and we don’t want them to be module one module two module three module four so we’re gonna use the properties window to make some changes to properties so we’re going to start with renaming module 1. in your project explorer window click on module 1 and then if you look down at your properties window it says properties for module one the object that we have selected and the only property a module has is the name property so if you double click on name it highlights module one for you and we’re going to talk about a prefix that we’re going to use here to identify it in a list as a module we’re going to use lowercase mod mod to indicate that it is a module and then we’re going to give it its name and that’s going to be capital f and the rest of the word first so mod first if we’re looking at a bunch of stuff in a list we’ll know that it’s a module because it has that three character prefix of mod and then when you press enter you’ll notice that it updated the name of the module in the project explorer window you can change the names of sheet tabs in here as well so in your project explorer you have that microsoft excel objects folder where you’re seeing your three sheet tabs we have one and it’s called sheet1 and in parentheses inventory sheet1 is how excel knows that sheet inventory is what it was renamed to but the system identifies it as sheet1 and then we have sheet2 and we have sheet3 we’re gonna click on sheet3 and in the properties window you’ll notice that there are two name properties the one at the top is indicative of the system name right so what excel knows is that name is the name property at the top my arrow got a little skewed there and then you have a name property lower down in your properties window and the one that’s lowered down is whatever you decide to name that sheet so the second name property the one that is not in parentheses you can double click right on name and it selects sheet three and we’re going to type new vehicles two separate words just like you would do it in excel if you were renaming the sheet tab and press enter so notice in your project explorer now you have your sheet1 which had already been renamed to inventory sheet 3 which we just named new vehicles we added the compile project icon to our toolbar and what that does is it kind of goes through your code for you and it checks to make sure that everything is okay if there’s a problem it will let you know by highlighting that problem so what we’re going to do is make sure you’re clicked anywhere between your sub and in sub statements you can be anywhere between those two statements and go up to your toolbar and find your compile vba project icon that we added there and just give it a click and it dims out and you didn’t get any notifications of anything wrong so your code is good good habit to get into good icon to have on your toolbar so now that we’ve modified our code we want to save this file and if you look up at the top you know your title bar is vehicles.xlsx the standard four character excel workbook extension if we don’t save this file in the right way it’s as if we didn’t record a macro and we wouldn’t have any vba code in it so you have to save it as a macro enabled workbook as a matter of fact let’s check this out on the toolbar you have a save button and notice when you hover over it it wants to save the file go ahead and click on that save icon and you get this pop-up message that says the following features cannot be saved in macro free workbooks and then it says vb project that’s your visual basic project to save a file with your code in it click no and then choose a macro enabled file type to continue saving as a macro free workbook click yes we are going to click no when you click no it gives you the save as dialog box now we’re going to leave the same name vehicles but we need to change the type right underneath the file name where it says save as type click on excel workbook and we want the second choice excel macro enabled workbook again if we just save this as a regular excel file it’s not going to keep your code so we need it to be macro enabled and part of that is for your security which i’ll explain in just a few moments and after we have it set as excel macro enabled workbook we’re going to go ahead and click save so now if you look up at the title bar it has a different extension dot xlsm that’s your macro enabled excel workbook extension and so it will retain our code and now that we’ve saved it as macro enabled we’re going to switch over to excel to test our edited code there’s a couple of ways that you can switch over to excel back and forth between excel and visual basic first of all and i’m not going to use this way but the first button on the toolbar is excel so i can use that to switch back over to excel i’m a real shortcut key person so alt f11 will also switch me back and forth between excel and the visual basic editor so i can just keep doing alt f11 and you see that it switches back and forth between the two separate application windows that are open when i am back in excel i’m going to do control o to get the open dialog box to display so this is where we’re going to open the vehicles 2 file and by the way if you look at my screen we have two files we have vehicles and vehicles too right we have two versions of vehicles i’m pointing to the macro enabled worksheet and then we have our original one which is just a regular excel file and if you look closely the icons are slightly different the macro enabled worksheet icon has an extra little thing in its lower right hand corner than the other regular excel icons so we want to open the vehicles to excel workbook and so we have two excel files open we have our macro enabled vehicles and we have vehicles too earlier when we went to record our macro i said if you save your macro in the personal macro workbook it opens behind the scenes every time you open any file in excel this is a workaround we save that macro in the vehicles file but we can use it in vehicles too as long as the vehicles dot xlsm file is open i don’t typically save in the personal macro workbook there are occasions that i do that if i’m going to use it across a wide range of files but typically my files are structured so differently that macros from one won’t work well with others so what we’re going to do here is we want to use the macro that we recorded the add formatting macro we want to use it in this file another way of getting to your macros instead of going to the developer tab is you can go to the view tab of the ribbon and all the way to the right the last button is macros so check this out if i do the drop down arrow under macros i can view or record them um and i’m going to just go to view macros notice that it gives the file name exclamation point and then the name of the macro that vehicles.xlsm file has to be open and it’s showing you macros in all open workbooks if we did the drop down and we choose this workbook right it’s showing there as well because the other one’s open so you can access it but it really resides in that other file vehicles the macro enabled vehicles file and so we’re going to just click on vehicles xlsm exclamation point ad formatting and choose run so you’ll notice that it gave us our headings they’re centered and bolded notice one of the changes we made is we had it do the accounting format on the msrp column right so that worked we also cleaned up some comments and stuff in there as well so you will see that if you have the file that contains the macro open you can access it from other excel files that you open also notice that the active cell is cell a1 because we changed that as well we’re going to close this vehicles 2 file without saving any changes to it so i’m going to just close that file when it prompts me i’m going to say don’t save the changes and i still have my macro enabled vehicles file open so in our macro enabled vehicles file first take a note look at your um sheet tabs so we renamed sheet 3 new vehicles and that’s what shows on the sheet down there we did that in the properties window in the visual basic editor so another change that we made in there that you’re seeing in here and i mentioned earlier and we saw that you can’t really undo the effects of a macro when we tried to do it it didn’t really undo it it only undid the column autofit right so we saw that but i said that there is a workaround like let’s say on the sheet 2 right that we wanted to test the macro and it’s already been run so we certainly don’t want it to put another row in here right at the top so on sheet 2 what i’m going to have you do is just delete row one so i’m just right clicking on the row header and choosing delete and now i’m gonna go to the view tab drop down view my macros and i’m going to rerun this macro so it puts the headings back in right we see that we have the currency format on or accounting format on the columns g and h and it put us in cell a1 so you would have to kind of manually delete the effects of a macro to rerun it on a sheet like that we’re going to go ahead and right click on the sheet2 sheet tab and we want to delete sheet 2 and confirm the deletion so now we have two sheets in this macro enabled file we have our inventory sheet and we have our blank for right now new vehicle sheet let’s go ahead and save and close this vehicle’s file now we’re going to explore what happens when you open a file that is macro enabled so what i’m going to do is i’m going to just relaunch excel and go to open and navigate to wherever you saved your macro enabled vehicles file and when you’re there you can go ahead and select the vehicles macro enabled file i’m going to just double click on it here and open it now because it’s macro enabled you’re going to get the yellow band underneath the ribbon that says security warning macros have been disabled and then there’s an enable content button microsoft does this by default that’s the default security settings for a file that contains macros that has been saved as macro enabled and it’s to kind of protect you so if you receive a file from an unknown source you probably do not want to enable the content it’s not the typical way of delivering viruses to computers anymore but it used to be delivered via macros that were infected via viruses so if it’s from a trusted source you can go ahead and enable the content which we’re gonna do now that can be annoying if you’re working with a lot of macro enabled files and you know the people that are creating them maybe your colleagues yourself you all work in teams or something like that so we’re gonna modify a truss center setting and you’ll see how this works so what we’re going to do is we’re going to go to the file tab and all the way at the bottom on the left you’re going to go to options on the left side of excel options at the bottom you’re going to click on trust center and then on the right you’re going to click on trust center settings so the first thing i want you to see here is on the left side click on macro settings so the default setting is to disable vba macros with notification that’s what the yellow band that we got and i wouldn’t suggest changing that what you can do to make it a little bit more convenient and you don’t get that yellow band when you’re you know using files back and forth amongst your teammates or colleagues is we can set either trusted documents on the left or trusted locations i always do trusted locations it’s more global than trusted documents so click on trusted locations and i’ll tell you um how this works right so i set up a folder on my desktop it’s called files for video description and it’s where i’ve stored all the files that we’re going to be using during this course and i want to set that as a trusted location so any of the macro enabled file formats that we’re going to be using during this course that folder and its any subfolders will be a trusted location so what i’m going to do underneath here is i’m going to click on add new location toward the bottom right and then i have to navigate to that location so i’m going to just do that i know it’s on my desktop so you’re navigating to wherever you put the files that you’re going to be using so the folder name for me is files for video description and i’m going to click ok and then i’m going to say subfolders of this location are also trusted so any folders within that folder would also be trusted and then i’m going to click ok and once i do that it shows up in this list of trusted locations so it could be a shared network drive if you’re all of your files that you and your team are working together on are in a specific shared network drive you can use that as a trusted location so that you don’t get the yellow warning and have to enable content at the bottom we’re going to click ok and then let’s close and reopen this vehicle’s macro enabled file so when i open it it’s in a trusted location now so i don’t get the yellow banner under the ribbon i don’t have to enable content and i didn’t disable the default trust center setting so that’s still in place but this file is now in a trusted location so i’m able to open it with no problems just to recap what we covered in this introductory lesson one on the getting started section we reviewed what you can do with visual basic for applications you learn that it is an object oriented programming language that is part of the microsoft office suite you learned that it’s the code that is produced in the background when you record a macro you also learn the advantages of visual basic for applications over recording macros we moved into customizing the ribbon to add the developer tab and we recorded a macro in excel that added and formatted column headings on a worksheet we then toured the visual basic editor environment and were able to edit the vba code produced by our recorded macro we also changed some vbe settings including font size and we saved a macro enabled file you tested your edited macro and lastly modified some trust center security settings by adding a trusted location you also understand the importance of saving a macro enabled workbook or else all of your work would be lost before we get hands on again in lesson three we need to go over some background information and i should mention at this point that this slide deck is also in the video description and you can use it for your future reference no one is expecting you to memorize all of these things so we need to talk about the excel object model you need to understand collections and how to reference objects and also how to simplify object references you learned that vba is an object-oriented programming language and we discussed that that means that excel is an object that contains objects objects that have attributes known as properties can be manipulated through vba and objects also have methods which are actions that can be performed on them via vba so this is a foundational lesson here and again you’ll be able to reference the slide deck so the excel object model hierarchy is a hierarchical structure of excel and all its objects with excel the application residing at the top of the hierarchy so you can see on this slide that we have the application at the top of the hierarchy here on the left and then underneath the application you would have add in objects window objects workbook objects and then we expand on the workbook object a workbook object has a name a visual basic project a workbook also contains worksheets worksheets can contain comments hyperlinks names ranges and pivot tables for example so a simplistic example is over on the right where you have excel the application which is an object at the top of the hierarchy then you have a workbook a worksheet is an object of a workbook and a range is an object of a worksheet and you’re going to be seeing this as we’re working in this video course the next thing you need to understand are collections now collections are key in vba programming a collection is simply a group of objects of the same type a collection is also an object collections are useful when you need to work with not just one worksheet but with a couple of them or all of them you’ll learn later that your vba code can loop through all members of a collection and do something to each one we have a table that shows the collections the most commonly used collections in visual basic so you have the workbooks collection and it would be all currently open workbook objects so all currently open cell files are part of the workbooks collection you have a worksheets collection and it’s a collection of all worksheets contained in a particular workbook the charts collection is a collection of all chart objects so these are excel worksheets that only have charts on them a collection of all chart objects contained in a particular workbook object a chart sheet is not part of the worksheets collection as it is not considered a worksheet it is in fact a worksheet but it only has a chart on it and then you have the sheets collection plural a collection of all worksheet objects contained in a particular workbook object so you have a worksheets collection and then you have a sheets collection what is the difference the sheets collection contains all worksheets and all chart sheets whereas the worksheets collection is just all of the worksheets and then the charts collection is just all of the chart sheets the sheets collection combines them all so you can reference these things sometimes across different collections as you will see when we resume with our hands-on stuff in order to access the objects that you want to reference in your code you’re going gonna have to learn how to reference them so you can work with an entire collection quite easily but it’s most often the case that you’ll need to work with a particular object in a collection for example if you need to work with a particular worksheet you’ll need to know how to reference it when it comes to referring to an object in a collection you can either use its name or its index number to reference a single object from a collection you put the item’s name or index number in parentheses after the name of the collection so you have two examples on this slide that refer to the exact same object the first worksheet in the workbook so worksheets and then in parentheses and double quotes sheet1 by name or worksheets and in parentheses 1 by index number when you refer to an object by its name the name must be enclosed in quotes when referring to an object by its index number you need to know that the first object in the collection has the index number of one using a workbook with three worksheets as an example sheet one has an index number of one sheet two would be two and sheet three’s index number would be three and index numbers are not enclosed in quotes we’re going to spend a few slides on referencing objects so each worksheet in the worksheet’s collection is an object in two collections which we mentioned already worksheets and sheets each chart sheet is an object in two collections charts and sheets so there’s another example of how to refer to sheet1 you could use the sheets collection instead of the worksheets collection like a typical office application you get several ways of referring to the same object you know there’s multiple ways of getting the same thing done in excel and along the way you’ll find a way that works best for you although i do have some suggestions so all excel objects are under the application object in the hierarchy remember excel the application is at the top of the hierarchy you access these objects by moving down the hierarchy and connecting each object with the dot operator you can even access the value of a particular cell on the worksheet by using the range object and you saw that when we reviewed our code there is no cell object in vba really it would be the range object even with one element and here are additional examples on this slide of object references so referring to a specific workbook application dot workbooks and then in parentheses and double quotes the name of the workbook including its extension and then a specific worksheet in the workbook if you’re using the entire hierarchy application.workbooks the name of the workbook and then dot worksheets 1 the first sheet referring to the value of a cell your application.workbooksname.worksheets1 dot range a1 dot value the last example is known as a fully qualified reference it specifically refers to all the objects in the hierarchy from application down to range so again you have this power point in your video description for future reference now i’m going to tell you about simplifying object references you want it to be as concise as possible and i i mentioned that earlier it’s easier to write and easier to troubleshoot should there be any issues so visual basic for applications can assume some of the object references for you for example it assumes that the workbook’s collection is within the application object and that means that you don’t have to reference that object in most cases another example here is that if you only have one workbook open one excel file open it is the only one in the collection so vba assumes it is the active workbook and you don’t have to reference the workbooks collection if the first worksheet is the active sheet in the workbook you don’t have to reference the worksheets collection as vba will assume it so gonna go over these examples the code that refers to the value of a cell so starting with the application application.workbooks the name of the workbook in parentheses and double quotes dot worksheets 1 by index number dot range a1 dot value if vba is assuming the application object it would just start with workbooks in the name of the workbook so on and so forth if it’s the only open excel file it will assume the workbooks object so you can just start with worksheets and if the first sheet is the active sheet all you would have to reference is range a1 dot value and so the last example is the most concise and therefore preferable you don’t want to have to type all of this line unless you just like to type like that my arrow drawing is getting horrible here but you don’t have to type all of that why would you want to type all of that maybe fat finger to keyboard whatever set of circumstances could happen when all you would have to type would be this and also if someone is coming behind you or if you have to troubleshoot the code this is a lot more difficult to troubleshoot because it has more on this line than the last and preferable example now that we’ve gained an understanding of the excel object model hierarchy collections and how to reference objects we’re ready to dive into lesson three which is working with procedures and functions previously you were introduced to modules and sub procedures when we edited the vba code that was generated by the macro we recorded you’re going to get more in-depth knowledge on those two topics during this lesson so we’re going to start by doing a deeper dive into modules and then procedures then we are going to move on to creating a standard module as well as creating a sub procedure you’ll learn different methods of executing procedures or running them including how to call procedures in this lesson then we’re going to create a function procedure and we’re going to use the immediate window within the visual basic editor to run it you’re going to learn how to get context sensitive help within the visual basic editor which is really cool we’re going to use the vehicles macro enable file that we created as well as another file in the video description and it’s another excel file named received vehicles those two files need to be in the same directory for this lesson you saw earlier that when we recorded a macro vba created a module to store the visual basic code in and so we discussed how a module is a container of sorts that stores your vba code well there are two different types of modules there are class modules which allow you to create your own objects and we’ll begin using class modules when we get to lesson seven and then there’s standard modules one of which you already saw and it uses the application objects we also discussed that our code was put in a procedure specifically in our case it was a sub procedure began with the sub statement and end it with the n sub statement so a procedure tells the application what to do as it defines a specific task specifically it’s a named group of statements that are run as a unit for example a block of code a sub procedure defines specific tasks like our ad formatting sub procedure it told the application what to do so insert a new row and then we typed in the headers that kind of thing when responding to events you’ll learn about these later they can be known as event procedures there are also function procedures and you’ll be introduced to creating function procedures during this lesson a function procedure actually returns a value property procedures are outside of the scope of this course but they exist and they’re are series of statements that allow a programmer to create and manipulate custom properties for example read-only properties for forms before we dive in we’re going to go over the naming rules and conventions for procedures now the rules cannot be broken conventions are suggestions but just so you’re aware of them you need to know what they are and i use conventions as well as the rules so if you inherit an excel macro enabled workbook and you’re looking at somebody else’s code they may be using the conventions so anyway let’s go over this and then we’ll get hands on and learn more about procedures and modules by recording another macro so when we’re naming procedures the name may be up to 255 characters it can be alphanumeric the first character must be a letter you can’t use any spaces or any of the special characters listed on the slide and the names must be unique within a module so you can’t have to add formatting sub procedures within the same module it will disallow it you just can’t do it and then the conventions begin the names with a verb use proper case for each word within the name when two or more procedures are related place the words that vary at the end and there are some examples so you could name a procedure close workbook get new inventory get selected date begin and get selected date end so if you’re looking at these in a list the ones that have the words that vary at the end would still be all together in the list so you know that they’re related procedures i’m back in the vehicles macro enabled file that we created earlier and i’m going to switch to the new vehicles sheet tab now we’re going to record a macro again to get this lesson started and along the way and going forward beyond this lesson whether we’re recording macros or we’re writing vba code from scratch we’re also going to be using properties and we’re going to be using methods now you saw properties we use properties to change the name of a module we use properties to change the name of this particular sheet tab and a method is an action that is taken on an object so you’ll learn how to access methods along the way as well and i want to show you another way of starting a macro recording without accessing the ribbon so i’d like to direct your attention to your status bar and it’s at the very bottom underneath your sheet tabs of your excel screen so the area all the way at the bottom now it starts with ready you may or may not have num lock and some of the other stuff that i have on my status bar but in particular i’m interested in making sure that you have this icon i don’t know it looks like a spreadsheet with a little camera on it in a way and if you don’t have it i’m going to show you how to get it down there you can right-click in a blank area of the status bar and you get the customize status bar menu and notice that a lot of the things on my customize menu are already checked which means they will show in my status bar as appropriate so for example caps lock and num lock my num lock is on and that’s why it’s showing down in the status bar my caps lock is currently not being held down i’m not enabling caps lock on my keyboard i should say so that one is not showing there but where i to enable it it would show in my status bar the setting that we’re interested in having you have down there is macro recording that’s that icon so if it doesn’t have a check mark in front of it and you click on it it will check it if it does and you click on it it unchecks it like it just did on mine so i’ll click on it again and then you just click on any blank cell you want to make sure you’re in cell a1 before we start recording this macro and what we’re going to do is we’re going to go down to that icon in our status bar that looks like a spreadsheet with a looks like a camera lens to me but if you hover over it it says no macros are currently recording click to begin recording a new macro and we’re going to do just that and it gives us our record macro dialog box so you could start this process from the developer tab or you can start it from that icon on your status bar now for this macro we want to name it using our rules and conventions so we’re going to start with a verb capital g get capital n new capital v vehicles because remember you can’t have spaces you could use the underscore character but i prefer to just use this convention we’re not going to use the shortcut key we’re going to store it in this workbook and we’re going to click in the description box and we’re going to type copy and paste data from the received vehicles file and again it once we click ok it’s ready to follow our instructions so go ahead and click ok notice that the icon on your status bar now looks different and it looks like a stop button and if you hover over it it says click here or a macro is currently recording click to stop the recording so we can start and stop it from the status bar as well so what we want to do is we want to open the received vehicles file that is in the same directory as this file and i’m going to use the shortcut combination control o to bring up my open dialog box i’m already in the proper directory for myself and i’m going to just double click that received vehicles excel file to open it and once it’s opened you’ll see that it has a limited amount of data there’s some then numbers and dealer costs and so what we’re going to do is we are going to click anywhere on the spreadsheet it’s only on sheet 1 and we’re going to hold down our control key and type the letter a and the letter c so a selects everything and c is the copy command and now we want to switch back to our vehicles macro enabled file so one way to do that is we can go to our view tab on the ribbon the next to the last button is switch windows and i’m going to use i’m going to just click on vehicles to switch back to that file we’re already in cell a1 in the vehicles file on the new vehicles tab i’m going to just do control v as in victor to paste in the information we have one more step we’re going to take before we stop this macro recording i’m going to switch back to the received vehicles file and i’m going to just close it and now i can go down to my status bar and stop the recording before we switch over to the visual basic editor to look at the code that we just generated just wanted to give you some examples of methods so i’ve said that a method is an action that is taken on an object so clear contents is a method of the range object it would empty the cells delete everything that’s in the cells clear all of everything that’s in the cells in the range add is a method of the workbook’s collection object and it’s used to create a new workbook and then you have activate and that’s a method of the worksheet object it’s used to activate a worksheet you know if i click on the inventory sheet tab i’m activating that sheet so examples of how you access the methods you start with the object so range a1 colon b11 in parentheses and double quotes you use the dot notation and then you can access the method clear contents workbooks dot add worksheets you have to give it the name or the index number of the sheet dot activate so we’re seeing the dot notation used to call methods as well and when you’re in the editor and you do the dot it sometimes gives you and usually gives you built-in help that it will list the methods that are available for that particular object i’m going to just delete this text box off of my spreadsheet then i’m going to alt f11 to switch over to the visual basic editor the first thing i want to point out is the project explorer window the upper left corner and if you look in your modules folder now we renamed what used to be called module 1 mod first so because we had closed the file and reopened it when we recorded this macro it created a new module since module 1 wasn’t in use anymore it used that and so we would have to go there to find the code that we just recorded the macro for so i’m going to switch to module one and it created a sub procedure we named it get new vehicles we put stuff in the description explaining what it is and you know we can get rid of those extra green lines that are preceded by apostrophes that don’t need to be there just to kind of clean up the code of course you want it as concise as possible when we did control o the open command it did this activewindow.close and then workbooks.open right so open is a method of the workbooks object close is a method of the active window object so we did workbooks open we had to give it the name of the file and these characters here so it says file name followed by a colon equal then there’s a space and an underscore the space and the underscore means the rest of this syntax the rest of what is needed here is on the next line it’s called the line continuation character space and underscore combined like that in visual basic is the line continuation character and that’s what we have after file name colon equal if we didn’t have that there we would get an error message because it’s saying hey you gotta give me the path to the file name including the file name so it just goes to where i have my on my hard drive users trish desktop files for video description and then it’s in that received vehicles the name of the file is receive vehicles.xlsx and that line starting with c begins with an open double quote and ends with a closing double quote and then i scrolled a little bit when i got over to that other file receive the vehicles and it took note of that that’s this active window small scroll down and then we did control a to select everything which is a 1 through b11 dot select select is a method of the range object and then we have range a2 activate and then we did copy so we actually just did control ac and it created those three lines of code and then after we copied it we switched back over to the vehicles macro enabled file we click in cell a1 and then we pasted what was on the clipboard onto the active sheet starting in cell a1 and then we went back over to received vehicles file calling the activate method and then we said close that window and then of course with every sub statement you have your n sub statement at the bottom now that we’ve reviewed this code that was generated from us recording that macro there’s a few things we want to do we want to rename module one so it’s more specific and we want to create a new sub procedure from scratch in the newly named module so let’s start in our project explorer window i’m gonna just click on module one go down the properties window double-click name and we’re gonna call this mod remember that three character prefix which is a convention not a rule mod new vehicles and i’m using the proper casing all mushed together and then i’m going to press enter so we have mod first and mod new vehicles in mod new vehicles click at the end of your in sub statement and press enter we’re going to go to the insert menu and we’re going to choose procedure and this is a microsoft product so this is just one way of doing this in the add procedure dialog box we’re going to start work our way from top to bottom right in the name box we’re going to name this procedure move cells so capital m capital c mushed together procedure name move cells the type defaults to sub for a sub procedure and we’re going to talk about the scope in a little while but we’re going to leave it on public and we’re going to just click ok so a couple of things happened it automatically put a dividing line between your get new vehicle sub procedure and this new sub procedure and it has the keyword public because we did it from within the dialog box and again you’ll learn about scope in a little while and that’s what public speaks to it gave us our sub and our n sub statements and of course the open and closing parentheses at the end of the first line so what i’m going to have you do is i’m going to have you click outside of the closing parentheses public sub move cells press enter twice and then press the tab key on your keyboard i talked about code being concise but also you need to know this you’re going to probably end up spending more time troubleshooting code than actually writing code it’s just the way it goes and there are certain things in terms of how you format you your code that makes it easier to review when you’re troubleshooting and indentation is one of those things i like to look at my code and see the public sub and in sub statements at the same margin and that’s what we’re doing by indenting here so now you’re going to type a few lines of code four lines to be exact and you can take them off of my screen the first line is going to be columns plural open paren open double quote b close your double quote close your paren so columns b so we’re referencing column b you’re going to use the dot notation and start typing select and if i don’t type it with a capital s when i press enter at the end it will automatically capitalize it for me and now we’re going to type selection dot cut enter i’ll explain it all when we get it in and then we’re going to type columns open paren open double quote g close the quote close the paren dot select active sheet dot paste and typically i like to have a blank line after public sub and a blank line before end sub so my previous block my get new vehicle sub procedure i’m going to just get that blank line above the n sub statement so basically it’s going to select everything in column b and it’s going to cut it put it on the clipboard and then it’s going to select column g and it’s going to paste what was in column b into column g congratulations you just wrote four lines of vba code from scratch now earlier we added some buttons to our toolbar and we used one of these earlier be anywhere in between your public sub and your in sub statements and go on and click that compile vba project that we put up on the toolbar earlier and again if there were any errors in your code you would be notified of it it’s kind of line checking your code you accessed the select method of the columns object and once you have something selected it is known as the selection object so you access the cut method of the selection object and the paste method of the active sheet object in that code block so let’s go ahead and save is save on the toolbar or you could do control s and then we’re going to do alt f11 to switch back over to excel so we can test this code there is another way that you can access your macros in here so earlier we accessed our macros from the developer tab by using the second button macros we also accessed it from the view tab of the ribbon by going to the last button which is macros well there’s another way of doing it and it’s a shortcut key so you can use alt f8 to open the macro dialog box and so in here you’ll see your ad formatting macro your get new vehicles macro both of those were based off of macro recordings i should say and then move cells is listed in here even though we created that sub procedure from scratch so this is just another way alt f8 that you can open the macro dialog box and we’re going to double click the move cells procedure so you could click it once and then choose run or you could just double click it to run it and it did exactly what we asked it to do just very quickly selected everything in column b cut it and then pasted it into column g so the next part we’re going to do is going to further our automation what we want to do is we want to edit the add formatting sub procedure so that it works on this sheet the new vehicle sheet that we’re currently on and before we do that we’re going to delete everything on this sheet new vehicles we’re going to do control a to select everything and then we’re going to just press delete and then just click in cell a1 now we want to go back over to the visual basic editor alt f11 will get you there and in the project explorer we’re going to double click mod first which is where our ad formatting sub procedure resides now notice the first two lines in our code block that’s when we right clicked on row one and we inserted a new row well we don’t want to do that again we want to keep the row headings that we already have so we don’t want it to insert a blank row above row one which now contains the headings so we need to delete just those two lines of code rows one colon one dot select and selection dot insert shift blah blah blah the first two lines so i already have them selected and i’m going to delete those two lines and then what i’m going to do is in your project explorer window go ahead and double click mod new vehicles again to get back into that module where we have our get new vehicles which is the result of a macro and notice when you do a macro it gives you in green that it’s based off of a macro you didn’t create this code and then whatever description you put in right so we should probably add comments just so i can be a good example here to our move cells sub procedure i’m going to click at the end of the public sub line and press enter twice and then i’m going to type an apostrophe now when you type an apostrophe it’s like saying the visual basic hey heads up the next thing i’m going to type is going to be a comment which means you’re not going to execute it when the code executes it’s just there for informational purposes and we’re going to say that this is going to select and cut contents of column b and paste into column g and then when i press enter it will turn that line green because we started with an apostrophe before we do the next bit i just want to go over that there are different ways to execute your procedures or run them within the application or in vba so we’ve used some of these already um we’ve used the macro dialog box the ones that are highlighted on in yellow on this slide we will use during this course so you’ll later on we’ll use the run sub user form button on the vbe toolbar we’ve already used the macro dialog box we’re going to call the procedure from another sub procedure which is the one the example we’re going to do next later on we’re going to add a button to the quick access toolbar in excel you can also attach the procedure to an event which you will learn later and also you can run it from what’s known as the immediate window in visual basic editor so many different ways to execute procedures so like i mentioned we’re going to be calling the procedure from another sub procedure in this lesson we’re going to click at the end of the end sub statement in your move cells public sub procedure and we’re going to press enter twice we’re going to create another sub procedure here going to do it in a different way and it’s going to be known as the calling procedure you’ll see how this works and i’ll explain more after we get it done now we’re going to actually just type this in we’re not going to use the add procedure insert procedure dialog box and so we clicked after in sub we pressed enter a couple of times and we’re going to type sub and then we’re going to name it get new inventory and press enter twice so you get the line the dividing line between the move cells sub procedure notice we didn’t have to type the opening and closing paren or the end sub statement the visual basic editor will supply you with those when you’re typing it from scratch so now we’re going to press i’m going to just do shift tab to out dent let’s do a comment here i’m trying to be a good example we’re going to type an apostrophe and we’re going to put this is a calling procedure that is calling three other procedures and press enter at the end of the line it turns green press enter again and then tab to indent we simply need to give it the names of the procedures so this is known as a calling procedures and the procedure names we’re going to type are known as called procedures so we are going to type get new vehicles enter move cells enter add formatting enter it should look like this on my screen so get new inventory’s purpose is to kind of bundle those three other procedures together in the order that they’re listed there and it will execute them when it is executed so we get three for the price of one we execute get new inventory and it executes three other sub procedures for us go ahead and compile your project and save we have our three procedures that are called procedures in our get new inventory sub procedure two of which reside in this same module ad formatting resides in mod first we’re going to talk now about the scope of procedures and why it’s possible that we can access the ad formatting procedure from a different module so of course we’re going to review the scope of procedures on the slide because again the slide deck is in the files in the video description and you’ll be able to re use it for future reference so scope determines where the procedure may be used you have basically three different scopes really two so the first one is public if a procedure declaration is preceded by the keyword public this makes the procedure accessible to all modules in the visual basic project if the procedure declaration is preceded by the keyword private this makes the procedure available only in the module where it resides it cannot be accessed from any other modules or from the excel workbook and then you have undeclared so we have no private procedures at this point if no keyword is inserted at the start of a sub or a function declaration the default is public okay so i’m going to switch back over to the visual basic editor and we’ll take a look at this and i’m still in mod new vehicles so we have the result of a macro we recorded a macro and we named it get new vehicles it simply named it sub it didn’t put public or private so it’s considered undeclared which means it’s public then we created a procedure by using the insert menu and because in there and i’ll bring up that dialog box the scope is defaulting to public so when we created the move cells procedure it added the public keyword and then we create it from one from scratch sub get new inventory we didn’t type public before sub we left it undeclared so all of these are public procedures and if we go to mod first add formatting is also undeclared which means it’s public and i look at the end of that and i want that blank line above in sub so i just modified it and did that so because ad formatting is public i’m going to go back to mod new vehicles we can access it by calling it from this module that’s why that’s possible the scope of procedures matter now one other little fix we’re gonna do because i already know it’s going to be an era and you may not even have this line in your get new vehicles sub procedure in mod new vehicles but that first line of code since get new vehicles is included in our calling procedure if we have the first line saying active window close it’s going to just close the file and then it won’t be able to run the rest of the code so that very first line active window close if you have that line you know could cause you to have an issue with the code if you don’t have that line as your first line if your first line is workbooks dot open file name so on and so forth you’re good to go but if not you want to delete that first line active window closed we’re going to leave it at the bottom but not at the top and then go ahead and save your code and now we’re ready to alt f11 to switch over to excel and we’re on the new vehicle sheet in cell a1 we’re going to do alt f8 to bring up our macros box and we want to run our calling procedure get new inventory so i’m going to just double click it and my screen will flicker for a moment and then ultimately stop okay so what happened well it ran the bundle let’s switch back over alt f11 the first thing that it did is it ran get new vehicles so it opened the received vehicles file it selected everything and then it copied everything and then it went back over to our vehicles macro enabled file made sure it was in cell a1 and it pasted the data and then it went back over to received vehicles file and closed it after that it did the move cells sub procedure so once it brought in that information from received vehicles it selected everything in column b and it pasted it it cut it and then it pasted it in column g and then after that it did add formatting which is in mod first and that’s where it added the headings for us right so it added our column headings and we didn’t want it to create a new row there because it came in with a heading row so we had already modified this it did the currency formatter accounting number format and it auto fitted the columns it also made the headings bold and centered in their cells so it ran the bundle we ran one sub procedure that called three other procedures so when i go back and look at it in excel we’re still on new vehicles right it moved the dealer costs to the appropriate column applied the appropriate formatting to it and it added the headings instead of the headings that came in from the received vehicles file and the formatting that it did so you saw that calling procedures lend themselves to efficiency but there is further efficiency to be had earlier we discussed how sometimes a sub procedure is known as an event procedure and that happens when you attach it to an event so first thing we’re going to do here is we’re going to do control a on this new vehicles sheet to select everything and then we’re going to press delete we’re going to clear the sheet just click in cell a1 and switch back over to your visual basic editor now on the left side you attach to in order to make something an event procedure you have to access an object’s events so we’re going to double click in the project explorer window we’re going to double click sheet 3 new vehicles now notice at the very top of your screen you have two different drop downs above option explicit which we still haven’t talked about but we’re getting there you have a general box and to the right you have a declarations box both of them have drop downs on their far right sides the left side where it says general is known as the object list the right side where it says declarations currently is known as the procedures or events list so we’re going to do the drop down arrow to the right of general and the only thing because we have sheet3 selected the only object we’re going to see is worksheet so we’re going to select worksheet and it creates this whole like sub procedure framework it’s private so it’s only available within where we’re putting it it’s attached only to the new vehicle sheet which the system knows as sheet 3 right so the first thing the default event for a worksheet if you look at the right now where it used to say declarations it says selection change that’s just the default event that’s not the event that we want what we want to happen is we want our calling procedure to run whenever the new vehicle sheet is activated so we’re going to do the drop down all the way to the far right of selection change and these are all worksheet events right activate before delete calculate you have a whole list we want to select the activate event so now it gives us the framework for a private sub procedure that it names worksheet underscore activate typically with event procedures you don’t change the names right it’s kind of like hard coded so it’s that particular worksheet activate event that we’re going to code so we don’t need this second block we don’t need this this is just what was created as soon as we selected worksheet it selected the default event which is selection change so we can just delete that click at the end of the parentheses on the private sub worksheet activate line press enter twice just so you get that blank space again we’re going to press tab so it’s indented and we’re simply going to call our calling procedure by name we named it get new inventory so that’s the one that has the the three called procedures within it so we’re saying whenever the new vehicle sheet is activated go ahead and run that bundled calling procedure known as get new inventory go ahead and compile your vba project using the toolbar you want to get in the habit of doing that and save and switch back to excel just make sure you’re in cell a1 on new vehicles which we deleted everything off of and now we’re going to go to our inventory sheet tab at the bottom and then we’re going to click back on the new vehicle sheet tab to activate it and voila as soon as we activated that sheet it ran our get new inventory calling procedure so we get the same result we didn’t have to do alt f8 to get into the macros dialog box to make it run or anything like that we simply made it an event procedure and it was the activate event for this particular sheet we are going to once again clear this sheet by doing control a and delete just click back in cell a1 and go ahead and save your vehicle’s file so now we’re ready to create a function procedure and if you remember from earlier a function procedure performs a calculation and returns a single value or an array of values so differs from a sub procedure so when you create a function procedure in vba it can only be executed in two ways compared to the nine ways you can execute a sub procedure you can call the procedure from a sub procedure or another function procedure or you can use the function in a worksheet formula it becomes a user defined function in your excel application and you’ll see both of these play out when we do this we’re going to create a new module for this so i’m going to just go up to the insert menu in the visual basic editor and i’m going to choose module so it gives me a new module one and and let’s rename that module using the properties window we’re going to call it mod and then capital f function and in this module we’re going to create a function and what it’s going to do is we’re going to give it different values for an msrp and depending on the value it’s going to display a message and once we get it typed in and stuff it’ll be easier to kind of explain it to you so in your mod function i’m going to click at the top after option explicit and just press enter and we’re going to type the word function and a space and we’re going to call it msrp so all of that is capitalized and then capital s status and then in the parentheses we have to have an open parenthesis we’re going to type msrp that’s a parameter you’ll also hear it as an argument so we have to pass the function an argument in order for it to give us a value as its return and after that you’re going to press enter and notice it gives you the end function statement just like it does when we do a sub procedure and it gives us the end sub statement so i’m going to press enter again and i am going to press my tab key to indent it’s just a structure thing visual basic doesn’t care now we’re going to build what’s known as an if construct it’s more specifically it’s an if then else if else construct which is a lot to say and can be overwhelming it’s similar to the if function in excel you’re being rudely introduced to it for this function but you’ll get a deeper dive in control of flow structures in a later lesson so i will explain this after we get it typed in so we’re going to type if and then msrp we’re going to do the less than symbol 20 000 no punctuation on the 20 000 and type then and press enter now tab a little bit more one more time so if the msrp value is less than 20 000 then if that is true it’s going to do what we say on this line we’re going to type now we’re going to type msrp status the name of our function equals and in double quotes less than 20k and close your quotes so if the msrp value is less than 20 000 it’s going to say as the function return the result of the function it’s going to display the text less than 20k press enter and then shift tab and you’re going to type else if and it’s all one word initial capital letters msrp less than thirty thousand then next line down you’re gonna tab msrp status the name of the function equals and then double quotes less than 30k and close your quotes enter and shift tab we’re almost done we have two more lines now we’re going to type else just else not else if space msrp status the name of the function again equals and then double quotes greater than or equal to 30 k and close your double quotes enter and we need an end if statement so end if and press enter one more time so you get that blank line between end if and in function so if the msrp is less than 20 000 it will display the tax less than 20k if it’s less than 30 000 meaning it’s not less than 20 000 but it’s less than thirty thousand it is say less than thirty k to display that text if neither of those statements are true if it’s not less than twenty thousand and it’s not less than thirty thousand it’s going to just display greater than or equal to 30k so the else statement and notice when you got to the end of the line it put that colon after else you didn’t have to type that so there’s a line editor every time you get to the end of the line it’s checking the line to make sure it’s okay so this is known as an if construct it’s going to do different things depending on whether a statement is true and that’s how you create the function procedure now we should go ahead and compile our project so again you just need to be anywhere between function and in function and do your compile project make sure there’s no errors and then we’re going to save so there are two ways to execute a function procedure the first way is by using what’s called the immediate window and it’s really testing the function to make sure that it works properly and so we’re going to do that way first and then i’ll tell you about the second way which is really super cool in my opinion um and you’ll see that soon so the first thing we need to do is get the immediate window open in visual basic editor so we’re gonna go to the view menu and we’re going to choose immediate window and it opens in the bottom of the screen in the immediate window we can test this function procedure i’ll explain it after we type it in you’re going to type question mark and then msrp status the name of the function and then in parentheses now if you notice right underneath where we’re typing in the immediate window right right underneath that it’s showing that in the parentheses it’s waiting for us to give it a argument so we use msrp in the parentheses as a parameter and now we have to pass it an argument in order for the function to work which means we have to give it a number that represents an msrp in the parentheses we’re going to just type 10 000 no punctuation close the parentheses and press enter question mark means the same as print in vb a right so it’s saying print the result right there in the immediate window so if we look at our if block we said if it’s less than 20 000 we want it to say less than 20k and that’s exactly what it did now we can use either the question mark or the print keyword to the same effect in the immediate window so now in the immediate window you’re going to type print and then msrp status open paren and we’re going to put 20 000 in there and close the parentheses and now press enter so it’s giving us less than thirty thousand so question mark and the print keyword do the same exact thing in the immediate window we’re testing our function to make sure that it works so let’s do another one we could do either question mark or print whichever your preferred one is and we’re going to set it up again msrp status and this time in the parentheses we’re going to put 40 000 close the parentheses press enter and we should get the greater than or equal to 30k the else statement is working because it’s not less than 20 thousand it’s not less than thirty thousand the parameter that we gave it the argument that we gave it in the parentheses it’s forty thousand so we’re getting greater than or equal to thirty k if you’re creating super complicated function procedures you would want to test them in your immediate window giving it different values to make sure it works the other way to test it let’s go ahead and switch over to excel i’m doing alt f11 there okay and let’s go to the inventory sheet tab and click in cell i to and so i2 you’re going to type an equal sign like you would for any built-in excel function and then you’re going to start typing the name of the function we’re going to type ms and our msrp status function shows up here it’s a user defined function in the excel application once you create it unless you go and delete that function you will be able to use it in excel we’re going to click on or since msrp is already selected i’m going to just tab key it’s called tabbing it in and then we are going to click on cell h2 the very first msrp and we don’t even have to type the closing parentheses here because we’re doing it in excel application so go ahead and press enter and then click on i2 and the little notch in the lower right hand corner of the cell is known as the fill handle and once i put my mouse on top of the fill handle it looks like a thin black cross and i am going to double click so you’ll notice it’ll fill it all the way down to the bottom until it runs into a blank right so if i do control n it filled it all the way down to row 105. and it’s looking at each msrp’s value and determining what to display in the adjoining cell and so we are going to right click on the column i column heading and delete that column and i want to show you something else since we’re in here go to the formulas tab on your ribbon and the first button is insert function click it where it says or select a category most recently used do the drop down arrow and you might have to scroll down to see it but you’re looking for a category called user defined now there’s going to be stuff in here that you’re like what does that mean don’t worry about it this stuff that comes into excel automatically but you’ll see your msrp status in that list so that is a user defined function in the excel application which i think is just pretty cool we can just cancel out of that and go ahead and save your file so our last topic in this lesson is getting context sensitive help in the visual basic editor so i’m going to do alt f11 and switch back over to vbe and in vbe i’m still in my mod function module i’m going to just click anywhere in the word function at the beginning of that function procedure and i’m going to press f1 on my keyboard so it brings up the context help box because you’re in excel visual basic for applications and it’s saying that there’s an object in both visual basic and excel called function we’re interested in the vba function so we can just either double click it or go over and click on help it’s already selected so it launches your browser and i can tell you that the vba documentation from microsoft is awesome so it gives you the function statement from vba it lets you know that it declares the name arguments and code that form the body of a function procedure it gives you the syntax so you know just like sub procedures there’s different statements public private right if it’s undeclared it’s public um there’s also friend and static and then the function name and then in parentheses the argument list and you can give it a data type as its return as well which we didn’t have to do on hours right um there’s also an exit function statement that we didn’t need to use so it gives you the breakdown about everything descriptions on everything right and so and then there’s remarks at the bottom and so it says there’s one line in here that says all execute all executable code must be in procedures you can’t define a function procedure inside of another function sub or property procedure and notice that sub there is a link so if i click on that link it brings me to context sensitive help about the sub statement and the other thing i’ll point out in here is on the left side it lets you know that you’re looking at the sub statement right so if i scroll up on the left side there’s the if then else construct and again we’re going to do a deeper dive into that later but if i wanted more information on that i can just click on it on the left side right and it gives you all the information you need to know about that if i continue to scroll up it’s all under the heading statements which is under the heading reference which is under the heading language reference so anything you need to know i’m going to just switch back over to my visual basic editor you can access it by pressing f1 when you are on a particular keyword right so it works that way it gets you into the microsoft documentation really good context specific help at your fingertips so we covered a lot in lesson three and just to recap what we covered we went into a deeper dive about the types of modules that are available within visual basic and the types of procedures then we went on to creating a standard module we created a sub procedure and we called procedures by creating a calling procedure you also learned about the scope of procedures then we created a function procedure and we tested it using the immediate window before going into excel and accessing it in its interface as a user defined function after that you were shown how to get context sensitive help from within the visual basic editor thank you for attending excel 2019 visual basic for applications video course hi everyone i’m trish connor cato welcome to the excel 2019 visual basic for applications video course this course is for beginning users looking to automate repetitive and recurring tasks in microsoft excel vba is microsoft’s programming language and it’s built into the office applications our focus during this course is on excel specifically you’ll be equipped with the basics to start writing your own vba code modify the code behind macros you’ve already recorded and have an understanding of how vba lends itself to creating efficiency in your daily tasks a key component of vba is its language elements you’ll learn about this important topic by learning about variables their scope and how to declare them you’ll also gain an understanding of vba data types intrinsic functions and the with end with structure and how it provides efficiency in your code you’ll also learn to create message boxes and input boxes in this lesson as well as gaining understanding of object variables the next lesson will teach you how to control program flow through supported control of flow structures this lesson begins with an overview of structures and boolean expressions you’ll then learn how to utilize conditional branching and the lesson ends with learning about how to use looping constructs if you’re enjoying these videos please like and subscribe if you want to earn certificates and digital badges please become a member of our patreon the link is in our video description if you have any questions you want answered by one of our instructors please join our off-site community the link is in the description as well as always if this course has exercise files you’ll find them in the video description below in our fourth lesson we’re going to dive into expressions variables and intrinsic functions you’ve already experienced comments seeing them when we fill out the description in the record macro dialog box and we’ve actually modified comments and added our own comments to code that we created from scratch and comments are known as a foundational vba language element well there are others and we’re going to get into them in this lesson so we’re going to get started by learning and understanding variables we’ll go over vba data types and intrinsic functions which include expressions we saw the with end with structure in the first macro we recorded the add formatting macro it created that structure with everything that resides in the paragraph group on the home tab of the excel ribbon and we deleted a lot of extraneous lines just to make our code more concise you’re going to learn about the offset property using message boxes and input boxes and object variables we’re going to be using our regular vehicles macro enabled file as well as two other excel files that are in the video description and you should be putting these files all in the same directory so we’re going to be using an excel file named then numbers and another one called sales fiscal year variables are often considered the most important vba language element since one of vba’s main purposes is to manipulate data variables store data in your computer’s memory when procedures are executed and the data may or may not end up on disk some data resides in objects like worksheet ranges other data is stored in variables you create data that is stored in a variable usually changes while your procedure executes there are of course naming rules and conventions when it comes to variables very similar to the rules and conventions or the rules for naming procedures variable names can be up to 255 characters alphanumeric the first character must be a letter cannot use spaces or any of the characters listed on the slide and then it has another one that is not a procedure rule vba is not case sensitive but it is case preservative so you’ll learn about declaring variables in a moment and you’ll see this play out when you declare a variable if you declare it in proper case right using the rules and conventions and then let’s say the next time you reference it you type it in all lowercase visual basic editor gonna automatically change it to the case it was when you declared it and that’s what case preservative is a convention is used proper case for each word within the name of the variable and we have a couple of examples today’s date then num before you can use variables they need to be declared and just like procedures variables also have a scope so there are two declaration methods they’re implicit and explicit implicit declaration means you declare the variable by just using it without writing a declaration statement and this method can lead to code errors so for example with implicit declaration let’s say i name a variable green for example and then when i go to use it i misspell green it’s going to think that i’m implicitly declaring another variable and you can see how that could lead to coding errors explicit declaration is the preferred method you write a declaration statement to officially declare the variable now when it comes to variable scope you can use either the dim or the private keyword they mean the same thing they’re used interchangeably they have the same result i typically use dim and you declared a variable at the top of the module before the first procedure and that area at the top of the module is known as the declaration section if you want the variable available to all procedures in a module you would use dim or private and declare it in the declaration section the public keyword is also used in the declaration section at the top of the module and you use it if you want the variable available to all procedures in all modules and then there’s a static keyword static variables retain their value even when the procedure ends and you declare a static variable at the procedure level it means it’s only available in that procedure and when you declare variables you should assign them a data type so on this slide it’s talking about the data types that are available in vba and you can see the name of the data type the number of bytes that are used and the data types range of values a byte uses the data type known as a byte uses one byte and has a range of values from 0 to 255 a boolean data type uses 2 bytes and has either true or false as its range of values you have integer long single double currency and then at the bottom you have decimal data type those are your numeric data types they use varying bytes and they have varying ranges of values you have a date data type i don’t think you will ever be in a situation where you’re not covered as concerns a date i mean it goes back to the year 100 and all the way up to the year 99.99 you have your string data types fixed length and variable length and you have a variant data type so if you declare a variable and you don’t assign it a data type it will automatically assign it the variant data type look how many bytes that’s using if it’s a value it’s going to use 16 bytes and if it’s a string it’s going to use 22 plus bytes so you want to be careful and really try your hardest to assign data types when you’re declaring variables i’ve gone ahead and opened the vin numbers excel file that was in the video description and i still have my vehicles macro enabled file open but our focus right now is going to be on this file so it only has one sheet it has one then number and it has several other columns year make model color country classification what we’re going to do is insert a new module create a sub procedure and declare six procedure level string variables we talked about the declaration section at the top of the module window and anything you declare there depending on the keyword that you’re using determines the scope of the variable and the scope of a variable not only determines where it can be used but also affects the circumstances in which the variable is removed from memory only procedure level variables that are declared using the dim keyword are removed from memory when its code has completed execution if you use the static keyword in a variable that’s declared at the procedure level that means it’s going to retain the value of the variable after it executes so you’ll see what this means and how we’re going to use it when we switch over to vbe which we’re going to do right now by doing alt f11 so i want to point out a few things to you now since i still and you do too have the vehicles file open there’s a vba project that we’ve been working in this whole time for that particular file i’m going to collapse that project because we have another open workbook we have another vba project and it’s thennumbers.xlsx file that we just opened one thing i want to point out at the very top of the screen and i’m going to just select like sheet one in here to get rid of the code that’s on my screen and at the very top of the screen we have that option explicit statement this is when it’s time to learn why that’s sitting there and what it means so let’s go to the tools menu and go into options like we did earlier in the course and one of the options under code settings on the editor tab is require variable declaration and that way we can’t do an implicit declaration we have to do an explicit declaration the implicit ones are where you don’t write a declaration statement you just use the variable but that’s the type that can lead to code errors so to get the system to force you to write declaration statements you want this setting to be checked in your options require variable declaration and that means that it produces i’m going to just cancel out of options it forces that option explicit statement to show at the top so it’s going to force you to do variable declaration the other thing we talked about just a moment ago is that the scope of a variable determines not only where it can be used but the circumstances in which the variable is removed from memory you can always use two techniques to remove all variables from memory one of them is the reset button on the vbe toolbar so it looks like a stop button when you hover over it it says reset and a lot of times if you get cold errors once you resolve the errors you’re going to want to reset anyway if you ever get a runtime error there’s a dialog box that will pop up and it has an end button on it if you click end it will remove all variables from memory so i’ve closed the immediate window as we won’t be using it it has an x in its upper right hand corner just to give me some more working space here and what we want to do we’re going to take this in little steps like i said we’re going to set up the framework of a sub procedure and we’re going to declare six string variables we are going to look up at the top of your screen right underneath the option explicit statement is known as the declaration areas that’s why it says declarations over to the right in the procedure box we are going to first insert a new module so we’re going to use make sure you’re on your vba project then numbers right we want to be on that one we’re going to go up to insert module so it gives us a module 1 which we are currently in and again i always verify in the title bar up at the top what file or what project i’m in and then what module i’m in and this is where we’re going to create a sub procedure we are going to type sub and we’re going to name it parse then since then is all capitalized i’m going to leave it that way parse then i’m going to press enter twice and press the tab key so it gave me my parentheses and my end sub statement i’m going to actually and actually we don’t have to press tab i’m going to shift tab i’m going to declare procedure level variables but first i want to type a comment so i’m going to do an apostrophe and type this procedure will parse the vin number into the appropriate columns and then i’m going to press enter and enter again so i have my comment line now we’re going to use the dim keyword so i’m going to type dim and i want to show you two examples here again you want your code to be as concise as possible so you guys you don’t have to type or do anything other than watch my screen just want to show you an example here so hopefully this example is going to show you how to make your code more concise i’m going to highlight the lines of interest here these variables are all using the string data type and i typed a separate line item using the dem keyword for each item why would i do that if they’re all the same data type i can type this line just using the dem keyword once separating the variable names by commas and at the very end giving it the as string data type so that’s the line that you’re going to end up typing and then i’m going to end up keeping but i have another example let’s say you were only declaring two variables and they had different data types so in that case you would end up with two lines dim dealer cost as single dim then number as string the ones that have the same data type i grouped them together on one line easier to type easier to troubleshoot so i am going to go ahead and delete these individual rows of variable declarations and i’m going to delete the last two and we want to declare six procedure level string variables and you’re going to type this dim statement that i have on my screen and you’ll notice that when you get to the as keyword and you start typing string a list of data types will appear so it’s not going to let you type in a data type that you just make up or pull from thin air that is not compatible with vva now that we have our six procedure level string variables declared and again they’re only going to be available to the procedure within which they’re declared we are going to look at building intrinsic functions so by definition they’re functions that are provided by the application like a function procedure an intrinsic function performs a specific task or calculation and returns a value you may be familiar with the three functions we’re going to use in this section because they’re essentially excel functions and there are string functions in excel so if you’ve ever used any of the excel text functions these may be familiar to you we’re going to use left mid and right so the left function extracts specified text from the left of the text string its syntax is left and then you have to tell it what string expression and then you give it a numeric expression don’t worry about memorizing this i will walk you through it when we’re ready to go back to visual basic editor the mid function extracts specified text from the middle of a string it has three arguments well first you use mid which is the name of the function and then it has a string expression that it needs to reference a starting position in that string and the number of characters you want extracted and then the right function does the opposite of the left it extracts specified text from the right of the text string it too has the same arguments as left so right and then the string expression that it’s referencing and a numeric expression that references how many characters are going to be extracted and again don’t worry about this i will guide you through these functions and now i want to show you just a split screen of a slide on the right and the vin numbers excel sheet on the left i mentioned earlier that these are just make believe then numbers but the way we’re using them in this course and the way we’re going to use them in this procedure that we’re developing is based on the slide so we’re saying the first character in the then so in this case the number one represents the country of origin honestly i don’t know if that’s true or not just make believe data here but this is how we’re using it the second character of the then would represent the make the third and the fourth characters would represent the model the 11th character would represent the year 12th character would represent the color and the 17th character of the then would represent the classification again i will guide you through this as we’re using our left right and mid functions but you have the slide for future reference if you want to kind of run through it again on your own you’ll know how we’re using the vin number now we’re ready to use our intrinsic functions in this parse then procedure we already created a blank line underneath our variable declaration dim statement in this procedure and we’re going to press tab on the keyboard to indent and what we’re going to type is range and then in parentheses and double quotes a 2 close your double quotes close the parentheses we’re going to use our dot notation and now you’ll see the list pop up with methods properties bunch of different things we’re gonna start typing select and when it shows up on the list and it’s highlighted i can stop typing and press my tab key to get it in and i’m going to press enter so it’s going to select cell a2 and then we’re going to reference one of our variables but we’re going to reference it in all lower case so we’re just going to type then num and then a spacebar equals and we’re going to type active cell dot and when the list comes up start typing value when i see it on the list i highlight it and tab it in so we’re saying select cell a2 and then that is the active cell once it’s selected we want the then number variable to be populated with whatever is in cell a2 so in excel you can see that the only then number in this file is in cell a2 so it’s going to select that cell and then assign the then num variable that then number go ahead and press enter at the end of that line and notice that it adjusted the casing on venn num remember vba is not case sensitive it’s case preservative so when we declared that variable we did uppercase v uppercase n and then when we typed it in we did it in all lower case as soon as we press enter at the end of that line it goes back and preserves its original declaration case that is an example of case preservative so now we’re going to type year so we’re going in the order of the way we declared the variables that’s easy to keep yourself organized so we started with select cell a2 and then populate the then num variable with the then number that is in cell a2 now we’re going to say what to populate the year variable with so we type year equal and then we’re going to type the mid intrinsic function open paren so right underneath it it’s telling you the arguments that it’s looking for so you’ll see that yellow banner there right right now it’s waiting for the string argument and then you have a numeric argument right and the string argument is bold because that’s the one that it’s waiting for in the open parentheses we’re going to type then num the name of our variable and again doesn’t matter how you do the casing because it’s case preservative then num comma 11 comma 1. so the mid function has three arguments the string argument the start as long argument right that’s the starting position and then the last argument is the number of characters so we’re saying the year is going to equal the 11th character of the then we’re saying in that then num variable which now holds the entire vin number we want you to go to the 11th character and extract one character which is the 11th character you’re gonna type a closing paren so the 11th character of the then represents the year and press enter our next one that we’re going to do is the make because we’re doing them in order here so instead of you watching me continue to type i finish this part of this procedure so we left off with doing the year so i’d like you to just copy from my screen and assign values based on the character or characters in the then to make model color and classification you can pause the video until you get it done and once you have the other variable assignments done go ahead and compile your vba project so just be anywhere between sub and in sub make sure there’s no errors by the way if you just watch my screen i’m going to take out this classification line and i just want to show you something you don’t have to worry about spacing you know the variable is a case preservative so i could type that line as classification no space equal mid open paren i’m typing then num in a weird mix of capitalization 17 comma 1 and i’m not typing spaces at all i’ll type the closing parentheses and when i press enter it gives me the appropriate spacing and it case preserved the name of the variable so you don’t have to worry about your spacing there’s a line editor so when you get to the end of the line and you press enter it will fix little stuff like that for you so you don’t have to worry about that now for the classification since we have 17 character then 17 characters total in the then we could have used the right function it would have just been right then num 17 right the last character but you can also use mid there same result now we’re going to go ahead and i’m going to compile again since i made a change and it’s saying the variable is not defined so i got a compile error this time class because i misspelled classification so it’s not defined i spelled classification and it’s like uh nope sorry you have explicit variable declaration turned on and you did not declare that variable so i’m going to just do ok correct my typo i’m going to compile again and now i don’t get the error we’re gonna test this at this point so we’re gonna switch over to excel i’m gonna use the excel icon on the toolbar to switch over since i have multiple files open and we’re going to test this we’re going to go alt f8 to open up our macros dialog box and we’ll see the macros that are in the vehicles macro enabled file that we still have open as well as this one that’s not prefaced by a file name parsfin because it’s in the current file that we’re working in so i’m going to just click on parsed then i double clicked it and absolutely nothing happened i wanted to show it to you at this stage let’s switch back over alt f11 and switch back over to our parseven sub procedure so all we’ve done at this point in this procedure is declare variables and use our intrinsic functions to assign each variable a value but we haven’t told it what to do with the values assigned to the variable so nothing happened it assigned the values to the variable but we didn’t say how to display those values in order to tell it where to display the values of the variables on the spreadsheet we’re going to take a look at the width end width structure and the offset property and then we’re going to go and complete that parseven sub procedure compare these two code blocks so the top one these four lines selection dot starts at the end of each line it’s repetitive and then you have whatever the thing is so selection dot horizontal alignment equals excel center selection dot vertical alignment equals excel center selection dot wrap text equals true selection dot merge cells equals false so you’re repeating the selection and the dot on every line as a compared to the with end with block of code so you say with selection and then you just do the dot and the thing that it is and what it equals and at the end of it you have an end with statement so with end with structure saves you some typing makes your code a bit more concise and that’s one thing that we’re going to use and then you’re going to learn how to use the offset property it allows you to refer to a cell that is a specific number of rows and or columns away from another cell so it has a syntax dot offset it is a property and then you have the number of rows comma the number of columns as arguments both arguments are not required if you use the rows argument only close the parentheses after it if you use only the columns argument use a comma as a placeholder for the rows argument when positive numbers are used in arguments the property goes down rows and right across columns when negative numbers are used in its arguments the property goes up rows and left across columns so i have some examples here range a1 so if you’re in cell a1 right dot offset one comma two refers to cell c2 the first argument is the rose argument so it’s saying go down one row and go to the right two columns so if i’m in cell a1 and i go down one row i’m in row two and if i go across two columns i’m in column c so it refers to cell c2 if i’m in cell c2 and i do an offset of negative 1 for the rows argument and negative 2 for the columns argument it’s going to go up rows because we’re using negative numbers there and it’s going to go to the left of cross column so it’s going to refer to cell a1 i have range a1 offset 1 and that refers to cell a2 i’m just using the first argument the rows argument so it’s just going down one row it’s staying in the same column no column offset and then the last example there range a1 offset comma two so we’re not using the rows argument but we need a comma as a placeholder or we’ll get an error message and we’re saying go to the right two columns but stay in the same row so that refers to cell c1 and again this powerpoint is in the video description for future reference and i already gave you the typing tips that are on the bottom of the slide so now we’re going to add our width and width structure and include it and it will be our offset statements we’re going to click at the end of the classification line and press enter and then tab and we’re going to type with active cell enter tab again and type dot and the letter o so the offset property shows at the top of the list notice it’s a property you can tell by the icons over time you’ll learn the different icons in the list but the one that looks like offset it looks like a spreadsheet or a piece of paper that a hand is holding that indicates it’s a property if you look down at the green icon that’s in the list for parse and paste special those are methods so just visual cues for you since offset is selected i’m going to tab it in so i don’t have to type and then i’m going to do an open paren comma because we’re not going to use the row offset but we have to use that comma as a placeholder we’re only doing column offsets here one close the paren dot value and you’ll see value on your list so you can double click it or tab it in equal year it’s saying the active cell is still cell a2 up at the very beginning we said select that cell and then we assign the then number variable the vennum variable the value of cell a2 where the actual then number resides that is still our active cell so we’re saying starting with cell a2 offset one column so go to b2 and put in the value of the year variable which is the 11th character of the then now again you don’t have to watch me type i’m gonna just pause and get the rest of these offset lines in and then you’ll be able to pause your video and type them in so after the year offset line you’re going to type the other remaining five offset lines on my screen for make model color country and classification but you’re also going to have to type the end with statement unlike when we do a sub or a function procedure when we type sub parsevin and press enter it gives us the open and closing parentheses for our parameters if any and it gives us the in sub statement or if it’s a function procedure the end function statement it will not give you the end with statement that is required with the with end with constructs so make sure you out dent and get your end within and you can go ahead and pause the video and get those lines typed in and once you’re done you’re going to go ahead and compile your project check to make sure there are no errors and we’re going to switch back over to excel i’m using the icon on the toolbar to get there and so now we’re ready to test it we told it what values to assign to each variable and now we’ve told it where to display those variable values which column and cell to display it in by using our offset statements within the with end width structure so i’m going to just be on any cell in here and i’m going to do alt f8 to bring up our macros dialog box and i’m going to click on parse then and then run or you can double click it and i’m like yay it worked it put the right bits of data in the right cells except for country what happened to country stay tuned and we’ll take a look and you’ll find out just so you know i did this on purpose you can blame me but i did it on purpose because a lot of coding is troubleshooting and we get to debugging code in like the last chapter of the last lesson of this course but along the way you’re going to run into situations and it’s helpful to get some guidance in what to do so in this case everything worked except it didn’t populate country in row two so the first thing we’re going to do since it didn’t work the way it’s designed to work is we’re going to delete we’re going to select b through g2 and just press delete and we’re going to switch back over to the visual basic editor so the last thing we did was our with endless structure and i’m going to start there and i look through the list and our offset statements pardon my ocd but i have them in order one two three four five six again i don’t want to be looking up and down if i’m troubleshooting to figure out where something is but i do have an offset statement for country so i’m like okay it’s not that the compiler did not pick up any errors so it’s something that i probably missed so i look up in the upper half of this and i said you know we’re going to tackle these variables in their order so we started with then num then we went to year make model color and then we skipped country and went to classification so we never did our country intrinsic function to tell it what value to assign to that variable which means that it can’t display anything even though we did an offset statement i’m going to click after the color mid function line and press enter so it’s in order the first character of the then represents the country so we’re going to use the left intrinsic function here we’re going to type country equals left open paren then num and we want it to extract one character which is the first character from the left side of the then number and we’re gonna close our parentheses we’re gonna press enter just so it does any formatting and then i’m gonna delete that extra line and shift tab so classification we’re going to go ahead and compile our project again make sure there’s no errors and now we’re going to switch back over to excel we’re going to do alt f8 to access our macros box and we’re going to run parse then again and now you’ll see that the year make model color country and classification columns are filled in appropriately as a result of the parse then procedure so because we created a sub procedure in this file you probably want to go ahead and save it as macro enabled workbook and i’m going to let you go ahead and do that on your own and when you’re done and you look in your working directory you have two vehicles file one is just a regular excel file and the other is macro enabled and now you have two vin numbers you have your regular one that we started with and then the macro enabled one that you just saved now we’re going to begin to get some background information on both the message box function and the input box functions in visual basic so we’re going to start with the message box function on the slide it has the syntax so in parentheses you have a prompt which is required and then you have two optional arguments buttons and title the message box function displays a pop-up box with a message for the user another thing vba will allow you to use the function without enclosing the arguments in parentheses a best practice here is to always enclose function arguments in parentheses so you err on the side of caution and to provide consistency in your code now if you do not use the title argument the title defaults to the name of the application which in this case is excel microsoft excel so the table on the right tells you about the argument it displays text in a message box for the end user the buttons is a number that specifies which buttons and icons appear in the message box this is optional if it’s not used the message box will default to the ok button and then you have the title argument like i said if you don’t use the title argument it defaults to the name of the application but if you want it to say something else in the title bar of the message box then you would use this argument to choose which buttons and or icons display in your message box you do that by using what are known as vba constants constants are similar to variables they are declared however while variable values can change during program execution constant values do not change and visual basic for applications constant names are preceded by lowercase vb so you have a table on the right we’re not going to review this again the slide deck is in your video description files and you can use it for future reference but if you just want an ok button in your message box the value for that particular constant is zero if you wanted a question mark icon in your message box you would use the value of 32 to represent that in addition to referencing the icons and the buttons in the message box by utilizing the values as we saw in the previous slide you can just use the vb constant name if you say vb yes no plus vb exclamation it will display the yes and no buttons with the exclamation point icon if you have vb ok cancel plus vb critical you’ll get the ok and cancel buttons and the critical warning icon and you can also have multiple lines for the prompt argument by using the vb newline constant so here’s an example msg box that’s the message box function in parentheses in double quotes because it’s text do you want to continue question mark then we’re using the concatenation character the ampersand to combine everything and we’re using the vb new line constant so it’s saying go down to the next line and on the next line it’s going to say click yes to continue then after that so all of that is the prompt argument and then we say vb yes no plus vb question so we want the yes and no buttons and the question mark icon and then the last argument is the title and we’re gonna put in step one of three for a title and when we get back into visual basic editor to use the message box function you’ll use the assignment operator which is the equal sign to assign the return value of a message box button to a variable you’ll see that in a bit and we’re also going to be using the input box function similar syntax to message box has three arguments one of which is required which is the prompt it has a title argument and a default argument and an input box is used to obtain a single piece of information from the user the information could be a value a text string or even a range address input boxes always display ok and cancel buttons so the prompt argument is just like the prompt argument for a message box the title argument is the same as well it’s optional but it’s the text value that appears in the title bar and if you don’t use it it would be the name of the application and then the default argument is new to you here it’s the default argument for the user’s input so it’s optional but you can pre-populate it and if the user doesn’t want what you pre-populated with they can type over it so we’re going to get ready to use both the message box and the input box functions we’ll be working again in our vehicles macro enabled file i’m in the visual basic editor for our vehicles macro enabled file and in the project explorer window i’m going to go ahead and double click sheet 3 new vehicles so this is where we use the event procedure when the new vehicle sheet is activated it runs the get new inventory calling procedure which bundles all the other procedures to retrieve that data and so we’re gonna make this further automated by modifying this procedure here and it’s going to give the end user a choice whether they want to get the new inventory or not so we’re gonna modify this worksheet activate subprocedure and click right in front of where it says get new inventory and press enter a few times and then use your up arrow to go back up so we want that blank line after private sub worksheet activate again just for spacing purposes and when you have to debug your code it’s easier to read so what we’re going to do is we’re going to declare a variable and it’s a procedure level variable so it’ll only be available in this sub procedure so we’re going to use our dem keyword and we’re going to name the variable response and we’re going to declare it as an integer and then i’m going to press enter and this is how you assign the user input from a message box results to a variable our next line is going to do just that we’re going to type response equals remember the equal sign is the assignment operator and then we’re going to type msg box we want to use our line continuation character here we’re going to do a space and then an underscore and press enter and remember if we didn’t do that and we just press enter we’d get an error because it’s expecting the rest of the message box arguments the rest of its syntax rather on the same line unless we tell it to continue to on the next line so that’s what we’ve done here and then we’re going to tab again and we’re going to do an open paren double quotes do you want to run the get new inventory procedure question mark closing double quote comma so that’s our prompt argument and your arguments separated by commas now we want another line continuation so we’re going to do a space and an underscore and enter we’re ready for what combination of buttons we want in the message box as well as which icon so we’re going to type we’re going to use the constant names vb yes no plus vb question comma and for our title bar argument our title argument it’s going to be in double quotes run get new inventory and i’m going to put a question mark at the end of that and close the quotes and now we’re ready to our closing parentheses now we’re going to press enter and we’re going to shift tab to get back to the margin so so far we’ve declared a variable response as an integer and we’re saying response equals whatever the user choices are in the message box well we have to tell it what to do based on a user choice so now we’re going to type if and then response equals vb yes then and now i’m going to use my delete key to get the get new inventory line on that same line if the response equals yes so if there’s going to be a yes and a no button in the message box if the response equals yes then run the procedure and we’re not telling it what to do if they say no in the message box so if they say no it’s not going to do anything in other words it’s not going to run the procedure go ahead and compile your project make sure there’s no errors there and let’s go ahead and save so now we’re ready to test this messagebox function and i’m going to just do alt f11 to switch back over to excel or any way you want to get there is fine and we’re going to click on the new vehicle sheet tab and let’s just say no at this point right so this time when we click on it instead of just running the procedure it gives us our message box let’s say no on the message box and it doesn’t bring in any of the new vehicle information go back to your inventory sheet tab click on new vehicles again and now you’ll see your title bar run get new inventory you see it has the question mark icon in the message box and it has yes and no buttons so we’re gonna click yes this time and it ran the procedure and we’re gonna select everything by doing control a and pressing delete and then just clicking cell a1 on new vehicle sheet again and go back to your inventory sheet now we’re going to switch back over to visual basic we’re going to use the input box function in our next example so we want to in visual basic editor we want to go to our new vehicles module and we’re going to modify this get new vehicles sub procedure the scenario here is that it defaults to opening that received vehicles file right and copying and pasting the information from it so suppose that that file changes over time maybe this month it’s called received vehicles maybe next month it’s called something else we want to give the users the end user the ability to put in what the actual file name is most of the time it will be received vehicles so we’re going to use that as a default setting that the user can override as necessary so the first thing we’re going to do is we’re going to go ahead and update the comment line so i’m going to just select that first comment line that says get new vehicles macro i’m going to leave the exclamation point there though so it will retain its status as a comment line and i’m going to type prompts the user for the name of a file comma opens the file comma selects the data and the second comment line the copy and paste data we’re going to just say copy and paste data into the current workbook so it’s going to be a more accurate description than what it was before underneath i’m going to press enter a couple of times and now i’m ready to declare two procedure level variables they’re both going to be strings so we’re going to do dim file location comma file as string so our two string variables and now i’m gonna click in front of workbooks dot open file name and press enter a few times and then i’m gonna up arrow so i have a blank space after our variable declarations and i’m gonna type file location equals this workbook dot path the directory path to this particular workbook this vehicle’s workbook so we’re assigning that path to the variable file location i’m going to press enter and now we’re going to say file equals and we’re going to type input box open paren double quotes what is the name of the new vehicles file question mark double quote comma and we want our line continuation character here so space and underscore and enter now we’re going to tab in one time and now we’re ready for the title argument so that is the prompt argument what is the name of the new vehicles file now we’re ready for the title argument and it’s going to be in double quotes new vehicles file name question mark close your quote comma line continuation so your space underscore enter and our last argument here for input box is the default argument so the actual text box in the input box will be populated with and we’re going to put it in double quotes received vehicles and you have to have the extension dot xlsx close your quotes closing paren enter we’re almost done with this one and we’re going to do shift tab just to get to the same margin as file location and file and we’re going to type file equals file location the ampersand for our concatenation character and then in double quotes a backslash another ampersand and file so we’re saying that the file location is the path on your directory path to this workbook the vehicle’s workbook and the file variable is going to be the result of the user’s input box choice if they keep the default it will be received vehicles.xlsx if they over type that it’d be whatever they over type it with and then we’re saying we want to combine the file location and the file with a backslash in between the file location and the file name and that is then going to be what the variable file represents and this is assuming that the received vehicles file or whatever file has the new inventory in it is in the same directory path as this workbook we have one other change to make to the existing code that was here so i’m going to go underneath my file equal file location concatenated line and i’m going to just delete the blank lines that are there and now we’re going to change that workbooks.open file name line so what i’m going to do is after the equal sign at the end of that line i’m gonna type file and then we’re gonna delete the continuation character notice how we get that red line underneath because we don’t have we’re not telling it to continue on the next line and we’re going to delete that whole path there because now we’re saying open the file based on the variable file so file is now the file location path and whatever file is in not name is in the input box whether it’s received vehicles or whether the end user types in something else so we don’t need the rest of that stuff that we had there go ahead and compile your project and save so now we’re going to be ready to test this and i will say we’ve given now the end user the ability to say no or yes that they want to run the get new inventory procedure and now the additional use of being able to dictate which file to bring the data into from i’m going to just go over to my excel and i’m on the inventory sheet tab i’m going to click on new vehicles and there’s our message box and we’re going to say yes that we do want to run the get new inventory procedure and now we see our input box we point out the title argument new vehicles file name question mark right here is our prompt what is the name of the new vehicle’s file and then we have our default argument where it populates it with receive vehicles.xlsx and it can be overwritten by the end user we’re gonna click ok to accept the default and it runs the procedure and of course we are going to select everything and delete it actually go back to your inventory sheet tab the last part of this lesson is getting used to object variables so they’re used to make your code more concise they help you avoid typing lengthy object references and when you’re declaring object variables the scope statements you use with regular variables are applicable so your dem private public keywords are the same object variables are declared with object types instead of data types so we have the syntax there you could use dim public private static the name of the variable as the object type so examples would be public sheet as worksheet dim range as range when you assign values to object variables you have to use the set keyword so your basic syntax would be set variable name equal object name set sheet equal worksheets year-to-date sales set range equal activesheet. a1 through f12 once you assign an object to an object variable the object can be referenced by its variable name now we’re going to do exercises obviously using object variables and we’re going to be using the sales fiscal year dot excel sx excel workbook in your directory it was a file from your video description so in this excel file we have multiple sheet tabs if i just right click on your tab scrolling arrows you’ll see going from june 1st 2016 to august 26 2016. each sheet is representing sales on that day so you have your vins your year make model classification color dealer costs msrp selling price and the sales person each sheet has different amounts of data so different amounts of rows of data depending on the sales on that particular date we’re going to use object variables and we’re going to create a sub procedure that will sum the column column i the selling price column and place the result in the cell two rows below the last populated cell in that column so for example on the 26th of august sheet we want the selling price sum to be two rows underneath the last selling price in column i and we’re going to use object variables to set that up let’s go ahead and switch over to the visual basic editor and make sure you’re in the right project if you still have your vehicles file open you may not see it here if you don’t see your file your sales fiscal year file listed over here sometimes you have to close the visual basic editor like mine’s been open the whole time so i’m going to close it and then go back into it just a little trick sometimes it doesn’t refresh and now i can see projects for sales fiscal year which has a lot of microsoft excel objects because of all the sheets i can collapse that and i still have my vehicles project there as well collapse that what we’re want to do in here is start this code where we’re gonna declare object variables so we’re gonna expand our sales fiscal year project and you can collapse your microsoft excel objects folder right click on your sales fiscal year project in project explorer hover over insert and choose module and in module 1 we’re going to start a sub procedure we can just this one’s not going to be very long we can just type it in so we’re going to type sub and we’re naming it add totals and i’m going to press enter twice and then i’m going to tab and i’m going to declare my object variables so we’re going to use the dim keyword and the variable name is going to be last cell as a range so as an object not a data type so we’re dimming last so we’re declaring last cell as a range enter and we’re going to dim total formula as a string and enter so two object variable declarations i’m going to enter again and then tab we’re going to set so we have to use the set keyword when assigning a value to an object variable last cell equals and then range and in parentheses and double quotes we’re going to type i2 so cell reference i2 close your quotes close your parentheses type the dot notation and then end and now when you type an open parenthesis you’ll have a list that pops up and we’re looking for the entry that says excel down that’s an excel constant and we’re going to close the parentheses so that line is saying starting in cell i2 go all the way to the end of that column until you find the last populated cell we’re going to press enter and we’re going to type last cell dot select right so the last populated cell is now selected in column i press enter and we’re going to do active cell dot offset you remember our offset before in parentheses we’re gonna do two close the parentheses so we’re saying the last populated cell is currently selected and we want to go down two rows dot select and select that blank cell two rows down from the last populated cell now we have to tell it what the object variable total formula is going to be so we’re going to do total formula equals in double quotes equal sum open paren i to colon close your double quotes space and an ampersand we’ll get this one typed in and i’ll explain it and then a space last cell dot address which will be on your list open paren false false closing paren space ampersand and then in double quotes a closing paren you’re like what okay so basically it’s saying we have that last cell right selected the last cell object variable is set to the last populated cell so it’s saying give the total formula give me the sum from cell i2 through the last cell address wherever that last populated cell is it could be i24 could be i26 whatever it is and then it wants to know if that last cell address is absolute and we’re saying false it’s not absolute by row it’s not absolute by column and then we just need to enclose it in a parenthesis a literal parenthesis so we have that in double quotes as well and now we just have to assign it so we’re going to go down and we’re gonna type active cell dot formula equals total formula declared to object variables we set both of them well last cell we we said it’s from i to the last populated cell starting in cell i2 and then select that last populated cell offset it by two rows and populate the total formula result in that cell that’s two rows underneath the last populated cell in column i that’s what you just did and we have our in sub statement there and you’re going to go ahead and compile your project and save so when we get to the save part right it lets us know that this is a macro free workbook we could lose our code here so we’re gonna do no on that message box and you’re gonna save it same file name as macro enabled we are going to test this sub procedure in a different way than we’ve seen our procedures run before so normally we’ve been running our procedures and the entire block runs we want to see kind of like the behind the scenes step-by-step version of what happens when we test this add total sub procedure with our object variables so i’ve arranged my windows i have my visual basic editor on one side of my screen and i have the excel sales fiscal year now macro enabled workbook on the other side of my screen so take a moment and get your screens arranged that way and then in the excel portion of your screen you’re gonna do alt f8 to bring up your macro dialog box now i still have my vehicles file open so you’ll see the macros that are in that file the code blocks that are in that file but you also see our add totals code here and so what you’re going to do is you’re going to just click once on add totals and over on the right you’re going to click on step into so now in your visual basic editor you’ll see that the name of the sub procedure is highlighted in yellow and there’s a yellow arrow in the margin so at this point if we were running the procedure it would be at this step it would just be highlighting the sub line of the procedure there’s no change in our excel window at all we used step into from the macro dialog box the shortcut key for step into once it started is just the f8 key on your keyboard so now we’re going to press f8 so it skipped the lines our object variable declarations it skipped those lines and it went to the first line of code so it’s saying set last cell equals range i2 and xl down so we want the last cell to be the last populated cell in column i but notice there’s still no change on your excel workbook at this point press f8 again and now it’s on the last cell select line again you’re not seeing any change in excel let’s f8 again now you’re seeing a change in excel in excel it has now selected the last populated cell in column i so when this active cell dot offset line is yellow highlighted you’ll see the step before it you’re now seeing the results of last cell dot select press f8 again so now you’re seeing the results of active cell offset by two rows so now it’s selected the cell two rows underneath the last populated cell in column i we’re going to f8 again no change in excel because we told it what the total formula is right it’s the sum of from i to the last populated cell in column i at this point we haven’t told it where to put that result so go ahead and press f8 again and you’ll get the result now activecell.formula equals the result of the totalformula object variable so you can see how this can be useful when you have varying amounts of data on different sheets but you want the sum to be two rows underneath the last populated cell in a particular column we’re going to press f8 one more time to finish the procedure so now all your yellow shading is gone in visual basic and on that one sheet the 26th of august sheet we do have the sum of column i’s selling prices in this lesson we did a deeper dive into foundational vba language elements and we started by getting an understanding of variables and you learned that variables store data in your computer’s memory when procedures are executed and the data may or may not end up on disk some data resides in objects like worksheet ranges and other data is stored in the variables that you create and so you learned about the naming conventions when you declare variables how to declare them you learned about the data types that are supported in vba and the importance of assigning data types to the variables you declare so that it uses the least amount of memory on your computer you learned about the scope of variables meaning where they can be accessed from as well as two methods of declaring them which is implicit and explicit and we have the option explicit statement at the top of all of our modules so it forces us to explicitly declare our variables which is the preferred method because implicit declarations can often lead to code errors and so we moved on to covering some intrinsic functions and we used the left mid and right functions to extract data from the then string we learned how to make our code more concise by using the with end with structure it decreases the amount of typing that you have to do and we did that when we used the offset property to put the extracted data into the right cells we moved on to using the messagebox function to give the end user more control over whether a procedure runs or not you learned about visual basic constants which are used to control which buttons display in the message box as well as which icon displays in the message box and then we moved on to input box which gave the end user the ability to change to a different file to get that data brought into the main vehicles file and you saw that it has similar arguments to the message box function but it also has a default argument which we populate it with the name of the file and the end user can overwrite that and then we ended up with declaring object variables and we did that so that we can configure a sum function on a sheet that shows two rows below the last populated cell in a particular column and this is useful when you have sheets with varying lengths of data on it to be able to set up object variables and get the result in the same position relative to the last populated cell in a column so lesson five is about controlling program executions we’re going to start by learning about control of flow structures as well as boolean expressions you’ll learn about conditional branching looping constructs in this lesson as well we’re going to be using our regular vehicles macro enabled sales fiscal year macro enabled files as well as two text files in the video description one is called inventory append and the other is called model to this point we’ve worked with code blocks either the ones that we created via macro recordings or by writing sub and function procedures that progress line by line through the code this is known as a sequential structure there will be situations where a sequential structure is not what you need for your project and we actually got to visually see a sequential structure where we did our object variables and we stepped into the code seeing line by line how it works in the background in vba you use control of flow structures in your code to make decisions such as which statements to skip testing conditions to determine what the code should do next and to execute some statements multiple times you’ve seen a small example of that when we did our message box function where we modified that event procedure with an if then construct so if they did the yes button in the message box it would run the code if they did the no button it would do nothing so you’ve had a small example of that already so here you’re seeing the common control of flow structures you have sequential which we’ve already discussed you have unconditional branching and you’ve seen that already you’re just not aware of it yet and that’s a statement directs the flow of execution to another location in the program without condition so when we created a calling procedure that is unconditional branching you’re going to learn about conditional branching the code to be executed is based on the outcome of an expression that evaluates to true or false a boolean expression and that’s also known as a decision structure and it is used to implement conditional branching and then we have our looping structure which a block of code is executed repeatedly as long as a certain condition exists within the conditional branching and looping structures there are constructs that you use to carry out the job of the structure so we’re going to focus on our conditional branching right now we’ll revisit this slide later to go over our looping structures but within your conditional branching there are two different constructs there’s if then and select case so if then statement does something if something is true your select case statement does any of several things depending on something’s value and we’re going to focus right now on our if then constructs and you also need to know a little bit about boolean expressions here so let’s do that first so boolean expression evaluates to true or false they usually contain two expressions on either side of a comparison operator if the expression evaluates to true the condition is met and the structure passes control to the code to be executed so we have an example here sheets dot count less than three if the count of sheets in the workbook is less than three the expression is true if the sheet count is greater than or equal to 3 the expression is false boolean expression expressions are of the integer data type so they’re stored as 0 for false and negative 1 for true but now we’re going to just briefly go over these comparison operators the ones that i like to know about when i tackle a new programming language is how is not equal to represent it because it varies according to a different programming language so in here it’s less than and equal to symbols together in vba also at the bottom of the slide you use the is keyword to compare object variables and you use the like keyword to compare string expressions in visual basic then you have the logical operators and so you can test for more than one condition by joining boolean expressions with a logical operator we have the table here we have and or not an exclusive or when you’re using the and operator each expression must evaluate to true for the entire condition to be true when you’re using or only one of the expressions must evaluate to true for the condition to be true the not logical operator says the expression must evaluate to false for the condition to be true and then you have exclusive or which returns true if the expressions are different so i have a couple of examples of joined expressions here year greater than 2017 and make equals chevrolet both of those conditions have to be true because it’s using the and keyword in order for the expression to evaluate to true selling price less than or equal to fifteen thousand or list price greater than fifteen thousand only one of those statements has to be true in order for the expression to be true because it’s using the or logical operator the if then construct has four variations that can be used in visual basic for applications so we’ve already seen if then if the condition evaluates to true it executes the code after the then statement if the condition evaluates to false it does nothing the next variation is if then end if it’s the same as if then but it closes the if block with the end if statement and i’ll just let you know now most of the time it needs to be closed with that end if statement or you’ll get an error then you have the if then else end if variation if the condition evaluates to true it will execute the code after the then statement if the condition evaluates to false it will execute the code after the else statement this is the one that’s most similar to the if function in excel in the if function you give it a condition and you tell it what to do if the condition is true and what to do if the condition is false and then we have if then else if end if and by the way you can also have if then else if else end if and this is used to test multiple conditions and it can take an action on any that evaluate to true and again the else statement can be used if all conditions evaluate to false so if condition is true let’s say if condition one is true then it will execute the code after the then statement else if condition two is true right or condition three condition four condition five so the ability to test multiple conditions and say what to do if any of them are true there is another conditional branching structure which we’ll talk about before we use and that’s the select case statement but for right now we’re going to go ahead and use our if then constructs i’m back in the visual basic editor and i’m in the code window for our sheet 3 new vehicles so that event procedure which we already modified to add our if then statement we’re actually going to put in a if then end if statement in here imagine if there’s something already populating cell a1 on your new vehicle sheet if that’s the case if the sheet is already populated you don’t want it to have the message box asking if they want to run the get new inventory procedure because the sheet is already populated only if that cell is empty do we want it to bring up the message box offering the end user the choice to run the procedure so we’re going to create an if statement and let’s click at the end of our dim response as integer line and press enter and i’m actually going to press enter twice and then i’m going to do my tab key and we’re going to start typing this if then end if construct so i’m going to type if and then active sheet dot range and then in parentheses and double quotes a1 for cell a1 and you want to close your quotes and close your parentheses dot value equals and we’re gonna have a set of double quotes which means it’s empty so two double quotes no space in between and then we’re gonna type the then keyword if cell a1 on the new vehicle sheet is empty then right we want it to do response equals message box do you want to run the get new inventory procedure so all of the stuff that we have there and now what we need to do click after that if response equals vbs line press enter and tab and type end if now the other thing we’re going to do is we’re going to click in front of that if response equals vbs line and we’re going to press tab twice we have an if construct nested within an if then end if construct it will only bring up that message box do you want to run the get new inventory procedure if cell a1 on new vehicles is empty let’s go ahead and compile and then save and switch over to excel go to your new vehicle sheet say no you don’t want to run the procedure and just type anything in cell a1 can be number text anything now go back to your inventory sheet and back to new vehicles and you’ll notice that the message box does not pop up because cell a1 is not empty so now you can click on cell a1 and delete that information go back to inventory back to new vehicles and because the sheet is not populated at least so a1 is not populated it displays the message box and we’re going to say no on that message box so now we’re going to create a function procedure and we’re going to do it in our new vehicles module for our vehicles macro enabled file and we’re going to create a function procedure with two arguments this is going to evaluate the character in the then that represents the model year and then mark up the cost based on whether the vehicle is from the current or previous year so the then character is the 11th character in the then so we’re going to use an intrinsic function here within an if then else end if structure so we’re giving it something to do based on two different things right what to do if our condition is true and what to do if it’s false so the 11th character of the then is either populated with an a or a b the a means it’s the previous year in which case it will get a 10 markup the b means it’s the current year and it will get a 15 markup so i’m going to guide you through this now so i’m in mod new vehicles and i did control end to get to the bottom of the module and i’m going to type the name of the function that we’re using here so it’s going to be function and it’s going to be called get msrp and in parentheses we’re going to give it two parameters dealer cost and then num and press enter twice so now you’ll have your function and end function statements and this is where we’re going to now set up the if construct using the mid function so i’m going to tab and i’m going to type if mid open paren then num comma 11 1 so if the 11th character of the then number close your paren equals and then double quotes b then enter and tab get msrp equals dealer cost times 1.15 and then we can put a comment at the end of that line so i’m going to do a single quote and afterwards i’m going to type vehicle is current model year and then press enter so only the comment portion of that line turned green anything after the apostrophe or single quote turns green and it’s just explaining what that math is on that line and that the character b represents the current model year okay so now we have that we’re going to do a shift tab to get back to the same margin as if and we’re going to type else enter tab and we’re going to type get msrp equals dealer cost asterisk for multiplication 1.1 which is 10 percent we’re gonna do a comment a line comment there so your apostrophe and then vehicle is previous model year enter shift tab and you need to type an end if statement here and then i’m going to press enter again so i have that blank line between end if and end function now we’re going to go ahead and compile and save and we’re going to call this function from another procedure so we’re not going to test it quite yet what we’re going to do is we’re going to go to the upper right corner where it says get msrp in your procedure list we’re going to do the drop down arrow there and we’re going to select the get new inventory procedure just to navigate to that procedure in the get new inventory procedure we’re going to declare two local variables so right underneath the comment line i’m gonna at the end of the comment line i’m gonna press enter twice and i’m gonna just declare these two local variables so we’re gonna dim dealer cost as single data type and then the next line we’re gonna dim then number as string data type so we have our variables declared click at the end of the add formatting line and press enter and you’re going to type range and then in parentheses and double quotes a2 dot select so we wanted to select cell a2 and so a2 on the inventory sheet is where the first vin number resides so we want that cell selected and then we’re going to assign the then number variable that cell as its value so the next line down we’re going to do then number equals active cell dot value and enter and now we want to assign the dealer cost value in sell g2 on that sheet to the variable dealer cost so on this line we’re going to type dealer cost equals active cell dot offset so we have to offset it by six columns no rows so it’ll go to g2 where the first dealer costs would be so we’re going to do a comma because we’re not using the row offset and then a 6 close your paren dot value so we’re assigning the value of cell g2 to the dealer cost variable and then we’re going to call on the next line down we’re gonna call the get msrp function and put its result in cell h2 so that line is going to be active cell dot offset in parentheses comma 7 which takes us to h2 and we’re going to do dot value so the value of cell h2 is going to equal and this is how we call the function procedure by its name and its parameters get msrp and then in parentheses dealer cost comma then number let’s go ahead and compile in our get new inventory and save and we’re going to switch over to excel so now we’re going to test this get msrp function by initiating our calling procedure so we’re going to go to the new vehicle sheet and we’re going to say yes that we want to run the procedure we’re going to use the default file name and you’ll notice that the msrp column is not wide enough now right and that is an easy fix so let’s select everything on this sheet and delete it and switch back over to the visual basic editor if you look at our get new inventory sub procedure the ad formatting procedure is being called before we do the get msrp section of this so we just need to move add formatting to right above the end sub statement so i’m going to just select it and cut it and then i’m going to click at the end of the active cell offset line press enter and then i’m going to ctrl v to paste it and get rid of the extra space by doing shift tab in front of it we had add formatting in the wrong position so now to add the formatting at the end after the msrp is already calculated and so now i’m going to compile and save again and switch back over to excel go back to the inventory sheet tab back to new vehicles yes run the procedure keep the default and now you’ll see that the msrp column is populated and formatted accordingly so the column width has been adjusted and everything and again it’s either 10 or 15 percent depending on whether the 11th character is a b or an a in the venn now we can clear the sheet again the new vehicle sheet and we’re going to create another function procedure that will get the year in the appropriate column on the sheet we can just go back to the inventory sheet after you clear it and then switch back over to the visual basic editor window i’m still in my new vehicles module i’m going to click at the end of the end function statement at the bottom for our get msrp function i’m going to press enter twice and we’re going to type function and this one we’re going to name get year and we’re going to give it one parameter and that’s going to be then num press enter a couple of times in this one we want to declare a local variable it’s going to be named year marker with a string data type so i’m going to just do dem year marker as string we’re going to set the value of the year marker variable to the 11th character of the then remember that’s the a or b either indicates the current year or previous year type in year marker equals and then we’re going to use the mid function mid open paren then num comma 11 1 the 11th character the vin number enter and now we’re going to use an if then else end if construct here as well so i’m going to tab over mid and then then num and you can copy and paste this if you want 11 1 equals and then in double quotes a then enter tab get year equals 2018 and then i’m gonna do a shift tab so i can get my else statement at the same margin as the if statement so else enter and then tab get year equals 2019 enter shift tab and end if and i’m going to press enter again so i get that blank line between end if and end function now we have to tell the get new inventory procedure where to place the result of the get year function so in your get new inventory procedure i’m clicking at the end of the line that starts with dealer cost press enter and you’re going to type active cell dot offset and then in parentheses comma 1 dot value equals get year and you have to put in the argument so it’s going to be uh get year we just use vin number and then you can go ahead and compile your get new inventory compile get year if you haven’t it compiles everything in the module actually so you don’t have to compile one and then save and then go ahead and switch over to excel let’s switch back to excel and test our work so at this point we should be getting the msrp and the year extracted from the then let’s go ahead and test this so i’m going to just go back to the new vehicles tab i’m going to run the procedure accept the defaults let it click and were and we have our year in column b and our msrp in column h again we’re going to select everything and delete it go back to your inventory sheet and switch back over to the visual basic editor now we’re going to create another function procedure to extract the classification from the then the classification is the 17th character of the then the last character of the then and depending on what its numeric value is it would either be a classification of a car a truck a van minivan or an suv so we’re going to put that function at the bottom of our new vehicles module and we’re going to just type function get classification is what we’re naming it and we’re going to give it then num as a parameter press enter we’re going to do our function level or procedure level variable declaration so we’re going to do dim class marker is what we’ll name this variable as string enter twice now we have to tell it which character of the then is the classification code we’re going to do that by saying class marker equals we’re going to use the right intrinsic function and then in parentheses then num comma 1. just extract the last character on the right of the vin number which is the 17th character representing the classification now we’re ready to do an if then else if end if construct because we’re going to actually be testing four different things so we’re going to have our test that we do on the if line and then we’re going to have three else if lines so it tests three other things we’ll start that i’m gonna press enter twice and then i’m gonna tab i’m gonna type if class marker equals one then enter and tab get classification equals and then double quotes car enter shift tab now we’re ready for our first of the three else if statements we’re going to do else if is one word initial capital letters on each one in visual basic so else if class marker equals two then enter tab get classification equals and then double quotes truck enter shift tab your next else if else if class marker equals three then enter tab get classification equals and then quotes van slash minivan and do your last else if so if the class marker is four then the classification is suv and you can see my elsa statement for the suv i’m going to press enter and shift tab and then i have to type my end if and you want to make sure you have press enter so you get the blank line between end if and end function now we’re going to navigate and again i’m using the procedure list i want to go back to get new inventory procedure and so we’ve been adding these active cell offset lines to put the year and the msrp in their correct cells right we have one there for dealer cost as well and we want to make this code more concise so we’re going to create a with end with block because we have other things that we’re going to be extracting as well so it’ll make this code more concise i’m going to click at the end of the dealer costs equals line and press enter and i’m going to type with active cell and then on the next line down i’m going to double click active cell before the dot offset and delete it just leaving the dot offset do the same thing on the next line go to the end of the last.offset line press enter and type end with so now you’re gonna go back and click after the dot offset comma one line press enter and we can add the offset here for the classification so we’re going to do dot offset and this one’s going to be comma 4 dot value equals get classification the name of our function and then we’re using then number as the argument here so this way we have the offsets in order so far one four and seven and that makes it easier to troubleshoot now i’m going to press enter at the end of that line just to get the spacing and then i have to delete and shift tab again so now we have our width block set up i’m going to select from with down to end with and press my tab key so that that width end width structure is indented now we can compile and save and switch over to excel and we’re going to test this so at this point we should have the year the classification and the msrp populate when we test this so go ahead and switch over start your procedure except the default and now we have the year the classification and the msrp extracted from the then and we can switch back over to visual basic editor we’ve just used the if then else if end if construct and there is a variation on that a different construct that mimics its use and it’s called the select case in select statement so it also tests for multiple conditions a lot of people think that select case is easier to read than the if then else if end if construct and also easier to troubleshoot so the if then else if end if construct has limitations it can only test like seven conditions but with select case you’re unlimited in the number of conditions that it can test so i have a slide in here giving you the syntax but we’re gonna just go ahead and use it before we set up our first select case construct to extract the color from the vin number i’m going to have you switch back over to excel and select everything on the new vehicle sheet delete it and then go back to the inventory sheet and then come back into visual basic editor i’m at the bottom of the new vehicles module underneath the get classification function and i am going to type function and we’re going to call it get color and we’re going to use then num as a parameter press enter twice we’re going to do a variable declaration here so dim we’re going to name it color marker as string and enter twice we need to tell it which character of the then number represents the color and it’s the 12th character of the vin it’s only one character so we’re going to use the mid function here color marker equals mid and then in parentheses then num comma 12 comma 1. so extract the 12th character of the then number that represents the color gonna press enter twice and then tab now we’re ready for our select case construct so we’re going to type select case and then color marker press enter and tab case 0 enter tab get color equals and then double quotes black so if the 12th number of the then is the 12th character of the then is a 0 that represents the color black press enter and we’re going to shift tab just till we get to the case margin and we’re going to type case 1 enter tab get color equals white and double quotes and press enter shift tab now i’m going to fill out the rest of the cases and the rest of this select case statement and then you’ll be able to just copy it from my screen now you can pause the video and complete your select case statement don’t forget the in select at the bottom if you need to make sure that that is there as well so you have your other cases there go ahead and get those populated and once you have that function get color completed we need to go back to the get new inventory procedure and we need to add the appropriate offset in our width and width block for the color and so it’s an offset of five columns so i’m going to click at the end of the get classification offset line and type another offset with a comma 5 dot value and that one’s going to equal get color and it’s using then number as an argument so we have that all set up now we’ll test the color in just a moment but first we’re going to create another function procedure and we’re not going to have to type this one from scratch because i have a text file that you’re going to access that’s in the video description that we’ll use for this one so in the meantime just go ahead and compile and save i’m going to do control and the end key to get to the very bottom of the new vehicles module and after that and make sure you’re after the end function statement that’s down there and you’re going to go to the insert menu and choose file in your files for video description or whatever your working directory is where you pulled in these text files you’re going to open the text files folder and we’re going to double click the get model text file so now if you look at the bottom of your screen it brings in this whole function and so saving you some typing here it’s using a select case statement here i’m going to just format it a little bit so i want a blank line after function another blank line after the variable declaration and then i want to have my yeah we’re assigning it we’re telling it what numbers from the vin number represent the model by using the mid function so it’s actually two characters the third and fourth characters of the then number represent the model so i’m going to put an enter after the model marker equals midline then i’m going to select everything from select case to end select and i’m going to tab to indent it now my ocd gets the better of me here i’m also going to tab in my cases and i can select multiple cases so we don’t have to spend time getting them indented properly and everything but my ocd is just going crazy right now because i’m not doing that but this is what happens when you bring it in from a text file i’m just going to go to the bottom and put an enter in front of in function so we have that space there and so you could see it’s two numbers starting with the third character of the then if it’s 16 it gives you the model as katera if it’s 17 it’s seville so on and so forth and now what we have to do is we have to make reference to this in the get new inventory procedure so that the result is in the right cell so i’m going to go back to get new inventory procedure using my procedure drop down and we’re going to add an offset here the offset for the model is three columns from the active cell so i’m going to click at the end of my offset comma 1 line and do dot offset it’s going to be comma 3 dot value equals get model with an argument of then number and we’re going to compile and save now we have one more that we’re going to do by typing it ourselves and then we’ll test these three so the last one we’re doing here if you look at the very bottom of my new vehicles module i have the framework of the function get make already set up and you need to copy that onto your screen recreate that onto your screen and then for the select case and select statement i’m going to put up a powerpoint slide and have you kind of work through it on your own get your function your variable declaration and the fact that the make marker represents the second character of the then in and once you get that in you’ll use the following powerpoint as your guide to build your select case statement and when you’re done building it you can go ahead and and pause this video while you build your select case statement you’ll be able to see my completed block of code and so you can see my completed get make function and now the only thing we have to do is get its offset reference and by the way the make is offset by two columns and we need to put that in our get new inventory procedure so i’m gonna switch to that procedure and put them in numerical order so i’m clicking at the end of the offset comma 1 pressing enter and i’m going to do offset comma 2 dot value equals get make and with an argument of then and now we can compile and save and we can switch over to excel so we’re just gonna get our procedure our calling procedure running by clicking on the tab you know how to do this go ahead and yes select the default of received vehicles and now we should have everything extracted in row 2 the year the make the model the classification the color dealer cost was already there and we have our msrp which is a calculation either 10 or 15 percent markup depending on the year well done everybody you can clear that sheet and return to the inventory sheet tab so we just used our conditional branching constructs all variations of the if then construct and the select case construct now we’re going to get into our looping constructs we have the 4-2 next loop which executes a series of statements a specified number of times we have a for each next loop which is used on collections and it loops through each object in the collection and then you have your do while and do until loops the do while loop statement does something if something else is true and the do until loop will do something until something becomes true we’re going to get started with our do loops so they’re used to execute a block of code repeatedly as we’ve been setting up our function procedures we’ve been seeing that it’s extracting the pertinent information from the vin number but it’s only populating the second row whereas we have other venlum numbers on the sheet and so we’re going to use these looping constructs to populate the rest of the sheet now there are two variations of the do loop do while and do until so the do while loop runs until as long as the condition is true and do until will run when a condition becomes true each of your do loops have two different syntaxes both of the constructs test a conditional value but the differences between the two control how they handle the tested condition here’s the two different syntaxes for do while you can start with do while and give it the condition and if that condition is true it will run the statement block or you can have it run the statement block before testing the condition which is the second syntax there so the first syntax will execute the statement block zero or more times depending on whether the condition is true the second will execute the statement block at least once because it’s not going to test the condition until it has executed the statement block and the same holds true for do until you can have it execute zero or more times by testing for the condition up front or you can have it execute the statement block at least once because it tests the condition at the end and then we have our four loops so four two next and four each next four two next executes a series of statements a specified number of times before each next loop is used on collections and it will loop through each object in the collection until there are no more objects so they do the same thing just in a different way so we’re going to switch over to the visual basic editor and what we’re going to do is we’re going to modify our get new inventory sub procedure by adding a do while loop to it the end result of this is that when we run the procedure in excel it is going to populate for all of the vin numbers on the sheet so all of the years makes models color classification all of that will be populated for all of the then numbers we’re going to start the modification look for the line in your get new inventory sub procedure that says then number equals active cell value click at the end of that line and press enter and we’re going to indent so i’m going to press my tab key and we’re gonna do do while two separate words then number and we’re gonna say not equal to so that’s the less than or great and greater than signs together do while then number is not equal to and we’re gonna put two double quotes to represent a blank so it’s gonna run this loop as long as the then number is not empty that’s what we’re saying to do there it will stop running this loop when it finds an empty vin number and now what we’re going to do we’re going to go down to add formatting line click in front of it press enter and up arrow and you have to give the loop keyword here so we’re going to just type loop and actually indent the word loop so it’s at the same margin as do while so it’s going to run this loop as long as the then number not equal to empty so not empty and then we need to add a couple of other things here under our offset comma 7 line click at the end of that line and press enter and we’re going to do an offset of one row so we’re going to do dot offset and then in parentheses one dot select and then underneath that after your offset one line press enter do shift tab and you’re gonna type then number equals active cell dot value so what does that do so we have our offset so as it’s extracting things from our function procedures it’s putting them in the right cells so after it does that we’re saying go down one row so right now the active cell right is range a2 which we assign to the then number variable so the first then number is in cell a2 and that’s what we’re assigning to the then number variable and now we’re saying go down one row so it’ll be on a3 the next vin number and it’s assigning that cell’s value to the then number variable and then it will keep looping until it doesn’t find any more than numbers we’re going to go ahead and compile and save and we’re ready to switch to excel to test it so start your procedure and of course select the default file name and now that you you can see that it populated for every vin number on the sheet we did that do while loop which says do continue doing this stuff right by extracting and putting it in the right offset columns continue doing this stuff until you have no more than numbers and it did just that so now the sheet is populated we’re going to perform a few more tasks in this file and one of the things that we want to do is i have another text file with and procedure in it called inventory append and what it will do is once you run the procedure in here and you get the sheet populated your new vehicle sheet populated it’s going to select everything from cell a2 through h11 so it’s purposely going to ignore the headings it’s going to select from a2 to h11 and it is going to cut that selection and then it’s going to paste it on the bottom of the inventory sheet so right now our inventory sheet goes through row 105 and anytime we bring in new vehicles we want them appended at the bottom of the inventory sheet so that’s one thing that we’re going to set up and then the second thing that we’re going to set up is we’re going to write a sub procedure that will then delete the data on new vehicles we’ve been deleting it manually this whole time and then we’ll add a line of code to call the procedure that deletes the data let’s first start by deleting the data off of new vehicles as we’ve been doing typically go back to your inventory sheet and then switch back over to the visual basic editor now we’re still working in the new vehicles module i want to get to the very bottom of that module and this is where we’re going to use a text file to get the inventory append code so we’re gonna go to the insert menu file and in your text files from the video description you’re gonna double click inventory append so when we look at that sub procedure right it’s using a an object variable dim last cell as range and then we have dem response as integer and we’re assigning the response to the outcome of a message box that says append the new inventory now it will have a yes no button and its title bar says append inventory if the user selects the yes button then it’s going to set the last cell to equal starting with h2 all the way down to the last populated cell in column h and then starting with a2 so basically it’s going to select the range a2 through h whatever the last row in column h that’s populated in and then it’s going to cut that selection switch to the inventory worksheet and it’s going to go to the bottom it’s going to find the last populated cell in column a and then it’s going to offset by one row so it’s going to go to the first blank cell in column a and start pasting the data from the new vehicles sheet tab and then it’s just going to select cell a1 and save the workbook that’s what that is going to do now we’re not going to test it right now we’re gonna test it in a moment we’re gonna create another sub procedure this one is short and quick so i didn’t have a text file for it click at the end of that in sub statement for your inventory append procedure press enter and you’re going to type sub clear sheet and press enter twice so we’re creating the sub procedure that’s going to tell it to clear the new vehicles sheet anything that’s on it so we’re going to just do an indent here and we’re going to type worksheets remember how to reference from a collection and then in quotes new vehicles close your quote close your paren dot select so go and select that worksheet and then we’re going to do cells dot select which will select all of the cells on the sheet kind of like us doing control a and then we’re going to do selection dot clear so clear everything in those cells and then we’re going to end with range and then parentheses and double quotes a1 dot select we want it to end up on cell a1 so that’s our clear sheet sub procedure so we’re gonna call clearsheet from within inventory append in inventory append we’re gonna click in front of activeworkbook.save and press enter and up arrow and we’re going to just type clear sheet to call that procedure so we want it to clear the new in the new vehicle sheet before the workbook is saved and last but not least we’re going to call the inventory append sub procedure from our get new inventory procedure so i’m going to go to my procedure drop down make my way back to get new inventory and we’re just going to add the call line here click at the end of the ad formatting line which is right above in sub press enter and we’re going to type inventory append to call that procedure and that procedure is going to call the clear sheet procedure now we’re ready to compile and save and switch over to excel so now we’re going to test to see if our append functionality works well by activating our new vehicle sheet go ahead and start your procedure use the default it will pop up and ask you if you want to append the new inventory now you’re going to select yes it clears the new vehicle sheet and when you switch back over to the inventory sheet remember we were at row 105 before and now we’re at row 115 because it appended the information from new vehicles onto the sheet you can go ahead and save your file we’re going to be using the sales fiscal year macro enabled file that we used earlier and in that file we’re going to use both of the four loops i’m gonna go ahead and close this vehicles file and i already had sales fiscal year file open i’m gonna just bring it back up and maximize it and i’m gonna actually switch over to visual basic editor here and make sure that i’m seeing this project because again sometimes if you have multiple files open you switch over it doesn’t update i want to make sure that i have the sales fiscal year project in project explorer then i go back to excel so this is the file earlier we had it do a sum function and place its result two rows down from the last populated cell in column i we did that earlier now we’re going to use our for loops because we have several sheet tabs of sales data on it and you’ll see how the for each next loop and the four two next loop are similar to each other we’re going to get the same result we’re just using two different loops so what we’re gonna do now is we’re gonna start with the four two next construct to repeatedly call that add totals procedures so all the worksheets have the selling price column totaled and i’m going to just switch over to the visual basic editor for that the project explorer window i’m going to collapse microsoft excel objects so that i don’t have all of those sheet instances showing up so we see or i’m looking at the module 1 code window and we see our add total sub procedure i’m going to click at the end of the end sub statement and we’re going to create another sub procedure and the first time we do it we’re going to use the 4 2 next construct so that’s when you have it run the loop a specific number of times and we’re going to create a sub procedure and we’re going to call it all totals and press enter twice and then we’re going to tab and we’re going to declare by using dim just a small letter i as an integer and press enter twice and then i’m going to tab again so my for loop is indented and for this one we’re going to tell it what i equals so we’re going to say 4 i equals one two worksheets dot count i equals one to however many worksheets are in the file and we’re gonna press enter after that line and tab we’re going to type worksheets and then in parentheses i dot select enter add totals enter shift tab so you’re at the same margin as your for statement and you’re going to type next i and then enter so you have a space between it and your n sub statement so we declared i as an integer and i represents worksheets one two three four five so starting with one i equals one to the total count of worksheets in the file we’re gonna select the first sheet and once the first worksheet is selected we’re calling our add total procedure it’s going to run on that first sheet then it’s going to go to the next i the next sheet run that procedure and it’s going to keep doing that until there are no more sheets to go to go ahead and compile and save and we’ll switch over to excel and test this out so we already have this sum configured on the 26th of august sheet and that’s fine we’re going to do alt f8 since we don’t have this attached to an event procedure and we are going to select all totals not add totals but all totals that’s where we put our four to next loop so i’m gonna just double click it so at some point during the execution of the program you will get this runtime error 1004 it says application defined or object defined error i will explain why this happened in just a moment but what we want to do is we want to click the end button in that error message and it takes us to the last cell well it takes us to a cell on the july 4th sheet tab if we do control home you can see that july 4th well it’s a holiday no sales happened on that day and that’s why we got that run time era so we’re going to fix that by adding some code so let’s go back over to visual basic editor the issue that caused the error is in the add totals procedure not the all totals one that’s calling ad totals in the add totals procedure we have to tell it that if cell i2 right is blank or if cell i2 is not equal to zero so if it’s if it’s unpopulated if it’s populated with anything other than a zero then run the procedure if it’s not populated with anything any number right then we want it to print the text no sales in cell a3 so we’re going to set that up you’re going to click after your dim total formula as string line and press enter twice and then tab and we’re going to use an if statement for this so if range and then in parentheses and double quotes i2 and we’re going to use our not equal less than greater than symbol 0 then if cell i2 is not equal to 0 then go ahead and run this code select everything from set down to active formula and tab it over click at the end of the activecell.formula equal total formula line press enter and shift tab and we’re going to type our else statement to go with if enter and we’re going to tab and we’re going to type range and then parentheses and double quotes a3 dot value equals and then double quotes no sales then we’re going to type enter shift tab and end if so your completed sub procedure add totals should look like my screen if the sheet is blank essentially right it’s going to put no sales in cell a3 if the sheet is not blank if there are values in column i then it’s going to calculate the sum and put it two rows below the last populated cell in that column that’s what we just set up there and we’ll test this soon go ahead and compile and save so in our all totals sub procedure we use the for to next loop now i’m going to show you the difference and it’s going to end up being the same end result between 4 2 next and 4 each next so 4 2 next repeats specific number of times in our example it repeats on every worksheet in the workbook for each next is used on collections so the easiest way to show you this is we’re going to use a for each next construct to duplicate the work that we have in the all totals procedure that we created with a 4 2 next construct so the first thing we’re going to do is select your entire all totals sub procedure and one of the buttons we added to the toolbar was comment block click on that comment block button and it basically puts the apostrophe before each line thereby commenting out that entire sub procedure at the end of its end sub statement press enter twice and we’re going to create another sub procedure named all totals you can’t have two with the same name so that’s one reason why we commented out our original one and for this one we’re going to use the for each next loop so we’re gonna just type sub all totals enter twice we’re gonna tab in and we’re gonna dim sheet as worksheet where creating like an object variable right every sheet is going to be declared as a worksheet here and now we’re going to press enter twice and tab and we’re going to type for each sheet in worksheets and that’s the worksheets collection right so all of the worksheets in the workbook for each sheet in the worksheets and we’re going to press enter and we’re going to tab again and we’re going to type sheet dot select enter add totals enter and then we’re going to shift tab and type next sheet the difference between this one and this one first one we did that we commented out the first one runs a definite number of times it runs from the first sheet until it runs out of worksheets this one we’re using the sheets as a collection object so for each sheet in the worksheets collection it’s going to select the sheet and then it’s going to call the add totals procedure and then it’s going to go to the next sheet in the collection and so on and so forth until it runs out of sheets so after your next sheet you should have the blank line and then you’re in sub statement so since we’re calling the add totals procedure which we modified so we wouldn’t get that runtime error we’ll see the results of our modification as well when we run this new all totals procedure go ahead and compile and save and we’re ready to switch to excel and test this out so i’m gonna just go back i’m gonna right click on my tab scrolling arrows in the lower left corner and i’m gonna go back to the first sheet which is 26th of august and that’s the one that we calculated the sum of the selling price before and now i’m going to do alt f8 to bring up the macros box and we’re going to double click all totals and so you saw your machine kind of click and were right it left me on june 1st and we see that we have the total of the selling price and it’s two rows beneath the last populated cell in column i i’m going to right click on my tab scrolling arrows and navigate to the 4th of july and that was one sheet that caused an error before because there were no sales on that sheet and so now you can see in cell a3 on the 4th of july sheet that it actually has no sales so we diverted it from having that runtime error go ahead and save your file in this lesson we went over control of flow structures and we utilized pretty much all of them so we worked with our looping structures we worked with our decision structures and so we started with our um just a general understanding of the structures of our controller flow structures and their variations you learned about boolean expressions and how to combine them with comparison and logical operators we went into conditional branching and that’s when we used our if constructs and our select case constructs and then we finished by using our looping constructs we used our do loops and then we did both variations of the four loops the four two next structure and the four each next structure thank you for attending excel 2019 visual basic for applications video course hi everyone i’m trish connor cato welcome to the excel 2019 visual basic for applications video course this course is for beginning users looking to automate repetitive and recurring tasks in microsoft excel vba is microsoft’s programming language and it’s built into the office applications our focus during this course is on excel specifically you’ll be equipped with the basics to start writing your own vba code modify the code behind macros you’ve already recorded and have an understanding of how vba lends itself to creating efficiency in your daily tasks we move into creating a form and programming its controls during this lesson you will learn about form properties events and methods and learn how to add controls to the forum and modify their properties you’ll ultimately launch a form with code the next lesson will take you through the steps necessary to create pivot tables programmatically and visual basic for applications if you’re enjoying these videos please like and subscribe if you want to earn certificates and digital badges please become a member of our patreon the link is in our video description if you have any questions you want answered by one of our instructors please join our off-site community the link is in the description as well as always if this course has exercise files you’ll find them in the video description below now we’re going to get started with lesson six working with forms and controls we have several topics to cover in this lesson you’re going to start learning about the userform object and then its properties events and methods there’s a toolbox we’ll be using to add controls to the user form we’ll go over what kind of controls will be able to access from the toolbox we’ll be adding controls to the form and modifying the control properties formatting the controls and then we’re going to apply code to the controls to determine what their use is going to be finally you’ll learn how to launch the form via code we’re going to be using our sales fiscal year file as well as accessing another text file named coding controls during this lesson so far in this course you’ve created message boxes and input boxes you’ve learned that message boxes display messages and accepts input from the user via buttons in our case it was ok and cancel buttons an action is then taken on that input via coding input boxes display messages to the user but also allow the user to type in one input or have it default just like a message box input action is taken on the input box via coding the userform objects allow for multiple inputs which can then be coded to perform specific actions these inputs can be text check boxes or drop down lists for example and they’re known as controls user forms have properties events and methods that can be accessed these next few slides are for your reference after you’ve completed the course i will be guiding you through this as we do exercise so i have a slide with a description of form properties that can be accessed the next one are form events so for example the click event and whatever action is attached to it will occur when the left mouse button is clicked went over the form and the next slide is about form methods you have cut copy paste hide move so on and so forth and again i will be walking you through these during the exercises in this lesson the one that i do want to cover with you now are form control prefixes we’ve used lowercase mod as a prefix for a module and so if you’re looking at them in a list you’ll see them all begin with mod we have prefixes for form controls and i’ll guide you through these as we use them but for example chk would be a check box cbo is a combo box and we’ll be utilizing these throughout the lesson each form control has its own set of properties and they differ depending on the type of control but this slide has a list of common control properties that most controls have so you have like a height property a width property that type of thing and again the slide deck is in the video description so you’ll have access to these reference slides we’re ready to get hands-on now with the userform object before we insert a userform object into our sales fiscal year excel file let’s talk about the different types of modules again we did a brief review early in the course your standard code is stored in modules like in this project we have module one we could have renamed it we didn’t we’ve also in a different file created event procedures and if you expand your microsoft excel objects folder in the project explorer window you’ll see one for each sheet and all the way at the bottom of all of the sheets you have one called this workbook and in our vehicles macro enabled file we did an event procedure based off of the new vehicles sheet tab which was known as sheet 3 in the system your sheet modules and this workbook module are where you store event procedure codes and i’m going to just go back up and collapse the excel objects folder so i don’t have to look at all of those sheets so we have our regular module where you store your function procedures your sub procedures and then you have your event procedure modules your worksheets and this workbook now we also talked about early in the course a class module the modules we’ve been using like module one that’s a standard module class modules we’re not going to use in this course however those are used to create your own objects and so now we’re going to create a user form and that actually sets up a forms folder and no matter how many forms you create in this particular file they will all go into that forms folder so it’s almost like another module just for form user form objects and you’ll see that now as we go to insert our user form so we’re going to just go up to the insert menu and choose user form and now a couple of things happened you have the blank grid a framework for your user form object on your screen and attached to it is a tool box which you’ll use to access the controls that you’re going to put on the form now i’ll give you a heads up here sometimes if you have double monitors your toolbox may show up on another monitor and it could be behind some other open windows so if you need it you may have to search it out if i click on a blank area here try to deselect this user form it’ll disappear but then it’ll reappear when i click back on the user form typically and we can always get it back by using the view menu now i’m going to close my toolbox for a minute it has an x in its upper right hand corner so that i can see in the project explorer window that i now have a forms folder with one form in it which it names by default userform1 now we’re going to use the properties window to change some of the properties for our user form object and again if your properties window is not showing on your left hand pane you can go to your view menu and select it or you can press f4 to bring it up we are gonna give the form a name using the appropriate prefix we’re gonna give it a caption which will show in the title bar of the form and we’re going to give it a height and width measurement so in the properties window we’re going to start with the name property we’re going to double click name in parentheses and we’re going to type lowercase frm capital g generate capital r reports so that’s the system name of the form frm generate reports the next property we’re going to do is the caption property and again that shows in the title bar and we’re going to type just in plain english and as you’re typing it you can look at the title bar and see it populating generate sales reports and i’m pressing enter after i change a property we’re going to double click height and we’re going to make it 300 and we’re going to scroll down if necessary double click with and we’re going to change that value to 400 and by the way the height and width values would change if we manually resize the form by dragging its sizing handles in the next exercises we’re going to add controls to the form and set properties for those controls so the first thing we need to do is display our toolbox again and we can get that from the view menu because we closed it by using its x so we’re going to just go to view toolbox and the tool box shows up again and we can move it so you can see it clearly and if you look at the controls in the box as you hover over them so the first one is your mouse pointer it’s the select objects control the next one is a label third one is a text box you have a combo box list box so on and so forth so we’ll be using several of those controls placing them on our form and you’ll learn also how to size and align your controls a little bit later in these exercises so let’s get started we’re going to add start date and end date label controls to the form so in my tool box i’m going to look for the label control it’s the capital letter a and i’m gonna click on it on the toolbox and now if i move my mouse over the form grid it looks like a crosshair i can click and hold and draw the label control or i’m going to just click in the lower left corner of the form and it places the label control there for me and so now with that label control selected we’re going to change some of its properties so typically you don’t name labels unless they’re going to be some kind of code attached to them so we’re not going to use the name property we want to look at the auto size property so the auto size property is set to false if we double click auto size it will change it to true and we want it to be true and then the caption property is the text that shows on the label so i’m going to double click caption and i’m going to type end date in plain english followed by a colon and press enter and now you see the end date text populating the label and then you notice how it wrapped end date within that label control we don’t want it to do word wrap so the last property is word wrap and it’s set to true we’re going to double click it to set it to false so it doesn’t wrap the words in the label and i’m going to just manually move so i want my mouse pointer to look like a four-headed arrow on that end date label and i’m going to just drag it down just a little bit we also want a start date label so instead of starting from scratch i’m going to just right click on the end date label and i’m going to choose copy and then i’m going to right click in a blank area of my form grid and choose paste so now i’m going to move the copy of the end date label above the existing end date label and now it’s just a matter of changing some of its properties a couple of things we didn’t give the label a name so we don’t have a label name here our other property auto size is set to true already because we copied it and word wrap is set to false and it’s the caption property we’re gonna change so i’m gonna double click caption and i want it to say start date in plain english with the colon and press enter so copying it actually saves you time because it copies some of the pertinent property information as well now we’re going to add two text box controls we’ll do the first one and then copy it and modify the properties for the second one we’re going to find in the tool box our text box control and it’s the one that has the lowercase a b to the right of your label going to select it and again when my mouse is on top of the form grid it looks like a crosshair and i’m going to click to the right of the end date label and let it place the text box there i’m going to move mine up just a little bit so it’s more in line like that and with that text box control selected we are going to give it a name so in the properties window we’re going to double click name we’re going to use lowercase t x t as the prefix for a text box and we’re going to type capital e and capital d date so txt end date and the other property that we’re going to change for the text box is its width property and we’re going to make the width 50. and then we’re going to copy that text box paste it on the grid and move it down so it’s to the right of the start date label and on the copy we’re going to just change the name of it to txt start date and notice the name property didn’t come over with the copy because you can’t have the same name for controls on a form object so txt capital t capital s start capital d date is what we’re naming that text box when this form is completed and totally coded it will generate sales reports based on user choices in the form and as such we want to add two buttons to the form we want to add a display button and a cancel button so we’re going to use the command button control in your tool box the command button control is in the second row it’s the second one on my screen in the second row and it looks like a lowercase a b as well when you hover over it of course the screen tip will let you know it is command button so we’re going to go ahead and select it in the toolbox and we’re going to place a command button like in the upper right hand corner of the form in the properties pane we’re going to name it using cmd as the prefix for a command button capital d display so cmd display is the name and the caption we’re going to go down to the caption property and that’s the text that shows on the button and it’s just going to be display in plain english and the last property we’re going to change is the default property default property is currently set to false we’re going to double click it to make it true so the default property when it comes to a command button is you can press enter to make that button happen instead of having to click on it that’s what the default property does and you can only have one default property on a button on your object your userforum object so we have cmd display and we gave it a caption of display and we changed the default property to true now we’re going to copy that display button paste it on the grid and drag the paste it version underneath your original display button and again don’t worry about alignment we’ll fix that later so on the copy notice the name didn’t carry over right we’re going to name this one c md capital c cancel we’re going to give we’re going to change the cancel property here from false to true and that means you can use the escape key on your keyboard to make that button happen and so we set cancel to true the caption property we’re going to change it to cancel and the default property we need to change to false because you can only have one default command button and that is the display button if you click on a blank area of your grid you’ll see the display button has like that dark border around it whenever you see a button like that in a dialog box it means you can press your enter key to make that button happen this would be a good time for us to go ahead and save right from the toolbar before we continue adding controls to this form now we’re going to add a combo box control to our form so the combo find the combo box control in your tool box and select it and we’re going to put it in the like the lower right hand corner of the form in the properties pane we’re going to change its name to prefix of cbo and then capital m month we’re going to use its list rows property and that just says how many rows will be in the drop down list so we’re going to change list rows to 12 and then the match required property we’re going to double click that to change it from false to true in visual basic controls a combo box by default says no match is required which means that the end user can type in their own entries and use them from the list we don’t want that to happen we want them to pull just from the list that we’re going to populate later so we have our combo box in the lower right hand corner and now we’re going to click in a blank area of the grid and you can copy your start date or end date label because we’re going to want another label and we’re going to paste it onto the grid and then we’re going to move that label to the left of the combo box i’m going to just move mine down a little bit and again we’ll do some alignment stuff in a little while so now we just have to change the label properties now we’re going to use this label later and code some stuff for it so we want to give it a name so we’re going to name this lbl prefix for a label month capital m month and we’re going to give it a caption of 4 which month question mark and then i need to move my label over because it auto expand it so it’s not overhanging my combo box so your form should look similar to mine at this point now we’re gonna add two frame controls to the form and we’ll add the first one of course copy it to create the second one but the frame control is utilized to group related other controls together so we’re going to start by adding our first frame control on my toolbox the frame control is the first one in the second row it has an x y at the top of it we’re gonna click that and i’m gonna click like in the upper left corner of the form grid and now in order to make space for the other frame i’m going to move this frame over as far left as i can where i can actually see the borders of it and then i’m going to decrease its width manually by just clicking on the right center sizing handle so my mouse looks like a double-headed arrow and dragging it backwards about that much and so we’re going to give the frame a name and it’s going to be fra is the prefix for frame control capital p period and we’re also going to give it a caption of period and the caption is what shows up the upper left hand corner of the frame now we’re going to copy that frame paste it onto your grid and drag the pasted frame to the right of your period frame and for this one we’re going to change the name property to fra sales and we’re going to give it a caption of sales so the next thing we’re going to do is we’re gonna add three option button controls into each frame we’re gonna find the option button in the tool box and it looks like the little circle with a dot in the middle of it the next to the last one in my first row and i’m gonna select the option button and now i’m gonna click inside the period frame and then i’m gonna copy that option button and i’m going to paste it twice inside the period frame so you’ll have three option buttons inside your period frame and if you click on the top one you’ll see in the name property it’s option button one second one is two second one is three you kind of want to have them in the right order for tab order purposes a little bit later and again we’ll deal with the alignment a little bit later and i’m going to show you how to get three option buttons in the sales frame now too another efficiency tip here what we can do inside the period frame just click in a blank area inside the period frame and do control a and it selects all three option buttons right and then you can just do control c to copy them and then right click inside your sales frame and paste let’s do the properties for these option buttons so the first one inside the period frame should say option button one as its name property its name property is going to be opt as the prefix capital m month and we’re going to give it a caption of month and you can see the caption shows instead of option button one the second option button in the period frame which name is currently option button 2 we’re going to change it to opt all with a caption of all the last option button option button three in the period frame its name is going to be opt other with a caption of other so we have month all and other option buttons in the period frame let’s go to the sales frame so the first one in the sales frame since we copied it it’s now option button four and we’re going to give that a name of opt sales person with a caption of salesperson and i’m making that caption plain english two words and then the next one in the sales frame option button five that one is going to be opt model with a caption of model and last but not least option button six its name is going to be opt classification with a caption of classification so now we’re ready to do some formatting of our form controls and we’ll start with alignment and grouping we’re going to start by aligning the option buttons in the period frame so just click in the period frame and do ctrl a like we did before to select the option buttons and we can go up to the format tab the format menu hover over a line and we’re going to click on lefts so those three option buttons are aligned by their left edge let’s do the same thing in the sales frame also align those three option buttons by their lefts now we want to align our two frames by their tops so i’m going to select the period frame hold down my control key and select the sales frame that’s one way of getting them both selected i’m going to go back to format menu align and this time we’re going to choose tops and we can click away and see they’re perfectly aligned by their top edges now now we want to group the options buttons in each frame so that if we move any one of them all of them will move they’ll retain their alignment and everything so i’m going to just click in the period frame and do control a to select all three option buttons i’m gonna go to the format menu and i’m gonna click on group and now you’ll see there’s one border around all three option buttons instead of three separate borders they’re grouped together now do the same in your sales frame now i’m going to show you how to use a selection net also known as a selection marquee has a lot of different names to select different objects so we want to align the period frame and the start date and end date labels by the left edges so i’m going to click slightly above and to the left of the period frame click and hold and drag down until your start and end date labels are within that little guideline so now when you let go it selected the period frame and the start and end date labels that’s called a selection net and we’re going to go to format align lefts let’s use a selection net to select our display and cancel buttons as well as our combo box and let’s align those by their left edges as well at this point we haven’t coded any of our form controls yet but we want to test our form make sure it displays properly and specifically we want to test the tab order on the form just make sure your form is selected and you can use the run button on the toolbar run sub user form button or you can just press f5 to run the form and the form should pop up on your screen it’s on top of some other module so we want to test the tab order on the form now when i bring up the form notice that it’s flashing in the end date field that’s where it’s starting if i press the tab key on my keyboard it then goes to start date if i press tab again it looks like it has the display button and then the cancel button and then the combo box then it goes into the period frame and it’s on month then all then other then it goes to the sales frame and it’s on salesperson then model then classification the frames the tab order is perfect because we made sure that the option button copies were in the right order so option button one two three four 5 6. but we can see that the rest of the tab order on this form is not the way it should be so we’re going to go ahead and fix that go ahead and close the x button in the upper right hand corner of your form and it should take you back to your form design view if you will if not you can double click frm generate reports in your forms folder in the project explorer window so we need to adjust the tab order here so we’re going to go to the view menu and on the view menu you’re going to select tab order and i’ll move this box here so we can see it a little bit better the labels don’t have to be included in the tab order because we don’t want to tab to any labels in there at this point so the tab order that we want is that it start period frame and then go to the sales frame so they’re at the bottom of my tab order list which is why it went there last i’m going to click and hold on fra period and drag down to select fra sales and with both of them selected on the right side i’m going to use the move up button until they’re in the first and second position then i’m going to click on txt start date move that up so it’s in the third position and put txt end date in the fourth position we want our combo box cbo month to be underneath the end date text box and then we want our command and display buttons underneath cbo month and again we’re not concerned about the labels because labels are not input controls we can click ok and then we’re going to do f5 so we can test the tab order on our form notice that the month in the period frame is already selected when we do tab it’s going to go to all and then other then into the sales frame sales person model and classification after that it jumps down to the start date text box then to the end date text box then to the combo box finally the display button and the cancel button we can close the form again by using the x in the upper right hand corner when we code the controls on our forms we’re going to be doing them in what are known as built-in class modules these modules contain procedures that are used to respond to events for a form or maybe a worksheet or that performs tasks in support of the form or worksheet so we’re going to be populating our combo box for starter by using code so what we’re going to do is we’re going to right click on the form anywhere in the blank area of the grid and this is only one way of doing this and we’re going to choose view code so now if you look up at the top right gives you the file that we’re in but it says frm generate reports code that is a built-in class module this is the code just for that particular form the first thing we’re going to do is explore the object list where it says it defaults to user form right and notice the user form default procedure is the click event we’ll do the drop down next to to the right of user form and you’ll see all of the controls that we’ve placed on that form and this is a good example of when using the prefix is handy your command buttons are grouped together your frames are grouped together your option buttons are grouped together as are your text boxes so you don’t have to keep looking through a list for something not knowing what the actual control is so that’s a good example of why you want to use those prefixes here we’re going to leave it on the user form object now i mentioned that it defaults to the click procedure but we want our code to be based on its initialize procedure so to the right of click in your procedure list you’re going to select initialize and just like when we did an event procedure earlier we don’t need to keep the framework for private sub user form click we’re going to just delete that and leave our private sub user form initialize in sub statement the initialize procedure happens when the form is loaded into memory so when the form is run that’s when this procedure will happen at the end of the private sub line we’re going to press enter twice and we’re going to do a with end with statement so i’m going to tab over and i’m going to type with and then cbo month so that’s the combo box the month combo box i’m going to press enter tab i’m going to do dot and the list pops up we want to use the add item method so dot add item space and then double quotes jan for january now you can copy that add item line we need 12 of them january through december and we’re just using the three character abbreviation for the months with no period and once you have your 12 add item lines we’re gonna shift tab and we have to have our end with statement and you can go ahead and compile and save and in your project explorer window you’re going to double click frm generate reports we’re going to press f5 to run it and we just want to test our drop down so go to your for which month drop down and you should see january through december there we added those items to the combo box and we can close generate sales reports form and we’re going to change one property for that combo box so select the combo box on your form grid and we’re going to go down to its text property and that’s like the default property so we want it to default to january so we’re going to just type j a n there and enter and now if we i have to select my form first and f5 we’ll see that the for which month combo box is now defaulting to january and we can close it another way to access the code window for the form is just by double clicking on the form grid and that will take you to your built-in class module and it’s built in because a form is a built-in object here in excel vba so unlike a regular class module where you’re actually creating objects that are not included in the application this is a built-in class and so we’re in the code window and we’re going to hide controls based on when another control is selected so for example if month is selected in the period frame we want to hide the start date and end date labels and text boxes and we have several event procedures to code so we’re going to insert a text file and then review the code for your understanding first we’re going to declare some variables and we’re going to click at the top after option explicit and press enter and we’re going to do public sales comma period as string and press enter so we’re declaring variables up in the declaration section and we’re making them public so that means they’re available to any modules here and then we’re going to click underneath our end with statement we’ll click at the end of it and press enter and we’re going to type cbo month that’s our combo box name dot visible which is a property equals false which shows up on your list right underneath that we’re gonna type lbl month dot visible that’s its label equals false so right now it’s telling it not to show the combo box or the label but we’re not done yet so we’re going to click at the end of n sub and press enter and then we’re going to go to our insert menu and choose file and we want to grab that coding controls text file so we can just double click it and boy did it help us with a lot of typing look at all the stuff that’s in here we’ll go over with all of this code that we didn’t have to type means we declared two string variables sales and period the first thing that came in from the text file is private sub cmd cancel click so when the cancel button on the form is clicked it’s going to unload the form from memory and me is just a shortcut for the current object in this case the form so that’s one thing that came in from the text file coding that cancel button and then we have our opt all button when that option button is selected when it’s clicked or accessed it’s going to set the period variable to all when the classification option button is clicked it’s going to set the sales variable to equal classification when the model option button is clicked it’s going to assign model to the sales variable so we need to do a fix here because i just noticed that model doesn’t have double quotes on it coming from the text file and it needs to or we would get an error message and you might want to make a note if you want to avoid that later to just go into the text file and change it in there so the next sub procedure is opt month when it changes if that opt month button is clicked right and you see this next sub procedure it’s going to set the period to equal month if opt month equals true then we want the combo box and the label to be visible or else we want them to be hidden unless they need to select a month they don’t need to have the label or the combo box showing up on the form and then we have we’ll go to our private sub opt other this one has a change event and this one has a click event so when it’s clicked the other option button it will set the period to other and if it’s other then we want the start date and end date text boxes to be enabled so they’re accessible if they select other in that frame or else we want them to be disabled so they’ll still be visible but the end user won’t be able to access them and then the last but not least if they select the sales person option button in the sales frame it’s going to set sales variable to equal sales person and you want to go ahead and compile and save let’s go test some of this so i’m going to just double click my form in the forms folder in project explorer to get back over to it and the first thing we’re going to do is in the properties pane we’re going to disable the start date and end date text boxes so i’m going to click in the start date text box and i’m going to double click the enabled property to change it from true to false and i’m going to do the same with the end date text box and now i’m going to go ahead and press f5 to run the form so make sure you’re just on the grid and you don’t have any control selected and then f5 will be successful for you and so the first thing i want you to do is try to click in the start date and end date text boxes and you cannot in the period frame select the month option and you’ll notice that the combo box and its label will now become visible and accessible on the form if you select the all option button in the period frame your start date and end date text boxes are not available to you because we want it to run all the reports for all of the dates and then if you select the other option button now you have the ability to get into the start date and end date text boxes so in the background on my screen you see that opt other change is what’s causing that so if they select opt other if they select the other option button it’s going to assign the period valuable the value of other and it’s going to enable the start date and end date text boxes and now we’re going to use the x in the upper right hand corner to close the form again and the last thing we’re going to do instead of us having to go to the forms folder and double click the form and then f5 to run it we want to launch it programmatically so we’re going to do that now we’re going to go over to our project explorer window we can right click on the modules folder hover over insert and choose module and we’re going to rename module 2 in its properties window we’re going to name it mod reports and in mod reports we’re going to type a very short sub procedure so we’re going to type sub we’re going to name it show form press enter twice and we’re going to tab over we’re going to type the name of our form including its prefix frm generate reports the dot notation and then we want the show method we just created a sub procedure that will show the form when this procedure runs and now we can compile and save and we could just execute the procedure by pressing f5 anywhere within it it brings up the form and because we brought it in from a text file we coded the cancel button we can actually use the cancel button to unload the form from memory and close it in this lesson we learned about and used the user form object we changed some form properties and we went over some properties events and methods for form controls we accessed the toolbox to be able to get to our form controls and we added controls to the form and modified their properties and then we did some formatting of form controls in terms of alignment and grouping and we moved on to creating code for form controls in a built-in class module and we used a lot of code from a text file that was in the files in the video description we ultimately ended up launching the form via code and we will be revisiting using the form in a later lesson in lesson seven we will be working with the pivot table object and visual basic so the first thing we’re going to do is create a pivot table in excel and then we’re going to create a pivot table in visual basic for applications when end users use the form that we created in the previous lesson it is going to generate pivot table reports based on the user’s choices on the form after we get our pivot tables done we’re going to finalize our form and then you’ll learn how to add code to a button in excel for ease of use pivot tables allow you to summarize data from a worksheet or an external data source and create reports you can decide how to summarize the data and the data to be analyzed and after you create a pivot table you can pivot the data to look at it in different ways for different analysis when you’re creating a pivot table in vba two separate objects are used the pivot table object which is the pivot table in the workbook and the pivot cache object which is a memory location that’s created and it holds the source data the pivot table is created from when you’re doing this in visual basic the pivot cache object needs to exist before a pivot table is created so you use what’s known as the create method of the pivot caches collection object to create that pivot cache in vba and i have on this slide it’s syntax the one required argument is source type and then you have two optional argument source data and version the source type argument has five options in the form of excel constants so we saw visual basic constants earlier they’re preceded by vb like when we were working with the message box right these are excel constants which are preceded by xl so you have consolidation database external pivot table and scenario process wise once the pivot cache is created the create pivot table method of the pivot cache object will be accessed to create the pivot table and it has four arguments as listed on this slide table destination table name read data and default version and the final three the only one that’s required is the table destination argument and again this is background information for your future review if you need to refresh on anything i will be guiding you through this when we get started the pivot cache and pivot table can be created in the same procedure and the fields that are going to populate the pivot table have to be set up separately within what’s known as the pivot fields collection yes this sounds complicated until you get used to it when it comes to pivot fields collection it’s a member of the pivot table object and it contains the columns of data from the data source the pivot fields orientation property is used to populate the pivot table report field names are assigned to the values in each column based on the column headings an excel constants are used here as well your if you’re used to pivot tables you know you have row labels column labels you have report filter you have values so the excel row field would be for your row labels excel column field for your column labels excel page field is used for the report filter an excel data field is used for the values you have an extra constant here excel hidden which is used to hide a field and then at the bottom i have the syntax of the orientation property for your future reference so we’re going to start in our sales fiscal year file by recording two macros to create the pivot table so i’m on the 26th of august sheet tab and i’m going to just click anywhere within my data there and we’re going to start a macro recording so i’m going to use the mac no macros currently recording button down in my status bar that we used earlier i’m going to click on that and we’re going to name this macro create pivot table and then we’re going to just click ok now just make sure you’re anywhere within your data and except for on that sum of the selling price we’re going to be anywhere within the data go to the insert tab of the ribbon and the first button is pivot table i’m going to click the upper half of the button in the create pivot table dialog box you’ll see that it has selected all of your data we were just anywhere within our range and it will select everything until it finds a blank and that’s the choice we wanted to use select a table or range and then the next choice you make is choose where you want the pivot table report to be placed it defaults to a new worksheet which is typically how they’re used and so we can just click ok so we’re on a new sheet we have the framework of our pivot table on the worksheet and to the right we have our pivot table fields list this is where we need to stop this recording remember it’s a two-step process even when you’re recording it as a macro in excel the first step is to create the framework of the pivot table and we’ve done that so i’m going to go down to my status bar and select stop recording now we need to record a macro that will select the fields that we want in our pivot table report so i’m going to go back to my status bar and start another macro recording and this one i’m going to name select fields and click ok in your field list on the right you’re going to drag your year field to the filters box underneath and notice your pivot table report is already starting to shape up we’re going to drag classification to columns and we see our pivot table we have our column labels and it’s showing the classifications car suv truck minivan we’re going to drag well we could put a check box in front of make and it will automatically put it in the rows box and we’re going to put a if we scroll down we’re going to put a check mark in front of selling price and it’s automatically going to put that in the values box so any text space field will automatically go into rows and any numeric field will automatically go into values and the default aggregate that’s used is the sum function so now in our pivot table we can see our row labels are the makes of the vehicles our column labels are the classification and we’re getting the selling price for each combination there now we’re ready to stop our macro our second macro from recording so you could stop the recording and let’s switch over to visual basic editor and in project explorer i’m going to collapse that microsoft excel objects folder and now you’ll notice we have mod reports module 1 and module 2. we’re going to double click module 2 and that’s where it put the code for the two macros we recorded and we’re going to rename module 2 so using its properties we’re gonna name it mod sheet pivot so this is the code that was created when we did our create pivot table macro right it’s adding you can see it’s referencing the pivot caches object right and we’re using the source type of excel database and you have all of this code that was generated by your two separate macro recordings and then we had to record a separate macro for selecting the fields and that’s where you’ll see those excel constants for page field column field row field so on and so forth so if you create a pivot table while recording a macro in excel you have to record two macros one to set up the framework of the pivot table and the second one to populate the pivot table report with the appropriate fields now we’re going to start creating our pivot table in visual basic editor and so we’re going to start by creating the pivot cache and pivot table objects which can be in the same procedure as you’ll see but before we do that switch back over to excel and delete the sheet that has your pivot table report on it and then we’re going to insert a new sheet a new worksheet and we’re going to name it reports and the sheet tabs in your excel file should look like mine on the screen so i’ve made the report sheet the first one and i deleted the other sheet where we recorded our macro and created the pivot table and now we can switch back over to the visual basic editor in your project explorer window switch to mod reports where we have just that one small sub procedure that shows the form we’re going to click after the in sub statement here and you’re going to type the sub procedure that i will display on my screen momentarily i’ve changed my font size to 18 so you can create that sub procedure that we’re naming create pivot based on what’s on my screen we’ll talk about it after you get it typed in in this sub procedure we are declaring two object variables destination and range data both with the range object type we’re setting the destination variable to equal that reports worksheet cell a1 that we just created in excel and we’re setting the range data object variable to equal the range a1 through j1 all the way down to the last populated cell in column j after that we’re accessing the pivot caches object so activeworkbook.pivotcaches.create and i’m using the line continuation character there space and underscore and this time in the parentheses we’re using a different syntax and we’re doing this here because you’ll probably come across it in code that you inherit so we’re actually naming the arguments and separating them from their values by using a colon and an equal sign so the first argument for the pivot caches is the source type and for an excel spreadsheet the data on an excel spreadsheet you use the excel constant of excel database the next argument is the source data and that is going to be the range data so a1 through the last populated cell in column j and then we’re doing another line continuation character at the end of that line and now we’re moving on to the create pivot table method of the pivot cache object and that line starts with dot create pivot table and then we’re giving it a destination for the table which is what we populated as the destination object variable so the report sheet cell a1 is where we’re going to start the pivot table framework and then we’re naming the pivot table sales pivot let’s go ahead and compile and save our work and we’ll switch to excel we need to run that sub procedure our create pivot procedure on a sheet that’s populated with data so i’m going to go to my 26th of august sheet tab and i’m going to just be anywhere within my data and i’m going to do alt f8 to bring up the macros dialog box and we want to double click create pivot it doesn’t initially look like anything happened but we told it to put the framework of the pivot table on the reports sheet tab so let’s go to reports and we’ll see the framework of our pivot table so now that we have the framework of our pivot table we’re going to switch back over to the visual basic editor because we have to create our fields collection regardless of whether you’re creating a pivot table by recording a macro or by using visual basic for applications it’s going to be a two-step process we’re going to be still working in mod reports and we’re going to go up to the top and click after option explicit we need to declare some variable names up here so we’re going to type public and after we click after option explicit i pressed enter we’re going to use the public keyword page name comma row name comma column name comma data name as string so four string variables we declared in the declaration section and you can press enter so now we’re gonna go to the bottom of our create pivot sub procedure click at the end of the end sub statement and press enter and we’re going to create another procedure sub procedure here so we’re going to type sub and the name of it is set fields and press enter a couple of times well we’re going to declare an object variable here within the procedure so we’re going to do dim and then i’m just calling it pvt table as pivot table and pivot table will show up on your list underneath that we’re going to use the set statement remember we have to use set for our object variables set pvt table and then equal worksheets and in parentheses and double quotes reports dot pivot tables and in parentheses we need to put what we named the pivot table which is in quotes it’s sales pivot and then we’re going to close those parentheses we’re going to press enter twice and we’re going to do a with end with block so we’re going to indent and we’re going to type with pvt table enter and tab we’re going to do dot pivot fields which will show up on your list and then in parentheses page name dot orientation equals xl page field so we’re referencing that constant and just a reminder the excel page field constant refers to the field that’s going to go into the report filter box we’re going to press enter and we’re going to do dot pivot fields again this time in the parentheses we’re going to type row name dot orientation and this one is going to equal excel row field so the field that’s going to go into the rows box for the pivot table enter again we have two more of these lines that we have to do so dot pivot fields and use the list as necessary to decrease your typing and in parentheses for this one we’re going to do column name dot orientation and this one equals xl column field and last but not least we’re going to do dot pivot fields in parentheses data name and that’s for the values dot orientation equal excel data field we’re going to press enter and shift tab and we’re going to type in our end with statement and enter again so now what we’re going to do is we’re going to finish up this sub procedure we have four more lines to type and i’m going to shift tab to out dent so i’m at the same margin as our dim and set lines and we’re going to type active workbook dot sheets and then in parentheses and double quotes reports dot activate and i’ll scroll down so you can see this a little bit better our next line is pvt table like our object variable name dot pivot select then we’re going to type a space in a set of double quotes comma and from the list that pops up we’re going to select excel data only another excel constant so the data field is the values field and we want to we’re typing this line to say select all of the values and we’re going to press enter and then we’re going to tell it how to format it so selection dot number format equals and in double quotes we’re going to type a dollar sign pound sign comma two more pound signs and a zero and then close your double quotes the number format and i have it highlighted on my screen that we’re using so it’s going to start it with a dollar sign and the pound represents any digit that may be in that position you have your thousand separator is the comma and then we have two more pound signs so digit placeholders if they’re in that position it will put them there if not it will skip it and we’re saying that we’re not going to have any decimal places on our numbers here if we wanted decimal places after the ending zero we would we could do a dot and then zero zero which means that it would have two decimal places the zero that’s sitting there instead of the pound signs or as they’re now known hashtags that would represent a leading zero for a number if it’s less than one so that’s the number format and you’ll see it once we finish this up and now we have one more line to finish this set field sub procedure and we’re going to just type range and in parentheses and double quotes e1 dot select this is going to set the fields whether they’re filter fields row fields column fields or your values fields for the pivot table that we created because the variables will not populate until we actually run the form again we’re going to be able to test this our sub procedure for setting the fields in just a little while we have some more tasks that we’re going to complete that i have under the heading finalizing the form what we’re going to do here is we’re going to create code that will generate pivot table reports based on the selections the user chooses in the form so in other words we’re going to distribute user responses to the correct procedures specifically we’re going to create code that will perform these steps when the user activates the display button on the form we want it to hide the form and whatever option is selected in the period frame will be evaluated determining the month or the start date and end date of the pivot table report the sales option that is selected in the sales frame will also be evaluated and at this point the variables containing the field names will be populated then the source data will be pulled from the workbook and placed on a new sheet and then the data will be moved to a new workbook and the pivot table will be created so we’re going to get started on these finalizing the form steps and i’m still in visual basic editor and in the project explorer window i’m going to expand forms folder and double-click our generate reports form to get back to it and then i’m going to double click in a blank area of our form to get back to our built-in class module which has all the code that we’ve created for this so far so we want to select the framework for the click event for your display command button so where it says user form at the very top of the module in the procedure list we’re going to do the drop down and we’re going to select cmd display so now we have private sub cmd display click event waiting for us because click is the default procedure for a command button i’m going to click after the opening and closing parentheses and press enter a couple of times and we’re going to tab and we’re going to type me dot hide and hide is on the list and in this instance as we saw previously when we used me it’s referring to the form when we click the display button it’s going to hide the form that’s one thing that we need to happen so now we’re going to declare some variables up top in the declaration section and we already have public sales and period as string click after period type a comma and type month so we have sales period and month as string variables press enter at the end of the as string line and we’re going to type public start date comma end date as date and press enter now we’re going to navigate to the end of this module and we’re going to create another sub procedure there that’s going to code the options selected in the period frame on the form and we’re going to use a select case construct here so at the very bottom of the module we’re going to type sub we’re going to name it get dates press enter a couple of times and then tab and i’ll scroll down so you can see my whole construct down there and we’re going to type select case period enter and then tab case and then in double quotes month enter tab month equals cbo month and we’ll type all of this in and then i’ll go over it and review it with you after i press enter after cbo month i’m going to shift tab so i get back to the case margin and i’m going to type case and then double quotes all enter tab start date equals get first date enter end date equals get last date enter shift tab case and then double quotes other so we have month all and other in our period frame enter and we’re going to do start date equals txt start date enter end date equals txt end date enter shift tab twice and you’re going to type end select and then i’m going to press enter again so i get that blank line between n select and end sub so let me break this down for you we’re doing a select case statement which is like an if then else if end if statement so we have three cases here right based on the period so case month means the month equals whatever month is selected in the combo box when they select all in that period frame the start date is going to equal the results of a function procedure that we don’t have in here yet called get first date and then the end date is going to equal the result of a function procedure that we also don’t have in here yet called get last date and then if they select other in the period frame the start date is going to be the start date that the end user puts in the start date text box and the end date will be the end date that the end user puts in the end date text box so that’s what we’ve created here in this get date sub procedure now the good news is the two procedures that we don’t have in here yet get first date and get last date we’re gonna bring in from a text file so we don’t have to type it and then we’ll review it so i’m going to click at the end of the end sub statement and press enter beneath our get date sub procedure and we’re going to go to insert menu file and this particular file that we want is going to be well we have get first date we’ll bring in the get last date first so we’re going to do get last date double click that file and then go to the end of that function after the end function statement be on the next blank line go back to insert file and we’re gonna insert get first date and so now let’s review these get last state and get first date functions we’ll start with get last date so we’re doing object variables here dim sheet as worksheet and then we’re just doing regular variables last date and test date we’re declaring those as dates so we’re starting with last date equals zero and we’re using a for each next construct so this is going to go through the worksheets for each sheet in worksheets the test state equals and it says see date and then in parentheses sheet.name so the name of the worksheets in this file are dates and see date is a conversion function that it’s going to convert the text date on the sheet tab into an actual date so let’s say it’s on the 26th of august 2016 sheet right it’s gonna convert the text on the sheet tab to a date format and assign it to the test date variable and then it says if test date is greater than the last date then the last date equals the test date and that’s in an if in if then end if construct which is nested in our for each next structure then it’s going to go to the next sheet and it’s going to repeat the process until there’s no more sheets and then it will determine what the last date is and so the result of the function get last date will be the last date that’s in the file and then get first date is similar right where we have our declarations and then it starts first date equals 99.99 well actually five nines and for each sheet it’s going to convert the sheet name date to a date and if the test date is less than the first date then the first date equals the test date and then it ends that if block with end if goes to the next sheet repeats the process until there are no more sheets now notice this one came in and the last line is red and if it’s not when you go to compile it’s going to be red because we declared first state and it’s all mushed together but in the text file it came in as two separate words so i’m going to just mush it together in that line and now we can compile and save so those two function procedures will determine the earliest date and the latest date in the workbook for the period frame at this point we have three more procedures that we’re going to need to do we’re only going to type one of them we’ll bring in the other two well actually we have four procedures we’re going to type one of them and bring in the remaining three from text files so we’re at the bottom of this module and we’re going to create a sub procedure under our get first state function procedure and i’m going to just type sub and i’m going to type get sales by grouping and press enter twice so this procedure is going to code the options in the sales frame on the form so it’s kind of like telling it if they select sales person in the sales frame what fields need to be in that pivot table report and so on and so forth so we’re going to do a select case statement for this i’m going to tab over type select case sales press enter and then tab case and then double quotes it’s going to be salesperson and on the form made that two words and then we’re going to press enter and tab so no page name which is the filter for the pivot table equals and then double quotes sales person and i’m going to check whether that needs to be separated there sometimes it’s what you called it on the form and then other times it’s the way it shows as a column header so i will definitely double check that before we test these procedures and then we’re going to do enter and we’re going to do row name equals and quotes year enter column name equals make and then our data name for our values in the pivot table report is going to equal selling price and i believe these are the headings on the spreadsheet we have a few more finishing touches we need to do in order to complete this process so we want to navigate to mod reports and go to the bottom of the module under our set fields sub procedure and we’re going to use a text file to bring in three other procedures so we’re going to go up to insert file and this time we want to consolidate data text file i did this as a text file because it actually contains three different procedures so we have a sub procedure named consolidate data then we have another sub procedure telling it where to start grabbing the cells and we have another sub procedure for finishing the report and just to kind of go over them briefly for you what these are doing so the consolidate data sub procedure will create a temporary worksheet in the file and name it reports and that will hold your pivot table report based on the option the user selects in the period frame it will collect the data from the worksheets this procedure calls a function that directs it to select the pertinent cells from each worksheet and if you look through it you can see the code blocks for that and they have select case statements and they’re using grab cells to grab some cells when it references grab cells it’s calling the sub procedure right underneath it named grab cells it’s passed an argument that is the beginning row number of the cells to be selected and it uses an if construct to grab all the cells on each worksheet that are applicable to the choices made in the form and then last but certainly not least we have a sub procedure named finish report and that moves the collected data from the reports worksheet into an existing workbook in the same directory named reports it then deletes the report worksheet in the sales fiscal year file and creates the pivot table in the reports workbook i should mention this by now we have created across different files multiple modules we also have an built-in class module for our form so you have lots of different blocks of code and what you want to do is as you’re working in visual basic you want to start saving your code blocks that actually work so after they’re tested and i have a code repository i just copy and paste my sub and function procedures into a word document because a lot of times you can reuse the same code over and over again you might have to just change a file name or something like that but why build it from the ground when you already know you have code that has worked before so i’ll make that suggestion here because especially some of these text files you’re getting really great code blocks to use in future vba projects we have just a few more finishing touches before we’ll test everything and this time we want to go to our built-in class module for our form so i’m going to just double click frm generate reports in the forms folder and then i’m going to double click a blank area of the form to get into that module we want to locate the click event for the display command button at the toward the top of mine i have private sub cmd display underscore click and currently it only has me hide in that sub procedure click at the end of me hide and press enter and now we’re going to use this to call other procedures we are going to call our get dates procedure enter get sales by grouping procedure enter consolidate data and we’re going to pass it up an argument of month so we can just put month after it consolidate data month and the finish report procedure and then we’re going to type unload me so when the the display button is clicked on the form it’s going to hide the form and it’s going to call those procedures get dates get sales by grouping consolidate data finish report and then it’s going to unload the form from memory now we have a modification we need to make in mod reports so we’re going to go back to mod reports and i’m going to use the procedure list to navigate to the set fields procedure we need to make a small modification there so when we created this set field sub procedure we did a number format but then when we created the get sales by grouping sub procedure for the selection in the sales frame if they select model we made color the data name so we made color to value field we don’t want the colors to be displayed with like a currency format really because it’s just going to be a count of color here we need to change this set fields procedure so it doesn’t put a numeric currency format on a color field if that’s what’s selected in the sales frame to adjust that if it is an actual value like a selling price value we do want it formatted in a currency format but if it’s account of models we don’t so we’re going to address that by using an if function so click at the end of the line that says activeworkbook.sheets reports dot activate and press enter and you’re gonna go ahead and tab and we’re gonna type if and then the name of our form frm generate reports dot sales and we’re going to use our not equal to so less than greater than and then in double quotes we’re going to type model if what they select in the sales frame on our form is not equal to model we wanted to go ahead and give it the currency format so we’re going to type then after model and then we’re going to come down to the line that has selection dot number format click at the end of that line and press enter and you’re going to tab and you’re going to type end if so it’s only going to apply a currency format if the selection in the sales frame is not model otherwise it won’t apply if it is model it won’t apply the currency format it’ll just be the number and we’re going to make a minor modification to our create pivot procedure so i’m going to use my procedure list to navigate to that one and then here in the set range data line we’re going to change the j1 range to i1 so when it consolidates all the data it’s only filling the column i we don’t need it to say j there so just another minor change and now we’re gonna go ahead and compile and save so two things we’re gonna do before we test this i promise that i would double check our sub procedure get sales by grouping it’s part of your built-in class module for your form to determine whether the salesperson case should be one word or two words it actually should be one word there so i’m gonna adjust that and i’m going to compile and save and then i’m gonna have you switch over to excel and delete the sheet tab that you created that you named reports which has the framework of the pivot table on it so just delete that sheet tab because it’s going to happen for us automatically when we test this and once you do that come back over to visual basic editor and we’re going to double click our form in the forms folder and then we’re going to press f5 to run this form we are going to select month in the period frame and then go down to the bottom right to your combo box and select july and in the sales frame we’re going to select sales person and then you’re going to go ahead and click your display button it’s going to click and were for a little bit on your screen and finally when it’s done now i’m getting a not responding message but that’ll clear we’ll see that a message box will pop up that says microsoft excel will permanently delete this sheet do you want to continue now notice it created that reports sheet tab for us and it just gathered all the information for the pivot table report so we’re going to tell it to delete this sheet and when i switch back over to excel you’ll notice that you’re in a whole different file this reports file has been sitting in the same directory as our sales fiscal year file and it was a file that was in the video description and what it did is first thing we’re going to look at is consolidate sheet tab so all the stuff that it gathered together for the selections in the form it put on the consolidate sheet tab and then it created the reports sheet tab where your actual pivot table report is showing so if we click on that pivot table report and you look at your fields list the sales person is being used as the filter field we have make in columns year in rows and the sum of the selling price in values and we’re going to close this reports file without saving the changes and you should still be in sales fiscal year and it doesn’t have a report sheet tab so we’re going to test this again using different selections on the form let’s do alt f11 to get back to our form and then we’re going to make sure it’s selected and press f5 to run it and this time we’ll we’ll still select month for and select july but this time in the sales frame we’re going to select model and now we’re going to choose display so again the clicking and wearing where it’s running all those procedures and gathering the data and you will ultimately get the message asking if you want to permanently delete this report sheet in sales fiscal year and we’re going to say delete and then when you switch back over to excel it is in that reports file and again if you look at the consolidate sheet it has all the data that was consolidated and then we go to the report sheet and this is where we put in that if statement because when we select model we said we don’t want the count of the models to be formatted as currency and you can see here or the count yeah of the model colors we don’t want them to be formatted as currency so they’re not they’re just the count of the colors per model and we can close the reports file without saving the changes so now we’re going to set up a way for the end user to display the form and make their choices without having to go into the code window so we’re going to add a button to the quick access toolbar that will show the form for the end user and the way we’re going to do that is we’re going to go up to the quick access toolbar and currently mine just has save on it and to the right of the save icon is a drop down arrow and when you select the drop down arrow you have a list of commands but toward the bottom you’re going to select more commands and it opens up the customize the quick access toolbar excel options window now on the right it defaults to customize quick access toolbar for all documents that’s the default well we want this button to only show in this document so we’re going to do the drop down next to for all documents and we’re going to choose for sales fiscal year and then what we’re going to do on the left side we’re going to access the drop down where it says choose commands from popular commands and when we do that drop down we see popular commands commands not in the ribbon all commands and macros we’re going to click on macros scroll down in this list until you see the show form macro we’re going to select it and then we’re going to click the add button so on the right you should just have show form sitting there for this particular document on the bottom right so you notice all of these macros have that same symbol right we’re going to change the symbol so with show form selected on the right underneath on the right you’re going to click on the modify button pick a symbol of your choice from the list of symbols that are showing there that you would like to have on the quick access toolbar for this so i always like to do different ones than the default ones i think for this one i’m going to just pick i’ll just pick the red circle no i’ll do the colorful butterfly just for fun so i’m going to click on the butterfly and click ok and now you’ll see the icon in front of show form and at the bottom you’re going to click ok so now you have that icon whichever one you selected on your quick access toolbar and when i click that icon it actually brings up the form so this is how the end users will be able to access the form and we can do cancel on our form and you’re going to go ahead and save your file to recap lesson 7 we started by recording two separate macros in excel to create a pivot table first the framework of the pivot table and then to create the fields that we want to use to populate the pivot table so two separate macro recordings then we went into visual basic for applications and we created a pivot table programmatically we had to create the pivot cache object first and then we could tell it to create the pivot table and we can do that in the same procedure but we had to do a separate procedure to set the fields for the pivot table just like we had to create create two separate macro recordings one for the framework of the pivot table and one to set the fields after that we spent some time finalizing our form by adding more code and we use some text files for some of the code that we added we then reviewed some of those text files and their procedures therein so you learned about the consolidate data procedure grab cells function and the finish report procedure and what they do in terms of the workflow here and then we modified our click event procedure for the display command button by calling all of the other procedures that we created or we created via text file and we added a line that said unload the form from memory once all of the other procedures have run we saw when we tested everything and we tested it a couple of times that it gathers all the data and puts it on a reports sheet tab in the sales fiscal year file and then it copies and pastes that data into a reports file in the same directory on its consolidate tab and then it creates the pivot table on another tab in the reports file and the pivot table displays the choices that were made on the form and we ended up adding code to a button on the quick access toolbar in excel and i selected the butterfly icon and that’s the way the user will launch the form to make their selections to get their pivot table reports created thank you for attending excel 2019 visual basic for applications video course hi everyone i’m trish connor cato welcome to the excel 2019 visual basic for applications video course this course is for beginning users looking to automate repetitive and recurring tasks in microsoft excel vba is microsoft’s programming language and it’s built into the office applications our focus during this course is on excel specifically you’ll be equipped with the basics to start writing your own vba code modify the code behind macros you’ve already recorded and have an understanding of how vba lends itself to creating efficiency in your daily tasks the course ends with you learning how to deal with code errors known as debugging and how to write error handling code if you’re enjoying these videos please like and subscribe if you want to earn certificates and digital badges please become a member of our patreon the link is in our video description if you have any questions you want answered by one of our instructors please join our off-site community the link is in the description as well as always if this course has exercise files you’ll find them in the video description below in the last lesson of this video course we’ll be focusing on debugging code we’ve already experienced some coding errors also referred to as bugs during this course as a matter of fact if we haven’t we could consider ourselves lucky as errors and coding go hand in hand typos will happen syntax may be overlooked math errors may occur and there are many more things that can cause code errors during program execution this lesson will introduce you to the three types of errors that can occur during execution and the reasons why they occur the process of tracing and correcting code errors is known as debugging the visual basic editor has a debug toolbar that can be used for this purpose we’ll also cover some tips for minimizing errors and what you can do if you cannot resolve them and you’ll see in this lesson why the structure of your code is important during the process of debugging code is easier to review when it’s organized in a logical structure so specifically we will be covering the following topics the types of coding eras and their causes using the debug toolbar to investigate errors and we’ll be setting breakpoints stepping through code using break mode during run mode and determining the value of expressions then we’ll move on to handling errors where you’ll gain an understanding of error handling and learning about vba’s error trapping options we’re going to get into trapping errors with the on error statement which includes understanding the error object writing an error handling routine and working with inline error handling as mentioned you’ll get tips for minimizing errors and tips on what to do if you cannot resolve them and finally you’ll be introduced to the object browser window and we’ll review more detail about that when we get there we’re going to be using our sales fiscal year file in this lesson there are only three types of eras that you may have in your visual basic for applications code so the first type is known as a logic error and these are the most difficult errors to locate and visual basic will not help you find them they’re usually caused by typos and logic errors will not stop your code execution instead you will have an unexpected outcome for example you may have used a minus sign instead of a plus sign and an expression so it will calculate the expression but you’ll get an unexpected outcome because of the wrong operator that’s being used then there are runtime errors a runtime error happens when a line of code cannot be executed the procedure is halted and a message box will display that defines the error there is a help button in the message box that can be used to view the help topic associated with that specific type of runtime era there are many types of runtime errors they’re caused by if you divide by zero that can’t be done if you reference a non-existent workbook or worksheet or other object and referencing an excel cell that contains an error are a few examples of things that can cause a runtime error and last but not least you have syntax errors now these are detected by the line editor and the compiler so as you’re typing code when you get to the end of a line and you press enter if there is a syntax error in that line the line will turn red and examples that can cause this are incomplete expressions and missing arguments and then syntax errors are also detected by the compiler so all along we’ve been compiling and then saving and the compiler checks all lines of code in each procedure and all declarations within the project a variable declaration is required if we have that option explicit statement at the top of a module the compiler will check that all variables are declared and that all objects have correct references to properties methods and events it also checks constructs to ensure the correct required statements are present so when you have a with block you need to have the end with statement when you have an if block you need to have end if the compiler will display a message box that describes the error if found so i mentioned using the debug toolbar in the visual basic editor to investigate errors the tools that are on that toolbar can be categorized as follows tools that help you manually execute the program tools that suspend the execution of the code and tools that assist in determining the values of expressions so there’s an illustration of the debug toolbar and its tools so the first set of tools would be the ones that could help you suspend the code and then you have a set of tools that can help you manually execute the program and that would start with like toggle breakpoint all the way through step out and then the last group of tools the window tools i call them are tools that assist in determining the values of expressions so this slide is for your future reference it’s just a further description of the debugging tools and their shortcut keys if any and a description a comprehensive description of each tool now most debugging is done when the application is suspended and that’s known as break mode an application is in break mode when a runtime error occurs a breakpoint is manually inserted into the code or a stop statement is entered within the code some of the tools for debugging can be utilized in design mode and or at run time in addition to when the application is in break mode so for example the step into tool can be run in break mode and design mode the immediate window can be run in brake mode design mode or at run time and the watch window can be run in brake mode and run time now before we do this next exercise i just want to review and i increase the size of the font for three of the tools on the debugging toolbar and those are the step tools so we used stepped into earlier in the course and we saw that that executed code one statement at a time one line at a time there’s also the ability to step over code and that would execute code one procedure or one statement at a time and then you have your step out option which can overlook a called procedure and execute the remaining lines of the calling procedure so you’ll get more experience with step into and you’ll get new experience with step out in this next lesson so we’re going to start by creating a syntax error and remember these would be detected by the line editor when you get to the end of the line and you press enter or by compiling your project which we’ve been doing all along and when you compile it compiles everything in the module we’re going to force this to happen i’m in the visual basic editor for sales fiscal year and then module one in the add totals procedure and what i’m going to do is i’m going to delete the end if statement and then i’m going to go up and compile the project now it gives me a compile error and it specifically tells me block if without end if so i can click ok and i’m going to put my end if statement back in and then i’m going to compile again and i don’t get the error let’s do another one in the if line we’re going to change the not equal to symbol to an exclamation point put an exclamation point there and now click out of that line and when you click out of that line the compile error comes up it says expect it then or go to and the entire line turns red we’re going to click ok and now go up and compile the project and this time you get a compiled error that says syntax error so this one’s a little bit more specific it’s letting you know there’s some kind of syntax error in that line and this is typical when you’re clicking out of the line it’s the same as pressing enter at the end of it and the line editor kicks in when you compile then the compiler kicks in this message is more specific i’m going to click ok and i’m going to change the exclamation point back to our not equal symbol and then i’m going to compile so now i’m in mod reports and i used my procedure list to get to the consolidate data procedure that’s one that we brought in from a text file and we’re going to go to the view menu hover over toolbars and click on debug so the debug toolbar comes up on the screen now we’re looking for a specific line of code and before we find it i’m going to decrease the width of the project explorer and properties panes on the left because we’re going to end up viewing this procedure side by side with the excel workbook after we set our manual break point so we’re going to scroll down in the procedure it says select case frm generate reports dot period when you find that line you can be anywhere within it and on the debug toolbar if you hover over the hand icon you’ll see that it says toggle breakpoint and it gives you the shortcut key which is f9 i’m going to just click the hand and it turns that line maroon and it puts a maroon oval in the gray bar to the left of the line that is indicative of a manual break point when you set a manual break point and you execute the code it will execute it up until the break point and then it goes into what’s known as break mode as you’ll see in a moment so i’m gonna arrange this so that my editor window is on the right side of my screen and i have my excel file on the left side of my screen and in the excel file i’m going to go ahead and start this procedure by running the show form procedure from the quick access toolbar so it’s going to bring up the form and in the period frame i’m going to select month and then choose august from the combo list and i’m going to select sales person in the sales frame and click display so if you notice on your excel screen the reports sheet has been created but it’s not populated and if you look at your editor screen now that line that where we set the manual breakpoint has yellow shading and a yellow arrow in the gray border to the left of it and so it ran all the code up until it gets to that line and now it’s in what’s called break mode now that we’re in break mode we can use our step tools i’m going to just display my debug toolbar again and your step tools are to the right of the hand so there’s your step into that does line by line you have step over which goes procedure by procedure or statement by statement and then you have step out that would skip any called procedures or just execute the rest of the code as one block so the first thing we’re going to do is step into and it goes down to the next line and we’ll do step over at this point that’s still within that for each block we’re going to step over again it goes down to compare which is another statement we’re going to step over again and it goes to the next statement and now go ahead and click on step out and it runs the rest of the code and you can see that it’s going through your excel workbook and ultimately you’ll get the pop-up asking if you want to permanently delete the report sheet in the sales fiscal year i’m going to go ahead and click delete and it opened the reports file and gave me my pivot table we’re going to go ahead and close the reports file and don’t save the changes and i’m going to just maximize the visual basic editor window again i’m going to expand my project explorer window so that i can get back to mod reports and notice it didn’t remove our break point so i’m going to click in that line and consolidate data procedure and go click the hand again to get rid of the break point and typically after using these processes i go ahead and click the reset button on the debug toolbar just to make sure there’s nothing lingering in memory you can go ahead and save so now i’m going to challenge you and give you an on your own exercise in the same consolidate data procedure i’m going to have you set the breakpoint again at the same line select case frm generate reports dot period and then i want you to execute the show form procedure until the program enters break mode so go ahead and pause the video and do those things at this point and i have my windows side by side again the program has halted execution at the point where it created the report sheet and now we can look at a couple of the window debug tools so with my debug toolbar to the right of your step tools are your window tools so the first one we’re going to select is the locals window and it opens in a pane on the lower half of the editor window and what it’s showing you is the current value of any variables if you look at mod reports under expression it has a plus sign when you expand it you’ll see your public variables and their values at this point it also on the right tells you the type of variable so the locals window will show you that when you’re in break mode and i just collapsed mod reports again and then what i’m going to do is i’m going to go ahead and press f8 so it’s at my break line i’m going to press f8 so it steps in to the code and i’m going to f8 until i get down to the on error resume next statement so now there’s a in the expression window the value of compare the compare expression is reports if i hover over compare in the code window you can see that it’s letting me know the value of that variable right in the code window when it’s in break mode in that compare line in the code window i’m going to have you select the function c date which is a conversion function right converts the date on the sheet tab the date the text string of the date on the sheet tab to an actual date so we’re starting with the letter c in c date and we’re going to highlight it until we get to the first closing parentheses after compare so just the function and its argument in parentheses is selected on your debug window the next to the last icon is quick watch another window so when we have that expression selected it gives us the context so it lets us know the vba project mod reports consolidate data procedure the expression itself and then its value is a type mismatch because there’s text on the sheet tab and then we’re converting it to a date so quick watch gives you different information than can show in your locals window and we’re going to close the quick watch window and you can use the x to close the locals window and now what you can do is you can go ahead step out of your code and i deleted the report sheet and i’m going to close the reports workbook without saving the changes and i’ll just maximize my editor window again we’re going to start forcing some runtime errors to happen and it is best practice to write error trapping code to try to avoid runtime errors you might not be able to avoid all of them but it will be helpful to avoid as many as possible error trapping options are set in the options dialog box in the editor where we set the required variable declaration earlier and changed our font size to review those options before we get into error handling they’re listed on this slide so there’s three options you can break on all errors so that means even if you’ve written error handling code a break in execution will occur if a runtime error is encountered so it really disables any error handling code that you’ve written break in class module the execution will break and an error message will display when an unhandled error occurs within a class module this option is only useful for debugging and then you have break on unhandled errors the execution will break and an error message will display when any unhandled error occurs and again we’ll review those options as we go over our next set of exercises there are some methods to error handling in visual basic for applications an on error statement is used to enable what’s called an error trap if an error is generated after this statement is executed the error handler becomes active and passes controlled to the code on the on error statement that it’s is specified and there are two types of on error statements on error go to and on error resume next i have the syntax so for on error go to then there’s a corresponding line label and then on error resumed x once an on error statement traps an error the error can be handled in one of three ways you could write an error handler this is a routine that is pointed to in the on error go to statement line label the line label statements address one or more types of errors for the procedure another method is ignoring the error and that’s what happens when you use the on error resume next statement to trap the error and handle it by moving to the next line of code and then you have inline error handling and that’s also on error resume next you can use it to trap the error you enter code in the procedure to check for errors after any statements that are expected to generate them you’ll see in the upcoming exercise that the error object can be used to examine information about an error that has just occurred the error object has a global scope and has properties and methods that are useful for finding out information about the current era clearing error information and generating errors the properties contain information about the error that just occurred in the current procedure so you have a number property and it’s the identification number of the most recent era and numbers represent different types of errors you have a description property which describes the error and corresponds to the error number and then you have a source property which is a name that identifies the component module and or procedure that generated the error and all three of those properties have data types as listed on this slide the error object only has two methods clear and raise clear resets all the error objects properties to zero or zero length strings this method is used automatically when any on error statement is encountered and then you have the raise method which generates a runtime error and it can specify the number of an error defined by vba excel or another application such as word and you’re like what is she talking about well it’ll start making sense when we start doing it which is going to be right now we’re going to start by causing a situation that will lead to a run time era so i’m in my working directory and what we’re going to do is we’re going to rename the excel file called reports we’re going to just name it reports with the number two and now i’m going to bring up my sales fiscal year file in excel i’m going to start the show form procedure from the quick access toolbar i’m going to select all for period and model in the sales frame and click display eventually you’ll get the runtime error has an error number 1004 sorry we couldn’t find my path reports.xlsx is it possible it was moved renamed or deleted and we’re gonna click the debug button on that message so it takes us over to mod reports to the sub procedure finish report and the error is being caused when it tries to execute that workbook dot open file name line because it’s looking for a file named reports now i’m gonna go up to the standard toolbar and i’m gonna click the reset button i’m going to go then go back to mod reports and notice that it cleared that break in the code for us so now before we write error handling code i want to show you the options that are available for you we saw them on the slide so i’m going to go up to the tools menu and choose options and when i get it in there at top i’m going to go to the general tab and on the right side you have your error trapping options so remember break on all errors really means ignore any error handling code that you would write your other choices are breaking class module or break on unhandled errors i usually use break on unhandled can’t really say usually it just depends on what kind of project i’m working on and i’m going to click ok to get out of there so now we’re going to modify this finish report sub procedure by using the on error go to statement so we’re going to click at the end of our variable declaration line dim sheet as worksheet press enter a couple of times and then you’re going to type on error go to and go to is one word here and then error handler in this example error handler is what we’re calling our line statement so on arrow go to error handler we’re going to go down and click at the end of the set fields called procedure and press enter and on this line we’re going to type exit sub and i’ll explain it after we get the rest of this in we’re going to press enter a couple of times and then we’re going to type error handler what we named our line label followed by a colon enter and we’re going to do a select case statement here so let’s select case and we’re going to do air dot and the list pops up and we’re going to select number so that’s a property of the air object so select case error num number enter tab and then we’re going to say case 1004 that’s the number of the runtime error we got so case 1004 enter tab message box and in parentheses and quotes the reports workbook is not available period close your quotes close the paren enter we’re going to out dent and we’re going to do case else enter tab message box again and this one is going to say error number we’re going to do a concatenated statement here colon space double quote our ampersand for concatenation air dot number again ampersand we’re going to do v b l f which is line feed we’re gonna do an ampersand and we’re gonna do our line continuation character of space underscore enter tab in double quotes error description colon space double quote space ampersand and air dot description so another property of the error object there and we’re going to close the parentheses we’re going to enter and out den until we get to the same margin as select case and we need our end select statement there and now we’ll break down what we just did so using on era go to what we’ve done is we said if there’s an error when this procedure runs go to our line so error handler is the line what we what we named it so if there is an error it’s going to go down and before it gets to that line it’s going to exit the sub procedure now this is only if there’s an error we don’t want it to try to keep running the sub procedure we wanted to exit the sub procedure and go to the error handler so we did a select case statement if the error number is 1004 it’s going to show a message box saying the reports workbook is not available if it’s a different error number it’s going to show a message box that gives the error number and then on the next line the error description both are pulled from the error object so that’s how you can trap this error go ahead and compile and save before we test this error handling code we need to switch back over to excel and delete the reports sheet tab confirm your deletion and now what we’re going to do is go ahead and launch the show form procedure again i’m going to select the same selections all model and display and this time instead of getting a runtime error we get our pop-up because it was era number 1004 the reports workbook is not available you can go ahead and click ok on that message box now this time we’re going to leave the reports sheet here and what i’d like you to do is go back to your working directory and rename reports to back to reports and then come back over here to your sales fiscal year file now that we have the file renamed we’re going to set up a situation where we will use inline error handling by using the on error resume next statement in your file go ahead and launch the show form again and this time i’m going to select month and choose july and i’ll just do salesperson in the sales frame and display we’re getting runtime era another 1004 that name is already taken try a different one and we’re going to select debug so it brings us to the consolidate data sub procedure where activesheet.net equals reports well remember when we’re running this procedure it has been creating the report sheet for us it’s already there so we’re getting this runtime error because you can’t have two sheet names with the same name reports we’re going to go ahead and use our reset button on the toolbar and i’m going to make my way back to mod reports and i’m still in the consolidate data procedure and after our variable declarations we are going to press enter after dim sheet as worksheet a couple of times and we’re going to type on error resume next and then we’re going to go down to the line that says activesheet.name equals report click at the end of it and press enter a couple of times and tab and we’re going to type an if statement here so if and then air dot number equals 1004 then enter and tab active sheet dot delete sheets on the next line and then parentheses double quotes reports dot cells dot select enter selection dot clear enter air dot clear that’s the clear method of the error object so clear out the error enter and then i’m going to shift tab to out dent and type my end if statement and you want to go ahead and compile and save so because the report sheet was already there when it ran this it created a new sheet so if i go look at excel i have this empty sheet three and so what this is saying and that’s the active sheet if after it goes to activesheet.name equals report and it gets that error it’s going to say active sheet delete which is that generic sheet and then it’s going to select the report sheet and all of its cells and clear everything off of that sheet and then it’s going to clear the era as well so that’s what this one is going to do let’s switch over to excel and the first thing we’re going to do is get rid of that extra sheet before the report sheet just delete it and go ahead and launch your form and we’ll do month july again here and i think i’m going to do model and display so now it’s letting us know that it’s going to delete this sheet now i’m on sheet 4 and we’re going to select delete to confirm it and then it’s going to go through the process and you’ll get your second delete prompt to delete the reports sheet and now you have your reports workbook open with the pivot table that one covers the case of if you forget to delete the report sheet from sales fiscal year we are trapping the era and resuming the rest of the code you can close the reports workbook without saving the changes so i promised you some tips for minimizing errors and also some tips on what to do if you can’t resolve an error i’m going to just stop talking and let you review this slide hopefully some of these tips will help you avoid errors and some of what to do if you can’t resolve them these are from my personal experience oftentimes if i ask someone else to look at my code or i’m explaining the issue i’m having with it the explanation will become clear to me during that process or someone else might look at it and instantly see what’s causing the era the object browser allows you to browse through all available objects in your project and see their properties methods and events in addition you can see the procedures and constants that are available from object libraries in your project you can also get online help as you browse in the object browser so you’ve already noticed some icons in the editor environment particularly in the list that are displayed and you’ll see those icons in the object browser window as well so i’ve given you a table here with the icons and what they represent within the visual basic editor i can go to the view menu and choose object browser its shortcut key is f2 and so it opens kind of like in its own window and notice at the top it says all libraries if you do the drop down there you could just see the excel library or the microsoft forms library or office or vba or vba project i’m going to select vba project and so this is our project and what it’s showing on the left side under classes these are the objects that are in our vba project so it’s showing all those worksheets and it’s showing our form if i click on frm generate reports then it shows you things so these are properties events methods it’s our objects our controls like month and period and sales those are our frames so you’re seeing everything that’s in your project as i continue to scroll down i see the click event for the cancel button and the display button so you’re seeing events properties all of those things and methods that make everything kind of work together and some of those properties we didn’t use on the objects on our form like we didn’t use the print form property but it’s available because it’s in the vba project library so if i click on cmd display click on the right hand side and i look almost at the bottom of the screen it just lets me know that it’s a private sub procedure and it’s a member of the form generate reports that we created and you can feel free to explore the object browser if there’s anything in there that you want more information on you can click on it and then you’ll have your help icon up here in the upper right so you can explore help topics from in here as well and to close the object browser i’m going to use the second close window the smaller one in the upper right hand corner of the screen to close the object browser our last topic in this course concerns how to protect your code so if you have end users using this excel file and they have the developer tab or they know how to switch over to visual basic for applications editor you may not want people to be able to access your code so you can password protect it it’s kind of a two-step process so you’re gonna go in the visual basic editor you’re gonna go to the tools menu and you’ll notice on the list you have an option for vba project properties let’s click it there are two tabs you’re on the general tab you’re gonna go to the protection tab and you’re gonna check the box that says lock project for viewing and then you have to give it a password and confirm it for training purposes i’m going to just use the word train and all lowercase and i’m going to click ok and then i’m going to save now you’re going to have to close both visual basic and your excel file for this to take effect so go ahead and close both of these windows and then reopen your sales fiscal year macro enabled file once you have your file reopened you can alt f11 to get back into the visual basic editor if you expand your sales fiscal year vba project you’ll see that it prompts you for your password and those who do not have the password will not be able to see the objects forms and modules and access them so again once you set your password you need to save and enclose vba and excel and reopen the file for that password protection to take effect to recap this lesson we started by going over the different types of coding eras and their causes you learned how to use the debug toolbar to investigate errors we set breakpoints we used our step debugging tools we entered break mode during run mode and we used the locals window and quick watch to determine the value of expressions and variables when it comes to handling errors we got an overview of error handling and vba’s error trapping options and then we moved on to trapping errors with the on error statement we learned about the error object and its methods and properties we wrote an error handling routine by using on error go to with a line handler and we also worked with inline error handling um actually sorry i got the mat opposite the error handling routine was the on error resume next and the inline error handling was on era go to we reviewed some tips for minimizing errors and what to do if you can’t get them resolved we did a quick tour of the object browser when you’re new to vba that can be very helpful so you can learn about different properties and methods that are available for different objects and then we end it with password protecting your code thank you for attending excel 2019 visual basic for applications video course thanks for watching don’t forget we also offer live classes and office applications professional development and private training visit learned.com for more details please remember to like and subscribe and let us know your thoughts in the comments thank you for choosing learn it [Music] you

By Amjad Izhar
Contact: amjad.izhar@gmail.com
https://amjadizhar.blog

Affiliate Disclosure: This blog may contain affiliate links, which means I may earn a small commission if you click on the link and make a purchase. This comes at no additional cost to you. I only recommend products or services that I believe will add value to my readers. Your support helps keep this blog running and allows me to continue providing you with quality content. Thank you for your support!